www.sap.

nl/education

SAP EDUCATION
CURSUSAGENDA
JANUARI – JUNI 2009
TOELICHTING

SAP EDUCATION CURSUSAGENDA

JANUARI – JUNI 2009

PDF inclusief
cursus detail gegevens
www.sap.nl/education

De cursusagenda bevat een aantal
hoofdonderdelen waarin we laten zien
wat er aan curricula beschikbaar is.
We onderscheiden de volgende onder-
delen: SAP Business Suite bestaande
uit ERP Solution Map, Customer
Relationship Management, Supply
Chain Management èn Supplier
Relationship Management. Platform
bestaande uit Sap NetWeaver, Solution
Manager en Enterprise Service-
oriented Architecture.
Additional Topics bestaan uit o.a. Duet,
SAP Performance for Enterprise
Performance Management en SAP
Solutions for Govenance, Risks en
Compliance. Er is een apart hoofdstuk
‘SAP Solution Overview’ dat de
overview cursussen van de genoemde
onderdelen inzichtelijk maakt en
waar u een keuze kunt maken tussen
klassikale overview cursussen of
E-learning.
In deze cursusagenda is eveneens de
integratie met Business Objects
zichtbaar geworden en hebben we het
complete Business Objects curriculum
toegevoegd.
Verder zijn er de E-learning cursussen
waarin we rolgebaseerde eind-
gebruikers functionaliteit aanbieden.
Deze E-learnings zijn te vinden onder
het hoofdstuk ‘SAP Education Online’
vanaf pagina 12.
In deze agenda hebben we door de
uitbreiding met het Business Objects
curriculum voor een gewijzigde opzet
gekozen.
De cursus detail gegevens die
normaliter logisch gerangschikt onder
de curricula vermeld stonden hebben
we voor de hanteerbaarheid van de
agenda in de gedrukte uitgave
achterwege gelaten. Wij hebben
gekozen voor de oplossing om u die via
de bijgeleverde cd digitaal beschikbaar
te stellen.
Met behulp van de index achterin de
agenda bent u altijd in staat om een
bepaalde cursuscode te vinden. In deze
index verwijzen wij u dan dus door naar
de cursus detail gegevens die wij u via
de cd beschikbaar stellen.

Legenda stroomschema’s
Overview Course Foundation Course Detailed Course Delta Course Recommended/ Permanente Educatie (PE) punten volgens
Required het Koninklijk Nederlands Instituut van
Classroom training E-learning Virtual Classroom On Request Certification Prerequisite Registeraccountants (NIVRA)
WELKOM
Beste gast van SAP Education,
“Als je met je zeilschip optimaal wilt
profiteren van je gekozen koers, zorg
je ervoor dat de zeilen juist getrimd
zijn, alle bemanningsleden precies
weten wat te doen en je schip in prima
conditie verkeerd. Daarnaast wil je te
allen tijde over de juiste informatie
beschikken om de beste koers te
bepalen. Zo kun je constant antici-
peren op de veranderende omstandig-
heden, hoe klein soms ook.”
Als SAP gebruiker heeft u ervoor
gezorgd dat uw schip in prima conditie
verkeerd. En de koers die u en uw
bedrijf heeft uitgezet past bij de
Meest actuele cursus- heersende omstandigheden. Zijn uw
informatie vindt u op bemanningsleden in staat de zeilen
www.sap.nl/cursusagenda constant perfect te plaatsen? Beschikt
u over real-time en online informatie,
zowel bij windstilte als zeer onstuimig
weer? Met Business Objects ligt dit
binnen handbereik, duidelijk en
eenvoudig.
De samenvoeging van SAP en
Business Objects ziet u terug in ons
uitgebreide en geïntegreerde portfolio.
Met name op het gebied van Enter-
prise Performance Management.
Maar ook in onze uitvouwbare cursus-
agenda. De opzet is iets gewijzigd;
de stroomschema’s zijn gebleven, maar
de uitgebreide cursusbeschrijvingen
plaatsten we voor u op cd-rom. Zo
blijft alles overzichtelijk en hanteerbaar.
Door continue trainen bereikt u met
uw team het juiste niveau voor een
optimaal resultaat onder alle
omstandigheden. Samen met u zorgen
wij er graag voor dat u uw gekozen
koers kunt blijven varen.
U bent van harte welkom bij
SAP Education!
Met vriendelijke groet,
René Megens
SAP Education
Alles over certificeringen
vindt u op
www.sap.nl/certificering
P.S. Bezoek ook eens
www.sap.nl/education voor ons
complete cursusaanbod van standaard-
cursussen, trainingen op maat
(eventueel op locatie) tot web-based
trainingen en coaching na een training.
Maar ook extra geplande trainingen.
Of bel 073-645 7950.
www.sap.nl/education 3
SAP EDUCATION CURRICULUM
SAP BUSINESS SUITE
ERP Solution Map HCM Shared Services

Strategic Enterprise Financial Operations Workforce

Analytics Management Analytics Analytics Analytics

Financial Supply Chain Financial Management Corporate

Financials Management Accounting Accounting Governance

Human Capital Talent Workforce Workforce

Management Management Process Management Deployment

Procurement and Supplier Inventory and Warehouse Inbound and Outbound Transportation
Procurement Collaboration Management Logistics Management
Logistics Execution

Product Development Production Manufacturing Enterprise Asset Product Life-Cycle Data

and Manufacturing Planning Execution Management Development Management

Sales and Services Sales Order Aftermarket Sales and Professional Service Global Trade Incentive & Commission
Management Service Delivery Services Management

Project Portfolio Travel Environment, Quality

Corporate Services Real Estate Management Management Management Health and Safety Management

Customer Relationship Management

SAP Supply Chain Management

SAP Supplier Relationship Management

PLATFORM ADDITIONAL TOPICS

SAP NetWeaver DUET

SAP Solution Manager SAP Solutions for Enterprise Performance Management

Enterprise Service-Oriented Architecture (Enterprise SOA) SAP Solutions for Governance, Risk and Compliance

BUSINESS OBJECTS
System Administrators Get acquainted Go deeper Achieve mastery Get certified

BusinessObjects BusinessObjects Enterprise XI: BusinessObjects Enterprise XI: 3 Exams

BusinessObjects Enterprise XI:
Administering Servers Designing & Deploying Administered by
Enterprise XI Administering Users & Content
Windows a Solution – Windows www.vue.com

Report Designers Achieve mastery

Report Design I
Report Design II Report Design III Report Design IV
Crystal Reports XI Fundamentals of Report
Business Reporting Solutions Report Processing Strategies Optimizing Report Data
Design

BusinessObjects BusinessObjects
Web Intelligence Web Intelligence XI: Web Intelligence XI:
Report Design Advanced Report Design
Get certified
Desktop Intelligence BusinessObjects BusinessObjects 2 Exams
(full client reporting, formerly Desktop Intelligence XI: Desktop Intelligence XI: Administered by
BusinessObjects 6.5) Report Design Advanced Report Design www.vue.com

Data Managers

BusinessObjects Web Performance Manager XI:

Dashboard Manager,
Performance Manager and
Universe Design
Measuring Performance
Intelligence XI: Report Design
BusinessObjects Desktop
Universe Design Dashboard Manager
Set Analysis XI: Creating Sets
Intelligence XI: Report Design (instructor only)

Information Managers Get certified

BusinessObjects Data Federator XI: Data Integrator
Data Integrator, Data BusinessObjects Designing On-Demand Federated Views 2 Exams
Data Integrator XI: Extracting,
Federator and Data Quality BusinessObjects Data Quality XI: Administered
Transforming and Loading Data
Core Concepts by www.vue.com

4
INHOUD
Toelichting / Legenda 2 SAP Customer Relationship Management Overige Cursussen
Welkom 3 CRM Enterprise 194 Industriespecifiek 326
Cursusinformatie / Cursusadministratie 6 CRM Technology & Channel 200 HR gerelateerd 326
Bedrijfsbrede ondersteuning van eindgebruikers – Industry Solution SAP for Utilities 327
SAP Productivity Pak by RWD 9 SAP Supplier Relationship Management 202
Academy SAP Customer Relationship Mgmt 333
SAP Education Online PLATFORM
Role Based Training – Order to Cash Processes 12 SAP NetWeaver Academies SAP NetWeaver
Role Based Training – Procure to Pay Processes 21 SAP NW Portal Business Intelligence Solution Consultant 334
Role Based Training – Controlling Processes 26 Administration / Development 204 SAP Process Integration 339
Role Based Training – Financial Processes 33
Role Based Training – Netweaver Functionality 43 SAP NW Master Data Management 210 BUSINESS OBJECTS
Role Based Training – System Administrator, Business Objects Administration
ABAP Programmer, Business Integration Specialist, SAP NW Business Intelligence Enterprise v6.5 343
Security Administrator 47 Enterprise Reporting, Query & Analysis 212 Enterprise XI R1/R2 347
Enterprise Data Warehousing 214 Enterprise Business Views XI R1/R2 365
INTRODUCTORY TRAINING Business Planning & Analytical Services 217 Enterprise Migration XI R2 367
SAP Solution Overview System Administration 218 Enterprise Universe Design XI R1/R2 375
E-learning Suite 48 Enterprise Universe Design vXI 3.0 375
Solution Architect & Integration Training 54 SAP NW Identity Management 219 Enterprise XI 3.0 381
Super User / End-User Training E-learnings 64 Enterprise Migration XI 3.0 381
Introductiecursussen en Solution Overviews 69 Business Integration Technology Edge XI R1/R2 391
SAP Process Integration and Business Workflow 220
SAP BUSINESS SUITE SAP NetWeaver Process Integration Technology I 227 Business Objects Business intelligence
SAP ERP SAP NetWeaver Process Integration Technology II 230 Crystal Reports XI R2 395
HCM Shared Services 76 Crystal Reports 2008 410
SAP Programming Dashboard Manager 418
Analytics SAP NetWeaver Programming Core 233 Desktop Intelligence v6.5 426
Strategic Enterprise Management 80 SAP NetWeaver Programming Core Desktop Intelligence XI R2 426
Financial Analytics 86 additional Courses Adobe 242 InfoView XI R2 437
Operations Analytics 89 Application Specific Programming Courses 245 Intelligent Question vXI R2 438
Workforce Analytics 92 Programming Web Applications 246 Live Office 438
Business Programming Java 248 OLAP Intelligence XI R1/R2 443
Financials Web Intelligence v6.5 445
Financial Supply Chain Management 93 SAP System Administration Web Intelligence XI R2 445
Treasury and Risk Management 96 General, J2EE & CTS Administration 255 Web Intelligence XI 3.0 454
Financial Accounting 97 User & Security 262 Xcelsius 459
Management Accounting 105 DB Administration 265 Xcelsius 2008 459
Corporate Governance 112 SAP SCM – SAP APO Administration 270
SAP Business Information Warehouse Business Objects Data Services
Human Capital Management – SAP BW Administration 271 Data Federator XI R2 471
Talent Management 119 SAP SRM & SAP CRM Data Insight XI R2 471
Workforce Process Management 123 – Mobile Sales/Services Administration 272 Data Integrator XI R1/R2 475
Pensioen module 326 Data Integrator XI 3.0 475
OrgPublisher 326 SAP NW Composition Environment 273 Data Integrator Accelerated XI R2 481
Data Quality XI R2 486
Procurement and Logistics Execution SAP NW Composite Applications 276 Data Quality XI 3.0 486
Procurement I & II 130 Information Quality XI R2 489
Procurement III / SAP SRM 137 SAP Solution Manager Postal Soft XI R2 489
Inventory & Warehouse Management 138 Implementation 282 Text Analysis vXI R1/R2 491
Transportation 142 Operations / Customer Support 285
End –to-End (E2E) Solution Operations 287 Business Objects Enterprise Performance
Product Development and Manufacturing SAP Testing 293 Management
Planning 145 Extended Analytics 496
Manufacturing 148 Enterprise Service-Oriented Architecture Planning XI 498
Enterprise Asset Management 152 (Enterprise SOA) Planning Extended 508
Life-Cycle Data Management 156 Enterprise Architect 295 Intercompany XI R2 510
Enterprise Service Development 297 Intercompany 5.1 510
Sales & Services Business Process Management 302 Profitability & Cost Management 512
Sales Order Management 161 Finance: Project Team / Functional Administrator 518
Aftermarket Sales and Services 166 ADDITIONAL TOPICS Finance: End User Working in Local Site 518
Global Trade Management – Foreign Trade Mgmt 167 SAP Solutions for Enterprise Performance Performance Management 522
Management Objectives Management 522
Corporate Services Solutions for Profitability and Cost Management 305
Real Estate Management 168 Solutions for Strategy Management 306 Certificering
Project Portfolio Management 170 Solutions for Planning 310 Beschikbare certificeringtests per januari 2009 526
Travel Management 174 Solutions for Consolidation 318
Environment, Health & Safety 175 Routebeschrijving / Hotelaccommodatie 529
Quality Management 176 SAP Solutions for Governance, Risk Algemene Voorwaarden SAP Education 530
and Compliance
SAP Supply Chain Management
Manufacturing – SCM Manufacturing and Execution
zie SAP ERP Product Dev. and Manufacturing 145
Compliance and Access Controls
Governance in SAP ERP
Global Trade Management – Foreign Trade Mgmnt
320
320
320
INDEX
Alle cursussen gesorteerd op cursuscode 533
Manufacturing – Production Planning and
Detailed Scheduling 179 Duet 321
Service Parts Management &
Extended Warehouse Management 185
Collaboration 190 www.sap.nl/education 5
SAP RFID and Event Management 192
CURSUSINFORMATIE
In deze brochure treft u in stroom-
schema’s de titel van de cursus met
een cursuscode aan. De genoemde
data zijn de startdata van de cursus-
sen. Een uitgebreide cursusomschrij-
ving vindt u op de SAP Education
Portal via de SAP Education Training
Catalog op www.sap.nl/education.
Ook actuele data, beschikbaarheid en
nieuwe cursussen treft u hier aan.
Voorinschrijving
Staat een training nog niet ingepland,
of heeft u voorkeur voor een andere
datum? Dan kunt u via voorinschrijving
kenbaar maken dat u interesse heeft in
een cursus of bepaalde expertise.
Dit vult u eenvoudig in op het beschik-
bare inschrijfformulier op www.sap.nl/
education. Zodra meerdere cursisten
dezelfde interesse tonen, neemt SAP
Education contact met u op om een
geschikte datum in te plannen.
6
Needs analysis
Voordat u een opleidingstraject ingaat, Een gecertificeerd consultant heeft
adviseert SAP om eerst een door het goed afleggen van deze test
leerstrategie te bepalen. Op basis van bewezen kennis te hebben van SAP.
een zorgvuldige inventarisatie van de Daarnaast krijgt een gecertificeerd
kennisbehoefte kan de effectiviteit van consultant toegang tot het expertforum
een training aanzienlijk worden van SAP waarmee hij/zij de opgedane
verhoogd. SAP Education biedt de SAP kennis verder kan verdiepen
mogelijkheid om voor u deze middels contacten met collega-
inventarisatie uit te voeren, eventueel consultants en -ontwikkelaars bij SAP.
uitgebreid met een opleidingsplan dat
specifiek voor u op maat wordt De certificaten zijn releasegebonden
gemaakt. Neem contact op met SAP en kunnen in een bepaalde periode
Education en informeer naar de worden opgewaardeerd naar een
voorwaarden. nieuwe release. Wanneer deze
mogelijkheid zich voordoet, ontvangen
Workshops (training op maat) reeds gecertificeerde consultants
Naast het reguliere aanbod staan onze hierover bericht. Een compleet
medewerkers voor u klaar om cursus- overzicht van alle certificeringen treft u
sen op maat te ontwikkelen, trainingen aan op pagina 526.
voor eindgebruikers voor te bereiden,
of in overleg met u invulling te geven
aan klantspecifieke workshops. Dit kan
bij SAP in ’s-Hertogenbosch, maar
indien gewenst komen wij op uw SAP Education
locatie. Dit levert u efficiency en tijd-
winst op.
“uw partner voor
SAP kennis:
Certificering
De kwaliteit van de kennis waarover overal en altijd”
SAP consultants beschikken wordt
zorgvuldig bewaakt door toepassing
van certificeringen. Voor een certifi-
cering moet een aantal cursussen zijn
doorlopen en dient een certificerings-
test met goed gevolg te worden
afgelegd. Een certificeringstest kunt u
bij het Training Center van SAP
Nederland B.V. op verschillende
deelgebieden afleggen. Wie slaagt
voor een certificeringstest staat bij
SAP wereldwijd geregistreerd als
‘Certified SAP Consultant’.
Teruggaaf opleidingskosten
uit Europees Sociaal Fonds
Wat is het Europees Sociaal Fonds
(ESF)?
Het ESF stelt zich ten doel knelpunten
op te lossen op de Europese arbeids-
markt. Een van de instrumenten die
daarvoor wordt gebruikt is subsidie-
verstrekking aan bedrijven en
instellingen die investeren in
opleidingen voor hun werknemers.
Onder bepaalde voorwaarden worden
gemaakte opleidingskosten door het
fonds vergoed. De belangrijkste eis is
dat de gevolgde opleiding de
inzetbaarheid van de medewerker
vergroot, zowel binnen de eigen
organisatie als daarbuiten. De positie
van de medewerker op de arbeids-
markt moet aantoonbaar verbeteren als
gevolg van de opleiding.
SAP opleidingen en het
Europees Sociaal Fonds
Omdat SAP wordt gezien als een
standaard op het terrein van bedrijfs-
administratieve software, komen
kosten gemaakt voor SAP opleidingen
in aanmerking voor een ESF-subsidie.
SAP kennis geldt als een factor die de
inzetbaarheid van werknemers
vergroot. Voor meer informatie over
onze services verwijzen wij u graag
naar onze website:
www.sap.nl/education.
SAP Preferred Card
De SAP Education Preferred Card is
een waardekaart voor al uw SAP
opleidingen. Op basis van de
opleidingsbehoefte bepaalt u van
tevoren het bedrag dat u wilt besteden
aan standaard of klantspecifieke SAP
opleidingen. Uw inkoopvoordeel kan
hierdoor oplopen tot circa 15%.
SAP Education
“van strategie via
planontwikkeling en
implementatie naar
kennisborging”?
Wanneer één van uw medewerkers Cursusadministratie
een opleiding volgt of wanneer een Onze receptie is geopend van
workshop wordt georganiseerd, wordt maandag tot en met vrijdag van 08.30
het bijbehorende bedrag automatisch tot en met 10.00 uur en van 12.00 tot
met de waarde van de Preferred Card en met 14.00 uur. Lestijden beginnen
verrekend. normaliter om 09.30 uur.
Het cursusmateriaal is standaard
Meer informatie Engelstalig – de cursus wordt
U leest meer over de hier beschreven doorgaans in de Nederlandse taal
onderwerpen op: www.sap.nl/ verzorgd. Iedere deelnemer heeft
education. Of belt u met een van onze beschikking over een eigen pc.
medewerkers op telefoonnummer Bij cursussen van minimaal 1 dag zijn
073 – 645 79 50 of het gratis nummer in de cursusprijs cursusmaterialen en
0800 – 022 12 06. lunch inbegrepen. Dresscode: Casual.
Registratie
Schriftelijke registratie is mogelijk via
het inschrijfformulier dat u aantreft op
www.sap.nl/education. Daarnaast
kunt u ook online registreren via de
SAP Education Portal. Uw persoonlijke
ID-nummer is de toegangscode. Hebt
u nog geen ID-nummer, dan kunt u dit
kosteloos aanvragen tijdens het online
boeken van de gewenste cursus.
www.sap.nl/education 7
SAP PRODUCTIVITY PAK BY RWD
BEDRIJFSBREDE ONDERSTEUNING
VAN EINDGEBRUIKERS
Hoe haalt u maximale waarde uit
uw bedrijfsapplicaties
SAP®-oplossingen bestaan eigenlijk uit
twee essentiële elementen: de soft-
ware en de mensen die de software
gebruiken. Als de communicatie over
en weer tussen software en eind-
gebruikers accuraat en intelligent
verloopt, stijgt het rendement, dalen de
exploitatiekosten en blijft de waarde
van uw oplossing stijgen. Maar soms
is het moeilijk om het niveau van de
prestaties van eindgebruikers op peil te
houden. Daarom introduceren SAP
Education en RWD Technologies; SAP
Productivity Pak by RWD (ook bekend
onder de naam RWD Uperform), voor
tijdige updates en accurate informatie
binnen het gehele bedrijf.
Bedrijfsbrede ondersteuning van
eindgebruikers
SAP Productivity Pak by RWD®: voor
vaardige en zelfverzekerde gebruikers
Hoe geavanceerd en degelijk uw
bedrijfsautomatisering ook is, de
effectiviteit en de waarde ervan
hangen direct samen met de
vaardigheid van de mensen die ermee
werken. Wanneer de interactie tussen
gebruikers en SAP-oplossingen
productief en actief verloopt, dan
maakt deze technologie alle beloften
waar. Zowel voor en tijdens de
implementatiefase, maar juist ook voor
de lange termijn daarna.
Het is niet altijd gemakkelijk om te
zorgen dat documentatie en materialen
voor de ondersteuning van gebruikers
correct, up-to-date en snel beschikbaar
zijn, zeker niet voor grote bedrijven en
multinationals. Na verloop van tijd
neemt het rendement af door natuurlijk
kennisverlies, het op een verkeerde
manier intern doorgeven van kennis en
de bureaucratie binnen een
organisatie.
De oplossing voor dit probleem is
een actieve, op samenwerking
gebaseerde leeromgeving waarin
ondersteuning voor gebruikers altijd
beschikbaar is en waarin de gebruiker
een actieve rol speelt in zijn of haar
eigen leerproces. SAP Education en
RWD Technologies introduceren nu
een geheel nieuwe applicatie voor
bedrijfsbrede gebruikersondersteuning:
SAP Productivity Pak powered by
RWD. Deze nieuwe applicatie is
gebaseerd op de technologie van de
sinds vele jaren bestaande oplossing
RWD Info Pak, maar biedt een veel
uitgebreidere functionaliteit.
SAP Productivity Pak by RWD
garandeert tijdige updates en accurate
informatie – hoe groot uw bedrijf ook
is. U kunt gemakkelijk documenten van
verschillende ontwikkelaars integreren,
feedback van eindgebruikers
toevoegen en elke gebruiker hulp op
maat geven. Dit allemaal gelijktijdig en
zelfs in meerdere talen.
Kortom, met SAP Productivity Pak by
RWD maakt u van uw organisatie een
actief centrum voor excellent leren,
door consistente groei en het onder-
steunen van de gebruikersprestaties.
De gebruikersvriendelijke visie op
documentatie en ondersteuning van
het personeel geeft alle SAP-klanten
de tools die zij nodig hebben om
eersteklas gebruikers van hun
medewerkers te maken en een
perfecte leeromgeving binnen het
bedrijf te realiseren.
www.sap.nl/education 9
SAP PRODUCTIVITY PAK BY RWD
Bedrijfsbrede ondersteuning en
samenwerking
Door SAP Productivity Pak binnen uw
organisatie te implementeren creëert u
op samenwerking gebaseerde partner-
schappen tussen eindgebruikers,
contentschrijvers en trainings-
beheerders. Zij kunnen allemaal naar
hetzelfde doel toewerken: maximaal
rendement op uw SAP-investering.
Het basisproces is opmerkelijk
eenvoudig. Uw supportmedewerkers
hoeven nog maar één transactie uit te
voeren om een professioneel
geformatteerde werkinstructie of
simulatie te creëren. SAP Productivity
Pak neemt de procedure automatisch
op en legt deze op heldere wijze vast.
In één stap wordt een “document”
gecreëerd dat zowel de procedure als
de simulatie bevat. Contentschrijvers
kunnen het document kopiëren om
lokale varianten te creëren –
uitgangspunten voor versies die
voldoen aan de specifieke behoeften
van business units of functies.
Wanneer een contentschrijver het
oorspronkelijke document aanpast,
worden alle contentschrijvers van de
hieraan verbonden documentvarianten
geïnformeerd, zodat zij eventuele
aanpassingen kunnen doorvoeren.
SAP Productivity Workflow stuurt het
document automatisch door naar de
aangewezen personen ter beoordeling,
aanpassing en goedkeuring. Dit staat
garant voor een eenvoudige roll-out en
zorgt dat alle belanghebbenden
geïnformeerd en betrokken blijven.
10
Beheerders kunnen de unieke output
eenvoudig omzetten in context-
gevoelige on-line hulpmaterialen die
lokale gebruikers direct vanaf hun
transactieschermen voor SAP-software
kunnen benaderen. U kunt het
referentiemateriaal ook afdrukken voor
off-line gebruik. Door de flexibiliteit is
de tool ook ideaal voor het vastleggen
van bedrijfsprocessen en het
samenstellen van lesmaterialen.
Het creëren van een leeromgeving
Met SAP Productivity Pak worden uw
gebruikers meer dan passieve
consumenten van informatie. De
ingebouwde samenwerkingsfunctie
maakt communicatie over en weer met
uw contentschrijvers mogelijk, door het
geven van essentiële feedback over
toepasbaarheid en best practices. Ook
kunnen zij gebruik maken van on-line
discussieforums om vragen voor te
leggen aan andere gebruikers.
Daarnaast is het op elk gewenst
moment mogelijk om een persoonlijke
homepage te bezoeken.
SAP Productivity Pak by RWD biedt
het volgende:
• Discussieforums – een omgeving
voor daadwerkelijke samenwerking,
feedback en gebruikersgroepen voor
contentschrijvers, beoordelaars en
eindgebruikers.
• Leerportalen die gebruikers toestaan
hun eigen informatie te kiezen, zich
aan content te verbinden voor
updates, discussies te voeren en
favorieten in te stellen.
• Automatische vertaling van
standaard documenten van en naar
18 verschillende talen.
Vanaf de basis ontworpen voor
bedrijfsprestaties
SAP Productivity Pak biedt een uit-
gebreid scala aan features voor elk
aspect van de bedrijfsdocumentatie,
samenwerking en ondersteuning van
gebruikers. Het resultaat is een
levendige leeromgeving voor content-
schrijvers, beheerders en
eindgebruikers.
Voor eindgebruikers
Uw eindgebruikers beschikken direct
vanuit de SAP-applicatie over een
contextgevoelige helpfunctie.
Afhankelijk de systeemconfiguratie,
kunnen zij ervoor kiezen om een
document, een simulatie of andere
content op maat te openen. Dit
garandeert de juiste hulp die precies
aansluit op de individuele leerstijl.
Eindgebruikers kunnen:
• Zich abonneren op voor hen
belangrijke informatie en ontvangen
via een persoonlijk leerportaal
updates.
• Deelnemen aan on-line discussies
over door hen geselecteerde onder-
werpen en ontvangen een melding bij
de publicatie van nieuwe informatie.
• Waardevolle feedback aan content-
schrijvers geven over de effectiviteit
en nauwkeurigheid van de
materialen.
• Eenvoudig via de “vertel het aan
anderen” feature informatie met hun
collega’s delen.
 Feedback from clients and users
Cost reduction
• “Document production savings up to 70% compared to situation before RWD Info Pak”
Time savings
• “With a good parent document, the time to create training documents has dropped considerably”
• “Updates to help files are much faster now”
Consistency
• “Users like the consistency of the material, particularly if they have to work across several modules”
• “I now feel much greater confidence in my abilities to make SAP software work for me, not the other way around”
Voor contentschrijvers
Contentschrijvers kunnen tijdens
dezelfde opname zowel een
helpdocument als een simulatie
creëren die meerdere applicaties
omvat. Als een proces zowel de SAP-
oplossing als Microsoft Office-
producten betreft, behandelen
document en simulatie beide, inclusief
gedetailleerde schermafbeeldingen van
uw specifieke systemen.
Contentschrijvers kunnen:
• Online samenwerken met hun
managers, collega’s en
eindgebruikers waardoor zij
eenvoudig gebruik kunnen maken
van bedrijfskennis en feedback.
• Documenten en simulaties creëren in
hun moedertaal en in 17 andere
talen. Daarnaast is het met behulp
van de feature voor “verwante”
documenten eenvoudig om
vergelijkbare content te vinden en
opnieuw te gebruiken.
• Document- en simulatiesjablonen
creëren en beheren zodat
consistentie en bedrijfsstandaarden
gewaarborgd zijn. Aanpassing van
het uiterlijk en de opmaak van
standaardsecties of het creëren van
een nieuwe lay-out op maat blijft
hierbij mogelijk.
• Een centrale lijst met terminologie en
definities raadplegen. Zij kunnen
suggesties voor definities indienen,
zoekopdrachten geven en erop
vertrouwen dat de gewijzigde
standaarddefinities worden
doorgevoerd in alle relevante
documenten, in alle talen.
• Documenten op meerdere manieren
(als oefening, infokaartjes, werk-
instructie, korte handleiding of
simulatie) en in meerdere formats
(PDF, HTML en Flash) publiceren.
Contentschrijvers kunnen alle
soorten documentatie en simulatie in
één stap bijwerken.
Voor beheerders
Beheerders krijgen de tools die zij
nodig hebben om workflows te creëren
en te beheren en om de structuur voor
document accordering vast te leggen.
Zij kunnen leerportalen voor
eindgebruikers op maat maken en deze
op functiegebied, bedrijfsproces,
functietaak en andere categorieën
structureren.
Zij kunnen het systeem configureren
voor het leveren van content voor
specifieke logons, talen, bedrijfs-
voorschriften, bedrijfsonderdelen, SAP
application client of SAP instance.
De huidige gebruikers van RWD Info
Pak schieten er niet bij in: SAP
Productivity Pak biedt aanvullende
functionaliteit terwijl u uw RWD Info
Pak documenten gewoon kunt blijven
gebruiken. U kunt:
• RWD Info Pak content aan de
website van SAP Productivity Pak
koppelen.
• Een website structuur genereren met
behulp van RWD Info Pak gegevens.
• RWD Info Pak termen en definities
importeren in de terminologielijst.
Dit nieuwe product is de perfecte
opvolger van RWD Info Pak, en biedt
aanzienlijk meer functionaliteit en
flexibiliteit. SAP Productivity Pak by
RWD is de ideale applicatie waarmee
uw organisatie de prestaties van
gebruikers kan opbouwen en op peil
houden – zodat uw bedrijf voorop
loopt.
Meer weten?
Neem voor meer informatie of een
demo over SAP Productivity Pak by
RWD contact op met uw SAP
Education accountmanager of bezoek
onze website via ww.sap.nl/education.
SAP Education Nederland:
+31 (0)73 – 645 7950 of e-mail
education.netherlands@sap.com
Powered by SAP NetWeaver
SAP-software draait op het platform
SAP NetWeaver®. SAP NetWeaver
integreert technologische compo-
nenten op één platform, zodat
organisaties de complexiteit van hun IT
kunnen beperken en meer rendement
uit hun IT-investeringen halen. Het is de
beste methode voor de integratie van
alle systemen die op SAP-software en
externe software draaien. SAP
NetWeaver helpt organisaties om hun
IT af te stemmen op het bedrijf. Met
SAP NetWeaver kunnen organisaties
hun bedrijfsapplicaties snel samen-
stellen en verbeteren met behulp van
serviceapplicaties. SAP NetWeaver is
de grondslag voor een Enterprise
Service-Oriented Architecture
(Enterprise SOA), waarmee
organisaties hun bestaande IT-
landschap kunnen ontwikkelen tot de
strategische omgeving die zakelijke
verandering bevordert.
www.sap.nl/education 11
SAP Education Online
Role Based Training – Order to Cash Processes

SAP125
SAP Navigation 2005

2 hours

ERP450 ERP451 ERP452 ERP453

Sales & Distribution Sales Order Processing Customer Master Data Quotation Management
Overview

2 hours 2 hours 2 hours 1 hour

ERP454 ERP455 ERP456 ERP457

Scheduling Agreements Sales & Distribution Pricing Condition Records Sales Agreements
and Contracts Reports

2 hours 2 hours 2 hours 2 hours

ERP458 ERP459 ERP460 ERP461

Backorder Processing Outbound Processing Billing Process Account Receivable &
Credit Management
Overview

1 hour 4 hours 4 hours 1 hour

ERP462 ERP463
Credit & Risk Management Credit Reporting

4 hours 1 hour

SAP125 · SAP Navigation 2005

DURATION 2 hours PRICE € 60 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP PREREQUISITES CONTENT

• Beginner users There are no required prerequisites for The SAP Navigation 2005 course is
• Project team members taking this course; however, it is designed to familiarize learners with key
• Project leaders recommended that learners have a basic terms and how to navigate within the SAP
• Support personnel knowledge of Windows. system. You will be introduced to the key
• SAP consultants GOALS areas of SAP screens, fields, and features.
• Technical consultants This course will prepare you to: You will also be introduced to ways in
• Sales • familiarize with key terms which you can obtain additional help,
• Super users • navigate within the SAP system. modify and customize the look of your
• End users SAP system, as well as apply more
advanced skills.
SOFTWARE

SAP ERP ECC 6.0

12
SAP Education Online
Role Based Training – Order to Cash Processes

ERP450 · Sales & Distribution Overview

DURATION 2 hours PRICE € 150 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP GOALS NOTES

• Functional Project Team Members This course will prepare you to: This course is part of the ‘Order to Cash
• Super Users Describe the main processes of Sales and Processes’ role based training series.
• IT Business Analyst Distribution
• Transactional End Users CONTENT

PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED Sales and Distribution Overview

SAP125 SAP Navigation SOFTWARE

PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None ECC 5.0, SCM 5.0

ERP451 · Sales Order Processing

DURATION 2 hours PRICE € 150 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP GOALS CONTENT

• Functional Project Team Members This course will prepare you to: • Sales Order Processing Overview
• Super Users • Describe order processing in Sales and • Sales Order
• IT Business Analyst Distribution • Cash Sales
• Transactional End Users • Explain sales order procedure SOFTWARE

PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED • Describe cash sales ECC 5.0, SCM 5.0

• SAP125 – SAP Navigation • Create and maintain sales orders NOTES

• ERP450 – Sales & Distribution Overview This course is part of the ‘Order to Cash
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None Processes’ role based training series.

ERP452 · Customer Master Data

DURATION 2 hours PRICE € 150 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None SOFTWARE

• Functional Project Team Members GOALS ECC 5.0, SCM 5.0

• Super Users This course will prepare you to: NOTES

• IT Business Analyst
• Transactional End Users
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAP125 – SAP Navigation
• ERP450 – Sales & Distribution Overview
• Describe customer master data This course is part of the ‘Order to Cash
• Create and maintain customer master Processes’ role based training series.
data
CONTENT
Customer Master Data

ERP453 · Quotation Management

DURATION 1 hour PRICE € 150 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED CONTENT

• Functional Project Team Members ERP451 – Sales Order Processing Quotations

• Super Users GOALS SOFTWARE

• IT Business Analyst
• Transactional End Users
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAP125 – SAP Navigation
• ERP450 – Sales and Distribution
Overview
This course will prepare you to:
• Describe order processing in Sales and
Distribution
• Explain quotation and sales order
process
• Create and maintain quotations
ECC 5.0, SCM 5.0
NOTES
This course is part of the ‘Order to Cash
Processes’ role based training series.

www.sap.nl/education 13
SAP Education Online
Role Based Training – Order to Cash Processes
ERP454 · Scheduling Agreements & Contracts
DURATION 2 hours PRICE € 150 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• Functional Project Team Members
• Super Users
• IT Business Analyst
• Transactional End Users
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAP125 – SAP Navigation
• ERP450 – Sales & Distribution Overview
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
ERP451 – Sales Order Processing
GOALS
This course will prepare you to:
ERP455 · Sales & Distribution Reports
DURATION 2 hours PRICE € 150 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• Functional Project Team Members
• Super Users
• IT Business Analyst
• Transactional End Users
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAP125 – SAP Navigation
• ERP450 – Sales & Distribution Overview
ERP456 · Pricing Condition Records
DURATION 2 hours PRICE € 150 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• Functional Project Team Members
• Super Users
• IT Business Analyst
• Transactional End Users
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAP125 – SAP Navigation
• ERP450 – Sales & Distribution Overview
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None
ERP457 · Sales Agreements
DURATION 2 hours PRICE € 150 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• Functional Project Team Members
• Super Users
• IT Business Analyst
• Transactional End Users
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAP125 – SAP Navigation
• ERP450 – Sales and Distribution
Overview
14
• Describe order processing in Sales and CONTENT
Distribution • Scheduling Agreement
• Describe the cash sales procedures and • Contract
scheduling agreement • Assortment Module
• Define what are basic contracts and • Outbound Delivery with Order
delivery requests Reference
• Create and maintain scheduling SOFTWARE
agreements ECC 5.0, SCM 5.0
• Create and maintain contracts NOTES
• Create and maintain assortment This course is part of the ‘Order to Cash
modules for contracts Processes’ role based training series.
• Create outbound delivery documents
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED CONTENT
ERP400 – Material Management Overview • Reports and Analyses in Sales and
GOALS Distribution
This course will prepare you to: • Reports and Analyses in Materials
• Execute customer analysis Management
• Generate a list of SD orders SOFTWARE
• Check available material on hand ECC 5.0, SCM 5.0
• Review physical inventory documents NOTES
This course is part of the ‘Order to Cash
Processes’ role based training series.
GOALS CONTENT
This course will prepare you to: • Pricing Overview
• Understand the fundamentals of pricing • Pricing Condition Records
in SD • Pricing reports
• Create and maintain pricing condition SOFTWARE
records ECC 5.0, SCM 5.0
• Generate pricing reports NOTES
This course is part of the ‘Order to Cash
Processes’ role based training series.
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED CONTENT
ERP252 – Customer Master Data • Sales Agreement Overview
GOALS • Rebate Agreements (check this out)
This course will prepare you to: SOFTWARE
• Explain sales agreements ECC 5.0, SCM 5.0
• Maintain customer master data for sales NOTES
agreements This course is part of the ‘Order to Cash
• Create and maintain listing/exclusion Processes’ role based training series.
master data
SAP Education Online
Role Based Training – Order to Cash Processes

ERP458 · Backorder Processing

DURATION 1 hour PRICE € 150 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED CONTENT

• Functional Project Team Members ERP451 – Sales Order Processing • Backorder Processing
• Super Users GOALS • Sales Order
• IT Business Analyst This course will prepare you to: SOFTWARE

• Transactional End Users • Explain the backorder process ECC 5.0, SCM 5.0
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED • Reschedule an order NOTES

• SAP125 – SAP Navigation This course is part of the ‘Order to Cash

• ERP450 – Sales and Distribution Processes’ role based training series.
Overview

ERP459 · Outbound Processing

DURATION 4 hours PRICE € 350 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP GOALS CONTENT

• Functional Project Team Members This course will prepare you to: • Sales Order
• Super Users • Describe the delivery process • Delivery Overview
• IT Business Analyst • Define the function of Picking • Outbound Delivery
• Transactional End Users • Understand the process of post goods • Picking
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED issue (PGI) • Goods Issue
• SAP125 – SAP Navigation • Create and maintain outbound delivery SOFTWARE

• ERP450 – Sales & Distribution Overview documents ECC 5.0, SCM 5.0
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED NOTES

ERP451 – Sales Order Processing This course is part of the ‘Order to Cash
Processes’ role based training series.
ERP460 · Billing Process
DURATION 4 hours PRICE € 350 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED CONTENT

• Functional Project Team Members ERP459 – Outbound Processing • Sales Order

• Super Users GOALS • Billing
• IT Business Analyst This course will prepare you to: • Returns and Complaints
• Transactional End Users • Understand the sales order, delivery and • Accounts Receivable
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED billing process SOFTWARE

• SAP125 – SAP Navigation • Execute the billing process ECC 5.0, SCM 5.0
• ERP450 – Sales and Distribution • Understand how to process a complaint NOTES
Overview This course is part of the ‘Order to Cash
Processes’ role based training series.

ERP461 · Accounts Receivable & Credit Management Overview

DURATION 1 hour PRICE € 150 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED CONTENT

• Functional Project Team Members
• Super Users
• IT Business Analyst
• Transactional End Users
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• ERP451 – Sales Order Processing • Account Receivable Overview
• ERP460 – Billing Process • Credit Management Overview
GOALS SOFTWARE
This course will prepare you to: ECC 5.0, SCM 5.0
• Explain accounts receivable NOTES

• SAP125 – SAP Navigation • Describe the processes related to credit This course is part of the ‘Order to Cash
• ERP450 – Sales and Distribution management and risk analysis Processes’ role based training series.
Overview

www.sap.nl/education 15
SAP Education Online
Role Based Training – Order to Cash Processes
ERP462 · Credit & Risk Management
DURATION 4 hours PRICE € 350 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• Functional Project Team Members
• Super Users
• IT Business Analyst
• Transactional End Users
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAP125 – SAP Navigation
• ERP450 – Sales and Distribution
Overview
• ERP461 – Accounts Receivable & Credit
Management Overview
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None
ERP463 · Credit Reporting
DURATION 1 hour PRICE € 150 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• Functional Project Team Members
• Super Users
• IT Business Analyst
• Transactional End Users
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAP125 – SAP Navigation
• ERP450 – Sales and Distribution
Overview
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
ERP462 – Credit & Risk Management
16
GOALS CONTENT
This course will prepare you to: • Credit Management
• Describe the processes related to credit • Risk Management
management and risk analysis • Sales Order
• Maintain credit master data SOFTWARE
• Create sales orders ECC 5.0, SCM 5.0
• Create and maintain financial NOTES
documents This course is part of the ‘Order to Cash
• Review and maintain orders on credit Processes’ role based training series.
hold
GOALS SOFTWARE
This course will prepare you to: ECC 5.0, SCM 5.0
• Display credit overview NOTES
• Explain credit master sheet This course is part of the ‘Order to Cash
• Execute the early warning list Processes’ role based training series.
• Display credit master data
CONTENT
• Credit Management Reports
• Credit Management Master Data
SAP Education Online
Role Based Training – Order to Cash Processes

Focus on business content

relevant to
the learner’s job and role

ERP900
Order to Cash –
Role Based Training I

6 hours

ERP901 ERP902 ERP904 ERP905

Salesman Sales Administrator I Outbound Shipping Clerk Billing Employee

7 hours 6 hours 6 hours 5 hours

ERP903
Sales Administrator II

5 hours

ERP906 ERP907
Credit Analyst I Credit Analyst II

8 hours 7 hours

ERP900 · Order to Cash – Role Based Training I

DURATION 6 hours PRICE € 550 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP GOALS CONTENT

• Salesman, Sales Administrative, This course will prepare you to: • SAP125 – SAP Navigation
Outbound Shipping Clerk, and Billing • Navigate the SAP system • ERP450 – Sales & Distribution Overview
Employee • Describe the main processes of Sales and • ERP451 – Sales Order Processing
• Functional Project Team Members Distribution SOFTWARE

• Super Users • Describe order processing in Sales and ECC 5.0, SCM 5.0
• IT Business Analyst Distribution NOTES

• Transactional End Users • Explain sales order procedure This course is part of the ‘Processes Order
PREREQUISITES None • Describe cash sales to Cash’ role based training series.
• Create and maintain sales orders

www.sap.nl/education 17
SAP Education Online
Role Based Training – Order to Cash Processes
ERP901 · Salesman
DURATION 7 hours PRICE € 550 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• Salesman
• Functional Project Team Members
• Super Users
• IT Business Analyst
• Transactional End Users
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
ERP900 – Order to Cash – Role Based
Training I
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
This course will prepare you to:
• Describe customer master data
• Create and maintain customer master
data
ERP902 · Sales Administrator I
DURATION 6 hours PRICE € 550 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• Sales Administrative
• Functional Project Team Members
• Super Users
• IT Business Analyst
• Transactional End Users
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
ERP900 – Order to Cash – Role Based
Training I
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
This course will prepare you to:
• Describe customer master data
• Create and maintain customer
master data
18
• Describe order processing in Sales and
Distribution
• Describe the cash sales procedures and
scheduling agreement
• Define what are basic contracts and
delivery requests
• Create and maintain scheduling
agreements
• Create and maintain contracts
• Create and maintain assortment
modules for contracts
• Create outbound delivery documents
• Explain quotation and sales order
process
• Create and maintain quotations
• Describe order processing in Sales and
Distribution
• Describe the cash sales procedures and
scheduling agreement
• Define what are basic contracts and
delivery requests
• Create and maintain scheduling
agreements
• Create and maintain contracts
• Create and maintain assortment
modules for contracts
• Create outbound delivery documents
• Execute customer analysis
• Generate a list of SD orders
• Check available material on hand
• Execute customer analysis
• Generate a list of SD orders
• Check available material on hand
• Review physical inventory documents
CONTENT
• ERP452 – Customer Master Data
• ERP453 – Quotation Management
• ERP454 – Scheduling Agreements and
Contracts
• ERP455 – Sales & Distribution Reports
SOFTWARE
ECC 5.0, SCM 5.0
NOTES
This course is part of the ‘Processes Order
to Cash’ role based training series.
• Review physical inventory documents
CONTENT
• ERP452 – Customer Master Data
• ERP454 – Scheduling Agreements and
Contracts
• ERP455 – Sales & Distribution Reports
SOFTWARE
ECC 5.0, SCM 5.0
NOTES
This course is part of the ‘Processes Order
to Cash’ role based training series.
SAP Education Online
Role Based Training – Order to Cash Processes

ERP903 · Sales Administrator II

DURATION 5 hours PRICE € 550 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP GOALS • Explain the backorder process

• Sales Administrative This course will prepare you to: • Reschedule an order
• Functional Project Team Members • Understand the fundamentals of pricing CONTENT

• Super Users in SD • ERP456 – Pricing Condition Records

• IT Business Analyst • Create and maintain pricing condition • ERP457 – Sales Agreements
• Transactional End Users records • ERP458 – Backorder Processing
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED • Generate pricing reports SOFTWARE

• ERP900 – Order to Cash – Role Based • Explain sales agreements ECC 5.0, SCM 5.0
Training I • Maintain customer master data for sales NOTES

• ERP902 – Role Based Training for Sales agreements This course is part of the ‘Processes Order
Administrative I • Create and maintain listing/exclusion to Cash’ role based training series.
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None master data

ERP904 · Outbound Shipping Clerk

DURATION 6 hours PRICE € 550 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP GOALS • Create and maintain outbound delivery

• Outbound Shipping Clerk This course will prepare you to: documents
• Functional Project Team Members • Execute customer analysis CONTENT

• Super Users • Generate a list of SD orders • ERP459 – Outbound Processing

• IT Business Analyst • Check available material on hand • ERP455 – Sales and Distribution Reports
• Transactional End Users • Review physical inventory documents SOFTWARE

PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED • Describe the delivery process ECC 5.0, SCM 5.0
ERP900 – Order to Cash – Role Based • Define the function of Picking NOTES
Training I • Understand the process of post goods This course is part of the ‘Processes Order
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None issue (PGI) to Cash’ role based training series.

ERP905 · Billing Employee

DURATION 5 hours PRICE € 550 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP GOALS CONTENT

• Billing Employee This course will prepare you to: • ERP460 – Billing Process
• Functional Project Team Members • Understand the sales order, delivery and • ERP461 – Accounts Receivable & Credit
• Super Users billing process Management
• IT Business Analyst • Execute the billing process SOFTWARE

• Transactional End Users • Understand how to process a complaint ECC 5.0, SCM 5.0
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED • Explain accounts receivable NOTES

ERP900 – Order to Cash – Role Based • Describe the processes related to credit This course is part of the ‘Processes Order
Training I management and risk analysis to Cash’ role based training series.
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED

ERP459 – Outbound Processing

www.sap.nl/education 19
SAP Education Online
Role Based Training – Order to Cash Processes
ERP906 · Credit Analyst I
DURATION 8 hours PRICE € 550 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• Credit Analyst
• Functional Project Team Members
• Super Users
• IT Business Analyst
• Transactional End Users
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None
ERP907 · Credit Analyst II
DURATION 7 hours PRICE € 550 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• Credit Analyst
• Functional Project Team Members
• Super Users
• IT Business Analyst
• Transactional End Users
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
ERP906 – Credit Analyst I
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
This course will prepare you to:
• Explain accounts receivable
20
GOALS
This course will prepare you to:
• Navigate the SAP system
• Describe the main processes of Sales and
Distribution
• Understand the sales order, delivery and
billing process
• Execute the billing process
• Understand how to process a complaint
• Describe the processes related to credit
management and risk analysis
• Maintain credit master data
• Create sales orders
• Create and maintain financial
documents
• Review and maintain orders on credit
hold
• Display credit overview
• Explain credit master sheet
• Execute the early warning list
• Display credit master data
CONTENT
• SAP125 – SAP Navigation
• ERP450 – Sales & Distribution Overview
• ERP460 – Billing Process
SOFTWARE
ECC 5.0, SCM 5.0
NOTES
This course is part of the ‘Processes Order
to Cash’ role based training series.
CONTENT
• ERP451 – Accounts Receivable & Credit
Management Overview
• ERP452 – Credit & Risk Management
• ERP453 – Credit Reporting
SOFTWARE
ECC 5.0, SCM 5.0
NOTES
This course is part of the ‘Processes Order
to Cash’ role based training series.
SAP Education Online
Role Based Training – Procure to Pay Processes

SAP125
SAP Navigation 2005

2 hours

ERP400 ERP401 ERP402 ERP403

Material Management Material & Service Master Purchasing Overview Vendor & Purchase
Overview Data Information
Master Data &
Source List
2 hours 2 hours 2 hours 2 hours

ERP404 ERP405 ERP406 ERP407

Purchase Requisitions, Material Management Inventory Management Material Requirements
Quotations & Contracts Reports Planning & Physical
Inventory

4 hours 1 hour 4 hours 2 hours

ERP408
Logistics Invoice
Verification

2 hours

ERP400 · Material Management Overview

DURATION 2 hours PRICE € 150 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP GOALS • Material Master Data, Vendor and

• Functional Project Team Members This course will prepare you to: Service
• Super Users • Describe the main processes of Material SOFTWARE

• IT Business Analyst Management ECC 5.0, SCM 5.0

• Transactional End Users • Identify material management master NOTES

PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED data This course is part of the ‘Procure to Pay

SAP125 SAP Navigation CONTENT Processes’ role based training series.
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None • Material Management Overview
• Master Data Overview

ERP401 · Material & Service Master Data

DURATION 2 hours PRICE € 150 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None CONTENT

• Functional Project Team Members GOALS • Material Master Data

• Super Users This course will prepare you to: • Service Master Data
• IT Business Analyst • Identify the main elements of material SOFTWARE

• Transactional End Users and service master data ECC 5.0, SCM 5.0
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED • Create and maintain material master NOTES

• SAP125 – SAP Navigation data This course is part of the ‘Procure to Pay
• ERP400 – Material Management • Create and maintain service master data Processes’ role based training series.
Overview

www.sap.nl/education 21
SAP Education Online
Role Based Training – Procure to Pay Processes
ERP402 · Purchasing Overview
DURATION 2 hours PRICE € 150 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• Functional Project Team Members
• Super Users
• IT Business Analyst
• Transactional End Users
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAP125 – SAP Navigation
• ERP400 – Material Management
Overview
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None
ERP403 · Vendor & Purchase Information Master Data & Source List
DURATION 2 hours PRICE € 150 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• Functional Project Team Members
• Super Users
• IT Business Analyst
• Transactional End Users
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAP125 – SAP Navigation
• ERP400 – Material Management
Overview
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
ERP402 – Purchasing Overview
ERP404 · Purchase Requisitions, Quotations & Contracts
DURATION 4 hours PRICE € 350 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• Functional Project Team Members
• Super Users
• IT Business Analyst
• Transactional End Users
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAP125 – SAP Navigation
• ERP400 – Material Management
Overview
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
ERP402 – Purchasing Overview
22
GOALS CONTENT
This course will prepare you to: • Purchasing Overview
• Describe the main processes of Material • Purchase Order
Management • Purchase Requisitions
• Describe the purchase process and the SOFTWARE
supply chain ECC 5.0, SCM 5.0
• Explain purchase order functionalities NOTES
• Create and maintain purchase orders This course is part of the ‘Procure to Pay
Processes’ role based training series.
GOALS CONTENT
This course will prepare you to: • Vendor Master Data
• Understand the main concepts about • Purchase Info Records
vendor master data and purchase • Sources of Supply
information records SOFTWARE
• Understand the Sources of Supply ECC 5.0, SCM 5.0
• Create and maintain vendor master NOTES
data This course is part of the ‘Procure to Pay
• Create purchasing information master Processes’ role based training series.
data
• Maintain source list
GOALS CONTENT
This course will prepare you to: • Purchase Requisitions
• Describe the main elements of a • Quotation, Contract and Purchase
purchase order Order
• Create and maintain a request for quote • Release Procedure
• Compare vendor prices SOFTWARE
• Create and maintain purchase ECC 5.0, SCM 5.0
requisition NOTES
• Release purchasing documents This course is part of the ‘Procure to Pay
• Understand the purchase order release Processes’ role based training series.
process
• Create and maintain contracts
SAP Education Online
Role Based Training – Procure to Pay Processes
ERP405 · Material Management Reports
DURATION 1 hour PRICE € 150 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• Functional Project Team Members
• Super Users
• IT Business Analyst
• Transactional End Users
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAP125 – SAP Navigation
• ERP400 – Material Management
Overview
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None
ERP406 · Inventory Management
DURATION 4 hours PRICE € 350 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• Functional Project Team Members
• Super Users
• IT Business Analyst
• Transactional End Users
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAP125 – SAP Navigation
• ERP400 – Material Management
Overview
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None
ERP407 · Material Requirements Planning & Physical Inventory
DURATION 2 hours PRICE € 150 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• Functional Project Team Members
• Super Users
• IT Business Analyst
• Transactional End Users
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAP125 – SAP Navigation
• ERP400 – Material Management
Overview
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None
ERP408 · Logistics Invoice Verification
DURATION 2 hours PRICE € 150 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• Functional Project Team Members
• Super Users
• IT Business Analyst
• Transactional End Users
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAP125 – SAP Navigation
• ERP400 – Material Management
Overview
GOALS CONTENT
This course will prepare you to: • Material Management Reports
• Generate purchase requisition reports • Stock
• Analyze purchasing documents • Inventory
• Check available stock • Purchasing
• Determine stock requirements SOFTWARE
• Display inventory documents ECC 5.0, SCM 5.0
NOTES
This course is part of the ‘Procure to Pay
Processes’ role based training series.
GOALS CONTENT
This course will prepare you to: • Goods Receipt
• Explain inventory management • Service Entry Sheet
• Describe the tracking of material from • Goods Issue
inventory receipt to inventory issue • Stock Transfers
• Create goods receipt and goods issue SOFTWARE
• Identify the elements of a material ECC 5.0, SCM 5.0
document NOTES
• Enter transfer postings This course is part of the ‘Procure to Pay
Processes’ role based training series.
GOALS CONTENT
This course will prepare you to: • Inventory Management Overview
• Execute material requirements • Physical Inventory
planning • Material Requirement Planning (MRP)
• Create and print physical inventory SOFTWARE
documents ECC 5.0, SCM 5.0
• Explain physical inventory NOTES
• Perform an inventory count and This course is part of the ‘Procure to Pay
recount Processes’ role based training series.
• Post inventory differences
• ERP402 – Purchasing Overview CONTENT
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED • Logistics Invoice Verification Overview
ERP406 – Inventory Management • Logistics Invoice Verification
GOALS SOFTWARE
This course will prepare you to: ECC 5.0, SCM 5.0
• Explain invoice verification NOTES
• Enter and display incoming invoice This course is part of the ‘Procure to Pay
documents Processes’ role based training series.
www.sap.nl/education 23
SAP Education Online
Role Based Training – Procure to Pay Processes

ERP910
Focus on business content Role Based Training –
relevant to Procure to Pay I
the learner’s job and role

6 hours

ERP912 ERP914 ERP915

Requisition Clerk & Invoice Buyer Receiving Clerk
Verification Clerk I

8 hours 7 hours 7 hours

ERP913
Invoice Verification Clerk II

6 hours

ERP910 · Role Based Training – Procure to Pay I

DURATION 6 hours PRICE € 550 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP GOALS CONTENT

• Requisition Clerk This course will prepare you to: • SAP125 – SAP Navigation
• Invoice Verification Clerk • Navigate SAP • ERP400 – Material Management
• Buyer • Describe the main processes of Material Overview
• Receiving Clerk Management • ERP402- Purchasing Overview
• Functional Project Team Members • Identify material management master SOFTWARE

• Super Users data ECC 5.0, SCM 5.0

• IT Business Analyst • Describe the purchase process and the NOTES

• Transactional End Users supply chain This course is part of the ‘Procure to Pay
PREREQUISITES None • Explain purchase order functionalities Processes’ role based training series.
• Create and maintain purchase orders
• Enter and display incoming invoice
documents

ERP912 · Requisition Clerk & Invoice Verification Clerk 1

DURATION 8 hours PRICE € 550 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP service master data requisition

• Requisition Clerk • Understand the main concepts about • Release purchasing documents
• Invoice Verification Clerk vendor master data and purchase • Create and maintain contracts
• Functional Project Team Members information records CONTENT

• Super Users • Understand the Sources of Supply and • ERP401 – Material & Service Master
• IT Business Analyst maintain a source list Data
• Transactional End Users • Create and maintain vendor master • ERP403 – Vendor & Purchasing
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED data Information Master Data & Source List
ERP910 – Role Based Training – Procure • Create purchasing information master • ERP404 – Purchase Requisitions,
to Pay I data Quotations & Contracts
GOALS • Describe the main elements of a SOFTWARE
This course will prepare you to: purchase order ECC 5.0, SCM 5.0
• Identify the main elements of material • Create and maintain a request for quote NOTES
and service master data • Compare vendor prices This course is part of the ‘Procure to Pay
• Create and maintain material and • Create and maintain purchase Processes’ role based training series.

24
SAP Education Online
Role Based Training – Procure to Pay Processes
ERP913 · Invoice Verification Clerk II
DURATION 6 hours PRICE € 550 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• Invoice Verification Clerk
• Functional Project Team Members
• Super Users
• IT Business Analyst
• Transactional End Users
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• ERP910 – Role Based Training – Procure
to Pay I
• ERP912 – Requisition Clerk & Invoice
Verification Clerk I
ERP914 · Buyer
DURATION 7 hours PRICE € 550 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• Buyer
• Functional Project Team Members
• Super Users
• IT Business Analyst
• Transactional End Users
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
ERP910 – Role Based Training – Procure
to Pay I
GOALS
This course will prepare you to:
• Understand the main concepts about
vendor master data and purchase
information records
• Understand the Sources of Supply and
ERP915 · Receiving Clerk
DURATION 7 hours PRICE € 550 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• Receiving Clerk
• Functional Project Team Members
• Super Users
• IT Business Analyst
• Transactional End Users
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
ERP910 – Role Based Training – Procure
to Pay I
GOALS
This course will prepare you to:
• Generate purchase requisition reports
• Analyze purchasing documents
• Check available stock and determine
GOALS
This course will prepare you to:
• Explain inventory management
• Describe the tracking of material from
inventory receipt to inventory issue
• Create goods receipt and goods issue
• Identify the elements of a material
document
• Enter transfer postings
• Explain invoice verification
• Enter and display incoming invoice
documents
maintain a source list
• Create and maintain vendor and
purchasing information master data
• Describe the main elements of a
purchase order
• Create and maintain a request for quote
• Compare vendor prices
• Create and maintain purchase
requisition
• Release purchasing documents
• Create and maintain contracts
• Generate purchase requisition reports
• Analyze purchasing and inventory
documents
• Check available stock and determine
stock requirements
• Display inventory documents
• Explain inventory management
• Describe the tracking of material from
inventory receipt to inventory issue
• Create goods receipt and goods issue
• Identify the elements of a material
document
• Enter transfer postings
• Execute material requirements
planning
• Create and print physical inventory
documents
• Explain physical inventory
CONTENT
• ERP406 – Inventory Management
• ERP408 – Logistics Invoice Verification
SOFTWARE
ECC 5.0, SCM 5.0
NOTES
This course is part of the ‘Procure to Pay
Processes’ role based training series.
stock requirements
CONTENT
• 403 – Vendor & Purchasing Information
Master Data & Source List
• 405 – Material Management Reports
• ERP404 – Purchase Requisitions,
Quotations & Contracts
SOFTWARE
ECC 5.0, SCM 5.0
NOTES
This course is part of the ‘Procure to Pay
Processes’ role based training series.
• Perform an inventory count and
recount
• Post inventory differences
CONTENT
• ERP405 – Material Management
Reports
• ERP406 – Inventory Management
• ERP407 – Material Requirements
Planning & Physical Inventory
SOFTWARE
ECC 5.0, SCM 5.0
NOTES
This course is part of the ‘Procure to Pay
Processes’ role based training series.
www.sap.nl/education 25
SAP Education Online
Role Based Training – Controlling Processes

SAP125
SAP Navigation 2005

2 hours

ERP200 ERP201 ERP202 ERP203

Controlling Overview Controlling Master Data Cost Center Planning & Cost Center Period-end
Postings Closing & Reports

4 hours 2 hours 4 hours 2 hours

ERP204 ERP205 ERP206 ERP207

Internal Order Product Cost Control Order – Production Profit Center
Order

4 hours 2 hours 1 hour 4 hours

ERP200 · Controlling Overview

DURATION 4 hours PRICE € 350 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP GOALS CONTENT

• Functional Project Team Members This course will prepare you to: • Controlling Overview
• Super Users • Describe the component Controlling • Cost Center Accounting Overview
• IT Business Analyst (CO) • Profit Center Accounting Overview
• Transactional End Users • Understand the classes of primary and SOFTWARE

PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED secondary costs ECC 5.0

SAP125 – SAP Navigation • Understand the cost center and profit NOTES

PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None center structure This course is part of the ‘Controlling
Processes’ role based training series.

ERP201 · Controlling Master Data

DURATION 2 hours PRICE € 150 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None CONTENT

• Functional Project Team Members GOALS • Cost Element Master Data

• Super Users This course will prepare you to: • Cost Center Master Data
• IT Business Analyst • Create and maintain cost center and SOFTWARE

• Transactional End Users cost elements ECC 5.0

PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED • Create cost center group NOTES

• SAP125 – SAP Navigation • Explain how cost center is utilized and This course is part of the ‘Controlling
• ERP200 – Controlling Overview how it can be grouped Processes’ role based training series.

26
SAP Education Online
Role Based Training – Controlling Processes
ERP202 · Cost Center Planning & Postings
DURATION 4 hours PRICE € 350 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• Functional Project Team Members
• Super Users
• IT Business Analyst
• Transactional End Users
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAP125 – SAP Navigation
• ERP200 – Controlling Overview
• ERP201 – Controlling Master Data
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None
ERP203 · Cost Center Period-end Closing & Reports
DURATION 2 hours PRICE € 150 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• Functional Project Team Members
• Super Users
• IT Business Analyst
• Transactional End Users
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAP125 – SAP Navigation
• ERP200 – Controlling Overview
ERP204 · Internal Order
DURATION 4 hours PRICE € 350 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• Functional Project Team Members
• Super Users
• IT Business Analyst
• Transactional End Users
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAP125 – SAP Navigation
• ERP200 – Controlling Overview
• ERP201 – Controlling Master Data
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
This course will prepare you to:
GOALS • Execute Plan Assessment
This course will prepare you to: • Enter G/L account document
• Create and describe Statistical Key CONTENT
Figures • Statistical Key Figures
• Explain Cost Center planning; • Cost Center Planning
Statistical key figures; Classes of • Actual Postings
Activities; Primary costs (dependents SOFTWARE
and independents of activities) and ECC 5.0
Secondary Costs NOTES
• Create Postings This course is part of the ‘Controlling
• Understand the allocations for period in Processes’ role based training series.
Planning; Distribution and Assessment
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED • Execute actual assessment and cost
ERP201 – Controlling Master Data center reports
GOALS CONTENT
This course will prepare you to: • Period-End Closing
• Describe the main classes of reporting • Information Systems
• Understand what are Periodic NOTES
Reposting; Delimitation of costs; This course is part of the ‘Controlling
Distribution and Assessment Processes’ role based training series.
• Describe the function of an internal CONTENT
order • Internal Order Overview
• Explain the commitment process • Internal Order: Master Data
• Create and maintain internal orders • Commitment
individually and using a collective • Internal Order Planning
process • Settlement
• Describe a commitment SOFTWARE
• Explain the function of the purchase ECC 5.0
order commitment NOTES
• Understand the planning of: Internal This course is part of the ‘Controlling
orders and costs Processes’ role based training series.
• Describe the Settlement function
www.sap.nl/education 27
SAP Education Online
Role Based Training – Controlling Processes
ERP205 · Product Cost
DURATION 2 hours PRICE € 150 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• Functional Project Team Members
• Super Users
• IT Business Analyst
• Transactional End Users
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAP125 – SAP Navigation
• ERP200 – Controlling Overview
• ERP201 – Controlling Master Data
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
ERP206 – Control Order – Production
Order
ERP206 · Control Order – Production Order
DURATION 1 hour PRICE € 150 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• Functional Project Team Members
• Super Users
• IT Business Analyst
• Transactional End Users
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAP125 – SAP Navigation
• ERP200 – Controlling Overview
• ERP201 – Controlling Master Data
• ERP250 – Product Cost
ERP207 · Profit Center
DURATION 4 hours PRICE € 350 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• Functional Project Team Members
• Super Users
• IT Business Analyst
• Transactional End Users
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAP125 – SAP Navigation
• ERP200 – Controlling Overview
• ERP201 – Controlling Master Data
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
This course will prepare you to:
• Understand the profit center structure
and hierarchy
• Describe accounts payable and accounts
receivable transfer
28
GOALS
This course will prepare you to:
• Create base planning objects
• Create production order
• Issue goods
• Confirm completion of production
order
• Understand all the stages of the
preliminary cost calculation for product
cost collector
• Understand and analyze the
target/actual postings for product cost
collector
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
This course will prepare you to:
• Settle an order
• Create a goods issue
• Confirm completion of production
order
• Understand all the stages of the
preliminary cost calculation for product
cost and overhead
• Explain profit center accounting in
planning
• Understand the concept of profitability
analysis and demonstration of
accounting applications
• Define the master data used in the
profitability analysis
• Explain the billing document transfer
• Describe profitability analysis planning
• Execute and Analyze profitability
reports
CONTENT
• Profit Center Accounting Overview
• Profit Center Master Data
• Profit Center Actual Postings
• PCA Period-End
CONTENT
• Product Cost Planning Overview
• Product Cost Planning
• Control for Period – Product Cost
Collector
SOFTWARE
ECC 5.0
NOTES
This course is part of the ‘Controlling
Processes’ role based training series.
• Calculate cost for work in process
CONTENT
• Production Cost Control Overview
• Control for Order – Production Order
SOFTWARE
ECC 5.0
NOTES
This course is part of the ‘Controlling
Processes’ role based training series.
• Profit Center Planning
• Information Systems
• Profitability Analysis Overview
• Profitability Analysis Master Data
• Profitability Analysis Actual Postings
• Profitability Analysis Planning
SOFTWARE
ECC 5.0
NOTES
This course is part of the ‘Controlling
Processes’ role based training series.
SAP Education Online
Role Based Training – Controlling Processes

Focus on business content

relevant to
the learner’s job and role

ERP920
Role Based Training –
Controlling Processes I

6 hours

ERP921 ERP922 ERP923 ERP924

Cost Center Analyst & Internal Order Analyst Product Cost Analyst I Profitability Analyst
Controller I

8 hours 6 hours 6 hours 6 hours

ERP925 ERP925
Product Cost Analyst II & Product Cost Analyst II &
Controller II Controller II

3 hours 3 hours

ERP926
Controller III

8 hours

ERP920 · Role Based Training – Controlling Processes I

DURATION 6 hours PRICE € 550 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP PREREQUISITES None CONTENT

• Cost Center Analyst GOALS • SAP125 – SAP Navigation
• Controller This course will prepare you to: • ERP200 – Controlling Overview
• Internal Order Analyst • Navigate SAP SOFTWARE
• Product Cost Analyst • Describe the component Controlling ECC 5.0
• Profitability Analyst (CO) NOTES
• Functional Project Team Members • Understand the classes of primary and This course is part of the ‘Controlling
• Super Users secondary costs Processes’ role based training series.
• IT Business Analyst • Understand the cost center and profit
• Transactional End Users center structure

www.sap.nl/education 29
SAP Education Online
Role Based Training – Controlling Processes
ERP921 · Cost Center Analyst & Controller I
DURATION 8 hours PRICE € 550 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• Cost Center Analyst
• Controller
• Internal Order Analyst
• Product Cost Analyst
• Profitability Analyst
• Functional Project Team Members
• Super Users
• IT Business Analyst
• Transactional End Users
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
ERP920 – Role Based Training –
Controlling Processes I
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
This course will prepare you to:
• Create and maintain cost center and
ERP922 · Internal Order Analyst
DURATION 6 hours PRICE € 550 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• Internal Order Analyst
• Functional Project Team Members
• Super Users
• IT Business Analyst
• Transactional End Users
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
ERP920 – Role Based Training –
Controlling Processes I
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
This course will prepare you to:
• Create and maintain cost center and
30
cost elements
• Create cost center group
• Explain how cost center is utilized and
how it can be
grouped
• Create and describe Statistical Key
Figures
• Explain Cost Center planning;
Statistical key figures; Classes of
Activities; Primary costs (dependents
and independents of activities) and
Secondary Costs
• Create Postings
• Understand the allocations for period in
Planning; Distribution and Assessment
• Execute Plan Assessment
• Enter G/L account document
cost elements
• Create cost center group
• Explain how cost center is utilized and
how it can be grouped
• Describe the function of an internal
order
• Explain the commitment process
• Create and maintain internal orders
individually and using a collective
process
• Describe a commitment
• Explain the function of the purchase
order commitment
• Describe the main classes of reporting
• Understand what are Periodic
Reposting; Delimitation of costs;
Distribution and Assessment
• Execute actual assessment and cost
center reports
CONTENT
• ERP201 – Controlling Master Data
• ERP203 – Cost Center Period-end
Closing & Reports
• ERP202 – Cost Center Planning &
Postings
SOFTWARE
ECC 5.0
NOTES
This course is part of the ‘Controlling
Processes’ role based training series.
• Understand the planning of: Internal
orders and costs
• Describe the Settlement function
CONTENT
• ERP201 – Controlling Master Data
• ERP204 – Internal Order
SOFTWARE
ECC 5.0
NOTES
This course is part of the ‘Controlling
Processes’ role based training series.
SAP Education Online
Role Based Training – Controlling Processes
ERP923 · Product Cost Analyst I
DURATION 6 hours PRICE € 550 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• Product Cost Analyst
• Functional Project Team Members
• Super Users
• IT Business Analyst
• Transactional End Users
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
ERP920 – Role Based Training –
Controlling Processes I
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
This course will prepare you to:
• Create and maintain cost center and
ERP924 · Profitability Analyst
DURATION 6 hours PRICE € 550 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• Profitability Analyst
• Functional Project Team Members
• Super Users
• IT Business Analyst
• Transactional End Users
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
ERP920 – Role Based Training –
Controlling Processes I
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
This course will prepare you to:
• Create and maintain cost center and
cost elements
cost elements
• Create cost center group
• Explain how cost center is utilized and
how it can be grouped
• Create and describe Statistical Key
Figures
• Explain Cost Center planning;
Statistical key figures; Classes of
Activities; Primary costs (dependents
and independents of activities) and
Secondary Costs
• Create Postings
• Understand the allocations for period in
• Create cost center group
• Explain how cost center is utilized and
how it can be grouped
• Understand the profit center structure
and hierarchy
• Describe accounts payable and accounts
receivable transfer
• Explain profit center accounting in
planning
• Understand the concept of profitability
analysis and demonstration of
accounting applications
• Define the master data used in the
profitability analysis
Planning; Distribution and Assessment
• Execute Plan Assessment
• Enter G/L account document
CONTENT
• ERP201 – Controlling Master Data
• ERP202 – Cost Center Planning &
Postings
SOFTWARE
ECC 5.0
NOTES
This course is part of the ‘Controlling
Processes’ role based training series.
• Explain the billing document transfer
• Describe profitability analysis planning
• Execute and Analyze profitability
reports
CONTENT
• ERP201 – Controlling Master Data
• ERP207 – Profit Center
SOFTWARE
ECC 5.0
NOTES
This course is part of the ‘Controlling
Processes’ role based training series.
www.sap.nl/education 31
SAP Education Online
Role Based Training – Controlling Processes
ERP925 · Product Cost Analyst II & Controller II
DURATION 3 hours PRICE € 350 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• Product Cost Analyst
• Controller
• Functional Project Team Members
• Super Users
• IT Business Analyst
• Transactional End Users
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• ERP920 – Role Based Training –
Controlling Processes I
• ERP921 – Cost Center Analyst &
Controller I or
• ERP923 – Product Cost Analyst I
ERP926 · Controller III
DURATION 8 hours PRICE € 550 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• Controller
• Functional Project Team Members
• Super Users
• IT Business Analyst
• Transactional End Users
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• ERP920 – Role Based Training –
Controlling Processes I
• ERP921 – Cost Center Analyst &
Controller I
• ERP925 – Product Cost Analyst II &
Controller II
GOALS
This course will prepare you to:
• Describe the function of an internal
order
32
GOALS
This course will prepare you to:
• Create base planning objects
• Create production order
• Issue goods
• Confirm completion of production
order
• Understand all the stages of the
preliminary cost calculation for product
cost collector
• Understand and analyze the
target/actual postings for product cost
collector
• Settle an order
• Create a goods issue
• Explain the commitment process
• Create and maintain internal orders
individually and using a collective
process
• Describe a commitment
• Explain the function of the purchase
order commitment
• Understand the planning of: Internal
orders and costs
• Describe the Settlement function
• Understand the profit center structure
and hierarchy
• Describe accounts payable and accounts
receivable transfer
• Explain profit center accounting in
planning
• Understand the concept of profitability
• Confirm completion of production
order
• Understand all the stages of the
preliminary cost calculation for product
cost and overhead
• Calculate cost for work in process
CONTENT
• ERP205 – Product Cost
• ERP206 – Control Order – Production
Order
SOFTWARE
ECC 5.0
NOTES
This course is part of the ‘Controlling
Processes’ role based training series.
analysis and demonstration of
accounting applications
• Define the master data used in the
profitability analysis
• Explain the billing document transfer
• Describe profitability analysis planning
• Execute and Analyze profitability
reports
CONTENT
• ERP204 – Internal Order
• ERP207 – Profit Center
SOFTWARE
ECC 5.0
NOTES
This course is part of the ‘Controlling
Processes’ role based training series.
SAP Education Online
Role Based Training – Financial Processes

SAP125
SAP Navigation 2005

2 hours

ERP250 ERP251 ERP252 ERP253

FI Overview General Ledger Overview General Ledger Billing Process
&
Master Data

2 hours 2 hours 4 hours 2 hours

ERP254 ERP255 ERP256 ERP257

Accounts Receivable Financial Master Data Accounts Payable Cash Management

4 hours 2 hours 4 hours 2 hours

ERP258 ERP259 ERP260 ERP261

Financial Reports Asset Accounting Overview Asset Accounting Master Asset Accounting Details
Data

2 hours 1 hour 2 hours 4 hours

ERP262 ERP270 ERP271 ERP280

Asset Accounting Closing Travel Management Travel Management Funds Management (Funds
Overview Manager)

1 hour 1 hour 4 hours 4 hours

ERP250 · FI Overview
DURATION 2 hours PRICE € 150 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP GOALS CONTENT

• Functional Project Team Members This course will prepare you to: • Financial Accounting Overview
• Super Users • Describe the main processes of Financial • Accounts Receivable Overview
• IT Business Analyst Accounting • Accounts Payable Overview
• Transactional End Users • Understand the integration between SOFTWARE

PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED Financial Accounting and others ECC 5.0

SAP125 – SAP Navigation components NOTES

PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None • Understand the subcomponents: This course is part of the ‘Financial
Accounts Receivable and Accounts Processes’ role based training series.
Payable

www.sap.nl/education 33
SAP Education Online
Role Based Training – Financial Processes
ERP251 · General Ledger Overview & Master Data
DURATION 2 hours PRICE € 150 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• Functional Project Team Members
• Super Users
• IT Business Analyst
• Transactional End Users
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAP125 – SAP Navigation
• ERP250 – Financial Overview
ERP252 · General Ledger
DURATION 4 hours PRICE € 350 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• Functional Project Team Members
• Super Users
• IT Business Analyst
• Transactional End Users
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAP125 – SAP Navigation
• ERP250 – Financial Overview
• ERP251 – General Ledger Overview &
Master Data
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None
ERP253 · Billing Process
DURATION 2 hours PRICE € 150 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• Functional Project Team Members
• Super Users
• IT Business Analyst
• Transactional End Users
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAP125 – SAP Navigation
• ERP250 – Financial Overview
34
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None CONTENT
GOALS • General Ledger Overview
This course will prepare you to: • General Ledger Master Data
• Describe the main components of the SOFTWARE
General Ledger ECC 5.0
• Define General Ledger master data NOTES
• Create and maintain General Ledger This course is part of the ‘Financial
master data Processes’ role based training series.
GOALS reports
This course will prepare you to: - Chart of Account
• Describe the General Ledger functions - Document Journal
• Create, change and display General - P/L
Ledger account postings, account • G/L account balances
documents and recurring documents CONTENT
- Clear G/L account • General Ledger Postings
- Mass and individual reversal of • General Ledger Account Balances
documents • Periodic Processing
- Reset cleared items • Generate Ledger Reports
- Close posting periods SOFTWARE
- Display account balances ECC 5.0
- Batch input NOTES
• Explain CO and FI reconciliation This course is part of the ‘Financial
• Execute and Analyze General Ledger Processes’ role based training series.
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED CONTENT
• ERP450 – SD Overview • Sales Order
• ERP459 – Outbound Processing • Billing
GOALS • Returns and Complaints
This course will prepare you to: • Accounts Receivable
• Understand the sales order, delivery and NOTES
billing process This course is part of the ‘Financial
• Execute the billing process Processes’ role based training series.
• Understand how to process a complaint
SAP Education Online
Role Based Training – Financial Processes

ERP254 · Accounts Receivable

DURATION 4 hours PRICE € 350 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP GOALS • Issue customer correspondence

• Functional Project Team Members
• Super Users
• IT Business Analyst
• Transactional End Users
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAP125 – SAP Navigation
• ERP250 – Financial Overview
This course will prepare you to: CONTENT
• Create and maintain customer master • Customer Master Data
data • Manage Invoices
• Display customer balances • Payment Processes
• Identify the invoice management • Customer Correspondence
functionalities • Generate Financial Reports
• Create invoices and credit memos SOFTWARE

PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED • Post incoming payments ECC 5.0

ERP450 – Sales & Distribution Overview • Understand the difference between NOTES
customer correspondence and internal This course is part of the ‘Financial
analysis Processes’ role based training series.

ERP255 · Financial Master Data

DURATION 2 hours PRICE € 150 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None CONTENT

• Functional Project Team Members GOALS • Vendor Master Data

• Super Users This course will prepare you to: • Bank Master Data
• IT Business Analyst • Explain vendor master data and bank SOFTWARE

• Transactional End Users master data ECC 5.0

PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED • Create and maintain vendor and bank NOTES

• SAP125 – SAP Navigation master data This course is part of the ‘Financial
• ERP250 – Financial Overview Processes’ role based training series.

ERP256 · Accounts Payable

DURATION 4 hours PRICE € 350 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP GOALS • Cancel payments

• Functional Project Team Members
• Super Users
• IT Business Analyst
• Transactional End Users
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAP125 – SAP Navigation
This course will prepare you to: • Void and reprint checks
• Explain the payment process CONTENT
functionality • Process Payments
• Understand the functions of check • Process Checks
processing • Generate Financial Reports
• Process vendor invoices, credit memos, SOFTWARE

• ERP255 – Financial Master Data down payments and recurring ECC 5.0
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED documents NOTES

ERP402 – Purchasing Overview • Calculate interest on arrears This course is part of the ‘Financial
• Issue output Processes’ role based training series.
• Explain check register and check lots

www.sap.nl/education 35
SAP Education Online
Role Based Training – Financial Processes

ERP257 · Cash Management

DURATION 2 hours PRICE € 150 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP GOALS CONTENT

• Functional Project Team Members This course will prepare you to: • Cash Management
• Super Users • Explain cash management including; • Customer Correspondence
• IT Business Analyst manual and electronic bank statement, • Generate Financial Reports
• Transactional End Users financial planning and internal analysis SOFTWARE

PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED • Understand the difference between ECC 5.0

• SAP125 – SAP Navigation customer correspondence and internal NOTES

• ERP250 – Financial Overview analysis This course is part of the ‘Financial

PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None • Import electronic bank statement Processes’ role based training series.
• Process manual bank statement
• Explain cash receipts and cash payments
• Issue output

ERP258 · Financial Reports

DURATION 2 hours PRICE € 150 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP GOALS • Open items due date forecast

• Functional Project Team Members This course will prepare you to: • Business activities
• Super Users • Generate Financial Reports CONTENT

• IT Business Analyst • Analyze customer information • Financial Reporting

• Transactional End Users • Open items • Vendor Reporting
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED • Balances in local currency SOFTWARE

• SAP125 – SAP Navigation • Payment history ECC 5.0

• ERP250 – Financial Overview • Sales NOTES

PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None • Analyze vendor information This course is part of the ‘Financial
• Open items Processes’ role based training series.
• Balances in local currency

ERP259 · Asset Accounting Overview

DURATION 1 hour PRICE € 150 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED CONTENT

• Functional Project Team Members • SAP125 – SAP Navigation Asset Accounting Overview
• Super Users • ERP250 – Financial Overview SOFTWARE

• IT Business Analyst PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None ECC 5.0

• Transactional End Users GOALS NOTES

This course will prepare you to: This course is part of the ‘Financial
• Describe the main functions of Asset Processes’ role based training series.
Accounting

36
SAP Education Online
Role Based Training – Financial Processes
ERP260 · Asset Accounting Master Data
DURATION 2 hours PRICE € 150 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• Functional Project Team Members
• Super Users
• IT Business Analyst
• Transactional End Users
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAP125 – SAP Navigation
• ERP250 – Financial Overview
• ERP259 – Asset Accounting Overview
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None
ERP261 · Asset Accounting Details
DURATION 4 hours PRICE € 350 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• Functional Project Team Members
• Super Users
• IT Business Analyst
• Transactional End Users
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAP125 – SAP Navigation
• ERP250 – Financial Overview
• ERP259 – Asset Accounting Overview
• ERP260 – Asset Accounting Master Data
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
ERP262 · Asset Accounting Closing
DURATION 1 hour PRICE € 150 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• Functional Project Team Members
• Super Users
• IT Business Analyst
• Transactional End Users
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAP125 – SAP Navigation
• ERP250 – Financial Overview
• ERP259 – Asset Accounting Overview
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None
GOALS CONTENT
This course will prepare you to: • Assignment and Master Data
• Explain the functions of Asset • Asset Master Data
accounting SOFTWARE
• Create and maintain Asset master data ECC 5.0
• Explain acquisition from purchase with NOTES
vendor This course is part of the ‘Financial
• Describe Asset Explorer Processes’ role based training series.
GOALS CONTENT
This course will prepare you to: • Asset Under Construction
• Explain Asset Accounting • Deactivation / Deletion / Blocking
• Create and maintain asset under • Depreciation
construction • Asset Retirement
• Distribute and settle asset under • Asset Transfer
construction SOFTWARE
• Understand the types of support ECC 5.0
provided for blocking, deleting and NOTES
retiring an asset This course is part of the ‘Financial
• Explain the Depreciation process Processes’ role based training series.
• Utilize Asset Explorer
• Understand inter-company and within
company asset transfer
GOALS CONTENT
This course will prepare you to: Asset Reporting and Closing
• Understand basic reporting SOFTWARE
functionalities for Asset Accounting ECC 5.0
• Simulate and recalculate depreciation NOTES
• Perform the Asset Accounting closing This course is part of the ‘Financial
activities Processes’ role based training series.
www.sap.nl/education 37
SAP Education Online
Role Based Training – Financial Processes
ERP270 · Travel Management Overview
DURATION 1 hour PRICE € 150 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• Functional Project Team Members
• Super Users
• IT Business Analyst
• Transactional End Users
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
SAP125 – SAP Navigation
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None
ERP271 · Travel Management
DURATION 4 hours PRICE € 350 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• Functional Project Team Members
• Super Users
• IT Business Analyst
• Transactional End Users
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAP125 – SAP Navigation
• ERP270 – Travel Management Overview
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None
ERP280 · Funds Management (Funds Manager)
DURATION 4 hours PRICE € 350 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• Functional Project Team Members
• Super Users
• IT Business Analyst
• Transactional End Users
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
SAP125 – SAP Navigation
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
This course will prepare you to:
• Describe the main processes of Financial
Accounting
• Understand the subcomponents:
Accounts Receivable and Accounts
38
GOALS CONTENT
This course will prepare you to: • Financial Accounting Overview
• Describe the main processes of Financial • Travel Management Overview
Accounting SOFTWARE
• Explain the Travel Management ECC 5.0
processes NOTES
This course is part of the ‘Financial
Processes’ role based training series.
GOALS CONTENT
This course will prepare you to: • HR Master Data
• Understand HR master data required • Trip Request
for travel management • Travel Planning
• Explain the trip request procedure • Travel Cost and Expense
• Create and approve trip request • Travel Reporting
• Describe the Travel Manager SOFTWARE
• Explain Travel Planning ECC 5.0
• Create trip data NOTES
• Explain assignment of cost for a trip This course is part of the ‘Financial
• Generate weekly and by period travel Processes’ role based training series.
planning and expense reports
Payable CONTENT
• Explain Cash Management and • Financial Accounting Overview
Liquidity Forecast • Cash Management and Liquidity
• Utilize Manual and Electronic Bank Forecast Overview
Statement inside the Cash Management • Account Receivable Overview
system • Account Payable Overview
• Assign differences between Liquidity • Cash Management
Forecast, Cash Management and • Liquidity Forecast
Financial Accounting • Reporting
• Generate Liquidity Forecast and Cash SOFTWARE
Management reports ECC 5.0
NOTES
This course is part of the ‘Financial
Processes’ role based training series.
SAP Education Online
Role Based Training – Financial Processes

Focus on business content

relevant to
the learner’s job and role

ERP930 ERP931
Role Based Training – Accounting Analyst
Financial Processes I

4 hours 6 hours

ERP932
Acc. Receivable Clerk I &
Acc. Payable Clerk I

4 hours

ERP934 SAP125 ERP933

Asset Manager I SAP Navigation 2005 Travel Manager

3 hours 2 hours 5 hours

ERP280
Funds Management (Funds
Manager)

4 hours

ERP932 ERP936
Acc. Receivable Clerk I & Accounts Receivable
Acc. Payable Clerk I Clerk II

4 hours 8 hours

ERP937
Accounts Payable
Clerk II

6 hours

ERP934 ERP935
Asset Manager I Asset Manager II

3 hours 5 hours

www.sap.nl/education 39
SAP Education Online
Role Based Training – Financial Processes

ERP930 · Role Based Training – Financial Processes I

DURATION 4 hours PRICE € 350 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP PREREQUISITES None Payable

• Accounting Analyst GOALS CONTENT
• Accounts Receivable Clerk This course will prepare you to: • SAP125 – SAP Navigation
• Accounts Payable Clerk • Navigate SAP • ERP250 – FI Overview
• Travel Manager • Describe the main processes of Financial SOFTWARE

• Asset Manager Accounting ECC 5.0

• Funds Manager • Understand the integration between NOTES

• Functional Project Team Members Financial Accounting and others This course is part of the ‘Financial
• Super Users components Processes’ role based training series.
• IT Business Analyst • Understand the subcomponents:
• Transactional End Users Accounts Receivable and Accounts

ERP931 · Accounting Analyst

DURATION 6 hours PRICE € 550 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP • Create and maintain General Ledger reports

• Accounting Analyst master data - Chart of Account
• Functional Project Team Members • Describe the General Ledger functions - Document Journal
• Super Users • Create, change and display General - P/L
• IT Business Analyst Ledger account postings, account • G/L account balances
• Transactional End Users documents and recurring documents CONTENT

PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED - Clear G/L account • ERP252 – General Ledger

ERP930 – Role Based Training – Financial - Mass and individual reversal of • ERP 251 – General Ledger Overview &
Processes I documents Master Data
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None - Reset cleared items SOFTWARE

GOALS - Close posting periods ECC 5.0

This course will prepare you to: - Display account balances NOTES
• Describe the main components of the - Batch input This course is part of the ‘Financial
General Ledger • Explain CO and FI reconciliation Processes’ role based training series.
• Define General Ledger master data • Execute and Analyze General Ledger

ERP932 · Accounts Receivable Clerk 1 & Accounts Payable Clerk 1

DURATION 4 hours PRICE € 350 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP GOALS - Open items

• Accounts Receivable Clerk This course will prepare you to: - Balances in local currency
• Accounts Payable Clerk • Explain vendor master data and bank - Open items due date forecast
• Functional Project Team Members master data - Business activities
• Super Users • Create and maintain vendor and bank CONTENT

• IT Business Analyst master data • ERP255 – Financial Master Data

• Transactional End Users • Generate Financial Reports • ERP258 – Financial Reports
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED • Analyze customer information SOFTWARE
ERP930 – Role Based Training – Financial - Open items ECC 5.0
Processes I - Balances in local currency NOTES

PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None - Payment history This course is part of the ‘Financial
- Sales Processes’ role based training series.
• Analyze vendor information

40
SAP Education Online
Role Based Training – Financial Processes

ERP933 · Travel Manager

DURATION 5 hours PRICE € 550 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP GOALS • Create trip data

• Travel Manager This course will prepare you to: • Explain assignment of cost for a trip
• Functional Project Team Members • Describe the main processes of Financial • Generate weekly and by period travel
• Super Users Accounting planning and expense reports
• IT Business Analyst • Explain the Travel Management CONTENT

• Transactional End Users processes • ERP270 – Travel Overview

PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED • Understand HR master data required • ERP271 – Travel Management
ERP930 – Role Based Training – Financial for travel management SOFTWARE
Processes I • Explain the trip request procedure ECC 5.0
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None • Create and approve trip request NOTES

• Describe the Travel Manager This course is part of the ‘Financial

• Explain Travel Planning Processes’ role based training series.

ERP934 · Asset Manager I

DURATION 3 hours PRICE € 350 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP GOALS CONTENT

• Asset Manager This course will prepare you to: • ERP259 – Asset Accounting Overview
• Functional Project Team Members • Describe the main functions of Asset • ERP260 – Asset Accounting Master Data
• Super Users Accounting SOFTWARE

• IT Business Analyst • Explain the functions of Asset ECC 5.0

• Transactional End Users accounting NOTES

PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED • Create and maintain Asset master data This course is part of the ‘Financial
ERP930 – Role Based Training – Financial • Explain acquisition from purchase with Processes’ role based training series.
Processes I vendor
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None • Describe Asset Explorer

ERP935 · Asset Manager II

DURATION 5 hours PRICE € 550 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP GOALS • Understand basic reporting

• Asset Manager This course will prepare you to: functionalities for Asset Accounting
• Functional Project Team Members • Explain Asset Accounting • Simulate and recalculate depreciation
• Super Users • Create and maintain asset under • Perform the Asset Accounting closing
• IT Business Analyst construction activities
• Transactional End Users • Distribute and settle asset under CONTENT

PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED construction • ERP261 – Asset Accounting Details

• ERP930 – Role Based Training – • Understand the types of support • ERP262 – Asset Accounting Closing
Financial Processes I provided for blocking, deleting and SOFTWARE

• ERP934 – Asset Manager I retiring an asset ECC 5.0

PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None • Explain the Depreciation process NOTES
• Utilize Asset Explorer This course is part of the ‘Financial
• Understand inter-company and within Processes’ role based training series.
company asset transfer

www.sap.nl/education 41
SAP Education Online
Role Based Training – Financial Processes
ERP936 · Accounts Receivable Clerk II
DURATION 8 hours PRICE € 550 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• Accounts Receivable Clerk
• Functional Project Team Members
• Super Users
• IT Business Analyst
• Transactional End Users
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• ERP930 – Role Based Training –
Financial Processes I
• ERP932 – A/R Clerk I & A/P Clerk I
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None
ERP937 · Accounts Payable Clerk II
DURATION 6 hours PRICE € 550 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• Accounts Payable Clerk
• Functional Project Team Members
• Super Users
• IT Business Analyst
• Transactional End Users
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• ERP930 – Role Based Training –
Financial Processes I
• ERP932 – A/R Clerk I & A/P Clerk I
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
This course will prepare you to:
• Explain the payment process
functionality
42
GOALS
This course will prepare you to:
• Understand the sales order, delivery and
billing process
• Execute the billing process
• Understand how to process a complaint
• Create and maintain customer master
data
• Display customer balances
• Identify the invoice management
functionalities
• Create invoices and credit memos
• Post incoming payments
• Understand the functions of check
processing
• Process vendor invoices, credit memos,
down payments and recurring
documents
• Calculate interest on arrears
• Issue output
• Explain check register and check lots
• Cancel payments
• Void and reprint checks
• Explain cash management including;
manual and electronic bank statement,
financial planning and internal analysis
• Understand the difference between
customer correspondence and internal
• Understand the difference between
customer correspondence and internal
analysis
• Issue customer correspondence
CONTENT
• ERP253 – Billing Process
• ERP 254 – Accounts Receivable
SOFTWARE
ECC 5.0
NOTES
This course is part of the ‘Financial
Processes’ role based training series.
analysis
• Import electronic bank statement
• Process manual bank statement
• Explain cash receipts and cash payments
• Issue output
CONTENT
• ERP256 – Accounts Payable
• ERP257 – Cash Management
SOFTWARE
ECC 5.0
NOTES
This course is part of the ‘Financial
Processes’ role based training series.
SAP Education Online
Role Based Training – Netweaver Functionality

SAP125
SAP Navigation 2005

2 hours

NW100 NW200 NW300 NW310

SAP Web Application SAP Web Application SAP Web Application SAP Web Application
Server Overview Server User Configuration Server Basic System Server System
Maintenance Maintenance II

4 hours 2 hours 2 hours 2 hours

NW400 NW500 NW600 NW900

SAP Web Application SAP Web Application SAP Web Application SAP Web Application
Server Development Server Database Server Development Server User Authorization
Overview Interaction Analysis and Tools Administration

4 hours 2 hours 2 hours 2 hours

NW100 · SAP Web Application Server Overview

DURATION 4 hours PRICE € 350 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP the SAP system configuration types. transaction and Database transaction.
• System Administrators • Know the main characteristics of the • Define the locks in the SAP system.
• ABAP Programmers ABAP and Java runtime environments. Define the asynchronous update
• Business Integration Specialists • List the system processes (work concept.
• Security Administrators processes) and services of each instance. CONTENT

PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
SAP125 – SAP Navigation
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
NW001 Technology Solutions Powered by
SAP NetWeaver
GOALS
• Explain the SAP Web Application Server
architecture. The SAP Web AS is the
central component of the SAP
NetWeaver’s application platform.
• Define the client/server concepts and
• Describe the instance in the ABAP and
Java environments.
• Describe the processing of user requests.
• Describe each component of the work
process.
• Present the background processing,
schedule and monitor jobs.
• Describe the query flow using the
database interface (Open SQL).
• Define the SAP transaction concept and
know the differences between a SAP
• Principal Architecture of the SAP Web
Application Server: Client and Server
• Principal Architecture of the SAP Web
Application Server: The Instance
• Processing ABAP Applications
• Communication with the Database
• The SAP Transaction
• Lock Management in SAP Systems
• Update Processing

NW200 · SAP Web Application Server User Configuration

DURATION 2 hours PRICE € 150 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP GOALS • Configure and use the online

• System Administrators • Configure SAP Logon, describe the documentation in the SAP system.
• Security Administrators logon process and the use of logon CONTENT

PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED groups. • Configuring SAP Logon

• SAP125 – SAP Navigation • Learn how to use the profile parameters
• NW100 SAP Application Server and operation modes to configure the
Overview SAP system.
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED • Find the profile files in the Windows
• NW001 Technology Solutions Powered operating system.
by SAP NetWeaver • Describe the RZ10 transaction for
maintaining the system profiles.
• How the System Evaluates its
Parameters
• How to Set up System Parameters
• Configuring the Online
Documentation

www.sap.nl/education 43
SAP Education Online
Role Based Training – Netweaver Functionality
NW300 · SAP Web Application Server Basic System Maintenance
DURATION 2 hours PRICE € 150 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
System Administrators
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAP125 – SAP Navigation
• NW100 SAP Application Server
Overview
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• NW001 Technology Solutions Powered
by SAP NetWeaver
NW310 · SAP Web Application Server System Maintenance II
DURATION 2 hours PRICE € 150 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
System Administrators
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAP125 – SAP Navigation
• NW100 SAP Application Server
Overview
• NW300 SAP Web Application Server
• Basic System Maintenance
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
NW001 Technology Solutions Powered by
SAP NetWeaver
44
GOALS
• List the main analysis transactions in the
SAP system.
• Start and stop the SAP system and
analyze logs and traces. Describe the
initialization process steps done
with Microsoft Management Console in
the Windows operating system.
• Analyze the log and trace files that were
generated during the system
initialization.
• Use of several tools to stop a SAP
instance
GOALS
• Adjust the work processes’ types and
distribution using the operation modes.
Describe the SAP Library.
• Learn the remote connection’s
functions and configuration.
• Describe the RFC interface, configure
and test RFC connections using the
SM59 transaction.
• Introduce the software logistics
concepts and manage transport.
• Describe the structure of a Workbench
• List the procedures for the System SAP
start and stop in the UNIX, OS/400 and
OS/390 operating systems.
CONTENT
• System Start: Process
• System Start: Logs
• Analysis Transactions
• System Shutdown: How and Why?
• Starting and Stopping other Operating
Systems
and Customizing change requests.
• Describe the transports in the Three-
System Landscape.
• Manually import change requests using
the STMS transaction.
• Verify the transports using the
Transport Organizer.
CONTENT
• Setting up Operation Modes
• RFC Fundamentals and Types
• Setting up RFC Connections
• Performing and Checking Transports
SAP Education Online
Role Based Training – Netweaver Functionality
NW400 · SAP Web Application Server Development Overview
DURATION 4 hours PRICE € 350 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
ABAP Programmers
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAP125 – SAP Navigation
• NW100 SAP Application Server
Overview
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• NW001 Technology Solutions Powered
by SAP NetWeaver
GOALS
• Explain the main differences between
ABAP and Java development strategies.
• Define the data structure in the ABAP
environment.
• Define Three-System Landscape.
• Define transport: export and import.
• Define the ABAP Language. Define the
ABAP Workbench and list its main tools.
NW500 · SAP Web Application Server Database Interaction
DURATION 2 hours PRICE € 150 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
System Administrators
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAP125 – SAP Navigation
• NW100 SAP Application Server
Overview
• NW300 SAP Web Application Server
• Basic System Maintenance
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• NW001 Technology Solutions Powered
by SAP NetWeaver
• Describe the ABAP reports creation
process using the ABAP Editor; describe
the Internet Communication Manager
(ICM) in the Business Server Pages
(BSP).
• Describe the ABAP Dictionary and the
object types.
• Identify the Java programming language
characteristics.
• Describe some functions of the SAP
NetWeaver Developer Studio.
• Describe the targets of the SAP
NetWeaver Java Development
Infrastructure (JDI).
• Introduce the methods to connect a
SAP system to other systems and
optimize the processes in a SAP system.
• Define Cross-System Business Processes.
GOALS
• Find the log files of the following
databases: SAP DB/Max DB, MS SQL
Server, Oracle, DB2 (Universal
Database), Informix and DB2 (OS/390).
• Access basic data about relational
database’s architecture and functions;
introduce the tool used to database
administration activities.
• Learn how a Database Management
System (DBMS) works. Define backup
of data and log data.
• Explain ALE fundamentals.
• Define the interface technologies that
are used by the SAP system. Explain the
meaning and use of business objects and
its BAPIs. Implement a RFC connection
and execute a remote call.
• Define Web Service.
CONTENT
• Data Structure and Transports between
SAP Systems
• The ABAP Language
• The ABAP Dictionary
• Introduction to the SAP NetWeaver Java
Development Infrastructure
• Cross-System Business processes
• Remote Function Calls and BAPIs
• Web Services
• Explain some basic scenarios of database
data recovery.
• Schedule activities to be done in the
database and verify the result of the
activity using the DB13 – Planning
Calendar transaction.
CONTENT
• Database Logs
• Architecture of Database Systems
• Backing up the Database Contents
• Overview: Monitoring the Database
www.sap.nl/education 45
SAP Education Online
Role Based Training – Netweaver Functionality
NW600 · SAP Web Application Server Development Analysis and Tools
DURATION 2 hours PRICE € 150 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
Business Integration Specialists
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAP125 – SAP Navigation
• NW100 SAP Application Server
Overview
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• NW001 Technology Solutions Powered
by SAP NetWeaver
GOALS
• Describe the SAP Business Workflow.
• Describe functionalities of the SAP
Business Workflow.
• Present the most used tools for the
System Administration task.
• List the main analysis transactions of the
SAP system. Describe an overview of the
Computing Center Management
System (CCMS) monitors. Define and
list some Solution Manager services.
Describe the main services of the SAP
Service Marketplace.
NW900 · SAP Web Application Server User Authorization Administration
DURATION 2 hours PRICE € 150 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• System Administrators
• Security Administrators
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAP125 – SAP Navigation
• NW100 SAP Application Server
Overview
• NW200 SAP Web Application Server
User Configuration
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• NW001 Technology Solutions Powered
by SAP NetWeaver
GOALS
• Understand the authorization test done
for every program execution in the SAP
system; define users, roles and profiles.
• Define User Master Record,
Authorization and Roles.
• Describe the SU01 – User Maintenance
46
• Present the main functions of the SAP
Developer Network.
• Introduce the SAP NetWeaver concept
and present details of its components.
• Explain the current challenges in the IT
Scenario.
• Explain the SAP NetWeaver integrated
system infrastructure.
• Define the main functions of the SAP
Enterprise Portal.
• Define the main functions of the SAP
Mobile Infrastructure. Define OLTP and
OLAP.
• Describe the components and
architecture of the SAP Business
Warehouse.
• Describe the components of the Process
Integraton.
• List the SAP XI services and its main
components.
• Define Enterprise Services Architecture
(ESA).
transaction.
• Define Authorization Objects
(its elements and structure).
• Describe how the SAP system does the
authorization test.
• Perform the Role and Profile
Maintenance using the PFCG
transaction.
• Assign roles to users and compare the
User Master Record.
• Present the necessary configurations for
authorizations. Obtain data about users
and his/her authorizations.
• Describe the system parameters for user
logon.
• Describe the rules for passwords in the
SAP system.
• Verify the user’s information system
using the SUIM transaction.
• Describe the SAP ERP software
evolution up to SAP ERP 2004.
• Define Client/Server Architecture,
Enterprise Services Architecture and
Web Services.
• List the SAP’s plan for the Enterprise
Services Architecture until 2007.
CONTENT
• SAP Business Workflow
• Analysis Transactions
• Introduction to Solution Manager
• SAP Service Marketplace and SAP
Developer Network
• SAP NetWeaver – Overview and People
Integration
• SAP NetWeaver – Information
Integration
• SAP NetWeaver – Process Integration
• The way to Enterprise Services
Architecture
• Use the available tools in the SAP system
for authorization test.
• Introduce the available resources for
central user administration (CUA).
• Describe the CUA and the data
exchange between Directory Servers and
the SAP system.
CONTENT
• User Administration Concepts
• Authorizations Concept
• Login parameters and Information
System
• Central User Administration and
Directory Server
SAP Education Online
Role Based Training

Focus on business content

relevant to
the learner’s job and role

SAP125 NW100 NW200

SAP Navigation 2005
System SAP Web Application SAP Web Application
Administrator Server Overview Server User Configuration

2 hours 4 hours 2 hours

NW300 NW310
SAP Web Application SAP Web Application
Server Basic System Server System
Maintenance Maintenance II

2 hours 2 hours

NW500 NW900
SAP Web Application SAP Web Application
Server Database Server User Authorization
Interaction Administration

2 hours 2 hours

NW100 NW400
ABAP
SAP Web Application SAP Web Application
Programmer Server Overview Server Development
Overview

4 hours 4 hours

NW100 NW600
Business SAP Web Application SAP Web Application
Integration Server Overview Server Development
Analysis and Tools
Specialist
4 hours 2 hours

NW100 NW200 NW900

Security SAP Web Application SAP Web Application SAP Web Application
Server Overview Server User Configuration Server User Authorization
Administrator Administration
2 hours
4 hours 2 hours

Cursusdetailgegevens kunt u vinden via de index op pagina 533

www.sap.nl/education 47
SAP Solution Overview
E-learning Suite

BW001 NW
Business Intelligence
Overview (SAPBI)

5 hours

SAP110 SAP125 SAP130 CRM001 CRM ERP020 ERP

Learning Advisor SAP Navigation 2005 Business Solutions Empower Sales, Services, Management Empowered
powered by SAP and Marketing with SAP by SAP ERP Financials
CRM Solution

30 mins 2 hours 2 hours 6 hours 2 hours

ERP001 ERP ERP030 ERP

Management Empowered Management Empowered
by SAP ERP by SAP ERP Human Capital
Management

4 hours 2 hours

NW001 NW ERP040 ERP

Technology Solutions Management Empowered
Powered by by SAP ERP Logistics and
SAP NetWeaver Operations

8 hours 4 hours

BW001 · Business Intelligence: Overview (SAPBI)

DURATION 5 hours PRICE € 550 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP GOALS repository

Managers, project team managers, and
project team members who would like an
overview of SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence.
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
This course will prepare you to:
Participants will gain an overview of the
functions and possible use Business
Intelligence capabilities in SAP NetWeaver.
CONTENT
• Enterprise Data Warehousing
• Enterprise Reporting, Query & Analysis
• Business Planning and Analytical
Services
SOFTWARE

General knowledge of analysis and • Integration of Business Intelligence • SAP NetWeaver 2004s
reporting methods. capabilities in SAP NetWeaver • SAP Business Information Warehouse
• Architecture and functions of BI 7.0
• BI business content and BI metadata

SAP125 · SAP Navigation 2005

DURATION 2 hours PRICE € 60 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP PREREQUISITES CONTENT

• Beginner users There are no required prerequisites for The SAP Navigation 2005 course is
• Project team members taking this course; however, it is designed to familiarize learners with key
• Project leaders recommended that learners have a basic terms and how to navigate within the SAP
• Support personnel knowledge of Windows. system. You will be introduced to the key
• SAP consultants GOALS areas of SAP screens, fields, and features.
• Technical consultants This course will prepare you to: You will also be introduced to ways in
• Sales • familiarize with key terms which you can obtain additional help,
• Super users • navigate within the SAP system. modify and customize the look of your
• End users SAP system, as well as apply more
advanced skills.
SOFTWARE
SAP ERP ECC 6.0

48
SAP Solution Overview
E-learning Suite
SAP110 · Learning Advisor
DURATION 30 min days PRICE € 60 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
Anyone taking an E-learning course from
SAP
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
This course will prepare you to:
Take an SAP E-learning product
SAP130 · Business Solutions Powered by SAP
DURATION 2 hours PRICE € 60 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• People for whom SAP is brand new
• People interested in SAP
• Project team members
• End users
• Consultants interested in
understanding SAP processes
• Power Users
• Executives
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAP E-learning Advisor
• SAP Basic Navigation Features
CONTENT
• Key components of an E-learning
product
- Structure and Navigation
- Example Content Area
- Example Animation
- Example simple & complex interaction
- Example exercises & practice via
simulation tools
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• Working knowledge of Microsoft office
and internet browsers
• Knowledge of one or more specific
business processes in an enterprise
GOALS
• This course will prepare you to: Identify
how your organization can use SAP to
enable optimization of one or more
business processes
• Explain the benefits and characteristics
of an optimized business.
• Describe how SAP enables the
optimization of business processes.
• Best Practices for taking an E-learning
product
- Amount of time a learner needs to
complete
- Recommended logistics and
demographics of Learning environment
CONTENT
• Benefits of optimizing a business
• How SAP enables business optimization
• SAP Business Suite
• Achieving efficient business processes
• Optimizing Customer Relationship
Management (CRM) business processes
• Benefits to customers of optimization
• Achieving efficiency through integrated
financials
• Achieving efficiency through enterprise
performance management
www.sap.nl/education 49
SAP Solution Overview
E-learning Suite
CRM001 · Empower Sales, Services, and Marketing with SAP CRM Solution
DURATION 6 hours PRICE € 550 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• All customer focused employees such
as:
- Sales Managers/Services Managers
- Account Managers/Sales
Representatives
- Interaction Center Agents
- Field Service Representatives
• Employees implementing SAP CRM
with prior knowledge of a CRM
solution
• People interested in getting insight of
using SAP´s Customer Relationship
Management Solution to empower
Sales, Service, and Marketing.
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
Knowledge of CRM processes
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• First Experience in SAP Navigation –
(covered i.e. by E-learning SAP120 SAP
Navigation)
ERP001 · Management Empowered by SAP ERP
DURATION 4 hours PRICE € 350 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• Executives and Managers
• Business & Strategy Consultants
• People interested in SAP ERP
• Client Cross Functional Users
• Project Team Members
• Super Users
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• First Experience in SAP Navigation –
(covered i.e. by E-learning SAP125 SAP
Navigation 2005)
• Overview of SAP Business Solutions –
(covered i.e. by E-learning SAP130
Solutions Powered by SAP or classroom
course SAP01 SAP Overview)
GOALS
This course will prepare you to:
• Explain how SAP ERP streamlines and
accelerates the business processes of a
typical organization.
50
• Overview of SAP Business Solutions –
(covered i.e. by E-learning SAP130
Business Solutions Powered by SAP)
GOALS
This course will prepare you to:
• Describe marketing, sales, service, and
analytics scenarios in SAP CRM
(Customer Relationship Management)
solution.
• Leverage integrated marketing, sales,
service, and analytics capabilities of SAP
CRM to effectively perform your
activities as customer focused employee.
CONTENT
• SAP CRM – overview, positioning, and
components.
• Benefits of using SAP CRM from
perspective of single roles in Sales,
Service, Marketing and Analytics.
• Features and integration aspects in SAP
CRM illustrated by exemplary business
• Provide an overview of SAP ERP and its
components relevant for Managers,
Business and Strategy Consultants.
• Explain how SAP ERP, powered by SAP
NetWeaver, enables integration of
various business processes and
solutions.
• Explain how SAP ERP assists an
organization in making informed
business decisions with accurate data
reporting and analytics.
• Explain how SAP BW Business Planning
and Simulation (SAP BW-BPS) assists in
strategic and operational planning and
decision making.
• Give examples of how SAP ERP
Operations increases employee
productivity.
CONTENT
• SAP ERP – Overview, positioning and
components
processes throughout Marketing, Sales,
and Service including Analytics.
• Key processes and capabilities in
- Marketing (campaign management,
telemarketing),
- Sales (activity, opportunity, and sales
order management),
- Service (contract, complaint, and
service order management), and
- Analytics (planning, performance
analyses).
SOFTWARE
• CRM 4.0
• MSA 4.0
• EP 6.0
• BW 3.5
• SAP ERP
• SAP ERP powered by SAP NetWeaver
and its components.
• Highlighted Analytics & Reporting
functionality in BW and SEM for
improved business decision making and
control.
• Strategic Business Planning in BW-BPS
and Planning Integration aspects with
other components.
• Highlight how SAP ERP helps to
increase the user productivity by
decreasing efforts through automation,
centralization and standardization. This
will be explained with several examples
like e-Procurement, RFID and Mobile
Sales.
SOFTWARE
SAP ERP
SAP Solution Overview
E-learning Suite
ERP020 · Management Empowered by SAP ERP Financials
DURATION 2 hours PRICE € 150 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• Executives and Managers
• Business and Strategy Consultants
• People interested in overview of SAP
ERP Financials
• Client Cross Functional Users
• Project Team Members
• Super Users
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• General knowledge of business
processes
• A basic understanding of the relevance
of financials in business Knowledge of
the significance of Enterprise Resource
Planning for optimizing business
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• First Experience in SAP Navigation –
(covered i.e. by E-learning SAP125 SAP
Navigation 2005)
• Overview of SAP Business Solutions –
(covered i.e. by E-learning SAP130
Solutions Powered by SAP or classroom
course SAP01 SAP Overview)
ERP030 · Management Empowered by SAP ERP Human Capital Management
DURATION 2 hours PRICE € 150 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• Executives and Managers
• Business and Strategy Consultants
• People interested in overview of SAP
ERP Human Capital Management
• Client Cross Functional Users
• Project Team Members
• Super Users
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
Basic understanding of Human Resources
Business Processes
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• First Experience in SAP Navigation –
(covered i.e. by E-learning (SAP125 SAP
Navigation 2005)
• Overview of SAP ERP – (covered i.e. by
E-learning (ERP001 Management
Empowered by SAP ERP)
• Overview of SAP ERP – (covered i.e. by
E-learning ERP001 Management
Empowered by SAP ERP)
GOALS
This course will prepare you to:
• Identify how SAP ERP Financials
addresses the processes involved in
running business and explain how it
supports business optimization and
effective management decisions
• Understand features, which are
interesting for every Manager, Decision
Makers and Business Consultants, who
has integration points to Financials
CONTENT
• Financials Overview
• Financials impact during typical
processes like
- Procure to Pay
- Plan to Product
- Order to cash
• Impacts on New General Ledger
Functionality
GOALS
This course will prepare you to:
• Identify how critical management
business challenges facing today’s
Business Manager are addressed and
supported by SAP ERP Human Capital
Management.
• Identify the capabilities, functions and
related software components that
constitute the SAP ERP HCM solution
• Apply SAP ERP HCM to typical Human
Capital Resources business processes
needs
• Financial Supply Chain Management
• Corporate Governance
SOFTWARE
SAP ERP
NOTES
Please be aware that this E-learning has
some overlaps to the classroom course
SAPFIN. The goal of this E-learning is not
to learn how to configure the system and
special transactions, but rather to give you
an integrated understanding of SAP ERP
Financials functionality relevant for every
Business Manager with touch points to
some Financial business aspects.
CONTENT
• Employee and Manager Self-Services
• Organizational Units
• Personnel List
• Profile Match
• Analytics/Balanced Scorecard
• Appraisals
• Training Plan
• Personnel Development Plan
• Compensation/Salary/Promotion
• Recruitment and e-Recruiting
SOFTWARE
• SAP ERP
• SEM 4.0
• BW 3.5
• EP 6.0
• E-REC 3.0
www.sap.nl/education 51
SAP Solution Overview
E-learning Suite
ERP040 · Management Empowered by SAP ERP Logistics and Operations
DURATION 4 hours PRICE € 350 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• Executives and Managers
• Business Consultants
• People interested in overview of SAP
ERP
• Client Cross Functional Users
• Project Team Members
• Super Users
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• First Experience in SAP Navigation –
(covered i.e. by E-learning SAP125 SAP
Navigation 2005)
• Overview of SAP Business Solutions –
(covered i.e. by E-learning SAP130
Solutions Powered by SAP)
• Overview of SAP ERP – (covered i.e. by
E-learning ERP001 Management
Empowered by SAP ERP)
GOALS
This course will prepare you to:
• Describe the key benefits and
capabilities of logistics and operations
management in SAP ERP.
• Provide an overview of all logistical
52
functions in SAP ERP and the key
capabilities delivered with SAP ERP.
• Explain how operational efficiencies can
be improved through the use of
worklists and interactive forms with
SAP ERP.
• Describe the tools available in SAP ERP
to maintain master data consistency
throughout an organization.
• Summarize the capabilities of SAP ERP
that help address customer satisfaction
and gain efficiency in the product
development process.
• Describe the additional capabilities that
could be used to make the procurement
processes in SAP ERP more efficient.
• Give examples of the analytics that are
available in SAP ERP to manage daily
operations and strategic evaluations.
CONTENT
• Key processes supported with ERP
Operations:
- Procurement
- Inventory and Warehouse Management
- Outbound and Inbound Logistics
- Transportation and Foreign Trade
- Production Planning and
Manufacturing Execution
- Enterprise Asset Management
- Lifecycle Data Management
- Sales Order Management
- After Market Sales and Service
(Customer Service)
• Key capabilities delivered with ERP:
- Plant Manager worklist
- Purchasing agent worklist
- Master Data Management (MDM)
- Easy Document Management (DMS)
- Recipe Management
- RFID
- cProject Suite
- Self service procurement
- Interactive request forms
SOFTWARE
• SAP ERP
• MDM 3.0
• CPROJECT 3.1
SAP Solution Overview
E-learning Suite
NW001 · Technology Solutions Powered by SAP NetWeaver
DURATION 8 hours PRICE € 550 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• People interested in SAP Technology
• Technical Implementation Team
members including:
- System Administrators
- Software Developers
- System Integration Technologists
- Business Warehousing Experts
• Web Technologists
- Project Team Members
- Consultants
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• First Experience in SAP Navigation –
(covered i.e. by E-learning SAP125 SAP
Navigation 2005)
• Overview of SAP Business Solutions –
(covered i.e. by E-learning SAP130
Business Solutions Powered by SAP)
GOALS
• Identify and pursue opportunities to
use SAP NetWeaver integration tools
and solutions to improve the way your
business implements key processes.
• Provide a conceptual overview of the
NetWeaver stack and the included
components.
CONTENT
• Introduction to NetWeaver
• Unveiling the Application Platform
- Java: Developing a Web Application
- ABAP: Using Business Logic
- Uncovering the Core Architecture
- Integrating Business Processes
- Accessing Exchange Infrastructure
- Using Integration Builder
- Managing Business Processes
• Leveraging Business Information
- Introducing Data Warehousing
- Collecting and Consolidating Data
- Decision-Making and Analysis
- Managing Intellectual Assets
- Master Data Management
• Streamlining Access to Information and
Tools
- Using the Portal to Simplify Access
- Configuring the Portal Platform
- Configuring Portal Content
- Configuring Portal Navigation
- Assigning Portal Content to Users
through Roles
- Leveraging Expertise through
Collaboration
• Making Business Processes Mobile
- Embracing the Future
- Managing Technology Life Cycle
- Extending Functionality
- Combining Technologies
SOFTWARE
• BW 3.5
• EP 6.0
• WEB AS 6.40
• XI 3.0
• MI 2.5
NOTES
• The E-learning includes several demos
using NetWeaver 2004 components (BW
3.5, EP 6.0 on Web AS 6.40, XI 3.0, etc.).
• This E-learning contains examples of
common technology demands and how
SAP NetWeaver meets those demands.
The goal is not to learn how to use all
the aspects of the NetWeaver stack, but
rather to give you an integrated
understanding of NetWeaver
functionality and how all the
component work together to provide an
integrated business solution to
technology demands.
www.sap.nl/education 53
Solution Architect & Integration Training

TERP10 ERP Solution Consultant

SAP ERP Integrated
Business Processes
Based on SAP ERP
10 days
SAP ERP – Fundamentals
& Integration of Business
Processes
C_TERP10_05

TERP1E ERP TERP11 ERP TERP12 ERP

Integration of Business SAP ERP: Introduction into SAP ERP: Introduction into
Processes in SAP ERP NW BI (BW 3.5) Strategic Enterprise Mgmt
(SEM 4.0)

54 hours 1,5 hours 1 hour

TERP21 ERP TERP22 ERP

SAP ERP: Introduction into SAP ERP: Introduction into
Processes in Financial Processes in Management
Accounting Accounting/CO
TERP01 ERP 6 hours 6 hours
SAP ERP: Introduction

TERP31 ERP

1,5 hours SAP ERP: Introduction into

Processes in Human
Capital Management
TERP02 ERP 5 hours
SAP ERP: Introduction into
SAP NetWeaver
TERP41 ERP TERP42 ERP

1 hour SAP ERP: Introduction into SAP ERP: Introduction into

Processes in Procurement Processes in Inventory
Management

6 hours 3 hours

TERP51 ERP TERP52 ERP TERP53 ERP TERP54 ERP

SAP ERP: Introduction into SAP ERP: Introduction into Enterprise Asset Mgmt/ SAP ERP: Introduction into
Processes in Material Processes in Customer Service Processes in Lifecycle
Planning Manufacturing Execution Organizational Structures Data Management

3 hours 3 hours 5 hours 2 hours

TERP61 ERP TERP71 ERP

SAP ERP: Introduction into SAP ERP: Introduction into
Processes in Sales Order Processes in Program and
Management Project Management

6 hours 4 hours

TERP01 · SAP ERP: Introduction

DURATION 1,5 hours PRICE € 150 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None NOTES

Solution architects, project managers,
team members and solution consultants
who want to gain a broad fundamental
understanding of the processes, business
interrelations, and integration of the
individual business areas within the SAP
ERP solution.
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• Knowledge of business processes in
Enterprise Planning and Management.
• Proficiency in navigation within the SAP
systems
GOALS
• Understand the fundamental concepts
of Organizational Levels, Master Data,
Transaction Data and Reports.
CONTENT
• Positioning of R/3 Enterprise toward
SAP ERP.
• SAP ERP Organizational Level.
• Function of SAP ERP Master Data.
• ERP reporting solutions including BW.
SOFTWARE
• SAP ERP 6.0
This course is designed for participants
who need a broad and integrative
understanding of mapping business
processes within SAP ERP. The course
therefore aims to describe mainly the
integration and not the Customizing of
individual areas. Customizing is examined
in the specific courses for the individual
areas.

54
Solution Architect & Integration Training
TERP10 · SAP ERP Integrated Business Processes Based on SAP ERP
DURATION 10 days PRICE € 5900 STARTING DATES 5-jan-09
TARGET GROUP
Solution architects, project managers,
project team members, and solution
consultants who want to gain a broad
overview of the core business processes,
business interrelations and integration of
the individual business applications within
the SAP ERP solution
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• Business knowledge of intercompany
business processes in enterprise
planning and management
• Knowledge of navigation within SAP
systems
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
Basic Knowledge in at least one SAP
application area is an advantage
GOALS
This course will prepare you to:
• Work together with the responsible
consultants and project team members
in the individual ERP areas
• Explain how the fundamental
integrative business processes interact
within SAP ERP in the areas of
Procurement, Manufacturing, Planning,
Project Management, Sales, Customer
Service, Enterprise Asset Management,
Financials, Human Capital
Management, and Analytics
TERP11 · SAP ERP: Introduction into NW BI (BW 3.5)
DURATION 1,5 hours PRICE € 150 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
Solution architects, project managers,
team members and solution consultants
who want to gain a broad fundamental
understanding of the processes, business
interrelations, and integration of the
individual business areas within the SAP
ERP solution.
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• Knowledge of business processes in
Enterprise Planning and Management.
• Proficiency in navigation within the SAP
systems
CONTENT
• Overview of enterprise resource
planning (ERP)
• SAP NetWeaver as the technical
platform of SAP ERP
• Overview of integrated logistics
scenarios for sales order processing,
material planning and manufacturing
execution, external procurement
process, inventory and warehouse
management, customer service
processing and enterprise asset
management, and project management.
• Integration of Financial Accounting
with the logistics scenarios, including
general ledger accounting, accounts
payable, accounts receivable, and asset
accounting.
• Controlling components of cost center
accounting, internal orders, product
cost accounting, profit center
accounting, profitability analysis, and
activity based costing.
• Supporting Product Lifecycle
Management business processes using
PLM components
• Supporting business processes using
integrated Human Capital Management
• Quick and efficient use of information
using analytical components such as
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
The aim of this course is to provide an
understanding of how SAP ERP supports
an organization’s need for users to access
and receive reports from one source
through Business intelligence module.
CONTENT
• Concepts and Architecture of Business
Information Warehouse (BW).
• Highlight how BW reporting and
analysis tools support various business
processes.
SAP Business Information Warehouse
(SAP BW) and SAP Strategic Enterprise
Management (SAP SEM) Certification
test
SOFTWARE
• ERP ECC 6.0
• SEM 4.0
• BW 3.5
NOTES
• This course aims to address mainly
integration questions. It does not cover
details or the Customizing of individual
areas. These topics are examined in the
specific courses for the individual areas.
• To ensure that you retain the
knowledge gained in this course and
successfully complete the certification
examination, we recommend that you
consolidate the content in your own
time after the course
• The course also discusses the functions
of the following SAP releases:
- SAP ERP 2005
- SAP ERP 2004
- R/3 Enterprise, BW & SEM
SOFTWARE
• SAP ERP 6.0
• BW 3.5
NOTES
This course is designed for participants
who need a broad and integrative
understanding of mapping business
processes within SAP ERP. The course
therefore aims to describe mainly the
integration and not the Customizing of
individual areas. Customizing is examined
in the specific courses for the individual
areas.
www.sap.nl/education 55
Solution Architect & Integration Training
TERP1E · Integration of Business Processes in SAP ERP
DURATION 54 hours PRICE € 3200 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
Solution architects, project managers,
project team members, and solution
consultants who want to gain a broad
overview of the core business processes,
business interrelations and integration of
the individual business applications within
the SAP ERP solution
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• Business knowledge of intercompany
business processes in enterprise
planning and management
• Knowledge of navigation within SAP
systems
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• Basic Knowledge in at least one SAP
application area is an advantage
GOALS
• Work together with the responsible
consultants and project team members
in the individual ERP areas
• Explain how the fundamental
integrative business processes interact
within SAP ERP in the areas of
Procurement, Manufacturing, Planning,
Project Management, Sales, Customer
Service, Enterprise Asset Management,
Financials, Human Capital
Management, and Analytics
TERP02 · SAP ERP: Introduction into SAP NetWeaver
DURATION 1 hour PRICE € 150 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
Solution architects, project managers,
team members and solution consultants
who want to gain a broad fundamental
understanding of the core processes,
business interrelations, and integration of
the individual business application within
the SAP ERP solution.
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• Knowledge of business processes in
Enterprise Management and
• Planning
• Proficiency in navigation within the SAP
System
56
CONTENT
• Overview of enterprise resource
planning (ERP)
• SAP NetWeaver as the technical
platform of SAP ERP
• Overview of integrated logistics
scenarios for sales order processing,
material planning and manufacturing
execution, external procurement
process, inventory and warehouse
management, customer service
processing and enterprise asset
management, and project management.
• Integration of Financial Accounting
with the logistics scenarios, including
general ledger accounting, accounts
payable, accounts receivable, and asset
accounting.
• Controlling components of cost center
accounting, internal orders, product
cost accounting, profit center
accounting, profitability analysis, and
activity based costing.
• Supporting Product Lifecycle
Management business processes using
PLM components
• Supporting business processes using
integrated Human Capital Management
• Quick and efficient use of information
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
Appreciate how SAP Netweaver is a
comprehensive integration and
application platform that works with
existing IT infrastructure enabling and
managing change.
CONTENT
Highlight the components and strategic
advantage of NetWeaver and how
NetWeaver supports the business
processes.
SOFTWARE
• SAP ERP 6.0
using analytical components such as
SAP Business Information Warehouse
(SAP BW) and SAP Strategic Enterprise
Management (SAP SEM) Certification
test
SOFTWARE
• ERP ECC 6.0
• SEM 4.0
• BW 3.5
NOTES
• This course aims to address mainly
integration questions. It does not cover
details or the Customizing of individual
areas. These topics are examined in the
specific courses for the individual areas.
• To ensure that you retain the
knowledge gained in this course and
successfully complete the certification
examination, we recommend that you
consolidate the content in your own
time after the course
• The course also discusses the functions
of the following SAP releases:
- SAP ERP 2005
- SAP ERP 2004
- R/3 Enterprise, BW & SEM
NOTES
This course is designed for participants
who need a broad and integrative
understanding of mapping business
processes within SAP ERP. The course
therefore aims to describe mainly the
integration and not the Customizing of
individual areas. Customizing is examined
in the specific courses for the individual
areas.
Solution Architect & Integration Training
TERP12 · SAP ERP: Introduction into Strategic Enterprise Management (SEM 4.0)
DURATION 1 hour PRICE € 150 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
Solution architects, project managers,
team members, and solution consultants
who want to gain a broad fundamental
understanding of the core processes,
business interrelations, and integration of
the individual business application within
the SAP ERP solution.
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• Knowledge of business processes in
Enterprise Planning and Management.
• Proficiency in navigation within the SAP
systems
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None
TERP21 · SAP ERP: Introduction into Processes in Financial Accounting
DURATION 6 hours PRICE € 550 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
Solution architects, project managers,
team members and solution consultants
who want to gain a broad fundamental
understanding of the core processes,
business interrelations, and integration of
the individual business applications within
the SAP ERP solution.
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• Knowledge of business processes in
Enterprise Planning and Management.
• Proficiency in navigation within the SAP
systems
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
The aim of this course is to provide an
understanding of how SAP ERP supports
an organization’s Financial Accounting
processes and integration of processes
GOALS
The aim of this module is to understand
how to implement SEM conjunction with
ongoing transaction systems and
appreciate its components and
functionality.
CONTENT
Overview of the function and
components of the applications Strategic
Enterprise Management (SEM).
SOFTWARE
• SAP ERP 6.0
• SEM 4.0
related to Material Management,
Production, Sales and Distribution,
Management Accounting and so on with
Financial Accounting. The course will
also introduce the participant to external
reporting through Financial Accounting.
CONTENT
• Tasks in Financial Accounting.
• Overview of Organizational Levels.
• Creation of G/L accounts, execution of
G/L postings, functions of new general
ledger.
• Introduction of vendor master record,
basic process in Materials Management
and the integration with the Financial
Accounting, posting of vendor invoices.
• Highlight how to maintain credit
management data, post a customer
invoice, the customer master record.
NOTES
This course is designed for participants
who need a broad and integrative
understanding of mapping business
processes within SAP ERP. The course
therefore aims to describe mainly the
integration and not the Customizing of
individual areas. Customizing is examined
in the specific courses for the individual
areas.
• Overview of Fixed Asset Accounting.
• Preparation of financial statements.
SOFTWARE
SAP ERP 6.0
NOTES
This course is designed for participants
who need a broad and integrative
understanding of mapping business
processes within SAP ERP. The course
therefore aims to describe mainly the
integration and not the Customizing of
individual areas. Customizing is examined
in the specific courses for the individual
areas.
www.sap.nl/education 57
Solution Architect & Integration Training
TERP22 · SAP ERP: Introduction into Processes in Management Accounting/CO
DURATION 6 hours PRICE € 550 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
Solution architects, project managers,
team members, and solution consultants
who want to gain a broad fundamental
understanding of the core processes,
business interrelations, and integration of
the individual business applications within
the SAP ERP solution.
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• Knowledge of business processes in
Enterprise Planning and Management.
• Proficiency in navigation within the SAP
systems
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
The aim of this course is to provide an
understanding of how SAP ERP supports
an organization’s Management
Accounting activities including Overhead
Cost Controlling, Product Cost
Accounting, Profit Centre Accounting
TERP31 · SAP ERP: Introduction into Processes in Human Capital Management
DURATION 5 hours PRICE € 550 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
Solution architects, project managers,
team members and solution consultants
who want to gain a broad fundamental
understanding of the core processes,
business interrelations, and integration of
the individual business applications within
the SAP ERP solution.
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• Knowledge of business processes in
Enterprise Planning and Management.
• Proficiency in navigation within the SAP
systems
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None
58
and Profitability Analysis of market
segments.
CONTENT
• Comparison of Financial and
Management Accounting and an
overview on the principal components
of Management Accounting and their
purpose.
• Overview on organizational units
involved in Management Accounting
and the relationships between them and
other SAP system organizational units.
• Highlight the master data that are used
in Cost Center Accounting, role of the
cost center standard hierarchy and the
various uses of cost centers, posting
logic, and cost assessment.
• Overview of internal order.
• Various aspects of Profit Center
Accounting
• Introduction to Profitability Analysis –
GOALS
This course aims to introduce the
participant to Personnel & Organizational
Structures, Employee Records
Management, Business Process and
Reporting & Analyse Tools in the Human
Capital Management (HCM) module of
SAP ERP
SOFTWARE
• SAP ERP 6.0
CONTENT
• Organizational Structures (jobs,
positions, persons) in HCM.
• Highlight how to manage employee
records.
its purpose, the master data used, the
flow of data.
• Product Cost Accounting – its
components and overview.
SOFTWARE
• SAP ERP 6.0
NOTES
This course is designed for participants
who need a broad and integrative
understanding of mapping business
processes within SAP ERP. The course
therefore aims to describe mainly the
integration and not the Customizing of
individual areas. Customizing is examined
in the specific courses for the individual
areas.
• Basic business processes of HCM, key
integration points with other SAP ERP
processes, advantages of ESS.
• Overview on Reporting.
NOTES
This course is designed for participants
who need a broad and integrative
understanding of mapping business
processes within SAP ERP. The course
therefore aims to describe mainly the
integration and not the Customizing of
individual areas. Customizing is examined
in the specific courses for the individual
areas.
Solution Architect & Integration Training
TERP41 · SAP ERP: Introduction into Processes in Procurement
DURATION 6 hours PRICE € 550 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
Solution architects, project managers,
team members, and solution consultants
who want to gain a broad fundamental
understanding of the core processes,
business interrelations, and integration of
the individual business applications within
the SAP ERP solution.
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• Knowledge of business processes in
Enterprise Planning and Management.
• Proficiency in navigation within the SAP
systems
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
The aim of this course is to provide an
understanding of how the Procurement
Cycle of an organization can be mapped in
SAP ERP. This would include
TERP42 · SAP ERP: Introduction into Processes in Inventory Management
DURATION 3 hours PRICE € 350 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
Solution architects, project managers,
team member and solution consultants
who want to gain a broad fundamental
understanding of the processes, business
interrelations, and integration of the
individual business areas within the SAP
ERP solution.
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• Knowledge of business processes in
Enterprise Planning and Management.
• Proficiency in navigation within the SAP
systems
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None
identification and linking of various
organization units related to Procurement
Processes, Creation of Master Data and
mapping of the Purchase-to-Pay Cycle and
integration with other SAP ERP processes
and modules. Procurement related
reporting and analysis tolls are also
discussed as part of this course.
CONTENT
• Identification of the Organizational
Levels and Master Data that support the
procurement process.
• Highlight how to perform the
procurement cycle for stock and
consumable materials including
purchase requisitions, purchase orders,
goods receipt, invoice receipt and
vendor payment.
• Transfer posting.
GOALS
The aim of this course is to provide an
understanding of how the Inventory
Management and Logistic Execution
processes of an organization can be
mapped in SAP ERP. This would include
an understanding of various physical
inventory procedures, process of Good
Receipt against a Purchase Order and
subsequent Putaway using Warehouse
Management functionality and process
for stock transfer and transfer postings.
CONTENT
• Difference between stock transfers and
transfer postings.
• Highlight the Warehouse Management
• Reporting and analysis tools used in
procurement.
SOFTWARE
• SAP ERP 6.0
NOTES
This course is designed for participants
who need a broad and integrative
understanding of mapping business
processes within SAP ERP. The course
therefore aims to describe mainly the
integration and not the Customizing of
individual areas. Customizing is examined
in the specific courses for the individual
areas.
functionality involved with posting a
goods receipt against a purchase order.
• Procedures of physical inventory.
SOFTWARE
• SAP ERP 6.0
NOTES
This course is designed for participants
who need a broad and integrative
understanding of mapping business
processes within SAP ERP. The course
therefore aims to describe mainly the
integration and not the Customizing of
individual areas. Customizing is examined
in the specific courses for the individual
areas.
www.sap.nl/education 59
Solution Architect & Integration Training
TERP51 · SAP ERP: Introduction into Processes in Material Planning
DURATION 3 hours PRICE € 350 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
Solution architects, project managers,
team members and solution consultants
who want to gain a broad fundamental
understanding of the core processes,
business interrelations, and integration of
the individual business application within
the SAP ERP solution.
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• Knowledge of business processes in
Enterprise Management and Planning
• Proficiency in navigation within the SAP
System
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
The aim of this course is to provide you
an understanding of the Material
TERP52 · SAP ERP: Introduction into Processes in Manufacturing Execution
DURATION 3 hours PRICE € 350 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
Solution architects, project managers,
team members, and solution consultants
who want to gain a broad fundamental
understanding of the core processes,
business interrelations, and integration of
the individual business applications within
the SAP ERP solution.
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• Knowledge of business processes in
Enterprise Planning and Management.
• Proficiency in navigation within the SAP
systems
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
The aim of this course is to provide an
60
Planning process of an organization can
be mapped in SAP ERP. This would
include identification of various
Organization Levels and Master Data
related to Material Planning Process and
integration with other SAP ERP processes
and modules. The course also aims to
introduce the participant to the difference
between Material Requirements Planning
and Consumption Based Planning.
CONTENT
• Highlight the Organizational Levels and
Master Data used in Material Planning.
• Overview of the importance of planning
strategies on business processes,
difference between Materials
Requirement Planning and
understanding of how the Manufacturing
Processes of an organization can be
mapped in SAP ERP. This would include
identification and linking of various
Organization Units related to
Manufacturing Processes, Creation of
Master Data and mapping of various
manufacturing activities and integration
with other SAP ERP processes and
modules. The course also introduces
participant to Production and Cost
Management related reporting and
analysis tools which help in analyzing
Production Performance.
SOFTWARE
• SAP ERP 6.0
Consumption -based Planning
procedures and integration of Materials
Management and Sales Order
Management.
SOFTWARE
• SAP ERP 6.0
NOTES
This course is designed for participants
who need a broad and integrative
understanding of mapping business
processes within SAP ERP. The course
therefore aims to describe mainly the
integration and not the Customizing of
individual areas. Customizing is examined
in the specific courses for the individual
areas.
CONTENT
• Organizational Levels and Master Data
used in Manufacturing Execution.
• Highlight how Manufacturing
Execution activities are performed.
NOTES
This course is designed for participants
who need a broad and integrative
understanding of mapping business
processes within SAP ERP. The course
therefore aims to describe mainly the
integration and not the Customizing of
individual areas. Customizing is examined
in the specific courses for the individual
areas.
Solution Architect & Integration Training
TERP53 · SAP ERP: Introduction into Processes in Enterprise Asset Mgmnt/Customer Service Organizational Structures
DURATION 5 hours PRICE € 550 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
Solution architects, project managers, and
solution consultants who want to gain a
broad fundamental understanding of the
processes, business interrelations, and
integration of the individual business
areas within the SAP ERP solution.
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• Knowledge of business processes in
Enterprise Planning and Management.
• Proficiency in navigation within the SAP
systems
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
The aim of this course is to provide an
understanding of how Enterprise Asset
Management and Customer Service can
be mapped in SAP ERP and learn to work
with the processes supported in Enterprise
Asset Management including the Creation
TERP54 · SAP ERP: Introduction into Processes in Lifecycle Data Management
DURATION 2 hours PRICE € 150 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
Solution architects, project managers,
team members and solution consultants
who want to gain a broad fundamental
understanding of the core processes,
business interrelations, and integration of
the individual business applications within
the SAP ERP solution.
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• Knowledge of business processes in
Enterprise Planning and Management.
• Proficiency in navigation within the SAP
systems
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None
of Maintenance Notification, the
maintenance order based on the
Notification, Planning and Monitoring
repair activities and cost. You will also
learn how Customer Service Support the
Creation of Service Notification and
Service Orders.
CONTENT
• Various Organizational Levels (General
Organizational Units in Logistics,
Location-based and Planning-Based
Organizational Units) of Enterprise
Asset Management.
• Different types of Technical objects such
as functional locations, pieces of
equipment, serial numbers, and bills of
material in Enterprise Asset
Management.
• Phases of the Corrective Maintenance
Process
GOALS
The aim of this course is to provide an
understanding of how SAP ERP supports
Collaborative Engineering and Product
Development processes through various
Lifecycle Data Management tools.
SOFTWARE
• SAP ERP 6.0
CONTENT
Highlight the document management
system, variant configuration, product
structure browser and engineering
workbench, functions of the classification
system.
• Highlight on how to process reports
using Plant Maintenance Information
System and tools involved in analyzing
maintenance history.
• Phases of Service Order fieldservice
process.
SOFTWARE
• SAP ERP 6.0
NOTES
This course is designed for participants
who need a broad and integrative
understanding of mapping business
processes within SAP ERP. The course
therefore aims to describe mainly the
integration and not the Customizing of
individual areas. Customizing is examined
in the specific courses for the individual
areas.
NOTES
This course is designed for participants
who need a broad and integrative
understanding of mapping business
processes within SAP ERP. The course
therefore aims to describe mainly the
integration and not the Customizing of
individual areas. Customizing is examined
in the specific courses for the individual
areas.
www.sap.nl/education 61
Solution Architect & Integration Training
TERP61 · SAP ERP: Introduction into Processes in Sales Order Management
DURATION 6 hours PRICE € 550 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
Solution architects, project managers,
team members and solution consultants
who want to gain a broad fundamental
understanding of the core processes,
business interrelations, and integration of
the individual business applications within
the SAP ERP solution.
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• Knowledge of business processes in
enterprise planning and management
• Proficiency in navigation within the SAP
Systems
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
The aim of this course is to provide an
understanding of How Order-to- Cash
TERP71 · SAP ERP: Introduction into Processes in Program and Project Management
DURATION 4 hours PRICE € 350 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
Solution architects, project managers,
team members, and solution consultants
who want to gain a broad fundamental
understanding of the core processes,
business interrelations, and integration of
the individual business applications within
the SAP ERP solution.
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• Knowledge of business processes in
Enterprise Planning and Management
• Proficiency in navigation within the SAP
Systems
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
The aim of this is to provide an
understanding on how SAP ERP supports
Project Management. Topics covered
include Master data used in Program and
62
cycle can be mapped in SAP ERP. This
would include identification and linking
of various Organization Units related to
Sales Processes, Creation of Master Data
and mapping of the Order-to-Cash Cycle
and integration with other SAP ERP
processes and modules. Sales cycle related
Reporting and Analysis Tools are also
discussed as part of this course.
CONTENT
• Organizational Levels and Master Data
that are essential for the Sales Order
Management Process.
• Highlight the execution of order to cash
Business process within SAP ERP.
• Reporting and Analysis Tools involved
in Sales Order Management process.
Project Management, the various project
management phases including project
planning, budgeting, project execution
and period-end activities. The course also
aims to provide an understanding of
integration of Program and Project
Management with other SAP ERP
Modules
SOFTWARE
• SAP ERP 6.0
CONTENT
• Highlight networks and activities and
basic functions involved in work
breakdown structures (WBS).
• Overview of project planning.
• Differences between planning and
budgeting and the function of budget
availability control.
• Various aspects of project execution.
SOFTWARE
SAP ERP 6.0
NOTES
This course is designed for participants
who need a broad and integrative
understanding of mapping business
processes within SAP ERP. The course
therefore aims to describe mainly the
integration and not the Customizing of
individual areas. Customizing is examined
in the specific courses for the individual
areas.
• Functions of project period-end closing
and their integration implications and
settling projects.
• Reporting and analysis tools involved in
the project system.
NOTES
This course is designed for participants
who need a broad and integrative
understanding of mapping business
processes within SAP ERP. The course
therefore aims to describe mainly the
integration and not the Customizing of
individual areas. Customizing is examined
in the specific courses for the individual
areas.
Solution Architect & Integration Training

TE2E04 · RunSAP – End-to-End Solution Operations

DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP SOFTWARE - Final handout with core deliverables for

• Application Consultants • SAP Solution Manager 7.0 the process
• Technical Consultants CONTENT NOTES

PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• Familiarity with SAP Implementation
Roadmaps
• Fundamentals of SAP Systems and SAP
application management
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED
• SAP Application user interface
experience (e.g. SAP GUI, SAP
• Enterprise Portal)
• SAP Solution Manager 7.0
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• Understand how to plan and
implement RunSAP projects
• Understand the RunSAP-Methodology
and SAP Standards
• Recognize areas of improvement for
customer support organizations
(including skill improvement)
• Identification of customer limitations
and challenges: Up- skilling and partner
involvement?
• Enabling: How to define a RunSAP
project plan
• Run SAP Overview • This course contains a certification test.
- Goals of RunSAP
- SAP Organizational Model
- RunSAP Methodology
- RunSAP Roadmap
• E2E Standards
- SAP Standards in Detail
- Details – Root Cause Analysis (RCA)
- Details – Change Control Management
(CCM)
- Details – Business Process Operations
(BPO)
- Details – Technical Operations (TO)
• Planning
- RunSAP Adoption and Planning
• Case Study
- Customer case
- Solution Manager scenario (Landscape,
Solution, Projects)
- Overview on all supporting offerings of
SAP (training, consulting, service)
- RunSAP Project planning
- Demonstration of core Solution
Manger E2E functionalities

www.sap.nl/education 63
Super User / End-User Training E-learnings

SAP01 SAP126
SAP Overview SAP Portal Navigation
2005

3 days half hour

SAP110 SAP125 SAP130 SAP200 ERP

Learning Advisor SAP Navigation 2005 Business Solutions Order to Cash
powered by SAP

30 mins 2 hours 2 hours 8 hours

TERP01 ERP SAP600 ERP SAP210 ERP

SAP ERP: Introduction Navigation in Procure to Pay
SAP Report

1,5 hours 2 hours 8 hours

TERP02 ERP SAP620 ERP SAP220 ERP

SAP ERP: Introduction into Analytics & Reporting in Plan to Inventory
SAP NetWeaver Financials

1 hour 2 hours 8 hours

TERP11 ERP SAP620

SAP630 ERP SAP230 ERP
SAP ERP: Introduction into Analytics & Reporting in Plant Maintenance
NW BI (BW 3.5) Financials
Human Capital
Management

1,5 hours 2 hours 8 hours

TERP1E ERP SAP640 ERP SAP240 ERP

Integration of Business Analytics & Reporting HR Admistration Processes
Processes in SAP ERP Sales

54 hours 2 hours 8 hours

SAP650 ERP
Analytics & Reporting in
Procurement

2 hours

SAP126 · SAP Portal Navigation 2005

DURATION 0,5 hours PRICE € 60 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED NOTES

• Beginning Users including: • Basic knowledge of windows • Format for this course is eLearning
• End users • Working knowledge of Microsoft office • This course should only be taking in
• Project leaders and internet browsers conjunction with the standard
• Project team members GOALS Navigation course
• SAP consultants • Understand the basic principals of
• Business executives navigation in a SAP Portal environment
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED CONTENT

• SAP E-learning Advisor • SAP Portal Navigation is a 1/2-hour

• SAP Navigation 2005 course that will prepare learners to
navigate within SAP Enterprise Portals
and familiarizes learners with the portal
screen layout

64
Super User / End-User Training E-learnings
SAP200 · Order to Cash
DURATION 8 hours PRICE € 550 E-LEARNING
• Those new to SAP
- Project team
- End users
- SAP consultants
• Super users (particularly who need to
learn another business process outside
their specialty)
• IT business analysts
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAP E-learning Advisor
• Solutions Powered by SAP
• SAP Basic Navigation Features
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• Basic knowledge of HR functions and
terms
• Working knowledge of Microsoft office
and internet browsers
GOALS
• Make informed business decisions that
are founded on a conceptual
understanding of SAP’s Order to Cash
business solutions
• Bring your SAP Order to Cash product
knowledge to a baseline level that will
enable you to participate effectively in
more detailed courses.
• Identify how a company can use SAP
solutions to support and optimize its
Order to Cash business process.
CONTENT
• Marketing and Campaign Management
• Sales Processing – Customer View
• Sales Processing – How it Works
• Logistics Execution of Customer Sales
• Billing/Invoicing Your Customer
• Addressing Customer Sales Queries
• Customer Payment/Accounts
Receivable
• Sales Management Reports
www.sap.nl/education 65
Super User / End-User Training E-learnings
SAP210 · Procure to Pay
DURATION 8 hours PRICE € 550 E-LEARNING
• Those new to SAP
- Project team
- End users
- SAP consultants
• Super users (particularly who need to
learn another business process outside
their specialty)
• IT business analysts
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAP E-learning Advisor
• Solutions Powered by SAP
• SAP Basic Navigation Features
SAP220 · Plan to Inventory
DURATION 8 hours PRICE € 550 E-LEARNING
• Those new to SAP
- Project team
- End users
- SAP consultants
• Super users (particularly who need to
learn another business process outside
their specialty)
• IT business analysts
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAP E-learning Advisor
• Solutions Powered by SAP
• SAP Basic Navigation Features
SAP230 · Plant Maintenance
DURATION 8 hours PRICE € 550 E-LEARNING
• Those new to SAP
- Project team
- End users
- SAP consultants
• Super users (particularly who need to
learn another business process outside
their specialty)
• IT business analysts
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAP E-learning Advisor
• Solutions Powered by SAP
• SAP Basic Navigation Features
66
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• Basic knowledge of purchasing
functions and terms
• Working knowledge of Microsoft office
and internet browsers
GOALS
• Make informed business decisions that
are founded on a conceptual
understanding of SAP’s purchasing
business solutions
• Bring your SAP purchasing product
knowledge to a baseline level that will
enable you to participate effectively in
more detailed courses.
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• Basic knowledge of planning and
manufacturing functions and terms
• Working knowledge of Microsoft office
and internet browsers
GOALS
• Make informed business decisions that
are founded on a conceptual
understanding of SAP’s Production
Planning (PP) and Advanced Planner &
Optimizer (APO) business solutions
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• Basic knowledge of Maintenance
functions and terms
• Working knowledge of Microsoft office
and internet browsers
GOALS
• Make informed business decisions that
are founded on a conceptual
understanding of SAP’s Plant
Maintenance business solution
• Bring your SAP Plant Maintenance
product knowledge to a baseline level
that will enable you to participate
effectively in more detailed courses.
CONTENT
• Procuring Goods and Services
• Purchase Requisitions
• Request for Quotation
• Purchase Order
• Goods Receipt
• Invoice Processing
• Paying an Invoice
• Bring your SAP PP/APO product
knowledge to a baseline level that will
enable you to participate effectively in
more detailed courses.
CONTENT
• Overview of plan to inventory
• Forecasting and demand planning
• Rough-cut planning
• Detailed material planning
• Production scheduling
• Production order execution
CONTENT
• Plant Maintenance Overview
• Maintenance Requests
• Planning Work Orders
• Executing Work Orders
• Completing Work Orders and
Maintenance Requests
• Analyzing Maintenance Costs
Super User / End-User Training E-learnings
SAP240 · HR Admistration Processes
DURATION 8 hours PRICE € 550 E-LEARNING
• Project team
• End users
• SAP consultants
• Super users (particularly who need to
learn another business process outside
their specialty)
• IT business analysts
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAP E-learning Advisor
• Solutions Powered by SAP
• SAP Basic Navigation Features
SAP600 · Navigation in SAP Report
DURATION 2 hours PRICE € 150 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUPS
Primary
• End Users
• Super Users
Secondary
• Project Team
• Application Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
SAP125
GOALS
This course will allow you to:
SAP620 · Analytics & Reporting in Financials
DURATION 2 hours PRICE € 150 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUPS
• Primary: End Users and Super Users
• Secondary: Project Team and
Application Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
SAP600 Navigation in SAP Reports
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED SAP125
GOALS
This course will allow you to:
• Describe the diverse analytical and
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• Basic knowledge of HR functions and
terms
• Working knowledge of Microsoft office
and internet browsers
GOALS
• Make informed business decisions that
are founded on a conceptual
understanding of SAP’s HCM (Human
Capital Management) business solution
• Gain hands-on experience and
conceptual information on SAP
reporting and analysis solutions.
And will prepare you to:
• Efficiently navigate and use SAP
reporting and analysis tools
CONTENT
• Introduction to SAP reporting and
analysis solutions (SAP ECC, BW, and
SEM) from a non-technical viewpoint
• Navigate various application reports and
analysis in SAP ECC, BW and SEM.
reporting solutions for SAP Financial
• Gain hands-on experience using SAP
Financial Information System, Business
Information Warehouse, and Strategic
Enterprise Management reporting and
analysis tools.
CONTENT
• Introduction to SAP Financial reporting
and analysis solutions
• Examine Financial Information System,
• Bring your SAP HCM product
knowledge to a baseline level that will
enable you to participate effectively in
more detailed courses.
CONTENT
• HR Overview
• Recruiting and Hiring
• Employee Data Maintenance
• Time and Payroll Management
• Learning and Development
• Compensation Management
• Reporting
• Interface to 3rd party reporting and
analysis tools (Crystal & Excel)
• Tips & Tricks to SAP reporting and
analysis
SOFTWARE
SAP ECC 6.0
NOTES
Reports used in this course are based on
Financial, Sales, Human Resources and
Procurement applications; however, the
course emphasizes the SAP reporting and
analysis tools not the application.
Business Information Warehouse and
Strategic Enterprise Management
solution capabilities
• Define, execute and navigate financial
reports using various SAP reporting and
analysis tools
• Review Top 10 financial reports
SOFTWARE SAP ECC 6.0
www.sap.nl/education 67
Super User / End-User Training E-learnings

SAP630 · Analytics & Reporting in Human Capital Management

DURATION 2 hours PRICE € 150 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP
• Primary: End Users and Super Users
• Secondary: Project Team and
Application Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAP600 Navigation in SAP Reports
• Gain hands-on experience using SAP
Human Resource Information System
and Business Information Warehouse
reporting and analysis tools.
SOFTWARE ERP ECC 6.0
CONTENT
• Define, execute and navigate Human
Capital Management reports using
various SAP reporting and analysis tools
• Review Top 10 Human Capital
Management reports

PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED • Introduction to SAP Human Capital

• SAP125 SAP Navigation 2005
GOALS
• Describe the diverse analytical and
reporting solutions for SAP Human
Capital Management
Management reporting and analysis
solutions
• Examine Human Resources
Information System and Business
Information Warehouse solution
capabilities

SAP640 · Analytics & Reporting in Sales

DURATION 2 hours PRICE € 150 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP GOALS • Examine Sales Information System and

• Primary: End Users and Super Users
• Secondary: Project Team and
Application Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAP600 Navigation in SAP Reports
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• SAP125 SAP Navigation 2005
• Describe the diverse analytical and
reporting solutions for SAP Sales
• Gain hands-on experience using SAP
Sales Information System and Business
Information Warehouse reporting and
analysis tools.
CONTENT
Business Information Warehouse
solution capabilities
• Define, execute and navigate Sales
reports using various SAP reporting and
analysis tools
• Review Top 10 Sales reports
SOFTWARE ERP ECC 6.0

• Introduction to SAP Sales reporting and

analysis solutions

SAP650 · Analytics & Reporting in Procurement

DURATION 2 hours PRICE € 150 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP
• Primary: End Users and Super Users
• Secondary: Project Team and
Application Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• Gain hands-on experience using SAP
Logistics Information System and
Business Information Warehouse
reporting and analysis tools.
CONTENT
• Define, execute and navigate
Procurement reports using various SAP
reporting and analysis tools
• Review Top 10 Procurement reports
SOFTWARE ERP ECC 6.0

• SAP600 Navigation in SAP Reports • Introduction to SAP Procurement

PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• SAP125 SAP Navigation 2005
GOALS
• Describe the diverse analytical and
reporting solutions for SAP
Procurement
reporting and analysis solutions
• Examine Logistics Information System
and Business Information Warehouse
solution capabilities

68
SAP Solution Overview
Introductiecursussen en Solution Overviews

SAPEP NW
SAP Enterprise Portal
Fundamentals

3 days

SAPCRM CRM
Overview of the SAP CRM
Solution

SAPPLM ERP
3 days
SAP PLM Solution
Overview
SAP01 SAPSCM ERP/SCM SAPSPM ERP/SCM
SAP Overview Overview of the SAP SCM 2 days SAP Service Parts
Solution Management
Overview
SAPHR ERP
3 days 3 days 2 days
SAP ERP Human Capital
Management Overview
SAPSRM SRM 2 days
Overview of the SAP SRM
Solution

SAPFIN ERP
3 days
SAP ERP Financials

SAPTEC NW
Fundamentals of 2 days
SAP Web AS

3 days

SAPNW NW CPM030
SAP NetWeaver Overview Introduction to
SAP Business Planning
and Consolidation

3 days 3 hours

SAP01 · SAP Overview

DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES 12-jan-09, 11-feb-09, 11-mrt-09, 20-apr-09, 18-mei-09, 22-jun-09

TARGET GROUP
• Project Team Members involved in
organizing and planning an SAP
implementation
• Any SAP beginner interested in
acquiring a basic overview of SAP
solutions
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
- Provide an overview of SAP’s business
solutions
- Develop the baseline SAP product
knowledge necessary for participation in
more detailed SAP courses
CONTENT
• SAP Business Suite
• SAP NetWeaver incl. Business
• SAP Supply Chain Management
• SAP Supplier Relationship Management
• SAP Product Lifecycle Management
• SAP Small and Midsize Business
• SAP xApps
SOFTWARE
SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
NOTES

Working knowledge of Microsoft Office
and Internet browsers
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
Basic knowledge of operational business
processes
GOALS
This course will:
- Explain the terminology used at SAP
Information Warehouse, Exchange The course includes several practical
Infrastructure and Enterprise Portals exercises using the SAP ERP component
• SAP ERP (Enterprise Resource (esp. ECC5.0, BW, SEM). It also presents
Planning) incl. Financials, Human additional components.
Capital Management, Logistics and
Operations, and Analytics and Planning
• SAP Customer Relationship
Management

www.sap.nl/education 69
SAP Solution Overview
Introductiecursussen en Solution Overviews
SAPEP · SAP Enterprise Portal Fundamentals
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES 16-feb-09, 27-apr-09, 17-jun-09
TARGET GROUP
All persons interested in SAP NetWeaver
Portal
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED None
GOALS
This course will prepare you to:
• Understand the need for an enterprise
portal
• Log on to, navigate, and personalize the
portal
SAPCRM · Overview of the SAP CRM Solution
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES 12-jan-09, 6-apr-09
TARGET GROUP
• Customers, project team members and
interested parties who want to have an
overview of SAP Customer Relationship
Management and the processes that it
covers
• SAP consultants and partners
PREREQUISITES None
GOALS
The course gives you an understanding of
how you can benefit from implementing
SAP CRM scenarios.
70
• Describe the components in SAP • Collaboration
NetWeaver Portal SOFTWARE
• Explain and use the main functions • SAP NetWeaver Portal 7.0
CONTENT • SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
• The big picture NOTES
• The end-user perspective This overview course SAPEP
• Technical infrastructure (SAP NetWeaver Portal Fundamentals) is
• Portal platform content the foundation for all subsequent courses
• Security aspects in the SAP NetWeaver Portal curriculum.
• Knowledge management:
CONTENT SOFTWARE
Introduction to: • SAP CRM 5.0
• Fundamentals and architecture of SAP • SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
CRM • SAP NetWeaver Portal 7.0
• SAPCRMAnalytics NOTES
• SAPCRMMarketing The course is structured using a case
• SAP CRM E-Commerce study of the functional and channel-
• SAP CRM Channel Management oriented key areas and scenarios in SAP
• SAP CRM Sales CRM. The course includes
• SAP CRM Interaction Center demonstrations and exercises in the
• SAP CRM Service system. This course is an introduction to
• SAP CRM Field Applications SAP CRM, it does not explain how to set
• Implementation & operation of up (Customize) the scenarios that are
SAP CRM shown.
SAP Solution Overview
Introductiecursussen en Solution Overviews
SAPSCM · Overview of the SAP SCM Solution
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES 21-jan-09, 15-apr-09
TARGET GROUP
This course is intended for managers,
project team members, key users (persons
from the user departments) and other
interested parties who want an overview
of the SAP SCM solution.
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
Knowledge of the windows application
environment
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• Basic knowledge of supply-chain
management
• SAP01 (SAP Overview)
GOALS
This course gives participants an overview
of the SAP Supply Chain Management
(SAP SCM) solution.
SAPSPM · SAP Service Parts Management Overview
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES 2-feb-09, 23-apr-09
TARGET GROUP
• Consultants
• Project Team Members
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• SAPSCM SAP Supply Chain
Management Solution Overview
GOALS
• explain the SAP Service Parts
Management solution and the required
system landscape
• understand the benefits of Service Parts
Planning and execute different planning
services in SAP SCM
• perform some typical SAP Service Parts
execution processes in SAP ECC
• describe the basic processes and
functions in Extended Warehouse
Management (SAP EWM)
• explain the different Supply Network
Collaboration (SAP SNC) business
processes and perform some typical
collaboration processes
CONTENT
• The components of the SAP Business
Suite
• The components, supported business
processes and scenarios of the SAP SCM
solution.
• Integration with the SAP Product
Lifecycle Management (PLM) solution,
especially concerning master data
administration and change
management
• Execution of a typical business process:
• Supply-chain planning with: sales and
operations planning, delivery and
procurement network planning,
production planning
• Supply chain execution with: direct
procurement, production, warehouse
processes, delivery preparation,
transport, billing
CONTENT
• Business Benefits
• System Landscape
• Master Data
• Service Parts Planning:
- Capture of historical demand
- Forecasting
- Inventory planning, economic order
quantity
- Distribution Requirements Planning
(DRP)
- Procurement planning
- Deployment and Inventory Balancing
• Service parts execution
- Creating deliveries and stock transfers
• Service Parts Warehousing
- An Introduction to Extended
Warehouse Management
- Organizational Elements and structure
of EWM
- Warehouse Task and Order creation
• Supply chain visibility with monitoring
of delivery, transport, production and
procurement processes with the
eventmanager
• Supply chain collaboration with an
overview of the Inventory Collaboration
Hub (SAP ICH)
SOFTWARE
• SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
• SAP SCM 5.0
NOTES
The objective of the SAPSCM course is to
represent the entire SAP Supply Chain
Management solution. It focuses on
integrating supply-chain planning and
supply-chain execution. For interested
parties who are only interested in supply-
chain planning (planning in SAP
SCM(APO)), we recommend course
SCM200.
• Supply Network Collaboration (SAP
SNC)
- Processing scheduling agreements and
purchase requisitions
• Order Fulfillment:
- Master data
- Sales Order Process
- Global Available-to-Promise check
• Analytics and Monitoring
SOFTWARE
• SAP ECC 6.0
• SAP SCM 5.1
• SAP NetWeaver BI 7.0
NOTES
The Order Fulfillment part is shown with
SAP ECC not with SAP CRM
www.sap.nl/education 71
SAP Solution Overview
Introductiecursussen en Solution Overviews
SAPSRM · Overview of the SAP SRM Solution
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES 16-mrt-09, 3-jun-09
TARGET GROUP
• Consultants and project team members
who are implementing the SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM)
solution
• All interest parties who want to have an
overview of the SAP SRM solution.
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
SAP01 (SAP Overview)
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
Basic knowledge of Materials
SAPTEC · Fundamentals of SAP Web AS
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES 12-jan-09, 9-mrt-09, 18-mei-09, 29-jun-09
TARGET GROUP
Project team members and anyone who
work in the area of SAP technology (for
example, technology consultants,
administrators, developers)
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
Knowledge of information technology
GOALS
• The architecture of SAPWeb Application
Server (SAPWeb AS) is presented in
detail. SAPWeb AS is the central
component of the SAP NetWeaver
application platform.
• You will learn effective techniques for
navigating.
• You will receive an overview of the
development process in SAP systems.
72
Management in SAP
GOALS
Learn the business processes and
components of the SAP SRM solution.
CONTENT
• SAP SRM – Overview
• Components and system landscape
• Strategic purchasing
• Operational purchasing
• Supplier Enablement
• Catalog and content management
CONTENT
• Short introduction to SAP NetWeaver
• Navigating in SAP systems
- Logon and structure of the user
interface
- Accessing functions in the system
- Personalization options
• SAP Web Application Server
architecture
- Processing a user query
- Structure of an instance
- Work process types, server processes and
their use
- Internet-based technology components:
• Overview of the SAP development
environment
- Creating and editing Repository objects
SOFTWARE
SAP SRM 5.0
NOTES
This course focuses on giving an overview
and the processes, not on configuring the
system.
- Transports between SAP systems
• Communication and integration
technologies
• Introduction to SAP system
administration
SOFTWARE
SAP Web Application Server 6.40
NOTES
For a general overview of SAP NetWeaver,
please attend the course SAPNW. Course
SAPTEC examines SAP Web Application
Server (SAP Web AS) and imparts the
fundamentals that are required for
subsequent courses related to the
technology of SAP NetWeaver.
SAP Solution Overview
Introductiecursussen en Solution Overviews
SAPPLM · SAP PLM Solution Overview
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES 15-jan-09, 16-apr-09
TARGET GROUP
• Decision makers, managers
• Project managers and teams from SAP
PLM introduction
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• Experience of using graphical user
interfaces (such as Microsoft Windows)
• Basic business knowledge
GOALS
Participants obtain an overview of the
basic SAP PLM functions. The training
course provides basic knowledge that can
SAPHR · SAP ERP Human Capital Management Overview
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES 8-jan-09, 14-apr-09
TARGET GROUP
• Decision Makers/ Management
• Project Team members
• HCM consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED None
GOALS
• Basic understanding of SAP ERP Human
Capital Management:
- Navigation and Terminology
- Structures and Processes
• Overview of the main functions of SAP
ERP HCM
• integration possibilities
CONTENT
• Navigation and structures in HCM
• Personnel procurement and personnel
be used to effectively take part in the
decision making when introducing SAP
PLM.
CONTENT
• Overview of SAP PLM with the key
areas:
- Program and Project Management &
Safety
- Life-Cycle Data Management
- Life-Cycle Collaboration
- Enterprise Asset Management
- Quality Management
administration
• Education and further training in
personnel development and in Training
and Event Management
• Time Management and payroll
• Personnel cost planning
• Reporting
• Employee Self-Service and Manager
Self-Service
• Strategic integration of HCM with other
solutions (for example SAP Learning
Solution, SAP E-Recruiting)
SOFTWARE
SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
- Environment, Health, & Safety
SOFTWARE
SAP ERP Central Component 5.0
NOTES
The training course provides a general
overview. Further basic knowledge can be
gained from the corresponding overview
training courses for each of the key areas.
Detailed knowledge and settings (for
example, individual functions and
Customizing activities) are dealt with in
subsequent training courses.
NOTES
• This course gives a brief overview of the
integrative processes in SAP ERP HCM.
SAP HR is aimed at decision makers in
particular. For users to visit detail
courses, we require them to have
attended the more in-depth course
HR050 beforehand.
• This course also discusses the functions
of the following SAP releases: R/3 4.6,
R/3 Enterprise Ext. 1.10/ 2.00 and ERP
2004.
• To gain a cross functional SAP solution
overview, you may also want to attend
SAP01 (SAP Overview).
www.sap.nl/education 73
SAP Solution Overview
Introductiecursussen en Solution Overviews
SAPFIN · SAP ERP Financials
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• Participants interested in a general
overview of SAP ERP Financials
• Project team members in the
organization and design phase of a SAP
ERP Financials implementation
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• SAP01 (SAP Overview)
GOALS
• SAP ERP Financials solution overview
• Describing the key functional areas and
key capabilities of SAP ERP Financials
using selected business processes
• Using SAP ERP Financials for strategic
and operational enterprise management
• Describing the options offered by SAP
ERP Financials for processing and
analyzing data and for supporting
SAPNW · SAP NetWeaver Overview
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES 4-mrt-09, 6-mei-09, 29-jun-09
TARGET GROUP
• Persons who are interested in having a
general overview of SAP NetWeaver
• Project managers and project team
members in the design phase of an
integration solution
• Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• Basic knowledge of the SAP system
• Interest in technological issues
GOALS
• Understand the concept of Enterprise
Service Architecture
• Describe the SAP Web Application
Server component as a technical
application platform
• Describe the benefits and use of the SAP
Exchange Infrastructure (XI)
component
• Describe the benefits and use of the SAP
Business Intelligence (BI) component
• Describe the benefits and use of the SAP
74
e-business strategy
CONTENT
• Introduction to SAP ERP Financials
(positioning)
• Business processes in financial
accounting and management
accounting (controlling) using SAP
• Purchase to pay (purchasing and
payment processing)
• Plan to product (value chains and
reporting)
• Order to cash (sales orders, incoming
payments, and analysis)
• Electronic Bill Presentment and
Payment for optimizing the financial
supply chain
• Corporate services within SAP ERP
Financials
Enterprise Portal component
• Recognize the advantages for your
company through the use of SAP
NetWeaver
CONTENT
• SAP NetWeaver – motivation and
strategy
• The concept of Enterprise Service
Architecture
• SAP Web Application Server as SAP
NetWeaver application platform
- ABAP Engine in SAPWeb AS
- J2EEEngineinSAPWebAS
- SAP Web Application Server: Web
services and Web Dynpro
• Process integration with SAP NetWeaver
- Process integration in SAP NetWeaver –
general overview
- SAP Exchange Infrastructure: An
overview of the architecture
- Business process management with
Business Workflow and ccBPM
• Business application scenarios for
managing companies using Strategic
Enterprise Management and Business
Analytics
• Portals within SAP ERP Financials,
presented using selected business
packages
SOFTWARE
• SAP ERP Central Component 5.0
• SAP Business Information
Warehouse 3.5
• SAP SEM 4.0
NOTES
The content of this course is appropriate
for participants on the following SAP
software releases: R/3 4.6, R/3 Enterprise
ext. 1.10/ 2.00, SEM 3.1, and BW 3.0.
• Information integration with SAP
NetWeaver
- Architecture of and reporting with the
SAP Business Information Warehouse
- Master data management with SAP
Master Data Management
• People integration with SAP NetWeaver
- Integration of applications in the SAP
Enterprise Portal
- Knowledge management and
collaboration in the SAP Enterprise
Portal
- SAP Mobile Infrastructure
- SAP Records Management
• Lifecycle management with SAP
Solution Manager
NOTES
The course provides an overview of SAP
NetWeaver’s abilities. It does not analyze
the customer-specific IT landscape and
the consequences of this.
SAP Solution Overview
Introductiecursussen en Solution Overviews
CPM030 · Introduction to SAP Business Planning and Consolidation
DURATION 3 hours PRICE € 350 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• This course is designed for individuals
who will be end users of SAP Business
Planning and Consolidation or who
require a product overview.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• Knowledge of Microsoft® Excel, Word
and PowerPoint
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED NONE
GOALS
• Work with the SAP Business Planning
and Consolidation Excel, Word,
PowerPoint and Web interfaces.
SOFTWARE
• Microsoft Windows Server 2003
Enterprise Edition
• Microsoft SQL Server 2000
• Microsoft Analysis Services 2000
• Microsoft Office Professional Enterprise
Edition 2003
• Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 - Inserting data values
• SAP Business Planning and • Working with BPC Web
Consolidation 5.1 - Content Library
CONTENT - Live Reporting
• What is SAP Business Planning and NOTES
Consolidation? • This course is delivered as an E-learning
- Architecture and Terminology Knowledge Transfer Product.
• The Connection Wizard
• The Action Pane
• Working with BPC for Excel
- The Current View
- Introduction to Dynamic Report
Templates
- Using the Park n Go feature
- Introduction to Dynamic Schedule
Templates
- Entering and viewing Comments
• Working with BPC for Word
- Inserting objects
• Working with BPC for PowerPoint
www.sap.nl/education 75
SAP ERP
HCM Shared Services

SAPHR ERP HR050 ERP HR130 ERP HR255 ERP HR290 ERP
SAP ERP Human Capital Business Processes in Essentials of Enterprise Employee & Manager Self- System Configuration for
Management Overview Human Capital Portal in Human Capital Service ESS/MSS
Management Management

2 days 5 days 2 days 5 days 2 days

HR150 ERP HR280 ERP

HCM Admin & EIC Smart Forms and Adobe
Forms in HCM

2 days 2 days

TERP31 ERP TZEREP ERP HR270 ERP HR272 ERP

SAP ERP: Introduction into HR Administrative Services SAP Enterprise Learning SAP Enterprise Learning -
Processes in Human E-learning Development
Capital Management and Integration

5 hours 2 days 3 days 2 days

HR050 · Business Processes in Human Capital Management

DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES 12-jan-09, 2-mrt-09, 11-mei-09
TARGET GROUP • Time Management and brief NOTES

• Project Team members
• HCM consultants
• Employees in HR, key users
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED None
GOALS
• Understand navigation and structures
• Understand and map essential problems
in HR
• Integration within HCM and with other
solutions
CONTENT
• Navigation and mapping personnel,
company and organization structure
• Personnel Administration and Global
Employment
introduction to payroll
• Recruitment and E-Recruiting
• Mapping personnel development
processes (especially performance
management)
• Training and Event Management, SAP
Learning Solution
• Enterprise Compensation Management
• Personnel cost planning
• Reporting options
• Employee Self-Service and Manager
Self-Service
SOFTWARE
SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
• This course also discusses the functions
of the following SAP releases: R/3 4.6,
R/3 Enterprise Ext 1.10/2.0 and ERP 2004.
• This course is a prerequisite for all
additional detail / Customizing courses
and replaces the previous courses
HR100 (Essentials of Human Resources)
and HR120 (Essentials of Personnel
Planning).
• For a comprehensive overview of
payroll, see course HR110 (Payroll
Business Processes).
• For a comprehensive overview of ESS,
MSS and the Learning Solution, see
course HR130 (Essentials of Enterprise
Portal in HCM).

HR150 · HCM Admin & EIC

DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP weiterführende Kenntnisse in den • Integration von HR Administrator und

• Mitglieder von Projektteams SAP ERP Komponenten Personal- dem SAP-System
• Mitarbeiter im Personalwesen administration • Überblick und Ziele beim EIC
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED GOALS • Typische Geschäftsprozesse im EIC
• HR050 (Grundlagen • Die Teilnehmer dieser Schulung lernen • Integration von HR Administrator und
Personaladministration) den HR Administrator und das EIC zu dem SAP-System
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED erklären. SOFTWARE
• SAPHR (Überblick über die Lösung CONTENT • ERP ECC 6.0
mySAP Human Resources) • Überblick und Ziele HR Administartor • SAP NetWeaver Enterprise Portal
• Hilfreich sind weiterführende • Typischer Geschäftsprozess im HR
Internet/Intranet-Kenntnisse und Administrator

76
SAP ERP
HCM Shared Services

HR130 · Essentials of SAP Enterprise Portal in HCM

DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES 11-mrt-09

TARGET GROUP
• Project Leaders
• Project team members
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
HR050 (HCM Business Processes)
[formerly HR100 and HR120]
• Give an overview of the offering and
implementation of an HCM Portal.
CONTENT
• You get an overview of the HCM
solutions in the SAP NetWeaver
Enterprise Portal: Employee Self Service,
• The technical infrastructure and system
structure is also outlined.
• The course is a compact introduction
for all customers who are interested in
the portal and who focus on HCM.
SOFTWARE

PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
In-depth knowledge of the Internet /
intranet and in-depth knowledge of SAP
ERP components that you want to make
Web-enabled is useful.
GOALS
• Become familiar with the SAP
NetWeaver Enterprise portal in the
HCM environment.
• Get to know a selection of individual
HCM Web Dynpro services.
Manager Self Service and Learning
Solution.
• The course introduces the Enterprise
Portal and howyou use it, and also
demonstrates the individual services
that are offered in HCM especially for
the portal.
• Starting with the installed Enterprise
Portal, it presents extracts of the
individual business packages, that is,
HCM content in the portal.
SAP NetWeaver Enterprise Portal
NOTES
• Follow-up courses on the portal issues
in HCM are HR250 (Employee Self-
Service), HR260 (Manager Self Service)
and HR270 (SAP Enterprise Learning).
These courses contain exercises on the
services and Customizing.
• Technical information is available in the
courses in the ADM, NET and EP
curriculums.

HR255 · Employee & Manager Selfservices

DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES 16-feb-09

TARGET GROUP • Understand the basics of technical • System landscape Portal and
• Project teams Infrastructure with the new Webdynpro Backendsystem
• Consultants technology. • Webdynpro Services
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED • Get to know, the diferent options to use • Business Packages
• HR050 and configure various ESS/MSS- • Web-Services
• HR305 processes in Intranet/Internet NOTES

• HR505 • Understand Business Packages within • A deeper dive into basis technology will
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED SAP NetWeaver Enterprise Portal and be provided within the courses HR290,
• HR130 how to adjust individually. as within the portals curriculum
GOALS SOFTWARE • For authorizations please refer HR940
• Get an overview of standard scenarios in • SAP NW EP • For SSO and WebAS please look for
ESS & MSS • ERP ECC 6.0, EnP 2 courses ADM960 and ADM102
• Understand the interaction of SAP CONTENT • For Programming of Webdynpro-
NetWeaver Enterprise Portal und • Explanation and Configuration of Services please look at JA310
Backend-System different ESS/MSS-scenarios.

www.sap.nl/education 77
SAP ERP
HCM Shared Services
HR270 · SAP Enterprise Learning
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• Training managers and employees from
HR departments who are responsible
for Knowledge Management and
Personnel Development
• Authors who are compiling content for
the SAP Learning Solution (SAP LS)
• Consultants
• Project team
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
HR050 (HCM Business Processes)
[formerly HR100 and HR120]
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• HR130 Essentials of Enterprise Portal in
HCM
HR272 · SAP Enterprise Learning - E-learning - Development and Integration
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• Content Administrators
• E-learning Specialists
• Authors
• Project team members
• Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• HR270 SAP Enterprise Learning
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• Course participants gain an overview of
the E-learning functions in the Learning
Portal 600 including navigation inside
the Content Player.
• They learn how to structure, maintain
and publish learning content in the
authoring environment. They learn
HR280 · Smart Forms and Adobe Forms in HCM
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES 30-mrt-09
TARGET GROUP
• Consultants, Project team members and
Super User in SAP HCM
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• HR400
• HR305
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• Some technical prerequesites (BC470,
BC480)
78
• HR515 (Training and Event Mgmnt)
• HR305 (Master Data Configuration)
• HR505 (Organizational Management)
GOALS
• Course participants get an overview of
the functions of the Learning portal 600
including collaboration and the
Content Player.
• Course participants learn how to use
the author environment (structuring
and publishing).
• Course participants become familiar
with Training Management.
• Course participants get an overview of
the tasks and applications of the persons
how to make use of metadata and
enhance content to support individual
learning strategies.
• They learn about the various
possibilities to integrate content into
SAP Enterprise Learning, in particular
about the conversion of SCORM or
AICC courses.
• They learn about the content life cycle
including versioning and reusability
• Participants are introduced to the
Publisher Database, which contains
tracking data of users navigating
through e-learning.
• They also obtain an insight into the
technical landscape and the underlying
data exchange processes of the SAP
GOALS
• Understand the use of Adobe Interactive
Forms and SAP Smart Forms
• Learn how to configure Adobe
Interactive Forms and SAP Smart Forms
• Understand basics of Adobe Document
Server
SOFTWARE
• ERP ECC 6.0
• SAP NetWeaver Enterprise Portal
involved in the learning cycle.
• Course participants gain insight into the
special features of performing E-
learning projects.
CONTENT
• Learning Portal 600 and Content Player
• Author environment
• Training Management
• Technical overview
• Functions of SAP LS and persons
involved
SOFTWARE
• SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
• SAP NetWeaver Enterprise Portal
• LSO 600, SAP Autorenumgebung 600
Enterprise Learning.
SOFTWARE
• SAP ERP Central Component 6.03
• SAPNW Enterprise Portal 6.0
• SAP Enterprise Learning 602
• SAP Authoring Environment 602
CONTENT
• Training Management, Learning Portal
and Content Player
• Theoretical basics on standards and
metadata
• Authoring environment
• Repository Explorer
• Technical overview and
Interdependencies (RWD etc.)
CONTENT
• Overview standard Forms in HCM
• Creation of Smart forms
• Creation of Adobe fiorms
• Interaction of SAP Backend system
Interactive Forms
• Configuration of Adobe Dokument
Servers?
• Adjustment of forms for customer
requirements
SAP ERP
HCM Shared Services
HR290 · System configuration for ESS / MSS
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES 2-apr-09
TARGET GROUP
Technical Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• EP200 SAP NetWeaver Portal System
Administration
• ADM200 SAP Web AS Java
Administration
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• ADM950 Secure SAP System
Management
• ADM960 Security in SAP System
Environments
• TEP10 Implementation and Operation
of SAP NetWeaver Portal
GOALS
• Describing the NetWeaver 2004s based
ESS/MSS Architecture
• Understanding the interaction of
SAPNW Enterprise Portal, WebDynpro
Services, and SAP backend system in
terms of the essential features in the
technical infrastructure for ERP2005
• Be able to explain and execute the
technical configuration of all
components being involved in the
ESS/MSS WebDynpro Application
TZEREP · HR Administrative Services
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• HR Solution Consultants or Sales
Engineers with technical background
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• Backendsystem and Portal on Level
EhP2 (XD5)
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• Know new developments in Portal Role
HR Administrator
• Know new developments in HCM
Processes and Forms
• Be able to implement a process with
HCM Processes and Forms, thus this
CONTENT
• NetWeaver 2004s based ESS/MSS
Architecture.
• Required Components and Usage Types
in an ESS/MSS Landscape.
• Describing the necessary installation
steps for a new ESS/MSS Landscape.
• Describing the necessary installation
steps for an existing ESS/MSS Landscape.
• Performing the necessary SLD
configuration steps for a SAP ESS/MSS
Landscape.
• SAP Enterprise Portal and the technical
connection to the SAP system.
• Describing the installation and
performing technical configuration of
Adobe Document Services.
• Describing and performing technical
configuration of Internet Graphics
Server.
• Performing the technical configuration
of the WebDynpro Application using an
ESS-based example.
• Applying patches by using the Java
Support Package Manager.
• Understanding and solving the Top Ten
Problems.
course will prepare you to perform the
implementation of HCM Processes and
Forms including the relevant activities
for the involved roles (HR
Administrator, Manager and Employee)
SOFTWARE
• XD5 and relevant Portal on actual level,
might be necessary to implement still a
support package or notes
CONTENT
• System navigation Update about HR
Administrator Role
• Update about HCM Processes and
Forms (Enhancments)
SOFTWARE
• ERP ECC 6.0
• SAP NW EP
NOTES
• Please note that this course is not an HR
application course, but a technical
course. The target group are technical
people, who want to learn, how to
setup the necessary system
configuration for landscapes, that
support ESS and MSS processes.
• You will find more information about
technology in the courses in the ADM-
curriculum and the EP-curriculum. For
the topics SSO and Web AS, we
recommend courses ADM950, ADM960
and ADM102. For the topics Jaca and
EP-administration we recommend
courses ADM200 and EP200 or TEP10.
Programming of Webdynpro-Services
(JA310) will not be a part of this course.
• The training content applies to
ESS/MSS, even if some examples are
purely based on ESS where MSS is not
mentioned explicitly
• Update about HCM Processes and
Forms (New Developments)
• Update about Analytics for HCM
Processes and Forms
• Implement a Process with HCM
Processes and Forms (including Form
• Scenario, Adobe Form and Workflow
Template and deployment for relevant
roles)
www.sap.nl/education 79
SAP ERP Analytics
Strategic Enterprise Management

SAPFIN ERP SEM010 ERP SEM200 ERP SEM220 ERP

SAP ERP Financials Strategic Enterprise Business Warehouse for SEM Corporate
Management Overview SEM Performance Monitor

2 days 3 days 5 days 5 days

SAP01
SAP Overview

3 days

ERP001 ERP SEM241 ERP SEM240 ERP SEM245 ERP

Management Empowered SEM-BCS BW-based Consolidation SEM-BCS Migration and
by SAP ERP for End Users Special Cases

4 hours 2 days 5 days 3 days

TERP11 ERP BW370 NW

SAP ERP: Introduction into SAP BW Business
NW BI (BW 3.5) Planning & Simulation

1,5 hours 5 days

TERP12 ERP AC040 ERP SEM215 ERP

SAP ERP: Introduction into Business Processes in Integrated Financial
Strategic Enterprise Mgmt Management Accounting Plannng with BPS
(SEM 4.0)

1 hour 5 days 5 days

CERTIFICATION basic training as Solution Consultant Strategic Enterprise Management – CPM & BPS (for new consultants)

TBW10 > TBW20 > TBW45 > TFIN40 > C_TFIN40_04

ALTERNATIVE COURSES BW310 > BW305 > BW370 > SEM010 > SEM220 > SEM215 > C_TFIN40_04

Voor de meest actuele certificeringinformatie verwijzen wij u graag naar www.sap.com/services/education/certification

AC040 · Business Processes in Management Accounting 30

DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES 30-mrt-09, 8-jun-09

TARGET GROUP GOALS • Planning, integrated planning, and

• Project managers and project team
members
• Employees responsible for
implementing Controlling
• Employees wanting to gain an overview
of Controlling and its internal and
external integration
• Understand the business concepts and
methods involved in Management
Accounting (Controlling) in the SAP
system
• Become familiar with cost and activity
allocation methods
• Learn how Management Accounting
planning tools in Management
Accounting (Controlling)
• Integrated flow of costs and revenues in
the SAP system
• Periodic activities in Management
Accounting (Controlling)
SOFTWARE

PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
Business knowledge in the area of
Controlling
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• SAP01 SAP Overview or
• SAPFIN overview of SAP ERP Financials
• Participants should have a basic practical
and theoretical knowledge of cost
accounting and theory of business
processes
(Controlling) is integrated internally in SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
the SAP system NOTES
CONTENT The functions of the following SAP
• Introduction to the business concepts, releases are also covered in this course: R/3
methods, and subareas of Management 4.6, R/3 Enterprise Ext. 1.10/ 2.00, SAP ERP
Accounting (Controlling) in the SAP Central Component 5.0.
system
• Presentation of key roles and tasks
• Organizational structures and master
data
• Information system

80
SAP ERP Analytics
Strategic Enterprise Management
SEM010 · Strategic Enterprise Management Overview
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
Project managers, project team members,
business analysts, CFOs / company
controllers, persons involved in strategic
enterprise management, persons involved
in investor and stakeholder relations,
persons involved in the business
information center, prospective SEM
consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
A basic understanding of enterprise and
management reporting
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
SAPFIN (SAP ERP Financials Solution
Overview)
GOALS
• Understand how management processes
in companies and groups are integrated
and supported at different levels by
SEM, and how it helps to achieve
competitive advantages and added
value.
SEM200 · Business Warehouse for SEM
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
Consultants, controllers, project team
members
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• Basic business knowledge: enterprise
management,
• SEM010 (Strategic Enterprise
Management)
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
SAPFIN (SAP ERP Financials Solution
Overview)
GOALS
• Acquire the fundamentals of BW that
are required for working with SEM.
• Develop application scenarios in BW-
SEM
• Working with InfoCubes
• Extractions and retractions: BW-SEM
SAP system
• Vertically link strategic planning and
business planning.
• Perform consolidation according to
legal aspects as well as perform
management consolidation.
• Relate personal and financial resources
to strategies
• Provide management teams at all levels
according to requirements with easily
understandable information using key
indicators.
• Support the development of
relationships to stakeholders and
business communication.
CONTENT
• SEM overview – support management
decisions
• Integrated database – SEM and Business
InformationWarehouse
• SEM-SRM A better “return on
management” with Stakeholder
Relationship Management
• Creating queries and their design
options for modeling in SEM
• BW-SEM technical integration.
• Modeling basic structures of planning
functions and Strategy Management, if
they are necessary for the integration
analysis.
CONTENT
• Fundamentals of BW and their link with
SEM
• Definition of the different types of
InfoCubes
• Key figure model and account model in
BW
• Implementing scenarios for filling
InfoCubes and data retention (current
and planned).
• Extracting from SAP Profitability
Analysis (CO-PA), Excel upload
• SEM-BPS: Vertical integration with
Business Planning and Simulation
• SEM-BCS: Legal consolidation and
management consolidation with SEM
Business Consolidation
• SEM-CPM: Strategy Management and
Performance Measurement with the
Corporate Performance Monitor
SOFTWARE
• SAP Business Information
Warehouse 7.0
• SAP SEM 6.0
• Creating queries and their design
options for use in SEM
• Data retraction into SAP CO-PA
• Linking the BW structures with Strategy
Management and Performance
Measurement
• Developing a simple planning structure
• BW consolidation according to
integration aspects
SOFTWARE
• SAP SEM 3.5
• SAP Business Information
Warehouse 3.5
• SAP ERP Central Component 5.0
NOTES
This course is intended for participants
with no or little knowledge of BW.
www.sap.nl/education 81
SAP ERP Analytics
Strategic Enterprise Management
SEM215 · Integrated Financial Plannng with BPS
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
Consultants and employees in the user
department who want to learn how to
implement a business plan in an
integrated scenario using a case study
after attending BW370 or TBW45.
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• Knowledge of business planning and
AC010 and AC040
• SEM200 Business Warehouse for SEM
• BW370/TBW45 (Business Planning and
Simulation)
GOALS
• Application of the knowledge gained
from BW370 or TBW45 to business issues
in accounting issues and implementing
them with SEM-BPS
• The analysis focuses on integrating
subplans such as sales and profit
SEM220 · SEM Corporate Performance Monitor
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
Project team members, consultants,
controllers, strategic planners and
Corporate Business Planners, executive
assistants, analysts
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• Business knowledge in enterprise
management and in controlling
• SEM010 (Strategic Enterprise
Management)
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• SEM200 (Business Warehouse for SEM)
or BW305 (Business Information
Warehouse (BW) – Reporting &
Analysis) and BW310 (Business
Information Warehouse (BW) – Data
Warehousing)
82
planning, profit center, overhead cost,
personnel cost, investment, balance
sheet and liquidity planning into a
business plan.
CONTENT
• Sales and profit planning with
hierarchies and variables as part of top-
down and bottom-up planning as well
as rolling forecast modeling approaches.
• Overhead cost planning with primary
and secondary costs.
• Balance sheet planning using financial
planning functions.
• Personnel cost planning.
• Investment planning
• Integrating profit center accounting to
the other subplans.
• Liquidity planning and cash flow
analyses.
GOALS
• Participants acquire detailed knowledge
about using Balanced Scorecards and
the Management Cockpit for Strategy
Management and Performance
Monitoring and the specific system
settings that are necessary for this.
• Emphasis is placed on swiftly
implementing Balanced Scorecards as
well as operational target setting and
analyzing deviations.
CONTENT
• Measure Builder, Business Content
• Defining business key figures
(measures) and measure catalogs
• Balanced Scorecard
• Analysis and design of Balanced
Scorecards
• Internet-supported Balanced Scorecards
• Business Content, strategy template
• Risk management
• Risk Builder: creating risks and risk
catalogs
• Assessing business key figures for
success-oriented enterprise controlling.
• Showing how the subplans interact with
a Web interface as part of a planning
folder.
• Showing various retractions such as cost
center retraction and investment
retraction.
SOFTWARE
• SAP Business Information
Warehouse 3.5
• SAP SEM 4.0
NOTES
SEM215 is designed as a follow-on course
to BW370. It will prepare participants to
map business concepts and connections
relating to the system using the SEM-BPS
options.
• Balanced Scorecard: risk allocation and
assessment
• Value driver trees and strategy-
independent modeling and analyzing
value driver trees
• Management Cockpit
• Defining walls, logical views, graphic
frames and the structure of a Cockpit
hierarchy
• Briefing Book
• Internet-supported analyses and
reporting, integration aspects for BW
and other SAP components and
implementation assistance
SOFTWARE
• SAP Business Information
Warehouse 3.5
• SAP SEM 4.0
SAP ERP Analytics
Strategic Enterprise Management

SEM240 · BW-based Consolidation 30

DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP Management) • Reclassification and allocation

• Consultants GOALS • Interunit elimination
• Customer project team members Integration in OLAP-based management • Capital consolidation
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED consolidation using the SEM-BCS • BEX reporting
• Knowledge of the underlying busines component. SOFTWARE
terms from consolidation CONTENT • SAP Business Information
• SEM200 (Business Warehouse for SEM) • Perform a consolidation process in the Warehouse 3.5
alternatively monitor • SAP SEM 4.0
• BW305 (Business Information • Datamodel of BW-based consolidation
Warehouse (BW) – Reporting & • Data transfer methods (flexible upload,
Analysis) and manual entry, read from BW)
• BW310 (Business Information • Master data (such as versions, item
Warehouse (BW) – Data Warehousing) plan)
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED • Validations
• SAPFIN (SAP ERP Financials Overview) • Manual standardizing entries
• SEM010 (Strategic Enterprise • Currency conversion and rounding

www.sap.nl/education 83
SAP ERP Analytics
Strategic Enterprise Management
SEM241 · SEM-BCS for End Users
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
Employees in group accounting
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
Business knowledge of consolidation
GOALS
Course participants will acquire all
necessary knowledge for creating
consolidated financial statements with
SEM-BCS.
CONTENT
• Navigation in the consolidation
monitor
• Master data terms: such as database,
consolidation area, units, items,
breakdown group, default values
• Creating new items and assigning the
appropriate breakdown group
• Using manual data entry layouts
(searching for imported account
assignments, changing values)
• Creating consolidation units.
SEM245 · SEM-BCS Migration and Special Cases
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• Consultants
• Customers – project employees
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• Knowledge of the fundamental business
terms from consolidation
• BW310 (Business Information
Warehouse (BW) – Data Warehousing)
GOALS
• Understand the new functions in SEM-
BCS 6.0 that are useful for migrating
from EC-CS to SEM-BCS.
84
• Creating additional financial data (such
as supplier/stock data for interim profit
elimination in working capital).
• Understanding and interpreting
validations (interaction with database
list totals records).
• Creating standardizing / adjustment
entries in the system (interaction with
database list totals records and access to
line items, ABAP List Viewer options for
individual layout design
• Currency conversion: interpreting the
report that is created
• Performing interunit eliminations as a
reconciliation measure. Interpreting the
reports that are created
• Update mode of interunit elimination
and reproducing postings.
• Manual postings across two
consolidation units
• Capital consolidation – interpreting
• Understand SEM-BCS 6.0 consolidation
functions
CONTENT
• Options of master data transfer from
EC-CS and SAP Business Information
Warehouse
• Options of transactional data transfer
from SAP feeder systems
• Legacy data transfer
• Elimination of IU profit and loss in fixed
assets
• Elimination of IU profit and loss in
postings using initial and subsequent
consolidation as an example
• Introduction to BW reporting
(executing reports and creating your
own simple BW reports)
SOFTWARE
• SAP Business Information
Warehouse 7.0
• SAP SEM 6.0
NOTES
This course is not suitable for consultants
who want to learn how to set up SEM-
BCS. We recommend that key users
attend course SEM240 (BW-Based
Consolidation) or advanced course
SEM245 (SEM-BCS Migration and Special
Cases)
working capital using supply chains
• Special cases
SOFTWARE
• SAP Business Information
Warehouse 7.0
• SAP SEM 6.0
NOTES
As the course is very technical in the field
of migrating master and transaction data,
it requires in-depth knowledge of Business
Information Warehouse.
SAP ERP Analytics
Strategic Enterprise Management
BW370 · BI – Integrated Planning
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES 30-mrt-09
TARGET GROUP
• Employees in Corporate Controlling
who deal with planning
• Project team employees/consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• BW305 (BI – Enterprise Reporting,
Query & Analysis (Part I))
• BW310 (BI – Enterprise Data
Warehousing)
• Basic knowledge of the planning process
GOALS
This course gives you an in-depth
introduction to BI integrated planning.
CONTENT
• Status and tracking system
• Setting up planning structures and
observing modeling aspects
• Setting up customizing and executing
planning functions
• Setting up a planning query that is
ready for input using the BEx Query
Designer
• Integrating the plan query in different
end user interfaces
• Displaying different query tools in the
planning context
• Using the characteristics relationships to
integrate correct business characteristics
relationships in the planning
• Integrating the status and tracking
system as a monitoring tool in the
planning
SOFTWARE
SAP NetWeaver 2004s
www.sap.nl/education 85
SAP ERP Analytics
Financial Analytics

SAPFIN ERP AC010 ERP AC280 ERP

SAP ERP Financials Business Processes in Analytics & Reporting in
Financial Accounting Financial Accounting

2 days 5 days 3 days

SAP01 AC040 ERP AC680 ERP

SAP Overview Business Processes in Analytics & Reporting in
Management Accounting Management Accounting

3 days 5 days 3 days

ERP020 ERP CA705 ERP CA710 ERP

Management Empowered Report Painter / Report Advanced Functions of
by SAP ERP Financials Writer Report Writer

2 hours
2 days 3 days

SAP600 ERP SAP620 ERP

Navigation in Analytics & Reporting in
SAP Report Financials

2 hours 2 hours

AC010 · Business Processes in Financial Accounting 30

DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES 16-mrt-09, 25-mei-09

TARGET GROUP • Accounts payable business processes participation. AC010 demonstrates

• Project managers and project team • Accounts receivable business processes business processes on the basis of the
members • Asset accounting business processes classic general ledger and merely gives a
• Employees wanting to gain an overview • Bank-related accounting business brief overview of the new general ledger.
of financial accounting and its internal processes If you want to gain an overview of the
and external integration • Financial statement creation business businesses processes in the new general
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED processes ledger, attend the overview course AC050
Accounting knowledge SOFTWARE (Financial and Management Accounting
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED SAP ERP Central Component 6.0 with the New General Ledger).
• SAPFIN Overview of SAP ERP Financials NOTES You can learn about the Customizing for
or The course content is limited to the most the new general ledger in AC210. The
• SAP01 SAP Overview important functions in the Financial functions of the following SAP releases are
GOALS Accounting integrated environment. You also covered in this course: R/3 4.6, R/3
This course gives participants an overview can learn about technical system Enterprise Ext. 1.10/ 2.00, SAP ERP Central
of the different processes in financial outsortings (Customizing) and get Component 5.0.
accounting and shows the connections answers to more detailed questions on
between the individual processes. individual applications in the advanced
CONTENT courses. This course is suitable for people
• System navigation with little or no SAP experience. This
• General ledger accounting course features a high level of individual

86
SAP ERP Analytics
Financial Analytics
CA705 · Report Painter / Report Writer
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
Project team members who are
responsible for the information system
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• SAP01 (SAP Overview)
• SAPFIN (overview of SAP ERP
Financials)
• Experience in Cost Center Accounting
GOALS
This course teaches you about the
functions of the Report Painter.
AC280 · Analytics and Reporting in Financial Accounting
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• Project team
• IT employees involved in the analytics
processes of the general ledger, accounts
receivable accounting, and accounts
payable accounting
• Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• AC010 Business Processes in Financial
Accounting
• AC200 Accounting Customizing I;
General Ledger, Accounts Payable,
Accounts Receivable
GOALS
• Learn to describe the evaluation options
of the information system reports in the
general ledger and subledgers (accounts
receivable and accounts payable)
• Use selections and restrictions within
CONTENT
• Introduction to the reporting tools
• Basics of the Report Painter
• Structure of the Report Painter report
• Models and variables
• Sections and column blocks
• Formatting
• Variation and extracts: mass reports
• Integration of reports in a productive
system
• Introduction to sets
SOFTWARE
SAP ERP Central Component 5.0
the reports as well as define and use
report variants and selection variables
• Use drilldown reporting for the
evaluation of financial data
• Use Customizing and the reporting
tools for information system reports
• Use query definitions in Business
Warehouse (BW)
CONTENT
• General ledger information systems,
accounts receivable, and accounts
payable
• ABAP reports in general ledger,
accounts payable, and accounts
receivable accounting
• Creating report variants
• Working with selection variables in
variants
• List Viewer
NOTES
The Report Painter can be used in
different modules. This course discusses
the functions of the Report Painter using
examples from Cost Center Accounting.
This course does not discuss the use of the
Report Painter for drilldown reports and
plan layouts. Instead, it explains the
functions of the Report Painter that are
needed to create Report Writer reports.
For participants who want to extend their
knowledge of the functions for creating
reports and who want to know more
about the Report Writer, we recommend
CA710 (Advanced Functions of the Report
Writer). The functions of the following
SAP releases are also covered in this
course: R/3 4.6, R/3 Enterprise Ext. 1.10/
2.00.
• Customer/vendor information systems
• Drilldown reporting information
system in FI-GL, FI-AP/AR
• Introduction to BW Reporting for
Financial Accounting
SOFTWARE
• SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
• SAP Business Information
Warehouse 3.5
NOTES
The functions of the following SAP
releases are also covered in this course: R/3
4.6, R/3 Enterprise Ext. 1.10/ 2.00, SAP ERP
Central Component 5.0, Business
Information Warehouse 3.1
www.sap.nl/education 87
SAP ERP Analytics
Financial Analytics

AC680 · Analytics & Reporting in Management Accounting

DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP CONTENT • Master data and control data reports

• Consultants who want to implement
consolidation functions
• Employees in the user department who
are involved in the implementation
project or who work with the system
• Consolidation types
• Consolidation units and hierarchies
• Charts of accounts
• Manual entry of reported financial data
• Transfer of account balancing data from
• Versions and restatement
• Balance carryforward
SOFTWARE
SAP ERP Central Component 5.0
NOTES

PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED external systems If you are interested in the BW-based

Knowledge of basic business concepts with
regard to consolidation
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• AC010 Business Processes in Financial
Accounting
• AC040 Business Processes in
Management Accounting (Controlling)
GOALS
Set up a consolidation system and become
familiar with the required system settings
for SAP Consolidation
• Validation consolidation SEM-BCS, attend course
• Manual postings SEM240. The functions of the following
• Currency conversion SAP releases are also covered in this
• Elimination of IC payables and course: R/3 4.6, R/3 Enterprise Ext. 1.10/
receivables 2.00.
• Elimination of IU revenue and expense
• Reclassification
• Consolidation of investments
(operations from purchase and equity
consolidation)
• Form-based drilldown reports

CA710 · Advanced Functions of Report Writer

DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP CONTENT SOFTWARE

Members of the project team who are • Introduction SAP ERP Central Component 5.0
responsible for the information system. • Structure of a Report Writer report NOTES

PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED • Sets The Report Writer can be used in different

CA708 (Basics of the Report
Painter/Report Writer)
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
Experience in Cost Center Accounting
GOALS
Explain the additional, more complex
functions for defining reports in the
Report Writer
• Variables
• Arranging sets in a report
• Detailing and formatting
• Structuring reports in sections
• Row structure of a section
• Cells and key figure blocks
• Key figures
• Summary
modules. This course discusses the
functions of the Report Writer using
examples from Cost Center Accounting.
Drilldown functions are not discussed in
this course, but in AC280 (Analytics &
Reporting in Financial Accounting). The
functions of the following SAP releases are
also covered in this course: R/3 4.6, R/3
Enterprise Ext. 1.10/ 2.00.

88
SAP ERP Analytics
Operations Analytics

SAP01 SCM100 ERP

SAP Overview Planning Overview (ERP) Let op! In sommige regio’s
wordt SCM130 gegeven in
plaats van SCM100

3 days 2 days

SAPSCM ERP PLM100 ERP

Overview of the SAP SCM Business Processes in
Solution Product Life-Cycle
Management

3 days 3 days

SAPPLM ERP PLM200 ERP PLM240 ERP

SAP PLM Solution Business Processes in Project Management –
Overview Project Management Reporting

2 days 3 days 3 days

ERP040 ERP PLM300 ERP PLM318 ERP

Management Empowered Business Processes in Analytics in Enterprise
by SAP ERP Logistics and Plant Maintenance Asset Management
Operations

4 hours 5 days 2 days

SAP600 ERP SAP640 ERP

Navigation in Analytics & Reporting
SAP Report Sales

2 hours 2 hours

SAP650 ERP
Analytics & Reporting in
Procurement

2 hours

SCM100 · Planning Overview (ERP)

DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES 2-feb-09

TARGET GROUP GOALS • Material requirements planning (MRP)

This course is aimed at project team This course provides you with an • Capacity evaluations
members and key users (from the user overview of the fundamental concepts • Integration with production
departments) responsible for and procedures used in planning with • Looking ahead to advanced planning
implementing production planning with SAP ECC. with SAP SCM (APO)
SAP ERP in the context of the CONTENT SOFTWARE
SAP Business Suite. • Overview of the planning process with SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED SAP ECC NOTES

PLM100 (Business Processes in PLM)
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
SAPSCM (Overview of the SAP SCM
Solution)
• Overview of the master data and
transaction data required for planning
• Sales & Operations Planning (SOP)
• Demand management
• Long-term planning (LTP)
• Master production scheduling (MPS)
In conjunction with SCM300
(Supply Chain Manufacturing Overview),
this course provides an overview of
production planning and control using
SAP ERP.

www.sap.nl/education 89
SAP ERP Analytics
Operations Analytics

PLM100 · Business Processes in Product Life-Cycle Management

DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES 21-jan-09

TARGET GROUP GOALS • Variant configuration

• Project manager Participants obtain an overview of the Life- • Engineering change management
• Project team Cycle Data Management areas: • Configuration Management
• SAP consultants CONTENT • Product replication
• Persons responsible for Life-Cycle Data • Document management • Internet scenario
Management • CAD Integration SOFTWARE

PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED None • Material master and bill of material SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED • Work centers and routings
SAP01 (SAP Overview) • Classification

PLM200 · Business Processes in Project Management

DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES 2-mrt-09, 18-mei-09

TARGET GROUP CONTENT • Integration with Other Applications

• Project manager • Work Breakdown Structure (WBS) SOFTWARE

• Project team • Network SAP ERP Central Component 6.0

• Consultants • Project Builder & Project Planning NOTES

PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED Board Detailed knowledge can be obtained from

• Experience of SAP systems
• Basic knowledge of business processes in
the area of project management
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
Any SAP course, such as SAPPLM
(Overview of the SAP PLM solution)
GOALS
Participants obtain an overview of the
functions in the SAP project system.
• Appointment Planning courses: PLM210 (Project Management –
• Resource Planning Structures) PLM220 (Project Management
• Project Material – Logistics) PLM230 (Project Management
• Cost Planning, Revenue Planning – Controlling) PLM240 (Project
• PS Cash Management Management – Reporting)
• Budgeting
• Commitment and Actual Data
• Period-End Processing
• Information Systems

PLM240 · Project Management – Reporting

DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES 6-apr-09

TARGET GROUP • PLM230 (Project Management – - Line item reports

• Project manager
• Project team
• Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
Detailed knowledge of SAP Project System
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• At least one other Project System
training course, such as PLM200 (Project
Management),
Controlling) • Progress Analysis:
• Basic business knowledge of accounting - Progress value determination
and logistics - Milestone trend analysis
GOALS • Area controlling:
Participants learn how to evaluate - Project summarization
important key figures using the - Interface in Profitability Analysis and
information systems in SAP Project Profit Center Accounting
System. - Business Information Warehouse
CONTENT SOFTWARE

• PLM210 (Project Management – • Information system structures SAP R/3 Enterprise

Structures), • Information system controlling
• PLM220 (Project Management – - Hierarchy reports:
Logistics), or - Costelementreports

90
SAP ERP Analytics
Operations Analytics

PLM300 · Business Processes in Plant Maintenance

DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES 16-feb-09, 4-mei-09

TARGET GROUP mapped in the SAP system. • Reporting and evaluations

• Project manager • Furthermore, it demonstrates the most SOFTWARE
• Project team important aspects of integration with SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED None other SAP applications. NOTES

PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED CONTENT This training course is an essential

• SAPPLM (SAP PLM Solution Overview)
or
• SAP01 (SAP Overview)
GOALS
• This training course provides an
overview of PlantMaintenance in the
larger context of Enterprise Asset
Management as part of the SAP solution
portfolio.
• It introduces the basic business
processes involved in Plant
Maintenance, as well as how these are
• Organization of Plant Maintenance
• Technical objects
• Maintenance due to malfunctions
• Predictive maintenance
• Refurbishment of spare parts
• Predictive Plant Maintenance
(maintenance planning)
• Project-based Plant Maintenance (brief
overview)
• Work clearance management (brief
overview)
• Mobile solutions (brief overview)
prerequisite for the following advanced
Plant Maintenance courses. The
Enterprise Asset Management area within
the SAP ERP solution is a further
development of the R/3 Plant
Maintenance (PM) component. However,
customers with R/3 Releases 4.6C and
Enterprise 4.7 can participate in Enterprise
Asset Management courses below releases
SAP ERP 2004 and SAP ERP 2005 without
problem.

PLM318 · Analytics in Enterprise Asset Management

DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES 30-mrt-09

TARGET GROUP queries in the Business Information NOTES

• Project manager
• Project team
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
PLM300 (Plant Maintenance)
GOALS
• This course demonstrates how source
data is aggregated from different
business processes in Enterprise Asset
Management and prepared for reports
and analyses.
• Participants learn about the uses of
different, Plant Maintenance-based
Warehouse (BW).
• The course also explains how to plan
budgets in the Plant Maintenance area
using the planning function in BW(BW-
BPS).
CONTENT
• Source data
• Updates and staging
• Reports and analyses
• Planning Plant Maintenance budgets
SOFTWARE
SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
The Enterprise Asset Management area
within the SAP ERP solution is a further
development of the R/3 Plant
Maintenance (PM) component. However,
customers with R/3 Releases 4.6C and
Enterprise 4.7 can participate in Enterprise
Asset Management courses below releases
SAP ERP 2004 and SAP ERP 2005 without
problem.

www.sap.nl/education 91
SAP ERP Analytics
Workforce Analytics

SAPHR ERP HR050 ERP HR580 ERP

SAP ERP Human Capital Business Processes in Analytics & Reporting in
Management Overview Human Capital Human Capital
Management Management

2 days 5 days 2 days

ERP030
Management Empowered
by SAP ERP Human Capital
Management

2 hours

SAP600 ERP SAP630 ERP

Navigation in Analytics & Reporting in
SAP Report Human Capital
Management

2 hours 2 hours

HR580 · Analytics & Reporting in Human Capital Management

DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES 16-apr-09

TARGET GROUP • Set up payroll infotypes inthe Business Information Warehouse

• Members of the human resources • Explain HCM in Business Information and in Strategic Enterprise Management
department Warehouse (Benchmarking) and in SOFTWARE

• Project teams for HR reporting
• Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
HR305 (Master Data Configuration)
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• HR306 (Configuration of Time
Recording) or
• HR505 (Organizational Management)
GOALS
• Explain Standard Reporting and
Information Systems in Human
Resources
• Describe Logical Databases and InfoSets
• Build Queries with Ad Hoc Query
• Build Queries with SAP Query
Strategic Enterprise Management
(Balanced Scorecard)
CONTENT
• Overview of all HR reporting tools
• Specific applications of various tools to
meet user and company requirements
• Effective use and adaptation of standard
reports, queries, InfoSets, and key
figures.
• Creation and layout of queries for Ad
Hoc Query and for SAP Query.
• Generation of payroll infotypes and
access simulated infotypes for Time
Management
• Outlook on the integration of HCM
SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
NOTES
• This course HR580 (Reporting in
Human Resources) does not teach how
to program reports. This is dealt with in
course HR350 (Programming in HR).
• This course also discusses the functions
of the following SAP releases: R/3 4.6,
R/3 Enterprise Ext. 1.10/ 2.00 and ERP
2004.

92
SAP ERP Financials
Financial Supply Chain Management

SAP01
SAP Overview

3 days

SAPFIN ERP AC010 ERP FSC020 ERP FSC200 ERP

SAP ERP Financials Business Processes in Processes in Credit Customizing
Financial Accounting Management SAP Dispute &
SAP Collections
Management
2 days 5 days 3 days 2 days

TERP21 ERP
SAP ERP: Introduction into
Processes in Financial
Accounting

6 hours

AC805 · Cash Management

DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES 11-feb-09

TARGET GROUP • Long-term financial budgeting is not account determination)

• Project team
• Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
Practical knowledge of SAP Financial
Accounting
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• AC010 Business Processes in Financial
Accounting
• Experience with the SAP system
(applications and Customizing)
GOALS
• Describe the functions for cash
management and for short- to
medium- term liquidity monitoring.
covered in this course.
• Learn how to use Customizing to adapt
the system to meet your company-
specific requirements.
CONTENT
• Short-term financial budgeting:
calculating daily balances based on
value dates
• Manual memo records
• Manual check deposits (Customizing
entry screens, creating posting rules)
• Electronic and manual bank statements
(application and Customizing;
company-specific posting rules and
• Medium-termfinancial budgeting,
liquidity forecast (projection of cash
flows taking into account payment
history, integration of logistics data and
financial transactions)
• Account clearing
SOFTWARE
SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
NOTES
The functions of the following SAP
releases are also covered in this course:
R/3 4.6, R/3 Enterprise Ext. 1.10/ 2.00,
SAP ERP Central Component 5.0.

www.sap.nl/education 93
SAP ERP Financials
Financial Supply Chain Management
FSC010 · Processes in Treasury and Risk Management
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES 12-jan-09
TARGET GROUP
• Project manager
• Project team members
• Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• SAPFIN (SAP ERP Financials) or SAP01
(SAP Overview)
GOALS
Using the core capabilities in SAP Treasury
and Risk Management (Transaction
Manager, Market Risk Analyzer and
Credit Risk Analyzer).
CONTENT
• Business partners and standing
instructions
• Banks/house banks
FSC020 · Processes in Credit Management
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES 21-jan-09, 3-jun-09
TARGET GROUP
• Decision makers
• Key users and project team members
• Consultants and sales employees
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
Basic knowledge of sales and financial
processes
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• SAPFIN (SAP ERP Financials) or SAP01
(SAP Overview)
• SCM600 (Processes in Sales and
Distribution)
GOALS
• Give an overview of SAP Financial
Supply Chain Management (FSCM) and
understand the SAP approach to
developing this solution.
• Gain insight into the SAP FSCM
components SAP Credit Management,
Biller Direct, Dispute Management, and
Collections Management, and
94
• Transaction Manager: instruments
available for money market trading,
foreign exchange, and securities
• Structure of the financial instruments
product type, transaction type, and
flow type
• Process for front and back office
• Integration with financial accounting,
payment program, and cash
management
• Parallel accounting in Treasury
(multiple GAAPs)
• Market Risk Analyzer with analysis,
value at risk, and results database
• Credit Risk Analyzer with exposure
calculation and limit management
• Reporting in Treasury
understand how these components
allow a company to make its processes
more efficient within the financial
supply chain.
CONTENT
• Definition of financial supply chain and
its business processes
• SAP FSCM motivation and functions
• Functions and mapping of an order-to-
cash process with the SAP FSCM
components SAP Credit Management,
Biller Direct, Dispute Management, and
Collections Management:
- Credit risk management and
monitoring with SAP Credit
Management
- Presentation of customer invoices and
customer data with SAP Biller Direct
- Managing complaints and
underpayments with SAP Dispute
Management
SOFTWARE
SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
NOTES
The functions of the following SAP
releases are also covered in this course:
R/3 Enterprise 2.00, SAP ERP Central
Component 5.0 The course FSC010
(Processes in Treasury and Risk
Management) shows the components of
the Financial Supply Chain using different
processes. The course does not cover
Customizing of components.
- Active processing of outside claims with
SAP Collections Management
• Integration of these SAP FSCM
components with one another, SAP
Accounts Receivable Accounting, and
other SAP ERP components
• Architecture variants for demonstrating
possible ways of integrating these
components in existing system
landscapes
SOFTWARE
SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
NOTES
The content of this course is tailored for
participants who have the following SAP
Software Releases: R/3 4.6c, R/3 Enterprise
Ext. 1.10/2.00, SAP ERP Central
Component 5.0.
SAP ERP Financials
Financial Supply Chain Management
FSC120 · SAP Inhouse-Cash
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• Project Leaders
• Responsible members of the project
team
• Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• AC010 Financial Accounting and
Reporting
• Experience with the SAP system
GOALS
• This course enables participants to
perform the core business processes and
functions of SAP In-House Cash.
FSC200 · Customizing SAP Dispute & SAP Collections Management
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES 8-jun-09
TARGET GROUP
• Decision makers
• Key users and project members
• Consultants and sales employees
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• Basic knowledge of sales and financial
processes
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• FSC020 Processes in SAP Credit
Management, SAP Biller Direct, SAP
Dispute and SAP Collections
Management
GOALS
• The participants learn about the
configuration of the SAP Dispute
• Participants will become familiar with
the necessary business processes and
master data.
CONTENT
• Master data maintenance: organization
elements, business partner, product,
account and account hierarchies,
conditions, limits
• Account maintenance and payment
transactions:
- Process automation in In-House Cash
- Account maintenance
- Process automation of internal payment
transactions
Management and SAP Collections
Management components.
CONTENT
• How SAP Records, Case, and Dispute
Management fit together
• Structure of dispute case processing
with regard to the case type
• Process integration for SAP Dispute
Management and the operational
system landscape (for example, FSCM
BAdIs)
• Organization and strategies in SAP
Collections Management
• Promise to pay (case)
• Integration with accounts receivable
- Process automation of external payment
transactions
- Central cash receipt
- Cross-bank area posting
- Payment items / payment orders
- Creating bank statements
• Periodic tasks
SOFTWARE
SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
accounting
SOFTWARE
• SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
NOTES
The content of this course is tailored to
the following SAP software releases: SAP
R/3 4.6C, SAP R/3 Enterprise Ext. 1.10/2.00,
SAP ERP Central Component 5.0.
www.sap.nl/education 95
SAP ERP Financials
Treasury and Risk Management

SAP01 FSC010 ERP

SAP Overview Business Processes in
Treasury & Risk
Management

3 days 5 days
OR
SAPFIN ERP AC805 ERP FSC800 ERP
SAP ERP Financials Cash Management SAP Liquidity Planner
(Cash Accounting and
Cash Flow Planning)

2 days 3 days 2 days

OR
TERP21 ERP AC010 ERP FSC120 ERP
SAP ERP: Introduction into Business Processes in SAP Inhouse-Cash
Processes in Financial Financial Accounting
Accounting

6 hours 5 days 2 days

FSC800 · SAP Liquidity Planner (Cash Accounting and Cash Flow Planning)
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP SOFTWARE • Difference to SAP Cash Management

• Decision makers • SAP ERP Central Component 6.0, SAP • Liquidity Analysis Using SAP Actual
• Key users and project members NW-BI 7.0 Calculation
• Consultants and sales employees CONTENT • Analysis Reports
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED • The concept of Cash Accounting • Modeling of SAP Liquidity Planner
• AC010 Business Processes in Financial • Tasks of Cash Accounting and Liquidity • Planing Layout
Accounting Planning • Extraction of data
• AC805 Cash Management • Recipients and Need for Information • Reporting
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED • Classification of SAP Liquidity Planner
• Knowledge & experience in SAP-BI in FSCM
GOALS • Actual Calculation (ECC part of SAP
• The participants learn about the Liquidity Planner)
configuration of the SAP Liquidity • Planning (Planning part of SAP
Planning processes and functions Liquidity Planner)

96
SAP ERP Financials
Financial Accounting

SAPFIN ERP AC010 ERP AC200 ERP AC201 ERP

SAP ERP Financials Business Processes in Financial Accounting Payment & Dunning
Financial Accounting Customizing I Program, Correspondence,
Interest Calculation

2 days 5 days 5 days 2 days

SAP01 AC050 ERP AC805 ERP AC202 ERP

SAP Overview Fin & Mgt Accounting with Cash Management Financial Accounting
New GL Customizing II

3 days 5 days 3 days 2 days

ERP020 ERP AC305 ERP AC205 ERP AC206 ERP

Management Empowered Asset Accounting Individual Parallel Valuation and
by SAP ERP Financials Account Closing Financial Reporting

2 hours
4 days 4 days 3 days

TERP21 ERP CA990 ERP AC210 ERP AC212 ERP AC400 ERP
SAP ERP: Introduction into Currency Conversion New General Ledger Migration to the Programming in Financials
Processes in Financial New General Ledger
Accounting
3 days
6 hours 2 days 4 days 5 days

DERPAA ERP AC220 ERP

Delta SAP System in Asset Special Purpose Ledger
Accounting

2 days 5 days

DERPFI ERP AC660 ERP SEM240 ERP SEM245 ERP

Delta SAP System in EC-CS Consolidation BW-based Consolidation SEM-BCS Migration and
Financial Accounting Functions Special Cases

2 days 5 days 5 days 3 days

CERTIFICATION Solution Academy basic training as Solution Consultant Financials – Financial Accounting (for new consultants)
TFIN50 > SM001 > TFIN52 > C_TFIN52_05
ALTERNATIVE COURSES AC200 > AC201 > AC202 > AC206 > AC210 > AC205 > AC280 > AC305 > SM001 > C_TFIN52_05

Voor de meest actuele certificeringinformatie verwijzen wij u graag naar www.sap.com/services/education/certification

AC050 · Fin & Mgt Accounting with New GL 30

DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES 19-jan-09

TARGET GROUP GOALS • Integration of Financial and

• Project managers and project team The course gives you an overview of the
members different components in Financial and
• Employees wanting to gain an overview Management Accounting and shows the
of Financial and Management relationships and dependencies between
Accounting, as well as the functions of them.
the new general ledger CONTENT
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED • Basic structures and processes in
Basic knowledge of accounting Financial and Management Accounting
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED • Master data maintenance
• SAP01 SAP Overview or • Typical transactions in the new general
• SAPFIN overview of SAP ERP Financials ledger, accounts receivable and
accounts payable, and in the area of
overhead cost controlling
Management Accounting with other
SAP ERP processes
SOFTWARE
SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
NOTES
The functions of the following SAP
releases are also covered in this course:
SAP ERP Central Component 5.0.

www.sap.nl/education 97
SAP ERP Financials
Financial Accounting

DERPAA · Delta SAP System in Asset Accounting

DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP • Asset class wizard • Depreciation calculation methods

• Project team leads and team members
in "Asset Accounting" projects
• SAP consultants and partners
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
Good understanding of asset-specific
organizational structures: the chart of
depreciation, depreciation areas, and asset
classes, from releases 3.x or later
GOALS
• Working with account assignment
objects
• Integration of Asset Accounting with
other components, particularly the
option of creating master records from
other components:
• Integration with MM
• Presentation of single-screen
transactions
• RAPOST2000
• Changes and enhanced functions for
legacy data transfer from a non-SAP
system (not SAP R/2)
• Legacy data transfer using Microsoft
Excel
• Parallel valuation from an asset
accounting perspective
SOFTWARE

Understand new functions and features in
the FI-AA module since release 3.x
CONTENT
• Changes and enhancements in the area
of master data, for example:
• Use of tab pages
• Automatic offsetting entry or SAP ERP Central Component 5.0
intercompany asset transfer:
• changes and enhancements in periodic
processing in Asset Accounting and in
the calculation of depreciation
• Schedule Manager

DERPFI · Delta SAP System in Financial Accounting

DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP check, automating the payment NOTES

Project team
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
Good knowledge of the Financial
Accounting component
GOALS
Learn the business concepts for the most
important new functions in Financial
Accounting
CONTENT
• New developments in ECC 6.0:
• Controlling and monitoring closing
operations
• New developments in ECC 5.0:
• Short introduction to the new general
ledger
• New developments in SAP R/3
Enterprise Financial Accounting:
• Accrual Engine
• Update cash journal
process) If you want to gain an overview of the
• Worklists for exchange rate businesses processes in the new general
maintenance ledger, attend the overview course AC050
• New developments in FI release 4.6: (Financial and Management Accounting
• Single-screen entry transaction (Enjoy) with the New General Ledger). You can
• Cash journal learn about the Customizing for the new
• Indirect quotation of exchange rates general ledger in AC210. In course
• Tolerance groups for clearing G/L DERPFI, you are given a brief overview of
accounts the functions in new general ledger
• User roles in FI (4.6c) accounting.
• New developments in FI release 4.5:
• Bank chains
• Payment currency
• Open item evaluation
• Dual control principle for master data
• Dunning and correspondence
• Optical archiving of outgoing FI
documents
SOFTWARE

• Payment transactions (debit balance SAP ERP Central Component 6.0

98
SAP ERP Financials
Financial Accounting
AC200 · Financial Accounting Customizing I
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES 12-jan-09
TARGET GROUP
• Project team
• Consultants
• People responsible for applications
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• AC010 Business Processes in Financial
Accounting
• Basic knowledge of Financial
Accounting
GOALS
Participants become familiar with the
basic concepts of general ledger and busi-
ness partner configuration, with special
attention to business process control.
SOFTWARE
SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
AC201 · Payment and Dunning Program, Correspondence, Interest Calculation
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES 22-jan-09
TARGET GROUP
• Project team
• Consultants
• People responsible for applications
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• AC010 Business Processes in Financial
Accounting
• AC200 Accounting Customizing I:
General Ledger, Accounts Payable,
Accounts Receivable
AC202 · Financial Accounting: Customizing II
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES 26-jan-09
TARGET GROUP
• Project team
• Consultants
• People responsible for applications
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• AC010 Business Processes in Financial
Accounting
• AC200 Accounting Customizing I:
General Ledger, Accounts Payable,
Accounts Receivable
SOFTWARE
SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
CONTENT
• Organizational units in Financial
Accounting
• Fiscal years and posting periods
• Currencies and exchange rates
• G/L accounts
• Customer/vendor accounts
• Bank master data
• Document control
• Posting documents
• Automatic postings
• Input and display control
• Clearing open items
• Manual incoming and outgoing pay-
ments
• Cash journal
• Basic concepts of logistics integration
GOALS
Participants learn about periodic process-
ing of business partner accounting and
the related Customizing settings.
CONTENT
• Automatic payment/payment program
• Automatic dunning/dunning program
• Correspondence
• Interest Calculation
SOFTWARE
SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
GOALS
The participants become familiar with the
application and the Customizing of the
functions described in the course content.
CONTENT
• Special G/L transactions (down payment
requests, down payments and alloca-
tion, individual value adjustments, and
so on)
• Document parking in Financial
Accounting
• Substitution, Validation and Archiving
in Financial Accounting
NOTES
Account determination is covered from a
sales and distribution perspective in
course SCM615 (Billing). The course
SCM550 (Customizing in Materials
Management) covers account determina-
tion from a materials management per-
spective. The course is based on the classic
general ledger. If you want to gain an
overview of the businesses processes in the
new general ledger, attend the overview
course AC050 (Financial and Management
Accounting with the New General
Ledger). You can learn about the
Customizing for the new general ledger in
AC210. The functions of the following
SAP releases are also covered in this
course: R/3 4.6, R/3 Enterprise Ext. 1.10/
2.00, SAP ERP Central Component 5.0.
NOTES
The functions of the following SAP releas-
es are also covered in this course: R/3 4.6,
R/3 Enterprise Ext. 1.10/ 2.00, SAP ERP
Central Component 5.0. This course is
based on the classic general ledger. If you
want to gain an overview of the businesses
processes in the new general ledger,
attend the overview course AC050
(Financial and Management Accounting
with the New General Ledger). You can
learn about the Customizing for the new
general ledger in AC210.
NOTES
The functions of the following SAP releas-
es are also covered in this course: R/3 4.6,
R/3 Enterprise Ext. 1.10/ 2.00, SAP ERP
Central Component 5.0. This course is
based on the classic general ledger. If you
want to gain an overview of the businesses
processes in the new general ledger,
attend the overview course AC050
(Financial and Management Accounting
with the New General Ledger). You can
learn about the Customizing for the new
general ledger in AC210.
www.sap.nl/education 99
SAP ERP Financials
Financial Accounting
AC205 · Individual Account Closing
DURATION 4 days PRICE € 2360 STARTING DATES 3-feb-09
TARGET GROUP
• Project team
• Consultants
• People responsible for applications
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• AC010 Business Processes in Financial
Accounting
• AC200 Accounting Customizing I:
General Ledger, Accounts Payable,
Accounts Receivable
GOALS
• Participants learn about the time frame
and integration flow of the creation of
periodic closings in Financial
Accounting.
• They learn the necessary system settings
for the creation of individual account
closings in the SAP system.
AC206 · Parallel Valuation and Financial Reporting
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• Project team members involved in
converting to IAS (IFRS) and US GAAP
• SAP Customers who want to create
parallel valuations with the old general
ledger (as opposed to the new general
ledger)
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
Excellent knowledge of parallel valuation
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• AC205 (Financial Closing)
• WDEBF3 (Accounting 3 – Overview of
Accounting in Accordance with IAS and
US GAAP) or equivalent experience in
international accounting regulations
GOALS
• Learn the basic methods for mapping
parallel valuation in SAP systems (using
the classic general ledger)
100
CONTENT
• Month and year-end closing in
Financial Accounting
• Balance sheet and P&L
• Preparatory closing postings in Human
Capital Management, logistics, and
Financial Accounting
• Technical and organizational activities
and documentary steps
• Monitoring closing operations
• Configuration of periodic closings in
Financial Accounting
• Implementation and monitoring of
closing, using the closing cockpit
• Brief look at the new general ledger
SOFTWARE
SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
• Gain a deeper insight into the topic
using examples and demos in SAP
systems
CONTENT
• International accounting: Current and
future trends
• Learn the fundamentals for mapping
parallel valuation in SAP systems (using
the classic general ledger)
• Methods of mapping parallel
accounting in SAP systems for fixed
assets, current assets, own capital and
outside capital, and profit and loss
statements with a focus on Account
Solution
• Mapping of the reporting requirements
that result from parallel valuation
NOTES
Due to the wide variety of topics covered
in this course, thorough accounting
knowledge is required. Material valuation
is covered in detail in course CA535
(Material Valuation). This course is based
on the classic general ledger. If you want
to gain an overview of the businesses
processes in the new general ledger,
attend the overview course AC050
(Financial and Management Accounting
with the New General Ledger). You can
learn about the Customizing for the new
general ledger in AC210. The functions of
the following SAP releases are also covered
in this course: R/3 4.6, R/3 Enterprise
Ext. 1.10/ 2.00, SAP ERP Central
Component 5.0.
SOFTWARE
SAP ERP Central Component 5.0
NOTES
This course provides a detailed description
of how parallel accounting can be
implemented in SAP systems. This course
provides a brief look at the new general
ledger. This topic is covered in more detail
in the course AC210. The content of this
course is appropriate for participants on
the following SAP software releases: R/3
4.6, R/3 Enterprise Ext. 1.10/ 2.00.
SAP ERP Financials
Financial Accounting
AC210 · New General Ledger
DURATION 4 days PRICE € 2360 STARTING DATES 24-mrt-09, 2-jun-09
TARGET GROUP
• People responsible for the introduction
of the new general ledger.
• Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
A good knowledge of using the classic
general ledger
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
A good knowledge of Financial
Accounting subsidiary ledgers and
Management Accounting (Controlling)
GOALS
• Participants should understand the
logic of the new general ledger.
• Participants should be able to activate,
configure, and use the new general
ledger.
AC212 · Migration to the New General Ledger
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• Persons who are responsible for
implementing the new general ledger
• Consultants who support customers
during the migration from the classic
general ledger to the new general ledger
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• Very good knowledge of the new
general ledger (SAP customer course
• AC210 New General Ledger (in mySAP
ERP))
• Very good knowledge of using the
classic general ledger – in application
and customizing
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• After this course, participants should be
able to understand the wide range of
complex interrelations of a migration to
CONTENT
• Introduction – the concept of the new
general ledger
• System configuration (activating the
new general ledger, defining and
deriving segments, assigning scenarios,
defining customer-specific fields)
• Documents and document splitting
• Integration with the Financial
Accounting subsidiary ledgers and with
Controlling (key word: real-time
integration of Controlling into
Financial Accounting)
• Reporting (=> using the new Financial
Accounting drilldown reporting
function (key word: segment reporting)
and the new G/L account balance
display)
• Closing operations
the new general ledger
• Participants should get to know and be
able to use the service SAP General
Ledger Migration, provided by SAP
• After this course, participants should be
able to carry out a migration project
SOFTWARE
• ERP ECC 6.0
CONTENT
• Fundamental questions that arise
during a new G/L migration
• What is a migration project like in
practice?
• What does the binding service Service
SAP General Ledger Migration provided
by SAP offer:
- What service sessions does SAP offer?
- What is the migration cockpit?
- What are the system requirements?
• Parallel financial reporting and the new
general ledger (introduction of the
ledger solution in the new general
ledger and the integration of this
solution into Asset Accounting
• Transition/data transfer from existing
customers (=> no external data transfer
from new customers)
SOFTWARE
SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
NOTES
Derivation from profit centers from other
SAP modules required for segment
balances is covered in detail in course
AC610 (Profit Center Accounting). The
functions of the following SAP releases are
also covered in this course: SAP ERP
Central Component 5.0.
• Migration assuming that migration
scenarios 1 – 5 are in place. More
information about the migration
scenarios are available at
http://service.sap.com/GLMIG
(Microsoft PowerPoint presentation
Overview Presentation SAP General
Ledger Migration)
NOTES
• Aspects of a migration with ERP ECC
5.0 will also be covered.
www.sap.nl/education 101
SAP ERP Financials
Financial Accounting
AC220 · Special Purpose Ledger
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
Project team
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• AC040 Business Processes in
Management Accounting (Controlling)
• AC010 Business Processes in Financial
Accounting
GOALS
Participants learn about the functionality
of the Special Ledger (FI-SL) and how to
use it in the context of Financial
Accounting. They also gain insight into
the most important control and data
entry techniques.
AC305 · Asset Accounting
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES 16-feb-09
TARGET GROUP
• Project team
• Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• AC010 Business Processes in Financial
Accounting
GOALS
• This course focuses on the various
business processes and managing master
data in FI-AA. It also covers periodic
processing and evaluation methods
using standard reporting.
• Participants will also learn about
organizational structures and using the
Asset Accounting component
configuration options to customize the
SAP system to the fit the business
processes of a particular enterprise.
102
CONTENT SOFTWARE
• Special ledger (FI-SL): introduction and SAP ERP Central Component 5.0
example NOTES
• Table definition and installation, This course provides a brief look at the
characteristics and key figures new general ledger. You can learn about
• Updates and adjustments, accounting the Customizing for the new general
principles ledger in AC210. The functions of the
• Validation and substitution following SAP releases are also covered in
• Sets and essential features of the Report this course: R/3 4.6, R/3 Enterprise
Painter Ext. 1.10/ 2.00.
• Planning
• Allocation
• Roll up
• Tools
• Summary
• A look ahead to the new general ledger
CONTENT NOTES
• Chart of depreciation This course is based on the classic general
• Depreciation areas ledger. If you want to gain an overview of
• Asset classes the businesses processes in the new
• Master data general ledger, attend the overview course
• Asset transactions and organizational AC050 (Financial and Management
processes Accounting with the New General
• Valuation Ledger). You can learn about the
• Periodic processing Customizing for the new general ledger in
• Information system AC210. The functions of the following
• Transfer of legacy data (not migration SAP releases are also covered in this
from SAP R/2 to SAP R/3 or to ERP course:
Central Component 5.0) R/3 4.6, R/3 Enterprise Ext. 1.10/ 2.00,
• Parallel valuation SAP ERP Central Component 5.0.
SOFTWARE
SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
SAP ERP Financials
Financial Accounting
AC660 · EC-CS: Consolidation Functions
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• Consultants who want to implement
consolidation
• Employees in the user department who
are involved implementation project or
who work with the
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
Knowledge of basic business concepts with
regard consolidation
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• AC010 Business Processes in Financial
Accounting
• AC040 Business Processes in
Management Accounting (Controlling)
AC665 · EC-CS: Integration
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
Project team
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• A knowledge of the components
Financial Accounting (FI) and
Consolidation (ES-CS)
• A basic knowledge of consolidation
• AC660 EC-CS: Consolidation Functions
• AC610 Profit Center Accounting
GOALS
Set up a consolidation system and become
familiar required system settings for SAP
Consolidation
CONTENT
• Consolidation types
• Consolidation units and hierarchies
• Charts of accounts
• Manual entry of reported financial data
• Transfer of account balancing data from
external
• Validation
• Manual postings
• Currency conversion
• Elimination of IC payables and
receivables
GOALS
Integrate EC-CS Consolidation with
Financial Accounting (FI) and Profit
Center Accounting (EC-PCA)
CONTENT
• Overview of integration between FI, CO,
EC-PCA, and EC-CS
• Creating EC-CS master data through
integration with FI and EC-PCA
• Linking EC-PCA and EC-CS hierarchies
• Methods of data collection from FI and
EC-PCA
• Elimination of IU revenue and expense
• Reclassification
• Consolidation of investments
(operations from equity consolidation)
• Form-based drilldown reports
• Master data and control data reports
• Versions and restatement
• Balance carryforward
SOFTWARE
SAP ERP Central Component 5.0
NOTES
If you are interested in the BW-based
consolidation attend course SEM240. The
functions of the following SAP releases are
also course: R/3 4.6, R/3 Enterprise Ext.
1.10/ 2.00.
• Reconciliation of FI with PCA in EC-CS
• Mapping the required system settings
for transferring integrated data from FI
or EC-PCA
SOFTWARE
SAP R/3 Enterprise
NOTES
The functions of the following SAP
releases are also covered in this course:
R/3 4.6
www.sap.nl/education 103
SAP ERP Financials
Financial Accounting

CA990 · Currency Conversion

DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP SOFTWARE - Activities after conversion

• Project team members • SAP ERP Central Component 6.0 • Project management
• Consultants CONTENT • Appendix
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED • Introduction to currency changeover NOTES

• Experience with SAP systems
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED
• SAP01 SAP Overview
• SAP125 SAP Navigation 2005
GOALS
• The participants become familiar with
the SAP functions of currency
conversion
• Changeover of external relationships • A system will be provided for
- Changeover of Business Partners demonstration of settings, but this
- Expiring Currencies training contains no standard exercises
• Local Currency Changeover and solutions
- Overview
- Preparations
- Technical conversion process
- Reconciliation in the applications -
handling of rounding differences

104
SAP ERP Financials
Management Accounting

SAPFIN ERP AC040 ERP AC405 ERP AC412 ERP

SAP ERP Financials Business Processes in Cost Center & Internal Cost Center Accounting
Management Accounting Order Accounting Extended Functionality

2 days 5 days 5 days 3 days

SAP01 AC050 ERP AC400 ERP AC420 ERP

SAP Overview Fin & Mgt Accounting with Programming in Financials Template Allocation
New GL Procedure for Processes

3 days 5 days 3 days 2 days

ERP020 ERP AC505 ERP AC520 ERP

Management Empowered Product Cost Planning Controlling for
by SAP ERP Financials Make to Order /
Stock Production

2 hours 5 days 5 days

TERP22 ERP AC605 ERP AC530 ERP

SAP ERP: Introduction into Profitability Analysis Actual Costing /
Processes in Management Material Ledger
Accounting/CO

6 hours 5 days 3 days

AC610 ERP
Profit Center Accounting

3 days

AC020 ERP AC350 ERP AC990 ERP

Investment Management System Configuration for Tips & Tricks in
Investment Management Management Accounting

3 days 2 days 3 days

CERTIFICATION

Solution Academy basic training as Solution Consultant Financials – Management Accounting TFIN20 > TFIN22 > SM001 > TFIN24 > C_TFIN22_05
ALTERNATIVE COURSES SAP125 > ERP001 > AC040 > AC405 > AC610 > AC415 > AC505 > AC520 > AC605 > SM001 > C_TFIN22_05

Voor de meest actuele certificeringinformatie verwijzen wij u graag naar www.sap.com/services/education/certification

www.sap.nl/education 105
SAP ERP Financials
Management Accounting
AC020 · Investment Management
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP Project managers
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
AC040 Cost Management and Controlling
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
Knowledge of the components FI-AA,
CO-OM-OPA, or PS would be an
advantage
GOALS
Acquire a basic knowledge of the use of
SAP systems to monitor and manage
investments
AC350 · System Configuration for Investment Management
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
Project team members
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
AC020 Investment Management as this
course barely covers the potential uses of
Investment Management
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• Basic knowledge of the SAP Project
System
• AC415 Internal Orders
• AC305 Asset Accounting
• Experience with the SAP R/3 System
GOALS
Implement an Investment Management
system
106
CONTENT
• Complete business process for
Investment Management
• Appropriation requests
• Planning and budgeting for investment
programs and investment measures
• CO internal orders, projects and
maintenance orders as investment
measures
• Invoicing investment measures to assets
and cost centers
• Direct capitalization
• Depreciation simulation
• Using equipment and maintenance
orders in plant maintenance
• Investment Management Information
System
SOFTWARE
SAP ERP Central Component 5.0
CONTENT
• This course does contain a brief
overview of the business processes in
Investment Management.
• Its focus, however, is on providing
participants with a knowledge of the
necessary Customizing steps with which
to map these business processes.
• The course covers Customizing steps for
implementing the following
components:
- Investment program: All settings for
structuring the investment program as
well as for the planning and budgeting
process
- Appropriation request: Settings for
master data maintenance, planning,
and approval
NOTES
The SAP R/3 Project System, CO internal
orders, and maintenance orders are only
considered in this course in terms of their
relationships to investment measures.
This course does not cover configuration
for implementing Investment
Management. The emphasis is on using
Investment Management for managing
capital investments in the SAP R/3 system.
Particular emphasis is placed on
accounting issues. The special functions
of maintenance orders and projects are
only addressed as far as they typically
relate to investment projects and
investment orders. The content of this
course is appropriate for participants on
the following SAP software releases: R/3
4.6, R/3 Enterprise Ext. 1.10/ 2.00.
- Investment projects as investment
measures: Settings for master data
maintenance, planning and budgeting
processes, and settlement
- Information system: Introduction to
the drilldown tool and summarization
SOFTWARE
R/3 4.7
NOTES
• This course only considers Customizing
of the project system from the
perspective of Investment Management.
• Settings for special management
accounting functions for projects are
addressed only as far as they are
typically required for investment
projects.
SAP ERP Financials
Management Accounting
AC400 · Programming in Financials
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• Project managers and project team
members
• Team members who are responsible for
the implementation projects in
Financials
• System managers and developers who
are responsible for customer-specific
reports and programming in Financials.
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• AC010 (Business Processes in Financial
Accounting) or AC040 (Business
Processes in Management Accounting)
• Basic knowledge of a programming
language
AC405 · Cost Center & Internal Order Accounting
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES 20-apr-09, 22-jun-09
TARGET GROUP
• Project team
• Team members responsible for
implementing overhead cost
controlling in the SAP system
• Accounting employees responsible for
planning, allocating, and analyzing
costs in overhead costs
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• SAPFIN overview of SAP ERP Financials
• AC040 Business Processes in
Management Accounting (Controlling)
• AC050 Financial and Management
Accounting with the New General
Ledger
GOALS
• Improve knowledge of programming
and train using case studies.
• Customize the SAP system for each
customer, with and without
modifications.
• Use BAdI interfaces and reporting tools.
CONTENT
• Basic concepts of the ABAP workbench
and ABAP dictionary
• Debugging and testing
• Reporting using the SAP List Viewer
(ALV)
• Function modules in template
allocation technology
GOALS
• Gain an overview of the design and
structure of cost element, cost center,
and internal order accounting
• Become familiar with the value flows to
and within overhead cost controlling in
the SAP system
• Learn about and set up cost allocation
methods in overhead cost controlling
• Learn about actual and planned cost
allocation methods within overhead
cost controlling
CONTENT
• Organizational structures and master
data in overhead cost controlling
• Account assignment of costs to cost
centers and internal orders via
preceding applications
• Tools for transaction-based postings
within overhead cost controlling
• Programs on master data maintenance,
status monitoring, and period end
closings
SOFTWARE
SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
NOTES
The functions of the following SAP
releases are also covered in this course: R/3
4.6, R/3 Enterprise Ext. 1.10/ 2.00, SAP ERP
Central Component 5.0. The content of
this course is not relevant to Delta ABAP.
• Periodic cost allocation procedures
within overhead cost controlling
• Planning of cost and cost allocations
within overhead cost controlling
• Planning in overhead cost controlling
• Reconciliation of cost accounting with
financial accounting using
reconciliation ledgers
• Budget management and availability
control in internal orders
• Cost analysis using the information
system
SOFTWARE
SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
NOTES
The functions of the following SAP
releases are also covered in this course: R/3
4.6, R/3 Enterprise Ext. 1.10/ 2.00, SAP ERP
Central Component 5.0.
www.sap.nl/education 107
SAP ERP Financials
Management Accounting
AC412 · Cost Center Accounting: Extended Functionality
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• SAP project team members responsible
for implementing the extended
functions of overhead cost controlling
• Management Accounting staff who are
responsible for efficient activity
allocation, extended planning
functions, and differentiated analysis of
target costs, variances, or revaluation at
actual prices in SAP systems
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
AC405 Cost Center and Internal Order
Accounting
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• Knowledge of cost accounting
GOALS
• Describe the methods for allocating
quantities in Cost Center Accounting,
including template technology
• Understand the input and the methods
for the extended planning tools for
AC420 · Activity-Based Costing Template Accounting
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• Project team members responsible for
implementing Activity-Based Costing
(ABC) in the SAP system
• Project team members who would like
to selectively use Activity-Based Costing
without a company-wide roll out
• People interested in allocating processes
and activities using the Activity-Based
Costing template technique
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• AC040 Business Processes in
Management Accounting (Controlling)
• AC405(Cost Center and Internal Order
Accounting)
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• AC412 Cost Center Accounting:
Extended Functionality
108
determining fixed and variable prices in
Cost Center Accounting
• Gain insight into the specific use of
different cost accounting systems in
Overhead Cost Controlling
• Describe the options for analyzing
target costs, variance, and revaluation
CONTENT
• Activity allocation: concept and master
data
• Advanced planning methods
• Indirect activity allocation with
automatic quantity determination and
template allocation
• Activity allocations in Cost Center
Accounting that are based on the
operating rate (target = actual activity
allocation)
• Splitting fixed costs among activity
types
• Plan price calculation with cost
• AC505 Product Cost Planning or
• AC605 Profitability Analysis
GOALS
• Describe the SAP approach to Activity-
Based Costing
• Use templates
• Customize the template allocation
technique
CONTENT
• ABC as a cost management method
• Template allocation procedure: user-
friendly allocation according to cause of
activity types and processes according to
any criteria (resource and cost drivers)
• Master data of Activity-Based Costing
• Quantity and value flows between cost
centers and processes
• Quantity and value flows between
component split
• Target/actual comparisons
• Variance determination on cost centers
• Actual price determination and actual
price revaluation
SOFTWARE
SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
NOTES
The functions of the following SAP
releases are also covered in this course: R/3
4.6, R/3 Enterprise Ext. 1.10/ 2.00, SAP ERP
Central Component 5.0.
processes and cost objects or
profitability segments (plan and actual)
• Periodic processing
• Information system
• Customizing Activity-Based Costing
• Functions and environments for
templates
SOFTWARE
SAP R/3 Enterprise
NOTES
The functions of the following SAP
releases are also covered in this course:
R/3 4.6, R/3 Enterprise Ext. 1.10.
SAP ERP Financials
Management Accounting
AC505 · Product Cost Planning
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• Project team
• Employees responsible for
implementing Product Cost Planning in
the SAP system
• Employees responsible for product cost
planning analysis
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• AC040 Business Processes in
Management Accounting (Controlling)
• AC050 (Financial and Management
Accounting with the New General
Ledger)
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• A basic knowledge of bills of material
and routings
AC520 · Controlling for Make to Order / Stock Production
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• Members of the project team
responsible for implementing Cost
Object Controlling in the SAP system
• Participants with experience in
production planning and/or controlling
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• Basic knowledge of the logistics
processes: order-related production,
repetitive manufacturing, process
manufacturing, and sales orders (as cost
objects)
• AC040 (Financial Accounting in
Management Accounting)
• AC050 (Financial and Management
Accounting with the New General
Ledger)
• AC505 (Product Cost Planning)
GOALS
• Product Cost by Period and Product
Cost by Order for make-to-stock
production
GOALS
• Cost planning throughout the entire
product life cycle
• Analyzing and integrating master data
and structures in the SAP system
• Applying the different costing methods
• Setting up the information system
• Learning to use the system efficiently
CONTENT
• Base object and simulation costing
• Material costing without quantity
structure
• Setting up Product Cost Planning
• Material costing with quantity structure
• Costing run (mass processing)
• Advanced costing functions
• Understand cost object analysis at the
product and order level
• Product Cost by Sales order scenarios
for make-to-order production and
services
• Gain knowledge of functionality,
integration, and Customizing options in
Cost Object Controlling
CONTENT
• Objects in Cost Object Controlling:
Product Cost by Period (for example,
product cost collectors), Product Cost
by Order (for example, order-related
production, process orders), sales orders
• Valuated sales order stock
• Planning functions: preliminary costing
for product cost collectors, production
orders, process orders, sales orders
• Functions for actual costs: simultaneous
costing based on goods issue from the
warehouse, purchasing, confirmations,
activity allocations, and deliveries
• Extended valuation methods: mixed
costing, raw material costing, scrap
• Joint product cost estimates
• Easy Cost Planning
SOFTWARE
SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
NOTES
The functions of the following SAP
releases are also covered in this course:
R/3 4.6, R/3 Enterprise Ext. 1.10/ 2.00,
SAP ERP Central Component 5.0.
• Period-end closing (template activity
allocations, overhead rates, work in
process, variance calculation, results
analysis, settlement) for Product Cost by
Period and Product Cost by Order as
well as sales-order-related production
(service)
• Information system
SOFTWARE
SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
NOTES
As this course covers a broad topic area
with a number of integration aspects (for
example, production and sales), course
participants must ensure that they have
completed all prerequisite courses or
possess equivalent knowledge. The
functions of the following SAP releases are
also covered in this course: R/3 4.6, R/3
Enterprise Ext. 1.10/ 2.00, SAP ERP Central
Component 5.0.
www.sap.nl/education 109
SAP ERP Financials
Management Accounting
AC530 · Actual Costing / Material Ledger
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• Project team
• Employees responsible for
implementing the material ledger
• Employees who use actual costing in
the SAP system
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• AC040 Business Processes in
Management Accounting (Controlling)
• Basic knowledge of the relationships
and value flows in controlling
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• AC505 (Product Cost Planning)
AC605 · Profitability Analysis
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES 26-jan-09
TARGET GROUP
• Project team
• Accounting employees responsible for
profitability analysis
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• AC040 Business Processes in
Management Accounting (Controlling)
or
• AC050 (Financial and Management
Accounting with the New General
Ledger)
• AC405 Cost Center and Internal Order
Accounting
110
GOALS
Learn about the tasks and goals of the
material ledger and actual costing
CONTENT
• Multiple currencies and valuations
• Recording business transactions
• Price and currency variances
• Actual cost component split
• Structuring value chains
• Costing run with single-level and
multilevel price determination
• Special account determination in the
material ledger
GOALS
• Describe the structure of Profitability
Analysis (CO-PA) in the SAP system and
the business concepts used in
Management Accounting
• Explain the integrated flows of actual
and plan values
• Use the reporting functions to meet
information needs
CONTENT
• Introduction to concepts in profitability
and Sales Accounting
• Data structures
• Integration of actual costing and
profitability analysis
• Alternative valuation run
• Distributing usage variances
• Material valuation and changing
valuation prices
• Customizing
SOFTWARE
SAP R/3 Enterprise
NOTES
The functions of the following SAP
releases are also covered in this course:
R/3 4.6
• Valuation and derivation
• Actual postings in profitability analysis
• Planning tools and integrated planning
• Information system
• Additional functions
SOFTWARE
SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
NOTES
The functions of the following SAP
releases are also covered in this course: R/3
4.6, R/3 Enterprise Ext. 1.10/ 2.00, SAP ERP
Central Component 5.0.
SAP ERP Financials
Management Accounting
AC610 · Profit Center Accounting
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES 7-apr-09
TARGET GROUP
• Project team
• Accounting employees responsible for
profitability analysis
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• AC040 Business Processes in
Management Accounting (Controlling)
• AC050 (Financial and Management
Accounting with the New General
Ledger)
• A knowledge of at least one of the
components Overhead Cost
Controlling or Product Cost
Controlling
GOALS
• Configure the Profit Center Accounting
application
AC990 · Tips & tricks in CO
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• Project team members and project
managers
• Project team members who are
responsible for the implementation of
Management Accounting
• Project team members involved with
special cases in Management
Accounting
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
Knowledge of implementation and
Customizing in Management Accounting
• Understand and apply the integration of
Profit Center Accounting to actual
value flows and plan scenarios
• Form flexible reporting structures
CONTENT
• Distinction of Profit Center Accounting
and Profitability Analysis
• Basic configuration settings for Profit
Center Accounting
• Master data and profit center
assignments
• Data flow from Financial Accounting,
Materials Management, Management
Accounting (Controlling), and
Sales/Service into Profit Center
Accounting
• Period-end closing Profit Center
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
The participants should begin the course
with thorough theoretical and practical
knowledge of business processes and cost
accounting
GOALS
• Learn about special cases in CO-PC and
CO-PA
• Develop knowledge of integration and
performance optimization in
Management Accounting
CONTENT
• Performance in product cost
controlling
Accounting
• Overview of transfer price concept
• Planning configuration and integrated
planning
• Planning methods in Profit Center
Accounting
• Formula planning
• Definition of drilldown reports
• Definition of drilldown forms
• The effect of the New General Ledger
on Profit Center Accounting
SOFTWARE
SAP ERP Central Component 5.0
NOTES
The functions of the following SAP
releases are also covered in this course: R/3
4.6, R/3 Enterprise Ext. 1.10/ 2.00.
• Integration of value flows with CO-PA
• Handling high data volumes in CO-PA
• Special cases in CO-PA
• Special cases in the Schedule Manager
• Special cases in overhead cost
controlling
SOFTWARE
SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
NOTES
The functions of the following SAP
releases are also covered in this course: R/3
4.6, R/3 Enterprise Ext. 1.10/ 2.00, SAP ERP
Central Component 5.0.
www.sap.nl/education 111
SAP ERP Financials
Corporate Governance

Compliance and Access Controls

GRC200 ERP GRC300 ERP ADM955 ERP
Managing Compliance with Risk Analysis and SAP GRC Access Control –
Compliance Calibrator Remediation Installation

2 hours 3 days 4 days

GRC220 ERP GRC310 ERP

Compliant Provisioning User Provisioning & Role
with Access Enforcer Management

3 hours 3 days

TZPC25 ERP
EPT SAP GRC Process
Control 2.5

5 days

Governance in SAP ERP

SAPFIN ERP FIN900 ERP FIN910 ERP
SAP ERP Financials Auditing with SAP Management of Internal
Controls

2 days 5 days 4 days

ERP020 ERP
Management Empowered
by SAP ERP Financials

2 hours

FIN009 ERP FIN090 ERP FIN930 ERP

Corporate Governance SAP Solution Overview for Auditing with SAP BW and
Overview (Auditing & SOA) Auditing & SOA SEM

4 hours 4 hours 8 hours

Global Trade Management – Foreign Trade Management

GTS100 ERP GTS200 ERP
SAP Global Trade Services Configuration of SAP
Overview Global Trade Services

3 days 3 days

112
SAP ERP Financials
Corporate Governance
GRC200 · Manage Compliance with SAP E-learning: Introduction to Virsa Compliance Calibrator v5.1
DURATION 2 hours PRICE € 150 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• Anyone who wishes an introduction to
Virsa Compliance Calibrator for SAP, or
the best-practice SOX compliance
methodology it supports.
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED None
GOALS
• Discuss the importance of complying
with government mandates, such as the
Sarbanes-Oxley Act (SOX), HIPAA, the
Turnbill Act, and the Basel Convention
• Identify the key benefits of Compliance
Calibrator by Virsa (Compliance
Calibrator)
• Describe the most important features of
Compliance Calibrator
• Identify the sequence and important
activities, roles, and features in each
phase of the Segregation of Duties and
Risk Management Process, and
GRC220 · Compliant Provisioning with SAP E-learning: Introduction to Virsa Access Enforcer v5.1
DURATION 3 hours PRICE € 350 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• Anyone who wishes an introduction to
Virsa Access Enforcer for SAP, or the
best-practice Provisioning Management
methodology it supports.
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED None
SOFTWARE
• ERP ECC 5.0
CONTENT
• Introduction
• Process and Product Overview
• Phase One: Build Workflows
- Configure System
- Workflow Components
- Workflow Settings
• Analyze the ways in which Compliance
Calibrator supports each of the major
roles during the SOD management
process
CONTENT
• Introduction, Process and Product
Overview
• Phase One: Risks and Rules
- Risk Recognition
- Rule Building and Validation
- Phase One: System Simulation
• Phase Two: Analysis, Remediation,
Mitigation
- Analysis
- Remediation
- Mitigation
• Phase Three: Continuous Compliance
• Course Review and Summary
SOFTWARE
• ERP ECC 5.0
• Phase Two: Provision Access
- Access Enforcer for Requestors
- Access Enforcer for Approvers
- Ongoing Maintenance
• Course Review and Practice
• Test Your Knowledge
NOTES
• Compliant Provisioning with SAP e-
learning provides an introduction to
Virsa Access Enforcer, as well as the
Provisioning Management Process. This
overview course will be of particular
value to current and potential users of
Access Enforcer, especially before or
after product implementation. Users
who want to understand the product
and its use in security administration
will find this course highly valuable.
NOTES
• Manage Compliance with SAP e-
learning provides an introduction to
Virsa Compliance Calibrator, as well as
the Segregation of Duties and Risk
Management Process. This overview
course will be of particular value to
current and potential users of
Compliance Calibrator, especially before
or after product implementation. Users
who want to understand the product
and its use in a SOX Compliance and
remediation process will find this
course highly valuable.
• This course is organized around the
story of a corporation’s remediation
project. The heart of the course is the
Segregation of Duties and Risk
Management Process, and the
Compliance Calibrator features and
functions that are used by the major
players in each phase.
• This course is organized around the
story of a corporation’s efforts to
implement and efficiently manage their
compliant provisioning process. The
heart of the course is creating and using
workflows in the request and approval
process, and the Access Enforcer
features and functions that are used by
the major players in each phase.
Students who pass this course will come
away with the skills and knowledge
necessary to create moderately complex
workflows, designate approvers, and
manage the request approval process.
www.sap.nl/education 113
SAP ERP Financials
Corporate Governance
GRC300 · Risk Analysis and Remediation
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES 2-mrt-09
TARGET GROUP
• Consultants for GRC and SOX
Compliance.
• Business Process Owners who want to
gain an overview how compliance
calibrator can support their business
processes.
• Auditors
• Decision Makers responsible for
compliance related risk management.
• System Implementers with SAP security
and SOX compliance background.
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• Knowledge of integrated processes in an
SAP System.
• knowledge of authorization concept of
an SAP System.
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• Completion of SAP courses ADM940
(SAP Authorization Concept) and
AC010 (Business Processes in Financial
Accounting)
GOALS
• Learn how to get an overview of the
structure of an SAP Business Process
from a business and authorization point
of view.
• Implement Segregation of Duties
Management Process using Compliance
Calibrator for Risk Recognition, Rule
Building, Validation, Risk Analysis
• SAP System and Compliance Calibrator
for Remediation
114
• Alerting Functionality of Compliance
Calibrator, Firefighter and Risk
Terminator for Mitigation
• Continuous Compliance
• Introduce to implementing Compliance
Calibrator
CONTENT
• Overview of Compliance Calibrator
• Business Process Workshop
• SoD management process Workshop
• Risk Recognition
• Rule Building and Validation
• Risk Analysis
• Risk Remediation
• Mitigation
• Continuous Compliance
• Implementation and technical
background
SOFTWARE
• Compliance Calibrator v5.2
NOTES
• This course provides an overview of the
Compliance Calibrator, Firefighter and
Risk Terminator as parts of the Access
Control Suite and shows a best practice
methodology to use these solutions on
the basis of business processes
implemented in an SAP System.
Consequently it supports the attendees
understanding the linkage between
their own company’s business process
challenges and how the Compliance
Calibrator can support them in the
areas of Governance, Risk and
Compliance.
• The participants start with the
recognition and validation of risks
within an example business process in
the SAP System. Afterwards they
perform a risk analysis in Compliance
Calibrator on the basis of the self
defined risks. After risk remediation
related to the business processes, the
attendees need to define preventative
and detective mitigation controls with
the help of the alerting functionality of
Compliance Calibrator, the Firefighter,
the Risk Terminator and best practice
knowledge from SAP.
• The course gives also overview
information about implementation and
technical background (detailed
information regarding to that topic
gives course ADM955).
SAP ERP Financials
Corporate Governance
GRC310 · User Provisioning & Role Management
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES 9-mrt-09
TARGET GROUP
• System Implementers with SAP security
and SOX compliance background. This
is an advanced course for experienced
technical implementers only.
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• Completion of SAP courses GRC300,
ADM950, ADM960, FIN900 and FIN009,
or instructor’s permission.
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This is a hands-on detailed course
focusing on Virsa’s Access Enforcer
implementation. You will learn how to
configure and implement Access
Enforcer. Topics include product
features and functionality, conducting
the client kickoff and implementation
meetings, and post-implementation
wrap up.
CONTENT
• Overview of Access Enforcer
• Introduction to Access Enforcer
• Pre-Implementation and Installation
• Technical architecture
• SAP User Management Engine (UME)
Access Enforcer roles
• Installation overview
• Post-installation tasks
• System Landscape and Connector
Integration
• Integration points
• Supported data sources
• Landscape overview
• Connector configuration
• Pre-workflow System Configuration
• Initialize system data
• Define Request Configuration variables
and Number Ranges
• Verify Request Attributes
• Identify Authentication Source
• Identify Multiple LDAP Authentication
sources (if applicable)
• Define Standard Approvers
• Setup Risk Analysis options
• Define AE Mitigation rules and Role
Attributes
• Workflow Configuration
• Workflow overview
• Create simple and advanced workflows
• Post Workflow System Configuration
• Master Data Loading
• Configure Roles
• Manage User Defaults
• Configure HR Triggers
• Configure LDAP and SAP field mapping
• Define Password Self-Service
• Manage HR Triggers
• Setup Background Jobs
• Create Custom Fields
• Export Data
• Quick Start Implementation Plan
• Statement of Work (SOW) overview
• Pre-implementation call #1 and #2
• Client Kick-off Meeting
• Installation verification
• System Landscape workshop
• Workflow Meeting
• Ongoing administrative tasks
www.sap.nl/education 115
SAP ERP Financials
Corporate Governance

FIN009 · Corporate Governance Overview (Auditing and SOA)

DURATION 4 hours PRICE € 350 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP • Using the guidelines set by the Important Case Law in Auditing, the
• Project Leaders Governments, working with the tools in Foreign Corrupt Practices Act and the
• Team Leaders the SAP systems to help comply with Sarbanes-Oxley Act will be reviewed.
• Auditors: External and Internal the governmental agencies. • Major components of an Audit
• Corporate Management • Understand the history of the Auditing including – planning an audit; study,
• End Users in the Corporation Process. test and evaluate internal controls;
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED CONTENT perform and evaluate substantive tests,
General understanding of Auditing and • Auditing Overview, which will include a and issuing of audit reports.
the SAP system. definition of operational and financial • Evidence gathering which will include
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED auditing. Review of the different types discuss on SAS #31, materiality, and
• SAP01 SAP Overview of auditors. Auditing terms, standards, relationship to AIS.
• Background in basic business process and processes will be defined. • Analysis of Internal Controls which will
functionality • Roles of an internal auditor and a include SAS #1, segregation of duties,
• Fundamental background in Finance or financial analysis in an operational and relationship to AIS.
Controlling audit. NOTES

GOALS • A review of the history and growth of Participant will need to have the
This course will prepare you to: the auditing process. This will include a appropriate software to run the E-
• Understand the legal process in terms of review of the Security Act of 1933 and learning tools for delivery of this product.
Auditing and SOA. the security exchange act of 1934.

FIN090 · SAP Solution Overview for Auditing and the Sarbanes-Oxley Act
DURATION 4 hours PRICE € 350 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP
• Project Leaders
• Team Leaders
• Management of the Corporation
• End Users of the Corporation.
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
Auditing background
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• SAP01 SAP Overview
• An understanding of the Process Flow
in SAP systems.
GOALS
This course will prepare you to:
• Understand the functionality and tools
within the SAP systems that will be of
use in the compliance of Auditing
Requirements.
• Overview of all of the Tools in the SAP
environment that impact your process
in Auditing and SOA. These tools are
made up of: Schedule Manager, AIS,
Authorizations, SEM-SM (Balanced
Scorecard); SEM-PM (Management
Cockpit); to name a few.
• Understand the options and possibly
tools that are found in the SAP systems
and what they can offer.
CONTENT
• Functionality and Flexibility of the
Auditing Information System.
• Processes in the SAP system – Fast
Closing process in R/3 and Globally:
including SEM-BCS, Schedule Manager,
Process Chain and Consolidations.
• Reporting Capabilities to enhance the
functionality of the Auditing process in
SAP.
• Internal Management Controls:
including – the MIC, SEM-BSC
(Balanced Scorecard), SEM-
MC(Management Cockpit), SEM-BPS
(Business Planning and Simulations),
and Processes in BW.
NOTES
Please confirm with the participant that
they have the platform that can run our
E-learning process.

116
SAP ERP Financials
Corporate Governance
FIN900 · Auditing with SAP 30
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• Auditors in the business processes,
Finance, and Accounting areas who are
responsible for checking, improving and
conceiving business process controls in
SAP ERP
• Consultants for Corporate Governance
and Compliance with the Sarbanes-
Oxley Act
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
Business knowledge in the area of
auditing/internal auditing
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
Basic knowledge of SAP for example from
the courses
• SAP01 SAP Overview,
• AC010 Business Processes in Financial
Accounting, or
• AC040 Business Processes in
Management Accounting (Controlling)
GOALS
Understanding of core processes and the
integration of SAP applications and
system control to optimize the internal
control system and meet regulations and
FIN910 · Management of Internal Controls
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• Consultants
• Internal and external auditors
• Project team members
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
Knowledge of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act and
its impact on year-end closing
GOALS
• Understanding how management of
internal controls (MIC) can support
corporate governance and process
management at your company
international standards
CONTENT
• Impact of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act and
other auditing standards (for example,
ISA) that are relevant for the auditors
on the audit process
• Compact overview of the authorization
concept
• Role-based setup of the AIS and
commercial audits with the AIS
• Basic system settings and logs
• Organizational units and organizational
structure within an SAP system
• Practical analysis of the risks and
controls using test cases
• General Customizing and controls in
Accounting while taking into account
the impact on the audit process
• Auditing business processes, for
example, Procurement, Production, and
Sales Order Processing
• Auditing the end of period financial
statements, for example, period-end
closing in internal Accounting
(Controlling) and in Financial
• Adapting the MIC tool to your
processes
• Using the MIC tool for updating process
documentation, evaluations, and tests
on an annual basis
• Personalizing the reporting and
dashboard views for users
CONTENT
• MIC positioning
• Maintaining the organizational
structure
• Maintaining the central process catalog
Accounting and Asset Accounting,
Evaluation of work in process,
allowances, and stock
• Auditing of specific evaluation methods,
for example, stock in an anonymous
warehouse, planned cost accounting
and inventory costing, actual costing
• Transfer of the financial accounting
data, balances, and document
information to the auditor’s computer
in standard format for further analysis
(for example, in ACL, IDEA, Excel)
SOFTWARE
ERP ECC 6.0
NOTES
• This course focuses on “commercial
audits”. For technical audits, we
recommend attending the courses
ADM900 and ADM910.
• The following releases are also covered
in the course: R/3 4.6c, R/3 Enterprise,
and ECC 5.0
• Scheduling assessments and testing
• Performing assessments and testing
• Management controls
• Roles and responsibilities in MIC
• Sign off and reporting
SOFTWARE
• SAP ERP Central Component 5.0
• SAP NetWeaver 2004s
• SAP Web Application Server 6.40
www.sap.nl/education 117
SAP ERP Financials
Corporate Governance
FIN930 · Auditing with SAP BW and SEM
DURATION 8 hours PRICE € 550 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• Project Leaders
• Team Leaders
• Auditors: Internal and External
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• Working Knowledge of Auditing
Processes
• FIN900 Auditing with SAP
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
FIN910 Management of Internal Controls;
FIN009 Corporate Governance Overview
(Auditing and Sarbanes-Oxley diting and
the Sarbanes-Oxley Act.
GOALS
• This course will prepare you to:
• Understand and configure the tools in
BW and SEM to help comply with
Auditing requirements of governing
agencies.
TZPC25 · EPT SAP GRC Process Control 2.5
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• Project Leaders
• Team Leaders
• Solution Consultants implementing
SAP GRC Process Control 2.5
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• Knowledge of SAP implementation
procedures
• Understanding of process control
principles
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• Plan a process control implementation
project
• Explain the process control phases
• Customize SAP GRC Process Control
2.5
118
• Understand the concepts of
authorizations in BW and SEM.
• Understand the use and configuration
of the Process Chain in BW and the
positioning of this tool to help with
Auditing.
• Organize the Key Performance Metrics
that are required by the governing
agencies.
• Perform the necessary auditing of the
ERP systems in the Global Process.
CONTENT
• Overview of the Auditing Process and
the Sarbanes-Oxley Act.
• Business Warehouse and the processes
within the Data Warehouse and
Auditing.
• Consolidations in the ERP environment
and the use of SEM-BCS to comply with
SOFTWARE
• ECC 6.0
• Dual Stack (ABAP + Java) Service
• SAP NetWeaver 7.0 (2004S) SP13
- SAP_BASIS 700 0013
- SAP_ABA 700 0013
- PI_BASIS 2005_1_700 0013
- SAP_HR 600 SP 22
- SAP_APPL 600 SP11
- GRCSPC 250 0003
- GRCPCRTA 250_700 0003
Auditing requirements.
• SEM-CPM and the use of the Balanced
Scorecard and the Management Cockpit
in Auditing.
• The use of the Risk Management Tools
within SEM to facilitate the Auditing
Process.
• Configuration and implementation of
the BW Process Chain to help with Fast
Closing in Auditing.
• Understanding and configuring
Authorizations in BW and SEM to
comply with Audit requirements.
NOTES
Students should be aware that this course
focuses on the Software implementation
versus the conceptual Process that is
identified in FIN009.
CONTENT
• SOX and COSO Overview
• Preparation for an Implementation
• Process Control 2.5 Work Centers
• Configuration of IMG
• The Master Data Upload Generator
(MDUG) Utility
• Creation and Management of Master
Data
• Surveys and Manual Tests
• Automated Controls
• Reports
SAP ERP Human Capital Management
Talent Management

SAPHR ERP HR050 ERP HR505 ERP HR506 ERP

SAP ERP Human Capital Business Processes in Organizational Advanced Organizational
Management Overview Human Capital Management Management
Management

2 days 5 days 3 days 2 days

ERP030 ERP HR315 ERP HR540 ERP

Management Empowered Recruitment Enterprise Compensation
by SAP ERP Human Capital Management
Management

2 hours 3 days 3 days

TERP31 ERP HR140 ERP HR316 ERP HR550 ERP

SAP ERP: Introduction into Business Processes in E-Recruiting Personnel Cost Planning &
Processes in Human Talent Management Simulation
Capital Management

5 hours 2 days 3 days 2 days

HR580 ERP HR510 ERP

HCM en OrgPublisher Analytics & Reporting in Personnel Development

Human Capital
zie ook pagina 326 Management

2 days 3 days

HR280 ERP HR515 ERP HR270 ERP

HCM Self-Services
Smart Forms and Adobe Training and Event SAP Enterprise Learning
zie ook pagina 76 voor Forms in HCM Management
HCM Shared Services
2 days 3 days 3 days

www.sap.nl/education 119
SAP ERP Human Capital Management
Talent Management
HR315 · Recruitment
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• Project teams
• Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
HR050 (HCM Business Processes)
[formerly HR100 and HR120]
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• HR305 (Master Data Configuration)
• HR505 (Organizational Management)
GOALS
• Explain the personnel procurement
functions of SAP ERP HCM
• Perform typical process flows ranging
HR316 · E-Recruiting
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• Project teams
• Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
HR050 (HCM Business Processes)
[formerly HR100 and HR120]
GOALS
• Learn about the main areas of the new,
Web-based e-recruiting solution
HR505 · Organizational Management
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES 4-feb-09, 30-mrt-09, 18-mei-09
TARGET GROUP
• Project teams
• Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
HR050 (HCM Business Processes)
[formerly HR100 and HR120]
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• SAPHR (SAP ERP Human Capital
Management: Overview)
• HR305 (Master Data Configuration)
GOALS
• Explain the functions in Organizational
Management
120
from job advertisements, to application
and hiring processes
• Configure a customer system
CONTENT
• Advertising
• Applicant master data
• Applicant activities
• Selection process
• Contract generation
• Hiring applicants
• Evaluations
• Intranet and Internet scenarios
• Outlook: E-Recruiting
• Configure e-recruiting specific processes
CONTENT
• Search order management
• Applicant tracking
• Talent Relationship Management
• Cross processes/areas (corresponding,
analytics) and integration into SAP ERP
• Configure the Organizational
Management component
CONTENT
• Concept of Organizational Management
• Maintenance of Organizational Units
- Organization & staffing interface
- Expertmode
• Matrix organizations and general
structures
• Reporting and reporting tools
• Manager’s Desktop andManager Self
Service (Enterprise Portal)
• Customizing Organizational
SOFTWARE
SAP ERP Central Component 5.0
NOTES
• This course also discusses the functions
of the following SAP releases: R/3 4.6,
R/3 Enterprise Ext. 1.10/ 2.00 and ERP
2004.
• For information about SAP ERP E-
Recruiting functions, see course HR316.
• SAPScript forms and text templates are
discussed in course BC460.
SOFTWARE
• E-Recruiting 6.00
• SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
NOTES
Smart forms are discussed in course
BC470.
Management
• Integrating Organizational
Management with other HR
components
SOFTWARE
SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
NOTES
This course also discusses the functions of
the following SAP releases: R/3 4.6, R/3
Enterprise Ext. 1.10/ 2.00 and ERP 2004.
SAP ERP Human Capital Management
Talent Management
HR506 · Advanced Organizational Management
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES 26-feb-09
TARGET GROUP
• Project teams
• Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• HR050 (HCM Business Processes)
[formerly HR100 and HR120]
• HR505 (Organizational Management)
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
HR305 (Master Data Configuration)
HR510 · Personnel Development
DURATION 4 days PRICE € 2360 STARTING DATES 20-jan-09
TARGET GROUP
• Project teams
• Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
HR050 (HCM Business Processes)
[formerly HR100 and HR120]
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
HR505 (Organizational Management)
HR515 · Training and Event Management
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• Project teams
• Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
HR050 (HCM Business Processes)
[formerly HR100 and HR120]
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• HR505 (Organizational Management)
• HR510 (Personnel Development)
GOALS
• Explain the functions of the Training
and Event Management module of the
SAP System
GOALS
Explain the advanced functions of the SAP
application component Organizational
Management and its configuration
CONTENT
• Data model enhancements
• Customer-specific adjustment of the
hierarchy framework
• Configuration of the manager’s desktop
• Workflow and Organizational
Management
GOALS
• Explain the functions and configuration
of Personnel Development
• Perform typical process flows in
Personnel Development
CONTENT
• Qualifications and requirements
• Career and succession planning
• Development plans
• Perform typical process flows including
creating an event catalog, booking
attendees and billing for business events
• Configure the SAP system for Training
and Event Management
CONTENT
• Business event preparation
• Creation of business event catalog
• Day-of-day activities
• Recurring activities for business events
and attendees
• Billing and activity allocation for
business events
• Transports in Organizational
Management (Appendix)
SOFTWARE
SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
NOTES
This course also discusses the functions of
the following SAP releases: R/3 4.6, R/3
Enterprise Ext. 1.10/ 2.00 and ERP 2004.
• Objective setting and appraisals
(Management by Objectives)
• Internet and intranet scenarios
SOFTWARE
SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
NOTES
This course also discusses the functions of
the following SAP releases: R/3 4.6, R/3
Enterprise Ext. 1.10/ 2.00 and ERP 2004.
• Reporting in Training and Event
Management
• Internet and intranet scenarios
SOFTWARE
SAP R/3 4.6C
NOTES
• SAPScript forms and text templates are
discussed in course BC460.
• The SAP Learning Solution is discussed
in course HT270.
www.sap.nl/education 121
SAP ERP Human Capital Management
Talent Management

HR540 · Enterprise Compensation Management

DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP GOALS SOFTWARE

• Project teams Learn about the Enterprise Compensation SAP ERP Central Component 5.0
• Consultants Management functionality and how to NOTES

PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• HR050 (HCM Business Processes)
[formerly HR100 and HR120] (Essentials
of Personnel Planning)
• HR305 (Master Data Configuration)
• HR505 (Organizational Management)
configure it in the SAP system The course is also available on SAP R/3
CONTENT Enterprise ext. 2.00.
• Overview of Enterprise Compensation
Management
• Compensation Administration
• Budgeting
• Long-term Incentives
• Job Pricing (Salary Surveys)
• Evaluations

HR550 · Personnel Cost Planning and Simulation

DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP component Personnel Cost Planning • Integration

• Project Team members
• Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• HR050 (HCM Business Processes)
[formerly HR100 and HR120]
• HR505 (Organizational Management)
and Simulation
CONTENT
• Planning preparation
- Definition of planning context
- Definition of planning scenarios
- Definition of additional and dependent
- Controlling integration
- Integration in Compensation
Management & Training Event
Management
• Reporting & Tools
SOFTWARE

PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED cost items SAP ERP Central Component 5.0

HR305 (Master Data Configuration) • Data collection NOTES

GOALS
• Explain the functions in the Personnel
Cost Planning and Simulation
component
• Configure the SAP System for the new
- Data collection for employees This course also discusses the functions of
- Data collection for organizational the following SAP releases: R/3 Enterprise
management objects Ext. 1.10/2.00 and ERP 2004.
• Cost planning run
• Detailed planning

HR140 · Business Processes in Talent Management

DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES 4-feb-09

TARGET GROUP GOALS • Succession Planning

• Project team members, consultants and
key users, employees in human
resources who have basic or experienced
knowledge in HCM and need
information about the new Talent
Management Strategy.
• Understanding the concept of typical • Performance Management
Talent Management processes Analytics
• Becoming familiar with basic processes SOFTWARE
of Talent Management • SAP ERP Central Component 6.0, E-
• Explaining how the various areas are Recruiting 6.0, LSO 6.0
integrated NOTES

PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED • CONTENT • This course is no substitute for the

• SAPHR (mySAP ERP Human Capital • Processes in E- Recruiting SAPHR or for the HR050.
Management Overview) • Learning Solution
• Processes in Skills & Competence
Management

122
SAP ERP Human Capital Management
Workforce Process Management

SAPHR ERP HR050 ERP HR305 ERP HR306 ERP HR310 ERP
SAP ERP Human Capital Business Processes in Configuration of Master Configuration of Time Time Evaluation with Clock
Management Overview Human Capital Data Recording Times
Management

2 days 5 days 5 days 4 days 5 days

ERP030 ERP HR350 ERP HR940 ERP HR311 ERP

Management Empowered Programming in Human Authorizations in Human Time Evaluation Without
by SAP ERP Human Capital Capital Management Capital Management Clock Times
Management

2 hours 5 days 2 days 5 days

TERP31 ERP HR110 ERP HR400 ERP WNL11 ERP WNL12 ERP
SAP ERP: Introduction into Essentials of Payroll Payroll Configuration Dutch Payroll Payroll Configuration
Processes in Human Processes NL (Techn)
Capital Management

5 hours 2 days 5 days 2 days 3 days

DERPHR ERP HR990 ERP HR580 ERP CA500 ERP

Delta in SAP ERP Human Technical Tips and Tricks in Analytics & Reporting in Cross Application Time
Capital Management Human Capital Human Capital Sheet
Management Management

3 days 3 days 2 days 2 days

WNLFB ERP HR280 ERP HR325 ERP HR540 ERP

HCM en SAP HCM Flexible Benefits Smart Forms and Adobe Benefits Administration Enterprise Compensation
pensioen module Forms in HCM Management

zie pagina 326

2 days 2 days 5 days 3 days

HCM Self-Services
zie ook pagina 76 voor
HCM Shared Services

CERTIFICATION Solution Academy basic training as Solution Consultant Human Resources – Management & Administration (former module HR)
(for new consultants) SAP125 > ERP001 > ERP030 > THR10 > SM001 > THR12 > C_THR12_05
ALTERNATIVE COURSES SAP125 > ERP001 > ERP030 > SAPHR > HR305 > HR306 > HR580 > HR400 > HR505 > SM001 > C_THR12_05

Voor de meest actuele certificeringinformatie verwijzen wij u graag naar www.sap.com/services/education/certification

CA500 · Cross Application Time Sheet

DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES 6-jan-09

TARGET GROUP Customizing in the Cross-Application • Transferring data to the target

• Project team members in human Time Sheet (CATS) components
resources, accounting, and logistics CONTENT • CATS and cost accounting
• Consultants • Overview of the different user interfaces • CATS Information System
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED used when working with CATS • Authorizations
An introductory course for one of the • Working with the Cross-Application • Tools and tips for working with CATS
CATS target components: Financial Time Sheet: maintaining and releasing SOFTWARE
Accounting, Human Capital data SAP ERP Central Component 5.0
Management, Project System, Plant • Approval and workflow NOTES
Maintenance, Customer Service, or • General Customizing steps: special The content of this course is appropriate
External Services Customizing settings for CATS classic for participants on the following SAP
GOALS (CAT2) and CATS for service providers software releases: R/3 4.6, R/3 Enterprise
Learning and using the functions and (CATSXT) Ext. 1.10/ 2.00 and ERP 2004.

www.sap.nl/education 123
SAP ERP Human Capital Management
Workforce Process Management
DERPHR · Delta in SAP ERP Human Capital Management
DURATION 4 days PRICE € 2360 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• Project Leaders
• Project team
• Key users
• SAP consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
Fundamental knowledge of Human
Capital Management functionality in
former versions
GOALS
Participants in this course are given an
overview of the functions in SAP ERP 2005
(that is, back-end SAP ECC 6.0) that were
added or enhanced with Release R/3 4.6,
4.6C, R/3 Enterprise, SAP ERP 2004 or SAP
ERP 2005.
HR110 · Essentials of Payroll
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES 9-mrt-09, 2-jun-09
TARGET GROUP
• Project Team members
• Consultants
• Key users
• Employees responsible for payroll in
Human Capital Management
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
HR050 (HCM Business Processes)
[formerly HR100 and HR120]
HR305 · Master Data Configuration
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES 19-jan-09, 16-mrt-09, 25-mei-09
TARGET GROUP
• Project Team members
• Consultants
• Support staff
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
HR050 (HCM Business Processes)
[formerly HR100 and HR120]
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
HR110 (Payroll Business Processes)
GOALS
Customize personnel administration data
CONTENT
• Structures in HCM:
- Company Structure
- Personnel structure
124
CONTENT
• Overview of new functions in Human
Capital Management that are either
new or have been enhanced after
Release 4.5:
- Personnel Administration, Time
Management (TMW), Global
Employment, and Payroll
- Recruitment and E-Recruiting,
Personnel Development (especially
Performance Management), Training
and Event Management, Blended
Learning (SAP Learning Solution and
SAP Tutor), new Personnel Cost
Planning and Simulation and new
Enterprise Compensation Management
GOALS
Explain the organization or the process of
payroll including subsequent activities
CONTENT
• Overview of payroll
• Data relevant to payroll
• Organizing productive payroll and
payroll procedures
• Retroactive accounting recognition
• Payroll reports
- Organizational structure
• Storing default values (features)
• Personal data
• Relationship between planned working
time and basic pay
• Payroll data
- Pay scale structure
- Wage type structure
• Workflows:
- Pay scale reclassification
- Standard pay increase
• Customizing Procedures and Interfaces
- Infotype Characteristics and Screen
Modification
- Combining Infotype Menus
- Analytics and reporting in SAP ERP
HCM
- Outlook: HCM Portal Solutions (ESS,
MSS)
SOFTWARE
SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
NOTES
• The course is structured according to
the availability of functions. This is why
it is suitable for customers with Release
R/3 4.6 or R/3 Enterprise Ext. 1.10/ 2.00
and ERP 2004.
• This course provides overview
information on new functions. For
more information and information
about Customizing, see our detail
courses.
• Data transfer to Financials
• Bank transfer
• Process model for payroll and
subsequent activities
SOFTWARE
SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
NOTES
This course also discusses the functions of
the following SAP releases: R/3 4.6, R/3
Enterprise Ext. 1.10/ 2.00 and ERP 2004.
- Setting Up Personnel Actions
- Dynamic Actions and Mail Connection
• Global Employment (management of
delegates abroad and concurrent
employment relationships)
• Overview: Portal role HR Administrator
and employee interaction center
SOFTWARE
SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
NOTES
This course also discusses the functions of
the following SAP releases: R/3 4.6, R/3
Enterprise Ext. 1.10/ 2.00 and ERP 2004.
SAP ERP Human Capital Management
Workforce Process Management
HR306 · Configuration of Time Recording
DURATION 4 days PRICE € 2360 STARTING DATES 26-jan-09, 6-apr-09
TARGET GROUP
• Project Team members
• Consultants
• Support staff
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
HR050 (HCM Business Processes)
[formerly HR100 and HR120]
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
HR305 (Master Data Configuration)
GOALS
• Gain an overview of time management
with and without time evaluation
(negative and positive time
management).
• Understand the fundamentals of time
management without time evaluation
(negative time management). These
fundamentals, however, also form the
basis for time evaluation (positive time
management).
HR310 · Time Evaluation with Clock Times
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES 20-apr-09
TARGET GROUP
• Project Team members
• SAP consultants and partners who work
in the area of Time Management
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• HR050 (HCM Business Processes)
[formerly HR100 and HR120]
• HR306 (Configuration of Time
Recording)
GOALS
• Explain and set up the time evaluation
process and its integration with
different HCM business processes
• Customize time evaluation by focusing
on the evaluation of data from time
recording subsystems
• Customizing for time data recording,
including quota accrual and Time
Manager’s Workplace (TMW), is
examined in detail.
CONTENT
• Overview of time management
functions and how they are integrated
with other applications
• Concept of integrating external time
recording systems
• Designing work schedules for mapping
planned working time
• Time management infotypes
• Absences, attendances, and deduction
rules
• Time quotas and their deduction rules
• Automatic structuring of absence
quotas
• Time Manager’s Workplace (TMW)
CONTENT
• Business process overview of time
evaluation
• Time evaluation in the SAP System
• The concept of the time evaluation
driver RPTIME00
• Processing time evaluation messages in
the Time Manager’s Workplace
• Customizing time evaluation
• Data collection in time evaluation
• Activities as time evaluation tool
(Personnel calculation rule and
Operations)
• Personnel calculation schema TM00.
SOFTWARE
SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
SOFTWARE
SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
NOTES
• This course also discusses the functions
of the following SAP releases: R/3 4.6,
R/3 Enterprise Ext. 1.10/ 2.00 and ERP
2004.
• Course HR310 (Time Evaluation
without Clock Times) deals with the
processes and configuration of time
evaluation.
• The main focus of this course is the
configuration of time data. These are
the prerequisites for time evaluation.
NOTES
• This course also discusses the functions
of the following SAP releases: R/3 4.6,
R/3 Enterprise Ext. 1.10/ 2.00 and ERP
2004.
• Course HR310 (Time Evaluation with
Clock Times) is targeted at members of
the project team. Although the basic
knowledge required for the day-to-day
business of a time data administrator is
discussed, there is not enough time to
deal with for this group of employees.
• Alternatively we offer the HR311 (Time
Evaluation without Clock Times). This
course imparts the time evaluation
without clock times and it is not an
additional course to HR310 (Time
Evaluation with Clock Times) and is
used mainly in the USA. This issue is
not relevant for German-speaking
countries for tax reasons.
www.sap.nl/education 125
SAP ERP Human Capital Management
Workforce Process Management
HR311 · Time Evaluation Without Clock Times
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES 9-feb-09
TARGET GROUP
• Project team members
• SAP consultants and partners
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• HR050 Business Processes in Human
Capital Management
• HR305 Master Data Configuration
• HR306 Configuration of Time
Recording
GOALS
• Explain the time evaluation process and
its integration with different HCM
business processes
• Customize time evaluation by focusing
on the valuation of different time
durations
• Outline different aspects of time
HR325 · Benefits Administration
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• Project team members
• Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• HR050 Business Processes in Human
Capital Management
• HR305 Master Data Configuration
• HR505 Organizational Management
GOALS
Configure the SAP system for Benefits
Administration
CONTENT
• Benefits overview
• Basic settings and general concepts
• Health plans
126
evaluation and explain how these can be
adapted to meet customer-specific
requirements
CONTENT
• Business overview of time evaluation
• Time evaluation in the SAP system
• The concept of the time evaluation
driver RPTIME00
• Processing time evaluation messages in
the Time Managers Workplace (TMW)
• Customizing time evaluation
• Data collection in time evaluation
• Operations as tools for time evaluation
• Personnel calculation schema TM04
• Using schema TM04 to process data
from a time recording subsystem
• Insurance plans
• Savings plans
• Stock purchase plans
• Flexible spending accounts (North
America)
• Credit plans
• Miscellaneous plans
• Flexible administration
- Administrative parameters
- Eligibility and conclusion of benefits
- Prerequisite and corequisite plans
- Benefit programs
- Standard plans
- Reasons for adjustments
- Setting up forms
SOFTWARE
ERP ECC 6.0
NOTES
• The content of this course is
appropriate for participants on the
following SAP software releases: R/3 4.6,
R/3 Enterprise ext. 1.10/ 2.00 and above.
• Course HR311 (Time Evaluation
without Clock Times) is designed for
project team members. Although the
basic knowledge required for the day-to-
day business of a time data
administrator is discussed, this course is
not aimed at time data administrators.
• Employee Self-Service
• COBRA (United States)
• Benefits processing
• Benefits reporting and Customizing
tools
• Integration with payroll
SOFTWARE
ERP ECC 6.0
NOTES
The content of this course is appropriate
for participants on the following SAP
software releases: R/3 4.6C, R/3 Enterprise
ext. 1.10/ 2.00.
SAP ERP Human Capital Management
Workforce Process Management
HR350 · Programming in Human Capital Management
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• IT employees
• IT administrators
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• HR050 (HCM Business Processes)
[formerly HR100 and HR120]
• ABAP programming skills
• BC400 (ABAP Workbench Foundations)
GOALS
• ProgramHCM reports using logical
databases and HCM-specific statements
• Enhance infotypes and create customer-
specific infotypes
HR400 · Payroll Configuration
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES 23-mrt-09
TARGET GROUP
• Project teams
• Consultants
• Key users
• HCM Support staff
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• HR050 Business Processes in Human
Capital Management (formerly HR100
Basics of Personnel Administration and
HR120 Essentials of Personnel
Development)
• HR110 Payroll Business Processes
• HR305 Master Data Configuration
CONTENT
• Data structures in Human Capital
Management
• Logical database PNP/PNPCE
• Views: join and projection
• Specific commands
• Authorization checks
• Repetitive structures
• Enhancing infotypes with customer-
specific fields
• Creating customer-specific infotypes
• Reading cluster data
• Logical Database PCH
GOALS
• Identify and operate the control
mechanisms available in the payroll
system
• Check the payroll using the payroll log
CONTENT
• Identify and operate control
mechanisms available in the payroll
system
• Personnel calculation schema and rules
• Encoding the payroll characteristics of
wage types
• Check the payroll using the payroll log
• Determine rates of pay
• HCM ABAP features
SOFTWARE
SAP ERP Central Component 5.0
NOTES
• This course also discusses the functions
of the following SAP releases: R/3 4.6,
R/3 Enterprise Ext. 1.10/ 2.00 and ERP
2004.
• This course is not an introduction to
programming. Participants should have
ABAP programming skills or have
attended the appropriate programming
courses before they attend this course.
• Calculation of averages
• Factoring
• Develop payment methodologies for
time-based entries
• Account for absences in payroll
• Understand retroactive accounting
SOFTWARE
• ERP ECC 6.00
NOTES
• This course also discusses the functions
of the following SAP releases: R/3 4.6,
R/3 Enterprise Ext. 1.10/ 2.00 and ERP
2004.
www.sap.nl/education 127
SAP ERP Human Capital Management
Workforce Process Management
HR940 · Authorizations in HCM
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES 2-feb-09, 4-jun-09
TARGET GROUP
• Project teams
• Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• HR050 (HCM Business Processes)
[formerly HR100 and HR120]
• ADM940 (SAP Authorization Concept)
HR990 · Technical Tips and Tricks in HCM
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• System administrators
• Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• HR050 (HCM Business Processes)
[formerly HR100 and HR120]
• HR305 (Master Data Configuration)
GOALS
• Course participants receive information
about special system settings, such as
screen modifications.
WNL11 · Dutch Payroll Processes
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES 2-apr-09
TARGET AUDIENCE
• Project team members
• Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAPHR mySAP Human Resources
Solution Overview
• HR110 Essentials of Payroll
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• HR305: Master data configuration
GOALS
This course will prepare you to:
• Describe SAP HCM Payroll process
specific for The Netherlands like
corrections and postpayments
128
GOALS
Create roles and authorizations in HCM
CONTENT
• Setting up general authorization checks
• Determining the responsibility period
• Authorization objects in payroll
• Authorization check for evaluations
• Structural authorization checks
• You will become familiar with the tools
for interfaces.
• The course also focuses on logging,
archiving and performance optimizing
in HCM.
CONTENT
• Dynamic actions
• Screen modifications
• Tools for interfaces
• Characteristics
• Logging
(correcties en nabetalingen), wage
return (aangifte loonheffingen) etc.
• Use the IMG for adapting the
customizing of the Dutch payroll
process
• Use the HR Form Editor to modify the
payslip/remuneration statement
• Understand the functionality of SAP
technical wagetypes and the use of
wagetypes in general
CONTENT
• Description of the communication
process with tax authorities
• Description of the correction and post
• Other aspects of authorization check
SOFTWARE
SAP ERP Central Component 5.0
NOTES
This course also discusses the functions of
the following SAP releases: R/3 4.6, R/3
Enterprise Ext. 1.10/ 2.00.
• Archiving cluster data
• Performance optimizing
• Infotype enhancement
SOFTWARE
SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
NOTES
The course deals with technical tips and
tricks in the HCM environment. For more
in-depth information, see the detail
courses.
payment (correctie en nabetalingen)
functionality
• Modification of the customizing of SV
premiums, JUPER/REPER structure,
wage return and other steps in the
Dutch IMG for payroll
• Creation and modification of wagetypes
• Modification of the payslip using the
HR Form Editor
SOFTWARE ERP 6.0
NOTES
You will find more information about
technology in the courses in the NET
curriculum and the EP.
SAP ERP Human Capital Management
Workforce Process Management
WNL12 · Payroll Configuration NL (Technical)
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES 6-apr-09
TARGET AUDIENCE
• Project team members
• Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAPHR SAP Human Resources Solution
Overview
• HR110 Essentials of Payroll
• WNL11 Dutch payroll processes
• HR400 Payroll Configuration
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• HR305: Master data configuration
GOALS
This course will prepare you to:
• Understand the structure of the Dutch
WNLFB · SAP HCM Flexible Benefits
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES 9-mrt-09
TARGET GROUP
• Project team members
• Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• HR305 Master data configuration
• HR130 Essentials of Enterprise Portals
• WNL11 Dutch Payroll processes
• WNL12 Payroll Configuration NL
(techn.)
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
SAP HCM Flexible Benefits is een nieuwe
oplossing, die de mogelijk biedt om de
keuzes van flexibele arbeidsvoorwaarden
WNLH09 · Payroll Configuration Expert
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• Applicatie beheerders SAP HR, specifiek
payroll
• SAP Consultants en partners
• Toekomstig applicatiebeheerders van
SAP HR
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• HR110 – Essentials of Payroll
• HR305 – Configruation of Master Data
• HR405 – Customizing Payroll
Framework NL
payroll scheme N000
• Create and modify payroll calculation
rules
• Use processing classes and cumulation
classes
• Create and modify typical payroll
calculations like hourly wage, pro ration
etc.
• Understand the use of time wagetypes
in a payroll scheme
• Understand the posting to accounting
process
CONTENT
• Explanation of the structure in payroll
in SAP HCM vast te leggen, ondersteund
door ESS. De resultaten van de keuzes
vinden hun weg naar de SAP HCM
afrekening, waar de verrekening van
bedragen plaatsvindt. Zoals u van SAP
gewend bent is Flexible Benefits volledig
geïntegreerd met alle HCM oplossingen.
SOFTWARE
• ERP 6.0
CONTENT
In een 2-daagse training Flexible Benefits
(cursuscode WNLFB) krijgen de cursisten
inzicht in:
• HR705 – Customizing Payroll NL and
Report en/of
• Duidelijke implementatie ervaring met
de payroll
GOALS
Een verdieping van het customizen van
het afrekenschema en specifieke
regelingen
scheme N000 and linked sub schemes
• Building your own payroll calculation
rules
• Customizing pension functionality
• Using processing classes and
cumulation classes
• Maintaining wagetypes to influence the
posting to accounting process
SOFTWARE
• ERP 6.0
NOTES
You will find more information about
technology in the courses in the NET
curriculum and the EP.
• het proces om de keuzes vast te leggen
en welke aanvullende mogelijkheden
daarbij gebruikt kunnen worden
• de verrekening van de resultaten van de
keuzes in de SAP afrekening
• de inrichtingsmogelijkheden om
Flexible Benefits toe te snijden op de
eisen en wensen van de organisatie.
Er zal in de training ruimte worden
geboden om te oefenen met de
inrichtingsmogelijkheden.
CONTENT
• De verschillenberekening
• Pensioenberekening
• Afdrachtsverminderingen, waaronder
kinderopvang
• Sociale verzekeringssplit
www.sap.nl/education 129
SAP ERP Procurement and Logistics Execution
Procurement I & II

SAP01 SAP210 ERP SCM510 ERP

SAP Overview Procure to Pay Inventory Management and
Physical Inventory

3 days 8 hours 5 days

SAPSCM ERP SCM500 ERP SCM515 ERP SCM550 ERP SCM516 ERP
Overview of the SAP SCM Business Processes Invoice Verification Customizing in Materials Procurement
Solution in Procurement Management Optimization

3 days 5 days 3 days 5 days 2 days

ERP001 ERP SCM680 ERP SCM520 ERP SCM521 ERP SCM518 ERP
Management Empowered Cross-Application Purchasing Pricing in Purchasing Materials Management
by SAP ERP Business Processes Archiving Purchasing
Documents

4 hours 2 days 5 days 3 days 2 hours

ERP040 ERP SCM525 ERP PLM415 ERP

Management Empowered Consumption-Based Quality Management
by SAP ERP Logistics and Planning and Forecasting in Logistics
Operations

4 hours 2 days 3 days

TERP41 ERP SCM540 ERP

SAP ERP: Introduction into Procurement of Services
Processes in Procurement

6 hours 2 days

SRM210 SRM
SAP Enterprise Buyer 5.0
Configuration

5 days

SCM681 ERP SCM682 ERP SCM683 ERP SCM684 ERP

Stock Transfer Business Stock Transfer Subcontracting Business Subcontracting
Process Customizing & Process Customizing &
Master Data Master Data

2 hours 2 hours 2 hours 2 hours

CERTIFICATION Solution Academy basic training as Solution Consultant SCM – ERP Procurement (Material Management) (for new consultants)

SAP125 > ERP001 > SAP210 > TSCM50 > SM001 > TSCM52 > C_TSCM52_05
ALTERNATIVE COURSES SAP125 > ERP001 > SAP210 > SCM500 > SCM510 > SCM515 > SCM520 > SCM525 > SCM550 > SM001 > C_TSCM52_05

Voor de meest actuele certificeringinformatie verwijzen wij u graag naar www.sap.com/services/education/certification

130
SAP ERP Procurement and Logistics Execution
Procurement I & II
SCM350 · KANBAN
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
This course is aimed at project-team
members and key users (from the user
departments) who are responsible for
implementing material replenishment
processing using KANBAN.
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• PLM110 Grunddaten Teil 1
• SCM300 Supply Chain Manufacturing
Overview
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• SAPSCM Overview of the SAP Supply
Chain Management Solution
• Fundamental knowledge of SAP R/3 for
purchasing and inventory management
(see notes)
GOALS
In this course, participants learn how to
use KANBAN processing.
SCM500 · Business Processes in Procurement
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES 23-feb-09, 25-mei-09
TARGET GROUP
• Project team members
• Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• A fundamental knowledge of
procurement
• Good knowledge of working with
Windows
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• SAP01 (SAP Overview) or
• SAPSCM (Overview of SAP SCM)
GOALS
• In this course, participants learn about
the fundamental elements of materials
management Using the procurement
CONTENT
• KANBAN business process and
philosophy
• KANBAN master data (production
supply area, control cycle)
• Operative processing of KANBAN
processes with barcode and KANBAN
table
• Material replenishment with in-house
production (repetitive manufacturing,
production orders and process orders,
manual KANBAN)
• Material replenishment with external
procurement (orders, scheduling
agreement delivery schedule lines, stock
transport orders and scheduling
agreements)
• Material replenishment with stock
transfer (direct transfer, stock transfer
with reservation, stock transfer from
the WM storage location)
processes for stockmaterial, consumable
materials, and services, the basic
functions from purchasing, inventory
management, invoice validation, service
entry, and requirements planning are
explained.
• Topic-specific exercises in the SAP
system give participants the
opportunity to gain first-hand practical
experience of the above processes.
Participants will also be introduced to
the documentation and other useful
tools.
CONTENT
• Introduction to the SAP system
• Material replenishment in combination
with demand planning, repetitive
manufacturing, external procurement
with summarized JIT call
• Automatic KANBAN calculation
• Special processes
• Troubleshooting (KANBAN correction),
evaluations
• Looking ahead to Internet KANBAN
and RF KANBAN
SOFTWARE
ERP ECC 5.0
NOTES
Participants who want to attend this
course purely for external procurement
and stock transfer processes, need to have
a knowledge of SAP ECC or R/3 for
purchasing and inventory management
only.
• Basics of procurement
• Master data (material, supplier)
• Procurement process for stock material
• Procurement process for consumable
materials
• Procurement process for external
services
• Automated procurement process
• Analysis in materials management
(overview)
• Insight into self-service procurement
SOFTWARE
SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
www.sap.nl/education 131
SAP ERP Procurement and Logistics Execution
Procurement I & II
SCM510 · Inventory Management and Physical Inventory
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES 9-mrt-09, 8-jun-09
TARGET GROUP
• Project team members
• Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
SCM500 (Processes in Procurement)
GOALS
• In this course, participants learn about
the basic functions of inventory
management and the physical inventory
• Participants learn how to create
different goods movements in the SAP
system and, if necessary, take any
particular features into consideration.
• They also become familiar with the
special functions of inventory
management and the physical
inventory, and with the Customizing
SCM515 · Invoice Verification
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES 23-mrt-09, 3-jun-09
TARGET GROUP
• Project team members
• Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
SCM500 (Processes in Procurement)
GOALS
In this course, participants become
familiar with logistics invoice verification
as the final stage in the external
procurement process. Participants learn
how to enter invoices relating to purchase
orders, block them, and release them for
payment.
CONTENT
• Introduction to invoice verification
• Invoice entry and parking
132
settings relevant to inventory
management and the physical
inventory.
CONTENT
• Goods receipt
• Stock transfers/transfer postings
• Goods issue
• Reservations
• Special forms of procurement
(subcontracting, consignment, pipeline)
• Special forms of inventory management
(split valuation, nonvaluated material)
• Physical inventory and special inventory
procedures (cycle counting and
inventory sampling in SAP)
• Reporting in inventory management
• Selected Customizing settings for
• Taxes, cash discounts, and foreign
currency
• Variances and blocking reasons
• Releasing blocked invoices
• Invoice reduction
• Variances without reference to an item
• Invoices for purchase orders with
account assignment
• Delivery costs
• Subsequent debts/credits
• Credit memos and cancellations
• Invoice verification in the background
• Automated processing
• GR/IR account maintenance
• Customizing for invoice verification
inventory management and physical
inventory
SOFTWARE
SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
NOTES
This course does not cover the
structuring of a warehouse and the
movements in the Warehouse
Management system. These topics are
dealt with in the course SCM630
(Warehouse Management). Shipping
processing movements are covered in
course SCM610 (Delivery Processes). Batch
management is examined in course
SCM595 (Batch Management).
SOFTWARE
SAP ERP Central Component 5.0
NOTES
This course examines the functions used
to enter and verify invoices with reference
to a preceding object (purchase order,
delivery note, material document). The
course AC200 (Financial Accounting
Customizing I) covers other topics in
accounts payable accounting (General
Ledger, Accounts Payable, Accounts
Receivable). Course AC201 (Payment and
Dunning Program, Correspondence,
Interest Calculation) covers functions and
settings for the payment program.
SAP ERP Procurement and Logistics Execution
Procurement I & II
SCM516 · Procurement Optimization
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• Procurement Project Team Members
• Procurement Super Users
• Consultants
• Business Analysts
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• SCM500 Business Processes in
Procurement
• SCM520 Purchasing
• SCM550 Customizing in Materials
Management
SCM518 · Materials Management Archiving Purchasing Documents
DURATION 2 hours PRICE € 150 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• Primary
• Consultants
• Installed base customers
• Secondary
• Project team
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
Five or more years of materials
management implementation experience.
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• Either Procurement (TSCM50 and
TSCM52), or Business Processes in
SCM520 · Purchasing
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES 30-mrt-09, 15-jun-09
TARGET GROUP
• Project team members
• Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
SCM500 (Processes in Procurement)
GOALS
• In this course, participants develop the
different master data in the purchasing
process and use it in the procurement
process.
• Participants learn about additional,
special purchasing functions and
Customizing settings relevant to
purchasing.
GOALS
• In this course, procurement
professionals, consultants, and business
analyst will have the opportunity to
bridge the knowledge gap exciting
between advanced logistics topics and
rudimentary technical skills.
• Topic-specific exercises in the SAP
system give participants the
opportunity to gain first-hand practical
experience of the processes introduced
in the course.
Procurement (SCM500).
• Customizing in Materials Management
(SCM550).
GOALS
Identify the purpose and benefits of
archiving purchasing documents, and
explain and demonstrate setting up and
running of this process in SAP.
CONTENT
• Define archiving and its benefits, and
explain and demonstrate the SAP
functionality for archiving purchasing
CONTENT
• Master data for purchasing
• Sources of supply: info records,
contracts, and scheduling agreements
• Source determination
• Optimized purchasing
• Special procurement processes
(accounting plan, subcontracting, MPN
processing)
• Document release (approval) procedure
• Vendor evaluation
• Customizing (vendor master records,
partner determination, document
types, user parameters)
CONTENT
• Maintaining Serial Numbers
• Creating Vendor Hierarchies
• Creating Quickviewer Reports
• IDOCS exchange
• Activating Workflow
• Search Help Functions
• Text Copy Rule
• Archiving and Deleting Documents
• Mass Maintenance Documents
• Maintaining Enhancements
SOFTWARE
ERP ECC 6.0
documents
• Identify and verify the system and
document settings necessary for
archiving purchasing documents
• Identify and demonstrate the periodic
tasks for performing a purchasing
document archiving process in SAP, and
demonstrate the steps to access and
view archived documents
SOFTWARE
mySAP ERP 2005
• Integrated scenarios in SAP ERP 2005
SOFTWARE
SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
NOTES
This course builds on the content of the
course SCM500 (Processes in
Procurement). Attending this course
(SCM520) makes sense only if you have
the appropriate prior knowledge and
skills.
www.sap.nl/education 133
SAP ERP Procurement and Logistics Execution
Procurement I & II

SCM521 · Pricing in Purchasing

DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP price determination functions in • Special condition types and functions
• Project team members purchasing and make the necessary • Subsequent settlement
• Consultants Customizing settings for price • Customizing
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED determination. SOFTWARE

SCM500 (Processes in Procurement) CONTENT SAP ERP Central Component 5.0

PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED • Elements of the condition technique NOTES

SCM520 (Purchasing) • Price determination To successfully complete this course,

GOALS • Header and group conditions participants need to have a very good
This course enables participants to use the • Maintaining conditions prior knowledge of purchasing.

SCM525 · Consumption-Based Planning and Forecasting

DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES 26-mrt-09

TARGET GROUP CONTENT NOTES

• Project team members
• Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
SCM500 (Processes in Procurement)
GOALS
In this course, participants become
familiar with consumption-based MRP
and forecasting procedures.
• Master data
• Planning run and evaluation
• Lot-size calculation
• Forecasting in consumption-based
planning
• Source determination during MRP
• MRP areas and storage locations
SOFTWARE
SAP ERP Central Component 5.0
This course does not cover requirements
planning procedures (with bill of material
explosion). The course SCM240
(Production Planning) addresses material
requirements planning procedures in
more detail. The special features for SAP
for Retail are covered in the course IRT330
(Requirements Planning and Purchasing).

SCM540 · Procurement of Services

DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP familiar with the processes for procuring • Value limits for unplanned services
• Project team members services from suppliers. • Invoice verification for services
• Consultants CONTENT • Value limits for unplanned services
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED • Master data • Integration with other processes
SCM500 (Processes in Procurement) • Service specifications SOFTWARE

GOALS • Sources of supply and optimized SAP ERP Central Component 5.0
In this course, participants become procurement

134
SAP ERP Procurement and Logistics Execution
Procurement I & II
SCM550 · Customizing in Materials Management
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES 9-feb-09, 22-jun-09
TARGET GROUP
• Project team members
• Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
SCM500 (Processes in Procurement)
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• SCM510 (Inventory Management and
Physical Inventory)
• SCM520 (Purchasing)
GOALS
This course prepares participants to
configure selected central functions in
materials management
SCM680 · Cross-Application Business Processes
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES 19-jan-09
TARGET GROUP
• Project team members responsible for
implementing cross application business
processes in Sales and Distribution and
Materials Management
• Participants wishing to familiarize
themselves with the basic execution of
cross-application business processes and
implementation in the standard SAP
R/3
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SCM600 Processes in Sales and
Distribution or LO150 Processes in Sales
and Distribution
SCM681 · Stock Transfer Business Process
DURATION 2 hours PRICE € 150 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
Project team members wishing to
familiarize themselves with the basic
execution of stock transfer business
processes.
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SCM600 Business Processes in Sales
Order Management
• SCM500 Business Processes in
Procurement
• Knowledge of the other applications
(SD or MM) as appropriate
CONTENT
• Introduction to working with the
Implementation Guide
• Global settings in the SAP system
• Setting up the organizational levels in
materials management
• Settings for master data in materials
management
• Settings for valuation and account
assignment, especially automatic
account determination
• Special settings for purchasing
(document types, transferring and
creating long texts, message
determination)
• SCM500 Processes in Procurement or
LO020
• Knowledge of the other application (SD
or MM) as appropriate
GOALS
This course will prepare you to explain
the functions for processing selected cross
application business processes in Sales and
Distribution and Materials Management,
and identify the associated Customizing
settings
CONTENT
• Third-party order processing
• Cross-company-code sales
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• SCM605 Sales
GOALS
• Explain the functions for stock transfer
business processes in Sales and
Distribution and Material Management
CONTENT
• Gain an insight in to the Intra-
company-code and Cross-company-
code stock transfer processes.
• Learn how to transfer materials between
two plants within the same company
• Special settings for inventory
management (creating a new
transaction type, message
determination)
SOFTWARE
SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
NOTES
In this course, selected settings for
materials management are discussed. It is
assumed that the participants have a good
knowledge of processes and transactions
in materialsmanagement. Attending this
course (SCM520) makes sense only if you
have a thorough knowledge of materials
management in SAP.
• Stock transfers within a company code
• Cross-company-code stock transfers
• Subcontracting
SOFTWARE
• R/3 4.70
• EXT.SET 1.10
NOTES
Please do not enroll in the course if you
have not fulfilled the prerequisites.
code and between two plants that
belong to differing company codes, by
means of purchase order and delivery
transactions.
• Become acquainted with the stock
transfer process from the point of view
of sales and distribution, inventory
management and shipping.
• Work with purchase orders, delivery
and billing documents
SOFTWARE
• R/3 4.7
www.sap.nl/education 135
SAP ERP Procurement and Logistics Execution
Procurement I & II
SCM682 · Stock Transfer Customizing & Master Data
DURATION 2 hours PRICE € 150 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
Project team members wishing to
familiarize themselves with Stock Transfer
Customizing and required Master Data
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SCM600
• SCM500
• Knowledge of the other applications
(SD or MM) as appropriate
SCM683 · Subcontracting Business Process
DURATION 2 hours PRICE € 150 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
Project team members wishing to
familiarize themselves with the basic
execution of Subcontracting business
processes.
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SCM600 Business Processes in Sales
Order Management
• SCM500 Business Processes in
Procurement
• Knowledge of the other applications
(SD or MM) as appropriate
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• SCM605 Sales
SCM684 · Subcontracting Customizing and Master Data
DURATION 2 hours PRICE € 150 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
Project team members wishing to
familiarize themselves with
Subcontracting Customizing and required
Master Data
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SCM600 Business Processes in Sales
Order Management
• SCM500 Business Processes in
Procurement
136
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
SCM605
GOALS
This course will prepare you to:
Implement stock transfer business
processes in Sales and Distribution and
Material Management
CONTENT
• Explain which settings in SD and MM
are necessary for and possible for stock
transfer processing
GOALS
Explain the functions for Subcontracting
business processes in Sales and
Distribution and Material Management
CONTENT
• Gain an insight in to the procurement,
goods movement, and goods recei
• Subcontracting processes.
• Learn how to flag a certain material for
subcontracting.
• Convert automatically created purchase
requisitions into purchase orders.
• Create a delivery document to send
required component quantities to
• Knowledge of the other applications
(SD or MM) as appropriate
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
Implement Subcontracting business
processes in Sales and Distribution and
Material Management
CONTENT
• Explain which settings in SD and MM
are necessary and possible for
• Customize the intra-company code and
cross-company code stock transfer
process
• Explain the significance of a goods
recipient and payer master data
• Determine and explain the key
organizational elements used in the
stock transfer business process
subcontractor.
• Post the goods receipt for a subcontract
order.
• Enter subsequent adjustments resulting
from excess consumption.
• Enter an invoice receipt for a
subcontract order.
• Explain the possibility of subcontractor
procurement using a schedulin
agreement.
SOFTWARE
• R/3 4.7
• Subcontracting processing
• Implement the process of
Subcontracting in an enterprise
• Explain and review required master data
for the Subcontracting process
• Determine and explain the key
organizational elements used in the
Subcontracting business process
SOFTWARE
• R/3 4.7
SAP ERP Procurement and Logistics Execution
Procurement III / SAP SRM

SAPSRM SRM SRM210 SRM SRM270 SRM

Overview of the SAP SRM SAP Enterprise SRM – MDM Catalog
Solution Buyer Configuration Managementt

3 days 5 days 3 days

SAP01 SRM300 SRM SRM260 SRM

SAP Overview SRM eSourcing Overview SAP Catalog and Content
Management

2 days
3 days 3 days

TERP41 ERP SAP210 ERP

SAP ERP: Introduction into Procure to Pay
Processes in Procurement

6 hours 8 hours

CERTIFICATION Solution Academy basic training as Solution Consultant SAP SRM – SRM Procurement & Catalog Content Management

(for new consultants) SRM210 > SRM260 > C_TSRM10_05

ALTERNATIVE COURSES SRM210 > C_TSRM10_40

Voor de meest actuele certificeringinformatie verwijzen wij u graag naar www.sap.com/services/education/certification

Cursusdetailgegevens kunt u vinden via de index op pagina 533

www.sap.nl/education 137
SAP ERP Procurement and Logistics Execution
Inventory & Warehouse Management

SAP01 SCM660 ERP EWM100 SCM

SAP Overview Handling Unit Management Extended Warehouse
Management Processes

3 days 2 days 3 days

SAPSCM ERP SCM601 ERP SCM630 ERP SCM631 ERP EWM110 SCM
Overview of the SAP SCM Processes in Logistics Warehouse Management Additional Topics in Extended Warehouse
Solution Execution Warehouse Management Management Customizing

3 days 3 days 5 days 2 days 5 days

ERP001 ERP SCM610 ERP SCM635 ERP

Management Empowered Delivery Processes Task Resource
by SAP ERP Management

4 hours 3 days 3 days

ERP040 ERP SCM500 ERP SCM510 ERP SCM550 ERP

Management Empowered Business Processes Inventory Management and Customizing in Materials
by SAP ERP Logistics and in Procurement Physical Inventory Management
Operations

4 hours 5 days 5 days 5 days

TERP42 ERP SCM680 ERP

SAP ERP: Introduction into Cross-Application
Processes in Inventory Business Processes
Management

3 hours 2 days

SCM681 ERP SCM682 ERP SCM683 ERP SCM684 ERP

Stock Transfer Business Stock Transfer Subcontracting Business Subcontracting
Process Customizing & Process Customizing &
Master Data Master Data

2 hours 2 hours 2 hours 2 hours

SRF001 SRF010 SRF050

Radio Frequency in SAP RFID-enabled SAP RFID for SCM
SAP Software – Supply Chain Execution – Technology and
Solution Overview Solution Overview System Landscape

1 hour 1 hour 1 hour

CERTIFICATION Solution Academy basic training as Solution Consultant SCM – WM & LE (for new consultants)

SCM601 > SCM610 > SCM611 > SCM630 > SCM631 > C_TSCM66_05
Voor de meest actuele certificeringinformatie verwijzen wij u graag naar www.sap.com/services/education/certification

138
SAP ERP Procurement and Logistics Execution
Inventory & Warehouse Management
SCM601 · Processes in Logistics Execution
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES 23-feb-09, 13-mei-09
TARGET GROUP
• Project managers
• Project-team members responsible for
an area in logistics execution
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
A fundamental knowledge of the use of
SAP applications, such as they are
described in course SAP01 (SAP
Overview), for example.
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
SAP01 (SAP Overview)
GOALS
• Understand how logistics execution fits
SCM610 · Delivery Processes
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES 4-mrt-09, 18-mei-09
TARGET GROUP
• Project team members
• Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SCM600 (Processes in Sales and
Distribution) or
• SCM601 (Processes in Logistics
Execution)
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
SCM605 (Sales)
SCM630 · Warehouse Management
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES 9-mrt-09, 25-mei-09
TARGET GROUP
• Project team members
• Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
SCM601 (Processes in Logistics Execution)
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• SCM610 (Delivery Processes)
• SCM510 (Inventory Management and
Physical Inventory)
GOALS
• Use the organizational structures of the
Warehouse Management system
• Configure control of pick, putaway, and
stock transfer activities at master data
into the SAP ERP Procurement and
Logistics Execution solution
• Control the basic processes in logistics
execution (goods receipt and goods
issue)
CONTENT
• Organizational units and master data in
Logistics Execution
• Mapping goods receipt and goods issue
processes in SAP ERP Central
Component (warehouse management,
delivery processing, and transport)
• Monitoring these processes in the
GOALS
In this course, participants become
familiar with the functions and
Customizing settings in delivery
processing.
CONTENT
• Overview of the delivery processes in
SAP ERP Central Component
• Organizational units for delivery
processing
• Controlling inbound and outbound
deliveries (Customizing)
and Customizing level
• Integrate the Warehouse Management
system with other logistics applications
in SAP ERP Central Component
CONTENT
• Organizational units and master data in
the Warehouse Management system
• Configuring the interface between
Inventory Management and the
Warehouse Management system
• Batch management and quality
management in the warehouse
• Delivery processes using the Warehouse
Management system
warehouse activity monitor
• Introduction to mobile data entry and
cross docking
• Overview of handling unit management
• Introduction to task and resource
management
SOFTWARE
SAP ERP Central Component 5.0
NOTES
It is not advisable to attend this course
unless you have fulfilled the course
prerequisites.
• Creating and processing deliveries
• Packing functions
• Picking
• Goods receipt and goods issue
• Stock transfer with delivery
SOFTWARE
SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
NOTES
It is not advisable to attend this course
unless you have fulfilled the course
prerequisites.
• Staging components for production
from the warehouse
• Configuring the warehouse activity
monitor as a control instrument
• Inventory at storage bin level
• Case study: setting up a new warehouse
SOFTWARE
SAP ERP Central Component 5.0
NOTES
It is not advisable to attend this course
unless you have fulfilled the course
prerequisites.
www.sap.nl/education 139
SAP ERP Procurement and Logistics Execution
Inventory & Warehouse Management
SCM631 · Additional Topics in Warehouse Management
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES 19-mrt-09, 4-jun-09
TARGET GROUP
• Project team members
• Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
SCM630 (Warehouse Management)
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
BIT300 (ALE Integration Technology)
GOALS
• Configure special functions for
warehouse management (storage unit
management and its connection with
handling unit management, hazardous
SCM635 · Task Resource Management
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• Warehouse Management consultants.
• Project team members with experience
in the Warehouse Management
functionality and configuration within
Logistics Execution
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
SCM630 Warehouse Management
GOALS
This course will prepare you to:
• Understand the functionality offered by
Task and Resource Management (TRM)
• Perform processes within TRM
• Perform the configuration of TRM
CONTENT
• Introduction to TRM
• Introduction to the TRM Monitors
- TRM monitor
- TRM alert monitor
140
material management)
• Use mobile data entry
• Set up interfaces to external systems
• Become familiar with decentralized
Warehouse Management
CONTENT
• Storage unit management
• Handling Unit Management &
Warehouse Management
• Hazardous material management
• Using mobile data entry in the
warehouse
• TRM Structure
- Site Definition
- Configuration of Nodes and Zones
- WM bin management for TRM
• Master data definition and
configuration
- Introduction to TRM master data
- Master data customizing
- Resource element creation
• Task Creation and Execution
- Introduction to task creation and
assignment
- Task prioritization
- Priority models
- Route determination
- Route customising
- Task execution
- Execution control objects
• Configuring the TRM Monitors
• Decentralized Warehouse Management
• Interfaces to external systems
SOFTWARE
SAP ERP Central Component 5.0
NOTES
It is not advisable to attend this course
unless you have fulfilled the course
prerequisites.
- TRM monitor customizing
- TRM alert monitor customizing
- Personalisation
- Application logs
• Business Add ins
- Business add ins in TRM
• Presentation Management
- Menus and transactions
- Screen conversion
• Case study
SOFTWARE
ERP ECC 6.0
NOTES
Do not attend this course unless you have
attended the Warehouse Management
course or have wide experience of the
functionality and configuration.
SAP ERP Procurement and Logistics Execution
Inventory & Warehouse Management
SCM660 · Handling Unit Management
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES 17-mrt-09
TARGET GROUP
• Project team members, consultants,
partners
• Project team
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• Good knowledge of logistics in the SAP
environment as covered in the course
SCM601 (Processes in Logistics
Execution)
• Good knowledge of inventory
management, acquired by attending the
course SCM510 (Inventory
Management and Physical Inventory),
for example
GOALS - Distribution processes using handling
• Gain an overview of the functions in units
Handling Unit Management - Quality assurance and Handling Unit
• Become familiar with the Customizing Management
settings for Handling Unit Management SOFTWARE
• Map procurement and distribution SAP ERP Central Component 5.0
subprocesses using handling units NOTES
within a cross-process scenario It is not advisable to attend this course
CONTENT unless you have fulfilled the course
• Basics of Handling Unit Management prerequisites.
- Packing as the basic function of
Handling Unit Management
- Procurement processes using handling
units
www.sap.nl/education 141
SAP ERP Procurement and Logistics Excecution
Transportation

SAP01
SAP Overview

3 days

SAPSCM ERP SCM601 ERP SCM611 ERP SCM612 ERP

SAP SCM Overview Processes in Logistics Transportation Transportation Planning
Execution and Vehicle Scheduling

3 days 3 days 3 days 3 days

ERP001 ERP SCM640 ERP

Management Empowered Foreign Trade
by SAP ERP

4 hours 3 days

ERP040 ERP SCM500 ERP SCM680 ERP

Management Empowered Business Processes Cross-Application
by SAP ERP Logistics and in Procurement Business Processes
Operations

4 hours 5 days 2 days

SCM600 ERP GTS100 ERP GTS200 ERP

Processes in Sales Order SAP Global Trade Services Configuration of SAP
Management Overview Global Trade Services

5 days 3 days 3 days

SCM681 ERP SCM682 ERP SCM683 ERP SCM684 ERP

Stock Transfer Business Stock Transfer Subcontracting Business Subcontracting
Process Customizing & Process Customizing &
Master Data Master Data

2 hours 2 hours 2 hours 2 hours

CERTIFICATION Solution Academy basic training as Solution Consultant SCM – WM & LE (for new consultants)

SCM601 > SCM610 > SCM611 > SCM630 > SCM631 > C_TSCM66_05
Voor de meest actuele certificeringinformatie verwijzen wij u graag naar www.sap.com/services/education/certification

142
SAP ERP Procurement and Logistics Excecution
Transportation
SCM600 · Processes in Sales Order Management
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES 16-feb-09, 4-mei-09, 29-jun-09
TARGET GROUP
• Project managers
• Project team members
• People with organizational
responsibilities
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• Basic knowledge of Microsoft Windows
• Basic business knowledge of processing
in sales and distribution
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• SAPSCM (Overview of SAP SCM)
• SAP01 (SAP Overview)
GOALS
• In this course, participants learn about
the fundamental business processes in
sales and distribution
• Participants learn how to perform the
most important functions in the process
SCM611 · Transportation
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES 9-mrt-09
TARGET GROUP
• Project team members
• Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SCM600 (Processes in Sales and
Distribution) or
• SCM601 (Processes in Logistics
Execution) and
• Good knowledge of condition
technique/pricing acquired by, for
example, attending the course SCM620
(Pricing in SD) or SCM521 (Pricing in
Purchasing)
chain, from “presales to customer
payment”, in the SAP system.
• The areas of materials management,
manufacturing (for example, assembly
orders), and financial accounting are
also touched on.
CONTENT
• Organizational structures in sales and
distribution
• Working with customer master data and
material master data in sales
• Overview of the process chain for sales
order processing
• Presales activities, order processing,
procurement, delivery, billing, payment
• Introduction to pricing in sales and
distribution
• Introduction to the availability check
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
SCM610 (Delivery Processes)
GOALS
In this course, participants will become
familiar with the functions of
transportation and shipment cost
processing, and with the
requiredCsettings.
CONTENT
• Basics of transportation processing
• Transportation processing control
• Transportation planning and processing
• Transportation monitoring and
• Sales and distribution processing with
make-to-order production
• Credit memo processing and returns
processing
• Introduction to sales and distribution
reporting
• Outlook on system installation tools
SOFTWARE
SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
NOTES
The course SCM600 (Processes in Sales
and Distribution) covers the functions in
sales and distribution processing in SAP
ERP. It does not examine company-
specific requirements in Customizing.
evaluation
• Basics of shipment cost processing
• Shipment cost calculation
• Shipment cost settlement
• Shipping costs within the sales process
• Connecting express delivery companies
SOFTWARE
SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
NOTES
It is not advisable to attend this course
unless you have fulfilled the course
prerequisites.
www.sap.nl/education 143
SAP ERP Procurement and Logistics Excecution
Transportation

SCM612 · Transportation Planning and Vehicle Scheduling

DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP
• Project team members
• Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAPSCM Overview of the SAP Supply
Chain Management Solution
• SCM611 Transportation
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
SCM610 Delivery Processes
GOALS
• The course will give participants a
fundamental understanding of the
functions and processes of the
Transportation Planning/Vehicle
Scheduling (TP/VS) component of SAP
Advanced Planning and Optimization
with SAP SCM.
• The course shows the participants how
TP/VS is implemented in SAP systems.
• The fundamental customizing settings
in the SAP systems related to TP/VS will
be covered in the course.
CONTENT
• Transportation-relevant business
processes such as planning returns and
stock transfer orders (from SNP)
• Transportation and costing in the SAP
ERP central component
• Overview of SAP SCM with SAP
Advanced Planning and Optimization
(SAP APO)
• Distribution of master data between
non-SAP and SAP systems
• TP/VS overview
• Transportation Planning in SAP SCM
including basic settings and modeling
supply chain models, plan versions and
maintaining TP/VS profiles
• Interactive planning (with order split
using delivery creation)
• Transportation service provider
selection
• Optimization
• Integration and transaction data
• TP/VS-relevant additional functions
such as monitoring and
troubleshooting or connecting external
geocoding programs
SOFTWARE
• ERP 5.0
• SCM 4.1

SCM640 · Foreign Trade

DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP system and learn how to make the SOFTWARE

• Project team members in the areas of
foreign trade and customs handling or
IT
• Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
SCM600 (Processes in Sales and
Distribution)
GOALS
In this course, participants become
familiar with export processing in the
necessary Customizing settings.
CONTENT
• Master data in foreign trade
• Document flow in foreign trade
• Nomenclatures and classification
• Communication and printing
• Export control
• Documentary payments
• Statistical notifications
• Preference determination
SAP R/3 4.6C
NOTES
It is not advisable to attend this course
unless you have fulfilled the course
prerequisites. In SAP R/3 Enterprise and
SAP ERP Central Component there are no
additional functions for foreign trade.
Note that course GTS100 (SAP Global
Trade Services) is available in this context.

144
SAP ERP Product Development and Manufacturing
Planning

SAP01 SCM130 ERP SCM240 ERP

SAP Overview SAP R/3 Planning and Production Planning (ERP)
Manufacturing Overview

3 days Let op! 5 days 5 days

SCM130 òf
SCM100 en SCM300
SAPSCM ERP SCM100 ERP SCM360 ERP
SAP SCM Overview Planning Overview (ERP) Capacity Planning (ERP)

3 days 2 days 5 days

ERP040 ERP SCM300 ERP SCM270 ERP

Management Empowered Production Overview Flexible Planning
by SAP ERP Logistics and
Operations

4 hours 3 days 2 days

SAP220 ERP SCM500 ERP SCM525 ERP

Plan to Inventory Business Processes Consumption-Based
in Procurement Planning and Forecasting

8 hours 5 days 2 days

TERP51 ERP OXLPO ERP

Zie ook www.service.sap.com/okp
SAP ERP: Introduction into Online Knowledge Product
Processes in Material SAP xApp Lean Planning voor meer informatie over
Planning and Operation (xLPO) 5.60
Online Knowledge Products
3 hours 20 hours

CERTIFICATION Solution Academy basic training Consultant Profile SAP SCM – Planning & Manufacturing

(for new consultants) SAP125 > ERP001 > SAP220 > TSCM40 > SM001 > TSCM42 > C_TSCM42_05
ALTERNATIVE COURSES

SAP125 > ERP001 > SAP220 > PLM114 > SCM240 > SCM210 > SCM250 > SCM300 > SCM310 > SCM360 > SM001 > C_TSCM42_05
Voor de meest actuele certificeringinformatie verwijzen wij u graag naar www.sap.com/services/education/certification

OXLPO · Online Knowledge Product SAP xApp Lean Planning and Operation (xLPO) 5.60
DURATION 20 hours PRICE € 350 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP • Implement SAP xApp Lean Planning - Supplier KANBAN With SAP xLPO 5.60
• Application Consultant and Operation 5.60 - Supermarket KANBAN With SAP xLPO
• Project Team Members CONTENT 5.60 Part1
• Super Users • Introduction to SAP xApp LPO: - Supermarket KANBAN with SAP xLPO
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED - SAP xLPO – Lean Production and 5.60 Part2
• Understanding of production planning Operations - Job Board in SAP xLPO 5.60
and scheduling - SAP xLPO – Lean Manufacturing - SAP xLPO – Solution in Detail
• Knowledge of lean concepts a plus Terminology • Summary
• SCM100 Business Processes in Planning - SAP xApp Lean Planning and NOTES
(SAP ERP) or Operations – Solution in Brief • This content is provided by SAP’s
• SCM130 SAP R/3 Planning and • Detailed Description of the SAP xLPO Online Knowledge Products.
Manufacturing Overview components: Information regarding Online Know-
GOALS - xLPO Overview ledge Products and instructions on how
• Describe SAP xApp Lean Planning and - Navigation in SAP xLPO 5.60 to access the Online Knowledge
Operation 5.60 - Pacemaker Planning in SAP xLPO 5.60 Products are available:
• Plan SAP xApp Lean Planning and Part1 – Master Data http://service.sap.com/okp
Operation 5.60 - Pacemaker Planning in SAP xLPO 5.60 • All materials are online
Part2
www.sap.nl/education 145
SAP ERP Product Development and Manufacturing
Planning
SCM130 · Planning and Manufacturing Overview
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES 2-mrt-09
TARGET GROUP
Project team members and key users
responsible for implementing production
planning with SAP ECC 6.0. The course is
also suitable for customers who are still
using an SAP R/3 version of the
component.
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• SAP01 SAP Overview or
• SAPSCM Overview of the SAP SCM
solution
GOALS
• This course will prepare you to:
• Provide an overview of the fundamental
concepts and procedures of production
planning within SAP R/3.
• Gain an overview of the manufacturing
methods supported by SAP Supply
Chain Management.
SCM240 · Production Planning (ERP)
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES 16-feb-09
TARGET GROUP
This course is aimed at project team
members and key users (from the user
departments) responsible for
implementing production planning with
SAP ERP in the context of the
SAP Business Suite.
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• PLM110 (Basic Data Part 1) or
• PLM111 (Basic Data Part 2)
• SCM100 (Planning Overview (ERP))
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
SAPSCM (Overview of the SAP SCM
Solution)
146
CONTENT
• Overview of the planning process
within SAP R/3
• Overview of the master and transaction
data relevant to production planning
• Overview of Master Planning using CO-
PA Planning, Sales and Operations
Planning, and Flexible Planning
• Overview of Long-Term Planning (LTP)
• Overview of Master production
scheduling (MPS)
• Introduction to Materials Requirements
Planning (MRP)
• Introduction to Capacity evaluations
• Integration with Manufacturing
execution
• Outlook on Advanced Planning with
SAP SCM (APO)
• Order-controlled production with
GOALS
In this course, participants gain an
understanding of the concepts of demand
planning and material requirements
planning (for nonconfigurable materials)
that are used in SAP ECC – MRP.
CONTENT
• Material planning overview
• Consumption-based planning and MRP
planning
• Demand management
• Requirements strategies for make-to-
stock production
• Requirements strategies for make-to-
order production
production orders
• Order-controlled production with
process orders
• Repetitive manufacturing
• KANBAN
• Further selected shop floor control
SOFTWARE
ERP ECC 6.0
NOTES
This course is a combination of SCM100
and SCM300. Some training locations
choose to offer SCM100 and SCM300 as
separate courses, while other locations
will choose to offer SCM130. Please
contact your local training center if you
have questions regarding which course
alternative is offered in your location.
• Performing requirements planning
• Processing of material requirements
planning results
• Master production scheduling
• Long-term planning
• Technical details of the planning run
• MRP areas
SOFTWARE
SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
NOTES
Note that characteristics planning
(variant configuration) is not covered in
this course, but in the course PLM 145
(Variant Configuration 1: Modeling and
Integration) instead.
SAP ERP Product Development and Manufacturing
Planning

SCM270 · Flexible Planning

DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP methods, and their differences • Statistical forecasting technique

This training course is designed for
project-team members and key users who
are responsible for creating demand plans
based on aggregated historical data stored
in the Logistics Information System (LIS)
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
Knowledge of the Logistics Information
System (LIS)
GOALS
• Planning on the basis of information
structures
• Comparison of sales and operations
planning (SOP) with flexible planning
• Summary of possible use, planning
• Maintenance of master data for various
planning methods
CONTENT
• Planning on the basis of the LIS
• Sales & Operations Planning (SOP)
• Flexible planning
• Comparison of level-by-level planning,
consistent planning, aggregation, and
disaggregation
• Generation of master data (planning
hierarchies and proportional factors)
• Product group planning
• Planning types and macros
• Navigation in interactive planning
• Rough-cut resource and capacity
planning
• Consideration of market information
about results
• Generation of planned independent
requirements (transfer to demand
planning)
• Mass processing for forecasts, macro
calculation, and transfer
• Interface between Profitability Analysis
(CO/PA) and the LIS
• Product allocation
SOFTWARE
ERP ECC 5.0

SCM300 · Business Processes in Manufacturing (SAP ERP)

DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES 9-feb-09

TARGET GROUP Planning (SCM)) process orders

This course is aimed at project-team • PLM100 (Life-Cycle Data Management) • Repetitive manufacturing
members and key users (from the user GOALS • KANBAN
departments) who are responsible for This course gives participants an overview • Further selected shop floor control
implementing shop floor control with of the production types supported by SAP topics
SAP Business Suite. Business Suite. SOFTWARE

PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED CONTENT • SAP ERP Central Component 6.0

• SAPSCM (Overview of SAP SCM) • Order-controlled production with • SAP SCM 5.0
• SCM100 (Planning Overview (ERP)) production orders
• SCM200 (Overview of Advanced • Order-controlled production with

SCM360 · Capacity Planning (ERP)

DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP CONTENT • System settings for available capacity,

This course is aimed at project team
members and key users (from the user
departments) responsible for capacity
planning with SAP ERP in the context of
the SAP Business Suite.
• Integration of capacity planning capacity evaluation, and capacity
• Analysis of capacity requirement leveling
• Maintenance of available capacity SOFTWARE
• Scheduling with the tabular and SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
graphical planning board NOTES

PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• PLM111 (Basic Data Part 2)
• SCM100 (Planning Overview (ERP))
GOALS
The participants will gain a detailed
knowledge of using capacity planning in
the SAP ERP solution.
• Scheduling strategies This course deals with capacity planning
• Scheduling control with SAP ECC (previously R/3). It uses
• Capacity reduction examples from planning and production
• Sequencing orders (SAP ECC (PP-SFC)). Users of
• Mass processing of dispatchings or process or repetitive manufacturing can
deallocations and must apply the same concepts to each
• Links with human resources of those areas. Capacity planning for plant
management (requirements, maintenance and networks is not covered.
qualifications)

www.sap.nl/education 147
SAP ERP Product Development and Manufacturing
Manufacturing

SAP01 SAPSCM ERP ERP040 ERP SAP220 ERP

SAP Overview Overview of the SAP SCM Management Empowered Plan to Inventory
Solution by SAP ERP Logistics and
Operations

3 days 3 days 4 hours 8 hours

SCM130 ERP SCM310 ERP SCM920 ERP PLM150 ERP

Let op! SAP R/3 Planning and Production Orders Customizing Production Change & Configuration
SCM130 òf Manufacturing Overview Orders Management
SCM100 en SCM300

5 days 5 days 3 days 3 days

SCM100 ERP SCM340 ERP

Planning Overview (ERP) Process Manufacturing

2 days 5 days

SCM300 ERP SCM350 ERP SCM344 ERP PLM421 ERP

Production Overview KANBAN Process Management Quality Management in the
Process Industry

3 days 3 days 3 days 3 days

SCM200 ERP
Business Processes
in Planning
(SAP SCM (APO))

2 days

TERP52 ERP
SAP ERP: Introduction into
Processes in
Manufacturing Execution

3 hours

CERTIFICATION Solution Academy basic training Consultant Profile SAP SCM – Planning & Manufacturing
(for new consultants) SAP125 > ERP001 > SAP220 > TSCM40 > SM001 > TSCM42 > C_TSCM42_05
ALTERNATIVE COURSES SAP125 > ERP001 > SAP220 > PLM114 > SCM240 > SCM210 > SCM250 > SCM300 > SCM310 > SCM360 > SM001 > C_TSCM42_05

Voor de meest actuele certificeringinformatie verwijzen wij u graag naar www.sap.com/services/education/certification

148
SAP ERP Product Development and Manufacturing
Manufacturing
SCM310 · Production Orders
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES 23-feb-09
TARGET GROUP
This course is aimed at project team
members and key users (from the user
departments) who are responsible for
implementing and managing production
orders with SAP Business Suite.
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• PLM110 (Basic Data Part 1)
• PLM111 (Basic Data Part 2)
• SCM300 (Production Overview)
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• SCM240 (Production Planning (ERP))
• SAPSCM (Overview of SAP SCM)
GOALS
In this course, participants become
familiar with production orders, learn
how they can be used, and also – to a
SCM340 · Process Manufacturing
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
This course is aimed at project-team
members and key users (from the user
departments) who are responsible for
implementing process manufacturing
with mySAP Business Suite.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• SCM300 Supply Chain Manufacturing
Overview
• PLM115 Basic Data for Process
Manufacturing
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED
• SCM240 Production Planning (ERP)
• SAPSCM Overview of the mySAP
Supply Chain Management Solution
SCM344 · Process Management
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• Project team members and other
individuals responsible for process order
management
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SCM340 Process Manufacturing
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• SCM300 Supply Chain Manufacturing
Overview
lesser extent – learn how they can be
configured.
CONTENT
• Overview of order categories and types
• Order structure and processing
• Order creation and changing orders
(routing and BOM selection, integrating
documents)
• Interface to planning (SAP ECC R/3 and
SAP SCM (APO))
• Order release (status management,
availability checks)
• Printing order documents
• Material staging and withdrawal
• Order control (detailed
control/integration of PDC systems)
• Confirmations
GOALS
In this course, participants gain an
understanding of how process orders are
used and which main system setting must
be made for process order execution. The
course also examines other selected
process manufacturing topics.
CONTENT
• Process order creation
• Integration with production planning
• Process planning and order release
- Material availability check
- Batch determination
- Resource scheduling
• Principles of process management
GOALS
• This course will prepare you to
configure process management and
explain how it can be used
CONTENT
• Process messages
• Process instructions
• Control recipes
• Goods receipt, order settlement
• Archiving and deletion
• Information systems (overview)
• Automation and mass processing
• Collection orders (multilevel order
management)
SOFTWARE
• SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
• SAP SCM 5.0
NOTES
In addition to this course, we recommend
that you also attend course SCM920
(Customizing Production Orders), in
which you can create and test a new order
type and its related functionality.
• Material staging and withdrawal
• Confirmations
• Goods receipt and order settlement
• Archiving and deletion
• Process data evaluation
• Production conforming to GMP
- Material identification
- In-process quality inspection
- Batch record
- Digital signature
SOFTWARE
• ERP ECC 5.0
• SCM 4.1
• Concept of linking process control
systems
• Process instruction sheets (PI sheets)
• Error handling
• Relevant Customizing
SOFTWARE
• R/3 4.70
www.sap.nl/education 149
SAP ERP Product Development and Manufacturing
Manufacturing
SCM380 · xApp Manufacturing Integration and Intelligence Fundamental
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2825 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• Solution Consultants from
SAP Partners
• Technical Personnel from
xMII Customers
• Solution Consultants from
SAP Internal
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAP NetWeaver
• SAP Enterprise Portal
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• Basic Knowledge on Web Technologies
including HTML/XML/XSL, JavaScript,
CSS, xPath and Web Services
• Basic Knowledge on MES systems
SCM920 · Customizing Production Orders
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
This course is designed for consultants
and project team members who are
responsible for making the Customizing
settings required for production orders.
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SCM310 Production Orders (SFC)
• Practical knowledge of production
order management is a definite
prerequisite for this course.
GOALS
This course will prepare you to gain in-
depth knowledge of Customizing for
production orders, to put this knowledge
into practice and to fully configure
management of production orders.
150
• Basic Knowledge on SAP ECC systems • Dynamic Page Generator
GOALS • Applets
This course will prepare you to: • JavaScript
• have a clear overview about xMII; • xMII Reports
• use xMII tool to integrate various data • Business Logic Services
from different data sources; • SPC
• use xMII to create real-time dashboard • Connection to SAP ECC System
such as KPIs, alerts and metrics. SOFTWARE
CONTENT • xMII 12.0; ECC 6.0
• Introduction to SAP xMII NOTES
• SAP xMII Administration • The course content listed here may be
• HTML Development Add-In modified during the course
• Data Server Configuration development due to the new features
• Query Template added in xMII version 12.0.
• Display Template
CONTENT information systems and mass
• Customize order categories and order processing
types • Customize the production scheduling
• Configure number assignment profile
• Set up scheduling parameters • Activate serial number management
• Customize routing and BOM selection • Activate CIF for production orders
• Activate DMS document linkage • Activate OCM
• Set up user status profile • Use an example to test all settings
• Configure availability checks SOFTWARE
• Set up print control tables • SAP R/3 4.70
• Storage location default and stock • PLUGIN 2003
determination • SAP APO 3.1
• Activate PDC interface NOTES
• Configure the confirmation parameters This is a new course and requires
• Configure goods receipt valuation participants to have application
• Set up settlement parameters knowledge.
• Set up archiving and deletion
• Customize profiles and layouts for
SAP ERP Product Development and Manufacturing
Manufacturing
PLM150 · Change & Configuration Management
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
Project team members and persons
responsible for managing changes to
master data and production orders, or
configuration management.
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• PLM100 Business Processes in Life-Cycle
Data Management
• Basic knowledge of production order
processing
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• SAPPLM Overview of the SAP PLM
solution
• SAPSCM Overview of the SAP SCM
solution
• PLM114 Basic Data for Manufacturing
PLM421 · QM in the Process Industry
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1695 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• Project team members
• Employees responsible for quality
management in process manufacturing
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
PLM405 Quality Inspections or LO705
Qualitätsprüfungen
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
SCM340 Process Manufacturing or LO060
Process Manufacturing
GOALS
This course will prepare you to:
• Use SAP PLM Quality Management in
the process industry
• Identify important functions from
related applications
and Product Management • Engineering change orders and
• PLM120 Document Management engineering change requests
GOALS • Change processing with standard
This course will prepare you to use and workflows
configure engineering change • Parameter effectivity
management for master data and • Change hierarchies
production orders. It also provides an • Release key
introduction to configuration • Digital signature
management. • Order change management (production
CONTENT orders) when master data or the sales
• Change master record order changes
• Changes to material masters, bills of • Configuration Management for product
material, documents, task lists (such as replication
routings), and objects for classification SOFTWARE
and variant configuration R/3 4.70
• Reporting functions
CONTENT NOTES
• Basics of the classification system in • This training course is intended for
connection with QM employees in companies, which use the
• Basics of batch management in SAP solutions for the process industry
connection with QM (SAP SCM Process Manufacturing).
• Sample management • The examples in the course are based on
• Integration of QM in the production master recipes and process orders.
process • Course PLM420 (QM in Discrete
- Master recipe and QM Manufacturing) or LO720 (QM in
- Process order and QM Discrete and Repetitive Manufacturing)
- PI sheet and QM is offered for users who work with the
• Basics of certificate processing SAP solution for discrete or repetitive
• Batch monitoring using recurring manufacturing (SAP SCM Discrete
inspections Manufacturing).
• QM-specific requirements in the process • Certificate processing (for example,
industry: planning, management) is covered in
- Digital signature detail in course PLM425 (QM in Sales
- Electronic batch log and Distribution / Quality Certificates)
SOFTWARE or LO725 (QM in Sales and Distribution
R/3 4.70 / Quality Certificates).
www.sap.nl/education 151
SAP ERP Product Development and Manufacturing
Enterprise Asset Management

SAP01 SAPPLM ERP

SAP Overview SAP PLM Solution
Overview
SAP230 ERP PLM305 ERP

3 days 2 days Plant Maintenance Structuring and Managing

Technical Objects

TERP53 ERP
8 hours 2 days
Enterprise Asset Mgmt/
Customer Service
Organizational Structures PLM310 ERP

5 hours Preventive Maintenance

and Service

3 days

ERP040 ERP PLM300 ERP PLM315 ERP

Management Empowered Business Processes in Maintenance Processing
by SAP ERP Logistics and Plant Maintenance Operational Functions
Operations

4 hours 5 days 3 days

PLM318 ERP
Analytics in Enterprise
Asset Management

2 days

PLM320 ERP
WCM Work Clearance
Management

TZMAM2 NW OMB03S ERP PLM200 ERP 3 days PLM322 ERP

EPT SAP Mobile Asset OKP SAP Mobile Business Business Processes in Managing Maintenance
Management 2.5 Project Management Projects/Capacity &
Shutdown Planning

3 days 20 hours 3 days 3 days

CERTIFICATION Solution Academy basic training as Solution Consultant PLM – Maintenance & Repair (former module PM) (for new consultants)
PLM300 > PLM305 > PLM310 > PLM315 > PLM318 > C_TPLM30_05
Voor de meest actuele certificeringinformatie verwijzen wij u graag naar www.sap.com/services/education/certification

OMB03S · OKP SAP Mobile Business

DURATION 20 hours PRICE € 350 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP
• Mobile Asset Management Consultants
• Mobile Procurement Consultants
• Mobile Time and Travel Consultants
• Mobile Sales Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• Knowledge equivalent to a consultant
profile for Mobile Business
• More than 12 months project
experience
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• Implement SAP Mobile Business
CONTENT
This Online Knowledge Product contains
the official SAP new-release knowledge for
the “mySAP Mobile Business, Q3/2003”,
and consists of Mobile Asset Management
2.0, Mobile Procurement 2.0, Mobile Time
and Travel 1.5, and Mobile Sales for
Handheld 1.0. The content is role-based
and prioritized to provide the most
convenient and efficient learning
experience. The Online Knowledge
learning objects, such as recorded expert
presentations, interactive tutorials and
simulations, documentation and self-
tests. In addition to the Online Knowledge
Product, Live Expert Sessions can be
offered. The student has the opportunity
to attend these sessions online without
the need to travel. The focus of the Live
Expert Sessions is to clarify open topics
about the “mySAP Mobile Business
Q3/2003”.
NOTES

• Describe SAP Business Product consists of 6 separate Learning Online Knowledge Products are offered in
• Plan your SAP Mobile Business Maps for the roles described above. Each English
implementation project Learning Map contains a variety of

152
SAP ERP Product Development and Manufacturing
Enterprise Asset Management

PLM305 · Managing Technical Objects

DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES 2-mrt-09, 14-mei-09

TARGET GROUP • All of the necessary Customizing NOTES

• Project manager
• Project team
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• PLM300 (Plant Maintenance)
GOALS
• SAP training course PLM305 explains in
detail the structure of object and asset
structures in the Enterprise Asset
Management area, which form the
backbone for processing Plant
Maintenance and service measures.
settings are also shown.
CONTENT
• Functional locations (further functions)
• Equipment (further functions)
• Classification
• BOMs and assemblies
• Serial numbers
• Measuring points and counters
SOFTWARE
SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
The Enterprise Asset Management area
within the SAP ERP solution is a further
development of the R/3 Plant
Maintenance (PM) component. However,
customers with R/3 Releases 4.6C and
Enterprise 4.7 can participate in Enterprise
Asset Management courses below releases
SAP ERP 2004 and SAP ERP 2005 without
problem.

PLM310 · Maintenance and Service Processing: Preventative

DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES 11-mrt-09, 18-mei-09

TARGET GROUP Plant Maintenance and Quality management based on a maintenance

• Project manager Management, or the procurement of plan
• Project team services based on the maintenance plan. SOFTWARE

PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED CONTENT SAP ERP Central Component 6.0

PLM300 (Plant Maintenance) • Routing management NOTES

GOALS
• This training course provides a detailed
overview of the business processes
involved in preventative maintenance
and service processing.
• It focuses on time-based and
performance-based maintenance
planning in the area of Enterprise Asset
Management.
• Participants also learn about specific
areas such as the integration between
• Maintenance planning with a cycle
• Maintenance planning with a strategy –
time-based
• Maintenance planning with a strategy –
performance-based
• Maintenance planning with cycles of a
different dimension
• Selling services based on a maintenance
plan
• Stateful maintenance
• Measurement and test equipment
The Enterprise Asset Management area
within the SAP ERP solution is a further
development of the R/3 Plant
Maintenance (PM) component. However,
customers with R/3 Releases 4.6C and
Enterprise 4.7 can participate in Enterprise
Asset Management courses below releases
SAP ERP 2004 and SAP ERP 2005 without
problem.

PLM315 · Maintenance Processing: Operational Functions

DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES 16-mrt-09, 3-jun-09

TARGET GROUP CONTENT NOTES

• Project manager
• Project team
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
PLM300 (Plant Maintenance)
GOALS
• This training course provides
participants with all of the basic
Customizing settings for maintenance
processing.
• It also deals with specific application
functions in the area of Enterprise Asset
Management.
• Notification (notification types,
catalogs, catalog profiles)
• Planning (order type, work center,
costing)
• Controlling (checking availability,
scheduling, printing)
• Completion (confirmation, settlement,
history)
SOFTWARE
• SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
The Enterprise Asset Management area
within the SAP ERP solution is a further
development of the R/3 Plant
Maintenance (PM) component. However,
customers with R/3 Releases 4.6C and
Enterprise 4.7 can participate in Enterprise
Asset Management courses below releases
SAP ERP 2004 and SAP ERP 2005 without
problem.
www.sap.nl/education 153
SAP ERP Product Development and Manufacturing
Enterprise Asset Management

PLM320 · WCM Work Clearance Management

DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP CONTENT NOTES

• Project manager
• Project team
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
PLM300 (Plant Maintenance)
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
PLM305 (Managing Technical Objects)
GOALS
Participants learn about using the work
clearance module in Enterprise Asset
Management and integrating it into
existing maintenance processing
• Overview of Work Clearance PLM320 is available by request only. The
Management Enterprise Asset Management area within
• Technical system structure the SAP ERP solution is a further
• Lockout/Tagout architecture development of the R/3 Plant
• Authorization process Maintenance (PM) component. However,
• Lockout/Tagout customers with R/3 Releases 4.6C and
• Integration of PM order and WCM Enterprise 4.7 can participate in Enterprise
• Extended Functions Asset Management courses below releases
• Customizing SAP ERP 2004 and SAP ERP 2005 without
SOFTWARE problem.
SAP R/3 Enterprise

PLM322 · Managing Maintenance Projects/Capacity & Shutdown Planning

DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP • The course shows in detail how such SOFTWARE

• Project manager projects are set up, planned, scheduled, SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
• Project team executed, completed, and evaluated. NOTES

PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED • To do this, it focuses on capacity The Enterprise Asset Management area
• PLM200 requirements planning from a within the SAP ERP solution is a further
• PLM300 maintenance perspective. development of the R/3 Plant
• PLM315 CONTENT Maintenance (PM) component. However,
GOALS • Planning & budgeting customers with R/3 Releases 4.6C and
• This training course teaches participants • Scheduling & capacity planning Enterprise 4.7 can participate in Enterprise
how to carry out complex Plant • Execution Asset Management courses below releases
Maintenance projects (such as • Response to changes SAP ERP 2004 and SAP ERP 2005 without
shutdowns or revisions) in Enterprise • Completion and analysis problem.
Asset Management.

154
SAP ERP Product Development and Manufacturing
Enterprise Asset Management

TZMAM2 · EPT SAP Mobile Asset Management 2.5

DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED • Front-end development framework

• Experienced Solution Consultants in • JA300 SAP J2EE Start-Up Kit • SAP Mobile Development Kit (MDK)
the area of SAP PLM – Asset Life Cycle • BIT526 Developing BAPI-enabled Web SOFTWARE
Management who want to implement Applications with Java • SAP Mobile Infrastructure 2.5
SAP Mobile Asset Management 2.5 GOALS NOTES

• Experienced Development Consultants
• MAM – project team members and
administrators
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• General device knowledge
• Plant maintenance and/or customer
service knowledge (Customizing an
business process)
• Knowledge of RFCs, Java, JSP,
Eclipse/SAP NetWeaver Developer Studi
• ABAP, Web Console for deployment,
SAP Mobile Infrastructure, especially
• Smart Sync technology
• TMOB20 Mobile Infrastructure
Administration
• Implement, customize, and enhance
the SAP Mobile Asset Management 2.5
application
• Maintain a live SAP Mobile Asset
Management 2.5 system
CONTENT
• Introduction and application overview
• Order management
• Notification management
• Technical object management
• Radio frequency identification (RFID)
• SAP MAM system landscape
• SAP MAM data modeling and
synchronization
• Back-end enhancements
• The course material is available in
English only.
• This course is offered as an SAP Early
Product Training workshop. The course
is not held using conventional training
systems and material. Instead, access is
made possible to early SAP product
versions and documents before mass
shipment. This workshop will feature
live demonstrations and hands-on
exercises.

www.sap.nl/education 155
SAP ERP Product Development and Manufacturing
Life-Cycle Data Management

SAP01 SAPPLM ERP PLM

PLM115 ERP PLM160 ERP
SAP Overview SAP PLM Solution Basic Data for Process Recipe Management
Overview Manufacturing

3 days 2 days 3 days

4 3 days

PLM512 ERP
cFolders

PLM100 ERP
Business Processes in 2 days
Product Life-Cycle
Management
PLM114 ERP PLM150 ERP
3 days
Basic Data for Change & Configuration
Manufacturing and Management
Product Management

4 days 3 days

ERP001 ERP ERP040 ERP PLM120 ERP

Management Empowered Management Empowered Document Management
by SAP ERP by SAP ERP Logistics and
Operations

4 hours 4 hours 3 days

TERP54 ERP PLM130 ERP PLM145 ERP PLM146 ERP

SAP ERP: Introduction into Classification Variant Configuration: Variant Configuration:
Processes in Lifecycle Modeling and Integration Scenarios and
Data Management Enhancements
2 hours 3 days 5 days 3 days

PLM170 ERP
Integrated Product- and
Process Engineering (iPPE)
in PLM

3 days

156
SAP ERP Product Development and Manufacturing
Life-Cycle Data Management

PLM114 · Basic Data for Manufacturing and Product Management

DURATION 4 days PRICE € 2360 STARTING DATES 2-feb-09

TARGET GROUP material master, bills of material Tools (PRTs)

Project team members and employees
responsible for material masters, bills of
material (BOMs), routings (task lists) and
work centers.
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
PLM100 Business Processes in Life-Cycle
Data Management or SCM130 SAP R/3
Planning and Manufacturing Overview
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
(BOMs), routings (task lists) and work • Maintenance of master data using mass
centers. change functions and engineering
CONTENT workbench
• Material master data and views required • Master data reports and lists
to support discrete and repetitive • Managing master data changes with and
manufacturing without history
• Material master configuration SOFTWARE
• Functions and features of bills of ERP ECC 6.0
material (BOMs) in detail NOTES

• SAPPLM Overview of the SAP PLM
solution or
• SAPSCM Overview of the SAP SCM
solution
GOALS
This course will prepare you to:
• Create, maintain, and use material
masters, bills of material (BOMs),
routings (task lists) and work centers.
• Understand the configuration of
• Bill of material (BOM) configuration • The content covered in this course is
• Work center master data and views appropriate for users on the following
required to support discrete SAP software releases:
manufacturing - R/3 4.6C
• Work center configuration - R/3 Enterprise (4.7)
• Functions and features of discrete - ERP 2004 (ECC 5.0)
manufacturing Task lists (routings) in • Demonstrations and hands-on exercises
detail are conducted using an ERP 2005 (ECC
• Routing (task list) configuration 6.0) system.
• Usage of Production Resources and

PLM115 · Basic Data for Process Manufacturing

DURATION 4 days PRICE € 2360 STARTING DATES 30-mrt-09

TARGET GROUP GOALS • Material quantity calculation

• Project team members This course will prepare you to maintain • Manufacture of co-products
• Employees of specialist departments and use the basic data that is relevant to • Aspects of quality inspections
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED process manufacturing. • Recipe approval
• PLM100 Business Processes in Life-Cycle CONTENT • Important Customizing settings
Data Management • Material masters SOFTWARE
• SCM300 Production Overview • Classification system ERP ECC 5.0
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED • Batches
• SAPPLM Overview of the SAP PLM • Resources
solution • Capacities
• SAPSCM Overview of the SAP SCM • Production versions
solution • Master recipes

PLM120 · Document Management System

DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES 28-jan-09

TARGET GROUP GOALS • Original storage in the secure area

• Project manager Participants obtain knowledge of how to • CAD Integration
• Project team configure and use document • Distribution
• Persons responsible for documents management. • Relevant Customizing
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED CONTENT • Internet scenario
PLM100 (Life-Cycle Data Management) • Use of the document info record SOFTWARE
• Object links to other objects SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
• Use of originals

www.sap.nl/education 157
SAP ERP Product Development and Manufacturing
Life-Cycle Data Management
PLM130 · Classification
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES 4-feb-09
TARGET GROUP
Project team members and persons
responsible for the implementation and
maintenance of the classification system
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• PLM100 Business Processes in Life-Cycle
Data Management
• Basic knowledge of material master data
maintenance
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• SAPPLM Overview of the SAP PLM
solution
PLM145 · Variant Configuration
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
To set up,maintain, and process
configurable products and intended for
team members responsible for the project
and other employees
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• PLM130 (Classification)
• Knowledge of processes in sales &
distribution, planning, and production
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• PLM100 (Life-Cycle Data Management)
• SCM600 (Processes in Sales and
Distribution)
• SCM240 (Production Planning Part 1)
• SCM310 (Production Orders)
• SCM620 (Pricing in SD)
GOALS
• Modeling of a configurable product,
including maintenance of all associated
objects and master data
• Integration of variant configuration in
logistic chain processes
158
• SAPSCM Overview of the SAP SCM
solution
GOALS
This course will prepare you to configure,
maintain and use the system to classify
objects
CONTENT
• Characteristics maintenance
• Class maintenance
• Object classification
• Options for using the classification
system to find objects
CONTENT
• Classification system tools: Overview &
special features in variant configuration
• Material masters, bill of material, and
routings: Special features in variant
configuration
• Overview of the configuration profile
and scenarios
• Overview of types and use of
dependencies: Prerequisites; selection
conditions, (actions), procedures,
constraints
• Use of dependencies in bills of material
and routings
• Use of dependencies for the valuation
interface
• Overview of constraints
• Pricing and variant configuration
• Material variants (configured materials)
• Configurable materials in sales and
distribution
• Configurable materials in planning
• Class hierarchies and characteristic
inheritance
• Object dependencies in classification
• Customizing, including maintaining
class types and classifiable object types
• Applications of classification
SOFTWARE
ERP ECC 5.0
• Configurable materials in production
• Configurable materials in engineering
and order change management
• The stand-alone configurator “SCE” of
“IPC”
SOFTWARE
SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
NOTES
This is an advanced training course.
Participants are expected to have
experience of classification. They should
also possess a basic knowledge of material
master data, bills of material, and
routings. Furthermore, knowledge gained
from at least one overview training course
(see the recommended courses) is
required.
SAP ERP Product Development and Manufacturing
Life-Cycle Data Management
PLM146 · Variant Configuration Additional Scenarios
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
Project members and other employees
responsible for setting up, maintaining,
and processing configurable products.
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• PLM145 Variant Configuration 1:
Modeling and Integration
• Knowledge of processes in sales,
planning, and production
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
PLM100 Business Processes in Life-Cycle
Data Management
GOALS
• Configuration scenarios for modelling
configurable products.
PLM160 · Recipe Management
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• Project teams implementing Recipe
Management as part of their new
product development process.
• Consultants interested in
understanding how Recipe
Management can assist companies in
their product definition process.
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• Experience with PLM – LDM (Life-cycle
Data Management) functions
• Experience with EH&S Basic Data &
Tools
GOALS
This course will prepare you to:
• Perform new product development
processes using Recipe Management
tools
• Create and edit specifications, phrases
and recipes
• Additional functions of the
configuration profile, dependencies,
and other variant configuration tools.
CONTENT
• Control parameters in the
configuration profile in detail
• Additional information on constraints,
variant tables, variant functions, and
characteristic selection
• Configuration scenario:
Planned/production order without
BOM explosion
• Configuration scenarios:
Planned/production order with single-
level/multilevel BOM explosion
• Use versions and engineering change
management to manage recipes
CONTENT
• An overview of PLM and the role of
Recipe Management within the PLM
and NPDI solutions
• An overview of EHS basis data and tools
and its use with Recipe Management
• New product development using Recipe
Management
• Recipe creation and editing using basic
and advanced functions
• Management of recipes using versions
and ECM
• Nutritional Data and Diet Suitability
• Recipe Transformation from Product
Development to Production
• Preview of new Trial Management
functionality focusing onthe transition
from laboratory product development
to full factory production.
• Configuration scenarios: Sales order
(SET processing)
• Configuration scenarios with order
BOMs
• Result-oriented and knowledge-based
order BOMs
• Tips on system performance
SOFTWARE
ERP ECC 6.0
NOTES
This course directly follows PLM145
(Variant Configuration Part 1: Modelling
and Integration) and assumes that course
participants are familiar with the content
of this course.
SOFTWARE
• ERP ECC 5.0
• RECIPE 2.2
NOTES
Recipe Management is designed to assist
companies with the definition of products
during the development process. Recipe
Management results can be used
exclusively in the product development
process or can be transferred to
production as the source of PP Bills of
Material (BOMs) or PP-PI Master Recipes.
Recipe Management can be used in the
product definition process by discrete,
repetitive, and process manufacturers.
www.sap.nl/education 159
SAP ERP Product Development and Manufacturing
Life-Cycle Data Management

PLM170 · Integrated Product- and Process Engineering (iPPE) in PLM

DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP GOALS • iPPE- Integration in Change

• Engineers and Designer of variant rich
products
• Project team members, Key- User und
Project managers
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• Detailed Knowledge of Variant
Configuration
• Basic Knowledge Material BOM
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• PLM100 Life-Cycle Data Management
• PLM110
• PLM145
• All functions of IPPE within PLM
including Conversion, Integration and
Customizing
SOFTWARE
• ERP ECC 6.0
CONTENT
• iPPE within Product Development
• Company Scenarios with iPPE
(Comparison with Industry solutions)
• iPPE- Workbench
• Product Variant Structure (PVS)
• Structure- generic Nodes, Variants,
Ideas and additional Object types in iPPE
• iPPE- BOM- Converter
• iPPE- Customizing
Management, Project System and
cFolders
NOTES
• This training is aimed at advanced
learners. Participants need experience
and basic knowledge in data modeling
in the context of variant configuration
with focus on bill of materials. PLM170
teaches iPPE application only in the
standard PLM- or ERP environment. For
the industry focus area (e.g.
Automotive) please visit training
IUA250.

160
SAP ERP Sales & Services
Sales Order Management

SAP01 SCM605 ERP SCM650 ERP DERPSP ERP

SAP Overview Sales Cross Functional Delta in Sales Order
Customizing in SD Management

3 days 5 days 3 days 3 days

SAPSCM ERP SCM600 ERP SCM610 ERP

Overview of the SAP SCM Business Processes in Delivery Processes
Solution Sales Order Management

3 days 5 days 3 days

ERP040 ERP SCM615 ERP

Management Empowered Billing
by SAP ERP Logistics and
Operations

4 hours 2 days

SAP200 ERP SCM620 ERP

Order to Cash Pricing in SD

8 hours 3 days

TERP61 ERP SCM645 ERP

SAP ERP: Introduction into Credit & Receivables Risk
Processes in Sales Order Management
Management

6 hours 2 days

SCM670 SCM GTS100 ERP GTS200 ERP

Global Available-to- SAP Global Trade Services Configuration of SAP
Promise Overview Global Trade Services

3 days 3 days 3 days

CERTIFICATION Solution Academy basic training as Solution Consultant SCM – Order Fulfillment (former module SD) (for new consultants)
SAP125 > ERP001 > SAP200 > TSCM60 > SM001 > TSCM62 > C_TSCM62_05
ALTERNATIVE COURSES SAP125 > ERP001 > SAP200 > SCM600 > SCM605 > SCM610 > SCM615 > SCM620 > SCM650 > SM001 > C_TSCM62_05

Voor de meest actuele certificeringinformatie verwijzen wij u graag naar www.sap.com/services/education/certification

www.sap.nl/education 161
SAP ERP Sales & Services
Sales Order Management
SCM600 · Processes in Sales Order Management
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES 16-feb-09, 4-mei-09, 29-jun-09, 4-mei-09, 29-jun-09
TARGET GROUP
• Project managers
• Project team members
• People with organizational
responsibilities
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• Basic knowledge of Microsoft Windows
• Basic business knowledge of processing
in sales and distribution
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• SAPSCM (Overview of SAP SCM)
• SAP01 (SAP Overview)
GOALS
• In this course, participants learn about
the fundamental business processes in
sales and distribution
• Participants learn how to perform the
most important functions in the process
SCM605 · Sales
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES 23-feb-09, 11-mei-09
TARGET GROUP
• Project team members
• People with organizational
responsibilities
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
SCM600 (Processes in Sales and
Distribution)
GOALS
In this course, participants become
familiar with the functions and
162
chain, from “presales to customer
payment”, in the SAP system.
• The areas of materials management,
manufacturing (for example, assembly
orders), and financial accounting are
also touched on.
CONTENT
• Organizational structures in sales and
distribution
• Working with customer master data and
material master data in sales
• Overview of the process chain for sales
order processing
• Presales activities, order processing,
procurement, delivery, billing, payment
• Introduction to pricing in sales and
distribution
• Introduction to the availability check
Customizing settings in sales
CONTENT
• Organizational units in Sales
• Creating and processing sales orders
• Sales document types
• Item categories
• Schedule line categories
• Partner determination
• Contracts and scheduling agreements
• Special business transactions
• Sales and distribution processing with
make-to-order production
• Credit memo processing and returns
processing
• Introduction to sales and distribution
reporting
• Outlook on system installation tools
SOFTWARE
SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
NOTES
The course SCM600 (Processes in Sales
and Distribution) covers the functions in
sales and distribution processing in SAP
ERP. It does not examine company-
specific requirements in Customizing.
• Incompletion logs
• Material determination, material
listing/exclusion, product selection
• Free goods
SOFTWARE
SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
NOTES
It is not advisable to attend this course
unless you have fulfilled the course
prerequisites.
SAP ERP Sales & Services
Sales Order Management
SCM615 · Billing
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES 12-mrt-09, 25-mei-09
TARGET GROUP
• Project team members
• People with organizational
responsibilities
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
SCM600 (Processes in Sales and
Distribution)
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
SCM605 (Sales)
GOALS
• In this course, participants become
familiar with the functions and
Customizing settings for billing.
• They also learn about the interface
points between billing in sales and
distribution and billing in financial
accounting.
SCM620 · Pricing in Sales Order Management
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES 16-mrt-09, 27-mei-09
TARGET GROUP
• Project team members
• People with organizational
responsibilities
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
SCM600 (Processes in Sales and
Distribution)
GOALS
In this course, participants become
familiar with the functions and
Customizing settings for pricing in SD
CONTENT
• Forms of billing
• Invoices based on deliveries and services
• Credit and debit memos
• Methods for creating billing documents
• Explicit billing
• Collective processing of billing
documents
• Billing to specific deadlines
• Settlement forms
• Separate invoices for each delivery
• Collective invoices
• Invoice splits
• Methods for creating billing documents
• Invoice lists
• Billing plans and down payments
• Revenue account determination
CONTENT
• Defining and maintaining prices,
surcharges, and discounts
• Creating condition tables, access
sequences, and condition types
• Using prices and other conditions in
sales documents
• Promotions and sales deals
• Rebate processing
SOFTWARE
SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
• Business area account assignment
• Special features of the SD/FI interface
SOFTWARE
SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
NOTES
It is not advisable to attend this course
unless you have fulfilled the course
prerequisites. The process chain in the
course SCM615 (Billing) is dealt with in
more detail from an accounts perspective
in course AC200 (Financial Accounting
Customizing I: General Ledger, Accounts
Payable, Accounts Receivable). Cost-
related billing and internal allocation are
not covered in this course.
NOTES
It is not advisable to attend this course
unless you have fulfilled the course
prerequisites. Sales price determination
through preliminary costing as part of
make-to-order production is dealt with in
course AC515 (Cost Object Controlling
for Sales Orders).
www.sap.nl/education 163
SAP ERP Sales & Services
Sales Order Management
SCM645 · Credit & Receivables Risk Management
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• Project team members
• Organizers
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SCM600 Processes in Sales and
Distribution or LO150 Processes in Sales
and Distribution
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
This course will prepare you to explain
the functions of credit and receivables risk
management and identify the associated
Customizing settings.
SCM650 · Cross Functional Customizing in Sales
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES 18-mrt-09
TARGET GROUP
Project team members predominantly
responsible for SD Customizing
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SCM600 (Processes in Sales and
Distribution)
• At least one of the following detailed
courses:
- SCM605 (Sales)
- SCM610 (Delivery Processes)
- SCM615(Billing)
GOALS
• Participants become familiar with the
164
CONTENT
• Credit master data
• Credit control area as organizational
unit
• Automatic credit limit check
• Specific functions in credit
management
- Office communication
- Processing blocked documents
- Monitoring functions
• Updating open sales values
• Risk management components
• Integrating receivables risk
management with credit management
• Payment card processing
functions and Customizing settings for
cross-component SD functions such as
output and text control
• They also learn about more complex
Customizing settings for Sales and
Distribution
CONTENT
• Copying control
• Output determination
• Text control
• Overview of configuring printed
documents in SD
• Introduction to basic system
SOFTWARE
• R/3 4.70 EXT.SET 1.10
NOTES
Training course SCM645 deals with the
mapping and realization of functionality
for credit and risk management in the
SAP ERP Central Component. The
mapping of this functionality in the add-
on application SAP Credit Management,
which is part of SAP Financial Supply
Chain Management (FSCM), is not
covered by this training course (for this,
see training course FSC020).
enhancements (user exits)
• Introduction to personalization (e.g.
transaction variants)
SOFTWARE
SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
NOTES
It is not advisable to attend this course
unless you have fulfilled the course
prerequisites. SCM650 (Cross-Functional
Customizing in SD) is aimed at project
team members involved with complex
and detailed Customizing functions for
Sales and Distribution.
SAP ERP Sales & Services
Sales Order Management
SCM670 · Global Availability Check
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES 6-apr-09
TARGET GROUP
This course is intended for project team
members who are responsible for
implementing the availability check as
part of sales and distribution.
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
SCM600 (Processes in Sales and
Distribution)
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• SCM605 (Sales)
• SCM200 (Overview of SC Planning)
• SCM210 (Core Interface APO)
GOALS
Course participants are given detailed
information about the functions of the
Global Available-to-Promise in the SAP
DERPSP · Delta in Sales Order Management
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• Project managers
• Project team
• Key users
• SAP consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
Fundamental knowledge of the Sales
Processes functionality in earlier versions
of SAP ERP Central Component and SAP
R/3
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• SAP01 (SAP Overview)
• SCM605 (Sales)
• SCM615 (Billing)
• SCM620 (Pricing in Sales and
Distribution)
SCM solution from the viewpoint of sales
and distribution.
CONTENT
• Create a sales order in the SAP ERP
Central Component with availability
check in SAP SCM (APO)
• Principles of transport and delivery
scheduling in SAP SCM (APO)
• Represent and configure basic methods
in SAP SCM (APO):
- Product availability check
- Check for product allocation
- Check for planned independent
requirements (preplanning)
• Represent and configure enhanced
methods in SAP SCM (APO):
GOALS
This course will give you an overview of
the functions in SAP ERP Central
Component 5.0 that have been added or
enhanced in the Sales Processes
environment since SAP R/3 3.1.
CONTENT
Functional enhancements in the
following areas of sales:
• Basicfunctions
• Sales
• Price determination
• Billing
• Foreign trade (overview only)
SOFTWARE
SAP ERP Central Component 5.0
- combine basic methods
- Rule-based availability check (product,
location and production process model
substitutions)
• Principles of production as part of the
availability check in SAP APO:
- Capable-To-Promise
- MultilevelATPCheck
• Simulation functions in SAP SCM
(APO)
• Backorder processing in SAP SCM
(APO)
SOFTWARE
• SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
• SAP SCM 5.0
NOTES
Note that the course DERPSP is offered
only on a customer-specific basis (for
further details, see the Delta Initiatives
section elsewhere in this curriculum).
The content of the course DERPSP is
based on the new functions contained in
the releases SAP R/3 4.0, 4.5, and 4.6. In
terms of the content of this course, there
are no relevant differences in Sales
Processes between SAP R/3 4.6 and SAP R/3
Enterprise or between SAP R/3 Enterprise
and SAP ERP Central Component 5.0.
This should be taken into account when
putting together your own catalog of
courses.
www.sap.nl/education 165
SAP ERP Sales and Services
Aftermarket Sales and Services

SAP01 SAPPLM ERP PLM305 ERP

SAP Overview SAP PLM Solution Structuring and Managing
Overview Technical Objects

3 days 2 days 3 days

PLM301 ERP PLM310 ERP

Business Processes in Preventive Maintenance
Customer Service and Service

5 days 3 days

ERP001 ERP ERP040 ERP PLM335 ERP

Management Empowered Management Empowered Service Processing
by SAP ERP by SAP ERP Logistics and
Operations

4 hours 4 hours 5 days

PLM301 · Business Processes in Customer Service

DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES 23-feb-09

TARGET GROUP • Support decision makers responsible for - Repair order processing and returns
• Project managers implementing the system delivery, repair processing, delivery, and
• Project team • Identify the different analysis options billing
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED None that are available • Service contracts
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED CONTENT - Content and structure of service
• SAP01 (SAP Overview) or • Overview of Customer Service contracts
• SAPPLM (SAP PLM Solution Overview) • Technical objects - Service processing with contract
GOALS - Material serial numbers and equipment • Planned customer service
• Gain an overview of Customer Service - Functional locations, bills of material - Task lists, maintenance plans, and
• Become familiar with the most and warranties scheduling
important business processes in • Help desk processing • Reports
Customer Service, including practical - Creating, processing, and completing - Service history and information system
exercises service notifications SOFTWARE

• Explain integration with other SAP • Planning of technician resources SAP ERP Central Component 5.0
components - Creating, processing, completing, and
billing for service orders
• Processing returns and repairs

PLM335 · Service Processing

DURATION 4 days PRICE € 2360 STARTING DATES 23-mrt-09

TARGET GROUP CONTENT - Materials planning

Project team • Organizational elements and master
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED data
PLM301 (Customer Service) • Help desk processing
GOALS - Processing of service notifications
• This course will prepare you to explain - Configuration of notification types
the functions of service processing in - Solution database
detail • Planning of technician resources
• It will also enable you to configure - Processing of service orders
service notifications, service orders, and - Configuring order types
customer repair orders - Scheduling and capacity planning
- External Services
- Printing and communication
- Completion confirmation
- Resource-related billing (DPP-profile)
- Completion
• Processing returns and repairs
- Repairs process
- Customizing settings
• Creation of quotations
• Service-assembly processing
SOFTWARE
SAP ERP Central Component 6.0

166
SAP ERP Sales & Services
Global Trade Management – Foreign Trade Management
SAP01
SAP Overview
3 days
SAPSCM ERP SCM601
Overview of the SAP SCM Processes in Logistics
Solution Execution
3 days
ERP040 ERP
Management Empowered
by SAP ERP Logistics and
Operations
4 hours
GTS100 · SAP Global Trade Services Overview
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
Project team members, consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
Basic knowledge of sales order processing
and external procurement in SAP systems
GOALS
• Understand the benefit and structure of
SAP Global Trade Services
• Explain the range of functions in SAP
Compliance Mngmt, SAP Customs
Mngmt, and SAP Risk Mngmt
• Use the functions in SAP Compliance
Mngmt, SAP Customs Mngmt, and SAP
Risk Mngmt for import and export
processes
CONTENT
• Introduction to the legal background of
GTS200 · Configuration of SAP Global Trade Services
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• Members of the project team
• Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• GTS100 (SAP Global Trade Services
Overview) or comparable knowledge
• Basic knowledge of sales order
processing and external procurement in
SAP R/3 or SAP ECC
• Basic knowledge of foreign trade law
and customs law
GOALS
• Setting up the communication between
SAP ECC and SAP GTS
SCM611 ERP
Transportation
3 days
ERP SCM640 ERP
Foreign Trade
3 days 3 days
GTS100 ERP
SAP Global Trade Services
Overview
3 days
functions in SAP Global Trade Services
• Overview of technical basics
• Structural basics (organizational units,
master data, control parameters)
• Classification (comparison of the
structures used for nomenclature of
goods, use in the processes)
• Import processes (import control,
customs procedures, customs value
calculation, communication with
authorities)
• Export processes (export control
including sanctioned party list
screening, customs procedures,
communication with authorities)
• Transit procedure for imports and
exports (including communication with
• Configuring selected services of SAP
Compliance Mngmt, SAP Customs
Mngmt and SAP Risk Mngmt
CONTENT
• Connecting SAP ECC to SAP GTS
• Basic mapping settings
• Definition and use of legal regulations
in SAP GTS
• Configuration of the “Legal Control”
service in SAP Compliance Mngmt
based on the EC “dual-use regulation”
and the German Foreign Trade and
Payments Act
• Configuration of the “Customs Proces-
SCM612 SCM
Transportation Planning
and Vehicle Scheduling
3 days
GTS200 ERP
Configuration of SAP
Global Trade Services
3 days
authorities, particularly participation in
NCTS)
• Preference determination and managing
vendor declarations
• Letter of credit processing for import
and export
SOFTWARE
• SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
• SAP Global Trade Services 7.0
NOTES
This course is aimed at participants with
no previous knowledge who are interested
in gaining an overview of SAP Global
Trade Services. SAP Global Trade Services
is not part of the SAP ERP solution.
However, it is closely linked to SAP ERP
Sales and Service in terms of content.
sing” service in SAP Customs Mngmt
based on EC customs law and the
process instructions for ATLAS Import
• Configuration of the “Preference
Processing” service in SAP Risk Mngmt
based on the preference agreements in
the EEA
SOFTWARE SAP ECC 6.0, SAP GTS 7.0
NOTES
The course material is in English. Good
application knowledge of SAP GTS is
required.
www.sap.nl/education 167
SAP ERP Corporate Services
Real Estate Management

SAPFIN ERP AC010 ERP RE010 ERP

SAP ERP Financials Business Processes in Business Processes in
Financial Accounting Real Estate Management

3 days
2 days 5 days

SAP01 AC200 ERP

SAP Overview Financial Accounting
Customizing I

3 days 5 days

ERP001 ERP AC201 ERP RE200 ERP

Management Empowered Payment & Dunning Flexible Real Estate
by SAP ERP Program, Correspondence, Management
Interest Calculation

4 hours 2 days 5 days

TERP21 ERP AC040 ERP

SAP ERP: Introduction into Business Processes in
Processes in Financial Management Accounting
Accounting

6 hours 5 days

RE010 · Business Processes in Real Estate Management

DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES 4-mrt-09

TARGET GROUP overview of all SAP solutions involved in • Move Management

• Corporate Real Estate Managers mapping the real estate processes, and • Facility Management
• Facility Managers learn to use basic real estate relevant SOFTWARE

• Project team members from both transactions. • SAP ERP Central Component 6.0: RE-
business and IT side CONTENT FX, FI-GL, FI-AP, FI-AR, FI-AA, PM, PS,
• Consultants • Project Management DMS
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED - Acquisition NOTES

• ERP001, ERP020 - Disposal • This is an overview course that serves as

PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED • Portfolio Management an introduction to real estate processes
• AC010 (Financial Accounting and • Lease Administration within SAP as well as SAP Real Estate
Reporting) - Financial Integration Management. We recommend RE200
GOALS • Document Management / Graphical after having attended RE010 for
• The participants become familiar with Integration configuration training.
real estate processes in SAP, receive an • Space Management

168
SAP ERP Corporate Services
Real Estate Management
RE200 · Flexible Real Estate Management
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES 9-mrt-09
TARGET GROUP
• Project team members
• Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• AC010 (Financial Accounting and
Reporting)
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• AC040 (Cost Management and
Controlling)
• AC200 (Financial Accounting:
Customizing I: GL & Accounts Payable
& Receivables)
• AC201 (Payment and Dunning Program,
Correspondence, Interest Calculation)
• RE010 (Business Processes in SAP ERP
Real Estate Management...)
• CR590 (BDT – Business Data Toolset)
GOALS
• The participants learn detailed
configuration setttings for selected
processes within SAP Real Estate
Management (Flexible Real Estate), and
become familiar with best practices on
how to use RE-FX for their business
needs.
CONTENT
• Real estate master data (architecture
and usage), Business partner master
data
• Contract management (Real Estate
Search, Real Estate Contract,
Conditions, condition purpose,
calculation methods)
• Real Estate Financials (Account
determination, flow types, invoice
creation, Option rate determination,
Correction items, Input tax
distribution)
• Adjusting conditions (Free and Index-
based condition adjustment, Sales-based
rent settlement, other & country-
specific condition adjustment methods)
• Complex service charge settlement
methods
• Corporate use scenarios (Occupancy
Planning, Reservation, Move
Management, Internal CO billing, FASB
13 support)
• Reporting (Business Intelligence
integration)
• Integration (CO integration, Enterprise
Asset Management integration, Project
system integration, PS-CD (FI-CA)
integration, Funds management
integration)
• Tools (correspondence, BDT, data
transfer, BAdI, BAPI and ESA Services
usage, Migration programs for former
product version, Workflow integration,
Microsoft Outlook integration,
document management)
• Country specifics (further localization
features (AT, CH, IT, JP, IN),
Withholding tax, contained in
appendix, but not required course
content. Instructor Guide will indicate
which slides and appendices to use for
which content.
SOFTWARE
• SAP ERP Central Component
NOTES
• If you intend to use FI-AA, EC-PCA, PM,
PS, or other functionality, we
recommend that you also attend the
training courses for these components.
www.sap.nl/education 169
SAP ERP Corporate Services
Project Portfolio Management

SAP01 SAPPLM ERP PLM510 ERP PLM220 ERP

SAP Overview SAP PLM Solution cProjects Project Management
Overview Logistics

3 days 2 days 2 days 5 days

PLM200 ERP PLM512 ERP PLM230 ERP

Business Processes in cFolders Project Management
Project Management Accounting

3 days 2 days 5 days

PLM210 ERP
Project Management
Structures

2 days

ERP001 ERP ERP040 ERP PLM200 of PLM240 ERP

Management Empowered Management Empowered PLM210 of Project Management –
by SAP ERP by SAP ERP Logistics and PLM220 of Reporting
Operations PLM230 of
PLM235
4 hours 4 hours 3 days

TERP71 ERP PLM550 ERP PLM280 ERP

SAP ERP: Introduction into SAP xRPM Resource Related Billing
Processes in Program and (Resource Portfolio
Project Management Management)
1 hour
4 hours 4 days

DERPPS ERP PLM281 ERP

Delta SAP R/3 Enterprise HR Workforce Planning
in PS Integration

20 hours 1 hour

CERTIFICATION Solution Academy basic training as Solution Consultant PLM – Project Management (former module PS) (for new consultants)
PLM200 > PLM210 > PLM220 > PLM230 > C_TPLM22_60
Voor de meest actuele certificeringinformatie verwijzen wij u graag naar www.sap.com/services/education/certification

DERPPS · Delta SAP R/3 Enterprise in PS

DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP Project Management for SAP R/3 from Management, Interest Calculation, Cost
Project Leaders, Project Team, Key Users release 3.1 to R/3 Enterprise. Forecast, Results Analysis, Incoming
and SAP Consultants • Basic Data: Project Builder, Mass Orders, Settlement, Schedule Manager
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED Change, Project Planning Board, • Reporting: Structure Information
Extensive knowledge of functions and Simulation System, ABAP List Viewer, Progress
options for setting up the system in R/3 PS • Scheduling Analysis, Summarization
prior to release 4.0 • Resource Management: Project Team, • Progress Tracking
GOALS Work Center; CATS • ProMan
To understand the new functions and • Materials: BOM-PS Interface, Valuated • Cost integration of claims
interfaces in Project Management since Project Stock, Requirements Grouping, • Open PS Enhancements
SAP R/3 Release 3.1 Delivery from Project • OCI Catalog interface
CONTENT • Controlling: Cost Planning, Easy Cost SOFTWARE R/3 4.7

DERPPS provides information on new Planning, Invoicing Plans, Dynamic Line

functionality and enhancements in Item Processor, Sales Pricing, Cash

170
SAP ERP Corporate Services
Project Portfolio Management

PLM210 · Project Management: Structures

DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES 9-mrt-09, 25-mei-09

TARGET GROUP GOALS • Milestones

• Project manager
• Project team
• Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• PLM200 (Project Management)
• Basic knowledge of business processes in
the area of project management
• The course demonstrates various ways • Standard structures
of creating and maintaining different • Simulations and project versions
structures in the SAP project system. • Project Builder & Project Planning
• It enables participants to make the Board
necessary Customizing settings. • Mass changes, substitution, and
CONTENT validation
• Work Breakdown Structure (WBS) SOFTWARE

• Activities and networks SAP ERP Central Component 6.0

PLM220 · Program and Project Management Logistics

DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES 16-mrt-09

TARGET GROUP system. • Delivery from projects

• Project manager CONTENT • ProMan
• Project team • Scheduling with network and Work • Progress Tracking
• Consultants Breakdown Structure (WBS) SOFTWARE

PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• PLM210 (Project Management –
Structures)
• Basic business knowledge of logistics
GOALS
• This course demonstrates how project
logistics can be planned and controlled
using the SAP project system.
• Participants learn the necessary
Customizing settings in the SAP project
• Capacity planning and workforce
planning of personnel
• Confirmation of activities
• Cross-Application Time Sheet (CATS):
• Workflows in the project
• External activities, services
• Material procurement (purchasing and
production)
• Preliminary requirements
• Demand aggregation
SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
NOTES
Some of the processes from course
PLM200 (Project Management) are
repeated in course PLM220 (Project
Management – Logistics) and expanded
upon in greater detail.

PLM230 · Project Management – Network Controlled and Customer-Driven Project Accounting

DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES 23-mrt-09

TARGET GROUP networks are planned, controlled, and • Commitment management

• Project manager
• Project team
• Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• PLM210 (Project Management –
Structures) and detailed knowledge of
SAP Project System
• Basic business knowledge of financial
accounting and logistics
realized from a controlling perspective.
• They also learn budgeting and
integration with sales & distribution. A
costing and customer project serves as
an example.
CONTENT
• Cost planning, structure planning,
detailed planning, easy cost planning,
network calculation
• Project stock (valuated/unvaluated)
• Actual costs – confirmation, CATS,
purchasing, execution services
• Actual revenues – resource-based
billing, milestone billing
• Period end closing – overhead rates,
interest determination, overhead rates,
accounting
SOFTWARE

PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
AC040 (Cost and Revenue Controlling)
GOALS
• Participants gain knowledge about how
work breakdown structures and
• Revenue planning – structure planning, SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
billing plan, integration with sales and
distribution
• Budgeting – cost projects, investment
projects, availability controls

www.sap.nl/education 171
SAP ERP Corporate Services
Project Portfolio Management
PLM280 · Resource Related Billing
DURATION 1 hour PRICE € 150 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• Consultants
• Project team members
• Super users
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• SAP01 SAP Overview
• Basic SAP knowledge
• Basic Project Systems’ knowledge
• Basic Sales & Distribution knowledge
GOALS
• This course will prepare you to:
• Understand the Resource Related
PLM281 · HR Workforce Planning Integration
DURATION 1 hour PRICE € 150 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
Consultants, Project team members and
Super users
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• SAP01 SAP Overview
• Basic SAP knowledge
• Basic Project Systems’ knowledge
• Basic Human Resources’ knowledge
GOALS
To understand the data and process
required for linking employee human
PLM510 · cProjects
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES 23-mrt-09
TARGET GROUP
Project managers, Project team and
Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
Basic knowledge of the processes in
project management
GOALS
At the conclusion of this course, you will
172
Billing process and requirements for
Project Systems.
CONTENT
• Creating a sales order and linking it to a
project
• Adding the DIP Profile to the Sales
Order
• Displaying a Dynamic Item Processor
(DIP) Profile
• Confirming cost-related activities
(work, materials) for a project
• Executing Resource Related Billing
resource records to projects within Project
Systems, performing skills matching and
workforce planning
CONTENT
• Creating a human resource (HR)
master record
• Creating a new qualifications group and
accompanying qualifications
• Creating a requirements profile
• Creating a work center
• Attaching an employee master record to
be able to use cProjects and make the
most important settings in Customizing
CONTENT
• Master data • Time scheduling
• Resource planning and resource staffing
• Cost Planning • Documents
• Authorizations • Execution
• Status management, notification,
(RRB)
• Creating a billing request
• Running the Invoicing program to
generate the customer’s invoice and
posting actual revenue to the project
• Identifying the effects of RRB
SOFTWARE R/3 4.7
a work center
• Creating a network and attaching the
requirements profile
• Creating a workforce planning profile
• Performing skills matching; and
assigning selected employees to the
project
• Perform workforce planning
SOFTWARE R/3 4.7
approval • Reports • Project versions
• Management of multiple projects
• Integration • Object links, document
management, cFolders, xPRM
SOFTWARE
• SAP ERP Central Component
• cProject Suite 4.0
SAP ERP Corporate Services
Project Portfolio Management
PLM512 · cFolders
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES 25-mrt-09
TARGET GROUP
Project managers and team members,
Consultants and SAP Implementation
team
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
Basic knowledge of document
management
PLM550 · xRPM (Resource Portfolio Management)
DURATION 4 days PRICE € 2360 STARTING DATES 20-apr-09
TARGET AUDIENCE
• SAP xRPM Projekt Manager and Project
Team Members
• SAP xRPM Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• Knowledge of processes in portfolio,
project and resource management
• Understanding of SAP technology and
software architecture
• Customizing experience in at least one
of the following components: ALE, HR,
FI/CO, PS, cProjects
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• Understand functions, processes and
GOALS SOFTWARE
Participants obtain an overview of the • SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
functions in the SAP cFolders scenarios. • cProject Suite 4.0
CONTENT
• Structured objects
• Authorizations
• Data sheets • Services
• Back-end integration
integration scenarios of SAP xApp • Field configurations
Resource and Portfolio Management • Strategic Financial and Resource
(xRPM) Planning
• Create Portfolios, Portfolio hierarchies • Questionnaires and Scoring Models
and Portfolio Items in SAP Enterprise • Portfolio Reviews and Analysis
Portal and carry out the necessary • Integration with Project Management-
customizing settings in the xRPM core and HCM-,FI/CO-systems
• Define and use Questionnaires and • User Management and Authorization
Scoring Models • Overview cProjects 4.0
• Set up Strategic Financial and Resource SOFTWARE
Demand Planning in xRPM • XRPM 4.0 ECC 6.0
• Create and Edit projects in cProjects 4.0 NOTES
CONTENT • Detail settings of cProjects 4.0 are not
• Definition of Portfolios and covered in this training, but will be
Portfolio Items teached in PLM510.
www.sap.nl/education 173
SAP ERP Corporate Services
Travel Management

SAPFIN ERP AC010 ERP AC270 ERP

SAP ERP Financials Business Processes in Travel Management Travel
Financial Accounting Planning and Travel
Expenses

2 days 5 days 5 days

SAP01
SAP Overview

3 days

SAPHR ERP HR050 ERP

SAP ERP Human Capital Business Processes in
Management Overview Human Capital
Management

2 days 5 days

AC270 · Travel Management: Expenses

DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP CONTENT - Entering travel expenses offline

• Project team members
• Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
AC010 (Financial Accounting and
Reporting)
GOALS
• Use the Travel Planning component in
the SAP system for travel requests,
availability checks, and bookings
• Use Customizing to set up company-
specific travel policies
• Use travel expenses functions in the SAP
system for entering, settling, posting,
and paying expenses and make
Customizing settings for legal and
company-specific requirements
• Travel Planning:
- Travel Planning as part of an integrated
travel management process
- Availability checks in real time for
flights, hotels, rental cars, and the
German rail company Deutsche Bahn
- Company travel policies (preferred
vendors, company-specific prices,
priority levels, and so on)
- Managing travelers’ personal
preferences
- Company-specific dialog control for
planning trips
• Travel Expenses:
- Concepts in the travel expense
functionality
- Entering trip data and approving trips
(including credit card clearing)
- Settlement, posting, and
reimbursement of travel expenses
- Dialog control in accordance with
company-specific requirements
- Settlement in accordance with
- company-specific, industry-specific, and
country-specific regulations
- Interface configuration
- Reports
- Introduction to HCM master data
SOFTWARE
SAP ERP Central Component 5.0
NOTES
The content of this course is appropriate
for participants on the following SAP
software releases: R/3 4.6, R/3 Enterprise
ext. 1.10/ 2.00.

174
SAP ERP Corporate Services
Environment, Health & Safety

Voor cursusdata en meer informatie verwijzen wij u naar

TechniDATA AG
Phone +49 (61 05) 2 82-0
E-mail EHS-Training@technidata.de
web www.technidata.com

www.sap.nl/education 175
SAP ERP Corporate Services
Quality Management

SAP01 SAPPLM ERP

SAP Overview SAP PLM Solution
Overview

3 days 2 days

PLM400 ERP PLM412 ERP PLM415 ERP

Business Processes in Quality Planning / Quality Management
Quality Management Inspections in Logistics

5 days 5 days 3 days

ERP001 ERP ERP040 ERP PLM420 ERP

Management Empowered Management Empowered Quality Management
by SAP ERP by SAP ERP Logistics and in Discrete Manufacturing
Operations

4 hours 4 hours 2 days

PLM421 ERP
Quality Management
in the Process Industry

3 days

CERTIFICATION Solution Academy basic training as Solution Consultant PLM – Quality Management (former module QM)

PLM400 > PLM412 > PLM415 > PLM420 > C_TPLM40_05

Voor de meest actuele certificeringinformatie verwijzen wij u graag naar www.sap.com/services/education/certification

PLM400 · Business Processes in Quality Management

DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP important aspects of integration with - Audit Management

• Project manager and project team other SAP applications. • Potential for introducing Quality
members CONTENT Management in companies
• Persons responsible for quality • Integration of Quality Management in SOFTWARE
management tasks the supply chain – process-related SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED None overview NOTES
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED - QM in procurement and sales This training course is an essential
SAP01 (SAP Overview) - QM in production prerequisite for the following detailed
GOALS • Insight into QM functions: training courses in the area of Quality
• This training course provides an - Qualityplan Management. Customers with R/3
overview of the uses of Quality - Qualitycheck Releases 4.6C and Enterprise 4.7 can
Management. It introduces the basic - Quality certificate participate in Quality Management
business processes involved in Quality - Quality notification courses below releases SAP ERP 2004 and
Management, as well as how these are - Quality control SAP ERP 2005 without problem.
mapped in the SAP system. - Test equipment management
• Furthermore, it demonstrates the most - Stabilitystudy

176
SAP ERP Corporate Services
Quality Management
PLM412 · Quality Planning / Inspections
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• Project team members, persons from
the user department
• Persons responsible for quality
management tasks
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
PLM400 (Quality Management)
GOALS
• Participants learn how to process QM-
specific basic data as well as inspection
planning details. They also learn how
basic data is used in different plans and
see how this data influences the
generated inspection lots. The general
inspection process is modeled using
various examples.
• In addition, the training course
demonstrates the possible uses of
quality notifications and explains the
different evaluation and reporting
options in Quality Management.
PLM420 · QM in Discrete Manufacturing
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• Project leaders and project team
members
• People responsible for quality
management during production
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
PLM405 Quality Inspections or LO705
Qualitätsprüfungen
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
SCM310 Production Orders (SFC) or
SCM200 Advanced Planning Overview
(SAP APO) and SCM300 Supply Chain
Manufacturing Overview
GOALS
This course will prepare you to:
• Explain quality assurance in production
• Link inspection operations to work
scheduling
• Inspect with inspection points
• Create partial lots.
CONTENT
• Managing QM-specific basic data
- Sampling procedures, dynamic
modification rules, master inspection
characteristics, inspection methods,
catalogs, coding
• Inspection planning
- Material specification, inspection plans,
engineering workbench, engineering
change management
• Quality inspection process
- Inspection lot processing, notification
processing, defects recording, results
recording, usage decision
• Quality notification and SAP Business
Workflow
• Evaluation methods in QM
- Reports and analyses based on
inspection lots, inspection results, and
notifications
• Outline the methods of statistical
process control (SPC) and the functions
in test equipment management
CONTENT
• Integration of QM in production
processes
• Inspection-point processing with
reference to time or quantity
• Use of SPC methods
• Inspection processing for production
versions and external processing
• Partial-lot processing and inspecting
goods receipts from production
• Test equipment management and
integration in SAP PLM Asset Lifecycle
Management (Plant Maintenance)
SOFTWARE
R/3 4.70
SOFTWARE
SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
NOTES
This training course concentrates
fundamentally on the inspection lot
processing procedures within Quality
Management. Advantages and special
features of the integration with the supply
chain form part of the subsequent
training courses. This training course
replaces course PLM405 (Quality
Inspections) and PLM410 (Quality
Notifications). Customers with R/3
Releases 4.6C and Enterprise 4.7 can
participate in Quality Management
courses below releases SAP ERP 2004 and
SAP ERP 2005 without problem.
NOTES
• This course is intended for employees in
companies, which use the SAP solutions
for discrete or repetitive manufacturing
(SAP SCM Discrete Manufacturing).
• The examples in the courses are based
on master recipes and process orders.
• Course PLM421 (QM in the Process
Industry) or LO721 (QM in the Process
Industry) is offered for users who work
with the SAP solution for the process
industry (SAP SCM Process
Manufacturing).
• The PLM420 (QM in Discrete
Manufacturing) replaces the former
LO720 (QM in Discrete and Repetitive
Manufacturing)
www.sap.nl/education 177
SAP ERP Corporate Services
Quality Management
PLM415 · QM in Procurement
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• Project manager and project team
members
• Persons responsible for procurement
tasks in Quality Management
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
PLM412 Quality Planning and Inspection
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
SCM500 Business Processes in
Procurement
GOALS
• Participants learn about the integration
of Quality Management with Materials
Management.
• In particular, they learn which of the
QM functions in the procurement
process are also linked to the sales
processes.
PLM421 · QM in the Process Industry
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• Project team members
• Employees responsible for quality
management in process manufacturing
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
PLM405 Quality Inspections or LO705
Qualitätsprüfungen
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
SCM340 Process Manufacturing or LO060
Process Manufacturing
GOALS
This course will prepare you to:
• Use SAP PLM Quality Management in
the process industry
• Identify important functions from
related applications
178
CONTENT
Inventory management with QM,
inspection stock, and inspection lot
• Goods receipt and goods issue
inspection
• Inspections of goods movements
• Control of the procurement process
- Vendor release, model processing
- Model processing
- Vendor’s QM system
• Procurement documents and
certificates on the Internet
• Planning and creating quality
certificates for outbound deliveries
SOFTWARE
ERP ECC 6.0
CONTENT
• Basics of the classification system in
connection with QM
• Basics of batch management in
connection with QM
• Sample management
• Integration of QM in the production
process
- Master recipe and QM
- Process order and QM
- PI sheet and QM
• Basics of certificate processing
• Batch monitoring using recurring
inspections
• QM-specific requirements in the process
industry:
- Digital signature
- Electronic batch log
SOFTWARE
R/3 4.70
NOTES
• This training course replaces course
PLM415 (QM in Procurement) and
PLM425 (QM in Sales and Distribution /
Quality Certificates). Contents from
these courses have been incorporated
into the new training course PLM415
(Quality Management in Logistics).
Specific subjects about QM processes in
procurement and sales & distribution,
as well as about processing certificates,
are offered using RCTs. The current
offer is available on the Internet at
www.sap.de/rct
• Customers with R/3 Releases 4.6C and
Enterprise 4.7 can participate in Quality
Management courses below releases SAP
ERP 2004 and SAP ERP 2005 without
problem.
NOTES
• This training course is intended for
employees in companies, which use the
SAP solutions for the process industry
(SAP SCM Process Manufacturing).
• The examples in the course are based on
master recipes and process orders.
• Course PLM420 (QM in Discrete
Manufacturing) or LO720 (QM in
Discrete and Repetitive Manufacturing)
is offered for users who work with the
SAP solution for discrete or repetitive
manufacturing (SAP SCM Discrete
Manufacturing).
• Certificate processing (for example,
planning, management) is covered in
detail in course PLM425 (QM in Sales
and Distribution / Quality Certificates)
or LO725 (QM in Sales and Distribution
/ Quality Certificates).
SAP Supply Chain Management
Manufacturing – Production Planning and Detailed Scheduling

SCM212 Core interface &

Master Data and Supply
Chain Modeling
(SCM210 and
SCM 215)
5 days

SAP01 SAP220 ERP SCM210 SCM SCM250 SCM

SAP Overview Plan to Inventory APO Core Interface Production Planning and
Detailed Scheduling
(APO PP / DS)

3 days 8 hours 2 days 5 days

SAPSCM ERP SCM200 SCM SCM215 SCM

Overview of the SAP SCM Business Processes APO Master Data and
Solution in Planning Supply Chain Modeling
(SAP SCM (APO))

3 days 2 days 3 days

SCM220 SCM SCM230 SCM SCM612 SCM

Demand Planning Supply Network Planning Transportation Planning
(SNP) and Vehicle Scheduling

3 days 5 days 3 days

SCM222 SCM SCM225 SCM SCM670 SCM

Zie voor meer SCM planning cursussen
Demand Planning with Bills Advanced Demand Global Available-to-
SAP ERP vanaf pagina 145 of Material Planning Promise

2 hours 2 days 3 days

ADM355 NW ADM555 NW SCM235 SCM

SAP APO System liveCache Administration Planning with Capable-to-
Administration Match (CTM)

2 days 2 days 4 days

CERTIFICATION Solution Academy basic training Consultant Profile SAP SCM – Planning & Manufacturing
(for new consultants) SAP125 > ERP001 > SAP220 > TSCM40 > SM001 > TSCM42 > C_TSCM42_05
ALTERNATIVE COURSES

SAP125 > ERP001 > SAP220 > PLM114 > SCM240 > SCM210 > SCM250 > SCM300 > SCM310 > SCM360 > SM001 > C_TSCM42_05
CERTIFICATION Solution Consultant SCM – Planning in mySAP SCM (SCM5.0)

PLM100 > SCM100 > SCM200 > SCM210 > SCM215 > SCM220 > SCM230 > SCM250 > C_TSCM44_05
Voor de meest actuele certificeringinformatie verwijzen wij u graag naar www.sap.com/services/education/certification

SCM200 · Business Processes in Planning (SAP SCM (APO))

DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES 19-jan-09, 2-mrt-09

TARGET GROUP planning in SAP SCM (APO). SOFTWARE

This course is aimed at project team
members and key users (from the user
departments) who are responsible for
implementing supply-chain planning
with SAP SCM (APO).
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SCM100 (Planning Overview (ERP))
• PLM100 (Life-Cycle Data Management)
GOALS
The course gives an overview of the
concepts and procedures in supply-chain
CONTENT
• Overview of the master data and
transaction data required for supply-
chain planning
• Integration of SAP ECC and SAP SCM
(APO) of the Core Interface (CIF)
• Demand Planning (APO DP)
• Supply Network Planning (APO-SNP)
• Production Planning and Detailed
Scheduling (APO-PP/DS)
• Integration with production
• SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
• SAP SCM 5.0
NOTES
In conjunction with SCM300 (Supply
Chain Manufacturing Overview), this
course provides an overview of extended
production planning and control in SAP
ECC and SAP SCM (APO). Course
SAPSCM provides an overview of the
entire SAP SCM solution.
www.sap.nl/education 179
SAP Supply Chain Management
Manufacturing – Production Planning and Detailed Scheduling
SCM210 · Core Interface APO
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
This course is aimed at project team
members and key users (from the user
departments) who are responsible
integrating master data from the SAP
SCM (APO) system with an SAP ECC
system.
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
SCM200 (Overview of Advanced Planning
(SCM))
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
SAPSCM (Overview of SAP SCM)
GOALS
Course participants gain an
understanding of the integration of an
SAP SCM system (APO) with an SAP ECC
SCM212 · Integrated Supply Chain Modeling
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• Customers who are responsible for the
maintenance of master data in SAP ECC
(R/3) for Manufacturing Execution and
SAP SCM (APO) for Supply Chain
Planning.
• Consultants and Project team members
responsible for master data integration
between SAP ECC (R/3) and SAP SCM
(APO).
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SCM200 Business Processes in Planning
(SAP SCM)
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• SAPSCM SAP R/3 Planning and
Manufacturing Overview
GOALS
• Develop a complete supply chain model
in SAP SCM based on SAP ECC (R/3)
master data.
180
system (or an external system). Course
participants can transfer master data from
the SAP ECC system to the SCM system
and they can make settings so that
transaction data can be transferred
between the systems.
CONTENT
• Architecture of the integration of ERP
systems (SAP ECC) with the SCM(APO)
system
• Business system group, logical systems,
target systems, RFC destinations)
• Select master and transaction data that
should be transferred (generate
integration models in the APO Core
Interface) and transfer the selected data
• Deliver your own master data from SAP
ECC (R/3) to SAP SCM (APO) and make
any necessary master data
enhancements to ensure proper
planning results in SAP SCM (APO).
• Complete the modeling of your supply
chain by creating the necessary SAP
SCM (APO) master data to activate a
fully functional Supply Chain in SAP
SCM (APO).
SOFTWARE
• ERP ECC 5.0
• SCM 4.1
CONTENT
• Demonstrate a basic understanding of
how an SAP SCM (APO) system is
integrated with an SAP ECC (R/3)
system.
• Describe and use the monitoring tools
and the compare/reconcile functions to
(activate integration models)
• Transfer master data as an initial and
change transfer (transfer plants,
distribution centers, customers,
suppliers, materials, work centers, task
lists, BOMs from SAP ECC)
• Transfer transaction data as an initial
and change transfer (stock, orders from
SAP ECC and retransfer of planning
results to SAP ECC).
• Monitor and handle transfer errors
(application log, qRFC monitor)
SOFTWARE
• SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
• SAP SCM 5.0
ensure data consistency between SAP
ECC (R/3) and SAP SCM (APO)
• Modeling the following master data
scenarios:
- Manufacturing, Distribution and
Transportation
- Work Centers and Resources
- Production Process Models
- Production Data Structures
- External Procurement Relationships
- Master Recipes and PPMs
• Subcontracting
• Additional Topics
NOTES
• This course will not address integration
with Non-SAP products.
SAP Supply Chain Management
Manufacturing – Production Planning and Detailed Scheduling
SCM215 · Master Data APO
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• Customers who are responsible for the
maintenance of master data in SAP ECC
for Manufacturing Execution and SAP
SCM (APO) for Supply Chain Planning.
• Consultants and Project team members
responsible for master data integration
between SAP ECC and SAP SCM (APO).
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SCM200 Business Processes in Planning
(SCM)
• SCM210 Core Interface APO
• SCM100 Planning Overview (ERP)
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• SAPSCM Overview of the SAP SCM
solution
• PLM114 Basic Data for Manufacturing
and Product Management
SCM220 · Demand Planning
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES 9-mrt-09
TARGET GROUP
This course is intended for project team
members and key users (from the user
departments) who are responsible for
creating task lists based on aggregated
historical data.
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
SCM200 (Overview of Advanced Planning
(SCM))
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• BW310 (Business Information
Warehouse (BW) – Data Warehousing)
• BW350 (Business Information
Warehouse (BW) – SAP Components
Extraction)
GOALS
Course participants gain a detailed
understanding of how tasks lists are
created in SAP SCM (APO) based on
aggregated historical data. Participants
GOALS
This course will prepare you to:
• Indentify steps necessary to integrate
SAP ECC to SAP SCM
• Students will set up and deliver their
own master data from SAP ECC to SAP
SCM (APO), and make any necessary
master data enhancements to ensure
proper planning results in APO.
• Students will complete the modeling of
their supply chain by creating APO
master data that is necessary to activate
a fully functional Supply Chain in APO.
CONTENT
• Modeling the following master data
scenarios:
- Manufacturing
- Distribution and Transportation
learn how to generate task lists using
different forecasting techniques and can
include market information about
promotions in the demand plan. The
results of Demand Planning can be used
as a basis for Supply Network Planning
and Production Planning and Detailed
Scheduling.
CONTENT
• Overview of the planning concepts and
data structures
• Transfer aggregated historical data to
the internal APO BW system
• Define the planning levels for creating
aggregated plans
• Generate master data (characteristics
combinations and proportional factors)
• Configure Demand Planning using
planning areas, planning object
structures, planning books and macros
- Work Centers and Resources,
- Production Process Models
- Production Data Structures/Run Time
Objects
- External Procurement Relationships
- Master Recipes
• Additional Topics
SOFTWARE
• ERP ECC 6.0
• SCM 5.0
NOTES
This course will not address integration
with Non-SAP products.
• Generate your own exception messages
(alerts) using macros
• Cooperative Demand Planning
(exchanging data between the customer
and manufacturer over the Internet)
• Demand Planning with statistical
forecasting, causal analysis and
combined forecasts
• Mass processing planning tasks in the
background
• Release the results of Demand Planning
as a planned independent demand for
Supply Network Planning and
Production Planning and Detailed
Scheduling.
SOFTWARE
• SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
• SAP SCM 5.0
www.sap.nl/education 181
SAP Supply Chain Management
Manufacturing – Production Planning and Detailed Scheduling

SCM222 · Demand Planning with Bills of Material

DURATION 2 hours PRICE € 150 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP GOALS for master data

Project team members and other key
users responsible for setting up the
framework for successful demand
planning.
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SCM200 Business Processes in Planning
(SAP SCM)
This course will prepare you to
• Create master and transaction data to
plan demand for product components
• Plan demand on component level
• Maximize forecast accuracy
• Avoid stockouts and unnecessary
inventory costs
• Overview of the required customizing
settings
• Demand plan creation for product
components using bills of material
• Release of component demand to
Supply Network Planning
SOFTWARE

• SCM222 Demand Planning with Bills- CONTENT • ERP ECC 5.0

Of-Material
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• SAPSCM SAP Supply Chain
Management Solution Overview
• SCM230 Supply Network Planning
(SNP)
• Description of a typical business • SCM 4.0/ 4.1
scenario in which a planner • PLUGIN 2004
immediately can see the impact of the
product forecast on the fixed
component level
• Sequencing of the administration steps

SCM225 · Advanced Demand Planning

DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED • Release from SNP to DP

This course is aimed at project team
members and key users (from the user
departments) responsible for
implementing Demand Planning with
SAP SCM based on the component SAP
APO 5.0. The course is also suitable for
customers who are still using an earlier
version of SAP APO.
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• BW310 BI – Enterprise Data
Warehousing
• BW350 BI – Data Acquisition
GOALS
You will gain an in-depth understanding
of several advanced topics in demand
planing with SAP APO are.
CONTENT
• Using Navigational attributes in
• Advanced Planning area Configuration
- Locking
- Data Horizons
• Methods for releasing Demand to SNP
• Uploading Data during Interactive
Planning
• Maintenance of Live Planning Area
• Demand Planning Metrics
SOFTWARE

• SCM200 Business Processes in Planning Demand Planning • ERP ECC 6.0

(SCM) • Extracting Data from the Planning • SCM 5.0
• SCM220 Demand Planning • Advanced Disaggregation methods

182
SAP Supply Chain Management
Manufacturing – Production Planning and Detailed Scheduling
SCM230 · Supply Network Planning (SNP)
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES 23-mrt-09
TARGET GROUP
This course is intended for project team
members and key users (from the user
departments) who are responsible for
creating and optimizing cross-plant rough
production, distribution and
procurement plans for the entire logistical
chain in the medium to long-term
horizon.
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SCM200 (Overview of Advanced
Planning (SCM))
• SCM210 (Core Interface APO)
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
SCM220 (Demand Planning)
GOALS
Course participants gain a detailed
understanding of how cross-plant rough
production and distribution and
procurement plans are created, taking
work center, storage and transport
capacities in SAP SCM. You can determine
SCM250 · Production Planning and Detailed Scheduling (APO PP / DS)
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES 26-jan-09, 30-mrt-09
TARGET GROUP
This course is aimed at project team
members and key users (from the user
departments) responsible for
implementing production planning with
SAP SCM using APO-PP/DS.
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SCM200 (Overview of Advanced
Planning (SCM))
• SCM210 (Core Interface APO)
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• SAPSCM (Overview of SAP SCM)
GOALS
The course provides information about
using APO-PP/DS to create a feasible
the feasible transfers in the short-term
horizon (deployment) and to summarize
stock transfer orders.
CONTENT
• Overview of supply-chain planning
(SNP) with SAP SCM(APO), integration
with Demand Planning (DP) and
Production Planning (PP/DS)
• Exchange master and transaction data
with SAP ECC
• Create master data for Supply Network
Planning Product interchangeability
• Configure Supply Network Planning
and interactive planning using planning
areas, planning books and macros
• Cooperative supply planning (data
exchange of requirements between
manufacturer and supplier over the
Internet)
• Integrated exception management in
the alert monitor
• Discuss the different planning methods:
production plan for the short-term
horizon. It shows the relationship with
ECC-MRP and APO-SNP.
CONTENT
• Brief overview of prerequisites and
master data
• Preplanning and sales orders in APO-
PP/DS
• Requirements planning
• Planning quantities and capacities
• Planning heuristics
• Planning strategies
• Advanced production planning
functions
• Planning tools for requirement and
heuristics with capacity comparison,
optimization, Capable-to-Match, VMI
and aggregated planning.
• Plan alternative resources and finite
supplier constraints
• Cross-plant safety stock planning
• Deployment: convert stock transport
requisitions into feasible stock transfer
orders. Optimize the short-term
replenishment schedules for
distribution centers and customers
• Transport Load Builder (TLB):
summarize transfers by threshold values
for volumes, weight and pallets.
• Delimitation to SAP SCM Transport
Planning (TP/VS)
SOFTWARE
• SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
• SAP SCM 5.0
capacity planning
• Corresponding Customizing settings
SOFTWARE
• SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
• SAP SCM 5.0
NOTES
This course requires knowledge of
integration and APO master data.
Industry-specific processes (campaigns,
length-oriented planning and so on)with
APO is not discussed in this course.
www.sap.nl/education 183
SAP Supply Chain Management
Manufacturing – Production Planning and Detailed Scheduling

SCM235 · Planning with Capable-to-Match (CTM)

DURATION 4 days PRICE € 2360 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP understanding of how to use APO CTM business scenarios

This course is intended for project team
members and key users who are
responsible for implementing Capable-to-
Match for short or long term solutions
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SCM200 Advanced Planning Overview
(SCM)Business Processes in Planning
(SAP SCM)
• SCM212 Integrated Supply Chain
Modeling
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• SCM230 Supply Network Planning
(SNP)
• SCM250 Production Planning and
Detailed Scheduling (APO-PP/DS)
• SCM670 Global Availability Check
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
This course enables you to gain an
to create production plans for the short
and long -term horizon.
SOFTWARE
• SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
• SAP SCM 5.1
CONTENT
• Details of the scope of a CTM
Run/Profile
• Details of CTM Time Streams
• Planning with CTM in the PP/DS
horizon
• Planning with CTM in the SNP horizon
• Impact of Demand prioritization and
Supply categorization on the CTM run
• Applying Search Strategies in the
planning run
• Tightening/relaxing constraints using
Master Data
• Applying CTM planning strategies to
• Integration of Interchangeability with
CTM
• Integration of Rules-Based substitution
with CTM
• Use of technical settings to control
CTM run
• Understanding Application logs for
CTM
• Application of Descriptive
characteristics with CTM
• Use of Supply Distribution with CTM
• Configuration of CTM settings
NOTES
• Industry specific processes with APO are
not covered in this course.
• Master data integration will NOT be
discussed in detail. Participants should
attend SCM212 or use SAP Online Help
in preparation for this class.

184
SAP Supply Chain Management
Service Parts Management & Extended Warehouse Management

SPM100 SCM SPM110 SCM

SAP Service Parts SAP Service Parts
Planning Processes Planning Customizing

3 days 5 days

SAPSPM SCM SPM200 SCM

SAP Service Parts SAP Service Parts
Management Fulfillment Processes
Overview

2 days 3 days

TZEWM1 SCM SCM630 ERP

SAP Extended Warehouse Warehouse Management
Management Processes

2 days 5 days

EWM100 SCM EWM110 SCM

Extended Warehouse Extended Warehouse
Management Processes Management Customizing

3 days 5 days

SNC100
Supplier Network
Collaboration

3 days

EWM100 · Extended Warehouse Management Processes

DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES 9-feb-09, 14-apr-09

TARGET GROUP • Describe the major processes and execution

• Project team members functions in Extended Warehouse - Process and layout storage control for
• Team Leaders Management (EWM) goods receipts
• Consultants • Describe the EWM Master Data • Goods Issue Processing:
• SAP Business partners integration with the ERP system - Outbound EWM documents
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED • Understand the EWM documents used - Warehouse task and order creation and
• SAP01 SAP Overview in the inbound, outbound and execution
• SAPSCM SAP Supply Chain warehouse processes. - Process and layout storage control for
Management Solution Overview or CONTENT goods issues.
SAPSPM SAP Service Parts Management • An Introduction to the Extended • Additional Functions in EWM:
Overview Warehouse Management system and its - Slotting and Rearrangement
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED architechture. - Yard Management
• SCM610 Delivery Processes • Organizational Elements and structure - Labor Management
• SCM210 Core Interface APO requirements of EWM SOFTWARE

• SCM660 Handling Unit Management
GOALS
• Understand the basic organizational
data related to Extended warehouse
management
• Master Data requirements of EWM • SAP ECC 6.0, SCM 2007
• Warehouse Monitor and RF Framework
• Goods Receipt Processing:
- Inbound EWM documents
- Warehouse task and order creationand

www.sap.nl/education 185
SAP Supply Chain Management
Service Parts Management & Extended Warehouse Management

EWM110 · Extended Warehouse Management Customizing

DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES 16-feb-09, 4-mei-09

TARGET GROUP
• Project Leaders
• Team Leaders
• Consultants
• SAP Business partners
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAPSCM SAP Supply Chain
Management Solution Overview
• EWM100 Extended Warehouse
Management Processes
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• SCM610 Delivery Processes
• SCM210 Core Interface APO
• Configure the use of Storage Types, • Goods Issue processing
Storage Sections and Activity Area • Posting Changes
• Set up process and layout oriented • Replenishment processing
storage control for goods receipt a • Physical Inventory processing
• Create the necessary EWM settings to • Additional Functions:
perform Replenishment. - Slotting and Rearrangement
• Understand the use and processes - Labor Management
related to posting changes in EWM. - Yard Management
• Describe, configure and execute SOFTWARE
physical inventory processing in EWM. • SAP ECC 6.0
• Create the required settings and data in • SCM 2007
the EWM system to perform slo
CONTENT

GOALS • Structural Elements and Master Data

• Configure and create the required EWM • The Interface between the ERP Sysytem
organizational elements and master and the EWM System.
data • Goods Receipt processing

186
SAP Supply Chain Management
Service Parts Management & Extended Warehouse Management

SNC100 · Supplier Network Collaboration

DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP processes and perform some typical - Work Order

• Consultants collaboration processes - Supply Network Inventory (SNI)
• Project Team Members CONTENT - Delivery Control Monitor (DCM)
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED • SAP SNC Overview and system - Dynamic Replenishment (DR)
• SAP01 (SAP Overview) landscape • Exception Management
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED • Purchase Order Process • Authorization
• SAPSCM (SAP SCM Overview) • Release Process • Appendix
GOALS • ASN Processing SOFTWARE

This course will prepare you to: • Invoice Collaboration • SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
• Understand the benefit and system • Master data • Inventory Collaboration Hub 5.1
landscape of SAP SNC • Supplier Managed Inventory (SMI)
• Explain the different SAP SNC business • Further Processes (without exercises)

SPM100 · SAP Service Parts Planning Processes

DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP planning; distribution requirements matrix

• Consultants
• Project Team Members
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAPSPM SAP Service Parts Management
Overview
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• SCM200 Advanced Planning Overview
(SCM) Business Processes in Planning
(SAP SCM)
• SCM210 Core Interface APO
• BW310 BI – Enterprise Data
Warehousing
planning (DRP) and deployment and • Procurement planning
inventory balancing. • Supply Network Collaboration (SAP
CONTENT SNC)
• SAP SPP overview and system landscape • Run deployment
• Master data like BOD • Perform inventory balancing
• Define planning profiles and run • Order fulfillment with GATP
planning service Manager • Use the Alert Monitor
• BI dataflow for Capture-Demand SOFTWARE
• Plan in the forecasting planning book • SAP ECC 6.0
• Forecast profiles and automated model • SAP SCM 5.1
selection • SAP NetWeaver BI 7.0
• Run a stocking service NOTES

GOALS • Perform EOQ and safety stock planning The Order Fulfillment part is shown with
• Gain an in-depth understanding of the • Perform a DRP planning run SAP ECC not with SAP CRM
different planning scenarios for service • Scheduling in DRP
parts like: forecasting, inventory • Retrieve information from the DRP

www.sap.nl/education 187
SAP Supply Chain Management
Service Parts Management & Extended Warehouse Management

SPM110 · SAP Service Parts Planning Customizing

DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP • Master Data • EOQ and Safety Stock

Process Consultants, Partners and Project - Hierarchy structures
Team Members needing to implement - BOD, VCLO, and Inventory Balancing
Service Parts Planning in SCM 5.0 or 5.1. Area Hierarchies
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED - Product Group Types and Product
• SAPSPM SAP Service Parts Management Groups
Overview - Assigning users to planners
• SPM100 SAP Service Parts Planning - Rounding profiles and package
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED specification
• SCM 4.x • Stocking and Destocking Decision
• CRM 4.0 - Replenishment Indicator
• SAP GTS - Exclusion tables
• SAP NetWeaver including integration • Historical Data Capture
and SAP R/3 or SAP ERP process and - Capturing and changing historical
configuration skills demand
• SAP01 SAP Overview - Settings to handle future customer
GOALS demand
Customize Service Parts Planning - Work day correction
including: - Realignment of historical demand
• Master Data • Forecasting
• Forecasting - Forecasting based on leading indicators
• EOQ and Safety Stock - Forecasting of return quantities
• DRP - Automatic forecast model selection
• Deployment - Smoothing parameter tuning
• Surplus and Obsolescence - User assignment to key figures
• Interchangeability - Forecast approval rules including
CONTENT customer defined
• Customizing the SAP’s Service Parts - Phase-in and Long term forecasting
Planning Solution: - Inheritance of forecast profiles
• Planning Service manager - Customer defined forecast strategies
• Planning Profiles - Outlier correction including customer
• Triggers defined
- Customer defined forecast errors
- Model Determination, Normal or
Poisson
- Target Service Level Determination
- Additional safety stock buffer
• DRP
- DRP Horizons
- Lead time settings
- Stability Rules
- Supplier Shutdown
- Product Group Procurement
- Consolidated Ordering
- Seasonal Safety Stock shift
- New or remanufactured parts decision
- DRP Approval rules and release
- Reorder point planning
• Deployment
- Deployment modes
- Deployment indicator
- Priority Tiers and sequencing rules
- Expedited shipments
- Stock transfer approval
- Determination of demand
• Surplus and Obsolescence
- Surplus and obsolescence customizing
- Surplus determination
- Surplus approval
- Obsolescence check service
- Surplus reporting
• Interchangeability
- Calculation of supersession times
- Interchangeability replacement types
- Supersession replacement strategies
- Form, Fit, and function classes

188
SAP Supply Chain Management
Service Parts Management & Extended Warehouse Management

SPM200 · SAP Service Parts Fulfillment Processes

DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET AUDIENCE
• Consultants
• Project Team Members
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAPSPM Service Parts Management
(SPM)
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• SAPCRM Overview of the SAP CRM
Solution
• SCM600 Processes in Sales and
Distribution
GOALS
• Execute the marketing and target group
selection for SAP Service Parts
Management (SPM)
• Get a detailed understanding about
CRM sales order management and
global available to promise check in
SAPSCM
• Understand the third party order
processing with extended billing
functionality and execution in SAP ECC
• Describe the Kit to Order processes
including functions in Extended
Warehouse Management (SAP EWM)
• Explain processes of the reverse logistic - TPOP with consolidation
like Claims & Returns and Entitlements - Additional functions for billing
CONTENT • Kit to Order process:
• Overview about the sales processes in - Additional functions in the availability
Service Parts Management check
• Relevant master data and integration of - Functions in EWM and handling of
SAP CRM, SPM SCM and SAP ECC partial quantities
• Marketing: • Pick from goods receipts
- Customer service (e.g. callback - Back order processing
campaign) - Push deployment
- Target group selection • Reverse logistics
- Campaign execution - Claims & Returns
• Global availability check (gATP) - Approval and quality inspection
- Initial determination of locations - Complaints for TPOP
- Rules based availability check - Entitlements
- Supersession SOFTWARE
• Sales order management • SAP ECC 6.0
- Oder creation, partner determination, • SAP SCM 5.1
pricing, credit limit check. • SAP NetWeaver BI 7.0
- Unchecked deliveries
- Goods issue using EWM
- Billing and rebates
• Third party order processing (TPOP)
- Additional functions in the availability
check

TZEWM1 · SAP Extended Warehouse Management Processes

DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP GOALS • CRM vs SD

The workshop is intended for SAP
consultants or pre-sales experts who will
be expanding the knowledge base in the
field with the new functionality in SAP
EWM coming out in the 2007 release.
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
Knowledge of EWM in SAP SCM 5.0
preferred; knowledge of SAP ERP WM at a
minimum.
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None
• Teach consultants new functionality so • Goods Receipt Optimization (including
that they are able to implement a GR from production)
customer project • Kit to Stock
• Teach pre-sales new functionality so • RFID Enablement
that they are able to demo and explain • Material Flow Systems
new functionality Train the trainer to • Serial Numbers
teach this workshop to customers • Direct Outbound Delivery
CONTENT • GR Tolerances
• Labor Management • GI for internal consumption (account
• Additional miscellaneous SAP EWM assignments)
2007 topics

www.sap.nl/education 189
SAP Supply Chain Management
Collaboration

OSC41S
OKP Supply Chain
Management (SCM) 4.1

8 hours

SCM280 SCM282
Overview on Process: Customer
SAP Inventory Collaboration
Collaboration Hub (SAP
ICH)
2 hours 2 hours

SNC100
Supplier Network
Collaboration

3 days

OSC41S · Online Knowledge Product SAP Supply Chain Management (SCM) 4.1
DURATION 8 hours PRICE € 350 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP GOALS Maps for SCM solution consultant and

• SC Planning Consultants
• SC Collaboration Consultants
• SC Operations Consultants
• SC Fulfillment Consultants
• SC Visibility Consultants
• SCM for Industry Consultants
• SC Technology and Integration
Consultants
• Presales Employees
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• Knowledge equivalent to a consultant
profile for SAP SCM 4.0
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
This Online Knowledge Product will
prepare you to:
• Describe the SAP SCM 4.1 functionality
• Describe the SAP SCM 4.1 technology
• Plan your SAP SCM 4.1 implementation
project
• Implement SAP SCM 4.1
CONTENT
This Online Knowledge Product contains
the official SAP new-release knowledge for
SAP SCM 4.1 and makes it available for
access anywhere and anytime. It is role-
based and prioritized to provide the most
technology consultant roles. Each
Learning Map contains a variety of
learning objects, such as recorded expert
presentations, interactive tutorials and
simulations, documentation and self-
tests. In addition to the Online Knowledge
Product, Live Expert Sessions can be
offered. The student has the opportunity
to attend these sessions online without
the need to travel. The focus of the Live
Expert Sessions is to clarify open topics
about SAP SCM 4.1.
NOTES

• Project experience convenient and efficient learning Online Knowledge Products are offered in
experience. The Online Knowledge English.
Product consists of 8 separate Learning

190
SAP Supply Chain Management
Collaboration
SCM280 · Overview on SAP Inventory Collaboration Hub (SAP ICH)
DURATION 2 hours PRICE € 150 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• Decision makers
• Solution consultants
• IT or business professionals interested in
Supply Chain Collaboration
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• Knowledge of the components and
supported business processes of the
mySAP Supply Chain Management
solution can be acquired by attending
SAPSCM
• Familiarity with the supply chain, and
particularly replenishment, aspects of
business operations.
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
Awareness that the traditional linear
supply chain is being replaced with an
SCM282 · Customer Collaboration with SAP Inventory Collaboration Hub (SAP ICH)
DURATION 2 hours PRICE € 150 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• Decision Makers
• Solution Consultants
• Parties interested in Supply Chain
Collaboration
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
Understanding of logistics processes and
their impact on application software
(see SAPSCM mySAP Supply Chain
Management Solution Overview and/or
SAPSCM mySAP Supply Chain
Management Solution Overview)
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
Insight into today’s supply chain
challenge using Vendor-Managed
Inventory
adaptive network of supply chain partners
can be acquired by reading the mySAP
SCM Statement of Direction at:
http://service.sap.com/scm
GOALS
• Explain why companies need Supply
Chain Collaboration
• Recognize how companies benefit from
software that enables collaboration
• Identify how SAP ICH adds value to the
existing mySAP SCM solution
• Outline the business processes
supported by SAP ICH in SAP SCM 4.1
• Describe how SAP’s supplier portal
strategy reaches beyond sourcing and
procurement
GOALS
• Describe the business purpose and
processes covered by Customer
Collaboration: from traditional Vendor-
managed Inventory (VMI) to web- based
Responsive Replenishment
• Explain the concepts of
- Responsive Promotion Planning
- Replenishment Planning
• Identify the functional building blocks
and enablers
- Data Import Control
- Responsive Forecasting
- Promotion and Replenishment
Planning
- Transport Load Building
- Planning Service Manager
SOFTWARE
SCM 4.1
CONTENT
In this e-learning you learn why
companies need supply chain
collaboration and how supply chain
collaboration is enabled by SAP ICH. You
are introduced to the supplier and
customer collaboration processes that are
supported by SAP ICH as well as to the
technological platform on which these
solutions are based. SAP ICH is one
component of mySAP SCM.
NOTES
• SAP ICH typically works together with
an ERP backend system, either mySAP
ERP or a non-SAP system.
SOFTWARE
• SCM 4.1
CONTENT
• Overview of the key benefits of
Customer Collaboration
• Solution to the business pain points in
short term planning
• Introduction to the creation of an
adaptive and self-adjusting forecast
• Amplification of replenishment and
load building processes
www.sap.nl/education 191
SAP Supply Chain Management
SAP RFID and Event Management

SAP01 SRF001
SAP Overview Radio Frequency in SAP
Software – Solution
Overview

3 days 1 hour

SAPSCM ERP SCM601 ERP SRF010 SRF050

Overview of the SAP SCM Processes in Logistics SAP RFID-enabled Supply SAP RFID for SCM
Solution Execution Chain Execution – Solution Technology and System
Overview Landscape

3 days 3 days 2 hours 1 hour

SAPNW NW SCM663
SAP NetWeaver Overview SAP Event Management
5.0

3 days 3 days

SCM663 · SAP Event Management 5.0

DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP Processes in SAP Event Management • Configuration will include; Creating
• Consultants • Send event notifications and perform Event Handlers, Event Notification,
• Project Team Members status retrieval configuring reaction to Events, the Web
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED • Configure the Fulfillment visibility Communication Layer (WCL), Event
• SAP01 SAP Overview process in the SAP ERP Application Management Document Flow and the
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED System and SAP Event Management configuration of the interface between
• Basic configuration skills • Configure the Web Communication Event Management and BI.
• Knowledge of Procurement, Sales and Layer (WCL) • Appendix of Additional Topics that
Distribution, and CONTENT includes:
• Transportation process flows and • Overview - Connecting Systems
documents • Creating Events - Archiving
GOALS • Event Notification and Status Retrieval - Application Log
• Explain the elements of SAP Event • Monitoring and Analysis - Simulation in the Application Server
Management • Visibility Processes and EM
• Explain the purpose and use of Visibility • Connecting SAP Application Systems

SRF001 · Radio Frequency in SAP Software – Solution Overview

DURATION 1 hour PRICE € 150 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP - technology components enabling RFID CONTENT

All parties interested in radio frequency
technology and how it is implemented in
different SAP solution areas
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• SAP01 SAP Überblick
• SAPNW SAP NetWeaver – Overview
GOALS
• Basic principles of RFID technology
- barcode versus Radio Frequency
identification
• Overview of the individual SAP
components using Radio Frequency
(RF)
- SAP Console
- SAP Mobile Asset Management
- SAP Auto-ID Infrastructure
• Overview of RFID-enabled processes
using SAP solutions
• Understanding of the different key
differentiators
• Handling of RFID data with mobile
devices
• Learn about industry-specific adoption

192
SAP Supply Chain Management
SAP RFID and Event Management
SRF010 · SAP RFID-enabled Supply Chain Execution – Solution Overview
DURATION 2 hours PRICE € 150 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
All parties interested in leveraging the
impact of technical innovation for
creating tomorrow’s supply chain
processes
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• SAP01 SAP Überblick, SAPNW SAP
NetWeaver – Overview, SAPSCM
Überblick über die Lösung SAP SCM
• SCM601 Processes in Logistics Execution
SRF050 · SAP RFID for SCM: Technology and System Landscape
DURATION 2 hours PRICE € 150 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
Technology Consultants and Project
Team in charge of setting up the overall
landcape for RFID-enabled SC Execution
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAPNW SAP NetWeaver – Overview
• SAP XI Installation
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• SRF001 Radio Frequency in SAP
Software (Solution Overview)
GOALS
• Learn about the basic principles of RFID
technology
• Understand the benefits of RFID in
supply chain processes
• Adopt the required infrastucture
• Differentiate between the supported
scenarios
GOALS
• Describe the required system
infrastructure and components
- SAP Auto-ID Infrastructure (SAP AII)
based on SAP Web Application Server
(SAP WAS) 6.40
- SAP Exchange Infrastructure (SAP XI)
- SAP R/3 Add-Ons
• Follow and execute the installation
procedure
• Set up the interface configuration
CONTENT
• Introduction of RFID and its use in the
area of SC Execution
• Implementation options incl. typical
roadmap of an RFID project
• Individual scenario focus per industry
(CP / Retail / ChemPharm / A&D /
Automotive)
CONTENT
• Overview of the different landscape set-
up options
• System Installation sequence
• Component connectivity
www.sap.nl/education 193
SAP Customer Relationship Management
CRM Enterprise

SAPCRM CRM CR100 CRM CR300 CRM SCM290

Overview of the SAP CRM CRM Customizing CRM Sales Overview of Trade
Solution Fundamentals Promotion Mgmt.
with CRM & SCM

3 days 5 days 4 days 2 hours

CRM001 CRM TCRM10 CRM CR600 CRM

Empower Sales, Services, CRM – Fundamentals I CRM Marketing
and Marketing with SAP
CRM Solution

6 hours 10 days 5 days

CR700 CRM CR580 CRM

CRM Service CRM User Interface

5 days 3 days

BW380 NW CR900 CRM

SAP BW Analysis Analytical CRM
Processes and
Data Mining

2 days 3 days

OCR60 CRM OCR60S CRM

Zie ook www.service.sap.com/okp
Online Knowledge Product Online Knowledge Product
voor meer informatie over SAP CRM 2007 SAP CRM 2006s
Online Knowledge Products
4 hours 22 hours

CERTIFICATION Solution Academy basic training as Solution Consultant CRM – Marketing (for new CRM consultants) TCRM10 > CR600 >

C_CR600_50
ALTERNATIVE COURSES SAPCRM > CR100 > CR500 > CR600 > C_CR600_50
CERTIFICATION Solution Academy basic training as Solution Consultant CRM – Service (for new CRM consultants) TCRM10 > CR700 > C_CR700_50

ALTERNATIVE COURSES SAPCRM > CR100 > CR500 > CR700 > C_CR700_50

CERTIFICATION Solution Academy basic training as Solution Consultant CRM – Analytical CRM (for new CRM consultants)

TCRM10 > CR900 > C_CR900_50

ALTERNATIVE COURSES SAPCRM > CR100 > CR500 > CR900 > C_CR900_50

Voor de meest actuele certificeringinformatie verwijzen wij u graag naar www.sap.com/services/education/certification

194
SAP Customer Relationship Management
CRM Enterprise

CR100 · CRM Base Customizing

DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES 26-jan-09, 20-apr-09

TARGET GROUP CONTENT SOFTWARE

• Customers and project team members • CRM basic data: • SAP CRM 5.0
wishing to gain in-depth knowledge of - Business partner • SAP NetWeaver Portal 7.0
CRMbasic data, basic functionalities and - Organizational model • SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
basic customizing - Product master NOTES

• SAP consultants and partners
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAPCRM (SAP CRM Solution
Overview)
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• SCM600 (Processes in Sales and
Distribution)
GOALS
The participants will gain a greater
understanding of both basic data in CRM
as well as selected basic CRM
functionality and basic customizing.
- Customizing settings for each object This course will only deal with the basic
• CRM business transactions data and functions in the CRM Enterprise
- Overview of generic functions in System. Neither the E-Commerce / Field
business transactions Applications nor specific Interaction
- Activity management Center functionality will be part of this
- Customizing for these objects course.
• Process control and determination
- Partner determination
- Actions
- OverviewofpricinginCRM
- CRM billing
• Basic concepts of CRM middleware
• Introduction in People-centric CRM
(PC UI)

CR300 · CRM Sales

DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES 2-feb-09, 11-mei-09

TARGET GROUP supported in SAP CRM Enterprise and the • Case study
• Customers and members of the project relevant Customizing settings. SOFTWARE
team who want to gain further CONTENT • SAP CRM 5.0
knowledge of the sales processes and • Introduction to sales scenarios • SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
scenarios that are supported in SAP • Call planning • SAP NetWeaver Portal 7.0
CRM Enterprise as well as the relevant • Activity management in SAP CRM Sales NOTES
Customizing settings. • Area management This course discusses the basic setup and
• SAP consultants and partners • Opportunity Management use of SAP CRM sales scenarios. This
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED • Copy control course does not cover e-selling nor mobile
• SAPCRM (SAP CRM Solution • Quote management sales scenarios nor specific interaction
Overview) • Order management center functions.
• CR100 (CRM Customizing • Special functions in quote and order
Fundamentals) management
GOALS • Pricing in SAP CRM Sales
Course participants will gain detailed • Contract management
knowledge of the sales scenarios that are • Rebate processing

www.sap.nl/education 195
SAP Customer Relationship Management
CRM Enterprise

CR580 · CRM User Interface

DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES 4-feb-09, 27-apr-09

TARGET GROUP Fundamentals • Business Roles

Customers, SAP consultants and project • IC WebClient UI experiences • Navigation Bar Customizing and
team members who are responsible for GOALS Transaction Launcher
configuring the SAP CRM User Interface • Gain an overview of the SAP CRM User • Architecture
(UI). Interface • UI Configuration
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED • Customize and maintain SAP CRM • Easy Enhancement Workbench
• SAPCRM Overview of the SAP CRM User Interface • Component Enhancement Concept
solution • Implement customer specific • Skin Configuration
• Fundamental knowledge of SAP enhancements • Web Services
technology CONTENT SOFTWARE

PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED • SAP CRM User Interface Overview • SAP CRM 2007
• CR100 CRM Customizing • UI Concept • SAP ECC 6.0

CR600 · CRM Marketing

DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES 16-feb-09

TARGET GROUP CONTENT • Lead Management

• Customers and project team members
who want to have greater knowledge of
the functions and scenarios that are
supported in SAP CRM Marketing.
• SAP consultants and partners
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAPCRM (SAP CRM Solution
Overview)
• CR100 (CRM Customizing
Fundamentals)
GOALS
Course participants learn about the
business processes in the SAP CRM
Marketing solution. They also learn how
to set up (customize) SAP CRM
Marketing Management functions.
• Overview of marketing management in
SAP CRM
• Marketing and campaign planning
- Planning and performing marketing
projects
- Marketing Calendar
• Overview of marketing analytics
• Personalized mail forms
- Creating personalized e-mails and
designing documents
- Business partner-controlled
communication
• Segmenting business partners
- Marketing characteristics
- SegmentBuilder
- Creating profiles and target groups
• Campaign automation
• External List Management
• Special functions in campaign
management
SOFTWARE
• SAP CRM 5.0
• SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
• SAP NetWeaver Portal 7.0
NOTES
This course is based on the functions
contained in SAP’s SAP CRM solution. It
does not contain functions that relate to
SAP industry solutions.

196
SAP Customer Relationship Management
CRM Enterprise
CR700 · CRM Service
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES 9-feb-09
TARGET GROUP
• Customers and project team members
who are involved in implementing SAP
CRM Service
• SAP consultants and partners
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAPCRM (SAP CRM Solution
Overview)
• CR100 (CRM Customizing
Fundamentals)
GOALS
Course participants learn about the
supporting service processes within SAP
CRM Service. They will also learn about
the Customizing settings that are relevant
for CRM service.
CR900 · Analytical CRM
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• Customers and project team members
who are involved in implementation
projects that focus on SAP BW and SAP
CRM integration
• SAP consultants and partners
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• SAPCRM Overview of the SAP CRM
solution
• Basic knowledge of SAP Business
Information Warehouse
• BW380 BI - Analysis Processes & Data
Mining
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• Course participants are given an
overview from the viewpoint of CRM
processes of what one should observe
when implementing system landscapes
CONTENT - Complaints and returns
• Installed base management: - In-house repair processing
- Installations • Case management
- Individual objects SOFTWARE
• Service contract processing: • SAP CRM 5.0
- Service agreements • SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
- Service contracts • SAP NetWeaver Portal 7.0
- Service plans NOTES
- Usage-based billing This course discusses the basic setup and
• Service order processing: use of SAP CRM service scenarios.
- Resourceplanning This course does not cover e-Selling nor
- Service confirmation mobile service scenarios nor specific
- Service billing Interaction Center functions.
- Product service letter
- Warranty claims
• Complaints and returns processing:
in which SAP BW, SAP CRM, SAP R/3 CRM processes)
and SAP SEM are integrated. They will - Planning (CRM planning applications)
also learn how to use analytical CRM • Analytical scenarios:
within the CRM scenarios Marketing, - Interaction channel analyses
Sales and Service. - Customer analyses
SOFTWARE - Marketing analyses
• CRM 5.0 - Sales analyses
• ERP ECC 6.0 - Service analyses
• SAP NetWeaver 7.0 NOTES
CONTENT • This course requires an understanding
• Overview of analytical CRM (platform of both CRM scenarios and the
and architecture) principles of BW; specific details about
• Analytical methods: these are not part of this course. Basic
- Measurement (data extraction and knowledge of data mining and the
reporting) Analysis Process Designer (APD) in
- Forecasts (data mining with a decision particular, which are part of course
tree, scoring, association analysis, ABC BW380, is required for the areas on
classification) analytical methods “forecasting and
- Optimizing (using analytical results in optimizing” in this course.
www.sap.nl/education 197
SAP Customer Relationship Management
CRM Enterprise
OCR60 · Online Knowledge Product SAP CRM 2007
DURATION 4 hours PRICE € 350 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• CRM Solution Consultants
• CRM Technology Consultants
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
The SAP CRM 2007 Learning Maps are
designed for qualified project participants.
You require:
• Knowledge equivalent to a consultant
certification for SAP CRM 2005
• More than 12 months project
experience
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• Describe SAP CRM 2007
• Plan SAP CRM 2007
• Implement SAP CRM 2007
OCR60S · OKP SAP CRM 2006s
DURATION 22 hours PRICE € 350 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• CRM Solution Consultants
• CRM Technology Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• Knowledge equivalent to a consultant
certification for SAP CRM 2005
• More than 12 months project
experience
GOALS
• This Online Knowledge Product will
prepare you to
- Describe and implement new
Interaction Center Capabilites
- Describe and implement new CRM
solutions for Financial Services, Public
Sector and Telco
198
CONTENT
• SAP CRM 2007 Roles
- Sales
- Service
- Marketing
- Interaction Center
- Web Channel
- Partner Channel Management
- Trade Promotion Management
- Mobile Service including Van Stock
- Technology
• SAP CRM 2007 Industry Roles
- Banking
- Financial Services
- Life Sciences
- Media
CONTENT
• Interaction Center Consultants
- Business Partner Handling
- Product Related Enhancements
- Intent-Driven Interaction
- Multi-Channel Communication
- IC Web Client Technology
Enhancements
- Interaction Center Management
• Service Industry Consultants
- Full Service Leasing
- SAP CRM 2006s Grantor Management
- Overview CRM 2006s for
Telecommunication
- Sales & Order Management – Product
Data Management and Product
Packages
- Sales & Order Management with E-
Commerce
- Sales & Order Management in Call
Center
- Professional Services
- Public Sector
- Telecommunication
- Utilties
NOTES
• This content is provided by SAP’s
Online Knowledge Products.
Information regarding Online
Knowledge Products and instructions
on how to access the Online Knowledge
Products are available:
http://service.sap.com/okp
• All materials are online
- Sales & Order Management in Dealer
Channel
• Technical Consultants
- SAP CRM Web Client UI
- Enterprise Service Oriented
Architecture (SOA)
NOTES
• This content is provided by SAP’s
Online Knowledge Products.
Information regarding Online
Knowledge Products and instructions
on how to access the Online Knowledge
Products are available: http://service.
sap.com/okp
• DURATION 4:26 hrs Interaction Center /
13:38 hrs Service Industries /
3:11 hrs Technology consultants
• All materials are online
SAP Customer Relationship Management
CRM Enterprise

SCM290 · Overview of Trade Promotion Management with CRM & SCM

DURATION 2 hours PRICE € 150 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP GOALS • How to organize and communicate

Project Managers, Project Team Leads and
Project Team Members responsible for
managing, documenting and
implementing SAP solutions
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• BW310 SAP BW Data Warehousing
This course will prepare you to:
• Describe the composition and functions
of Trade Promotion Management
realised with SAP CRM and SAP SCM
• Use the tools provided to successfully
and efficiently implement the Trade
changes in the TPM process
• How to plan and coordinate marketing
activities using TPM
• How to execute and validate pricing
conditions connected to TPM
SOFTWARE

• SAPCRM Overview of the SAP CRM
Solution
• CR010 CRM Überblick
• SCM200 Business Processes in Planning
(SAP SCM)
• SEM010 Strategic Enterprise
Management
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• SAPSCM SAP Supply Chain
Management Solution Overview
• CR500 CRM Middleware
• CR600 CRM Marketing
• CR215 Mobile Sales Basics
• Knowledge of Consumer Products
Industry
Promotion Management solution • R/3 4.6C
CONTENT • CRM 4.0
• Overview of the key concepts and SAP • SCM 4.0
components enabling Trade Promotion • SEM/BW 3.5
Management (TPM) solution
• How to organize and implement the
TPM process
• How to analyze pre- and post-
evaluations of KPIs
• How to prepare and set objectives for a
Trade Promotion Management budget
• How to plan, organize, and implement
TPM for offline
• and online Field Account planning
• How to generate proposals for TPM

TCRM10 · CRM Fundamentals

DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES 2-mrt-09, 25-mei-09

TARGET GROUP CONTENT - Solution Manager (project preparation

Solution consultants responsible for
implementing Customer Relationship
Management with mySAP CRM
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• Basic business knowledge of CRM
processes and concepts
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• Knowledge of mySAP ERP sales business
processes (for example, TSCM60 Order
Fulfillment I or SCM600 Processes in
Sales and Distribution)
GOALS
• Overview of the mySAP CRM solution:
- Fundamentals and architecture
- Overview of key areas (Analytics,
Marketing, E-Commerce, Channel
Management, Sales, Interaction Center,
Service, Field Applications,
Implementation & Operation)
• Customizing fundamentals for CRM:
- CRM basic data (business partner,
organizational model, product master,
plus the accompanying Customizing)
- CRM business transactions (overview of
phase, Business Blueprint phase,
implementation phase)
• CRM Middleware: basic concepts of
CRM middleware, replication
administration, data exchange,
monitoring, and error handling
• User interface (UI) technology in
mySAP CRM
• Case Study: implementation of example
scenarios using specific business
processes
SOFTWARE

At the conclusion of this course, you will
be able to:
• Use the basic knowledge a CRM
solution consultant requires for all
consultant profiles
the generic functions in business • CRM 5.0
transactions, activity management, • EP 7.0
essentials of Customizing) Transaction • ERP ECC 6.0
monitoring and determination (partner NOTES
determination, overview of pricing in The course material is available in
CRM, promotions, CRM billing) English only.

www.sap.nl/education 199
SAP Customer Relationship Management
CRM Technology & Channel

SAPCRM CRM CR580 CRM CR410 CRM

Overview of the SAP CRM CRM User Interface CRM Interaction Center
Solution (WebClient)

3 days 3 days 3 days

CR500 CRM
CRM Middleware

3 days

CERTIFICATION Solution Academy basic training as Solution Consultant CRM – Telesales

(for new CRM consultants) TCRM10 > CR300 > CR400 > CR410 > C_CR410_50
ALTERNATIVE COURSES SAPCRM > CR100 > CR500 > CR300 > CR400 > CR410 > C_CR410_50

CERTIFICATION Solution Academy basic training as Solution Consultant CRM – Internet Sales

(for new CRM consultants) TCRM10 > CR300 > CR800 > C_CR800_50
ALTERNATIVE COURSES SAPCRM > CR100 > CR500 > CR300 > CR800 > C_CR800_50

Voor de meest actuele certificeringinformatie verwijzen wij u graag naar www.sap.com/services/education/certification

CR410 · CRM Interaction Center (WebClient)

DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES 11-feb-09, 4-mei-09

TARGET GROUP GOALS - Management call lists

• Members of project teams who are
involved in implementing the CRM
Interaction Center WebClient as part of
SAP CRM
• SAP consultants and partners
• Customers who work with the CRM
Interaction Center WebClient
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAPCRM (SAP CRM Solution
Overview)
• CR100 (CRM Customizing
Fundamentals)
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• Knowledge of the SAP R/3 or SAP ERP
central component system in SD and
CS
On the one hand, course participants
learn about the technical architecture of
the Interaction Center WebClient in SAP
CRM. They also learn about how to use
the Interaction Center (IC) as an agent as
well as Customizing the user interface in
the Interaction Center WebClient in SAP
CRM.
CONTENT
• Architecture and technology
• Agent functions and operating the IC
• Creating IC profiles
• Configuring components such as the
navigation bar and the transaction
launcher
• IC manager portal:
- IC manager dashboard
- Interactive scripting
- IC workforce management
SOFTWARE
• SAP CRM 5.0
• SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
NOTES
This course prepares the members of a
project team for implementing a CRM
Interaction Center WebClient. The
Interaction Center WinClient is not part
of this course (please attend course CR400
(CRM Interaction Center WinClient) for
this).

200
SAP Customer Relationship Management
CRM Interaction Channels / CRM Technology
CR500 · CRM Middleware
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES 19-jan-09, 15-apr-09
TARGET GROUP
Customers, SAP consultants and partners
who are responsible for configuring and
operating the CRM Middleware
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAPCRM (SAP CRM Solution
Overview)
• Basic knowledge of SAP technology
GOALS
• At the end of this course, participants
will:
• Have an overview of the internal data
processing of the CRM Middleware
• Be able to set up and monitor the
connection of the CRM Middleware to
the SAP R/3 system that is connected
• Be able tomonitor the flow of data
within the CRMMiddleware
• Understand the principles of the data
distribution model for mobile clients
CONTENT
• Introduction to the CRM architecture
and CRM Middleware
• Connecting an SAP back-end system to
an SAP CRM system:
- CRM Middleware / administration
console
- Messaging BDoc
- Initial load / delta load / request
- Data flow, configuration and
monitoring
• Connecting an external system using
the XIF adapter
• Architecture and technical
configuration for field applications
(mobile):
- CRM Middleware: synchronizing BDoc
and consolidated database
- Minor / major realignment
SOFTWARE
• SAP CRM 5.0
• SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
NOTES
The contents of course CR500 originate
largely fromthe previously available
course CR555 (CRM Technology). A
mobile client or communication station is
available for demonstration purposes by
the instructor (there are no participant
exercises). The course material is generally
available in English.
www.sap.nl/education 201
SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SRM)

SAPSRM SRM SRM210 SRM SRM270 SRM

Overview of the SAP SRM SAP Enterprise SRM – MDM Catalog
Solution Buyer Configuration Managementt

3 days 5 days 3 days

SAP01 SRM300 SRM SRM260 SRM

SAP Overview SRM eSourcing Overview SAP Catalog and Content
Management

3 days 2 days 3 days

SAP210 ERP OSR50S SRM

Procure to Pay Online Knowledge Product Zie ook www.service.sap.com/okp
SAP SRM 5.0
voor meer informatie over

8 hours 50 hours Online Knowledge Products

CERTIFICATION Solution Academy basic training as Solution Consultant SAP SRM – SRM Procurement & Catalog Content Management

(for new consultants) SRM210 > SRM260 > C_TSRM10_05

ALTERNATIVE COURSES SRM210 > C_TSRM10_40

Voor de meest actuele certificeringinformatie verwijzen wij u graag naar www.sap.com/services/education/certification

OSR50S · Online Knowledge Product SAP SRM 5.0

DURATION 50 hours PRICE € 350 E-LEARNING

Zie ook www.service.sap.com/okp voor meer informatie over Online Knowledge Products

SRM210 · SAP Enterprise Buyer 5.0 Configuration

DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES 23-mrt-09, 8-jun-09

TARGET GROUP GOALS • Sourcing

Consultants and project team members • Create technical and application- • Plan-Driven Procurement
who are implementing SAP Enterprise specific basic knowledge to be able to • Bidding Engine
Buyer or SAP Supplier Relationship participate successfully in an SAP • Annex
Management (SAP SRM) Enterprise Buyer implementation. SOFTWARE

PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED • Customizing procurement processes SAP SRM 5.0

• Basic knowledge of SAP Materials with SAP SRM server NOTES
Management CONTENT • Configuring the SAP supplier self-
• SAPSRM (Overview of the SAP SRM • Enterprise Buyer and SRM server service component is not part of this
Solution) or basic knowledge of SAP overview course.
Enterprise Buyer • Backend integration and configuration • It does not focus on representing
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED • Organization processes, but on learning the possible
• SCM500 (Processes in Procurement) • Workflow Customizing settings. Consequently,
• Basic knowledge of SAP Solution • Master data this course is not suitable for beginners
Manager • Catalog management in SAP SRM or SAP Enterprise Buyer.
• Self-service procurement

202
SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SRM)

SRM260 · SAP Catalog and Content Management

DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770* STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP GOALS SOFTWARE

Consultants and project team members
who are responsible for implementing
SAP SRM for the configuration and
maintenance of the SAP Catalog and for
Catalog Content Management with SAP
CCM 2.0 (Catalog and Content
Management).
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
SRM210 (SAP Enterprise Buyer
Configuration)
* Indien direct aansluitend de certificeringstest afgenomen wordt is genoemde prijs inclusief certificeringskosten.
Learn the attributes and functions of SAP • SAP SRM 5.0
Catalog and Content Management (SAP • SAP Catalog Content Management 2.0
CCM 2.0). NOTES
CONTENT This course was still being planned when
• SAP CCM system landscape the catalog was created.
• Processes in SAP Catalog and Content
Management
• Basic configuration of SAP CCM
• ContentManagement (loading,mapping
and approval process)
• Search engine (search and data transfer)
• Supplier directory

SRM270 · MDM Catalog Content Management

DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES 1-apr-09, 22-jun-09

TARGET GROUP functions of SRM-MDM Catalog 1.0 • MDM Data Manager

• SRM-MDM Catalog Project Team based on the SAP Master Data • MDM Workflow
• SRM-MDM Catalog Solution Management 5.5 technology. • SRM-MDM Integration and Processes
Consultants CONTENT SOFTWARE

PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED • This course will cover the solution • NW MDM 5.5 SP04
• SRM210 Enterprise Buyer overview and architecture of SAP SRM- • SAP SRM 5.0
Configuration MDM Catalog 1.0 NOTES

PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• SAPSRM SAP SRM Overview
GOALS
• This course will prepare you to be able
to understand and use the features and
• The modules of SAP Master Data • This course is geared toward
Management 5.5 pertinent to SRM- participants who have already acquired
MDM Catalog 1.0: a knowledge of the mySAP SRM
• MDM Console enterprise buyer functionality.
• MDM Import Manager

SRM300 · SRM – SAP E-Sourcing Overview

DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES 6-apr-09, 25-jun-09

TARGET GROUP PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED • Projects

• Consultants and project team members • SCM500 (Processes in Procurement) • RFX
involved in SAP Supplier Relationship GOALS • Auction
Management (SAP SRM) E-Sourcing • Gain an overview over SAP SRM E- • Contract
projects. Sourcing • E-Sourcing System Administration
• Prospects who want to get an overview CONTENT Overview
about SAP E-Sourcing. • SAP E-Sourcing SOFTWARE

PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED • Workbench • SAP E-Sourcing with e-sourcing

• SAP01 SAP Overview • Vendor Management (version 4.2)

www.sap.nl/education 203
SAP NetWeaver Portal
Administration / Development

SAPNW NW ADM200 NW BIT600 NW

SAP NetWeaver Overview SAP Web Application SAP Business Workflow –
Server Java Administration Concepts, Inboxes,
Reporting and Template
Usage
3 days 5 days 2 days

NW001 NW EP200 NW EP300 NW EP600 NW

Technology Solutions SAP Enterprise Portal Configuration of SAP NetWeaver Portal
Powered by System Administration Knowledge Management Universal Work List
SAP NetWeaver and Collaboration

8 hours 5 days 5 days 1 day

SAPEP NW TEP10 NW
SAP Enterprise Portal Implementation and
Fundamentals Operation

3 days 10 days

TEP12 NW
Knowledge in development
Knowledge in development SAP NetWeaver Portal
of Java-, J2EE- and Web
of Java- and J2EE- Development
Dynpro for Java
applications
applications
5 days

ONWES NW EP120 NW EP130 NW

OKP SAP NetWeaver SAP NetWeaver SAP KMC Development
Enterprise Search 7.0 Portal Development

7 hours 5 days 5 days

CERTIFICATION Solution Academy basic training as Technology Consultant SAP NetWeaver 2004s – Portal (SAP NetWeaver Portal 7.0)

(for new Portal consultants) (TADM5) > (TADM10) > TEP10 > C_TEP10_04
ALTERNATIVE COURSES (SAPTEC) > (ADM100) > (ADM200) > (ADM102) > SAPEP > EP200 > EP300 > C_TEP10_04S

CERTIFICATION Solution Academy basic training as Development Consultant SAP NetWeaver 2004s – Portal (SAP NetWeaver Portal 7.0)

(for new Portal consultants) JA100 > JA300 > JA310 > TEP12 > C_TEP12_04S
ALTERNATIVE COURSES JA100 > JA300 > JA310 > SAPEP > EP120 > C_TEP12_04S
CERTIFICATION Solution Academy basic training as Development Consultant SAP NetWeaver 2004s – Knowledge Management and Collaboration

JA100 > JA300 > TEP13 > C_TEP13_04S

ALTERNATIVE COURSES JA100 > JA300 > SAPEP > EP130 > C_TEP13_04S

Voor de meest actuele certificeringinformatie verwijzen wij u graag naar www.sap.com/services/education/certification

ADM200 · SAP Web AS Java Administration

DURATION 5 days PRICE € 3300 STARTING DATES 5-jan-09, 23-feb-09, 4-mei-09, 22-jun-09

TARGET GROUP CONTENT • SAP transport management for Java

• SAP system administrators • Fundamentals of SAP Web AS Java • Other topics related to system
• Technology consultants • Installation of an additional Java administration for SAP Web AS Java
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED instance for an existing SAP system SOFTWARE

SAPTEC (Fundamentals of SAP Web AS) • Starting and stopping SAP Web Application Server 6.40
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED • Basic configuration of SAP Web AS Java NOTES

• Fundamental Java knowledge • User management This course provides an introduction to

• ADM100 (SAP Web AS Administration I) • Monitoring administration in SAP systems that use
GOALS • Patching for SAP Web AS Java SAP Web AS Java. The course does not
Carrying out fundamental administration • Change management for SAP Web AS cover administration with SAP Web AS
tasks during SAP Web AS Java operation Java ABAP.

204
SAP NetWeaver Portal
Administration / Development

EP120 · SAP NetWeaver Portal Development

DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP GOALS CONTENT

• SAP NetWeaver Portal Java Developers
• Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAPEP SAP NetWeaver Portal
Fundamentals
• JA300 SAP J2EE Fundamentals
• JA310 Java Web Dynpro Basics
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
Familiarity with Internet and network
technologies
• Understanding of the different SAP
tools and concepts for creating content
for the SAP NetWeaver Portal
• Use of SAP NetWeaver Visual Composer
• Use of the SAP NetWeaver Developer
Studio
• Understanding of portal API provided
and its services
• Overview and Positioning of the
Development Tools
• SAP NetWeaver Visual Composer
• SAP NetWeaver Developer Studio
• Portal applications and the portal
runtime environment
• Portal components
• Portal services and Web services
• Standard portal services
• SAP NetWeaver Portal client framework
SOFTWARE NWP 7.0

EP130 · SAP KMC Development

DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP GOALS CONTENT

• SAP NetWeaver Portal Java developers
• Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAPEP SAP NetWeaver Portal
Fundamentals
• JA300 SAP J2EE Fundamentals
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
Familiarity with Internet and network
technologies
• Use of the Knowledge Management and • Overview of KMC
Collaboration Platform from the • Introduction to KMC Development
developers’ perspective • Using the Repository Framework
• Use of the Repository Framework • Repository Filter
• Understanding of the KM services • KM services
• Development of applications with • Repository Manager
flexible UI • Flexible UI
• Use of the Index Management API for • Search and Classification
creating individual searches • Collaboration
• Programming using collaboration APIs SOFTWARE NWP 7.0

EP200 · SAP Enterprise Portal System Administration

DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES 2-mrt-09, 29-jun-09
TARGET GROUP
• SAP NetWeaver Portal administrators
• Technology consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAPEP (SAP NetWeaver Portal
Fundamentals)
• ADM200 (SAP Web AS Java
Administration)
GOALS
This course will prepare you to:
• Configure user administration and
logon
• Implement an authorization concept in
the portal
• Describe the variants of Single Sign-On
• Connect SAP systems to an SAP
NetWeaver Portal
• Operate and monitor an SAP NetWeaver
Portal securely
• Adapt the Portal user interface to
company specifications
• Implement advanced portal scenarios
CONTENT
• User administration and authentication
• Portal authorization concept
• Single Sign-On with back-end systems
• Integrating SAP applications
• Solution management
- Logging and monitoring
- IntegrationintheCCMS
- Backup strategies
- Translation process
- Transports
• Secure system management
• Design changes and branding
• Advanced scenarios
- External portal
- Federated portal network
SOFTWARE
• SAP NetWeaver Portal 7.0
• SAP Web Application Server 6.40
NOTES
In addition to the contents of course
SAPEP, fundamental administration
knowledge for SAP Web AS Java is also
required, as discussed in course ADM200.
www.sap.nl/education 205
SAP NetWeaver Portal
Administration / Development

EP300 · Configuration of Knowledge Management and Collaboration

DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES 9-mrt-09

TARGET GROUP CONTENT • Technical infrastructure

Consultants, administrators and content
managers for the knowledge management
platforms
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
SAPEP (SAP NetWeaver Portal
Fundamentals)
GOALS
• You will learn how to configure SAP
NetWeaver Knowledge Management
and SAP NetWeaver Collaboration and
to integrate them in SAP NetWeaver
Portal.
• Overview of SAP NetWeaver knowledge
management
• Content management functions
- Create and publish documents
- Overview of connecting WebDAV and
ICE
- Collaboration functions in content
management
• Administration and configuration
- Repositories and repository manager
- Attributes and metadata
- Form-based publishing (XML Forms
- Content Management
- TREX
- Monitoring and logging
• SAP NetWeaver collaboration
- Introduction to the collaboration
services
- Architecture, configuration and
administration of rooms
- Functions and configuration of Real-
Time Collaboration
- Groupware integration
SOFTWARE

• Understand and implement the Builder) SAP NetWeaver Portal 7.0

functionalities of Content
Management, Search and Classification,
Collaboration with SAP NetWeaver.
- Adjusting the user interface
• Search and classification (TREX)
- Index administration
- Taxonomies and classification
- Adjusting the search dialog

EP600 · SAP NetWeaver Portal Universal Work List

DURATION 1 day PRICE € 590 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP GOALS • Configure the Universal Worklist iView

• Technology Consultants
• Project team members
• Anybody interested in Universal
Worklist
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
SAPEP SAP NetWeaver Portal
Fundamentals
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
BIT600 SAP Business Workflow –
Concepts, Inboxes, Reporting and
Template Usage
• Understand how to use Universal • Set Universal Worklist Service
Worklist Parameters
• Connect Universal Worklist to an SAP • Enable Delta Pull Mechanism
Business Workflow system • Introduce Advanced Configuration
• Configure Universal Worklist Possibilities
CONTENT SOFTWARE
• Introduction to Universal Worklist • NWP 7.0
• Using Universal Worklist • ECC 6.0
• Personalize Universal Worklist
• Connecting Universal Worklist to an
SAP Business Workflow System

206
SAP NetWeaver Portal
Administration / Development
ONWES · OKP SAP NetWeaver Enterprise Search 7.0
DURATION 7 hours PRICE € 350 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• Solution Consultant
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• The SAP NetWeaver Enterprise Search
7.0 Learning Map is designed for
qualified project participants. You
require:
- Basic knowledge about the backend you
are connecting to Enterprise Search
- Knowledge of the wizards that are used
within WebDynpro UI’s is helpful
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• Describe SAP NetWeaver Enterprise
Search 7.0
• Plan SAP NetWeaver Enterprise Search
7.0
• Implement SAP NetWeaver Enterprise
Search 7.0
CONTENT
• Introduction to SAP NetWeaver
Enterprise Search
• Integration SAP NetWeaver Enterprise
Search into the Customer Landscape
• Configuring an SAP NetWeaver
Enterprise Search Appliance
• Operating an SAP NetWeaver Enterprise
Search Appliance
• Summary
NOTES
• This content is provided by SAP’s
Online Knowledge Products.
Information regarding Online
Knowledge Products and instructions
on how to access the Online Knowledge
Products are available:
http://service.sap.com/okp
• Course length:
- ~ 7:00 hrs
• All materials are online
www.sap.nl/education 207
SAP NetWeaver Portal
Administration / Development
TEP10 · Implementation and Operation
DURATION 10 days PRICE € 6600 STARTING DATES 2-feb-09
TARGET GROUP
Technology consultants responsible for
implementing and operating SAP
NetWeaver Portal
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
TADM10 Delta Implementation &
Operation SAP Web AS 6.20 - SAP Web AS
6.40 (Java & ABAP) (Java & ABAP)
for consultants with experience in SAP
Web AS ABAP administration, but no
experience in SAP Web AS Java
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• Understand the concepts and make use
of SAP NetWeaver Portal
• Install, configure, and administer SAP
NetWeaver Portal
• NetWeaver Developer Studio
208
SOFTWARE
• NWP 7.0
• ECC 6.0
• SAPWEBAS 6.40
CONTENT
• Basic principles
- Overview and end-user perspective
- Technical infrastructure and security
- Portal platform content
• System administration
- User management and security
- Integrating enterprise applications
- Solution management
• Implementation
- Installing and importing patches
- Implementation methodology
- Sizing and distribution
• Knowledge management and
collaboration
- Basic functions, concepts, and
architecture
- Advanced administration of search and
classification (TREX)
• Certification examination for
Technology Consultant for SAP
NetWeaver 2004s – Portal on the content
of both this course and the prerequisite
courses (see certification description for
more details).
NOTES
Course material and the certificate
examination are available in English only.
SAP NetWeaver Portal
Administration / Development
TEP12 · SAP NetWeaver Portal Development
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES 19-jan-09
TARGET GROUP
• SAP NetWeaver Portal Developers
• Development Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• JA100 SAP J2SE Fundamentals or Java
programming experience
• Familiarity with Internet and Network
technologies
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• JA300 SAP J2EE Fundamentals or
programming experience with J2EE
applications
• ABAP knowledge
GOALS
• Understand the concepts of the SAP
NetWeaver Portal
• Understand the different SAP tools and
approaches of content development for
the SAP NetWeaver Portal
• Develop Java-based Portal Applications
and Portal Services for the SAP NW
Portal with the help of the SAP
NetWeaver Developer Studio
SOFTWARE
• SAP NetWeaver 7.0
CONTENT
• Basics
- The big picture
- The end user perspective
- Technical infrastructure and security
• Portal platform content
• Overview and positioning of
development tools
• Introduction to SAP NetWeaver Visual
Composer
• Introduction to Portal Development Kit
and Portal Runtime
• Development of Java-based Portal
Components (Abstract Portal
Components, DynPages, and JSP
DynPages), using NetWeaver Developer
Studio
• Personalization, internationalization
• Portal Services and Portal Web Services
• Using Standard Portal Services (HTMLB,
UME, and Connector Framework)
• Enterprise Portal Client Framework
(EPCF)
• Introduction to Java Web Dynpro and
Portal integration of Java Web Dynpro
applications
• Certification examination for
Development Consultant SAP
NetWeaver 2004s – Portal
NOTES
The course materials are in English. The
course is held in the language of the
country where it takes place.
www.sap.nl/education 209
SAP NetWeaver
Master Data Management

SAPNW NW SRM270 SRM

SAP NetWeaver Overview SRM – MDM Catalog
Managementt

3 days 3 days

NW001 NW MDM101
Technology Solutions Master Data Management
Powered by – Global Data
SAP NetWeaver Synchronisation

8 hours 4 hours

MDM100 MDM300
Master Data Management Master Data Management
Fundamentals 5.5 SP04 5.5 SP04 Print Publishing

5 days 3 days

MDM400
SAP NetWeaver 2004s
Data Modeling in MDM

3 days

MDM100 · Master Data Management 5.5 SP04

DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES 26-jan-09

TARGET GROUP CONTENT • Integration scenarios within SAP

• MDM Solution Consultants • This course will cover the modules of NetWeaver:
• Project team members MDM: - Portal integration
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED - Console - BI integration
• Basic knowledge of SAP NetWeaver - Data Manager (including Taxonomy, - XI integration
Exchange Infrastructure Validations, Workflow, and Matching) - R/3 Communication
GOALS - Import Manager • OCI integration
• This course will prepare you to: - Syndicator • Security and User Management
- to understand the features and options • Master Data Harmonization • Performance
to support a customer implementation • Rich Product Content Management SOFTWARE
employing the current version of MDM RPCM (Overview) • MDM 5.5
5.5 SP04. The focus for this session is • Global Data Synchronization
clearly on the IT scenarios (Overview)

MDM101 · Global Data Synchronisation

DURATION 4 hours PRICE € 350 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP GOALS CONTENT

• MDM Solution Consultants • This course will prepare you to • Overview of the Global Data
• Project team members understand the features and options Synchronisation (GDS) Process
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED and enable you to support a customer • Installation procedure for GDS Console
• MDM100 Master Data Management 5.5 implementation employing Global Data • Architecture of GDS
SP04 Synchronisation (GDS). • Data import to GDS
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED • Data maintenance on GDS
• Knowledge of SAP Exchange • System configuration
Infrastructure (SAP XI) SOFTWARE
• MDM 5.5 SP04

210
SAP NetWeaver
Master Data Management

MDM300 · Master Data Management 5.5 SP04 Print Publishing

DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP GOALS CONTENT

• MDM Solution Consultants who will
implement MDM 5.5 Print Publishing
components
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• Attendees should meet the following
pre-requisites or have equivalent work
experiences: Completed MDM Training
(MDM100 Master Data Management 5.5
SP04, MDM200 Master Data
Management Product Content
Management).
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• Basic knowledge of SAP NetWeaver
Exchange Infrastructure
• Prepare for MDM implementations
where there are print publishing
requirements, with knowledge of the
methodologies, concepts and tools used
in this type of business scenario.
• Review the print and publish related
functions and features within MDM 5.5
SP4, including the Data Manager,
Publisher and Indexer components with
hands-on exercises.
• Interface with DTP (Desktop
Publishing)
• Print Publishing Concepts and general
philosophy
• Impact of Print Publishing on Data
Model
• Paper Publishing Considerations
• MDM Print Publish Process flow
• MDM Print Publish features and
functions
• Architectural Considerations
SOFTWARE
• MDM 5.5

MDM400 · SAP NetWeaver 2004s Data Modeling in MDM

DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP GOALS CONTENT

• Project team members with extensive
knowledge of MDM Console and MDM
Data Manager
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• Sound knowledge of the material
covered in the MDM100 Master Data
Management 5.5 SP04
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• Basic knowledge of SAP NetWeaver
Exchange Infrastructure
• Model MDM Repository tables and
fields
• Model MDM Repository Taxonomies
• Model MDM Hierarchies
• Model MDM Qualifiers
• Model MDM Relationships
• Overview of Data Modeling Issues
• Overview of MDM Repository
Tables/Fields/Taxonomies/Hierarchies/
Qualifiers
• Data Modeling Project Preparation
• Modeling Issues/Solutions
• Data Modeling for Retail
• Data Modeling for SRM & CRM
Products
SOFTWARE
• SAPNW 2004S
• MDM SP04

www.sap.nl/education 211
SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence
Enterprise Reporting, Query & Analysis

BW001 NW BW305 NW BW306 NW ANA10 NW

Business Intelligence BI – Enterprise Reporting, BI – Enterprise Reporting, xApp Analytics using Visual
Overview (SAPBI) Query & Analysis (Part I) Query & Analysis (Part II) Composer

5 hours 5 days 5 days 3 days

SAPNW NW BW365 NW
SAP NetWeaver Overview BI – User Management &
Authorizations

3 days 2 days

NW001 NW
Technology Solutions
Powered by
SAP NetWeaver

8 hours

DBW70R NW
BI – Delta Reporting SAP
NetWeaver 2004s

3 days

CERTIFICATION Solution Academy basic training as Solution Consultant SAP NetWeaver 2004s – Business Intelligence (for new BI consultants)

TBW10 > TBW20 > TBW41 > TBW42 > TBW45 > C_TBW45_04s
ALTERNATIVE COURSES BW310 > BW305 > BW306 > BW330 > BW350 > BW360 > BW365 > BW370 > BW380 > C_TBW45_04s

Voor de meest actuele certificeringinformatie verwijzen wij u graag naar www.sap.com/services/education/certification

BW305 · BI – Enterprise Reporting, Query & Analysis (Part I) 30

DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES 9-feb-09, 16-mrt-09, 4-mei-09

TARGET GROUP • The knowledge you will acquire will • Integrating reports in the SAP
Project team members with basic form the basis for more advanced Enterprise Portal
knowledge of Data Warehousing and SAP courses in the BI curriculum. • Integrating documents in reports
ERP experience CONTENT • Configuring the report-report interface
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED • Architecture and functions of SAP BI • Delivering reports based on MS Excel
Basic knowledge of Data Warehousing analysis tools and/or HTML
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED • Navigating in SAP BI reports • Using predefined reports from the SAP
Experience in an SAP component • Creating query definitions with the BEx Business Content
GOALS Query Designer and the BEx Web SOFTWARE

• This course will give you knowledge
that you can use to create simple and
complex query definitions using the
BEx Query Designer and the BExWeb
Analyzer and tomake them available in
standard layouts.
Analyzer SAP NetWeaver 2004s
• Using key figures, features, hierarchies,
variables, properties, exceptions and
conditions in the query definition
• Using the BEx Information Broadcaster
to distribute reports

212
SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence
Enterprise Reporting, Query & Analysis

BW306 · BI – Enterprise Reporting, Query & Analysis (Part II)

DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES 2-mrt-09

TARGET GROUP
Project team members with in-depth
knowledge of creating queries in BI
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
BW305 (BI – Enterprise Reporting, Query
& Analysis (Part I))
GOALS
This course enables you to create
formatted layouts that differ from the
standard layout. You will learn how to use
the BEx Web Application Designer, the
BEx Report Designer and the BEx
Analyzer.
CONTENT
• Using different Web items to create
sophisticated Web applications.
• Creating formatted reports that are
optimized for presentations and
printing
• Using GIS functions to display data on
clickable maps
• Extended use options and setting
options for the BEx Information
Broadcaster
• Using the extended options based on
MS Excel
• Introduction to modeling analytical
applications with the Visual Composer
SOFTWARE
SAP NetWeaver 2004s

BW365 · BI – User Management & Authorizations

DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES 6-apr-09

TARGET GROUP GOALS • Standard roles and templates for the

Persons responsible for security and
authorizationmanagement in SAP
NetWeaver Business Intelligence
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• ADM940 (SAP Authorization Concept)
• BW310 (BI – Enterprise Data
Warehousing)
• BW305 (BI – Enterprise Reporting,
Query & Analysis (Part I))
Acquire knowledge and skills that are authorization concept
required for developing an authorization • Authorizations for connected source
concept and implementing it in SAP BI. systems
CONTENT • Authorizations for the planning
• Architecture and strategies for a BI environment
authorization concept SOFTWARE
• Security requirements in SAP BI SAP NetWeaver 2004s
• Setting up authorizations for reporting
• Authorizations for administrative tasks
in BI

DBW70R · BI – Delta Reporting SAP NetWeaver 2004s

DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES 23-feb-09, 27-mei-09
TARGET GROUP
Customers and consultants with SAP BW
3.5 experience
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
Course participants should already have
knowledge of the reporting tools and
their functions for SAP BW 3.5.
GOALS
Participants are given an overview of the
new reporting functions that are delivered
with SAP NetWeaver 2004s.
CONTENT functions, extended Excel integration,
• BEx Query Designer (new user design mode)
interface, new analytical functions) • BEx Information Broadcaster (new
• BEx Web Analyzer (new functions) functions)
• BEx Report Designer • Introduction to the Visual Composer
• BEx Web Application Designer (new • New functions for document
user interface, new functions such as integration
command wizard, new Web items, new • New concept for reporting
graphics functions) authorizations
• BEx Analyzer (new navigation SOFTWARE
SAP NetWeaver 2004s

www.sap.nl/education 213
SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence
Enterprise Data Warehousing

BW001 NW BW310 NW BW365 NW

Business Intelligence BI – Enterprise Data BI – User Management &
Overview (SAPBI) Warehousing Authorizations

5 hours 5 days 2 days

SAPNW NW BW380 NW
SAP NetWeaver Overview BI – Analysis Processes &
Data Mining

3 days 2 days

NW001 NW BW330 NW
Technology Solutions BI – Modeling and
Powered by Implementation
SAP NetWeaver

8 hours 5 days

DBW70E NW BW350 NW
BI – Enterprise Data BI – Data Acquistion
Warehousing
SAP NetWeaver 2004s

2 days 5 days

BW360 NW
BI – Performance &
Administration

5 days

CERTIFICATION Solution Academy basic training as Solution Consultant SAP NetWeaver 2004s – Business Intelligence (for new BI consultants)

TBW10 > TBW20 > TBW41 > TBW42 > TBW45 > C_TBW45_04s
ALTERNATIVE COURSES BW310 > BW305 > BW306 > BW330 > BW350 > BW360 > BW365 > BW370 > BW380 > C_TBW45_04s

Voor de meest actuele certificeringinformatie verwijzen wij u graag naar www.sap.com/services/education/certification

DBW70E · BI – Delta Enterprise Data Warehousing SAP NetWeaver 2004s

DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES 2-mrt-09, 2-jun-09

TARGET GROUP CONTENT • New data flow concept

Customers and consultants with • Introduction to enterprise data • Extended functions of process chains
SAP BW 3.5 experience warehousing • Virtual provider and remote access to
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED • Data Warehousing Workbench master and transaction data
Course participants should already have • DataStore objects • Realtime Data Acquisition
knowledge of the Data Warehousing • Extended functions of InfoSets • BI accelerator
functions of SAP BW 3.5 • Remodeling toolbox • Information lifecycle management
GOALS • Business content analyzer and content concept
Participants are given an overview of the browser SOFTWARE
new enterprise data warehousing • BI DataSources SAP NetWeaver 2004s
functions in SAP NetWeaver 2004s • Translating units of measure

214
SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence
Enterprise Data Warehousing
BW310 · BI – Enterprise Data Warehousing
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES 16-feb-09, 23-mrt-09, 11-mei-09
TARGET GROUP
• Project team members with basic
knowledge of Data Warehousing and
SAP ERP experience
• BI system administrators
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
Basic knowledge of Data Warehousing
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• Experience in an SAP component
• Basic knowledge of the Data Dictionary
GOALS
• Participants will gain the detailed SAP BI
knowledge necessary for successful
BW380 · BI Analysis Processes & Data Mining
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES 26-feb-09
TARGET GROUP
Customers and consultants with BI
experience
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• BW305 (BI – Enterprise Reporting,
Query & Analysis (Part I))
• BW310 (BI – Enterprise Data
Warehousing)
BW330 · BI – Modeling and Implementation
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES 9-mrt-09, 25-mei-09
TARGET GROUP
Project team members with knowledge of
Warehouse Management
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
BW310 (BI – Enterprise Data
Warehousing)
GOALS
Participants will learn the procedures
within data modeling and will acquire
additional knowledge about Data
Warehousing with SAP NetWeaver 2004s
implementation and administration systems or additional data sources in BI
within a heterogeneous SAP BI system • Benefits and use of Business Content
landscape. • Introduction to the administration of BI
• The knowledge you will acquire will data targets
form the basis for more advanced • Principles of optimizing query
courses in the BI curriculum. performance (BI accelerator)
CONTENT SOFTWARE
• Architecture of SAP NetWeaver 2004s BI SAP NetWeaver 2004s
• Overview of the most important objects
(InfoObjects, InfoProviders etc.) of BI
and their attributes
• Components of the data flow and
extraction of data from SAP source
GOALS • Framework and methods of BI data
Participants gain detailed knowledge of mining
the concept of BI data mining and the • BI data mining – tools, especially the
data mining tools that are required. Analysis Process Designer (APD)
CONTENT SOFTWARE
• Principles of data mining SAP NetWeaver 2004s
• Data problems
• Architecture of BI data mining
CONTENT Warehousing aspects
• The datamodeling process is described - InfoSets, MultiProviders and Open Hub
using different examples: Service
- Creating a requirements analysis • This course does not discuss operational
- Developing a BI data model solutions or specific technical company
- Modeling data marts scenarios!
- Enhancing/changing the data model, SOFTWARE
remodeling SAP NetWeaver 2004s
- Aspects of an enterprise data warehouse
architecture
- Special modeling and Data
www.sap.nl/education 215
SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence
Enterprise Data Warehousing
BW350 · BI – Data Acquistion
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES 16-mrt-09
TARGET GROUP
Project team members who are
responsible for loading data from different
source systems
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
BW310 (BI – Enterprise Data
Warehousing)
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
Knowledge of the Data Dictionary as well
as at least one SAP component
BW360 · BI – Performance & Administration
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES 30-mrt-09, 8-jun-09
TARGET GROUP
SAP BI (system) administrators who are
responsible for implementing and
maintaining an SAP BI system
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• BW310 (BI – Enterprise Data
Warehousing)
• Data Warehouse experience
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• Data Dictionary experience
• Experience of SAP components
216
GOALS
Acquire knowledge of and skills in
extracting data from SAP source systems
as well as fundamental knowledge of
different interfaces.
CONTENT
• Data flow in BI (data transfer process)
• Transformations
• Delta management
• Enhancing business content
DataSources
• Process of data extraction from SAP
GOALS
Acquire extended knowledge and skills in
the fields of SAP BI administration and
SAP BI performance
CONTENT
• Consolidate knowledge in the field of
administration and performance
• Optimize and monitor query
performance
• Optimize and monitor data import
performance
source systems
• Data staging using different interfaces
(such as XML, DB Connect)
• Realtime Data Acquisition
• Direct access
• Translating units of measure
• Principles of the SAP Exchange
Infrastructure (XI) and Universal Data
Integration (UDI)
SOFTWARE
SAP NetWeaver 2004s
• Define and manage process chains
• BI accelerator and aggregates
• Archiving and near-line storage
• Partitioning
• Transport management
• BI customizing for special subjects
SOFTWARE
SAP NetWeaver 2004s
SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence
Business Planning & Analytical Services

BW001 NW BW305 NW BW310 NW BW380 NW

Business Intelligence BI – Enterprise Reporting, BI – Enterprise Data BI – Analysis Processes &
Overview (SAPBI) Query & Analysis (Part I) Warehousing Data Mining

5 hours 5 days 5 days 2 days

SAPNW NW BW370 NW
SAP NetWeaver Overview BI – Integrated Planning

3 days 5 days

NW001 NW
Technology Solutions
Powered by
SAP NetWeaver

8 hours

DBW70P NW
BI – Delta Planning SAP
NetWeaver 2004s

2 days

CERTIFICATION Solution Academy basic training as Solution Consultant SAP NetWeaver 2004s – Business Intelligence (for new BI consultants)

TBW10 > TBW20 > TBW41 > TBW42 > TBW45 > C_TBW45_04s
ALTERNATIVE COURSES BW310 > BW305 > BW306 > BW330 > BW350 > BW360 > BW365 > BW370 > BW380 > C_TBW45_04s

Voor de meest actuele certificeringinformatie verwijzen wij u graag naar www.sap.com/services/education/certification

DBW70P · BI – Delta Planning SAP NetWeaver 2004s

DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES 26-feb-09, 4-jun-09

TARGET GROUP GOALS • Creating planning functions

Customers and consultants with SAP BW
3.5 experience
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
Course participants should already have
knowledge of the planning tools and their
functions for SAP BW 3.5.
Participants are given an overview of the
new planning functions that are delivered
with SAP NetWeaver 2004s.
CONTENT
• Overview of the new BI integrated
planning
• Setting up a planning query that is
ready for input using the BEx Query
Designer
• Integrating the plan query in different
end user interfaces
SOFTWARE

• Creating a planning model SAP NetWeaver 2004s

www.sap.nl/education 217
SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence
System Administration

BW001 NW BW310 NW BW360 NW

Business Intelligence BI – Enterprise Data BI – Performance &
Overview (SAPBI) Warehousing Administration

5 hours 5 days 5 days

SAPNW NW BW365 NW
SAP NetWeaver Overview BI – User Management &
Authorizations

3 days 2 days

NW001 NW
Technology Solutions
Powered by
SAP NetWeaver

8 hours

DBW70M NW
BI – Upgrading to SAP
NetWeaver 7.0

2 days

CERTIFICATION Solution Academy basic training as Solution Consultant SAP NetWeaver 2004s – Business Intelligence (for new BI consultants)

TBW10 > TBW20 > TBW41 > TBW42 > TBW45 > C_TBW45_04s
ALTERNATIVE COURSES BW310 > BW305 > BW306 > BW330 > BW350 > BW360 > BW365 > BW370 > BW380 > C_TBW45_04s

Voor de meest actuele certificeringinformatie verwijzen wij u graag naar www.sap.com/services/education/certification

Cursusdetailgegevens kunt u vinden via de index op pagina 533

DBW70M · BI - Upgrading to SAP NetWeaver 7.0

DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP CONTENT - New and restricted functionalities

• Customers and BI consultants • Upgrade Basics - Dependencies and specific hints
• Project Team Leaders - Strategic perspective • Migration of Authorizations
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED - Upgrade process and requirements - BI authorization concept
• Course participants should already have • Upgrade Aspects in BI Backend - Migration of authorizations
extensive knowledge of the - Technical prerequisites - Assignment of new authorizations
• SAP BW 3.x environment. - Staging and data flow • Upgrade of BPS to Integrated Planning
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None - DataSources - Differences between BW-BPS and BI-IP
GOALS - Update and transformation rules
This course will prepare you to: - Routines and formulas
• Plan and implement the upgrade from - Differences in the routine concept
an SAP BW 3.x environment to SAP - Real-time data acquisition
NetWeaver 7.0 BI. • Upgrade Aspects in BI Frontend
SOFTWARE - Technical prerequisites
• SAP NetWeaver 7.0 - Migrating queries, workbooks, web
applications and broadcast settings

218
SAP NetWeaver Identity Management

OIM70 NW TZNWIM NW
Online Knowledge Product SAP NetWeaver Identity
SAP NetWeaver Identity Management 7.0
Management 7.0

19 hours 5 days

OIM70 · Online Knowledge Product SAP NetWeaver Identity Management 7.0

DURATION 19 hours PRICE € 350 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP Management 7.0 • SAP NetWeaver Identity Center version

• Technology Consultants, who are
responsible for SAP NetWeaver Identity
Management 7.0
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
To get the most benefit from this manual,
you should have the following knowledge:
• Generic knowledge about databases and
computer systems
• Knowledge about the Java runtime
environment
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• Describe SAP NetWeaver Identity
Management 7.0
• Plan SAP NetWeaver Identity
• Implement and configure SAP
NetWeaver Identity Management 7.0
CONTENT
• SAP NetWeaver Identity Management
7.0 Technology Consultant
• Introduction
• Identity Center
• Virtual Directory Server
• Using the Products in the SAP
Environment
• Summary
SOFTWARE
The following software is required
(provided on the SAP Software
Distribution Center):
7.0
• A Microsoft SQL Server database with
an Identity Center database installed.
(See the SAP NetWeaver Identity Center
database installation guides included in
the software download)
NOTES
• This content is provided by SAP’s
Online Knowledge Products.
Information regarding Online
Knowledge Products and instructions
on how to access the Online Knowledge
Products are available:
http://service.sap.com/okp
• All materials are online

TZNWIM · SAP NetWeaver Identity Management 7.0

DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP • Installation of Identity Center different types of log files generated.
• Consultants • Identity Center architecture, basic SOFTWARE

PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• Basic Knowledge about Identity
Management and LDAP is required
GOALS
After completion of the training, the
participants should be able to:
• Understand SAP NetWeaver Identity
Management
• Configure SAP NetWeaver Identity
Management
CONTENT
• Overview about SAP NetWeaver Identity
Management 7.0 and its components
concepts and principle of operation
• Jobs or sequence of tasks in the Identity
Center
• The trainer will specifically go through
each type of connection task (pass) and
describe their parameters. Passes include
ASCII, LDAP, LDIF, Generic, XML,
DSML, OBDC/JDBC, Shell.
• Connections to different target systems,
such as ABAP- and Java- based SAP
systems and LDAP directory
• Audit Trail information in Identity
Center
• View and explain log files. Look at the
• SAP NetWeaver 7.0
NOTES
• The training is highly interactive,
alternating between explaining new
features, questions and exercises
accompanying each component.
Exercises are used throughout the
training to give the students the hands-
on ability and increase the level of
confidence with the product.
• Course material is available in English
only.

www.sap.nl/education 219
Business Integration Technology
SAP Process Integration and Business Workflow

SAP01 BIT140 NW BIT430 NW

SAP Overview XML Introduction SAP XI Business Process
Management

3 days 2 days 3 days

SAPTEC NW BIT100 NW BIT400 NW BIT450 NW

Fundamentals of SAP NetWeaver Process SAP Exchange SAP Exchange
SAP Web AS Integration – Overview Infrastructure* Infrastructure Development

3 days 3 days 5 days 2 days

SAPNW NW BIT460 NW
SAP NetWeaver Overview * BIT400 is uitwisselbaar SAP Exchange
Infrastructure Mapping
met de cursus TBIT40
2 days
3 days 2 days

BIT402 NW BIT403 NW
Adapters Concepts Part 1 Adapters Concepts
Part 2

6 hours 6 hours

NW001 NW BIT600 NW BIT601 NW BIT603 NW

Technology Solutions SAP Business Workflow – SAP Business Workflow – SAP Business Workflow
Powered by Concepts, Inboxes, Build and Use and Web Scenarios
SAP NetWeaver Reporting and Template
Usage
8 hours 2 days 4 days 2 days

DBITWF NW BIT610 NW BIT611 NW

SAP Business Workflow – SAP Workflow – SAP Workflow –
Voor PI training zie tevens pagina 339 Delta R/3 Enterprise in Programming Advanced Programming
SAP NW 2004s (ABAP OO)

2 days 3 days 1 day

CERTIFICATION Solution Academy basic training as

Development Consultant SAP NetWeaver 2004 – Exchange Infrastructure & Integration Technology (XI 7.0) (for new XI consultants)
(BIT100) > (BIT140) > TBIT40 > BIT402 > BIT403 > TBIT44 > C_TBIT44_70
ALTERNATIVE COURSES (BIT100) > (BIT140) > BIT400 > BIT402 > BIT403 > BIT430 > BIT450 > BIT460 > C_TBIT44_70

Voor de meest actuele certificeringinformatie verwijzen wij u graag naar www.sap.com/services/education/certification

220
Business Integration Technology
SAP Process Integration and Business Workflow
BIT100 · SAP NetWeaver Process Integration – Overview
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES 7-jan-09, 6-mei-09
TARGET GROUP
• Technical project managers
• SAP R/3 Basis consultants
• System architects focusing on technical
integration
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAPTEC (Fundamentals of SAP Web AS)
GOALS
• Experience of SAP integration
technology used in the Internet
Business Framework
• Help when selecting suitable integration
technologies for the different
integration scenarios
• Explanation of general integration
aspects
BIT402 · Adapters Concepts – Part 1
DURATION 6 hours PRICE € 500 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• Development Consultants responsible
for configuration of SAP XI scenarios
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• TBIT40 SAP NetWeaver Exchange
Infrastructure
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• BIT100 SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration – Overview or equivalent
form of knowledge
• BIT140 XML Introduction or equivalent
form of knowledge
• Basic Java programming knowledge
GOALS
• Understand the core concepts of the
adapter engine delivered with SAP
NetWeaver XI.
• Configure the individual XI technical
adapters.
• Implement and troubleshoot basic
scenarios which rely on adapter
technology.
CONTENT
• Areas of use and properties of the
different integration technologies with
regard to closely and loosely linked
Business Framework scenarios
• Relationships between the integration
technologies, XI/ ALE / BAPI, ALE / WF,
ITS / Business Connector, Web
Application Server
• SAP business integration technologies:
ALE, BAPI, EDI, Workflow
• Basis communication technologies:
IDoc, RFC, Connector
• Security aspects in distributed
environments
• Case studies focusing on general
CONTENT
• Adapter overview (“what are adapters
and why do we need them?” – overview
of XI adapters in general – adapter
strategy)
• J2EE adapter engine – architecture +
positioning AE, AF, PCK
• File adapter
• JMS adapter
• JDBC adapter
• Plain HTTP adapter
• IDoc adapter
• RFC adapter
• SOAP adapter
• XI2XI adapter
• Mail adapter (SMTP)
• Overview on other adapters
(marketplace, RNIF, CIDX, third-party
adapters e.g. SEEBURGER and iWay)
• CPA Cache
• Advanced concepts: module processing,
adapter metadata…
AF administration + installation
integration aspects and SAP-specific
integration aspects
SOFTWARE
SAP ERP Central Component 5.0
NOTES
The course merely gives an overview and
there are no exercises for the participants
to carry out in the system. The trainer
will show how the different integration
scenarios are used with live
demonstrations.
SOFTWARE
• XI 7.0
NOTES
• In most countries (for example,
Germany) access to e-learning is
granted when you book the classroom
training course that follows on from the
e-learning course, as stated in the
curriculum. In other words,
participation in the e-learning course is
included in the price of the classroom
training course. In some countries, e-
learning is not included in the price of
classroom training. Please contact your
local training department for more
information.
• If you have studied this e-learning
material in detail, successful
participation in the following classroom
training course is possible in all cases.
• The course material is available in
English only. A training system is not
available from SAP Education for e-
learning
www.sap.nl/education 221
Business Integration Technology
SAP Process Integration and Business Workflow
BIT403 · Adapters Concepts – Part 2
DURATION 6 hours PRICE € 500 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• Development Consultants responsible
for configuration of SAP XI scenarios
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• TBIT40 SAP NetWeaver Exchange
Infrastructure
• BIT402 XI – Adapter Concepts (File,
JDBC, JMS, Mail)
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• BIT100 SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration – Overview or equivalent
form of knowledge
• BIT140 XML Introduction or equivalent
form of knowledge
• Basic Java programming knowledge
GOALS
• Understand the core concepts of the
adapter engine delivered with SAP
NetWeaver XI.
• Configure the individual XI technical
adapters.
• Implement and troubleshoot basic
scenarios which rely on adapter
technology.
BIT611 · SAP Workflow Advanced Programming with ABAP OO
DURATION 1 day PRICE € 590 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• Administrators
• Developers
• Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• BIT601 – SAP Workflow: Definition and
Use of Customer-Specific Workflows
• Knowledge of ABAP-OO
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None
222
CONTENT
• Adapter overview (“what are adapters
and why do we need them?” – overview
of XI adapters in general – adapter
strategy)
• J2EE adapter engine – architecture +
positioning AE, AF, PCK
• File adapter
• JMS adapter
• JDBC adapter
• Plain HTTP adapter
• IDoc adapter
• RFC adapter
• SOAP adapter
• XI2XI adapter
• Mail adapter (SMTP)
• Overview on other adapters
(marketplace, RNIF, CIDX, third-party
adapters e.g. SEEBURGER and iWay)
• CPA Cache
• Advanced concepts: module processing,
adapter metadata…
• AF administration + installation
GOALS
• Participants learn about programming
the workflow interface using ABAP-OO
instead of business objects
CONTENT
• Definition and implementation of
ABAP-OO classes for use in the
workflow
• Definition of attributes
SOFTWARE
• XI 7.0
NOTES
• In most countries (for example,
Germany) access to e-learning is
granted when you book the classroom
training course that follows on from the
e-learning course, as stated in the
curriculum. In other words,
participation in the e-learning course is
included in the price of the classroom
training course. In some countries, e-
learning is not included in the price of
classroom training. Please contact your
local training department for more
information.
• If you have studied this e-learning
material in detail, successful
participation in the following classroom
training course is possible in all cases.
• The course material is available in
English only. A training system is not
available from SAP Education for e-
learning
• Definition of methods and error
handling
• Definition of events
• Triggering ABAP-OO events
• Using ABAP-OO classes in workflow
processes
SOFTWARE
• SAP ERP Central Component 6.0.
Business Integration Technology
SAP Process Integration and Business Workflow
BIT140 · XML Introduction
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
Developers and consultants who are
interested in the principles of XML and
the use of XML at SAP
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAPTEC (Fundamentals of SAP Web AS)
or basic knowledge of SAP
• Basic knowledge of HTML
BIT400 · SAP NW Exchange Infrastructure
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
Consultants and developers who want to
set up scenarios with the SAP Exchange
Infrastructure (SAP XI)
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
SAPTEC (Fundamentals of SAP Web AS)
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
BIT100 (SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration – Overview)
GOALS
• The participants will learn to configure
BIT430 · SAP XI Business Process Management
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
Consultants and developers who want to
set up scenarios with the cross component
business process management (ccBPM) in
the Exchange Infrastructure (SAP XI)
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
BIT400 (SAP Exchange Infrastructure)
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
BIT600 (SAP Workflow – Concepts,
Inboxes, Reporting & Handling Samples)
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• BC400 ABAP Workbench Foundations
GOALS
• Introduction to XML fundamentals and
related topics
• Displaying the use of XML at SAP
CONTENT
• Overview of using XML at SAP
• Introduction to the principles of XML,
scenarios and
• Understand and configure the different
options with which a back-end system
can be connected to the SAP Exchange
Infrastructure (SAP XI).
CONTENT
• Architecture and components of the
SAP Exchange Infrastructure
• Configuration and runtime behavior of
synchronous and asynchronous
scenarios
GOALS
• Participants become familiar with the
possibilities of business process
management
• Participants learn how to handle cross-
component business process
management (ccBPM)
CONTENT
• Overview of BPM
• Step types of ccBPM processes in SAP
Exchange Infrastructure (SAP XI)
• BPEL4WS import and export
DTD and XML schema
• Introduction to the basic principles of
XSL (XSLT and XPath)
• XSLT transformations in SAP Web AS
using XSLT programs
• Outlook: ABAP Web Services
SOFTWARE
SAP Web Application Server 6.20
• Connecting back-end systems using
proxies and adapters (especially file
adapters, HTTP adapter, IDoc adapter
and RFC adapter)
• Overview of mapping and message
mapping
• Overview of cross-component business
process management (ccBPM)
SOFTWARE
SAP Exchange Infrastructure 3.0
• Delivered samples (process pattern)
• Exception handling in ccBPM processes
• Monitoring and error handling in
ccBPM processes
SOFTWARE
SAP Exchange Infrastructure 3.0
NOTES
It is absolutely essential that you have
attended BIT400 (SAP Exchange
Infrastructure) beforehand.
www.sap.nl/education 223
Business Integration Technology
SAP Process Integration and Business Workflow

BIT450 · SAP Exchange Infrastructure Development

DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP GOALS • Server proxies, Web services and WSDL

ABAP or Java developers who want to • Define message interfaces SOFTWARE
develop their own scenarios for the • Proxy generation in ABAP and Java SAP Exchange Infrastructure 3.0
SAP XI • Using generated proxies in Java and NOTES

PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED ABAP It is absolutely essential that you have

• BIT400 (SAP Exchange Infrastructure)
• BC400 (ABAP Workbench Foundations)
• JA100 (Java Start-up Kit) or equivalent
Java basic knowledge
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• BC401 (ABAP Objects) or equivalent
ABAP Objects knowledge
CONTENT attended BIT400 (SAP Exchange
• Developing using the SAP Exchange Infrastructure) beforehand.
Infrastructure (SAP XI)
• Message interfaces and integration
scenarios
• Proxy generation for ABAP and Java
• Using proxy objects in ABAP and Java

BIT460 · SAP Exchange Infrastructure Mapping

DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP GOALS • User-defined functions

Consultants and developers who want to Participants learn the technical options of • Complex mapping tasks
set up mapping with the SAP Exchange defining and using mapping. • Value mapping
Infrastructure (SAP XI) CONTENT SOFTWARE

PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED • Overview of mapping techniques SAP Exchange Infrastructure 3.0

BIT400 (SAP Exchange Infrastructure) • Integrating Java mapping NOTES

PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED • Integrating XSLT mapping It is absolutely essential that you have
JA100 (Java Start-up Kit) • Integrating ABAP mapping attended BIT400 (SAP Exchange
• Standard functions of message mapping Infrastructure) beforehand.

BIT600 · SAP Business Workflow – Concepts, Inboxes, Reporting and Template Usage
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES 2-mrt-09, 18-mei-09

TARGET GROUP • In the course, they also set up an Organizational Management

Project managers, project team members, organizational workflow model, process - Terminology
consultants work items, and evaluate runtime - Structure of organizational units,
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED tables. positions, and jobs
Fundamental experience using SAP CONTENT • Enhancing templates: Configuration
systems • Workflow terminology • Reporting
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED • Use of workflow and workflow SOFTWARE

• SAPTEC (Fundamentals of SAP Web AS) templates SAP R/3 Enterprise

• SAP01 (SAP Overview) • Basic Customizing settings in the SAP NOTES

GOALS
• This course prepares participants to
explain the fundamental terms and
concepts in SAP Business Workflow and
to make the appropriate settings for
workflow processing.
• Participants learn how to find and
activate business processes that are
delivered by SAP (workflow templates).
Business Workflow system The course does not cover how to build
• Inboxes: customer-specific workflows. This course
- Possibleinboxesforworkitems is not an introductory course. The units
- Defining substitutes on reporting, Customizing, and inboxes
- Processing work items are discussed in BIT600 (SAP Business
• Architecture: Workflow – Concepts, Inboxes, Reporting
- Workflow components and Template Usage) only.
- Activating templates
• Determining agents using

224
Business Integration Technology
SAP Process Integration and Business Workflow

BIT601 · SAP Business Workflow – Build and Use

DURATION 4 days PRICE € 2360 STARTING DATES 16-mrt-09, 26-mei-09

TARGET GROUP CONTENT • Triggering events in the system

Administrators, project team members,
consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
BIT600 (SAP Business Workflow –
Concepts, Inboxes, Reporting and
Template Usage)
GOALS
This course will prepare participants to
use workflow tools to define and
implement their own workflows.
• Defining workflows using the Workflow • Deadline monitoring
Builder • Workflow Wizards
• Enhancing business objects with the • Options for ad-hoc processing
Business Object Builder SOFTWARE
• Defining business process steps: task SAP R/3 Enterprise
definition
• Data definition and containers
• Dynamic agent determination at
runtime
• Triggering workflows with events

BIT603 · SAP Business Workflow and Web Scenarios

DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES 23-mrt-09

TARGET GROUP • In the course, participants also build components

• Workflow modelers workflows that use the Wf-XML - WebFlow Service Handler Customizing
• Workflow developers interface to communicate with - Importing WSDL Web service definitions
• Consultants workflows from other SAP or non-SAP - Using Web services as a workflow step
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED systems. SOFTWARE

BIT601 (SAP Business Workflow– Build CONTENT SAP R/3 Enterprise

and Use) • Internet business processes that use the
GOALS Wf-XML interface
• This course will prepare you to use a - Wf-XML structures
workflow with the Internet and - Wf-XMLCustomizing
intranet. - Using Wf-XML as a workflow step
• Participants will learn how SAP Business • Internet business processes that use Web
Workflow services can be called as part services
of a workflow. - WebFlow Service Handler and its

www.sap.nl/education 225
Business Integration Technology
SAP Process Integration and Business Workflow

BIT610 · SAP Workflow – Programming

DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES 25-mrt-09

TARGET GROUP Objects, events, methods, rules, - User type function modules
• System administrators attributes - User function modules
• Developers • In addition, the course enables • Runtime system:
• Consultants participants to monitor the runtime - Setup
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED system and program exits at workflow - Performance
• BIT601 (SAP Business Workflow – Build and step level. - Administration
and Use) CONTENT SOFTWARE

• Knowledge of ABAP • Business Object Builder: defining and SAP R/3 Enterprise
GOALS implementing your own BOR objects NOTES

• This course investigates workflow
enhancements that require customer-
specific programming.
• Participants learn to program workflow
interfaces at the following levels:
• Binding and new containers
• Rule function modules
• Program exist at step and workflow level
• Generating events by programming
- Check function modules
Before you attend this course, you must
already be able to define and test
workflows in the system.

DBITWF · SAP Business Workflow – Delta 4.6c / NW04s

DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES 20-apr-09

TARGET GROUP GOALS • New start options in Transaction SWUS

• Project managers and project employees
in workflow projects
• Workflow developers
• All persons interested in the SAP
NetWeaver functions regarding
workflow processes
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
BIT601 (SAP Workflow — Definition and
Use of Customer-Specific Workflows)
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
Basic knowledge of ABAP Objects
At the end of the course, you will be able • Extended notifications
to understand and apply the new • Features of the universal worklist in SAP
functions of SAP workflow in SAP ERP NetWeaver Portal
CONTENT SOFTWARE
• Use BAdis to improve performance SAP ERP Central Component 6.0
• Use events in the workflow basic data
• Integrate Business Intelligence and SAP
workflow
• Use ABAP classes in the SAP workflow
• Use blocks, correlations, local
workflows, new multiple conditions

226
Business Integration Technology
SAP NetWeaver Process Integration Technology I

SAPNW NW
SAP NetWeaver Overview

3 days

SAPTEC NW BIT640 NW BIT615 NW BIT660 NW

Fundamentals of SAP NetWeaver – SAP SAP Archive Link Data Archiving
SAP Web AS Records Management in Document Management
Detail with SAP Archive Link

3 days 3 days 4 days 3 days

NW001 NW BIT100 NW BIT300 NW BIT670 NW

Technology Solutions SAP NetWeaver Process Application Link Enabling Data Archiving –
Powered by Integration – Overview (ALE) Technology Programming Display
SAP NetWeaver Functions

8 hours 3 days 3 days 2 days

BC415 NW BIT350 NW
Remote Function Calls in ALE Extensions
ABAP

2 days 2 days

BC415 · Remote Function Calls in ABAP

DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP GOALS • Introduction to BAPI (Business

• Developer Course participants are able to use the Application Programming Interface)
• Consultants SAP standard communication interface SOFTWARE

PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED RFC for cross-system program-program • SAP R/3 4.6C

• SAPTEC (Basics of SAP Web AS) communication from the ABAP program. NOTES

• BC400 (ABAP Workbench Foundations) CONTENT The course does not discuss all ALE and
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED • Remote Function Call (RFC) IDoc techniques.
BC414 (Programming Database Changes) communication interface

BIT300 · Application Link Enabling (ALE) Technology

DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP GOALS • Business processes (with a synchronous

• Project team
• Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
Basic knowledge of the SAP R/3 system,
such as that gained from attending
SAPTEC (Principles of SAP Web AS)
• Implementation of SAP ALE business and asynchronous BAPI call) using the
scenarios in a distributed system transfer of travel expenses from the
landscape travel expense management system to
• Understand the possibilities and limits accounting
of ALE • Ensuring ongoing operation
CONTENT SOFTWARE

PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED • Basic principles of ALE and IDocs SAP ERP Central Component 5.0
BIT100 (SAP NetWeaver Process • Master data distribution using the
Integration – Overview) material master as an example
• EDI using an order as an example

www.sap.nl/education 227
Business Integration Technology
SAP NetWeaver Process Integration Technology I

BIT350 · ALE Enhancements

DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED CONTENT

• ABAP developers • BIT300 (Application Link Enabling • Enhancing messages

• Consultants (ALE) Technology) - Outbox
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED GOALS - IDoctype
• ABAP knowledge Enhancing SAP ALE business scenarios in - Inbox
• BC414 (Programming Database a distributed system landscape SOFTWARE
Changes) SAP R/3 4.6C
• BC425 (Enhancements and
Modifications)

BIT615 · SAP Archive Link Document Management with SAP Archive Link
DURATION 4 days PRICE € 2360 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP external archiving system and linking • Print lists

• System administrators
• Consultants
• Project team members
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
SAPTEC (Fundamentals of SAP Web AS)
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
them using documents from SAP
solutions.
• Participants learn how the interfaces are
integrated into the solutions and how
Customizing settings are made.
CONTENT
• Technology and administration
• Linking external clients using protocol
maintenance
• Administration and monitoring
• The “Document Finder” tool
SOFTWARE

BIT600 (SAP BusinessWorkflow – • Introduction to and overview of SAP SAP R/3 Enterprise
Concepts, Inboxes, Reporting and ArchiveLink NOTES
Template Usage) • Archiving scenarios The course does not cover data archiving.
GOALS • Workflow To acquire data archiving knowledge and
• This course gives participants an • Barcode skills, please attend course BIT660 (Data
overview of archiving documents in an • Outgoing documents Archiving).

BIT640 · SAP NetWeaver – SAP Records Management in Detail

DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP
• Customers who use records
management
• Project managers and consultants who
manage records with Records
Management or who use process
management functions in Case
Management
• Basic knowledge of ABAP and ABAP Customizing, creating and modifying
Objects content models and record models
GOALS • Project enhancements
Participants will learn how to use, - Enhancements with SAP Business
configure, and administer SAP Records Workflow and ArchiveLink
Management. - Optional enhancements using business
CONTENT objects, BAPIs, and BAdIs
• Overview of SAP Records Management SOFTWARE

PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
Fundamental experience using SAP
systems
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• Experience with document
management at SAP
• Experience with ArchiveLink
• Experience with SAP Business Workflow
and the Business Object Repository
- SAP Records Management and Case
Management components, service
provider framework architecture,
functions, availability, SAP Records
Management release strategy, SAP Case
Management and integrated
documentmanagement functions
• Configuration
- Basic settings, registry maintenance,
SAP R/3 Enterprise
NOTES
The course covers the basics of records
management and case management.
Applications that use records
management functions (such as SAP for
Public Sector) provide further training
courses targeting that specific application.

228
Business Integration Technology
SAP NetWeaver Process Integration Technology I

BIT660 · Data Archiving

DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES 6-apr-09

TARGET GROUP archiving concept • Using third-party storage media

• Project managers
• Project team members
• System administrators
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAPTEC (Fundamentals of SAP Web AS)
- Plan and implement a data archiving • Accessing archived data
project • Archive information system
CONTENT • Document Relationship Browser
What is data archiving and when is it • Setting up an archiving project
necessary? SOFTWARE

GOALS • The archiving process SAP ERP Central Component 6.0

• Data archiving is used to reduce
database tables within your SAP
solution.
• This course will prepare you to:
- Explain and demonstrate the data
• The archiving object
• Customizing of archiving objects
• Determining the data to be archived
• Scheduling and administering archiving
sessions
NOTES
The examples in the course are based on
frequently used archiving objects.

BIT670 · ADK – Retrieval Programming

DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP
Project team members who have to
implement customer-specific display
solutions
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• BIT660 (Data Archiving)
• Good ABAP knowledge
GOALS
At the end of the course, you will be
able to:
• Describe the concept of the archiving
object
• Develop a new archiving object
• Enhance an existing archiving object
CONTENT
• Principles of data archiving
• ADK development tools
• Logic of archiving programs
• Customer-specific sequential and index-
based read programs
• Access to individual documents in the
Archive Information System
• Customer-specific field catalogs in the
Archive Information System
• Business views in the Archive
Information System
• Displaying stored original documents in
the Archive Information System
SOFTWARE
SAP R/3 Enterprise

www.sap.nl/education 229
Business Integration Technology
SAP NetWeaver Process Integration Technology II

SAPTEC NW BIT100 NW BIT526 NW BC415 NW

Fundamentals of SAP NetWeaver Process Java Connector Remote Function Calls in
SAP Web AS Integration – Overview Programming ABAP

3 days 3 days 5 days 2 days

SAPNW NW BIT528 NW BC416 NW

SAP NetWeaver Overview SAP .NET Connector Web Services in ABAP
Programming

3 days 5 days 2 days

NW001 NW BC417 NW
Technology Solutions BAPI Development for
Powered by Accessing SAP
SAP NetWeaver

8 hours 3 days

BC420 NW
Data Transfer

5 days

BIT140 NW BIT530 NW BIT531 NW

XML Introduction SAP Business Connector SAP Business Connector
Introduction Integration

2 days 2 days 3 days

BIT526 · Java Connector Programming

DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP (BAPIs), other RFC-enabled Function SOFTWARE

Experienced Java developers who want to
use BAPIs and/or IDocs to build Internet,
intranet or desktop applications that
communicate with SAP R/3 and other
SAP components
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
At least one year of practical experience
with Java programming
GOALS
• Participants learn how to build
applications and components with Java
that communicate with SAP R/3 and
other SAP components.
• This can be achieved using Business
Application Programming Interfaces
Modules (RFMs), and ALE Intermediate
Documents (IDocs).
• Both “inbound” and “outbound” calls
are covered in this course.
CONTENT
• Integration with SAP
• SAP R/3 architecture
• Overview of Remote Function Call
(RFC)
• RFC clients and servers, sRFC, tRFC,
qRFC
• Business Object Repository and BAPIs
• ALE Intermediate Documents (IDocs)
• SAP Java Middleware
• Debugging and troubleshooting
SAP R/3 4.6C
NOTES
No prior SAP knowledge is required. At
least one year of practical experience with
Java programming is essential. Attending
this course without this experience makes
no sense. This is a hands-on course with
many exercises. It is aimed at developers
and is not a management overview. The
course materials are available in English
only.

230
Business Integration Technology
SAP NetWeaver Process Integration Technology II

BIT528 · SAP .NET Connector Programming

DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP Programming Interfaces), RFMs (RFC- • IDoc clients

Developers who want to use BAPIs and/or enabled function modules), and IDocs • RFC server, tRFC server, and IDoc tRFC
IDocs to build Internet, intranet or (ALE Intermediate Documents) server
desktop applications that communicate CONTENT • Solution deployment
with other SAP components • Introduction to SAP data interfaces SOFTWARE

PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED • Using Visual Studio.NET SAP .Net Connector 2.0

Experience in any object-oriented
programming language
GOALS
• Building applications and components
in .NET that communicate with SAP
components
• Using BAPIs (Business Application
• Creating and using proxies
• SAP client exceptions
• SAP client debugging
• Parameters
• Connector classes in detail
• tRFC and qRFC clients
• Asynchronous RFC programming
NOTES
Both “inbound” and “outbound” calls are
covered in this course. No prior SAP
knowledge is required. The course
materials are available in English only.

BIT530 · SAP Business Connector Introduction

DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP Language (XML) • Install and administer SAP BC, and
• Technical project managers PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED configure various business scenarios
• Basis and cross-application consultants • BIT100 (SAP NetWeaver Process CONTENT

• Consultants from Internet Business
Framework implementation partners
• System architecture managers who
focus on integration technology
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAPTEC (Fundamentals of SAP Web AS)
• Basic knowledge of Internet technology
• Knowledge of Extensible Markup
Integration – Overview)
• Basic knowledge of the HTTP protocol
• Basic knowledge of ALE technology
(IDocs)
GOALS
This course will prepare you to:
• Explain the architecture and functions
of SAP Business Connector (SAP BC)
• SAP BC architecture and installation
• Communication between SAP BC and
SAP components
• SAP BC Developer as the development
environment
• SAP Business Connector administration
SOFTWARE
• SAP Business Connector 4.7

BIT531 · SAP Business Connector Integration

DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP • Develop services with SAP BC • Developing programmed services
• Project team members who develop e- Developer (Integrator) • Using transports and “guaranteed
commerce applications • Process inbound and outbound delivery”
• SAP R/3 Basis consultants messages from and to partner systems SOFTWARE

• Technical e-commerce consultants • Develop services using Java • SAP Business Connector 4.7
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED CONTENT NOTES

• BIT530 (SAP Business Connector
Introduction)
• Knowledge of Internet technologies
GOALS
This course will prepare you to:
• SAP BC Developer (Integrator)
• Inbound processing from partner
systems
• Outbound processing to partner
systems
The course materials are in English.
Knowledge of Java is not needed, although
Java is sometimes used in the course
content for illustration and
demonstration purposes.

www.sap.nl/education 231
Business Integration Technology
SAP NetWeaver Process Integration Technology II

BC416 · Web Services in ABAP

DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES 27-apr-09

TARGET GROUP • You know how to use ABAP Web • Introduction to the Internet Control
• Developer services Framework (ICF)
• Project managers • You learn how to create ABAP Web • Web services for SAP Web AS 6.40
• Project team members services - SAP Web AS as a Web service server
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED CONTENT - SAPWeb AS as aWeb service client
• SAPTEC (Basics of SAP Web AS) • SAP integration technology - XI and Web services
• BC400 (ABAP Workbench Foundations) - Components of the SAP Web SOFTWARE

PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED Application Server • SAP NetWeaver 2004

• Basic knowledge of Internet technology - Evolution of the SAP Web Application NOTES

• BC401 (ABAP Objects) Server When revising courses, we reserve the

GOALS • Foundations of RFC, HTTP, XML, SOAP, right to usemore up-to-date software
• You can describe the SAP integration WSDL, UDDI and business standards than specified.
technology (@SAP)

BC417 · BAPI Development for Accessing SAP

DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP GOALS • Enhancements and modifications

Developer Project team members • Creating, maintaining and using BAPIs • BAPIs and ALE
Consultants • Localizing and creating business objects • Mass data transfer
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED • Enhancing SAP-specific BAPIs SOFTWARE

• SAPTEC (Basics of SAP Web AS) • External BAPI calls SAP R/3 4.6C
• BC400 (ABAP Workbench Foundations) CONTENT NOTES

• ABAP programming experience • BAPI fundamentals When revising courses, we reserve the
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED • Creating RFC function modules right to use more up-to-date software
• BC430 (ABAP Dictionary) • Business objects than specified.
• BC414 (Programming Database • Database updates
Changes) • BAPI calls

BC420 · Data Transfer

DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP Workbench (LSMW) to convert data to - Direct Input
• Developer the required SAP format - DatatransferwithBAPIs
• Consultants • Use the Data Transfer Workbench - Fundamentals of the IDoc interface
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED (DXWB) • Data Transfer Workbench
• SAPTEC (Basics of SAP Web AS) • Process batch input sessions • Legacy System Migration Workbench
• BC400 (ABAP Workbench Foundations) • Create your own data transfer programs • Batch Input Monitor
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED using batch input and call transaction • Transaction Recorder
• SAP R/3 experience • Aspects of background processing • Data transfer in background processing
GOALS CONTENT SOFTWARE

• Learn the available transfer methods • Overview of the possible transfer SAP R/3 Enterprise
• Correct transfer of legacy data to the methods NOTES
SAP system • Data analysis and formatting This courses teaches you the usual data
• Perform the data transfer with the • Sequential and local files transfer methods from a technical
transfer programs and BAPIs supplied • Transfer techniques viewpoint.
by SAP - BatchInput
• Use the Legacy System Migration - Call transaction
232
SAP Programming
SAP NetWeaver Programming Core

SAPNW NW BC401 NW BC402 NW

SAP NetWeaver Overview ABAP Objects Advanced ABAP

3 days 5 days 5 days

NW001 NW DNW7AW NW BC405 NW

Technology Solutions Delta ABAP Workbench ABAP Reporting
Powered by SAP R/3 4.6C to
SAP NetWeaver SAP NetWeaver 7.0

8 hours 5 days 5 days

SAPTEC NW BC400 NW BC410 NW BC412 NW

Fundamentals of ABAP Workbench Programming User Dialogs Dialog Programming using
SAP Web AS Foundations EnjoySAP Controls

3 days 5 days 3 days 5 days

MBC40 NW BC425 NW BC427 NW

Managing ABAP Enhancements and Enhancement framework
Development Projects Modification

2 days 3 days 2 days

CA611 NW BC430 NW BC490 NW

eCATT and ABAP Dictionary ABAP Performance Tuning
Test Workbench

3 days 2 days 3 days

BC407 NW BC414 NW BC417 NW

Experience in Reporting with the InfoSet Pogramming Database BAPI Development for
any programming Query and QuickViewer Changes Accessing SAP
language

2 days 2 days 3 days

ONW04S BC415 NW
Online Knowledge Product Remote Function Calls in BC460 NW
SAP NetWeaver 2004S ABAP
SAPscript Forms Design
and Text Management
230 hours 2 days

3 days
BC416 NW
Web Services in ABAP BC470 NW
Form Printing using SAP
Smart Forms
2 days

2 days
BC420 NW
Data Transfer BC480 NW BC481 NW
PDF-Based Print Forms SAP Interactive Forms bij
with the Interactive Forms Adobe (SIFbA) in the ABAP
5 days Solution Environment
3 days 2 days

CERTIFICATION Solution Academy basic training as Development Consultant SAP NetWeaver 2004 – Web Application Development Focus ABAP

(for new ABAP consultants) TAW10 > TAW12 > C_TAW12_04

ALTERNATIVE COURSES SAPTEC > BC400 > BC401 > BC402 > BC405 > BC410 > BC414 > BC425 > BC430 > SM001 > C_TAW12_04

Voor de meest actuele certificeringinformatie verwijzen wij u graag naar www.sap.com/services/education/certification

www.sap.nl/education 233
SAP Programming
SAP NetWeaver Programming Core
CA611 · eCATT and Test Workbench
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
This course is aimed at all employees who
are involved in creating or organizing test
cases.
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
SAPTEC Fundamentals of SAP Web AS or
relevant experience in using an SAP
system
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• General software testing experience
• General programming knowledge
(such as BC400 – ABAP Workbench
Fundamentals)
MBC40 · Managing ABAP Development Projects
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1130 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• IT managers
• Development managers
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
SAPTEC Fundamentals of SAP Web AS
GOALS
This course will enable you to explain the
development process using the ASAP
Roadmap and describe the tasks necessary
within an ABAP development project,
including the critical success factors.
CONTENT
• Change levels
• Customizing
• Personalizing
• Modifications
234
GOALS
• Create automated test scripts
• Create executable data-controlled test
cases
• Include test cases in test projects that
you manage with the Test Workbench
(status tracking and issue management)
• Migrate test cases from CATT
CONTENT
• Introduction to automated testing of
SAP systems
• Set up the system landscape for eCATT
• eCATT environment (scripts and script
language)
• Test applications (what can I test
and how?)
• Customer exits and user exits
• Customer development
• Roles in the project team
• Standards
• Documentation
• Software logistics and system
environment
• Change requests, Workbench Organizer
• Originals and copies
• Process and technical design
• Using the ABAP Workbench in
development projects
• Data model and ABAP Dictionary
• Transactional processing
• Reporting
• Quality assurance, maintenance
• Develop executable test cases
• Version eCATT scripts
• Migrate CATT to eCATT
• Test Workbench overview
SOFTWARE
SAP NW 2004S
NOTES
• This training is also suitable for
participants using SAP Web Application
Server 6.20.
• The content of course CA611 is the
same as the PDECAT workshop.
SOFTWARE
R/3 4.6C
NOTES
• This course is designed for IT managers
who are responsible for implementing
developments using the ABAP
Workbench.
• We recommend that you attend this
course to prepare for your project kick-
off meeting.
• The objective of this course is to give a
complete overview of the development
process, and not to train ABAP
programmers.
SAP Programming
SAP NetWeaver Programming Core
BC400 · ABAP Workbench Foundations
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES 9-feb-09, 30-mrt-09, 25-mei-09
TARGET GROUP
Developers, project managers, consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• Programming knowledge
• SAPTEC (Basics of SAP Web AS)
GOALS
• Learn the fundamental concepts of the
ABAP programming language
• Efficiently use the ABAP Workbench
tools
• Create simple application programs
with user dialogs (selection screen, list
and screen) and database dialogs
(reading from the database)
CONTENT
• Create ABAP programs and the most
important Repository objects using
appropriate ABAP Workbench tools
• Navigate in the Workbench and use the
BC401 · ABAP Objects
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES 16-feb-09, 20-apr-09
TARGET GROUP
• Developer
• Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• Programming experience
• SAPTEC (Basics of SAP Web AS)
• BC400 (ABAP Workbench Foundations)
GOALS
• Determine the concepts of object-
oriented programming
• Develop business applications with
ABAP Objects
• Good understanding of object-oriented
programming using ABAP Objects as an
example
syntax help
• Process source text with the ABAP
Editor
• Test programs using the Debugger
• Define elementary and structured data
objects
• Overview of important ABAP
statements
• Use internal tables (introduction)
• Use modularization techniques local in
the program
• Database dialogs: information about
database tables in the ABAP Dictionary,
read database tables
• User dialogs: list, selection screen,
screens
• Overview of ABAP Web Dynpro (from
SAP NetWeaver Application Server 7.0)
• Use function groups and function
ONTENT
• Analyze and design classes (UML)
• Classes, instances, references
• Inheritance, interfaces, polymorphism
• Events
• Special object-oriented techniques
• Global classes/interfaces (Class Builder)
• Class-based exception concept
SOFTWARE
SAP NetWeaver Application Server 7.0
modules, classes and methods, BAPIs
• Project-oriented development using the
Workbench Organizer
• Overview of the different options for
adapting software
SOFTWARE
SAP NetWeaver Application Server 7.0
NOTES
The course is also suitable for participants
who are using a release older than the one
specified (at least SAP R/3 4.6). All ABAP
programming courses require that you
understand the contents of this basic
course.
NOTES
This course is aimed exclusively at
participants without any knowledge of
object-oriented programming. You
should attend both BC400 (ABAP
Workbench Foundations) and BC401
(ABAP Objects) to gain in-depth
understanding of the ABAP Workbench as
well as the ABAP programming language.
(ABAP consists of procedural and object-
oriented parts. This is also reflected in
these courses.) The course is also suitable
for participants who are using a release
older than the one specified (at least
SAP R/3 4.6).
www.sap.nl/education 235
SAP Programming
SAP NetWeaver Programming Core

BC402 · Advanced ABAP

DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP CONTENT NOTES

• Developer • ABAP runtime environment The topic of the performance of ABAP

• Project team members
• Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAPTEC (Basics of SAP Web AS)
• BC400 (ABAP Workbench Foundations)
• BC401 (ABAP Objects)
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• ABAP (Objects) programming skills
GOALS
• In-depth knowledge of the ABAP
programming language to be able to
write more robust programs
• The ability to assess ABAP
programming techniques according to
performance aspects and develop high-
performance programs
• ABAP types and data objects
• Unicode
• Analysis tools for programs
• Work with internal tables
• Program modularization with function
modules
• Performance of complex Open SQL
statements
• Dynamic programming with field
symbols and references
• Runtime type information, runtime
type creation
• Program calls and memory
management
• Shared objects
SOFTWARE
programs is also subject of the BC490
(ABAP Performance Tuning) course.
BC490 focuses on analyzing and
eliminating existing performance
problems, whereas BC402 is concerned
with avoiding performance problems even
during the design and implementation of
a program. The course is also suitable for
participants who are using a release older
than the one specified (at least SAP R/3
4.6). The topics ‘Shared Objects’ and
‘Runtime Type Creation’ are only relevant
from SAP Web Application Server 6.40.

• Acquire the necessary knowledge to SAP NetWeaver Application Server 7.0

develop dynamic ABAP programs

BC405 · Programming ABAP Reports

DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES 23-mrt-09

TARGET GROUP • You can use logical databases to obtain SOFTWARE

• Developer data from the database and even SAP Web Application Server 6.40
• Project team members program complex database queries NOTES

• Consultants yourself. If required by all participants, the object

PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAPTEC (Basics of SAP Web AS)
• BC400 (ABAP Workbench Foundations)
• Practical ABAP programming
experience
GOALS
• You will learn how to use the different
techniques for list processing.
• You can design and implement simple
basic lists.
• You can implement complex data tasks
using the SAP List Viewer (ALV).
CONTENT model of the SAP List Viewer (ALV) is
• Obtain data: discussed in the course, which was
- Selection screen introduced with SAP Web Application
- Logical databases Server 6.40. If not, the ALV Grid Control
- OpenSQL version is used, which was introduced
• ALV programming: with SAP R/3 4.6B and can also be used in
- using the ALV to display tables the latest SAP software. The version that is
- Trigger ALV basic functions from the not used can be discussed briefly on
application request.
- Layout adjustments
- Use display variants
- Process user actions (double-click, press
pushbuttons and so on)

236
SAP Programming
SAP NetWeaver Programming Core
BC407 · Reporting with the InfoSet Query and QuickViewer
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES 12-mrt-09
TARGET GROUP
• Query developers
• Project team members
• Query administrators
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• Fundamental knowledge of a
programming language
• SAP user experience
GOALS
• This course enables you to create simple
and complex data analyses using the
QuickViewer, InfoSet Query and SAP
BC410 · Programming User Dialogs
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES 6-apr-09
TARGET GROUP
• Developer
• Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAPTEC (Basics of SAP Web AS)
• BC400 (ABAP Workbench Foundations)
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• BC430 (ABAP Dictionary)
• ABAP programming experience
GOALS
In this course you will learn to develop
screen-based user dialogs.
BC412 · Dialog Programming using EnjoySAP Controls
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• Developer
• Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAPTEC (Basics of SAP Web AS)
• BC400 (ABAP Workbench Foundations)
• BC410 (Developing User Dialogs)
• Knowledge in object-oriented
programming (such as ABAP Objects)
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• BC401 (ABAP Objects)
GOALS
This course explains techniques for
creating user dialogs that are maintained
using the EnjoySAP Controls from ABAP
programs.
Query tools.
• You also learn to set up the
administrative Query environment and
to manage it.
CONTENT
• QuickViewer
• InfoSet Query
- Lists
- User Administration
• SAP Query
- Lists
- User Administration
CONTENT
• Principles and ergonomics of user
dialogs
• User interface
- Menu Painter (tool)
- Menu bar
- Application Toolbar
- Options
• Screen objects – attributes
implementation and processing:
- Screen Painter (tool)
- Text fields, frames, status icons,
input/output fields, dropdown list
boxes, pushbuttons, checkboxes,
CONTENT
• Function and use of the Control
Framework
• Integrate and call controls
• Data transport between ABAP programs
and controls
• Change control attributes
• React to actions in the control
• Context menus
• Drag and drop functionality
• Combination of EnjoySAP Controls
with other ABAP dialog forms
• Function scope and use of selected
EnjoySAP Controls: HTML control,
picture control, text edit control, ALV
grid control, tree control
• Necessary ABAP foundations to create
the InfoSet
• InfoSets
• Transportation
SOFTWARE
SAP R/3 4.6C
NOTES
When revising courses, we reserve the
right to usemore up-to-date software
than specified in the course.
radio buttons, subscreens, tabstrips,
table controls
• Context menus
• List processing in dialog programming
SOFTWARE
SAP R/3 4.6C
NOTES
When revising courses, we reserve the
right to usemore up-to-date software
than specified. The course is also suitable
for participants who are using a release
older than the one specified (at least SAP
R/3 4.6).
SOFTWARE
SAP R/3 4.6C
NOTES
This courses teaches you to control the
EnjoySAP Controls from ABAP programs
(using the classes delivered in the standard
system). The ABAP Objects syntax
elements that are necessary for this are
also part of the course contents. The
following are not part of the course:
object-oriented modeling, general object-
oriented programming and the control of
external controls.
www.sap.nl/education 237
SAP Programming
SAP NetWeaver Programming Core
BC414 · Programming Database Updates
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
Developer Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
ABAP programming experience
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• BC410 (Developing User Dialogs)
GOALS
The courses explains techniques for
programming change transactions in the
SAP NetWeaver Application Server.
BC425 · Enhancements and Modification
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• Project managers
• Developer
• Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAPTEC Fundamentals of SAP Web AS
• BC400 ABAP Workbench Foundations
• BC401 ABAP Objects
GOALS
• Display the options for making
customer-specific adjustments to the
SAP standard system
• Searching for and using enhancements
• Correct implementation of
modifications
BC427 · Enhancement framework
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• Developers and consultants who want
to use the Enhancement Framework to
enhance SAP software
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• BC400 ABAP Workbench Foundations
• BC401 ABAP Objects
• BC425 Enhancements and
Modifications
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
238
CONTENT
• Open SQL statements fromABAP for
changing the contents of database tables
• The LUW concept
• Use of the SAP locking concept
• Database changes from dialog programs
using suitable techniques: inline
updates, synchronous, asynchronous
and local updates in V1 and V2 mode
• Implementation of complex
transactions
CONTENT
• Overview of the options for making
customer-specific adjustments to the
SAP standard system
• Personalization (transaction variants)
• Enhancements to:
- Elements of the ABAP Dictionary
- SAP programs
- SAP screen menus
- SAP screens
• Enhancement techniques:
- Enhancements to elements of the ABAP
Dictionary
- Enhancements via customer exits
- Business Transaction Events (BTEs)
- Business Add Ins (BAdIs)
GOALS
• Enhance SAP software with the
Enhancement Framework
SOFTWARE
• SAP NetWeaver 7.0
CONTENT
• Enhancements in the ABAP Dictionary
• Enhancement Points
• Enhancement Sections
• New BAdIs
SOFTWARE
SAP R/3 4.6C
NOTES
Participants in this course should be able
to use the ABAP Workbench. Knowledge
of ABAP dialog programming is very
useful. When revising courses, we reserve
the right to usemore up-to-date software
than specified in the course. The course is
also suitable for participantswho are using
a release older than the one specified (at
least SAP R/3 4.6).
• Modifications:
- Procedure
- Utilities (Modification Assistant,
Modification Browser)
- Modification adjustment
• SAP Note Assistant (tool for SAP Note
implementation)
SOFTWARE
WEB AS 6.20
NOTES
• When revising courses, we reserve the
right to use more up-to-date software
than specified.
• The course is mainly suitable for
participants using SAP R/3 4.6.
• Switch Framework
NOTES
• Please note that the Enhancement
Framework is available only as of SAP
NetWeaver 7.0
SAP Programming
SAP NetWeaver Programming Core
BC430 · ABAP Dictionary
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• Dictionary administrators
• Developer
• Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAPTEC (Basics of SAP Web AS)
• BC400 (ABAP Workbench Foundations)
GOALS
The course discusses the role of theABAP
Dictionary in the SAP system and its scope
of functions.
BC460 · SAPscript: Forms Design and Text Management
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• Project team members
• Developer
• Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
BC400 (ABAP Workbench Foundations)
GOALS
• Learn the basic elements of SAPscript
and how its components interact
• Create and maintain forms
• Maintain and execute print programs
CONTENT
• Overview of SAPscript: Significance of
SAPscript in the SAP system,
BC470 · Form Printing using SAP Smart Forms
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• Project team members
• Developers
• Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAPTEC (Basics of SAP Web AS)
• BC400 (ABAP Workbench Foundations)
• ABAP programming experience
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• Relevant application courses
GOALS
Learn SAP Smart Forms:
- Create and maintain forms
- Application programs
- Smart Styles
CONTENT
• Terms and functions of the
ABAPDictionary
• Type definitions in the ABAP Dictionary
• Tables incl. includes and appends
• Performance aspects when accessing
tables:
- Buffering
- Indexes
• Relationships between tables:
- Define and manage foreign keys
- Texttables
components, forms and print programs,
processing flow
• Form elements: windows and pages,
paragraph formats, character formats
• Text editor: text layout in the PC editor
and in the line editor
• Icons and control commands
• Print program: functions of the print
program and the form processor,
important function modules,
outputting text elements, processing
header lines, functions of the form
processor
• Formatting text modules using styles
CONTENT
• Overview of SAP Smart Forms
• General concepts of form printing:
windows and pages, main and
secondary windows, text and data
• Create and adapt an SAP Smart Form:
Form Builder, Form Painter, form logic,
node types (texts, graphics, addresses
and so on)
• Variables: form interface, global data
• Tables: Table Painter, dynamic tables,
templates, headers and footers
• Smart Styles: Style Builder, paragraph
and character formats
• Changing the form and application
program
• Dependencies between objects in the
ABAP Dictionary
• Views and append views
• Search help and append search help
SOFTWARE
SAP Web Application Server 6.20
NOTES
Basic knowledge of using and the scope of
functions of the ABAP Workbench are
essential. This course is also suitable for
participants using SAP R/3 4.6. When
revising courses, we reserve the right to
usemore up-to-date software than specified.
• Modifications: procedure for changing
forms and print programs, transporting
SAPscript objects
• SAPscript font maintenance
• Overview of SAP Smart Forms
SOFTWARE
SAP R/3 4.6C
NOTES
This course discusses the technological
aspects of SAPscript. It does not give you
any application-specific knowledge. This
course is also suitable for participants
using SAP R/3 4.6.
SOFTWARE
SAP R/3 Enterprise
NOTES
This course is also suitable for participants
using SAP R/3 4 6C. Refer you the
documentation for your application(s) to
see whether SAP Smart Forms or
SAPscript is used. SAP Note 430621 offers
initial information. Also note that from
SAP ERP 2005, PDF-based forms are
delivered in addition to the existing forms
fromboth older methods or instead of
them. This course discusses the
technological aspects of Smart Forms. It
does not give you any application-specific
knowledge.
www.sap.nl/education 239
SAP Programming
SAP NetWeaver Programming Core
BC480 · PDF-Based Print Forms
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• Developers
• Project team members
• Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAPTEC (Basics of SAP Web AS)
• BC400 (ABAP Workbench Foundations)
• Programming experience with ABAP
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• Knowledge of SAPscript and/or Smart
Forms
BC481 · SAP Interactive Forms bij Adobe (SIFbA) in the ABAP Environment
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• Team Leaders
• Team members
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• BC48 PDF-Based Print Forms
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED
• NET310 Fundamentals of ABAP Web
Dynpro
• BC400 ABAP Workbench Foundations
GOALS
• Understand the architecture and use
cases of the SIFbA
240
GOALS NOTES
• Create forms for print scenarios with From SAP NetWeaver 2004 (SAP Web
Interactive Forms based on Adobe Application Server 6.40), a new
software technology is available for creating and
• Integration in ABAP programs displaying forms in addition to SAPscript
CONTENT and Smart Forms: PDF-based forms using
• Overview: Architecture Adobe technology. Standard forms are
• Interface delivered from SAP ERP 2005. (Delivered
• Context forms in SAP ERP 2004 may only be
• Designer (the graphical layout tool) implemented and used in customer
• Form structure systems following consultation with SAP
• Static elements and with support from an SAP
• Dynamic elements and tables consultant. See also SAP Note 735050.)
• Scripting Course BC480 provides details about print
• Integration in ABAP programs scenarios with these forms. (Interactive
SOFTWARE applications or integration in Web
SAP Web Application Server 6.40 scenarios are not discussed in the course,
however.) Course BC480 discusses the
technological aspects of the PDF-based
forms; it does not give you any
application-specific knowledge.
• Use the SIFbA in Web Dynpro ABAP • SIFbA within ABAP: PDF print forms
• Use the SIFbA in the ABAP and complex layouts
environment • SIFbA within Web Dynpro ABAP: simple
SOFTWARE applications and RFC calls
• SAP ERP Central Component 6.0 • Offline scenarios: web services, email,
• SAP NetWeaver 7.0 XML
CONTENT • Advanced features of the SIFbA within
• Overview capabilities of SIFbA ABAP: best practices, digital signatures,
• Architecture in the ABAP and in the security, scripting, APIs
J2EE environments
• Existing business applications featuring
SIFbA
SAP Programming
SAP NetWeaver Programming Core
BC490 · ABAP Performance Tuning
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• Developers
• Technical consultants
• Persons responsible for performance
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAPTEC Basics of SAP Web AS
• BC400 ABAP Workbench Foundations
• BC430 ABAP Dictionary
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• Learn the methods for systematic
analysis of ABAP performance including
individual object analyses and SAP
system analyses
• Learn to optimize database accesses and
ABAP processing
CONTENT
• Individual object analysis: transaction
step analysis, SQL performance analysis,
ABAP runtime analysis, ABAP
Debugger, optimizing database accesses
• Unsuitable access path: introduction to
DNW7AW · Delta ABAP R/3 4.6C > SAP NW 7.0
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• Developers
• Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• Development experience with ABAP in
SAP R/3 4.6C, both procedural and
object oriented
GOALS
• Changes in the ABAP Workbench and
the programming language ABAP
between SAP R/3 4.6C and SAP
NetWeaver 7.0
CONTENT
• New syntax elements
- Unicode
- ABAP Workbench
• New editor and new debugger with SAP
NetWeaver
database indexes; create, change and
delete database indexes; DB views or
ABAP joins and database indexes; Open
SQL statements and database indexes
• Suitable access paths: accessing
individual tables, accessing multiple
tables, accessing pool and cluster tables,
SAP table buffering
• Optimized use of internal tables: design
and definition of internal tables,
efficient structure, efficient access,
applications
• SAP system analysis – overview
• SAP workload analysis (transaction
profiles)
SOFTWARE
• SAP NetWeaver 7.0
NOTES
The course is aimed at experienced ABAP
developers with fundamental experience
of SAP administration. The course
content that participants learn are put to
• Packages
• Code Inspector
- Advanced Object oriented
programming with ABAP
• Class-based exceptions
• Persistence framework
- Assertions and breakpoints
- Shared Objects
- SAP List Viewer Object Model
(Overview)
- ABAP Unit (code testing)
- Dynamic programming
• Reference types, dynamic instantiation
- Runtime Type Services (RTTI and
RTTC)
- ABAP Web Dynpro (Overview)
- Screen enhancements with classical
BAdIs
practical use in the course as part of a
performance optimization project. The
topic of the performance of ABAP
programs is also subject of the BC402
(Advanced ABAP) course. Whereas BC402
is concerned with avoiding performance
problems during the design and
implementation, course BC490 focuses on
analyzing and eliminating existing
performance problems.
- Enhancement Framework
- Enhancement Points and Enhancement
Sections
- BAdIs as of SAP NetWeaver 7.0
- Regular expressions
SOFTWARE
• SAP NetWeaver 7.0
NOTES
The following topics are not part of this
course:
• Introduction into object oriented
programming with ABAP – see course
BC401
• Business Server Pages see course NET200
• Forms – see courses BC470 and BC480
ABAP Web Dynpro will only be touched
upon – for details please see course
NET310 and NET311
www.sap.nl/education 241
SAP Programming
SAP NetWeaver Programming Core additional Courses Adobe

Overview / Awareness SAP Interactive Forms by Adobe

WNLADA NW
Adobe Interactive Forms
Awareness

1 day

SAP Interactive Forms for ABAP Development

SAPTEC NW BC400 NW BC401 NW WNLAIF NW

Fundamentals of ABAP Workbench ABAP Objects Workshop ABAP
SAP Web AS Foundations Interactive Forms for ECC

3 days 5 days 5 days 5 days

SAP Interactive Forms for Java Development

JA100 NW JA300 NW JA310 NW WNLADJ NW

SAP J2SE Fundamentals SAP J2EE Fundamentals Java Web Dynpro Workshop Interactive
Forms Java Development
Introduction

5 days 5 days 5 days 4 days

Dit SAP Interactive Forms curriculum is een lokale samenwerking tussen Adobe, NL4B en SAP Education Nederland

WNLADA · Adobe Interactive Forms Awareness

DURATION 1 day PRICE € 590 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP GOALS • Overview of Adobe Software possibilities

• Sales consultants, pre-sales consultants, • Understand the partnership between • Overview of standard Interactive Forms
project managers, key users / power SAP and Adobe Scenarios
users. • Understand the possibilities of • Sales triggers and the way of selling
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED Interactive Forms • Relationship between Interactive Forms
• Knowledge of business processes and • Understand the relationship between and Business Processes
their disruptive process steps Interactive Forms and Business • Possible scenarios and the way of
• Knowledge of the use of paper forms Processes implementation
within business processes • Find the sales triggers to sell Interactive • Participants presentation of a local case
• Knowledge of the way IT supports Forms SOFTWARE
business processes CONTENT • NW 2004s
• Partnership SAP and Adobe NOTES
• Overview of possibilities of Interactive • Course language: Dutch
Forms

242
SAP Programming
SAP NetWeaver Programming Core additional Courses Adobe

WNLADJ · Workshop Interactive Forms Java Development Introduction

DURATION 4 days PRICE € 2360 STARTING DATES 3-feb-09

TARGET GROUP • To implement an Interactive Form in a • Implementing an offline and online

• SAP Java Developers who want to create
Interactive Forms applications.
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• Programming experience with Java
• JA100 SAP JS2E Fundamentals
• JA300 SAP J2EE Fundamentals
• JA310 Java Web Dynpro
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• JavaScript
GOALS
• To understand the partnership between
SAP and Adobe
• To understand the architecture of
Adobe Document Server within the SAP
NetWeaver environment
Web Dynpro for Java scenario
• To use simple Scripting within an
Interactive Form
CONTENT
• Partnership SAP and Adobe
• Overview of possible scenarios for using
Interactive Forms
• Architectural overview of Adobe
Document Server within SAP
NetWeaver
• Working with the Adobe Acrobat &
Adobe Reader
• Setting ReaderRights for Interactive
Forms in Adobe Reader
• Standard SAP Controls and their use in
Interactive Form scenario
• Create an Interactive Form for a Web
Dynpro for Java scenario
• Zero Client Installation (ZCI) versus
Active Component Framework (ACF)
• Generating and E-mailing an Interactive
Form in a SAP environment
• Uploading and Downloading Interactive
Forms
• Extracting data from an Interactive
Form in a SAP environment
• Making use of the PDF object Java
Classes
• Making use of Form Scripting
SOFTWARE

• To develop Interactive Forms using the Interactive Forms • NW 2004s

Adobe Document Server and Adobe • Working with the Adobe LiveCycle NOTES
LiveCycle Designer Designer • Course will be held in Dutch, unless
• To process data, from an Interactive • Working with the designer within the English is necessary
Form, within a SAP environment NetWeaver Development Studio

www.sap.nl/education 243
SAP Programming
SAP NetWeaver Programming Core additional Courses Adobe
WNLAIF · Workshop ABAP Interactive Forms for ECC
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES 2-mrt-09, 25-mei-09
TARGET AUDIENCE
SAP ABAP Developers who want to create
and modify Interactive Forms
applications.
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• Programming experience with ABAP
• BC400 ABAP Workbench Foundations
• BC401 ABAP Objects
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• JNET310 ABAP Web Dynpro
• BC425 Enhancements and
Modifications
• JavaScript
GOALS
• To understand the partnership between
SAP and Adobe
• To understand the architecture of
Adobe Document Server within the SAP
NetWeaver environment
• To develop Interactive Forms using the
Adobe Document Server and Adobe
LiveCycle Designer
• To process data, from an Interactive
Form, within a SAP environment
• To implement an Interactive Form in a
Web Dynpro for ABAP scenario
• To use simple Scripting within an
Interactive Form
• To understand Interactive Forms
possibilities within SAP Enterprise Core
Component (ECC)
244
• To understand Interactive Forms for
ISR Framework scenarios
• To make use of fonts replacement,
• To understand performance
influencing aspects
• To understand how to trace and handle
errors
SOFTWARE
• NW 2004s
CONTENT
• Partnership SAP and Adobe
• Overview of possible scenarios for using
Interactive Forms
• Architectural overview of Adobe
Document Server within SAP
NetWeaver
• Working with the Adobe Acrobat &
Adobe Reader
• Setting ReaderRights for Interactive
Forms in Adobe Reader
• Standard SAP Controls and their use in
Interactive Forms
• Working with the Adobe LiveCycle
Designer and the SAP transaction
“Form Builder”
• Implementing an offline and online
Interactive Form scenario
• Create an Interactive Form for a Web
Dynpro for ABAP scenario
• Zero Client Installation (ZCI) versus
Active Component Framework (ACF)
• Generating and E-mailing an Interactive
Form in a SAP environment
• Uploading and Downloading Interactive
Forms
• Extracting data from an Interactive
Form in a SAP environment
• Making use of the PDF object ABAP
Classes and ADS Form Processing
Function Modules
• Making use of Form Scripting
• Making use of DDIC or XML Interfaces
• Understanding Internal Service Request
(ISR) Form scenarios
• Web Dynpro for ABAP, advanced
Interactive Forms topics
• Implementing multi-language
Interactive Forms
• Implementing tables, dynamic
properties and standard SAP library
controls
• Adding fonts and font replacements
within Interactive Forms
• Understanding aspects influencing the
performance of Interactive Forms
• Troubleshooting regarding Interactive
Forms
NOTES
• Course will be held in English
SAP Programming
Application Specific Programming Courses

SAPNW NW SAPTEC NW BC400 NW

SAP NetWeaver Overview Fundamentals of ABAP Workbench
SAP Web AS Foundations

3 days 3 days 5 days

NW001 NW HR350 ERP

Technology Solutions See special prerequisites Programming in Human
Powered by for AC400 and HR350 Capital Management
SAP NetWeaver on pages 102 and 122

8 hours 5 days

AC400 ERP
Programming in Financials

Cursusdetailgegevens kunt u vinden via de index op pagina 533

3 days

www.sap.nl/education 245
SAP Programming
Programming Web Applications

SAPTEC NW BC400 NW BC401 NW

Fundamentals of ABAP Workbench ABAP Objects
SAP Web AS Foundations

3 days 5 days 5 days

SAPNW NW NET200 NW
SAP NetWeaver Overview Experience in Developing
any programming BSP Applications
language

3 days 5 days

NW001 NW NET310 NW NET311 NW

Technology Solutions ABAP Web Dynpro Advanced Web Dynpro for
Powered by ABAP
SAP NetWeaver

8 hours 5 days 2 days

NET312 NW
UI Development with
ABAP Web Dynpro

3 days

NET200 · Developing BSP Applications

DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES 23-feb-09

TARGET GROUP SAP Web Application Server • Layout design with BSP extensions
• Developer • Create Web applications that are based • Model View Controller (MVC)
• Consultants on the Business Server Pages (BSP) programming model
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED programming model. • Adjustment options:
• BC400 (ABAP Workbench Foundations) CONTENT - Internationalization (OTR)
• Basic knowledge of HTML / HTTP • System architecture of the SAP Web - Design adjustment
• Basic knowledge of object-oriented Application Server • Logon procedure
programming (preferably: ABAP • Process of an HTTP request/response • Additional techniques:
Objects) cycle - Connecting back-end systems using
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED • Components of a BSP application and a RFC
• Knowledge of transaction programming BSP - Sending e-mails from BSP applications
(preferably: BC410 (Developing User • Create BSP applications and BSPs - Client role of the SAP Web Application
Dialogs)) • Ease of navigation Server
GOALS • Status management (session handling) SOFTWARE

Overview of the system architecture of the • MIME objects in BSPs SAP Web Application Server 6.20

246
SAP Programming
Programming Web Applications
NET310 · ABAP Web Dynpro
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES 2-mrt-09, 4-mei-09
TARGET GROUP
• Developers and consultants who want
to create applications based on the
ABAP Web Dynpro programming
model.
• Project managers who want to learn
about the capabilities of ABAP Web
Dynpro.
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
A sound knowledge of ABAP, particularly
of the material covered in the courses
BC400 (ABAP Workbench Foundations)
and BC401 (ABAP Objects)
NET311 · Advanced Web Dynpro for ABAP
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES 16-mrt-09, 11-mei-09
TARGET GROUP
• Developers of ABAP Web Dynpro
applications
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• ABAP Web Dynpro (NET310)
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• At the end of this course you will be
able to use advanced ABAP Web Dynpro
coding techniques
NET312 · UI Dev. with ABAP Web Dynpro
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES 18-mrt-09, 13-mei-09
TARGET GROUP
• Developers of ABAP WD Applications
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• NET310 Fundamentals of ABAP Web
Dynpro
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• Implement complex UI elements
SOFTWARE
• SAP NetWeaver 7.0
GOALS • Input help
• To discuss the role of ABAP Web • Changing context and UI at runtime
Dynpro with regard to SAP’s UI strategy • Connecting components
• To develop ABAP Web Dynpro-based • Integrating the SAP List Viewer (ALV)
applications • Portal integration
CONTENT • Configuring and personalizing
• Web Dynpro component architecture SOFTWARE
• Create and use Web Dynpro controllers SAP NetWeaver 2004s
• Data storage in Web Dynpro NOTES
components: context Please note that Web Dynpro for ABAP is
• Navigation and data transfer only available from SAP NetWeaver 2004s
• Definition of the Web Dynpro user (SAP NetWeaver Application Server 7.0).
interface
• Internationalization
• Define and send messages
CONTENT NOTES
• The ABAP Web Dynpro API • Please note that ABAP Web Dynpro was
• Dynamic Component Usage introduced only with SAP NetWeaver
• Popup windows 7.0.
• Enhancements for ABAP Web Dynpro
• Development Rules
SOFTWARE
• SAP NetWeaver 7.0
CONTENT
• Implementing complex UI elements,
e.g.: Table, TabStrip, Tree, RoadMap
• Using UI Patterns
• Defining Business Graphics
• Integrating SAP Interactive Forms by
Adobe
www.sap.nl/education 247
SAP Programming
Business Programming Java

NW001 NW JA310 NW JA312 NW

Technology Solutions Java Web Dynpro Advanced Web Dynpro for
Powered by Experience with J2EE Java
SAP NetWeaver

8 hours 5 days 5 days

SAPTEC NW JA100 NW JA300 NW JA320 NW JA313 NW

Fundamentals of SAP J2SE Fundamentals SAP J2EE Fundamentals SAP Java Persistence Integration of SAP
SAP Web AS Framework Interactive Forms into Web
Dynpro for Java

3 days 5 days 5 days 5 days 2 hours

SAPNW NW JA331 NW JA314 NW

SAP NetWeaver Overview SAP J2EE Open Integration Java WebDynpro –
Technologies Business Graphics

3 days 12,5 hours 2 hours

JA340 NW
SAP Java Development
Infrastructure

3 days

ONW04S OCE71 JA400 JA410 JA450 NW

Online Knowledge Product Online Knowledge Product Introduction to Java EE5 Java on Web Dynpro for Java on
SAP NetWeaver 2004S SAP NetWeaver SAP NetWeaver 7.1 SAP NetWeaver 7.1
Composition Environment
7.1
230 hours 75 hours 5 days 3 days 5 days

CERTIFICATION Solution Academy basic training as Development Consultant SAP NetWeaver 2004 – Web Application Development Focus Java

JA100 > JA300 > JA331 > JA340 > JA310 > JA320 > C_JA320_04
Voor de meest actuele certificeringinformatie verwijzen wij u graag naar www.sap.com/services/education/certification

JA100 · SAP J2SE Fundamentals

DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES 5-jan-09

TARGET GROUP • They can implement simple object- • Collection framework

• Developer oriented applications in Java • SAP Java Connector and SAP Enterprise
• Consultants • They can call remote function modules Connector
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED in an SAP system from a Java application • Overview of Java 2 Enterprise Edition
Programming knowledge in any CONTENT (J2EE)
programming language • Development tools in the Java 2 NOTES

PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED Software Development Kit The course uses the SAP NetWeaver
Basic knowledge of ABAP, especially about • SAP NetWeaver Developer Studio Developer Studio as the development
function modules and BAPIs • Java data types environment. All subsequent courses
GOALS • Operators, expressions and statements (JAxxx) require that you understand the
• Participants learn the attributes, special • Object-oriented programming with Java contents of this course.
features and the syntax of the Java • Inheritance and interfaces
programming language • Exception handling

248
SAP Programming
Business Programming Java
JA300 · SAP J2EE Fundamentals
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES 12-jan-09
TARGET GROUP
• Developer
• Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• JA100 SAP J2SE Fundamentals or
equivalent knowledge
• Knowledge of HTML, especially HTML
forms
GOALS
Develop J2EE applications based on the
SAP NetWeaver Application Server Java
JA310 · Java Web Dynpro Basics
DURATION 4 days PRICE € 2360 STARTING DATES 26-jan-09
TARGET GROUP
• Developer
• Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
JA100 (Java Start-Up Kit)
GOALS
Develop graphical user interfaces in Java
with the Web Dynpro technology
JA312 · Advanced Web Dynpro for Java
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• Experienced Java Web Dynpro
developers
• Project members
• Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• JA310 Java Web Dynpro Basics
• Practical programming experience with
Java Web Dynpro
GOALS
The course provides developers with a
deeper understanding of the Java Web
Dynpro programming model. It also
discusses aspects of larger Web Dynpro
applications with a complex business logic
and user interface layout.
CONTENT
• Web Dynpro Programming Model
CONTENT
• Overview of the SAP NetWeaver
Application Server Java system
architecture
• Administration tools: Visual
Administrator, SAP Management
Console
• SAP NetWeaver Development
Infrastructure (NWDI)
• Overview of Enterprise JavaBeans
• Introduction to the SAP persistence
framework
CONTENT
• Core Positioning
• Web Dynpro development with the SAP
NetWeaver Developer Studio
• Web Dynpro Controller
• Context definition
• Context access at runtime
• UI elements
- Phase model
- Dynamic action handler and complex
parameter mapping
- Definition of standalone component
interfaces
- Navigation and popup windows
- Error handling
- Suspend/resume plugs
- Web Dynpro technology service classes
- Application and URL properties
- Structuring complex Web Dynpro
applications
• Complex context properties
- Supply and dispose functions
- Typed context API
• Complex UI properties
- Programming with tree UI elements
- Object value selectors
- SAP Java Dictionary
- Open SQL for Java
- Overview of supported persistence
models
• Introduction in Web Services
• SAP Web Dynpro Java (introduction)
• Servlets, JSP (introduction)
• Programming Java stand alone clients
and Web clients for EJBs
SOFTWARE
WEB AS 6.40
• Messages and multilingual capability
• Input help
• Debugging Web Dynpro applications
• Dynamic changes to context and UI
• Using models using adaptive RFC as an
example
SOFTWARE
SAP Web Application Server 6.40
- Dynamic context visualization
• Multilingual capability in Web Dynpro
• Web Dynpro model objects
- Changes to the RFC interface
- Web Service models and Java Bean
models
SOFTWARE
SAP NW 2004S
NOTES
This course is not suitable for beginners.
This is an advanced and highly technical
training course. If possible, programmers
with a basic knowledge of Web Dynpro
should have already completed a
productive Web Dynpro project before
attending this course.
www.sap.nl/education 249
SAP Programming
Business Programming Java
JA313 · Integration of SAP Interactive Forms into Web Dynpro for Java
DURATION 2 hours PRICE € 150 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• Technical consultants
• Java developers
• Development management
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• JA300 SAP J2EE Fundamentals
JA310 Java Web Dynpro Basics
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• SAPNW SAP NetWeaver – Overview
• NW001 Technology Solutions Powered
by SAP NetWeaver
• JA340 SAP NetWeaver Development
Infrastructure
JA314 · Business Graphics Integration
DURATION 2 hours PRICE € 150 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
Java WebDynpro Developers
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• JA300 SAP J2EE Start-Up Kit
• JA310 Java Web Dynpro
JA320 · SAP Java Persistence Framework
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• Developer
• Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• JA100 (Java J2SE Fundamentals)
• JA300 (SAP J2SE Fundamentals) or
equivalent knowledge
250
GOALS
• Understand how SAP Interactive Forms
is integrated into SAP NetWeaver
• Grasp the differences between online
and offline interactive scenarios and
non-interactive forms use
• Develop a forms-based application in
Web Dynpro for Java
SOFTWARE
SAP NetWeaver 7.0
CONTENT
• This course is designed to familiarize
learners with the integration of SAP
GOALS
• Use the Internet Graphics Server with
WebDynpro
• Install, Configure and Integrate Web
Dynpro with the Internet Graphics
Server
• Supply Business Data from your
WebDynpro Application to the Internet
Graphics Server for presentation
GOALS
Develop J2EE applications based on
relational database tables
CONTENT
• Maintaining the properties of database
tables using the Java Dictionary
• Overview of the persistence models in
SAP Persistence Framework: JDBC,
SQLJ, entity beans, and JDO
Interactive Forms by Adobe into the
different development and run-time
environments of SAP NetWeaver.
• You will get an overview of how forms
can be used in business processes, and
you will learn how to create a Web
Dynpro for Java application that
includes an interactive PDF form for
data capture
CONTENT
• Internet Graphics Server Overview
• Installation and Configuration of the
IGS
• WebDynpro integration with the IGS
NOTES
This content was formerly part of TJA311
Java WebDynpro
• Transaction handling
• Managing logical locks using the
enqueue server
• Logging and tracing
• Secure database access with J2EE
security roles and UME permissions
SOFTWARE
SAP Web Application Server 6.40
SAP Programming
Business Programming Java
JA331 · SAP J2EE Open Integration Technologies
DURATION 12 hours PRICE € 500 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
Development Consultants responsible for
developing in Java applications
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• JA100 (Java Start-up Kit)
• JA300 (SAP J2EE Startup Kit)
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
Develop Java applications that integrate
with other systems.
JA340 · SAP Java Development Infrastructure
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
Development Consultants responsible for
developing in Java applications
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• JA100 (Start-up Kit)
• JA300 (SAP J2EE Startup Kit)
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
Use the Java development Infrastructure
for your development projects
JA400 · Introduction to Java EE5
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• Consultants and developers who want
to use the Java Platform, Enterprise
Edition 5 for developing server-side
applications.
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• JA100 SAP J2SE Fundamentals or
equivalent knowledge
• Knowledge of HTML, especially HTML
forms
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• Develop Java EE 5 compliant
applications
CONTENT
• SAP Enterprise Connector (JCo)
• Java Connector Architecture (JCA)
• JCo RFC Provider – ABAP > Java
Communication
• Java Message Beans (JMS) and Message
Driven Beans (MDB)
• Web Services – Use and Creation
• Protocols of Web Services (SOAP, WSDL,
UDDI)
CONTENT
• Component Model
• Software Deployment Manager (SDM)
• JDI from a programmers point of view
- Design Time Repository (DTR)
- Component Build Service (CBS)
- Change Management Service (CMS)
SOFTWARE
SAP Web Application Server 6.40
CONTENT
• Stateless/Stateful Session Beans and
Message Driven Beans (EJB 3.0)
• Java standalone clients and web clients
for EJBs
• Java Message Service (JMS)
• Java Database Connectivity (JDBC)
• Java Persistence API 1.0
• Timer Service
• Java Mail API
• Java Naming and Directory Interface
(JNDI)
• Entity Callbacks and Listeners
• Interceptors
• Transactions
SOFTWARE
SAP Web Application Server 6.40
NOTES
If you have studied this E-learning
material in detail, successful participation
in the following classroom training course
is possible in all cases. The course material
is available in English only. A training
system is not available from SAP
Education for E-learning.
NOTES
If you have studied this E-learning
material in detail, successful participation
in the following classroom training course
is possible in all cases. The course material
is available in English only. A training
system is not available from SAP
Education for E-learning.
• Security
• Web Service Standards: JAX-WS
• Web Applications (Servlets, Java Server
Pages, Java Server Faces (JSF))
• Java Connector Architecture
SOFTWARE
• SAP NetWeaver Composition
Environment 7.1
NOTES
In this class, SAP NetWeaver Developer
Studio and SAP NetWeaver Application
Server Java of SAP NetWeaver
Composition Environment 7.1 will be
used.
www.sap.nl/education 251
SAP Programming
Business Programming Java
JA410 · Java voor SAP NetWeaver 7.1
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• Consultants and developers who want
to develop Java applications running on
top of SAP NetWeaver 7.1
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• JA400 Introduction to Java EE 5
or equivalent knowledge
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• Develop Java applications based on SAP
NetWeaver Composition Environment
7.1
JA450 · Web Dynpro for Java on SAP NetWeaver 7.1
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• Developers and consultants who want
to create applications based on the Web
Dynpro Java programming model
• Project managers with technical
experience who want to learn about the
capabilities of Web Dynpro Java
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• JA100 SAP J2SE Fundamentals
• or similar knowledge
GOALS
• Develop graphical user interfaces with
Web Dynpro Java on SAP NetWeaver 7.1
252
SOFTWARE
• SAP NetWeaver Composition
Environment 7.1
CONTENT
• Server Architecture and Administration
from developer´s perspective
• Deployment
• SAP VM:
- Memory Analyzer
- Debugging on demand
• Logging and Tracing
• User Management
CONTENT
• Positioning of Web Dynpro Java
• Web Dynpro development with SAP
NetWeaver Developer Studio 7.1
• Web Dynpro Component architecture
• Creating and using Web Dynpro
Controller
• Data storage in Web Dynpro
• Navigation and data transfer
• Defining the user interface
• Internationalization
• Defining and sending messages
• Usage of input help and pop-ups
• Debugging Web Dynpro Applications
• Dynamic changes at runtime
• Security (Architecture, Security
Provider, UME Permissions, etc.)
• Java Dictionary
• Open SQL
• Enqueue Server
• Introduction to NetWeaver
Development Infrastructure (NWDI)
NOTES
The course material is available only in
English.
• Using models with adaptive RFC as an
example
SOFTWARE
• SAP NetWeaver Composition
Environment 7.1
NOTES
• Course material (handbook and
presentation) is available in English
only.
• In this class, SAP NetWeaver Developer
Studio and SAP NetWeaver Application
Server Java of SAP NetWeaver
Composition Environment 7.1 will be
used
SAP Programming
Business Programming Java
OCE71 · Online Knowledge Product SAP NetWeaver Composition Environment 7.1
DURATION 75 hours PRICE € 350 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• Major consultant and and IT operations
roles for SAP NetWeaver CE 7.1
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• The SAP NetWeaver Composition
Environment 7.1 (NetWeaver CE 7.1)
• Learning Maps are designed for qualified
project participants.
• Knowledge equivalent to a consultant
profile for SAP NetWeaver CE 7.1
• More than 12 months project
experience
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• Identify the SAP NetWeaver
Composition Environment and the
capabilities for developing Composite
Applications
• Create composite applications using
SAP Composite Application Framework
• Develop a user interface using
WebDynpro for Java.
• Model composite views
• Model composite processes
CONTENT
• Overview
- Creating Composite Applications
• Migration
- Java EE Migration
• Developing Applications Using Java
- Developing a Java EE-Compliant
Application
- Developing a User Interface with Web
Dynpro for Java
• Creating Composite Applications
- Modeling Composite Views
- Modeling Composite Processes
- Developing Composite Applications
• Software Life-Cycle Management
- Software Life-Cycle Mangement for CE
• Operations
- Administering and Monitoring CE
• Enabling Enterprise Services
- Consuming Enterprise Services
• Mobilizing Business Processes
- Developing Voice-Enabled Applications
• Running an Enterprise Portal
- Integrating Composite Applications
Into the Portal
• Enterprise Reporting, Query, and
Analysis
- Embedding BI Into Applications
NOTES
• At the core of SAP NetWeaver CE is the
latest version of the SAP NetWeaver
Application Server component. This
component is fully compatible with Java
Platform, Enterprise Edition (Java EE) 5,
including complete support for all the
major Java technologies including
Enterprise JavaBeans 3.0 (EJB 3.0) and
the latest data persistence models.
• Through SAP NetWeaver CE, SAP
delivers one of the first Java EE
5–compatible application servers on the
market, which supports the creation
and adoption of technology standards
and enables the implementation of
development projects based on Java EE 5
technology.
• This content is provided by SAP’s
Online Knowledge Products.
Information regarding Online
Knowledge Products and instructions
on how to access the Online Knowledge
Products are available:
http://service.sap.com/okp
• All materials are online
www.sap.nl/education 253
SAP Programming
Business Programming Java
ONW04S · Online Knowledge Product SAP NetWeaver 2004S
DURATION 230 hours PRICE € 350 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• SAP NetWeaver Technical Consultants
• SAP NetWeaver Development
Consultants
• Customers upgrading to NW04s
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• More than 12 months experience with
NetWeaver
• Upcoming participation in a SAP
NetWeaver 2004s project
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• Describe the capabilities of SAP
NetWeaver 2004s
• Plan your SAP NW04s implementation
project
• Upgrade to NW04s
CONTENT (duration)
• General Topics (17 hrs)
- SAP NetWeaver Development
Infrastructure
- Security
254
• Enabling Application-to-Application
Processes (6 hrs)
• Enabling Business-to-Business Processes
(8 hrs)
• Business Process Management (7 hrs)
• Business Task Management (8 hrs)
• Enterprise Data Warehousing (15 hrs)
• Enterprise Reporting, Query, and
Analysis (20 hrs)
• Business Planning and Analytical
Services (4 hrs)
• Enabling User Collaboration (4 hrs)
• Running an Enterprise Portal (3 hrs)
• Developing, Configuration, and
Adapting Applications (68 hrs)
- Creating Business Applications using
ABAP
- Creating Applications using Web
Dynpro for ABAP
- Creating Composite Applications
- Creating Composite Applications
• SAP NetWeaver Operations (14 hrs)
- Monitoring & Administering SAP
NetWeaver, Data Archiving
- Adaptive Computing
• Software Life-Cycle Management
(25 hrs)
• Enabling Platform Interoperability
(30 hrs)
- IBM
- Microsoft
• Authentication and Single Sign-On
(1:30 hrs)
- Integrated User and Access (1 hr)
Management
NOTES
• This content is provided by SAP’s
Online Knowledge Products.
Information regarding Online
Knowledge Products and instructions
on how to access the Online Knowledge
Products are available: http://service.
sap.com/okp
• All materials are online
SAP System Administration
General, J2EE & CTS Administration

ADM200 NW ADM225 NW
SAP Web Application SAP Software Logistics for
Server Java Administration Java

5 days 3 days

SAPTEC NW ADM100 NW ADM110 NW HR290 ERP

Fundamentals of SAP Web AS SAP ECC 5.0 Installation System Configuration for
SAP Web AS Administration I ESS/MSS

3 days 5 days 2 days 2 days

SAPNW NW DADM7A NW ADM102 NW

SAP NetWeaver Overview Delta Administration SAP Web AS
SAP NetWeaver AS Administration II
ABAP 4.6C - 7.0

3 days 5 days 3 days

NW001 NW ONWES NW ADM106 NW ADM107 NW

Technology Solutions OKP SAP NetWeaver Advanced SAP System Advanced System
Powered by Enterprise Search 7.0 Monitoring Monitoring for
SAP NetWeaver SAP NetWeaver 2004

8 hours 7 hours 2 days 2 days

OCE71 TZACC2 NW ADM325 NW ADM326 NW

Online Knowledge Product Adaptive Computing Software Logistics Upgrade to R/3 Enterprise
SAP NetWeaver Implementation with ACC
Composition Environment in SAP NetWeaver
7.1 Technology 5 days
75 hours 7 hours 5 days

TADMD7 C_TADM51_70 ADM315 NW

Delta Implementation &
Operation SAP Web AS
6.40 - SAP NetWeaver AS
7.0 (Java & ABAP)
5 days
SAP Certified Technology
Workload Analysis
Associate - System
Administration
(Oracle DB) with
SAP NetWeaver 7.0 3 days

CERTIFICATION Solution Academy basic training as Technology Consultant SAP NetWeaver 2004 – SAP Web AS for DB

(for new SAP WebAS consultants) TADM10 > TADM12 > ADM515 > C_TADM50_04
ALTERNATIVE COURSES SAPTEC > ADM100 > ADM102 > ADM110 > ADM200 > ADM315 > ADM325 > ADM515 > C_TADM50_04
CERTIFICATION Solution Academy basic training as Technology Consultant SAP NetWeaver 2004 – SAP Web AS for Oracle

(for new SAP WebAS consultants) TADM10 > TADM12 > TADM51 > C_TADM51_04
ALTERNATIVE COURSES SAPTEC > ADM100 > ADM102 > ADM110 > ADM200 > ADM315 > ADM325 > ADM505 > ADM506 > C_TADM51_04

CERTIFICATION Solution Academy basic training as Technology Consultant SAP NetWeaver 2004 – SAP Web AS for MS SQL Server

(for new SAP WebAS consultants) TADM10 > TADM12 > TADM53 > C_TADM53_04
ALTERNATIVE COURSES SAPTEC > ADM100 > ADM102 > ADM110 > ADM200 > ADM315 > ADM325 > ADM520 > C_TADM53_04

CERTIFICATION Solution Academy basic training as Technology Consultant SAP NetWeaver 2004 – SAP Web AS for DB2 UDB

(for new SAP WebAS consultants) TADM10 > TADM12 > TADM56 > C_TADM56_04
ALTERNATIVE COURSES SAPTEC > ADM100 > ADM102 > ADM110 > ADM200 > ADM315 > ADM325 > ADM535 > C_TADM56_04

Voor de meest actuele certificeringinformatie verwijzen wij u graag naar www.sap.com/services/education/certification

www.sap.nl/education 255
SAP System Administration
General, J2EE & CTS Administration
ADM100 · SAP Web AS Administration I
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 3300 STARTING DATES 19-jan-09, 16-mrt-09, 25-mei-09
TARGET GROUP
SAP system administrators, technology
consultants, employees responsible for IT,
and employees involved in SAP system
administration
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAPTEC (Fundamentals of SAP Web AS)
• Basic knowledge of operating systems
and databases
GOALS
Implementation of basic administrative
tasks in a production environment
CONTENT
• Starting and stopping an SAP system
• System configuration options
• Configuration of online documentation
• Configuration of periodic, automated
ADM102 · SAP Web AS Administration II
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1980 STARTING DATES 26-jan-09, 23-mrt-09, 3-jun-09
TARGET GROUP
• SAP system administrators
• Technology consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAPTEC (Fundamentals of SAP Web AS)
• ADM100 (SAP Web AS Administration I)
• SAP system administration experience
GOALS
Performing additional administrative tasks
that are not dealt with in the course
ADM100 (SAP Web AS Administration I)
CONTENT
• Internet-based technology components:
- SAP Internet Transaction Server
(SAP ITS)
- Internet Communication Manager
(ICM)
- SAPWebDispatcher
256
work with a database, for example,
scheduling backups
• Transport functions in SAP systems
• Importing support packages and add-
ons
• Scheduling background jobs
• Definition and integration of printers
• Fundamentals of user administration
• Setting up remote connections
• Using system monitors
• Fundamentals of SAP document
archiving
• Structured error searches
• Fundamentals of system security
SOFTWARE
SAP Web Application Server 6.40
• Globalization
- Several languages in one SAP system
- Several code pages in one SAP system
and Unicode
• Technical aspects of external
communication:
- External mail server links using
SAPconnect and SMTP
• Extended Computer Aided Test Tool
(eCATT)
• Central user administration (CUA)
• Directory services links using LDAP
SOFTWARE
SAP Web Application Server 6.40
NOTES
SAP Web AS is the central component of
the SAP NetWeaver application platform.
Building on the knowledge gained from
the SAPTEC course (Fundamentals of
SAPWeb AS), this course is a solid
foundation for training SAP system
administrators. This course is the
prerequisite for many of the subsequent
courses from the “SAP System
Administration” curriculum. This course
is suitable as an introduction to managing
SAP systems that use the SAP Web AS
ABAP. The course does not cover
administration with SAP Web AS Java.
NOTES
SAP Web AS is the central component of
the SAP NetWeaver application platform.
Following on from ADM100 (SAP Web AS
Administration I), this course provides
additional training on SAP Web AS for
SAP system administrators. This course
focuses on Internet-based technology
components and user administration
(CUA and integrating directory services).
The administration of SAP Web AS Java is
not examined in detail in this course. For
more information on this topic, please
attend course ADM200 (SAP Web AS Java
Administration).
SAP System Administration
General, J2EE & CTS Administration
ADM106 · Advanced SAP System Monitoring
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1320 STARTING DATES 2-feb-09
TARGET GROUP
• SAP system administrators
• Technology consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAPTEC (Fundamentals of SAP Web AS)
• ADM100 (SAP Web AS Administration I)
• Practical experience of transactions
RZ20 and RZ21
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
ADM100 (SAP Web AS
Administration II)
GOALS
• Gain expert knowledge of using the
CCMS monitoring infrastructure
ADM107 · Advanced System Monitoring for NetWeaver 2004
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1320 STARTING DATES 5-feb-09
TARGET GROUP
• SAP system administrators
• Technology consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• Good knowledge of SAP system
administration (SAPTEC, ADM100)
• ADM106 (SAP System Monitoring Using
CCMS I)
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
ADM100 (SAP Web AS Administration II)
GOALS
This course consolidates and expands
knowledge from ADM106 mainly with
up-to-date SAP Web AS 6.40-related issues.
Topics for monitoring SAP Web AS Java
• Set up central monitoring of an SAP
system landscape
CONTENT
• Structure and basic operating functions
of the CCMS monitor
• Agent technology
• Steps for setting up central monitoring
• Monitoring remote systems
• Creating your own static and rule-based
monitors
• Special monitors for SAP components
• Monitor property variants
• Maintain threshold values using
attribute groups
are currently handled in course ADM200
– Administration SAP Web AS Java.
CONTENT
• Configuration of the sapccm4x,
sapccmsr, and ccmsping agents
• Use of the central data cache
• Configuration of central autoreaction
methods with e-mail notification
• Configuration and use of the central
performance history and reporting on it
using BW in SAPWeb AS 6.40
• Monitoring background tasks
• Monitoring file contents using agents
• Availability monitoring of RFC
connections
• Maintain methods using MTE classes
• E-mail notification in case of errors
SOFTWARE
SAP Web Application Server 6.40
NOTES
The course material is available in English.
The course is enhanced by course
ADM107 (Advanced SAP System
Monitoring using CCMS II).
• Connecting the CCMS to Alert
Management (ALM)
• Configuration of GRMG monitoring
(such as Web site availability)
• Further details on system monitoring
SOFTWARE
• SAP Web Application Server 6.40
• SAP ERP Central Component 5.0
NOTES
The course material is available in English.
Where possible, you should attend
courses ADM106 and ADM107 in the
sequence stated.
www.sap.nl/education 257
SAP System Administration
General, J2EE & CTS Administration
ADM110 · SAP ECC 5.0 Installation
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1270 STARTING DATES 29-jan-09, 8-jun-09
TARGET GROUP
• SAP system administrators
• Technology consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAPTEC (Fundamentals of SAP Web AS)
• ADM100 (SAP Web AS Administration I)
• Practical experience with SAP system
administration
GOALS
This course will prepare you to install an
SAP ECC 5.0 system and enable you to
understand the technical principles of
installing any SAP software components
based on SAP Web AS 6.20 and above.
ADM225 · SAP Software Logistics for Java
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1980 STARTING DATES 11-mrt-09
TARGET GROUP
• SAP system administrators
• Technical consultants
• Persons responsible for software logistics
for Java
• Technical employees in the Customer
Competence Center
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• ADM200 – SAP Web AS Java
Administration
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• Experience of administrating SAP
systems
258
CONTENT
• System architecture of SAP ECC 5.0 and
SAP Web AS 6.40
• Working with the Implementation
Guide
• Installation procedure
- Java runtime environment
- SAPInst
• Installation options
- Central system
- Additional instances
• Post-installation procedures
• Troubleshooting
SOFTWARE
SAP ERP Central Component 5.0
GOALS
• Concepts and tools of SAP software
logistics for Java
• Managing and transporting Java
development objects
• Developing a suitable SAP system
landscape
CONTENT
• Introduction to the concepts of the SAP
NetWeaver Development Infrastructure
(NWDI)
• Configuring NWDI
• Component model and the System
Landscape Directory (SLD)
NOTES
In this course, you install an SAP ECC 5.0
system based on SAP Web Application
Server 6.40. The system is implemented
on a Windows 2000 operating system and
an Oracle database. Specifics of
installations on Unix-based operating
systems or databases other than Oracle are
covered to some extent in the appendix to
the course materials. This course focuses
mainly on the practicalities of performing
an installation. The theory will be
examined only when necessary or
appropriate. Because this course shows
you how to install a system based on SAP
Web AS 6.40, it is relevant for all SAP
software components that are based on
SAP Web AS.
• Change Management Service (CMS)
- Landscape configurator
- Transport studio
• Design Time Repository (DTR)
• Component Build Service (CBS)
• Software maintenance
SOFTWARE
SAP NetWeaver Application Server 7.0
NOTES
The course material is available in English
only but the course is held in the local
language.This course does not include
transporting ABAP objects; to do this, you
should attend course ADM325.
SAP System Administration
General, J2EE & CTS Administration
ADM315 · Workload Analysis
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1980 STARTING DATES 6-apr-09, 10-jun-09
TARGET GROUP
• SAP system administrators
• Implementation team members
• Technology consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAPTEC (Fundamentals of SAP Web AS)
• ADM100 (SAP Web AS Administration I)
• Knowledge of administration of an
operating system and database
GOALS
This course explains the concepts for
performance monitoring and
performance tuning of SAP systems.
CONTENT
• Introduction to monitors for analyzing
ADM325 · Software Logistics
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 3300 STARTING DATES 30-mrt-09, 15-jun-09
TARGET GROUP
• SAP system administrators
• Technology consultants
• Employees responsible for software
logistics
• Technical staff in Customer
Competence Centers
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAPTEC (Fundamentals of SAP Web AS)
• ADM100 (SAP Web AS Administration I)
• Practical experience with SAP system
administration
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• Experience of the SAP Change and
Transport System (CTS)
GOALS
• Developing a suitable SAP system
landscape with a client concept
load and performance:
• Workload monitor, buffer analysis,
database monitor, operating system
monitor, statistics
• Identifying hardware bottlenecks and
using “big” hardware
• Expensive SQL statements from the
perspective of the SAP system and
database
• Identifying expensive SELECTs
• Table buffering
• RFC monitoring
SOFTWARE
• SAP ERP Central Component 5.0
• SAP Web Application Server 6.40
• Explaining the methodology, concepts,
and tools in SAP software logistics
• Managing and transporting
Customizing and Workbench transport
requests
• Managing clients
• Using the SAP Note Assistant, applying
SAP Support Packages, and explaining
what happens during an SAP system
upgrade
CONTENT
• Overview of SAP software logistics, SAP
system landscapes, and the client
concept
• Configuration of the Transport
Management System
• Creating and transporting Customizing
and Workbench transport requests in
NOTES
We recommend that you attend this
course after gaining some experience with
SAP system administration. Almost all the
content of this course is applicable to all
SAP systems that run on at least SAP Web
AS 6.10. Most of the content is applicable
to SAP R/3 4.6C. The training system is
based on a Windows/Oracle platform.
However, the content of the course is to a
great extent platform-independent. The
course materials are in English. The
course is held in the language of the
country where it takes place.
the ABAP environment
• Transport management in the ABAP
environment
• Tools for client copy and client
maintenance
• SAP Note Assistant, SAP Support
Packages, SAP system upgrade
• Fundamentals and concepts of
transporting applications in the Java
environment
SOFTWARE
SAP Web Application Server 6.40
NOTES
We recommend that you attend this
course as soon as possible after the initial
installation of your SAP system.
www.sap.nl/education 259
SAP System Administration
General, J2EE & CTS Administration
ADM326 · SAP R/3 Enterprise Upgrade
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 3300 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• SAP system administrators
• Technology consultants
• Project team leads
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• Knowledge of SAP system
administration
• Basic knowledge of database and
operating system administration
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• ADM100 (SAP Web AS Administration I)
• ADM325 (Software Logistics)
GOALS
The participants learn to plan and
implement upgrades for SAP systems.
This is done using an upgrade to SAP ECC
6.40/5.0/5.00
DADM7A · Delta Administration SAP NetWeaver AS ABAP 4.6C – 7.0
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 3300 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• SAP system administrators
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• Experiences in the implementation and
operation of SAP R/3 release
• 4.6
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• Configure and administer SAP
NetWeaver AS (ABAP) 7.0 based SAP
systems
SOFTWARE
• SAPNW
CONTENT
• Overview SAP solutions and
architecture SAP NetWeaver 7.0
• Processes SAP NetWeaver AS 7.0
260
CONTENT
• Reasons for an upgrade, planning
upgrades
• Preliminary and subsequent work
• Upgrade tools (PREPARE, upgrade
assistant etc.)
• PREPARE and upgrade phases
• DDIC behavior during the upgrade
• Integrating support packages and add-
ons
• Making modifications (SPDD and SPAU)
• Minmizing system downtime during
the upgrade
• Customer-specific upgrades
• Troubleshooting and upgrade service
and support
SOFTWARE
• SAP ERP Central Component 5.0
• SAP Web Application Server 6.40
• Communication and integration
technologies
• Starting and stopping the NetWeaver AS
7.0 (ABAP)
• Software development in SAP Systems
based on NetWeaver AS 7.0
• Software lifecycle of SAP systems
• Software maintenance
• Printer connections in NetWeaver AS 7.0
• Technology Components of browser
based user dialogs (BSP`s, ICM, ITS)
• Technical aspects of external
communication (SAPconnect, SMTP)
• Extended computer aided test tool
(eCATT)
• Advanced user administration topics
(LDAP, CUA, NetWeaver Identity
Management 7.0)
NOTES
This course focuses on planning and
executing an SAP ECC upgrade from SAP
R/3 3.1I to SAP ECC 6.40/5.0/5.00. It
therefore covers SAP R/3 Release SAP R/3
4.0B to SAP R/3 4.6C and SAP R/3
Enterprise 6.20/4.7/2.00. The upgrade can
be transferred to other SAP systemswith
SAP Web AS 6.x. Common errors have
been built into the training system. The
participants should find and remove these
errors when they perform the upgrade.
The training servers run on the Windows
2000 operating system, the database is
Oracle 9.2. Focus is placed neither on the
operating system nor on the database, but
on upgrading the SAP system. The course
material is available in English only, the
course is held in the local language.
NOTES
• The content for the first two days of the
course consists of parts of the courses:
SAPTEC and ADM100. The content for
the next three days are equivalent to the
content of the course ADM102
Administration ABAP II.
• You can find details for the
administration of the SAP NetWeaver AS
Java 7.0 in the course ADM200
Administration AS Java.
• The contents of this course (DADM7A)
and the course ADM200 are offered as a
package (10 days). The name of this
package is: DADM7D (Delta
Administration SAP NetWeaver AS 4.6C
— 7.0)
SAP System Administration
General, J2EE & CTS Administration

TADMD7 · Delta Implementation & Operation SAP Web AS 6.40 - SAP NetWeaver AS 7.0 (Java & ABAP)
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 3300* STARTING DATES 9-mrt-09, 20-apr-09

TARGET GROUP
• Technology consultants who are
responsible for the implementation and
operation of SAP systems and who
already have experience of SAP Web AS
6.40
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• Experience implementing and operating
SAP systems using SAP Web AS 6.40
• For the delta certification only:
Certification as Technology Consultant
SAP NetWeaver 2004 – SAP Web AS for
[DB] must be presented before the
certification exam.
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This course covers the main differences
between the certification training
courses for SAP Web AS 6.40 and SAP
NetWeaver AS 7.0
SOFTWARE
• SAP NetWeaver AS 7.00
CONTENT
• Installing SAP systems based on SAP
NetWeaver 7.00
• Starting and stopping SAP NetWeaver
AS Java (using SAP MC)
• Performing Post-Installation Activities
• Basic configuration of SAP NetWeaver
AS Java
• Technology Components for Browser-
based User Dialogs
• Setting Up an SAP System Landscape
allowing extended Transport Control
and transports of non-ABAP objects
using CTS
• User administration in SAP NetWeaver
AS Java (using UME etc.)
• Basic Configuration of SMSY within
SAP Solution Manager
• Oracle Database Delta
• Further minor details (Access Method
“G”, SAPSPRINT, News on Release
Strategy, Product Portfolio,
Terminology etc.)
NOTES
• Please note, that this course will be
based on extensive training material
that will only be covered in areas in
which changes occurred that are
relevant for passing the FULL exam
(building on your existing knowledge).
This means that the provided training
material won’t be covered in full detail.

* Indien direct aansluitend de certificeringstest afgenomen wordt is genoemde prijs inclusief certificeringskosten.

TZACC2 · Adaptive Computing Implementation with Adaptive Computing Controller in SAP NetWeaver Technology
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP GOALS NOTES

• Technology Consultants
• SAP system administrators
• IT managers
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• Technical basis knowledge about SAP
NetWeaver technology
• Basis knowledge about system
administration of min. one operating
• system
• Overall knowledge about operating of
databases
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
• Install and configure an adaptive • This training is a Early Product Training
computing landscape (EPT) based on workshop material and
• Use an adaptive computing landscape training systems used for training
• Find and solve problems in adaptive purposes during Ramp-up phase.
computing landscape • Early Product Trainings are conducted
• Explain basic functions of adaptive in form of workshops as the focus is
computing controller in an overview providing early access to important
SOFTWARE information using early course material
• Adaptive Computing Controller in SAP instead of using detailed course binders.
NetWeaver Technology • The course material is available in
CONTENT English only.
• Overview adaptive computing
• Architecture of adaptive computing
landscape
• Installation adaptive computing
controller
• Customizing of control components
and of landscape
• Usage of adaptive computing controller

www.sap.nl/education 261
SAP System Administration
User & Security

SAPTEC NW ADM100 NW ADM960 NW C_TADMSEC_04 NW

Fundamentals of SAP Web AS Security in SAP System SAP Consultant
SAP Web AS Administration I Environments Certification Technology
Consultant SAP NetWeaver
– SAP Security (2004)
3 days 5 days 3 days
3 hours
SAPNW NW ADM950 NW
SAP NetWeaver Overview Secure SAP System
Management

3 days 2 days

NW001 NW ADM940 NW
Technology Solutions SAP Authorization Concept
Powered by
SAP NetWeaver

8 hours 3 days

ADM200 NW ADM955 ERP

SAP Web Application SAP GRC Access Control –
Server Java Administration Installation

5 days 4 days

OIM70 NW TZNWIM NW
Online Knowledge Product SAP NetWeaver Identity
SAP NetWeaver Identity Management 7.0
Management 7.0

19 hours 5 days

ADM940 · SAP Authorization Concept

DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1980 STARTING DATES 26-jan-09, 6-apr-09, 15-jun-09

TARGET GROUP CONTENT • Central user administration (CUA)

• Project team members • Introduction • Integration into organizational
• User/authorization administrators from • Elements of the SAP authorization management, including a
system administration and user concept demonstration (without structural
departments • User master record authorization in HR)
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED • Working with the Profile Generator SOFTWARE
• SAPTEC (Fundamentals of SAP Web AS) (roles, composite roles, reference roles, SAP R/3 Enterprise
or SAP01 (SAP Overview) derived roles, Customizing roles) NOTES

• Basic or advanced courses in at least one • Profile Generator: installation and The concepts explained here are
application area upgrade demonstrated using an SAP R/3 system.
GOALS • Access control and user administration For the most part, however, they can be
• Explaining the elements, strategies, and (password rules, special users, user and applied to other components. A
tools of the SAP authorization concept authorization administration) fundamental knowledge of the SAP
• Creating and assigning authorizations • Analysis and monitoring functions environment is essential for this course.
using the Profile Generator • Special authorization components, use
• Using the “Central User of area menus
Administration” (CUA) tool • Transport of authorization components

262
SAP System Administration
User & Security
ADM950 · Secure SAP System Management
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1320 STARTING DATES 2-feb-09, 16-apr-09
TARGET GROUP
Professional security auditors, SAP
security administrators, project team
members
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAPTEC (Fundamentals of SAP Web AS)
• ADM100 (SAP Web AS Administration I)
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• Knowledge of security issues, technical
background (Web technologies, SAP
ITS, fundamental knowledge of SAP
systems)
• ADM940 (SAP Authorization Concept)
GOALS
This course will prepare you to:
• Identify and protect sensitive data and
mechanisms in live solutions based on
SAP Web AS
• Use the SAP Audit Information System
ADM955 · SAP GRC Access Control – Installation
DURATION 4 days PRICE € 2640 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• GRC Consultants
• Security Administrators
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAPTEC Fundamentals of SAP Web AS
• NW001 Technology Solutions Powered
by SAP NetWeaver
• ADM200 Administration AS Java
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• GRC300 SAP GRC Access Control –
Risk Analysis and Remediation
(formerly known as Compliance
Calibrator)
• GRC310 SAP GRC Access Control –
Compliant User Provisioning &
to structure and conduct thorough
security checks and configure
important security monitoring
mechanisms
• Configure standard SAP role
maintenance tools to produce secure
company-specific roles and
authorization profiles
• Secure change management
mechanisms in production system
landscapes and protect system
administration tools frommisuse
CONTENT
• Introduction and overview
• Configuring and using the SAP Audit
Information System
• Configuring and using the auditing,
logging, and tracing tools provided by
SAP
• Enterprise Role Mgmt. (formerly Access
Enforcer & Role Expert)
• SM001 Introduction to SAP Solution
Manager
PREREQUISITES – OPTIONAL
• GRC200 Manage Compliance with SAP
E-learning: Introduction to Virsa
Compliance Calibrator v5.1
• GRC220 Compliant Provisioning with
SAP E-learning: Introduction to Virsa
Access Enforcer v5.1
GOALS
• Identify the pre-installation
requirements for SAP GRC Access
Control 5.2
• Monitoring and protecting accesses and
transactions, tables, and programs
• Configuring secure role and
authorization maintenance
• Securing the change management
process
• Secure system administration
• Critical authorizations, authorization
combinations, and authorization
groups
SOFTWARE
SAP R/3 Enterprise
NOTES
This course assumes that you are familiar
with many SAP system administration and
system architecture functions. The course
materials are available in English only.
• Install SAP GRC Access Control 5.2
components
• Perform post-installation tasks to
configure SAP GRC Access Control 5.2
CONTENT
• SAP GRC Access Control Overview and
Product Component Tours
• SAP GRC Access Control Pre-
Installation Requirements
• SAP GRC Access Control Installation
• Virsa Compliance Calibrator
Configuration
• Virsa Firefighter for SAP Configuration
• Virsa Access Enforcer Configuration
• Virsa Role Expert Configuration
www.sap.nl/education 263
SAP System Administration
User & Security
ADM960 · Security in SAP System Environments
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1980 STARTING DATES 9-feb-09, 20-apr-09
TARGET GROUP
• SAP system administrators, project team
members
• Employees responsible for technical
system security
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAPTEC (Fundamentals of SAP Web AS)
• ADM100 (SAP Web AS Administration I)
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• Experience in security-related issues
• Technical background (Web
technologies, SAP ITS, SAP
technologies)
GOALS
This course will prepare you to:
• Raise awareness about security topics
264
• Improve security in an SAP system
environment
CONTENT
• Fundamentals and objectives of system
security
- Authentication and encryption
• Network basics
- Communication, TCP/IP, ports
- Routing, firewalls, proxies, SAProuter
• Security in the SAP system
- Authentication and passwords
- Auditing as intrusion detection
- RFCs, trusted RFCs, RFC destinations
- Encryption,SNC
• Cryptography basics, PKI, TCS
• SAP Web AS, SAP ITS, and SAP
Enterprise Portal
- Encryption, SSL, SNC
- Authentication, certificates, Single Sign-
On
• Logon tickets, X.509, SSL, PAS
• Collaboration and network security
- DMZ, intrusion detection
- Application security: digital signatures
SOFTWARE
• SAP Web Application Server 6.20
NOTES
To understand the technologies covered
in this course, participants need some
prior knowledge of basic Internet security
issues. The course materials are available
in English only.
SAP System Administration
DB Administration

SAPTEC NW ADM505 NW ADM506 NW

Fundamentals of Oracle Database Oracle Database
SAP Web AS Administration I Administration II

3 days 3 days 2 days

SAPNW NW ADM515 NW
SAP NetWeaver Overview SAP DB Database
Administration MaxDB

3 days 3 days

NW001 NW ADM520 NW BIT660 NW

Technology Solutions Database Administration Data Archiving
Powered by MS SQL Server
SAP NetWeaver

8 hours 3 days 3 days

ADM525 NW
SAP NetWeaver on DB2
UDB for iSeries: Database
Administration

5 days

ADM530 NW
SAP NetWeaver on DB2
UDB for z/OS: Database
Administration

4 days

ADM535 NW
DB2 UDB (UNIX and
Windows) Database
Administration

3 days

CERTIFICATION Solution Academy basic training as Technology Consultant SAP NetWeaver 2004 – SAP Web AS for DB

(for new SAP WebAS consultants) TADM10 > TADM12 > ADM515 > C_TADM50_04
ALTERNATIVE COURSES SAPTEC > ADM100 > ADM102 > ADM110 > ADM200 > ADM315 > ADM325 > ADM515 > C_TADM50_04
CERTIFICATION Solution Academy basic training as Technology Consultant SAP NetWeaver 2004 – SAP Web AS for Oracle

(for new SAP WebAS consultants) TADM10 > TADM12 > TADM51 > C_TADM51_04
ALTERNATIVE COURSES SAPTEC > ADM100 > ADM102 > ADM110 > ADM200 > ADM315 > ADM325 > ADM505 > ADM506 > C_TADM51_04

CERTIFICATION Solution Academy basic training as Technology Consultant SAP NetWeaver 2004 – SAP Web AS for MS SQL Server

(for new SAP WebAS consultants) TADM10 > TADM12 > TADM53 > C_TADM53_04
ALTERNATIVE COURSES SAPTEC > ADM100 > ADM102 > ADM110 > ADM200 > ADM315 > ADM325 > ADM520 > C_TADM53_04

CERTIFICATION Solution Academy basic training as Technology Consultant SAP NetWeaver 2004 – SAP Web AS for DB2 UDB

(for new SAP WebAS consultants) TADM10 > TADM12 > TADM56 > C_TADM56_04
ALTERNATIVE COURSES SAPTEC > ADM100 > ADM102 > ADM110 > ADM200 > ADM315 > ADM325 > ADM535 > C_TADM56_04

Voor de meest actuele certificeringinformatie verwijzen wij u graag naar www.sap.com/services/education/certification

www.sap.nl/education 265
SAP System Administration
DB Administration
ADM505 · Database Administration Oracle
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1980 STARTING DATES 11-mei-09, 2-mrt-09
TARGET GROUP
• Database administrators
• SAP system administrators
• Project team members
• Technology consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAPTEC (Fundamentals of SAP Web AS)
• Fundamental understanding of Oracle
databases
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• SAP system administrators should
attend the course ADM100 (SAPWeb AS
Administration I)
ADM506 · Oracle Database Administration II
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1320 STARTING DATES 14-mei-09, 5-mrt-09
TARGET GROUP
• Database administrators
• SAP system administrators
• Project team members
• Technology consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAPTEC (Fundamentals of SAP Web AS)
• ADM505 (Oracle Database
Administration I)
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• ADM315 (Workload Analysis)
GOALS
• Describe memory management in the
266
• Basic knowledge of system CONTENT
administration of at least one operating • Fundamentals of the Oracle database
system • Data backups
GOALS - Backup concepts
• Describing the structure of an Oracle - Backing up data
database • Database restore and recovery of the
• Administering Oracle databases using database
SAP tools (BR tools) • Database monitoring
• Putting effective data backup strategies - Working with BR tools
into practice - Working with CCMS tools
• Saving and recovering databases • Database storage management
SOFTWARE
• SAP Web Application Server 6.40
• Oracle 9.2
Oracle database • Cost-based optimizer in the SAP
• Regularly monitoring an Oracle environment
database with the SAP database monitor • Analyzing the physical and logical
• Analyzing and optimizing database layout
performance SOFTWARE
CONTENT • SAP Web Application Server 6.40
• Introduction to Oracle memory • Oracle 9.2
management NOTES
• Analyzing the performance of and Optimizing database parameters and the
optimizing the database hardware configuration are not covered as
• Monitoring the database instance part of this course. The course materials
• Analyzing the application design are in English.
• Index management and optimization
SAP System Administration
DB Administration
ADM515 · SAP DB Database Administration
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1980 STARTING DATES 9-feb-09
TARGET GROUP
• Database administrators
• SAP system administrators
• Project team members
• Technology consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAPTEC (Fundamentals of SAP Web AS)
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• For SAP system administrators: ADM100
(SAP Web AS Administration I)
• Basic knowledge of administrating at
least one operating system
• Basic knowledge in the area of relational
databases
GOALS
• At the end of this course you will be
ADM520 · Database Administration MS SQL Server
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1980 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• Database administrators
• SAP system administrators
• Project team members
• Technology consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAPTEC (Fundamentals of SAP Web AS)
• Fundamental knowledge of the
Microsoft SQL Server database system
and of the Windows NT 4.0/Windows
2000 operating system
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• SAP system administrators should
attend the course ADM100 (SAP Web AS
Administration I)
able to manage a MaxDB using the • Performance monitoring
database’s administration tools SOFTWARE
(DBMGUI, DBMCLI) and tools from • SAP Web Application Server 6.40
the SAP systems • MaxDB 7.5
• Implement suitable database backup NOTES
strategies and This training is also intended for
• Recognize performance bottlenecks. customers who are still using an SAP DB
CONTENT as the new MaxDB tools that are
• Basics and database structure presented in this course can also be used
• Data backup for older releases such as SAP DB 7.3.
• Backup concepts Those customers who use the SAP DB /
• Implementing the backup MaxDB with non-SAP products may also
• Recovering and reparing the database participate in this course. In this case, they
• Database monitoring do not have to attend SAPTEC
• CCMS monitors (Fundamentals of SAP Web AS).
• Database configuration
GOALS • Working with SQL Server monitors
• Increasing your knowledge of database • Working with CCMS monitors
administration by using CCMS database • System maintenance and
tools in SAP systems and Microsoft SQL troubleshooting
Server tools SOFTWARE
• Developing suitable backup strategies SAP Web Application Server 6.20
• Detecting and solving performance NOTES
bottlenecks The course materials are in English.
CONTENT However, the course is held in the
• SAP system architecture and MS SQL language of the country where it takes
Server architecture place. The course ADM520 (MS SQL
• Data backups Server Database Administration) replaces
• Backup concepts course BC520 (MS SQL Server Database
• Backing up data Administration) and is held using a
• Database restore Microsoft SQL Server 2000 system.
• Database monitoring
www.sap.nl/education 267
SAP System Administration
DB Administration
ADM525 · SAP NetWeaver on DB2 UDB for iSeries: Database Administration
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 3300 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• Database administrators
• SAP system administrators and
technology consultants
• Project team members
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAPTEC Fundamentals of SAP Web AS
• Basic knowledge of relational databases
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• For SAP system administrators: ADM100
(SAP Web AS Administration I)
• Basic knowledge of administrating at
least one operating system
GOALS
• Description of implementing SAP on
i5/OS
ADM530 · SAP NetWeaver on DB2 UDB for z/OS: Database Administration
DURATION 4 days PRICE € 2640 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• Database and SAP system administrators
• Project team members
• Technology consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAPTEC Fundamentals of SAP Web AS
• Basic knowledge of administrating z/OS
• Basic knowledge of database
administration
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• For SAP system administrators: ADM100
(SAP Web AS Administration I)
• Basic knowledge of administrating one
of the following operating systems:
Linux, Windows or AIX
• Basic knowledge of DB2 for z/OS
GOALS
You will learn how to prepare the DB2
UDB for z/OS database for SAP
268
• Data backup and recovery with i5/OS
• Basics of problem and performance
analysis
SOFTWARE
• SAP Web Application Server 6.40
CONTENT
• Overview of iSeries and i5/OS
• User interfaces and CL programming
• Overview of system administration
• Use of DB2 UDB by SAP
• Directory structures, security and work
management
• 3-tier, printing and Java with SAP on
i5/OS
• Backup and recovery concepts
• High availability solutions
applications and manage them in a
heterogeneous landscape with SAP
NetWeaver as an application platform. To
do this, use the tools in the SAP system
and the database. You will also learn the
essential features of performance analysis
for SAP systems with DB2 for z/OS.
SOFTWARE
• SAP Web Application Server 6.40
CONTENT
• SAP on zSeries system architecture and
application server platforms
• Database architecture and storage
management
• Database configuration in an SAP
environment
• Data backup and recovery
• Database monitoring using the SAP DB2
UDB monitor
• Software maintenance i5/OS and DB2
UDB
• Installation of SAP Web AS on iSeries
• i5/OS tools for restricting problems and
performance analysis
• Platform-specific SAP tools for
performance analysis
• Principles of database performance
analyses
NOTES
This course is offered by IBM together
with SAP and takes place in IBM’s offices.
For booking details, see
www.ibm.com/services/learning/de.
• Performance monitoring and working
with the DB2 cost-based optimizer in
the SAP system
• Working with the DB2 Dynamic SQL
cache analysis in SAP systems
• Problem analysis and support as well as
high availability options
NOTES
This course is offered by IBM together
with SAP and takes place in IBM’s offices.
For booking details, see abbreviation
ES53E1DE on
www.ibm.com/services/learning/de.
SAP System Administration
DB Administration
ADM535 · DB2 UDB (UNIX and Windows) Database Administration
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1980 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• Database administrators
• SAP system administrators
• Project team members
• Technology consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAPTEC (Fundamentals of SAP Web AS)
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• For SAP system administrators: ADM100
(SAP Web AS Administration I)
• Basic knowledge of administrating at
least one operating system
• Basic knowledge of DB2 UDB
GOALS
• Manage a DB2 UDB in an SAP
environment using the administration
tools in the SAP system and at database
level
• Implement appropriate database backup
strategies
• Recognize performance bottlenecks
CONTENT
• Data backup and recovery
• Various data recovery scenarios
• Handling log files in the database
• Database monitoring using the SAP DB2
UDB monitor
• Database configuration in an SAP
environment
• Storage management
• DB2 Redirected Restore
• Working with the DB2 cost-based
optimizer in the SAP system
• Working with the DB2 Dynamic SQL
cache analysis in SAP systems
• Performance monitoring
• High availability options
SOFTWARE
SAP Web Application Server 6.40
NOTES
The coursematerials used are available in
English only. The course is held in the
local language.
www.sap.nl/education 269
SAP System Administration
SAP SCM – SAP APO Administration

SAPTEC NW ADM100 NW ADM355 NW

Fundamentals of SAP Web AS SAP APO System
SAP Web AS Administration I Administration

3 days 5 days 2 days

SAPNW NW ADM555 NW
SAP NetWeaver Overview liveCache Administration

3 days 2 days

NW001 NW
Technology Solutions
Powered by
SAP NetWeaver

8 hours

ADM355 · SAP APO System Administration

DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1320 STARTING DATES 12-jan-09
TARGET GROUP • The course also looks at the optimizer • New functions in APO 3.1 and
• Project team members and the core interface to OLTP systems. liveCache 7.4
• SAP APO system administrators At the end of the course, participants • Troubleshooting
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED will be able to perform administration SOFTWARE

• SAPTEC Fundamentals of SAP Web AS tasks using the tools provided by SAP. R/3 4.6C
• ADM100 SAP Web AS Administration I • Monitoring SAP APO systems and NOTES

PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED troubleshooting • We recommend that you attend this

• ADM555 liveCache Administration CONTENT course after becoming familiar with the
• Comprehensive knowledge of an • Overview of APO fundamentals of the architecture and
operating system, SAP system • APO Core Interface the administration of SAP systems.
architecture, and the DBMS concept • Core Interface (CIF) monitoring • The course materials are in English.
GOALS • APO optimizer However, the course is held in the
• This course will enable you to • APO and BW language of the country where it takes
understand the fundamentals of SAP • APO authorizations place.
APO – from the architecture to day-to- • APO performance
day administration tasks. • APO disaster recovery strategies

ADM555 · liveCache Administration

DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1320 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP GOALS • Connecting the liveCache to the SAP

• liveCache administrators This course teaches you about liveCache system
• APO system administrators administration as part of an SAP APO SOFTWARE

• Project team members system. • SAP R/3 4.6C

PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED CONTENT • APO 3.1
• SAPTEC Fundamentals of SAP Web AS • liveCache concepts • LIVECACH 7.4
• ADM100 SAP Web AS Administration I • Process structure, memory areas, disk NOTES

PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• Basic knowledge of administering at
least one operating system and database
architecture, and disk configuration
• Tools for liveCache administration
• Backup and recovery of a liveCache
system
• Performance monitoring
We recommend that you attend this
course once you have acquired some
practical experience of administering an
SAP system.

270
SAP System Administration
SAP Business Information Warehouse – SAP BW Administration

BW310 NW BW365 NW
SAP BW Data SAP BW Authorization
Warehousing

5 days 2 days

SAPNW NW BW360 NW
SAP NetWeaver Overview SAP BW Performance &
Administration

3 days 5 days

NW001 NW
Technology Solutions
Powered by
SAP NetWeaver

8 hours

BW001 NW SAPBO NW BOE310 NW BOE320 NW

Business Intelligence
Overview (SAPBI)
5 hours
SAP Business Objects with SA210V3.0 Business
SAP NetWeaver BI Objects Enterprise XI 3.0:
Admin and Security
2 days 2 days
SA210V3.0 Business
Objects Enterprise XI 3.0:
Administering Servers
(Win)
3 days

Cursusdetailgegevens kunt u vinden via de index op pagina 533

SAPBO · SAP Business Objects for SAP NetWeaver BI

Duration 2 days
TARGET GROUP CONTENT • Special Themes
• SAP BI customer, project team • SAP BO Strategy - Authorization
members, and consultants - The SAP BO Tools - Hierarchies
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED - SAP BO Roadmap - Intelligence Search
• Fundamental knowledge in SAP • Business Object architecture - BI Widgets
NetWeaver BI 7.0 - Architecture Overview - Scheduling
• Advanced know-how in reporting - Vocabulary SAP BO - Auditing
capabilities in SAP NetWeaver BI 7.0 - SAP Integration Kit - Performance
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None - BO Universe • Perpspectives
GOALS • Crystal Reports - Pioneer
• Introduction of the reporting options - Connectivity with SAP Netweaver BI - Xcelsius+
with SAP Business Objects alongside - Create a report with Crystal Report - Polestar
with the product roadmap. • Web Intelligence NOTES

• The tools in SAP Business Objects are - Connectivity with SAP Netweaver BI • Please note that this course will not be
introduced and participants gain - Create a report with WebI available before 2009
practical experiences based on hands-on • Xcelsius • This course is only available with
sessions - Connectivity with SAP Netweaver BI English documents
SOFTWARE - Query as a Web Service
• SAP Netweaver BI 7.0 - Create a dashborad with Xcelsius
• BO XI 3.0 • Live Office
- Live Office

www.sap.nl/education 271
SAP System Administration
SAP SRM & SAP CRM – Mobile Sales / Services Administration

SAPTEC NW ADM100 NW CR500 NW

Fundamentals of SAP Web AS CRM Middleware
SAP Web AS Administration I

3 days 5 days 3 days

SAPNW NW
SAP NetWeaver Overview

3 days

NW001 NW
Technology Solutions
Powered by
SAP NetWeaver

8 hours

Cursusdetailgegevens kunt u vinden via de index op pagina 533

272
SAP NetWeaver Composition Environment 7.1 (CE)

SOA400 NW JA400 NW JA410 NW JA450 NW

Overview of Enterprise Introduction to Java EE5 Java on Web Dynpro for Java on
Service Provisioning and SAP NetWeaver 7.1 SAP NetWeaver 7.1
Consumption

3 days 5 days 3 days 5 days

NWC110 NW NWC120 NW BIT420 NW

Modeling Applications with Guided Procedures PI - Proxy Development &
Visual Composer Service Provisioning with
ESR

2 days 3 days 5 days

TZCE11 NW TZNWVC NW TZESR1 NW OCE71 NW

SAP NetWeaver Visual Composer for SAP Enterprise Services Online Knowledge Product
Composition Environment NetWeaver Composition Repository for SAP SAP NetWeaver
7.1 Environment 7.1 NetWeaver Composition Composition Environment
Environment 7.1 7.1
3 days 2 days 1 day 75 hours

BIT420 · PI – Proxy Development & Service Provisioning with ESR

DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED • Development Objects in SAP NW PI 7.1

• Customer and partner who want to
develop their own scenarios, interfaces
and proxies using SAP NetWeaver
Process Integration 7.0
• Customer and partner who want to
create Enterprise Services using SAP
NetWeaver Process Integration 7.1
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• BC400 ABAP Workbench Foundations
• BIT400 SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration - Foundations
• SOA100 SAP Enterprise SOA –
Fundamentals or
• BC401 ABAP Objects or equivalent
ABAP Objects knowledge
GOALS
• Create design objects in the Enterprise
Service Repository
• Understand the methodology of service
derivation using SAP NW PI 7.1
• Proxy generation in ABAP
• Implement server proxies and
Enterprise Services using ABAP
• Understand and use the services registry
SOFTWARE
• SAP NetWeaver Process Integration 7.1
• Concepts of Signature Derivation out of
SAP Models in SAP NW PI 7.1
• Proxy generation for ABAP in SAP NW
PI 7.0 and 7.1
• Implementing of server proxies and
Enterprise Services in ABAP
• Runtime configuration with
WSADMIN, WSCONFIG,
SOAMANAGER
• Use of the Services Registry
• Mass configuration, Direct Connection
and Communication using WSRM
NOTES

• SOA300 Design Time Governance in CONTENT • It is absolutely essential that you have
Enterprise SOA • Development Environment using SAP attended BIT400 (SAP Exchange
NetWeaver Process Integration Infrastructure) beforehand
• Development Objects in SAP NW PI 7.0

NWC110 · Modeling Applications with Visual Composer

DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP • Develop effective cross applications CONTENT

• Solution Consultants responsible for using SAP NetWeaver Visual Composer. • Explain the purpose of the Visual
creating composite applications using • Understand basic modeling with Visual Composer
SAP NetWeaver Visual Composer on Composer. • Create and Deploy Visual Composer
Composition Environment • Demonstrate how to administer Visual Models
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None Composer. • Use advanced techniques like Service
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None • Use advanced modeling techniques Component Wizard, Validation Rules
GOALS SOFTWARE and Guard conditions
• Use the Visual Composer tool and • SAP ERP System (based on ECC 6.0) • Understand model management
understand how it fits in with • SAP NetWeaver CE 7.1 options
Composition Environment • Demonstrate knowledge of Destinations
and Service destinations
www.sap.nl/education 273
SAP NetWeaver Composition Environment 7.1 (CE)

NWC120 · Guided Procedures

DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP • Explain how to build guided CONTENT

• Project team members,
• Business process experts
• Developers interested in learning about
guided procedures
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• Familiar with SAP NetWeaver
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED
• Previous experience with business
process design.
GOALS
• Explore fundamentals of guided
procedures and Composite
Applications.
procedures, including callable objects, • Introduction to Guided Procedures
blocks, processes, form processing, and • Build your first process
email templates. • Callable Objects
• Provide insight into guided procedures • Process Actions
and Composite Applications. • Process Blocks
Understanding when professional • Email templates
programming skills are required, and • Forms processing
what can be developed without • Special step types
programming skills. • Administration and monitoring
SOFTWARE • Appendix: Development resources
• SAP NetWeaver Composition
Environment 7.1

TZCE11 · SAP NetWeaver Composition Environment 7.1

DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP GOALS • Modeling of user centric processes,

• Solution Consultants covering the In this workshop, we will concentrate on consuming of services, and custom
Ramp-up Phase for SAP NetWeaver the use of the design time perspective of business logic
Composition Environment 7.1 NetWeaver CE 7.1 for composite SOFTWARE NetWeaver CE

PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED None applications NOTES

PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED CONTENT The focus of this intensive three-day

• Java Programming (JEE5) – basics
• WebDynpro for Java (NW7.0 and earlier)
– basics
• Web Services – basics
• Overview and positioning of SAP
NetWeaver Composition Environment
7.1
• Developing composite applications on
the SAP NetWeaver Composition
Environment 7.1
workshop is Model-Driven development
of composites using the Composite
Application Framework and Guided
Procedures. Minimal coverage of pure
JEE5 topics and Web Dynpro is included as
the students should be familiar with these
concepts prior to attending.

TZNWVC · Visual Composer for SAP NetWeaver Composition Environment 7.1

DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP composite applications, in a code-free • Advanced modelling Techniques

ISVs, Customers, Business Developers, BPX modelling environment, using the SAP • Lifecycle Management
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED None NetWeaver Visual Composer for • Portal Content Creation
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED Composition Environment 7.1. SOFTWARE

General knowledge of SAP software CONTENT • NetWeaver CE

GOALS • Visual Composer Overview
This course will prepare you to rapidly • Model Management
compose and adapt rich user interfaces for • Componentization & Model Reuse

274
SAP NetWeaver Composition Environment 7.1 (CE)

TZESR1 · Enterprise Services Repository for SAP NetWeaver Composition Environment 7.1
DURATION 1 day PRICE € 590 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP Environment 7.1 • Authorization concepts

Solution Consultants covering the Ramp- • Introduce basic concepts for service • Service Provisioning and Consumption
up Phase for SAP NetWeaver Composition modelling and governance using the SOFTWARE
Environment 7.1 ESR • NetWeaver CE
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED None CONTENT NOTES

PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• Java Programming (JEE5) – basics
• Web Services – basics
GOALS
• This course introduces the Enterprise
Service Repository (ESR) for the
SAP NetWeaver Composition
• Introduction and Overview of ESR on
NetWeaver Composition Environment
• Use-cases for CE ESR
• Installation, maintenance and
configuration
• Overview of Repository and Registry,
Standards Review
This workshop is intended to introduce
the ESR on CE and provide background
and perspective on its use and operation.
Hands-on exercises will include Service
Provisioning (design, configure, publish)
and consumption using NWDS and CAF.

www.sap.nl/education 275
SAP NetWeaver Composite Applications

TZRPM4 NW ANA10 NW
Early Product Training SAP SAP xApp Analytics using
xRPM 4.0 SAP Net Weaver Visual
Composer

3 days 3 days

OXE10S NW OXL10S NW OXQ10S NW

Online Knowledge Product Online Knowledge Product Online Knowledge Product
SAP xAPPS Emissions SAP xApps Integration SAP xAPPS Cost and
Management 1.0 Exploration and Production Quotation Management
(xIEP) 1.0 (xCQM) 1.0

OXP10S NW OXP20S NW OXR10S NW

Online Knowledge Product Online Knowledge Product Online Knowledge Product
SAP xAPPS Product SAP xAPPS Product SAP xAPPS Resource and
Definition 1.0 Definition 2.0 Program Management 1.0

OXR20S NW OXR40S NW OXA11S NW

Online Knowledge Product Online Knowledge Product Online Knowledge product
SAP xAPPS Resource and SAP xRPM 4.0 SAP xAPP Analytics 1.1
Program Management 2.0

TZRPM4 · Early Product Training SAP xRPM 4.0

DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP and Portfolio Items in SAP Enterprise • User Management and Authorization
• SAP xRPM Projekt Manager and Project Portal and carry out the necessary • Overview cProjects 4.0
Team Members customizing settings in the xRPM core SOFTWARE

• SAP xRPM Consultants • Define and use Questionnaires and • XRPM 4.0
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED Scoring Models NOTES

• Knowledge of processes in portfolio,
project and resource management
• Understanding of SAP technology and
software architecture
• Customizing experience in at least one
of the following components: ALE, HR,
FI/CO, PS, cProjects
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• Understand functions, processes and
integration scenarios of SAP xApp
Resource and Portfolio Management
(xRPM)
• Create Portfolios, Portfolio hierarchies
• Set up Strategic Financial and Resource
Demand Planning in xRPM
• Create and Edit projects in cProjects 4.0
CONTENT
• Definition of Portfolios and Portfolio
Items
• Field configurations
• Strategic Financial and Resource
Planning
• Questionnaires and Scoring Models
• Portfolio Reviews and Analysis
• Integration with Project Management
systems, HCM, FI/CO and SAP xApp
Product Definition (xPD)
• The focus of this workshop is providing
early access to important information
using early course material instead of
using detailed course binders and
exercises.
• The training materials are available in
English only.
• This training is offered as”Early Product
Training”. The goal of this workshop is
to provide early access to classroom
training for experienced consultants.
This training does not use SAP standard
training systems or SAP standard course
materials.

276
SAP NetWeaver Composite Applications
OXA11S · Online Knowledge product SAP xAPP Analytics 1.1
PRICE € 350 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• Consultants responsible for
implementing SAP xApp Analytics 1.1
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
The SAP xApp Analytics 1.1 Learning
Maps are designed for qualified
project participants. You require:
• Knowledge equivalent to a consultant
profile for the specific industry or
solution
• Knowledge of NetWeaver 2004s – Visual
Composer required
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• Introduce SAP Analytics as SAP’s
initiative to empower the business
person by providing insights in the
context of the business process.
• Gain an understanding of the Visual
Composer as a Tool and how it fits into
SAP NetWeaver.
• Develop effective cross application
analytical content using the Visual
Composer for Analytics.
• Deploy SAP Analytics content to the
SAP Enterprise Portal for Web
Application Server 6.40
• Get an overview about the predefined
and delivered SAP Analytic models.
CONTENT
The Online Knowledge Product covers the
analytical applications for th following
industries and generic solutions:
• A&D, EC&O, IM&C (Facility Operations
– Damage Analytics, Pilot Repor Service
Manager, Vendor Analytics)
• Automotive (ICH Alert Monitoring –
SMI)
• Banking & Insurance (Banking Based II
– Defaulted Exposures, Banking Based II
– Regulatory Capital Requirements,
Banking Based II – Overview of Col-
laterals and Guarantees, Expenditure
Detail, Expenditure Overview, Expendi-
ture Trend)
• Chemical (Customer Profitability
Analysis)
• Consumer Products & Apparel
Footwear (AFS Reseller Analytics, Brand
Analytics, Category Cockpit, Category
Promotion Analysis, Category Sales
Analysis, Channel Performance VTD,
Trade Marketing Analytics)
• Healthcare (Hospital Contribution
Margin, Diagnoses Related Group
(DRG) Monitor, Hospital Material
Management, Occupancy Monitor)
• Higher Education & Research
(Admission Overview, Registration
Overview)
• High Tech (NPDI Projects Analytics)
• Logistics Service Providers (Sales
Manager Logistics, Transportation
Manager)
• Media (Entertainment Analytics –
License Sales Contract, Key Account
Manager Advertising, PCB Analytics –
By Title)
• Mill Products (Mill Product Profit, Mill
Product Sales)
• Oil & Gas and Mining (Bulk Shipment
Tracking)
• Public Sector (Tax and Revenue
Management, Funds Management,
Maintenance Cost Monitor – Grantee
Management)
• Retail (Category Manager,
Replenishment Planner, Store Manager)
• Utilities (Meter Reading Administrator
Utilities, Process Manager Utilities, Sales
Analyst Utilities)
• mySAP CRM (Order and Lead Analysis
of Channel Manager, Web Analysis,
Connection and Open Ticket Analysis,
Marketing Project Performance
Analysis, Order and Lead Analysis for a
Channel Partner, Sales Pipeline Analysis,
Competitive Win/ Loss Analysis)
• mySAP ERP Financials and Human Cap-
ital Management (Blocked Order List,
Corporate Governance:
Design/Effectiveness/Issue/Overview/
Process/Signoff, Consolidation, Credit
Monitor, Early Warning List, Head-
count, Learning, Line Manager: My
Budget, Line Manager: My Team, Over-
time-Illness, Profit Center Accounting,
Recruiting)
• SAP FI-CA (Credit Manager)
• mySAP PLM: Environment, Health and
Safety (Average Number of Inciden per
1000 Employees, Workarea, Exposure
Log, Waste Approvals, Quote of already
released Quantities)
• SAP Manufacturing (Availability OEE,
Capacity Utilization, Execution Time
Analysis, Inventory Overview, Manufac-
turing Order Analysis, Material Con-
sumption Value, Material Utilization,
OEE Overall Equipment Effectiveness,
Performance Analysis OEE, Plan Real-
ization, Production Flexibility, Quality
Problem Analysis, OEE Yield Scrap,
Scrap Quantity Analysis – Plant Level,
Take from Stock or By, Yield OEE, Qual-
ity of Purchased Parts)
• mySAP SCM (Demand/ Supply Match,
Forwarding Agent Efficiency, Forward-
ing Agent Requirement Analysis, Global
Capacity Utilization, Global Inventory
View, Order Analytics, Supplier Rating
Monitor, Warehouse Stock Analysis,
Warehouse Workload Historical View)
• SAP Service and Asset Management
(Downtime Analysis, Maintenance Cos
Monitor – Work View, Maintenance
Cost Monitor – Equipment View,
Service Organization Performance
Analysis)
• mySAP SRM (Category Management,
Contract Management, Supplier Order
Management)
SOFTWARE
• ERP ECC 6.0
• CRM 2005
• SAP NW 2004S
NOTES
• This content is provided by SAP’s
Online Knowledge Products, see
http://service. sap.com/okp
• All materials are online. Actual learning
duration may vary depending on the
individual learner. Access to training
system for this OKP is not provided by
www.sap.nl/education 277
SAP NetWeaver Composite Applications
OXE10S · Online Knowledge Product SAP xAPPS Emissions Management 1.0
PRICE € 350 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• xEM Solution Consultants
• xEM Sales/presales employees
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• Knowledge equivalent to a consultant
profile for SAP PLM EH&S or
• SAP Netweaver technology
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• Project experience
GOALS
• Describe the SAP xEM 1.0
• Plan your SAP xEM 1.0 implementation
project
• Implement SAP xEM 1.0
OXL10S · Online Knowledge Product SAP xApps Integration Exploration and Production (xIEP) 1.0
PRICE € 350 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• xIEP Solution Consultants
• xIEP Technology Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• Knowledge of SAP Oil and Gas 4.6 and
above
• Knowledge equivalent to a consultant
profile for xApps
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• Project experience
GOALS
• Describe SAP xIEP 1.0
• Plan your SAP xIEP 1.0 implementation
project
278
CONTENT
This Online Knowledge Product contains
the official SAP new-release knowledge for
SAP xEM 1.0 and makes it available for
access anywhere and anytime. It is role-
based and prioritized to provide the most
convenient and efficient learning
experience. The Online Knowledge
Product consists of 2 separate Learning
Maps for Solution Consultants and
Sales/Presales employees. Each Learning
Map contains a variety of learning objects,
such as recorded expert presentations,
interactive tutorials and simulations,
• Implement SAP xIEP 1.0
CONTENT
This Online Knowledge Product contains
the official SAP new-release knowledge for
SAP xIEP 1.0 and makes it available for
access anywhere and anytime. It is role-
based and prioritized to provide the most
convenient and efficient learning
experience. The Online Knowledge
Product consists of 2 separate Learning
Maps for Solution and Technology
Consultants. Each Learning Map contains
a variety of learning objects, such as
recorded expert presentations, interactive
documentation and self-tests. In addition
to the Online Knowledge Product, Live
Expert Sessions can be offered. The
student has the opportunity to attend
these sessions online without the need to
travel. The focus of the Live Expert
Sessions is to clarify open topics about SAP
xEM 1.0.
NOTES
Online Knowledge Products are offered in
English only.
tutorials and simulations, documentation
and self-tests. In addition to the Online
Knowledge Product, Live Expert Sessions
can be offered. The student has the
opportunity to attend these sessions
online without the need to travel. The
focus of the Live Expert Sessions is to
clarify open topics about SAP xIEP 1.0.
NOTES
Online Knowledge Products are offered in
English.
SAP NetWeaver Composite Applications
OXP10S · Online Knowledge Product SAP xAPPS Product Definition 1.0
PRICE € 350 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• xPD Application Consultants
• xPD Technology Consultants
• xPD Sales/presales Employees
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• Application and Technology
Consultants:Knowledge equivalent to
an
• SAP xApps consultant profile
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• Project experience
GOALS
• Describe SAP xPD 1.0
• Plan your SAP xPD 1.0 implementation
OXP20S · Online Knowledge Product SAP xAPPS Product Definition 2.0
PRICE € 350 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• xPD Solution Consultants
• xPD Technology Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• Knowledge equivalent to an SAP xApps
consultant profile
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• Plan an xPD 2.0 project
• Implement xPD 2.0
OXQ10S · Online Knowledge Product SAP xAPPS Cost and Quotation Management (xCQM) 1.0
PRICE € 350 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• xCQM Solution Consultants
• xCQM Technology Consultants
• xCQM Sales Employees
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• Solution and Technology Consultants:
Knowledge equivalent to an SAP
• xCQM consultant profile
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• Project experience
GOALS
• Describe SAP xCQM 1.0
• Plan your SAP xCQM 1.0
implementation project
project
• Implement SAP xPD 1.0
CONTENT
This Online Knowledge Product contains
the official SAP new-release knowledge for
SAP xPD 1.0 and makes it available for
access anywhere and anytime. It is role-
based and prioritized to provide the most
convenient and efficient learning
experience. The Online Knowledge
Product consists of 3 separate Learning
Maps for Application Consultants,
Technology Consultants and
Sales/Presales employees. Each Learning
CONTENT
• Solution Consultant:
- SAP xApp Product Definition (xPD) 2.0
Overview
- xPD 2.0 Business Processes
- xPD 2.0 Configuration
• Technology Consultant
- xPD 2.0 Overview
- xPD 2.0 Business Processes
- Installation and Configuration of xPD
2.0
• Implement SAP xCQM 1.0
CONTENT
This Online Knowledge Product contains
the official SAP new-release knowledge for
SAP xCQM 1.0 and makes it available for
access anywhere and anytime. It is role-
based and prioritized to provide the most
convenient and efficient learning
experience. The Online Knowledge
Product consists of 3 separate Learning
Maps for Solution Consultants,
Technology Consultants and
Sales/Presales employees. Each Learning
Map contains a variety of learning objects,
Map contains a variety of learning objects,
such as recorded expert presentations,
interactive tutorials and simulations,
documentation and self-tests. In addition
to the Online Knowledge Product, Live
Expert Sessions can be offered. The
student has the opportunity to attend
these sessions online without the need to
travel. The focus of the Live Expert
Sessions is to clarify open topics about SAP
xPD 1.0.
NOTES
Online Knowledge Products are offered in
English only.
NOTES
• This content is provided by SAP’s
Online Knowledge Products.
Information regarding Online
Knowledge Products and instructions
on how to access the Online Knowledge
Products are available: http://service.
sap.com/okp
• All materials are online. Actual learning
duration may vary depending on the
individual learner. Access to training
system for this OKP is not provided by
SAP Education.
such as recorded expert presentations,
interactive tutorials and simulations,
documentation and self-tests. In addition
to the Online Knowledge Product, Live
Expert Sessions can be offered. The
student has the opportunity to attend
these sessions online without the need to
travel. The focus of the Live Expert
Sessions is to clarify open topics about SAP
xCQM 1.0.
NOTES
Online Knowledge Products are offered in
English.
www.sap.nl/education 279
SAP NetWeaver Composite Applications
OXR10S · Online Knowledge Product SAP xAPPS Resource and Program Management 1.0
PRICE € 350 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• xRPM Solution Consultants
• xRPM Technology Consultants
• xRPM Project Team Members
• xRPM Sales/presales employees
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• Solution Consultant: process &
customizing know how and
customizing of backend application (3+
years experience) in at least one of the
following components: HR, FI/CO, PS,
CATS; ALE setup, debugging; good
understanding about SAP Technology
• Knowledge according to SAP
Technology Consultant profile
• Knowledge according to SAP Portal
Consultant profile
• Knowledge according to SAP BI
OXR20S · Online Knowledge Product SAP xAPPS Resource and Program Management 2.0
PRICE € 350 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• xRPM Process Consultants
• xRPM Application Consultants
• xRPM Enterprise Portal Consultants
• xRPM Sales/presales employees
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• Process Consultant: Business expertise,
basic understanding of process design,
good understanding of SAP xRPM 1.0
components and customizing
• Application consultant: Process &
customizing know how of backend
application (3+ years experience) in at
least one of the following components:
HR, FI/CO, PS, CATS; ALE setup,
debugging skills; good understanding
about SAP Technology, good
understanding of SAP xRPM 1.0
• Portal Consultant: Knowledge of Portal
Installation, Portal Framework, KM
Framework, iView Development, Java
Programming, Java Connector and Role
Configuration
280
Consultant profile
• Project experience
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• Describe the SAP xRPM 1.0
• Plan your SAP xRPM 1.0
implementation project
• Implement SAP xRPM 1.0
CONTENT
This Online Knowledge Product contains
the official SAP new-release knowledge for
SAP xRPM 1.0 and makes it available for
access anywhere and anytime. It is role-
based and prioritized to provide the most
convenient and efficient learning
experience. The Online Knowledge
Product consists of 3 separate Learning
Maps for Solution Consultants,
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• Project experience
GOALS
• Describe the SAP xRPM 2.0
• Plan your SAP xRPM 2.0
implementation project
• Implement SAP xRPM 2.0
CONTENT
This Online Knowledge Product contains
the official SAP new-release knowledge for
SAP xRPM 2.0 and makes it available for
access anywhere and anytime. It is role-
based and prioritized to provide the most
convenient and efficient learning
experience. The Online Knowledge
Product consists of 4 separate Learning
Maps for Process Consultants, Application
Consultants, Enterprise Portal
Consultants and Sales/Presales employees.
Each Learning Map contains a variety of
learning objects, such as recorded expert
presentations, interactive tutorials and
simulations, documentation and self-
Technology Consultant and Sales/Presales
employees. Each Learning Map contains a
variety of learning objects, such as
recorded expert presentations, interactive
tutorials and simulations, documentation
and self-tests. In addition to the Online
Knowledge Product, Live Expert Sessions
can be offered. The student has the
opportunity to attend these sessions
online without the need to travel. The
focus of the Live Expert Sessions is to
clarify open topics about the SAP xRPM
1.0.
NOTES
Online Knowledge Products are offered in
English
tests. In addition to the Online Knowledge
Product, Live Expert Sessions can be
offered. The student has the opportunity
to attend these sessions online without
the need to travel. The focus of the Live
Expert Sessions is to clarify open topics
about SAP xRPM 2.0.
NOTES
Online Knowledge Products are offered in
English only.
SAP NetWeaver Composite Applications
OXR40S · Online Knowledge Product SAP xRPM 4.0
DURATION 49 hours PRICE € 350 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• xRPM Solution Consultants
• xRPM Technology Consultants
• xRPM Project Team Members
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• For presales role you require:
- Knowledge equivalent to a role covered
by Presales Account experience.
- Upcoming participation in the sales
cycle for SAP xRPM 4.0.
• For a consultant role you require:
- More than 12 months project
experience.
- Upcoming participation in an SAP
xRPM 4.0 project.
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• Describe the SAP xRPM 4.0
• Plan your SAP xRPM 4.0
implementation project
• Implement SAP xRPM 4.0
CONTENT
• Solution Engineers / Presales
- xRPM 4.0 Overview
- xRPM 4.0 Business Processes
- xRPM 2.0 – 4.0 Migration
• Application Consultants
- xRPM 4.0 Overview
- xRPM 4.0 Business Processes
- xRPM 4.0 Configuration
• Enterprise Portal Consultants
- xRPM 4.0 Overview
- SAP xRPM 4.0 Running in Enterprise
Portal 7.0
- Summary
NOTES
• This content is provided by SAP’s
Online Knowledge Products.
Information regarding Online
Knowledge Products and instructions
on how to access the Online Knowledge
Products are available: http://service.
sap.com/okp
• Course length:
- Solution Engineers / Presales 13 hrs
- Application Consultants 31 hrs
- Enterprise Portal Consultants 5 hrs
• All materials are online
www.sap.nl/education 281
SAP Solution Manager
Implementation

NW001 NW
Technology Solutions
Powered by
SAP NetWeaver

8 hours

SAPNW NW SM510 NW SM520 NW

SAP NetWeaver Overview SAP Solution Manager E-learning with SAP
Global Rollout Solution Manager

3 days 4 hours 4 hours

SM001 NW SMI210 NW SMI310 NW C_SMI310_06

Solution Consultant
SAP Solution Manager SAP Solution Manager SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager 4.0
Introduction Implementation Implementation Tools in
– Solution Manager
Methodology Overview Detail
Implementation Tools
2 hours 1 day 3 days 1 hour

TZACC2 NW TZTDM3
Adaptive Computing Basic Implementation and
Implementation with ACC Configuration of SAP
in SAP NetWeaver TDMS 2006
Technology
7 hours 3 days

OCE71 OIM70 NW
Online Knowledge Product Online Knowledge Product
SAP NetWeaver SAP NetWeaver Identity
Composition Environment Management 7.0
7.1
75 hours 19 hours

SM001 · Solution Manager

DURATION 2 hours PRICE € 150 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP GOALS the SAP Solution Manager. You will be

• Consultants This course will prepare you to: introduced to the benefits of using the
• Project Managers • Define the concept of the SAP Solution SAP Solution Manager during the
• Project Team Leads Manager implementation of your SAP solutions
• Project Team Members • Discuss the tools provided by the SAP and during ongoing support and
• IT Service Desk Managers Solution Manager operations.
• IT Service Desk Members CONTENT SOFTWARE

PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED This course is meant to familiarize you SAP NetWeaver, SAP Solution Manager 4.0
Basic knowledge of SAP systems with the principles and terminology of

282
SAP Solution Manager
Implementation

SM510 · Solution Manager: Global Rollout

DURATION 4 hours PRICE € 350 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP GOALS SOFTWARE

• SAP Solution Manager Solution • Global Roll-out concept • SOL.MAN 4.0

Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SM001 Introduction to SAP Solution
Manager
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• SMI210 SAP Solution Manager
Implementation Methodology
Overview
• SMI310 SAP Solution Manager:
Implementation Tools in Detail
• Benefits of a the use of templates for
rollout
• Use of global templates and it’s
administration with the SAP Solution
Manager
CONTENT
• Global Rollout Overview
• Defining Global Templates
• Implementing at local sites
• Adapting Templates
• Using BC Sets with SAP Solution
Manager

SM520 · E-learning with SAP Solution Manager

DURATION 4 hours PRICE € 350 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP GOALS CONTENT

• SAP Solution Manager Solution
Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SM001 Introduction to SAP Solution
Manager
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• SMI210 SAP Solution Manager
Implementation Methodology
Overview
• The e-learning Management concept • e-learning Management with SAP
• How to include e-learn materials like Solution Manager
the SAP Tutor • e-learning in Implementation or
• How to generate learning maps out of Upgrade Projects
the SAP Solution Manager • e-learning Material Distribution via SAP
Solution Manager
• SAP Tutor for SAP Solution Manager
Customers
SOFTWARE

• SMI310 SAP Solution Manager: • SOL.MAN. 4.0

Implementation Tools in Detail

www.sap.nl/education 283
SAP Solution Manager
Implementation
SMI210 · SAP Solution Manager: Implementation Methodology Overview
DURATION 1 day PRICE € 590 STARTING DATES 4-feb-09, 9-apr-09
TARGET GROUP
Managers, Project Managers, Project Team
Leaders and Project Team Members
responsible for managing, documenting
and implementing SAP solutions
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAP01 (SAP Overview)
• Basic knowledge of SAP systems and
Windows operating environment
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
SAP Implementation Experience
GOALS
At the conclusion of this course, you will
be able to: Describe the “SAP Solution
Manager for Implementation” and within
this tool environment the AcceleratedSAP
SMI310 · SAP Solution Manager: Implementation Tools in Detail
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES 11-feb-09, 15-apr-09
TARGET GROUP
Project managers, project team leaders
and project team members who are
applying the implementation with the
SAP Solution Manager
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
SAP01 (SAP Overview), experience with
the Windows system environment
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
Knowledge about how Business
Configuration Sets (BC-Sets) work
GOALS
This course prepares you to understand
the structure and functions of the SAP
Solution Manager and to use the tools
successfully and efficiently during the
implementation.
284
(ASAP) standard implementation
methodology is structured and used.
CONTENT
• Explain how the different
implementation roadmaps are used to
facilitate each successive phase of the
SAP implementation
• Provide an understanding of the
Solution Manager implementation
toolset and how it is used in the context
of the ASAP roadmap
• Navigate through the Solution Manager
roadmap to follow the methodology
through each successive phase of an
implementation project. The phases
are:
CONTENT
• Overview of the most important
concepts and components of the SAP
Solution Manager
• Use roadmaps as part of the
“implementation” ; purpose, most
important activities and the services
offered in each phase of the roadmap
• Define a project and document the
system landscape of an SAP solution
• Define, configure and document the
project scope and the business
requirements
• Completion of the configuration and
documentation activities with the SAP
Solution Manager as a central platform
for all component systems
- Project preparation
- Business Blueprint
- Call for action
- Final preparation
- Go Live & Support
SOFTWARE
• SAP R/3 Enterprise
• SAP Web Application Server 6.20
• SAP CRM-EBP 4.0
• Use enhanced Customizing tools such
as BC-Sets, Customizing distribution
and consistency checks
• Organize, perform and document all
project-related test requirements
through the integrated use of the SAP
Solution Manager and the SAP test
workbench
• Editing function for problem messages
• Use of standard reports to support
project management activities
• Support ongoing management of the
live environment with the SAP Solution
Manager
SOFTWARE
SAP Solution Manager 3.1
SAP Solution Manager
Operations / Customer Support

NW001 NW
Technology Solutions
Support Academy
Powered by
USMX20
SAP NetWeaver

8 hours

SAPNW NW SM100 NW C_SM100_06 SAP

Certification
SAP NetWeaver Overview Solution Manager
SAP IT Excellence - SAP
Operations
Solution
Manager 7.0 Operations
3 days 5 days

SM001 NW SM530 NW SM540 NW SM550 NW

SAP Solution Manager ITIL with SAP Solution Solution Manager Incident Solution Manager Change
Introduction Manager Management Request Management

2 hours 4 hours 4 hours 4 hours

Customer Support
SM001 NW SM530 NW SM540 NW SM550 NW
SAP Solution Manager ITIL with SAP Solution Solution Manager Incident Solution Manager Change
Introduction Manager Management Request Management

2 hours 4 hours 4 hours 4 hours

TZACC2 NW TZTDM3
Adaptive Computing Basic Implementation and
Implementation with ACC Configuration of SAP
in SAP NetWeaver TDMS 2006
Technology
7 hours 3 days

OCE71 OIM70 NW
Online Knowledge Product Online Knowledge Product
SAP NetWeaver SAP NetWeaver Identity
Composition Environment Management 7.0
7.1
75 hours 19 hours

SM100 · Solution Manager Operations

DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES 12-jan-09, 2-mrt-09, 4-mei-09
TARGET GROUP • During this training the emphasis lies • Service Delivery
• System Administrators on practical exercises for starting up and - Service Plan
• Technical Consultants managing the SAP Solution Manager - Issue tracking
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED from an Operations point of view. - Expertise On Demand
• SAPTEC Fundamentals of SAP Web AS • The Implementation section of the • System Monitoring
• ADM100 SAP Web AS Administration I SAP Solution Manager is covered in this • Solution Manager Diagnostics
• SAP01 SAP Overview course but not in any detail. • Business Process Monitoring
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED CONTENT - Service Level Reporting (SLR)
Functional Knowledge of Business • SAP Solution Manager Overview Integration
Configuration sets (BC sets) • Customizing SAP Solution Manager - Interface Monitoring
GOALS - Solution Directory • Service Desk
• This training will enable you to describe - Logical Components • Change Request Management
the fundamental steps for installing and - Remote Funtion Calls (RFCs) SOFTWARE
configuring the SAP Solution Manager. • Early Watch Alert Reporting SOL.MAN 4.0
• Additionally, you will learn how to • Solution Landscape Reporting
administer all the necessary tools and - Central Performance History (CPH)
features of the SAP Solution Manager Integration
and their basic functionality. • Solution Reporting
www.sap.nl/education 285
SAP Solution Manager
Operations / Customer Support

SM530 · ITIL with SAP Solution Manager

DURATION 4 hours PRICE € 350 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP GOALS CONTENT

• Customer Support Management
responsible for optimizing SAP
operations and cost structures
• SAP Solution Manager Technical
Consultants
• Customer Support Organizations
• Learn how ITIL processes relate to SAP
customer implementations and
understand how SAP IT Service and
Application Management supports this
effort
• Understand standard ITIL methodology
• Explain standard ITIL and SAP IT
Service and Application Management
• Standard ITIL coverage by SAP
• Additional tasks covered by SAP IT
Service and Application Management
SOFTWARE

PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED • Understand additional requirements for • Solution Manager 4.0

• SM010 Solution Manager Overview
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• SM100 SAP Solution Manager for
Operations of SAP Solutions
SAP Applications
• Understand extensions of SAP IT Service
and Application Management
• Understand how SAP Solution Manager
can be used to improve IT processes

SM540 · Solution Manager: Incident Management

DURATION 4 hours PRICE € 350 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP GOALS CONTENT

• SAP Solution Manager Technical
Consultants
• Customer Support Organizations
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SM010 Solution Manager Overview
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• SM100 SAP Solution Manager for
Operations of SAP Solutions
• Explain how the SAP Solution Manager
supports Application & IT Support
• Shows the service desk workflow
• Gives an overview regarding additional
functionalities like Interaction Center
Web Client, reporting, integration of
3rd-party help desks
• Problem Message Creation
• Message Processing
• Creating Attachments
• Forwarding Messages to SAP
• Maintaining Service Connections
• Notes Database and Solution Database
SOFTWARE
• Solution Manager 4.0

SM550 · Solution Manager: Change Request Management

DURATION 4 hours PRICE € 350 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED SOFTWARE

• Programmers • SM100 SAP Solution Manager for • SAP Solution Manager 4.0
• System Administrators Operations of SAP Solutions
• Support Team GOALS

• Project Team • Control and handle changes to SAP

PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• Basic Knowledge of SAP Solution
Manager
• Basic Knowledge of SAP Change and
Transport System and SAP Transport
Management System
• Basic Knowledge of Navigation in ABAP
based SAP systems
Systems using SAP Solution Manager
CONTENT
• Introduction and Overview
• Set Up of the Change Request
Management
• Development
• Testing Change Requests
• Import into Production

286
SAP Solution Manager
End-to-End (E2E) Solution Operations

SAPTEC NW E2E100 NW C_E2E100_07

Fundamentals of E2E Root Cause Analysis E2E Appl. Mgmt. Expert –
SAP Web AS Root Cause Analysis
Certification

3 days 5 days 1 hour

E2E040 NW E2E200 NW C_E2E200_07

Run SAP End-to-End E2E Change Control E2E Appl. Mgmt. Expert –
Solution Operations Management Change Control
Management Certification

2 days 5 days 1 hour

E2E050 NW E2E300 NW C_E2E300_07

E2E Solution Scope and E2E Solution Support – E2E Appl. Mgmt. Expert –
Documentation Integration and Automation Integration and Automation
Certification

3 hours 5 days 1 hour

E2E400 NW C_E2E400_07
E2E Technical Upgrade E2E Appl. Mgmt. Expert –
Management Technical Upgrade
Management Certification

2 days 1 hour

TE2E04 NW C_ TE2E04_08
RunSAP - End-to-End Sol. Consultant - Managing
Solution Operations E2E Sol. Operations (with
Run SAP)

5 days 1 hour

E2E040 · Run SAP End-to-End Solution Operations

DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP and SAP Operational Standards (End- - Goals of RunSAP

• Customer IT Management to-end Standards) - SAP Organizational Model
• Hosting/AMS Partner Management • Identification of relevant topics for the - RunSAP Methodology
• Implementation Project Managers customer situation - RunSAP Roadmap
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED • Recognize areas of improvement for • SAP Operational Standards (E2E
• Familiarity with SAP Implementation customer support organizations Standards)
Roadmaps • Identification of customer limitations - SAP Standards in Detail
• Fundamentals of SAP Systems and SAP and challenges: Up-skilling and partner - Details – Root Cause Analysis (RCA)
application management involvement - Details – Change Control Management
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED • Enabling: What is and how to define a (CCM)
• SAP Application user interface RunSAP project plan - Details – Business Process Operations
experience (e.g. SAP GUI, SAP SOFTWARE (BPO)
• Enterprise Portal) • SAP Solution Manager 4.0 SP15 - Details – Technical Operations (TO)
GOALS CONTENT • Planning
• Understand the RunSAP-Methodology • Run SAP Overview - RunSAP Adoption and Planning

www.sap.nl/education 287
SAP Solution Manager
End-to-End (E2E) Solution Operations
E2E050 · E2E Solution Scope and Documentation
DURATION 3 hours PRICE € 350 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• Persons who are interested in having a
general overview of E2E Solution
Support
• Service and Support managers and
team members in charge of running a
solution
• Partners and System Integrators for the
Run phase
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• Knowledge of information technology
• Fundamentals of SAP Systems
GOALS
• Understand the concept of E2E Solution
Support
• Describe the SAP Solution Manager as
an application platform for E2E
Solution Support
• Describe the benefits and methods of
the E2E Root Cause Analysis
• Describe the benefits and methods of
the E2E Change Control Management
288
• Describe the benefits and methods of
the E2E Business Process Integration
and Automation
• Recognize the advantages for your
company through the use of
communication and collaboration with
SAP via SAP Solution Manager
CONTENT
• SAP E2E Solution Support – motivation
and strategy
• Skills, Processes and Tools in the E2E
Solution Support aligned with SAP IT
Service and Application Management
• Communication and Collaboration
with SAP
- Navigation in the SAP Solution Manager
- Maintain Business Processes and System
Landscapes
- How to use the service plan
- Work with the Issue management and
Expertise on Demand
• SAP E2E Root Cause Analysis
- Overview on Solution Manager
Diagnostics
- Early Watch Alert
• SAP E2E Change Control Management
- Overview on Change Request
Management
- Maintenance Optimizer
• SAP E2E Business Process Integration
and Automation
- Overview on Business Process
Monitoring
- Data Volume Management
SOFTWARE
• SOL.MAN. 4.0
NOTES
• The course provides an overview of SAP
Solution Manager abilities for the E2E
Solution Support.
• It does not analyze the customer-
specific IT support and its
infrastructure.
SAP Solution Manager
End-to-End (E2E) Solution Operations
E2E100 · E2E Root Cause Analysis
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES 26-jan-09, 20-apr-09
TARGET GROUP
• Solution Architects
• Application Management Team,
especially team responsible to establish
and execute cross componet problem
analysis and resolution
• NetWeaver Operations Team
• Business Process Operations Team
• Technical Quality Managers
• Service and Support Consultants
• Technical Consultant
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAP Web AS architecture
• Basic knowledge of the SAP Solution
Manager
GOALS
• Perform E2E Diagnostics to isolate the
component causing the problem in a
heterogeneous IT landscape
CONTENT
• Introduction to End to End Root Cause
Analysis
- Why End to End Root Cause Analysis?
- Cross component diagnostics vs.
component diagnostics
- Root Cause Analysis vs. Solution
Monitoring
- SAP Solution Manager as key enabler
for End to End Root Cause Analysis
- Savings through E2E Diagnostics in SAP
Solution Manager
• Incident Management Process and Pre-
clarification
- The end to end process: incident,
preclarification, cross component root
cause analysis, component root cause
analysis, change request management,
change deployment
- Preclarification: get all input ready for
your root cause analysis
• End to End Change Diagnostics
- How to collect end to end version
information from customer landscape
- How to detect changes to production:
- Changes to technical configuration via
Configuration Tracker
- Changes to Business configuration,
Coding, Content via One Transport
Order
- Applied patches or support packages via
One Transport Order
- Architecture of One Transport Order
• End to End Workload Analysis
- How to detect a general performance
bottleneck on server
- Comparison of ABAP and Java root
cause analysis
- Overview on Java Workload Analysis
- Java Thread Dump Analysis
- Workload Analysis with Wily Introscope
- Java Memory Analysis
- Overview on ABAP Workload Analysis
- ABAP Process Overview
- ABAP Performance Statistics
- ABAP Memory Analysis
- Overview on Operating System and
Database Analysis
- File System Browser and OS Command
Console
- Displaying CPU and IO consumption in
SAP Solution Manager
- Introduction into database monitors
• End to End Trace
- Recording and analyzing an End to End
Trace
- Architecture of End to End Trace: client
> network > server > database > disk
- Java Tracing with Wily Introscope
Transaction Trace
- ABAP Tracing with Application Trace
(ST12)
• End to End Exception Analysis
- Accessing logs and dumps for ABAP and
non ABAP environments with End to
End Exception Analysis
• Data Inconsistency Analysis
• Client Side Root Cause Analysis
- BMC Appsight as SAP standard for
client side root cause analysis
- Understanding the end user experience
by watching the client movie
- Comparing Client Configuration (DLLs,
Registry,...)
- Analyzing inbound and outbound
traffic (HTTP, (D)COM, TCP)
- Analyzig performance metrics from
clients
- Root Cause Analysis down to coding
level with Appsight Code
• Proving Stabilization of Solution
Landscapes with SAP EarlyWatch Alert
• Review and Certification Preparation
• Certification for the Application
Management Engineer – End to End
Root Cause Analysis
SOFTWARE
• SOL.MAN. 4.0
NOTES
• The course does not introduce
Netweaver fundamentals and
administrations
• The course material is only available in
English language.
• To ensure the learning process and to
pass the certification at the end of this
course, it is recommended to deepen
the knowledge in regards to the taught
content through self-study, which
should take place outside of the regular
course hours
www.sap.nl/education 289
SAP Solution Manager
End-to-End (E2E) Solution Operations
E2E200 · E2E Change Control Management
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES 9-feb-09
TARGET GROUP
• Solution Quality Managers who are
responsible for the quality of technical
changes and system stability
• Change Control Managers who are in
charge of workflows for managing
change requests
• Test Managers who are responsible for
performing integration tests.
• Support Managers and members of the
customer’s SAP competence center
(CCC) who are in charge of supporting
a productive SAP solution.
• Partners and System Integrators for the
Run phase
GOALS
• Understand the value of E2E Change
Control Management.
• Describe the concept and methods of
E2E Change Control Management.
• Leverage the SAP Solution Manager as
an application platform for E2E Change
Control Management.
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• Fundamentals of SAP Software Change
Management
• Basic Knowledge of the SAP Solution
Manager
SOFTWARE
• SOL.MAN. 4.0
• SAP NW 2004S
CONTENT
• SAP E2E Change Control – motivation
and strategy
• Skills, Processes and Tools in the E2E
Change Control aligned with SAP IT
290
Service and Application Management
• Change Analytics
- Transparency and documentation of
current system configuration and
business processes
- Transparency on past and planned
changes
- Transparency on downtimes, service
outages and service degradations
- Solution Quality Reporting
- Control Dashboard to control
parameter settings across the solution
- Planning Calendar for future changes
- Collision Prevention by identifying
potential conflicts early
- Introduction of SAP Solution Manager
and SAP System Landscape Directory as
configuration management and
documentation tools.
• Change Request Management
- End to end workflow for managing
change and development requests in a
customer organization
- Approval process including demand
consolidation, priorization,
categorization and scheduling of
changes
- Introduction of Change Request
Management in SAP Solution Manager
as a tool
• Change Deployment
- Focus on automation of the change
deployment process in order to reduce
manual effort as well as to increase
process reliability
- Test Management and Automation
- SAP best practises for transport
landscape topologies and release
strategies
- SAP best practices for regular
maintenance of SAP software
- Change deloyment tools for ABAP and
Java components
• Review and Certification Preparation
• Certification for the Application
Management Engineer – End to End
Change Control Management
NOTES
• The course provides an overview of the
concept of E2E Change Control
Management
• It shows how the SAP Solution Manager
can be leveraged as an application
platform for E2E Change Control
Management
• To ensure the learning process and to
pass the certification at the end of this
course, it is recommended to deepen
the knowledge in regards to the taught
content through self-study, which
should take place outside of the regular
course hours
SAP Solution Manager
End-to-End (E2E) Solution Operations
E2E300 · E2E Solution Support – Integration and Automation
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• Persons who want to specialize in E2E
Integration and Automation including
the usage of the respective tools
• Service and Support managers and
team members in charge of running a
solution
• Partners and System Integrators for the
Run phase
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• Knowledge of the SAP Solution
Manager concerning maintenance of
Solution and System Landscapes
• Knowledge of information technology
• Fundamentals of SAP Systems
GOALS
• Understand the concept of E2E Solution
Support – Integration and Automation
• Understand the different areas and
respective SAP tools with regards to E2E
Integration and Automation
• Establish the provided procedures and
SAP tools in your company in order to
overcome specific Integration and
Automation challenges
CONTENT
• SAP E2E Integration and Automation –
motivation and strategy
• Skills, Processes and Tools in the E2E
Solution Support Integration and
Automation aligned with SAP IT Service
and Application Management
• Business Process Management and
Analysis
- Application Operations
- Program Scheduling Management
• Integration Management
- Transactional Consistency Analysis
- Interface Monitoring
- Data Consistency Check and Analysis
- Data Migration
• Performance and Data Volume
Management
- Volume Test Optimization
- Business Process Performance
Optimization
- Data Volume Management
• Review and Certification Preparation
• Certification for the SAP Managed
Service Engineer – Business Process
Expert
SOFTWARE
• SOL.MAN. 4.0
NOTES
• The course provides details on the
topics and relevant tools in the area of
E2E Integration and Automation
• It does not analyze the customer-
specific IT support and its
infrastructure.
• The course material is only available in
English language.
• To ensure the learning process and to
pass the certification at the end of this
course, it is recommended to deepen
the knowledge in regards to the taught
content through self-study, which
should take place outside of the regular
course hours.
www.sap.nl/education 291
SAP Solution Manager
End-to-End (E2E) Solution Operations
E2E400 · E2E Technical Upgrade Management
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• Upgrade Project leader and IT Manager
• Persons who are interested in setting an
up-to-date technical risk management
for SAP upgrade
• Service and Support employees of
customers support organizations being
in charge of upgrade projects
• Technical Quality Managers and
Solution Architects
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAP Web AS architecture and basic
administration skills
• Knowledge of information technology
• Fundamentals of SAP Systems
• Basic knowledge of the SAP Solution
Manager for E2E Solution Support and
SAP solution support portfolio and
engagement models in detail
GOALS
• Learn about SAP’s standards for
successful upgrade projects
• Understand the major technical risks
and challenges within an upgrade
project
• Understand the concept of safeguarding
for upgrade and describe the benefits
and methods of the individual service
elements
292
CONTENT SOFTWARE
• Key Focus Areas of a Successful • SOL.MAN. 4.0
Upgrade: main challenges and success NOTES
factors • The course does not introduce
- Program definition, project plan and Netweaver fundamentals and
scope administrations
- Business Continuity and Component • The course material is only available in
Compatibility English language.
- Change Management, incl. Test • To ensure the learning process and to
management pass the certification at the end of this
- System Downtime course, it is recommended to deepen
• SAP Safeguarding for Upgrade: the knowledge in regards to the taught
- Upgrade evaluation and assessment content through self-study, which
- Technical Feasibility check for upgrade should take place outside of the regular
- Technical Integration Check for course hours.
upgrade
- Downtime assessment
- Other SAP Optimization Services
• Collaboration with SAP
- SAP Solution Manager as
communication and collaboration
platform
- Understand advantages of using
Solution Manager scenarios for your
upgrade
- Available Services and Tools supporting
your upgrade
• Review and Certification Preparation
• Certification for the SAP Consultant
Certification Technical Quality Manager
for upgrade porjects (“Upgrade
Planner”)
SAP Solution Manager
SAP testing

ADM315 NW CA611 NW
Workload Analysis eCATT and
Test Workbench

3 days 3 days

SMI310 NW TDMS10 NW
SAP Solution Manager SAP Test Data Migration
Implementation Tools in Server 3.0
Detail

3 days 3 days

E2E200 NW
E2E Change Control
Management

5 days

OTDMS3 NW
Online Knowledge Product
SAP Test Data Migration
Server (TDMS)

4,5 hours

OTA010 · Online Knowledge Product SAP Test Acceleration and Optimization (TAO) 1.0
DURATION 1,25 hours PRICE € 350 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP GOALS • Test components

• Test Consultants • Describe SAP Test Acceleration and • Analysis of test results
• IT administrators Optimization (TAO) 1.0 NOTES

PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED • Generate Test Components for HP • This content is provided by SAP’s
The SAP TAO 1.0 Learning Maps are Quality Center using SAP Test Online Knowledge Products.
designed for qualified project Acceleration and Optimization Information regarding Online
participants. You require: knowledge CONTENT Knowledge Products and instructions
equivalent to a consultant profile for HP • Introduction to SAP Test Acceleration on how to access the Online Knowledge
Quality Center and/or Quick Test and Optimization 1.0 Products are available:
Professional • Application overview http://service.sap.com/okp
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None • Connectivity • All materials are online

www.sap.nl/education 293
SAP Solution Manager
SAP testing
OTDMS3 · Online Knowledge Product SAP Test Data Migration Server (TDMS) 3.0
DURATION 4,5 hours PRICE € 500 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• TDMS Consultants
• TDMS BI Consultant
• TDMS CRM Consultant
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
The SAP Test Data Migration Server
(TDMS) 3.0 Learning Map is designed for
qualified project participants. You require:
• Knowledge in the area of SAP R/3 basis
and advanced SAP R/3 application
know-how
• More than 12 months project
experience
• Upcoming participation in an SAP
TDMS 3.0 project
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
TZTDM3 · Basic Implementation and Configuration of SAP TDMS 2006
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
Customers and solution consultants
planning to run TDMS implementation
projects
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• Advanced knowledge in the area of SAP
NetWeaver (SAP ERP Basis)
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• SAP ERP application know-how
TDMS10 · SAP Test Data Migration Server 3.0
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• SAP System Administrators
• Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• Advanced knowledge in the area of SAP
basis
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• System copy and client copy
• SAP ERP application know-how
GOALS
• Make current test data available in non-
production environments using SAP
Test Data Migration Server
294
GOALS - Summary
• Describe SAP Test Data Migration Server • TDMS CRM Consultant:
(TDMS) 3.0 - Overview
• Plan SAP Test Data Migration Server - Salient Features
(TDMS) 3.0 - Summary
• Implement SAP Test Data Migration NOTES
Server (TDMS) 3.0 • This content is provided by SAP’s
CONTENT Online Knowledge Products.
• TDMS Consultant: Information regarding Online
- Overview Knowledge Products and instructions
- New Features on how to access the Online Knowledge
- Technical Aspects Products are available: http://service.
- Summary sap.com/okp
• TDMS BI Consultant: • Course Length: ~ 4:30 hours
- Overview • All materials are online
- Salient Features
GOALS • Usage of different package types
This course will prepare you to • Package details
implement and configure standard • Hands-on training exercises
functionality of SAP TDMS SOFTWARE
CONTENT • SAP ECC 6.0, SAP TDMS 2006
• Overview SAP Test Data Migration NOTES
Server Workshop materials are only available in
• TDMS solution approach English
• TDMS rollout
• Details about TDMS Migration Server
• TDMS Migration Process Tree
• Install SAP Test Data Migration Server • It covers the standard scenarios for test
and prepare your system landscape data selection and how to configure
• Adjust the standard configuration to them according to individual
provide test data according to your requirements.
requirements • Detailed information is provided on
SOFTWARE installation, system preparation and
• SAP Test Data Migration Server 3.0 functionality while hands-on training
CONTENT exercises allow to directly using the
• This course gives an overview about SAP lessons learned in a real system
Test Data Migration Server 3.0 and how landscape.
to provide non-production • Besides the basic features the course
environments with a reduced set of introduces into advanced topics like test
current test data. data scrambling and shell creation.
Enterprise Service-Oriented Architecture
Enterprise Architect

SAP01
SAP Overview

3 days

SAPNW NW SOA100 NW SOA110 NW SOA200 NW

C_SOA200_70 SAP
SAP NetWeaver Overview SAP Enterprise SOA Enterprise SOA Roadmap SAP Enterprise Architect
Certified
Fundamentals Framework for enterprise
Associate Enterprise
SOA
Architect
3 days 2 days 3 days 5 days

NW001 NW
Technology Solutions
Powered by
SAP NetWeaver

8 hours

SOA100 · Enterprise SOA Fundamentals

DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES 19-jan-09, 16-mrt-09

TARGET GROUP • Unterstand how SAP Enterprise Services SOFTWARE

• Enterprise Architects are delivered to the customer • Discovery Server NW2004s

• Business Consultants • Unterstand the methodology to build NOTES

• Solution Architects
• Technology Consultants
• Application Consultants
• IT Customers
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• Fundamental understanding of SAP
NetWeaver (NW001 or SAPNW)
• Fundamental understanding of basic
business processes
GOALS
• Explain SAP’s strategy for Enterprise
SOA
• Understand the concept of consumer
and provider models to design und
build new business processes
own Enterprise Services • The class does not cover how to analyze
• Know the tools to consume and business processes from a business
orchestrate Enterprise Services perspective
• List the requirements and milestones for • In this class you will not create an
your organization to realize Enterprise enterprise service
SOA • In this class you will not develop a
CONTENT composite application
• SAP’s Enterprise Services Oriented • You will understand the fundamentals
Architecture regarding enterprise services and
• Requirements and Design of new consumption tools.
business processes
• Consumer and Provider Model
• Service Provisioning
• Service Consumption and
Orchestration
• Milestones to realizing Enterprise SOA
within your Enterprise

www.sap.nl/education 295
Enterprise Service-Oriented Architecture
Enterprise Architect
SOA110 · Enterprise SOA Roadmap
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES 21-jan-09, 18-mrt-09
TARGET GROUP
• Enterprise Architects
• Business Consultants
• Solution Architects
• Business Manager
• IT Manager
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• Fundamental understanding of SAP
enterprise SOA – ESA100
DURATION 3 days
GOALS
• Understand the concept of enterprise
SOA
• Learn about the architecture and its
benefits
SOA200 · SAP Enterprise Architect Framework for enterprise SOA
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES 30-mrt-09, 8-jun-09
TARGET GROUP
• Enterprise Architects
• Business Consultants
• Solution Architects
• IT Architects
• Technology Architects
• IT Managers
• Program Managers
• Business Process Experts
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• Fundamental understanding of basic
business processes
• Fundamental understanding of Service
Oriented Architecture principles
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• Basic knowledge of the Open Group
Architecture Framework
• SAPNW – SAP Netweaver Overview
• SOA100 – SAP Enterprise Service
Oriented Architecture
• Fundamentals
• SOA110 – Enterprise SOA Roadmap
GOALS
• Articulate the concept and benefits of
Enterprise Architecture
• Promote Enterprise Architecture inside
an organization
• Understand and explain the features of
296
• Understand SAP’s product strategy
• Execute SAP’s enterprise SOA
methodology to evaluate and identify
enterprise SOA opportunities within an
organization
• Evaluate business processes
• Develop an business driven enterprise
SOA Roadmap
• Learn about the techniques to identify
and implement services within SAP
NetWeaver
CONTENT
• Enterprise SOA Fundamentals
• Core and Context model
• SAP’s product strategy
• SAP’s enterprise SOA conceptional
Enterprise Architecture frameworks
• Begin an Enterprise Architecture
engagement in an organization
• Explain the differentiating features of
the SAP Enterprise Architecture
Framework
• Gain a theoretical understanding of the
SAP Enterprise Architecture Framework
• Analyze the business drivers to derive
enterprise architecture requirements
• Detect critical deficiencies in business,
application, data, and technology
environment
• Analyze & determine enterprise impact
of technology, industry and market
trends
• Translate Enterprise Architecture into
executable solutions
• Identify which existing governance
processes in an organization need to be
involved
CONTENT
• SAP Enterprise Architecture Framework
for Enterprise SOA: an overview
• The SAP EAF Architecture Process –
explain
• The SAP EAF Metamodel – explain
catalogs, matrices and views
consulting portfolio embedded in
Adoption Program
• Enterprise SOA Roadmap Methodology
• Pulse Check – short assessment
• Identification of relevant processes
• Target landscape including service
identification
• Drawing a Roadmap to the target
landscape
• Giving recommendations
• Practical Examples
SOFTWARE
• Netweaver 2004s
• ESA Adoption Program Release 4.0
• Phase 0 – Preliminary – Framework and
Principles
• Phase A – Architecture Vision
• Phase B – Business Architecture
• Phase C – Information Systems
Architecture
• Phase D – Technology Architecture
• Phase E – Opportunities and Solutions
• Phase F – Migration Planning
• Phase G – Implementation Governance
• Phase H – Architecture Change
Management
• How the SAP EAF maps to SAP Specific
Products and Concepts
• How to use the SAP EAF in architecture
engagements
• SAP EAF Extensions for ARIS IT
Architect toolset
• SAP Certified Associate Enterprise
Architect Exam
• This will focus on the specific
extensions to support the effective
adoption of packaged solutions in a
service-oriented enterprise. It will cover
the outline process, the process
narrative and the accelerators provided.
SOFTWARE
• IDS Scheer ARIS IT Architect
Enterprise Service-Oriented Architecture
Enterprise Service Development

SOA200 NW SOA250 NW SOA230 NW

SAP Enterprise Architect SAP Enterprise ARIS Toolset for SAP
Framework for enterprise Architecture Framework for Enterprise Architecture
SOA Enterprise SOA Framework

5 days 5 days 2 days

SOA100 NW SOA120 NW SOA300 NW SOA400 NW NET310 NW

SAP Enterprise SOA SAP Business Process Design Time Governance in Overview of Enterprise ABAP Web Dynpro
Fundamentals Modeling Enterprise SOA Service Provisioning and
Consumption

2 days 2 days 3 days 3 days 5 days

SOA110 NW BIT420 NW JA410

Enterprise SOA Roadmap PI - Proxy Development & Java on
Service Provisioning with SAP NetWeaver 7.1
ESR

3 days 5 days 3 days

NWC110 NW
Modeling Applications with
Visual Composer

2 days

OCA71 NWC120 NW
Online Knowledge Product Guided Procedures
SAP Composite

16 hours 3 days

ANA10 · xApp Analytics using Visual Composer

DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP • Gain an understanding of the Visual SOFTWARE

• Solution Consultants responsible for Composer (VC) as a tool and how it fits • SAP NW 2004S
creating analytical applications using into SAP NetWeaver. • ERP ECC 6.0
SAP NetWeaver Visual Composer or • Develop effective cross application NOTES
implementing SAP xApp Analytics analytical content using SAP NetWeaver • The course material is only available in
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED Visual Composer. English.
• Experience with implementing SAP CONTENT
NetWeaver BI Business Content • SAP xApp Analytics overview
GOALS • SAP Netweaver Visual Composer
• Introduce SAP xApp Analytics as SAP’s - Introduction and demo
initiative to empower business people by - Architecture and integration into SAP
providing insights in the context of the NetWeaver Portal
business process. - Advanced features
• Get an overview of the predefined and - BI kit overview and advanced features
delivered models in SAP xApp Analytics • Development and adaptation of
analytical models

www.sap.nl/education 297
Enterprise Service-Oriented Architecture
Enterprise Service Development
SOA120 · SAP Business Process Modeling
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• Business Process Expert
• Business Manager
• IT Manager
• Enterprise Architects
• Business Consultants
• Solution Architects
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• SOA100 SAP Enterprise SOA -
Fundamentals
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED
• Fundamental understanding of SAP
enterprise SOA
GOALS
• Understand the concept of business
process modeling
SOA230 · ARIS Toolset for SAP Enterprise Architecture Framework
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• Enterprise Architects
• Business Consultants
• Solution Architects
• IT Architects
• Technology Architects
• Business Process Experts
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• Fundamental understanding of basic
business processes
• Fundamental understanding of Service
Oriented Architecture
• principles
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED
• SAP Associate Enterprise Architect
Certification
GOALS
• Use and Administer ARIS IT Architect
to capture Enterprise Architecture
models
• Use ARIS IT Architect as part of the
detailed case study presented in SOA250
- SAP Enterprise Architecture
Framework for Enterprise SOA – Level
II.
• Implement the SAP EA Framework
metamodel, catalogs, matrices and
views using ARIS IT Architect
298
• Learn about modeling methodology part of SAP enterprise SOA strategy
• Understand SAP’s strategy of business • SAP’s accelerators and templates
process modeling • SAP business process modeling
• Execute SAP’s enterprise SOA business methodology
process modeling methodology to - Modeling methodology and templates
evaluate and identify enterprise SOA - Identification of relevant business
opportunities within an organization processes
• Evaluate business processes - Targeting business process including
• Learn about SAP’s infrastructure, where service identification
business process modeling is embedded - Drawing a roadmap to the target
SOFTWARE process landscape
• SAP NetWeaver 7.0 • Practical examples & further
CONTENT information on BPM
• Overview of Business Process
Management (types, etc.)
• Business Process Modeling as essential
SOFTWARE
• IDS Scheer ARIS IT Architect
CONTENT
• An overview of IDS Scheer ARIS tools
relevant to Enterprise Architecture
• Introduction to ARIS IT Architect and
the benefits of an Architecture Resource
Base
• How to use and administer ARIS IT
Architect
• SAP Reference Models and ARIS IT
Architect
• SAP EA Framework Metamodel,
Objects, Relationships and Views
• Using ARIS IT Architect to define :
- Architecture Context
- Business Architecture
- Information Systems (Applications and
Data) Architecture
- Technology Architecture
NOTES
• This is primarily a hands-on course
where attendees will use and administer
the ARIS IT Architect software and
develop an example Enterprise
Architecture Resource Base.
Enterprise Service-Oriented Architecture
Enterprise Service Development
SOA250 · SAP Enterprise Architecture Framework for Enterprise SOA
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• Enterprise Architects (Already certified
at Associate Level)
• Business Process Experts
• Business Consultants
• Enterprise Solution Architects and
Solution Architects
• IT Architects (with Application or Data
or Infrastructure specialty)
• Technology Architects (with
Infrastructure specialty)
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• SOA200 SAP Enterprise SOA - Enterprise
Architechture Framework -
• Level 1
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED
• Participants must have achieved
Associate Enterprise Architect
• Certification
• Fundamental understanding of basic
business processes
• SOA100 SAP Enterprise SOA -
Fundamentals
• SOA110 SAP Enterprise SOA - Roadmap
& Methodology
• SOA220 The Open Group Architecture
Framework (TOGAF) - Training and
• Certification (mandatory if the attendee
is not TOGAF-certified)
• SOA230 ARIS Toolset for SAP Enterprise
Architecture Framework
GOALS
• This course covers the SAP Enterprise
Architecture Framework in significant
detail.
• The course involves a detailed case
study, and a significant portion of
participants’ time will be spent in
syndicate groups preparing Enterprise
Architecture models based on the case
study.
• This course will prepare you to:
- Promote enterprise architecture
discipline inside an organization
- Utilize SAP Enterprise Architecture
Framework to support the objectives of
Enterprise Architecture program within
an organization
- Analyze the business drivers to derive
enterprise architecture requirements
- Identify and define critical deficiencies
in an enterprise’s business, application,
data, and technology architecture
- Lead the creation of governing
principles to guide decision making for
the enterprise
- Design and lead the development of an
implementation plan for the enterprise
architecture
- Design and direct the governance &
compliance structure for enterprise
architecture
SOFTWARE
• IDS Scheer ARIS IT Architect
CONTENT
• A quick refresher on key concepts
introduced in SOA200
• Quick overview of SAP EAF Process and
Metamodel
• Introduction to Course Case Study
• Phase 0 – Preliminary – Framework and
Principles (Level II review*)
• Phase A – Architecture Vision (Level II
review*)
• Phase B – Business Architecture (Level II
review*)
• Group case study work on Phases 0 to B
using Resource Base and ARIS IT
Architect
• Phase C – Information Systems
Architecture (Level II review*)
• Phase D – Technology Architecture
(Level II review*)
• Group case study work on Phases C to
D using Resource Base and ARIS IT
Architect
• Phase E – Opportunities and Solutions
(Level II review*)
• Phase F – Migration Planning (Level II
review*)
• Group case study work on Phases E to F
using Resource Base and ARIS IT
Architect
• Group Presentations of completed case
studies to the group
• Feedback on presentations and content
including model answers
• SAP Certified Professional Enterprise
Architect Exam
• The course will cover key concepts from
SAP EAF at the next level of detail
relative to what was covered in SOA200.
In addition, the course will describe key
activities and tasks defined in EAF ADM
in a bit more detail to enable the
participants to work on the case study
more effectively.
NOTES
• Course participants will be expected to
present their final case study material to
the group on the final day.
• The case study presentations will be
evaluated and be considered along with
the final day examination as part of SAP
Professional Enterprise Architect
Certification.
www.sap.nl/education 299
Enterprise Service-Oriented Architecture
Enterprise Service Development
SOA300 · Design Time Governance in Enterprise SOA
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• Enterprise Architects
• Integration Architects
• Solution Architects
• Technology Consultants
• Application Consultants
• Development Managers
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• Fundamental understanding of basic
business processes
• SOA100 SAP Enterprise SOA -
Fundamentals
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED
• SOA120 SAP Business Process Modeling
GOALS
• This course will prepare you to
understand the concept of enterprise
SOA and enterprise services definition
and implementation based on a mature
SOA400 · SAP Enterprise SOA – Service Provisioning & Consumption
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES 18-feb-09, 15-apr-09
TARGET AUDIENCE
• Enterprise Architects
• Integration Architects
• Software Developers
• Technical Consultants
• Project and Development Managers
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED
• SOA100: SAP Enterprise SOA -
Fundamentals
• Basic ABAP knowledge
• Hands-on experience in Java
programming
• Basic SAP NetWeaver Development
Infrastructure knowledge
PREREQUISITES - OPTIONAL
• SAP Web Dynpro for Java
• SAP Visual Composer
• SAP Composite Application Framework
• SAP Guided Procedure
300
design & modeling methodology
derived from SAP Best Practices. This
includes:
- Business-driven enterprise services
design and modeling methodology
- Decomposing technical requirements
into smaller more manageable process
components and objects for reuse
- Learn how to effectively leverage SAP
delivered content for Enterprise Services
- Best practices and guidelines to leverage
a harmonized data models based on
Global Data Types
• The course will use the Enterprise
Services Repository delivered with SAP
NetWeaver CE 7.1 or PI 7.1 as the
modeling tool.
SOFTWARE
• SAP NetWeaver CE 7.1 and PI 7.1
GOALS
• To understand the concept of Web
Services and Services Oriented
Architecture (SOA)
• To understand the concept and
platform of Enterprise SOA &
Enterprise Services
• To understand how to discover, test and
evaluate Enterprise Services
• To understand how Enterprise Services
can be provided on the SAP platform
• To experience how Enterprise Services
can be consumed with SAP NetWeaver
MDA tools
CONTENT
• Introduction to fundamentals of
Enterprise SOA
• Provisioning of Enterprise Services
• Consuming of Enterprise Services via
CONTENT
• Introduction to Enterprise SOA
Concepts (Methodology & Governance
Process - Overview)
• Business Semantics & Enterprise Service
Modeling (Process Components,
Integration Scenarios)
• Service Signature Definition (Business
Object Modeling, Service Derivation)
• Service Implementation - Programming
Model & Rules
• Organizational Aspects, SAP delivered
content & Outlook
- SAP Visual Composer
- SAP Web Dynpro for Java
- SAP Composite Application Framework
- SAP Guided Procedure
• System Landscape for Enterprise SOA
SOFTWARE
• Enterprise Services based on ERP6.0
Discovery System
• Consumption based on SAP NetWeaver
7.0
NOTES
This course is strongly focusing on
development related activities and
projects by applying the various
development tools for different purposes.
Enterprise Service-Oriented Architecture
Enterprise Service Development
OCA71 · Online Knowledge Product SAP Composite Applications
DURATION 16 hours PRICE € 350 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• Solution Consultant
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
The SAP Composite Learning Maps are
designed for qualified project participants.
You require:
• Knowledge equivalent to a consultant
profile for SAP Netweaver 7.1 CE
• Knowledge about the latest NW CE
stack is essential to run and adapt an
• Industry Composite Application.
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• Implement and adapt SAP Composite
Applications
CONTENT
• SAP Composite Applications
- Implementing a SAP Composite
Application
- Adopt and Adapt a SAP Composite
Application
- Summary
• SAP Composite Application for Return
Merchandise Authorization (RMA)
- Composite Application for Return
Merchandise Authorization
NOTES
• This content is provided by SAP’s
Online Knowledge Products.
Information regarding Online
Knowledge Products and instructions
on how to access the Online Knowledge
Products are available:
http://service.sap.com/okp
• Course Length: ~ 16:00 hrs
• All materials are online
• Extend your core business processes
with SAP composite applications
- SAP composite applications address
solution gaps within the SAP Bus Suite
by reusing and combining existing
application components to initiate new
business practices. Hence, they sit on
top of existing enterprise applications
without creating or extending backend
functionality. They have their own
software lifecycle, running on a
dedicated technology platform and are
only loosely coupled (via webservice
calls) to the core enterprise systems.
The technology platform is provided by
SAP NetWeaver Composition
Environment (CE) for running and
implementing composite applications.
The composition tools of SAP
NetWeaver CE enables the orchestration
of enterprise services to composite
applications by a model-driven
development approach. Therefore,
composite applications can be quickly
adapted to changing business needs by
re-assembling of those enterprise
services.
• Design principles of SAP Composite
Applications
- Industry composite applications are
process-driven and allow ad-hoc
collaboration between business
partners. With guided procedures you
can model the process flow of the
composite application in a declarative
way, either by including/excluding of
complete process steps and their
assigned activities or by changing user
roles amd context parameters. SAP
composite applications provide a user-
centric design by leveraging several UI
technology, like Visual Composer,
WebDynpro for Java or SAP Interactice
Forms by Adobe for offline processing,
to optimize the end- user experience for
a given user context. Industry
composite applications are completely
based on webservices, in order to
execute business logic remotely in the
backend systems or locally in the
composite application itself. The SAP
NetWeaver Composite Application
Framework (CAF) provide the necessary
tools and run time to create the
corresponding business object models as
wells to generate the required service
operations.
www.sap.nl/education 301
Enterprise Service-Oriented Architecture
Business Process Management (BPM)

SAP01
SAP Overview

3 days

SAPNW NW SOA100 NW BPM100 NW BPM130 NW BPM300 NW

SAP NetWeaver Overview SAP Enterprise SOA Business Process SAP Business Architect by Business Process
Fundamentals Management Methodology IDS Scheer Management Governance
Overview

3 days 2 days 2 days 2 days 3 days

NW001 NW
Technology Solutions
Powered by
SAP NetWeaver

8 hours

BPM100 · Business process Management methodology

DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP and optimization of business processes certification

• Solution Architects, Business
Consultants, Application Consultants,
Business Analysts
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED
• Fundamental understanding of SAP
SAP01 SAP Overview
• Fundamental understanding of SAP
NetWeaver SAPNW SAP NetWeaver -
Overview
• BPM Governance Overview
• BPM300 Business Process Management
Governance Overview
GOALS
• Explain and apply SAP´s 4 phases
Business Process Management
methodology (Calibration, As-Is-
Analysis, To-Be-Design, Solution
Transformation)
• Understand basic principles of process
structuring (hierarchy model)
• Understand the “hand-shake” between
process design and succeeding IT
realization
SOFTWARE
• Systems will not be used for this
training session
CONTENT
• Overview
• Business Process Management
Methodolgy:
- Phase 1: Calibration (Link to strategy,
define scope of project)
- Phase 2: As-Is analysis (Define
parameters, analyze processes, identify
process weaknesses)
- Phase 3: To-Be design (Optimize
processes, design To-Be process model)
- Phase 4: Solution Transformation
(Identify possible IT-based solution
scenarios, develop IT roadmap)
NOTES
• Processes have always been part of the
business world. Every employee in every
company has to deal with processes
somehow. When processes are well
organized, they deliver real value to the
organization. If not, they produce costs
and inefficiency. To handle processes
right and to increase added value and
customer satisfaction, every company
deals with business process
management (BPM).
• In order to deliver value to customers,
SAP offers a standardized BPM
methodology as it can be used to bring
transparency on a customer’s As- Is
processes, to identify weaknesses and
pain points systematically and to realize
optimization potential.

• Have all the methodological knowledge • This training session: BPM100

to optimize business processes and Methodology is one of the courses in
define business process landscapes the BPX for associate Curriculum,
• Use the necessary tools for the analysis which result in a BPX associate
302
Enterprise Service-Oriented Architecture
Business Process Management (BPM)
BPM130 · SAP Business Architect by IDS Sheer
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• Solution Architects, Business
Consultants, Application Consultants,
Business Analysts
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED
• Fundamental understanding of SAP
SAP01 SAP Overview
• Fundamental understanding of SAP
NetWeaver SAPNW SAP NetWeaver -
Overview
• BPM100 Business Process Management
Methodology
GOALS
• Learn how to use ARIS Business
Architect for SAP NetWeaver within
project situations.
• Understand the core concepts like ARIS
house, static and dynamic perspectives,
linking (vertical and horizontal
navigation within the process
repository), basic administration, filters
and templates.
• This course also covers the concepts
regarding synchronization with ARIS
and SAP Solution Manager.
SOFTWARE
• SAP Business Architect by IDS Scheer
CONTENT
• Overview
• Reasons and methods for business
process modeling
• Integration within process lifecycle
management
• ARIS tools portfolio
• Necessary roles for business process
modeling and management
• Central ARIS concepts
- Project setup
- ARIS house
- Linking: horizontal and vertical
navigation
• Dynamic perspective: Value added chain
diagrams and event driven process
chains
• Static perspective: organization chart,
terms, functions, entity relationship
modeling
• Synchronization with the SAP Solution
Manager
NOTES
• This training session BPM130 SAP
Business Architect by IDS Scheer is one
of the courses in the BPX for associate
Curriculum, which result in a BPX
associate certification
• ARIS (Architecture of Integrated
Information Systems) developed by IDS
Scheer is a methodology and tool
defining business process modeling and
analysis.
• ARIS is one of the leading business
process modeling environments on the
market. It comprises business and
technical view on processes and
therefore provides a holistic view on
company processes.
• The core concept, the ARIS House
provides different perspectives for all
kind of modeling purposes like
processes, data, functions, organisation
and products.
• Furthermore it is possible to
synchronize processes with SAP
Solution Manager.
www.sap.nl/education 303
Enterprise Service-Oriented Architecture
Business Process Management (BPM)
BPM300 · Business Process Management Governance Overview
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• Solution Architects, Business
Consultants, Application Consultants,
Business Analysts
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED
• Fundamental understanding of SAP
SAP01 SAP Overview
• Fundamental understanding of SAP
NetWeaver SAPNW SAP NetWeaver -
Overview
GOALS
• Explain SAP´s Business Process
Management Governance Framework,
Understand how BPM will change the
way your company operates,
Understand functionally driven vs. the
Process Driven Organization,
Understand the 4 phases in the BPM
Journey (Strategy, Set-up, Transition,
Continues Improvement and BPM
supporting phases), Understand
concepts as Process Mapping
Framework, Process Maturity
Assessment, Process Performance
Measurement, PPI, Process Ownership
etc.
SOFTWARE
• Systems will not be used for this
training session
304
CONTENT
• Overview
• Business Process Governance:
- Phase 1:Strategy (Link to strategy,
Define building blocks, Choose path,
Monitor Fit-Gap)
- Phase 2: Set-Up (Define Basics, Develop
Analytics, Create Methods, Harmonize
Terms)
- Phase 3: Transition (Create Basis,
Perform Analysis, Define Portfolio,
Optimize Processes)
- Phase 4: Continuous Improvement
(Add Process-Based Rewards, Expand
Reporting, Allocate Budget
- Supporting Phases: Communication &
Train, Manage Change, Build Process-
Centric IT
NOTES
• This training session: BPM300
Governance Overview is one of the
courses in the BPX for associate
Curriculum, which result in a BPX
associate certification
• Business Process Management (BPM) is
a management discipline that requires
organizations to shift to process-centric
thinking, and to reduce their reliance
on traditional territorial and functional
structures.
• BPM requires and enables organizations
to manage the complete revision cycles
of their processes, from process design
to monitoring and optimization, and to
change them more frequently to adjust
to changing circumstances.
• The development of BPM technologies
is enabling business managers to
abstract process flows and rules from
the underlying applications and
infrastructure, and to change them
directly.
• BPM is neither a technology nor an
updated version of BPR. It is an IT-
enabled management discipline. It
represents a fundamental change in
how business manage and run their
processes.
SAP Solutions for Enterprise Performance Management
Profitability & Cost Management: Business Objects Profitability & Cost Management

BOA250 NW
PF210 - Actitvity Analysis:
Advanced Topics in
Model Building
BOA340 NW
5 days
PC205 - BusinessObjects
Profitability
BOA225 NW BOA355 NW
PF204e - Introduction to 4 days PC300e - BusinessObjects
Activity Based Costing Profitability and Cost
Management Transactional
BOA240 NW ABC
2,5 hours 5 hours
PF205 - Actitvity Analysis:
Foundation
BOA365 NW
4 days OM300e - Business
Objects Objectiv. Mgmt:
Using Profitability for Perf.
Mgmt.
6 hours

Cursusdetailgegevens kunt u vinden via de index op pagina 533

www.sap.nl/education 305
SAP Solutions for Enterprise Performance Management
SAP Solutions for Strategy Management: SAP Strategy Management (SSM)
CPM210
SAP Strategy Management
5 days
OCPM07
SAP Strategy Management
2007
3 hours
CPM210 · SAP Strategy Management
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES 9-mrt-09, 22-jun-09
TARGET GROUP
• Project Leaders
• (Technical) Pre-Sales
• Application Consultants
• Technical Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• Understand strategy concepts and PM
terminology
• Understand concepts and platform of
SSM
• Develop/manage all components of
SSM
• Develop/maintain the SSM
Administrator interface
• Set up a demo environment in Strategy
Management
• Understand 5-step process for
developing a scorecard
• Understand how to administer an entire
SSM solution
• Design/develop SM models to meet all
user needs
306
SOFTWARE
• SAP Strategy Management 2007 SP1
CONTENT
• Business topics overview to include:
- Difference between a KPI and a metric
- Difference between an Initiative and a
project
- Different performance management
solutions
• Overview of SSM User Interface
components
• Building a SM model using the model
builder toolkit
• Understanding data entry module
workflow process
• Administering contexts/scorecards with
the SSM Administrator Interface
• Developing a strategy management
model via Pilot Application Server (PAS)
- Understand the 7 basic steps to building
a model
- Creating a model
- Understanding time intelligence in PAS
- Creating effective dimensions vs.
attributes
- Creating metrics vs. KPIs
- Steps to loading external data into the
model
- Steps to consolidating data within the
model
- Maximizing consolidation efficiencies
for performance
- Understanding how attributes can
increase performance and when to
implement
NOTES
This course is designed to provide a
technical overview on strategy
management implementation. Individuals
taking this course will have the base
knowledge to begin designing, developing
and managing a strategy management
solution within the SSM 2007
environment in addition to designing,
developing, and maintaining an efficient
model to support the solution.
SAP Solutions for Enterprise Performance Management
SAP Solutions for Strategy Management: SAP Strategy Management (SSM)

OCPM07 · SAP Strategy Management 2007

DURATION 3 hours PRICE € 350 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP • Business knowledge in Strategy NOTES

• SAP Strategy Management 2007
Solution Consultant
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
The SAP Strategy Management 2007
Learning Maps are designed for qualified
project participants. You require:
• Knowledge equivalent to a consultant
profile for SAP SEM
• Knowledge regarding NW BI or Business
Intelligence in common
Management and Corporate
Performance Management
• Upcoming participation in an SAP
Strategy Management 2007 project
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• Describe SAP Strategy Management
2007
CONTENT
• CPM Suite Overview
• SAP Strategy Management
• This content is provided by SAP’s
Online Knowledge Products.
Information regarding Online
Knowledge Products and instructions
on how to access the Online Knowledge
Products are available:
http://service.sap.com/okp
• All materials are online

www.sap.nl/education 307
SAP Solutions for Enterprise Performance Management
SAP Solutions for Strategy Management: SAP SEM Balanced Scorecard (SEM-BSC)

SAPFIN ERP SEM010 ERP SEM200 ERP SEM220 ERP

SAP ERP Financials Strategic Enterprise Business Warehouse for SEM Corporate
Management Overview SEM Performance Monitor

2 days 3 days 5 days 5 days

Cursusdetailgegevens kunt u vinden via de index op pagina 533

308
SAP Solutions for Enterprise Performance Management
SAP Solutions for Strategy Management: Business Objects Performance Management

BOM210 BOM235
PM350R2 - Performance PM380eR2 - Deploying
Manager: Measuring Dashboards from
Performance Development to Production

1 day 4 hours

BOM215 BOM236
PM350eR2 - Performance PM375rwR2 - Performance
Manager: Measuring Management: Additional
Performance Designer Topics

8 hours 1 hour

BOM245
PM381eR2 - Performance
Management: Moving from
BOM205 Development to Production
Systems on SP2
BU230eR2 - Performance 4 hours
Management Essentials for
Business Use
BOM246
5 hours
PM376rwR2 - Performance
Management: Additional
Admin Topics

4 hours

Cursusdetailgegevens kunt u vinden via de index op pagina 533

www.sap.nl/education 309
SAP Solutions for Enterprise Performance Management
SAP Solutions for Planning: SAP Business Planning and Consolidation (SAP BPC)

CPM310 CPM320 CPM325

SAP BPC: Application SAP BPC: Reporting, SAP Business Planning
Configuration Budgeting & Consolidation and Consolidation -
Reporting
CPM030
Introduction to 3 days 3 days 5 hours
SAP Business Planning
and Consolidation
CPM311 CPM321
3 hours
SAP BPC: Application SAP BPC: Reporting,
Configuration Budgeting & Consolidation

5 days 5 days

OBPC51
OKP SAP Business
Planning and Consolidation
5.1
Virtual Classroom
20 hours

CPM311 · SAP Business Planning and Consolidation: Application Configuration

DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES Virtual ILT: On request
TARGET GROUP • Creating Applications and Applying NOTES

• Application Administrators Dimensions • PLease be aware, that CPM311 is a

• Project Leaders • Introduction to Logic/Calculations remote version of the classroom course
• (Technical) Pre-Sales • Loading and Validating Data CPM310 with the same content. The
• Application Consultants • Working with BPC for Excel offering depends, which delivery option
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED - Developing Reports is offered by which country.
• Knowledge of Microsoft® Excel, Word - Developing Input Schedules • This course is delivered as live virtual
and Powerpoint - BPC Comments classroom training.
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None - Book Publication • It is designed for individuals who are
GOALS • Working with BPC Web responsible for application development
• Implement and configure SAP Business - Content Library and administration of SAP Business
Planning and Consolidation 5.1 - Live Reporting Planning and Consolidation 5.1. The
SOFTWARE • Working with BPC for Word and BPC student will learn the features and
• SAP Business Planning and for PowerPoint capabilities and the general procedures
Consolidation 5.1 - Inserting Objects and Data Values required to create an application.
CONTENT • Security Setup
• What is SAP Business Planning and • Work Status
Consolidation? • Creating Business Process Flows
- Architecture and Terminology • Enabling BPC Audit
• Creating an Application Set • Case Study
• Creating Dimensions and Properties

310
SAP Solutions for Enterprise Performance Management
SAP Solutions for Planning: SAP Business Planning and Consolidation (SAP BPC)

CPM310 · SAP BPC: Application Configuration

DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES 21-jan-09, 22-apr-09

TARGET GROUP • Creating Applications and Applying • Creating Business Process Flows
• Project Leaders Dimensions • Enabling BPC Audit
• (Technical) Pre-Sales • Introduction to Logic/Calculations • Case Study
• Application Consultants • Loading and Validating Data SOFTWARE

PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED • Working with BPC for Excel • SAP Business Planning and
• Knowledge of Microsoft® Excel, Word - Developing Reports Consolidation 5.1
and Powerpoint - Developing Input Schedules NOTES

PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• Implement and configure SAP Business
Planning and Consolidation 5.1
CONTENT
• What is SAP Business Planning and
Consolidation?
- Architecture and Terminology
• Creating an Application Set
• Creating Dimensions and Properties
- BPC Comments This course is delivered as live classroom
- Book Publication training. It is designed for individuals who
- Working with BPC Web are responsible for application
- Content Library development and administration of SAP
- Live Reporting Business Planning and Consolidation 5.1.
• Working with BPC for Word and BPC The student will learn the features and
for PowerPoint capabilities and the general procedures
- Inserting Objects and Data Values required to create an application.
• Security Setup
• Work Status

CPM320 · SAP BPC: Reporting, Budgeting & Consolidation

DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES 28-jan-09, 27-apr-09

TARGET GROUP • Creating Trend and Multi-Application Business Process Flows

• Project Leaders Reports • Foreign Currency Translation
• (Technical) Pre-Sales • Conditional Formatting • Inter-company Eliminations
• Application Consultants • Creating Expansions and Drill Downs • BPC Journals
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED • Working with the Control Panel SOFTWARE

• Knowledge of Microsoft® Excel • Filtering in Reports • SAP Business Planning and

PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• CPM310 SAP Business Planning and
Consolidation Application
• Configuration or
• CPM311 SAP Business Planning and
Consolidation Application
• Configuration
GOALS
Create reports and input schedules, and
implement budgeting and consolidation
functionality in SAP Business Planning
and Consolidation 5.1
CONTENT
• Creating Input and Report Templates
• Creating Better/(Worse) Variances
• Workbook Options
• Custom Suppression
• Adding Indentation to Reports
• Advanced Expansions
• Hot Analysis
• Creating Custom Buttons
• Creating Dynamic Range Exchange
Reports and Schedules
• Budgeting System Implementation
Overview
• Seeding the Budget
• Defining Modeling Requirements
• Defining and Creating Budget Input
Templates
• Creating and Developing Budgeting
Consolidation 5.1
NOTES
• This course is delivered as live classroom
training.
• It is designed for individuals who will be
responsible for creating reports and
input schedules, and implementing
budgeting and consolidation
functionality, for SAP Business Planning
and Consolidation 5.1 applications. This
course covers reporting topics from
basic to advanced, as well as budgeting
and consolidation functionality

www.sap.nl/education 311
SAP Solutions for Enterprise Performance Management
SAP Solutions for Planning: SAP Business Planning and Consolidation (SAP BPC)

CPM321 · SAP BPC: Reporting, Budgeting & Consolidation

DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES Virtual ILT: On request

TARGET GROUP • Conditional Formatting NOTES

• Project Leaders
• (Technical) Pre-Sales
• Application Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• Knowledge of Microsoft® Excel
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• CPM310 SAP Business Planning and
Consolidation Application
• Configuration
GOALS
• Create reports and input schedules, and
implement budgeting and consolidation
functionality in SAP Business Planning
and Consolidation 5.1
SOFTWARE
• SAP Business Planning and
Consolidation 5.1
CONTENT
• Creating Input and Report Templates
• Creating Better/(Worse) Variances
• Creating Trend and Multi-Application
Reports
• Creating Expansions and Drill Downs
• Working with the Control Panel
• Filtering in Reports
• Workbook Options
• Custom Suppression
• Adding Indentation to Reports
• Advanced Expansions
• Hot Analysis
• Creating Custom Buttons
• Creating Dynamic Range Exchange
Reports and Schedules
• Budgeting System Implementation
Overview
• Seeding the Budget
• Defining Modeling Requirements
• Defining and Creating Budget Input
Templates
• Creating and Developing Budgeting
Business Process Flows
• Foreign Currency Translation
• Inter-company Eliminations
• BPC Journals
• PLease be aware, that CPM321 is a
remote version of the classroom course
CPM320 with the same content. The
offering depends, which delivery option
is offered by which country.
• This course is delivered as live virtual
classroom training.
• It is designed for individuals who will be
responsible for creating reports and
input schedules, and implementing
budgeting and consolidation
functionality, for SAP Business Planning
and Consolidation 5.1 applications. This
course covers reporting topics from
basic to advanced, as well as budgeting
and consolidation functionality.

312
SAP Solutions for Enterprise Performance Management
SAP Solutions for Planning: SAP Business Planning and Consolidation (SAP BPC)

CPM325 · SAP Business Planning and Consolidation - Reporting

DURATION 5 hours PRICE € 550 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP
• This course is designed for end users,
power users, and project team members
who want to learn report-writing skills.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• Knowledge of Microsoft® Excel
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
• Microsoft Analysis Services 2000
• Microsoft Office Professional Enterprise
Edition 2003
• Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0
• SAP Business Planning and
Consolidation 5.1
CONTENT
• Dynamic Range Exchange function
(EVDRE)
NOTES
• Course length: 5 hours
• This course is delivered as an E-learning
Knowledge Transfer Product.

GOALS • Introduction to SAP Business Planning

• Course participants will gain a detailed
knowledge of report-writing, as well as
introductory knowledge of the Business
Planning & Consolidation product.
SOFTWARE
• Microsoft Windows Server 2003
Enterprise Edition
• Microsoft SQL Server 2000
& Consolidation 5.1
• Creating input schedules
• Creating reports
• Enabling drill-down capability
• Utilizing dynamic wizard templates
• Custom filters and suppression
• Setting workbook behavior options
• Adding indentation to row headers

OBPC51 · OKP SAP Business Planning and Consolidation 5.1

DURATION 20 hours PRICE € 350 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP • Applications • Report Identation

• Application Consultant • Logic • Advanced Expansion
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED • Data Manager • Hot Analysis
• Knowledge of Microsoft Excel, Word, • Creating Reports • Custom Buttons
and Powerpoint • Creating Input Schedules • Customizing Dynamic Templates
• More than 12 months project • Comments • EVDRE – Part I
experience • Creating and Publishing Books • EVDRE – Part II
• Upcoming participation in an SAP • Content Library / Live Reporting • Budgeting
Business Planning and Consolidation • Word and PowerPoint Interface • Web Assessment
• 5.1 project • Security • Summary
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None • Work Status NOTES
GOALS • Business Process Flows • This content is provided by SAP’s
• Describe SAP Business Planning and • Audit Reports Online Knowledge Products.
Consolidation 5.1 • Case Study Information regarding Online
• Plan SAP Business Planning and • Input Templates Knowledge Products and instructions
Consolidation 5.1 • Report Templates on how to access the Online Knowledge
• Implement SAP Business Planning and • Trend and Multi Application Templates Products are available:
Consolidation 5.1 • Conditional Formatting http://service.sap.com/okp
SOFTWARE • Basic Expansions • Course Length: 16: 27 hrs
CONTENT • Basic Control Panel • All materials are online
• Overview of SAP’s Next-Generation • Custom Control Panel Filtering
CPM Solutions • Drill in Place
• SAP Business Planning and • Suppresion
Consolidation 5.1: Getting Started • Dynamic Template Conditional
• Dimensions Formatting

www.sap.nl/education 313
SAP Solutions for Enterprise Performance Management
SAP Solutions for Planning: SAP NW BI – Business Planning & Analytical Services

BW001 NW BW305 NW BW310 NW BW380 NW

Business Intelligence BI – Enterprise Reporting, BI – Enterprise Data BI – Analysis Processes &
Overview (SAPBI) Query & Analysis (Part I) Warehousing Data Mining

5 hours 5 days 5 days 2 days

SAPNW NW BW370 NW
SAP NetWeaver Overview BI – Integrated Planning

3 days 5 days

NW001 NW
Technology Solutions
Powered by
SAP NetWeaver

8 hours

DBW70P NW
BI – Delta Planning SAP
NetWeaver 7.0

2 days

Cursusdetailgegevens kunt u vinden via de index op pagina 533

314
SAP Solutions for Enterprise Performance Management
SAP Solutions for Planning: SAP SEM Business Planning and Simulation (SEM-BPS)

SAPFIN ERP SEM010 ERP SEM200 ERP

SAP ERP Financials Strategic Enterprise Business Warehouse for
Management Overview SEM

2 days 3 days 5 days

SAP01
SAP Overview

3 days

ERP001 ERP BW370 NW

Management Empowered SAP BW Business
by SAP ERP Planning & Simulation

4 hours 5 days

TERP12 ERP AC040 ERP SEM215 ERP

SAP ERP: Introduction into Business Processes in Integrated Financial
Strategic Enterprise Mgmt Management Accounting Plannng with BPS
(SEM 4.0)

1 hour 5 days 5 days

Cursusdetailgegevens kunt u vinden via de index op pagina 533

www.sap.nl/education 315
SAP Solutions for Enterprise Performance Management
SAP Solutions for Planning: Business Objects Planning XI

BOP245
PL443e - BusinessObjects
Planning: Dashboard
Basics

4 hours

BOP246 BOP210 BOP216

PB410rw - PL340 - Planning: Plan PB355rw - Planning XI:
BusinessObjects Planning Reporting Fundamentals Working with Fixed and
XI Variable Reports

0,5 hour 2 days 1 hour

BOP215 BOP226
PB345e - BusinessObjects PB360w - BusinessObjects
Planning: Plan Reporting Planning XI
Fundamentals

2 hours 1 hour

BOP236
PB365rw -
BusinessObjects Planning:
BOP220 XI
PL440 - Planning: System 1 hour
and Budgeting
Fundamentals

2 days

BOF225 BOP235
FM215e - BusinessObjects PL442e - BusinessObjects
Planning: Planning for End- Planning: Budgeting Basics
Users

3 hours 6 hours

BOP205
PB210e - BusinessObjects
Planning: Essentials

4 hours

Cursusdetailgegevens kunt u vinden via de index op pagina 533

316
SAP Solutions for Enterprise Performance Management
SAP Solutions for Planning: Business Objects Planning Extended

BOP300 BOP310
PX200 - Planning Extended PX201 - Planning Extended
5.3: Implementation Team 5.3: Scripting
Training

4 days 1 day

Cursusdetailgegevens kunt u vinden via de index op pagina 533

www.sap.nl/education 317
SAP Solutions for Enterprise Performance Management
SAP Solutions for Consolidation: Business Consolidation (SEM-BCS)

SEM240 ERP SEM245 ERP

P_SEM-BCS_60
BW-based Consolidation SEM-BCS Migration and
Appl. Professional Bus.
Special Cases
Consolidation with SAP
ERP 6.0
5 days 3 days

SEM241 ERP AC660 ERP

SEM-BCS EC-CS Consolidation
for End Users Functions

2 days 5 days

Cursusdetailgegevens kunt u vinden via de index op pagina 533

318
SAP Solutions for Enterprise Performance Management
SAP Solutions for Consolidation: SAP Business Planning and Consolidation (SAP BPC)

CPM310 CPM320 CPM325

SAP BPC: Application SAP BPC: Reporting, SAP Business Planning
Configuration Budgeting & Consolidation and Consolidation -
Reporting
CPM030
Introduction to 3 days 3 days 5 hours
SAP Business Planning
and Consolidation
CPM311 CPM321
3 hours
SAP BPC: Application SAP BPC: Reporting,
Configuration Budgeting & Consolidation

5 days 5 days

OBPC51
OKP SAP Business
Planning and Consolidation
5.1
Virtual Classroom
20 hours

Cursusdetailgegevens kunt u vinden via de index op pagina 533

www.sap.nl/education 319
SAP Solutions for Governance, Risk and Compliance

Compliance and Access Controls

GRC200 ERP GRC300 ERP ADM955 ERP
Managing Compliance with Risk Analysis and SAP GRC Access Control –
Compliance Calibrator Remediation Installation

2 hours 3 days 4 days

GRC220 ERP GRC310 ERP

Compliant Provisioning User Provisioning & Role
with Access Enforcer Management

3 hours 3 days

TZPC25 ERP
EPT SAP GRC Process
Control 2.5

5 days

Governance in SAP ERP

SAPFIN ERP FIN900 ERP FIN910 ERP
SAP ERP Financials Auditing with SAP Management of Internal
Controls

2 days 5 days 4 days

ERP020 ERP
Management Empowered
by SAP ERP Financials

2 hours

FIN009 ERP FIN090 ERP FIN930 ERP

Corporate Governance SAP Solution Overview for Auditing with SAP BW and
Overview (Auditing & SOA) Auditing & SOA SEM

4 hours 4 hours 8 hours

Global Trade Management – Foreign Trade Management

GTS100 ERP GTS200 ERP
SAP Global Trade Services Configuration of SAP
Overview Global Trade Services

3 days 3 days

Cursusdetailgegevens kunt u vinden via de index op pagina 533

320
Duet

SAPDUT DUT010
Duet Solution Overview Installation and
Administration of Duet

2 days 3 days

DUT021 DUT022 DUT023 DUT024

Leave Management Time Management Budget Monitoring Team Management
Scenario for Duet Scenario Configuration for Scenario for Duet Scenario Configuration for
Duet Duet

2 hours 2 hours 2 hours 2 hours

DUT025 DUT026 DUT027 DUT028

Travel Management Sales Management Purchasing Management Demand Planning Scenario
Scenario Configuration for Scenario Configuration for Scenario Configuration for Configuration for Duet
Duet Duet Duet

2 hours 2 hours 2 hours 2 hours

DUT029 ODUET1
Reports Management Online Knowledge Product
Scenario Configuration for Duet
Duet

2 hours 25 hours

SAPDUT · Duet Solution Overview

DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP CONTENT • Provide an overview of the application

• Technology Consultants
• System Administrators
• Application Consultants implementing
Duet Scenarios
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• SAPNW SAP NetWeaver – Overview or
• NW001 Technology Solutions Powered
by SAP NetWeaver
• Knowledge of SAP Applications
GOALS
• Give an overview of the general features,
architecture and framework of Duet for
Microsoft Office and SAP
• Identify the main goals of Duet for configuration requirements to enable
Microsoft Office and SAP the Duet scenarios for Microsoft Office
• Define how Duet leverages the openness and SAP
of SAP Enterprise Services Architecture • Give an overview of the reporting
and Microsoft .NET capabilities with Duet for Microsoft
• Give an overview of the general features Office and SAP
of Duet for Microsoft Office and SAP SOFTWARE
• Give an overview of the Duet • ERP ECC 5.0
Environment architecture and • SAP NW 2004
framework
• Explain the Duet scenarios for Microsoft
Office and SAP

www.sap.nl/education 321
Duet
DUT010 · Installation and Administration of Duet
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• SAP NetWeaver administrators
• Technology consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAPDUT Duet Solution Overview
• ADM200 SAP Web AS Java
Administration
GOALS
• Install and configure the Microsoft and
SAP components of Duet
• Understand the Duet Framework
• Describe the variants of Single Sign-On
• Configure the User Management of SAP
Duet Server and SAP Duet Add-On
• Understand the Duet Role Management
and Synchronization
DUT021 · Leave Management Scenario for Duet
DURATION 2 hours PRICE € 150 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• Application Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAPDUT
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• SAPHR SAP ERP Human Capital
Management: Overview
GOALS
• Explain and configure the user
scenarios Leave Management of Duet
DUT022 · Time Management Scenario Configuration for Duet
DURATION 2 hours PRICE € 150 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• Application Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAPDUT
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• SAPHR SAP ERP Human Capital
Management: Overview
GOALS
• Explain and configure the user
scenarios Time Management of Duet
322
CONTENT SOFTWARE
• Identify the main goals of Duet for • DUET 1.0 SP01
Microsoft Office and SAP • WEBAS 6.40
• Installation of Duet server components • SAP ECC 5.0
• Configuring User Management and NOTES
Authentication • In addition to the content of course
- Kerberos Authentication SAPDUT, fundamental administration
- Configuring User Management knowledge for SAP Web AS Java is highly
• Initial Duet configuration required, as discussed in course
- Deploying Duet Business Applications ADM200.
- Role management and synchronization • The course does not cover any scenario
• Configuring trust in the Duet specific configuration in the backend
environment system, e.g. for Leave Management.
• Installation of Duet client components • The course documentation is in
• Supporting Duet English.
CONTENT • Common troubleshooting tips for
• Explain the business scenario Leave executing Leave Management with Duet
Management of Duet for Microsoft SOFTWARE
Office and SAP • ERP ECC 5.0
• Execute a leave request from Microsoft • SAP NW 2004
Outlook
• List prerequisite system requirements
for Duet Leave Management
• Configure the Leave Management
scenario of Duet
CONTENT • Common troubleshooting tips for
• Explain the business scenario Time executing Time Management with Duet
Management of Duet for Microsoft SOFTWARE
Office and SAP • ERP ECC 5.0
• Execute a leave request from Microsoft • SAP NW 2004
Outlook
• List prerequisite system requirements
for Duet Time Management
• Configure the Time Management
scenario of Duet
Duet
DUT023 · Budget Monitoring Scenario for Duet
DURATION 2 hours PRICE € 150 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• Application Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAPDUT
• Knowledge of budget configuration in
SAP ECC
GOALS
• Explain and configure the user
DUT024 · Team Management Scenario Configuration for Duet
DURATION 2 hours PRICE € 150 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• Application Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAPDUT
• Knowledge of organization
configuration in SAP ECC
GOALS
• Explain and configure the user
scenarios Team Management of Duet
DUT025 · Travel Management Scenario Configuration for Duet
DURATION 2 hours PRICE € 150 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• Application Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAPDUT Duet Solution Overview
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• SAPHR SAP ERP Human Capital
Management Overview or
• SAPFIN SAP ERP Financials
GOALS
• Explain and configure the user
scenarios Travel Management of Duet
scenarios Budget Monitoring of Duet for Duet Budget Monitoring
CONTENT • Configure the Budget Monitoring
• Explain the business scenario Budget scenario of Duet
Monitoring of Duet for Microsoft Office • Common troubleshooting tips for
and SAP executing Budget Monitoring with Duet
• Execute a budget report from Microsoft SOFTWARE
Outlook • ERP ECC 5.0
• List prerequisite system requirements • SAP NW 2004
CONTENT • Common troubleshooting tips for
• Explain the business scenario Team executing Team Management with Duet
Management of Duet for Microsoft SOFTWARE
Office and SAP • ERP ECC 5.0
• Execute team management processes • SAP NW 2004
from Microsoft Outlook
• List prerequisite system requirements
for Duet Team Management
• Configure the Team Management
scenario of Duet
CONTENT SOFTWARE
• Explain the business scenario Travel • SAP ERP 2005
Management of Duet for Microsoft • SAP Netweaver 2004 Java Web
Office and SAP Application Server 6.40
• Execute a travel request from Microsoft • Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0
Outlook • Microsoft IIS 6.0
• List prerequisite system requirements • Microsoft SQL Server 2000 and 2005
for Duet Travel Management Express Edition
• Configure the Travel Management • Microsoft Active Directory Service
scenario of Duet • Microsoft Exchange Server 2003
• Common troubleshooting tips for • Microsoft Office Professional Enterprise
executing Travel Management with Edition 2003
Duet
www.sap.nl/education 323
Duet
DUT026 · Sales Management Scenario Configuration for Duet
DURATION 2 hours PRICE € 150 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• Application Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAPDUT Duet Solution Overview
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• SAPSCM SAP Supply Chain
Management Solution Overview or
• SAPCRM Overview of the SAP CRM
solution
GOALS
• Explain and configure the user
scenarios Sales Management of Duet
DUT027 · Purchasing Management Scenario Configuration for Duet
DURATION 2 hours PRICE € 150 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• Application Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAPDUT Duet Solution Overview
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• SAPPLM Overview of the mySAP PLM
solution or
• SAPSRM Overview of the SAP SRM
solution
GOALS
• Explain and configure the user
scenarios
• Purchasing Management of Duet
DUT028 · Demand Planning Scenario Configuration for Duet
DURATION 2 hours PRICE € 150 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• Application Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAPDUT Duet Solution Overview
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• SCM220 Demand Planning
GOALS
• Explain and configure the user scenario
Demand Planning of Duet
CONTENT
• Explain the business scenario Demand
324
CONTENT
• Explain the business scenario Sales
Management of Duet for Microsoft
Office and SAP
• Execute a Sales process from Microsoft
Outlook
• List prerequisite system requirements
for Duet Sales Management
• Configure the Sales Management
scenario of Duet
• Common troubleshooting tips for
executing Sales Management with Duet
CONTENT
• Explain the business scenario
Purchasing Management of Duet for
Microsoft Office and SAP
• Execute a Purchasing process from
Microsoft Outlook
• List prerequisite system requirements
for Duet Purchasing Management
• Configure the Purchasing Management
scenario of Duet
• Common troubleshooting tips for
executing Purchasing Management with
Duet
Planning of Duet for Microsoft Office
and SAP
• Execute a Demand Planning process
from Microsoft Excel
• List prerequisite system requirements
for Duet Demand Planning
• Configure the Demand Planning
scenario of Duet
SOFTWARE
• mySAP ERP 2005
• SAP Netweaver 2004 Java Web
SOFTWARE
• SAP ERP 2005
• SAP Netweaver 2004 Java Web
Application Server 6.40
• Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0
• Microsoft IIS 6.0
• Microsoft SQL Server 2000 and 2005
Express Edition
• Microsoft Active Directory Service
• Microsoft Exchange Server 2003
• Microsoft Office Professional Enterprise
Edition 2003
SOFTWARE
• SAP ERP 2005
• SAP Netweaver 2004 Java Web
Application Server 6.40
• Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0
• Microsoft IIS 6.0
• Microsoft SQL Server 2000 and 2005
Express Edition
• Microsoft Active Directory Service
• Microsoft Exchange Server 2003
• Microsoft Office Professional Enterprise
Edition 2003
Application Server 6.40
• Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0
• Microsoft IIS 6.0
• Microsoft SQL Server 2000 and 2005
Express Edition
• Microsoft Active Directory Service
• Microsoft Exchange Server 2003
• Microsoft Office Professional Enterprise
Edition 2003
Duet

DUT029 · Reports Management Scenario Configuration for Duet

DURATION 2 hours PRICE € 150 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP CONTENT SOFTWARE

• Application Consultants
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAPDUT Duet Solution Overview
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• SAP01 SAP Overview or
• SAPSCM SAP Supply Chain
Management Solution Overview
GOALS
• Explain and configure the user
scenarios Reports Management of Duet
• Explain the business scenario Reports
Management of Duet for Microsoft
Office and SAP
• Execute reports from Microsoft
Outlook
• List prerequisite system requirements
for Duet Reports Management
• Configure the Reports Management
scenario of Duet
• Common troubleshooting tips for
executing Reports Management with
Duet
• SAP ERP 2005
• SAP Netweaver 2004 Java Web
Application Server 6.40
• Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0
• Microsoft IIS 6.0
• Microsoft SQL Server 2000 and 2005
Express Edition
• Microsoft Active Directory Service
• Microsoft Exchange Server 2003
• Microsoft Office Professional Enterprise
Edition 2003

ODUET1 · Online Knowledge Product Duet

DURATION 25 hours PRICE € 350 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP • Plan your Duet implementation project - Installation

• Duet Application Consultants
• Duet Technology Consultant
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• The Duet Learning Maps are designed
for qualified project participants
• Knowledge equivalent to this
Consultant profile
• More than 12 months project
experience
• Participation in a Duet Early Release
project
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• Describe Duet 1.0
• Implement Duet 1.0 - Configuration
CONTENT - Tools
• Application Consultant: NOTES
- Duet 1.0 Overview • This content is provided by SAP’s
- Organization (Team) Management Online Knowledge Products.
- Time Management Information regarding Online
- Leave Management Knowledge Products and instructions
- Budget Monitoring on how to access the Online Knowledge
- Admin UI for Budget Monitoring & Products are available:
Reporting http://service.sap.com/okp
- Travel Management • Course length:
- Sales Management - Application Consultant 12:30 hrs
• Technology Consultant: - Technology Consultant 12:30 hrs
- Duet 1.0 Overview • All materials are online

www.sap.nl/education 325
Overige cursussen

INDUSTRIESPECIFIEK
SAP Defense Forces and Public Security
DFPS60 Basics of Defense & Security 3 days € 1695 DATES On request
DFPS66 Defense Forces & Public Security Workshop part 1 4 days € 2360 DATES On request

DFPS67 Defense Forces & Public Security Workshop part 2 3 days € 1770 DATES On request

SAP Public Sector

WNLKF1* KFI Module 1 Budgeting Overview 5 days € 2950** DATES On request

WNLKF2* KFI Module 2 Budget Control System 2 days € 1180 DATES On request

WNLKF3 KFI Module 3 Additional Topics 2 days € 1180 DATES On request

* WNLKF1 en WNLKF2 gecombineerd 5 dagen € 2825 op 25 t/m 29 aug

** Indien direct aansluitend de certificeringstest afgenomen wordt is genoemde prijs inclusief certificeringskosten.

SAP Retail
SAPIRT Function Overview in SAP for Retail 5 days € 2950 DATES On request
IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail 5 days € 2950 DATES On request

IRT320 Pricing, Promotions, and Markdowns 5 days € 2950 DATES On request

IRT330 Planning, Purchasing, and Merchandise Distribution 5 days € 2950 DATES On request

IRT360 Store Connection 3 days € 1770 DATES On request

IRT370 SAP Retail Store 2 days € 1180 DATES On request

HR CURSUSSEN
Pensioen Module
WNLPF1 SAP HR Pension Funds NL: Overview 1 day € 590 DATES On request

WNLPF2 SAP HR Pension Funds NL: Customizing 4 days € 2360 DATES On request

WNLPF4 SAP HR PF NL: Maintenance 1 day € 590 DATES On request

OrgPublisher
Met OrgPublisher® for SAP solutions krijgen gebruikers van SAP HR nu de beschikking over een volledig geïntegreerde oplossing voor het publiceren
van gegevens vanuit SAP HR op het intranet.
WNLOR1 Intro OrgPublisher for SAP Solutions half day € 260 DATES On request

WNLOR2 WS OrgPublisher for SAP Solutions 2 days € 1180 DATES On request

326
Overige cursussen
Industry Solution SAP for Utilities

IUT110 IUT210 IUT220 IUT225 IUTBIL

Intro to the IS-U/CCS Master Data & Basic Device Management Energy Data Management Settling Energy Quantities
System Functions

5 days 3 days 3 days 2 days 3 days

IUT221
Work Management

4 hours

IUT230 IUT235
Billing & Invoicing Real-Time-Pricing

5 days 2 days

IUT240
Contract Accounts
Receivable and Payable

5 days

IUT250 IUT255
Customer Service Integration of SAP for CRM
and SAP for Utilities

2 days 3 days

IUT110 · Intro to the IS-U/CCS System

DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES 4-mei-09

TARGET GROUP with standard SAP components is - Device maintenance

• Managers exemplified. - Meter reading
• Project managers SOFTWARE - Billing and invoicing
• Project teams • ERP ECC 6.0 - Energy data management
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None CONTENT - Contract accounts receivable and
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED • Overview payable
• SAP01 SAP Overview - IS-U/CCS application components - Waste management
GOALS - Integration of IS-U/CCS with standard NOTES

• Participants gain an overview of the SAP system • This course, along with IUT210 (Master
business processes that can be mapped • Execution of the most important Data and Basic Functions) is
using IS-U/CCS. business processes: recommended as a prerequisite for any
• The most important customer business - Customer information further courses.
processes are introduced briefly using - Master data
examples. The integration of IS-U/CCS - Move-in/out handling

www.sap.nl/education 327
Overige cursussen
Industry Solution SAP for Utilities

IUT210 · Master Data & Basic Functions

DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES 11-mei-09

TARGET GROUP basic functions and tools of IS-U/CSS - Connection

• Project managers efficiently. - Premise
• Project teams SOFTWARE - Installation
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None • ERP ECC 6.0 - Point of delivery
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED CONTENT - Device
• IUT110 Business Processes in SAP for • IS-U/CCS basic functions • Integration with the standard SAP
Utilities - Regional structure system
GOALS - Scheduling - Equipment
• Participants familiarize themselves with • Commercial master data - Functional locations
technical and commercial master data - Business partner - Material
as well as the related basic functions of - Contract account • Enterprise organization/agent
the system. - Contract determination for Customizing
• Practice-oriented exercises equip • Technical master data functions
participants with the ability to use the - Connection object

IUT220 · Device Management

DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES 18-mei-09

TARGET GROUP • In addition to providing a theoretical - Device relationships and installation

• Project managers overview, this course equips participants
• Project teams with the practical ability to install their
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED own data constructs and customize the
• IUT110 Business Processes in SAP for device management.
Utilities SOFTWARE
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None • ERP ECC 6.0
GOALS CONTENT
• Participants familiarize themselves with • Device master data
the basic principles of device • Inventory managment (integration
management and the conversion of with MM)
related key business processes in IS- - Device procurement, device storage,
U/CCS, as well as the interfaces of device movement
standard SAP components MM and PM. • Device installation
- Installation, removal, replacement, and
modification
structure
• Meter readings
- Organization of readings
- Creation of meter reading orders and
download to external systems
- Entry, validation, and extrapolation
- Monitoring of meter reading results
• Device inspection
- Sampling procedure
- Periodic meter replacement
- Integration with standard QM
component

328
Overige cursussen
Industry Solution SAP for Utilities
IUT221 · Work Management
DURATION 4 hours PRICE € 350 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• Project managers
• Project team members
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• IUT110 Business Processes in Customer
Service
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• Participants will gain knowledge of basic
work management processes,
connections to standard components,
and interfaces to external systems
• The course includes exercises that
develop the participants' ability to
implement and operate important
processes in the system, such as service
connection processing
IUT225 · Energy Data Management
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES 4-jun-09
TARGET GROUP
• Project managers
• Project teams
• Consultants
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• IUT110 Device Management
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This course enables participants to use
the EDM component within IS- U/CCS.
• This course provides information about:
- Managing profiles in EDM
- Integrating profile management in IS-
U/CCS
- The structure of the EDM database
system
- The EDM interfaces
SOFTWARE
• ERP ECC 6.0
CONTENT
• Mapping technical assets for
transmission and distribution
• Drawing up maintenance and service
orders using service objects
- Scheduling appointments in call centers
- Linking sales orders and service orders
with service products
- Configuring service products
- Configuration and pricing
- Multilevel service products
• Using service objects and products in
utility industry processes
- Workflow for creating a service
connection with quotation
• By the end of this course, participants
shoule be able to manage profile data
using EDM.
SOFTWARE
• ERP ECC 6.0
CONTENT
• Introduction to EDM
• Profile managment
- Storing profile data
- Create and change profile header
- Allocate profiles to IS-U data objects
- Profile value imports and the roles of
profile allocation
- Import, display, and change profile
values and versions
• Synthetic profiles
- Generate and use synthetic profiles
- Periodic replacement, repair,
inspections, and so on
• Interfaces to external systems
- Integration of software products
- GIS Business Connector
- Outage management systems, SCADA
systems, and so on
NOTES
• This course is no longer offered as
classroom training. Instead, the course’s
content will ensure knowledge transfer
as an offline knowledge package.
- Dynamic modification of profiles
• Formula profiles
- Formula allocation and formula
calculation
NOTES
• This course is a prerequisite for course
IUT235 (Real-Time-Pricing). Participants
learn the basics of profile management
that are necessary for billing meter
readers
www.sap.nl/education 329
Overige cursussen
Industry Solution SAP for Utilities
IUT230 · Billing & Invoicing
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES 25-mei-09
TARGET GROUP
• Project managers
• Project teams
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• IUT110 Master Data and Basic Functions
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• Participants learn about the billing-
relevant master data and IS-U/CCS
functions. They also gain an
understanding of the billing process
flow, up to and including invoicing and
bill printing.
IUT235 · Real-Time-Pricing
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1180 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• Project managers
• Project teams
• Consultants
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• IUT110 Billing and Invoicing
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This course enables participants to use
the real-time pricing component (RTP)
within energy data management
(EDM).
• Participants will be able to use EDM for:
- Performing time series billing using load
profiles
330
• Participants will use exercises to learn - Functions (including periodic and
how to maintain existing rates, create period-end billing)
new constructs, and edit budget billing - Simulation
plans. - Outsorting
SOFTWARE - Reversal
• ERP ECC 6.0 - Manual billing
CONTENT • Invoicing
• Rate structure - Bill print-out
- Rate types and rate categories - Budget billing plan
- Prices - Reversal
- Billing schemas • Discounts and surcharges
- Rate determination • Special billing features
• Billing process • Customizing functions
- Creating complex rate models such as • Elements of the RTP interface
time-of-use and RTP - Formulas and RTP components
• By the end of this course, participants - Customizing settings and restult
will be able to map and define complex parameters for input and output
rate models using the RTP interface in - Embedding the RTP interface in IS-U
order to prepare the data contained in billing
EDM for billing in IS-U/CSS. NOTES
SOFTWARE • Please note that the e-learning course
• ERP ECC 6.0 IUT23e is available as an alternative to
CONTENT this classroom training.
• Introduction to real-time pricing billing
• Overview of the RTP interface
- Scope of functions in IS-U/CSS billing
- Overview of classic billing in IS-U/CCS
and the integration of profiles in billing
Overige cursussen
Industry Solution SAP for Utilities
IUT240 · Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES 8-jun-09
TARGET GROUP
• Project managers
• Project teams
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED
• IUT110 Master Data and Basic Functions
Duration
GOALS
• This course covers the technical data
context of contract accounts subledger
and its integration into FI general ledger
accounting and other standard SAP
modules.
• Using concrete examples, participants
learn how the most important business
IUT250 · Customer Service
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• Project managers
• Project teams
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• IUT110 Master Data and Basic Functions
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED NONE
GOALS
• This course explains the specific IS-U
knowledge required for mapping typical
business processes within a company
and the integration of these processes
processes from the contract accounting
area are represented in the system.
• An impression is given of how efficient
revenue managment can be achieved
based on the contract accounts
receivable and payable.
SOFTWARE
• ERP ECC 6.0
CONTENT
• Organizational elements of contract
accounting
• Transactions and account
determination
• Posting and documents
• Account information
into the Customer Interaction Center.
• Participants learn how to execute the
most important business processes in
customer service.
SOFTWARE
• ERP ECC 6.0
CONTENT
• Customer Interaction Center
- Operation and user-specific
modification of CIC processes
- Design of the CIC interface
• Payments and returns processing
• Cash desk and payment lot
• Settlement control
• Deferrals/installent plans
• Interest calculation
• Dunning and collection
• Security deposits
• Transfer to general ledger (FI-GL) and
integration into further SAP
components
• Contract accounting as the basis for
credit and collections management
• Demonstration of the customizing
functions for all business processes
• Processing of business transactions
- Customer information/contacts
- Move-in/out
- Disconnection/reconnection of
installations
- Master data generator
• Customizing functions
NOTES
• This course does not cover the use of
CIC as a call center with telephony
functions.
www.sap.nl/education 331
 Overige cursussen
Industry Solution SAP for Utilities
IUT255 · Integration of SAP for CRM and SAP for Utilities
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• Project teams that are responsible for
modeling business processes
• Key users with technical aims
• Administrators controlling data
integration
• Technical consultants
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• IUT250 CRM Customizing
Fundamentals
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED
• CR600 BI - Enterprise Data
Warehousing
GOALS
• Participants will be able to explain the
most important aspects of the
IUTBIL · Settling Energy Quantities
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• Project managers
• Consulting partners with IS-U/CSS
knowledge
• EDM/IDE implementation team
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• IUT110 Business Processes in SAP for
Utilities
• IUT210 Master Data and Basic Functions
• IUT225 Energy Data Management
332
integration process between SAP CRM,
SAP IS-U and SAP BW, as well as the
data model.
• Participants will be familiar with the
necessary Customizing settings for the
integration of these systems and know
how to execute them.
SOFTWARE
• ERP ECC 6.0
CONTENT
• Process overview: involved objects (SAP
CRM/SAP IS-U/SAP BW)
• Process overview: utility contracts for
residential customers, follow- up
processes, and marketing for utilities
• Middleware: general concepts
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED
• IUT235 Real-Time-Pricing
• IUTW44 Master Data for Deregulation
and Data Exchange
GOALS
• This course focuses on settling energy
quantities and schedule management.
SOFTWARE
CONTENT
• The settlement workbench is used based
on real-life examples. Enhancement
options and Customizing settings are
• Middleware replication: integration of
business partners and technical objects
• Products in SAP CRM, master data
templates in SAP IS-U
• Replication of SAP CRM service
contracts to SAP IS-U
• Initial download
• SAP IS-U contacts and SAP CRM
activities
• Configuration of Interaction Center
WinClient in SAP CRM
• Settings regarding marketing campaigns
• Processes in IC WebClient, KAM Portal
for commercial and industrial
customers
discussed and demonstrated on the
system. In particular, the following
topics are covered:
- Settling energy quantities
- Timetable creation
- Higher and lower volume
determination
- Settlement procedures
- Energy dataflows
Academy SAP Customer Relationship Management

TCRM10 CRM TCRM20 CRM

C_TCRM20_60
CRM – Fundamentals I CRM – Fundamentals II Appl. Associate -
CRM Fund. with
SAP CRM 2007
(CRM 6.0)
10 days 10 days

TCRM20 · Fundamentals II
DURATION 10 days PRICE € 5900 STARTING DATES 9-mrt-09, 8-jun-09

TARGET GROUP CONTENT • CRM Middleware: basic concepts of

• Solution consultants responsible for • Customizing fundamentals for CRM - CRM middleware, replication
implementing Customer Relationship CRM business transactions administration, data exchange,
Management with SAP CRM - Overview of generic functions in monitoring, and error handling
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED business transactions • User interface (UI) technology in SAP
• Basic business knowledge of CRM - Activity management CRM
processes and concepts - Customizing for these objects • Case Study: implementation of example
• TCRM10 Business Processes in Sales • Customizing fundamentals for CRM - scenarios using specific business
Order Management Process control and determination processes
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None - Partner determination • Certification examination on the
GOALS - Actions content of the course
• Use the basic knowledge a CRM - Overview of pricing in CRM NOTES
solution consultant requires for all - CRM billing • As part of this training the certification
consultant profiles • Solution Manager (project preparation exam "SAP Certified Application
SOFTWARE phase, Business Blueprint phase, Associate – CRM Foundation with SAP
• SAP CRM 2007 implementation phase) CRM 2007" is included and will be run
• ERP ECC 6.0 on the last day of the training.

www.sap.nl/education 333
Academy SAP NetWeaver
Business Intelligence Solution Consultant

Basic Training as Solution Consultant SAP NetWeaver 2004s – Business Intelligence (for new BI consultants)
TBW41 NW
BI – Extraction with UDI &
XI and APD

4 hours

TBW10 NW TBW20 NW TBW42 NW TBW45 NW C_TBW45_70 NW

BI – Data Warehousing BI – Reporting & Analysis BI – Advanced Enterprise BI – Business Planning and SAP Certified Application
Data Warehousing & Simulation Associate – Business
Reporting Intelligence – SAP
NetWeaver 7.0
5 days 5 days 10 days 5 days

Delta Training as Solution Consultant SAP NetWeaver 2004s – Business Intelligence (for experienced BI consultants)
TBW45 NW TBW70D NW C_DBW30_04s NW
Certified Solution
Consultant SAP BI – BI – Business Planning and BI – Delta Enterprise Data Solution Consultant SAP
Business Information Simulation Warehousing & Reporting NetWeaver 2004s
Warehouse 2002 SAP NetWeaver 2004s* - Business Intelligence
SAP BW 3.0 (SAPBW3.0)
5 days 5 days

TBW41 NW
BI – Extraction with UDI & * TBW70D = DBW70R + DBW70E
XI and APD

4 hours

TBWD35 NW TBW45 NW C_DBW45_04 NW

Certified Solution
Consultant SAP BI –
Business Information
Warehouse 2002
SAP BW 3.0
Delta-Reporting WHM, BI – Business Planning and Solution Consultant SAP
Extraction Simulation NetWeaver 2004
(SAP BW 3.0 – 3.5) - Business Intelligence
3 days 5 days

DBW70P NW TBW70D NW C_DBW35_04S NW

Certified Solution
Consultant
SAP Netweaver 2004
- Business Intelligence
SAP BW 3.5
BI – Delta Planning SAP BI – Delta Enterprise Data
NetWeaver 2004s Warehousing & Reporting
SAP NetWeaver 2004s*
2 days 5 days
Solution Consultant SAP
NetWeaver 2004s
- Business Intelligence
(SAPBW3.5)

CERTIFICATION Solution Academy basic training as Solution Consultant SAP NetWeaver 2004s – Business Intelligence (for new BI consultants)

TBW10 > TBW20 > TBW41 > TBW42 > TBW45 > C_TBW45_04s
ALTERNATIVE COURSES BW310 > BW305 > BW306 > BW330 > BW350 > BW360 > BW365 > BW370 > BW380 > C_TBW45_04s

Voor de meest actuele certificeringinformatie verwijzen wij u graag naar www.sap.com/services/education/certification

334
Academy SAP NetWeaver
Business Intelligence Solution Consultant
TBW10 · BI – Enterprise Data Warehousing
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES 5-jan-09, 8-jun-09
TARGET GROUP
Solution consultants responsible for
implementing SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
Basic knowledge of data warehousing
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• Experience of one SAP component
• Basic understanding of the Data
Dictionary
GOALS
The participants gain the detailed BI
knowledge necessary to carry out
successful implementation and
administration within a heterogeneous
SAP BI system landscape
TBW20 · BI – Reporting & Query Design
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950 STARTING DATES 12-jan-09, 15-jun-09
TARGET GROUP
Solution consultants responsible for
implementing SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
TBW10 (SAP Business IntelIigence – Data
Warehousing)
GOALS
In this course you will gain knowledge
that will enable you to create simple and
complex query definitions with the BEx
Query Designer and the BEx Web
Analyzer, and make these available in
standard layouts.
CONTENT
• Architecture and functions of the SAP
BI analysis tools
CONTENT NOTES
• Architecture of SAP NetWeaver 2004s BI To ensure that you retain the knowledge
• Overview of the most important objects gained in this course and successfully
(Info objects, InfoProviders and so on) complete the certification examination at
in BI and their properties the end of course TBW45, we recommend
• Components of the data flow and that you consolidate the content in your
extracting data from SAP source systems own time after the course.
or other data sources in the BI
• Benefits and use of the business content
• Introduction to administration of BI
data targets
• Basics for optimizing query
performance (BI accelerator)
SOFTWARE
SAP NetWeaver 2004s
• Navigation in SAP BI reports Business Content
• Creating query definitions with the BEx SOFTWARE
Query Designer and the BEx Web SAP NetWeaver 2004s
Analyzer NOTES
• Integrating key figures, characteristics, To ensure that you retain the knowledge
hierarchies, variables, properties, gained in this course and successfully
exceptions, and conditions in the query complete the certification examination at
definitions the end of course TBW45, we recommend
• Using the BEx information broadcaster that you consolidate the content in your
to distribute reports own time after the course.
• Integrating applications in the SAP
Enterprise Portal
• Integrating documents in reports
• Configuring report-report interfaces
• Presenting reports in MS Excel or
HTML
• Using predefined reports from the SAP
www.sap.nl/education 335
Academy SAP NetWeaver
Business Intelligence Solution Consultant
TBW41 · BI – Extraction with UDI & XI and APD
DURATION 5 hours PRICE € 550 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
Solution consultants responsible for
implementing SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• TBW10 (BI – Enterprise Data
Warehousing)
• TBW20 (BI – Reporting & Query
Design)
TBW42 · BI – Advanced Enterprise Data Warehousing & Reporting
DURATION 10 days PRICE € 5900 STARTING DATES 19-jan-09, 22-jun-09
TARGET GROUP
Solution consultants responsible for
implementing SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• TBW10 (BI – Enterprise Data
Warehousing)
• TBW20 (BI – Reporting & Query
Design)
• The following are included in posting
TBW42: E-learning TBW41 (BI –
Extraction with UDI & XI and APD),
which you must study in your own
time before the course begins
GOALS
In this course, you will gain in-depth
knowledge in the areas of extraction,
performance & administration,
authorizations, and modeling and layout
of reports.
CONTENT
• Data acquisition (data flow in BI,
transformations, delta management,
336
GOALS
In this course, you will become familiar
with selected information from the topic
areas UDI, XI, and APD.
CONTENT
• Universal data integration
• Exchange Infrastructure
• Process Designer analysis
SOFTWARE
SAP NetWeaver 2004s
enhancement of Business Content
DataSources, process of extracting data
fromSAP source systems, data staging
via different interfaces, real-time data
acquisition, direct access, unit of
measure conversion)
• Performance & administration (process
chains, aggregates, BI accelerator)
• User management & authorizations
(architecture and strategies for a BI
authorization concept, security requests
in SAP BI, creating authorizations for
reporting, administrative tasks, source
systems, and the planning
environment)
• Modeling (creating authorizations for
reporting, developing a BI data
model,modeling data marts,
enhancing/changing the data model,
remodeling, aspects of an Enterprise
Data Warehouse architecture, special
aspects of modeling and data
warehousing, InfoSets, MultiProvider,
NOTES
• To ensure that you retain the
knowledge gained in this course and
successfully complete the certification
examination at the end of course
TBW45, we recommend that you
consolidate the content in your own
time after the course.
• A training system is not available from
SAP Education for this E-learning.
and Open Hub Service)
• Report layout (using different webitems
to create demanding web applications,
creating formatted reports that are
optimized for presentation and
printing, using GIS functions to display
data on maps, advanced options and
settings options in the BEx Information
Broadcaster, using the advanced options
in MS Excel, introduction to modelling
analytical applications using the Visual
Composer)
SOFTWARE
SAP NetWeaver 2004s
NOTES
To ensure that you retain the knowledge
gained in this course and successfully
complete the certification examination at
the end of course TBW45, we recommend
that you consolidate the content in your
own time after the course.
Academy SAP NetWeaver
Business Intelligence Solution Consultant

TBW45 · BI – Business Planning and Simulation

DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950* STARTING DATES 2-feb-09, 6-jul-09

TARGET GROUP GOALS • Using characteristic relationships to

Solution consultants responsible for
implementing SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
For new SAP BI consultants:
• TBW10 (BI – Enterprise Data
Warehousing)
• TBW20 (BI – Reporting & Query
Design)
• TBW41 (BI – Extraction with UDI & XI
and APD)
This course give you an in-depth insight
into BI integrated planning
CONTENT
• Status and tracking system
• Setting up planning structures and
looking at modelling aspects
• Customizing and executing planning
functions
• Setting up a planning query that is
ready for input using the BEx Query
Designer
integrate the correct business
characteristic relationships in planning
• Integrating the status and tracking
system in planning, as a monitoring
tool
• Certification examination for SAP
NetWeaver 2004s – Business Intelligence
Solution Consultant on the content of
courses TBW10, TBW20, TBW41, TBW42,
and TBW45
SOFTWARE

• TBW42 (BI – Advanced Enterprise Data • Integrating the planning query in SAP NetWeaver 2004s
Warehousing & Reporting) different end-user interfaces
• Displaying different query tools in a
planning context
* Indien direct aansluitend de certificeringstest afgenomen wordt is genoemde prijs inclusief certificeringskosten.

TBW70D · BI – Delta Enterprise Data Warehousing & Reporting SAP NetWeaver 2004s
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950* STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP • Business Content Analyzer and • New functionalities in document

Solution Consultants responsible for
implementing SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence who already have experience
with SAP BW 3.5
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
A solid knowledge of SAP BW 3.5
GOALS
• Overview of the new Enterprise Data
Warehousing and reporting functions in
SAP NetWeaver 2004s
• For the delta certification examination
only: a certificate in accordance with
the description of certification (you
must have this certificate before sitting
the examination)
CONTENT
• Introduction to Enterprise Data
Warehousing
• Data Warehousing Workbench
• Enhanced functions of InfoSets,
DataStore objects
• Remodeling toolbox
Content Browser
• Unit of measure conversion
• New data flow concept, BI data sources
• Enhanced process chain functionalities
• Virtual provider and remote access to
master and transaction data, real-time
data acquisition
• BI accelerator
• Concept for Information Lifecycle
Management
• BEx Query Designer (new user interface
and analytical functions), BEx Web
Analyzer (new functions), BEx Report
Designer, BEx Web Application Designer
(new user interface, new functions such
as Command Wizard, new Web items,
new graphics functionalities), BEx
Analyzer (new navigation functions,
enhanced Excel integration, design
mode), BEx Information Broadcaster
(new functions)
• Introduction to the Visual Composer
integration
• New concept for reporting
authorizations
• Delta certification examination to
become a solution consultant for SAP
NetWeaver 2004s based on the content
of courses TBW45, TBW41, TBW70D (for
delta exam BW 3.0 – 2004s) or DBW70P,
TBW70D (for delta exam BW 3.5 – 2004s)
SOFTWARE
SAP NetWeaver 2004s
NOTES
After completing this course, you will be
able to sit the delta certification exam BW
3.0 – SAP NetWeaver 2004s (2 hours) or
BW 3.5 – SAP NetWeaver 2004s (1 hour),
depending on the certificates you have.
Specify which certification exam you wish
to sit when you register for the course.

* Indien direct aansluitend de certificeringstest afgenomen wordt is genoemde prijs inclusief certificeringskosten.

www.sap.nl/education 337
Academy SAP NetWeaver
Business Intelligence Solution Consultant

TBWD35 · Delta-Reporting WHM, Extraction (SAP BW 3.0 – 3.5)

DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1770 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP - Enhanced functionality in the Integration (Universal Data Connect, BI

Solution Consultants responsible for
implementing SAP Business Intelligence
who already have experience with SAP BW
3.0B/3.1C
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
availability and use of reports with the
BEx Broadcaster
- Introduction to SAP Chart Designer
and new Web items in the Web
Application Designer
Java Connector, BI Java SDK)
- Enhanced open-hub service for third-
party extraction tools
• SAP BI Data Mining overview
SOFTWARE

A solid knowledge of SAP BW 3.0B/3.1C - Introduction to BEx Web Analyzer SAP Business Information Warehouse 3.5
GOALS - Introduction to the new planning NOTES

This course will prepare you to:
Use the new reporting, Warehouse
Management (WHM), and extraction
functions in SAP BW 3.5
CONTENT
• New features in reporting:
functions
- Simple report publishing in SAP
Enterprise Portal
• New features in WHM/extraction:
- Enhanced flexibility in the extraction
process through: Universal Data
To ensure that you retain the knowledge
gained in this course, we recommend that
you consolidate the content in your own
time after the course.

338
Academy SAP NetWeaver
SAP Process Integration

SAP Process Integration Technology Consultant

TADMD5 TBIT40 NW TBIT50 NW TBIT51 NW
Geen ervaring met Delta Implementation & XI Fundamentals* XI Technical XI Technical
SAP Web AS Java – Operations SAP Web AS Implementation & Implementation &
Administration 6.20 – 6.40 Operation (Part 1)** Operation (Part 2)

5 days 5 days 6 hours 5 days

TADM10 NW
C_TBIT51_70
SAP NetWeaver -
Tech. Consultant
Web AS Implementation & SAP NW 7.0-
Operation I Exchange Infrastructure
10 days

SAP Process Integration Development Consultant

BIT100 NW BIT140 NW
SAP NetWeaver Process XML Introduction
Integration – Overview

3 days 2 days

TBIT40 NW BIT402 NW BIT403 NW TBIT44 NW

C_TBIT44_70
XI Fundamentals* Adapters Concepts Adapters Concepts Mapping, Adapters and
Dev. Consultant
Part 1** Part 2** BPM
SAP NW 7.0-
Exchange Infrastructure
5 days 6 hours 6 hours 5 days

* TBIT40 is uitwisselbaar met BIT400

** Bij aanmelding voor de cursussen TBIT44 en TBIT51 zijn betreffende E-learnings BIT402, BIT403 en TBIT50 kosteloos.

CERTIFICATION Solution Academy basic training as Development Consultant SAP NetWeaver 2004 – Exchange Infrastructure & Integration Technology

(XI 7.0) (for new XI consultants)

(BIT100) > (BIT140) > TBIT40 > BIT402 > BIT403 > TBIT44 > C_TBIT44_70
ALTERNATIVE COURSES (BIT100) > (BIT140) > BIT400 > BIT402 > BIT403 > BIT430 > BIT450 > BIT460 > C_TBIT44_70

Voor de meest actuele certificeringinformatie verwijzen wij u graag naar www.sap.com/services/education/certification

www.sap.nl/education 339
Academy SAP NetWeaver
SAP Process Integration
TADM10 · SAP Netweaver AS Implementation and Operation
DURATION 10 days PRICE € 6600 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• Technology Consultants responsible for
the implementation and operation of
SAP systems
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• Data processing knowledge
• Fundamental knowledge of operating
systems and databases
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• Perform SAP system administration
tasks
SOFTWARE
• SAP NetWeaver AS 7.0
CONTENT
• Fundamentals of SAP Netweaver AS:
- Introduction to SAP NetWeaver
- Architecture of SAP Netweaver AS
• Fundamentals of SAP system
administration:
TADMD5 · Delta Implementation & Operations SAP Web AS 6.20 – 6.40
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 3300* STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
Technology consultants who are
responsible for the implementation and
operation of SAP systems and who already
have experience of SAP Web AS 6.20
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• Experience implementing and operating
SAP systems using SAP R/3 4.6B or SAP
Web AS 6.20
• For the delta certification examination
only: Certification exam as Technology
Consultant SAP NetWeaver – SAP Web
AS Impl. & Oper. for [DB] (2003, SAP
Web AS 6.20). This must be presented
for the certification exam.
GOALS
This course covers the main differences
between the certification training courses
for SAP Web AS 6.20 and SAP Web AS 6.40
(especially SAP Web AS Java
administration).
* Indien direct aansluitend de certificeringstest afgenomen wordt is genoemde prijs inclusief certificeringskosten.
340
- Starting and stopping an SAP system
(incl. SAP MC)
- System configuration options in AS
ABAP and AS Java
• User administration
• System monitoring in AS ABAP and AS
Java
• Fundamentals of AS Java
• Change management and software
logistics for SAP Netweaver AS
• Configuration of integrated SAP
Internet Transaction Server (SAP ITS)
• Internet technologies in the SAP
environment:
- SAP ITS, SAP ICM, SAP Web Dispatcher
CONTENT
• Fundamentals of SAP Web AS Java
• Starting and stopping
• Basic configuration of SAP Web AS Java
• User administration in SAP Web AS Java
• Monitoring SAP Web AS Java
• Patching for SAP Web AS Java
• Change management and software
logistics for SAPWeb AS Java
• Other topics related to system
administration for SAP Web AS Java
• Configuration of integrated SAP
Internet Transaction Server (SAP ITS)
and use of SAP GUI for HTML
• New features in SAP Web Dispatcher
and ICM
• Delta certification examination for
Technology Consultant SAP NetWeaver
2004 – SAPWeb AS for [DB], based on the
course content
NOTES
• Most of the topics listed are looked at
from the perspective of both AS Java
and AS ABAP (user administration,
system monitoring, configuration,
starting and stopping, and so on).
• The topics covered in this course also
prepare you for your follow-up
education needed for Associate
certification exams in PI (XI) and Portal.
The selection of topics in TADM10 is
such, that you are prepared to follow
three certification paths. For the
certificate Technology Associate –
System Administration SAP NetWeaver
7.0, you further need the knowledge of
courses TADM12 and TADM5x.
• To ensure that you retain the
knowledge gained in this course and
successfully complete the certification
examination at the end of course
TADM5x, we recommend that you
consolidate the content in your own
time after the course.
SOFTWARE
SAP Web Application Server 6.40
NOTES
This course is included in the Technology
Consultant SAP NetWeaver ’04 – SAPWeb
AS curriculum as a delta course with a
delta certification examination. It is also
included as a baseline training course for
Java administration in the Technology
Consultant SAP NetWeaver 2004 –
Enterprise Portal & KMC curriculum (for
consultants with prior knowledge of SAP
Web AS ABAP administration, but with no
experience of Java administration; such
participants do not need to take the delta
certification examination).
Academy SAP NetWeaver
SAP Process Integration
TBIT40 · XI Fundamentals
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 3300 STARTING DATES 12-jan-09, 23-mrt-09, 25-mei-09
TARGET GROUP
• Consultants and developers who want
to set up scenarios with the SAP
NetWeaver Exchange Infrastructure
(SAP XI, i.e. SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration PI)
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• SAPTEC Fundamentals of SAP Web AS
• BIT100 SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration – Overview
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED None
TBIT44 · Mapping, Adapters and BPM
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2950* STARTING DATES 2-feb-09, 20-apr-09
TARGET GROUP
• Development consultants responsible
for configuring SAP XI scenarios
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• TBIT40 (XI Fundamentals)
• BIT402 (Adapter Concepts I)
• BIT403 (Adapter Concepts II)
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• BIT100 (SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration) or equivalent knowledge;
BIT140 (Introduction to XML) or
equivalent knowledge
• Basic Java programming knowledge
GOALS
• Implement complex XI scenarios,
including enhanced mapping and BPM
functions
* Indien direct aansluitend de certificeringstest afgenomen wordt is genoemde prijs inclusief certificeringskosten.
GOALS
• The participants will learn to configure
scenarios and
• Understand and configure the different
options with which a back-end system
can be connected to the SAP Exchange
Infrastructure (SAP XI).
CONTENT
• Architecture and components of the
SAP Exchange Infrastructure
• Configuration and runtime behavior of
synchronous and asynchronous
scenarios
CONTENT
• BPM
- Overview of BPM
- Step types for ccBPM processes in the
SAP Exchange Infrastructure (SAP
BPEL4WS import and export
- Delivered samples (process patterns)
- Exception handling in ccBPM processes
- Monitoring and error handling in
ccBPM processes
• Mapping
- Overview of mapping techniques
- Standard functions in message mapping
- User-defined functions in message
mapping
- Complex mapping tasks in message
mapping
- Value-mapping techniques in message
mapping
• Connecting back-end systems using
proxies and adapters (especially file
adapters, HTTP adapter, IDoc adapter
and RFC adapter)
• Overview of mapping and message
mapping
• Overview of cross-component Business
Process Management (ccBPM)
SOFTWARE
• XI 7.0
• SAP NetWeaver 7.0
- Further techniques of message mapping
including ABAP, Java, and XSLT
mapping
- Examination for certification as a
Development Consultant for SAP
NetWeaver
SOFTWARE
• SAP NetWeaver 7.0
• SAP Exchange Infrastructure 3.0
NOTES
• To ensure that you retain the
knowledge gained in this course and
successfully complete the certification
examination, it is essential that you
consolidate the content in your own
time after the course.
www.sap.nl/education 341
Academy SAP NetWeaver
SAP Process Integration
TBIT50 · XI Technical Implementation & Operations (Part 1)
DURATION 6 hours PRICE € 550 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• Technology Consultants responsible for
the implementation and operation of
SAP NetWeaver XI
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• TBIT40 SAP NetWeaver Exchange
Infrastructure
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• TADMD5 Delta Implementation &
Operation SAP Web AS 6.20 – SAP Web
• AS 6.40 (Java & ABAP) to gain Java
administration know-how
GOALS
• Perform the administration and
monitoring tasks relevant to the specific
components covered in the course.
TBIT51 · XI Technical Implementation & Operation (Part 2)
DURATION 5 days PRICE € 3300* STARTING DATES 16-feb-09, 20-apr-09
TARGET GROUP
• Technology Consultants responsible for
the implementation and operation of
SAP NetWeaver XI
PREREQUISITES – REQUIRED
• TBIT40 XI Fundamentals (or
alternatively BIT400)
• TBIT50 XI Technical Implementation
and Operations (part 1)
PREREQUISITES – RECOMMENDED
• TADMD5 Delta Implementation &
Operation SAP Web AS 6.20 – SAP Web
• AS 6.40 (Java & ABAP) to gain Java
administration know-how
GOALS
• Perform the installation, administration
and monitoring of all XI technical
components
* Indien direct aansluitend de certificeringstest afgenomen wordt is genoemde prijs inclusief certificeringskosten.
342
CONTENT NOTES
• XI technical architecture overview • In most countries (for example,
• Exchange profile Germany) access to e-learning is
• SLD granted when you book the classroom
• Runtime workbench training course that follows on from the
• IB administration e-learning course, as stated in the
• SW logistics curriculum. In other words,
• Network considerations participation in the e-learning course is
• Operations included in the price of the classroom
• XI tuning training course. In some countries, e-
SOFTWARE learning is not included in the price of
• XI 7.0 classroom training. Please contact your
local training department for more
information.
• If you have studied this e-learning
material in detail, successful
participation in the following classroom
training course is possible in all cases.
• The course material is available in
English only. A training system is not
available from SAP Education for e-
learning.
CONTENT Exchange Infrastructure & Integration
• XI Installation and patching Technology covering the content of
- XI preparation and installation TBIT40/BIT400, TBIT50 und TBIT51
- Post-installation and configuration SOFTWARE
- Patching • XI 7.0
• User management and connections + NOTES
security • To ensure that you retain the
- User Management knowledge gained in this course and for
- Security the successful completion of the
• Integration Engine certification examination, we
- Integration Engine XML processing recommend that you consolidate the
- Integration Engine Configuration content in your own time after the
• BPE Administration course.
• CCMS Integration
• Use case: msg troubleshooting
• AF Administration
• Certification test Technology
Consultant SAP NetWeaver 2004 –
Business Objects
Administration - Enterprise v6.5
BOE105 BOE115
BO601e - BusinessObjects BO602e - BusinessObjects
6.5 Enterprise 6.5 Enterprise
Administration Part 1 Administration Part 2
9 hours 10 hours
BOE105 · BO601e - BusinessObjects 6.5 Enterprise Administration Part 1
DURATION 9 hours PRICE € 423 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• System Administrators and architects
who are responsible for the technical
and practical aspects of administering
BusinessObjects 6.5 for their enterprise.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• Familiarity with Windows 2000 Server
administration
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• The first of a three-part series of E-
learning courses for Business Objects
administrators, the BusinessObjects 6.5
Enterprise Administration Part 1:
Understanding BusinessObjects
Architecture, Client Applications, and
Repository course allows you to
understand enduser software from an
end-user and an administrative
perspective, BusinessObjects server
architecture, and database structure.
• On completion of this course you will
be able to:
BOE125 BOE130
BO603e - BusinessObjects BO502 - BusinessObjects:
6.5 Enterprise Supervisor
Administration Part 3
4,5 hours
- Describe how end-users work with
BusinessObjects and WebIntelligence
- Explain Business Objects architecture
- Describe Business Objects system
components and services
- Install 2-tier Business Objects
- Work with Business Objects repositories
and universes
- Manage users with Business Objects 6.5
Supervisor
- Migrate documents from a
development to a production
environment
CONTENT
• Report Builders
- Learn about report builders’ roles and
the tools and products needed in any
successful Business Objects 2-tier and 3-
tier deployment.
- Learn how to delegate log on to an
existing WebIntelligence system, and
create, edit, and distribute
WebIntelligence and BusinessObjects
1 day
reports.
• Architecture Overview
- Understand what servers are needed
and how they interact.
• 2-tier Installation
- Install desktop and administration
products and set up middleware
connections to the database.
Understand the XML license file needed
for all Business Objects products and
what the key file is for.
• Database-tier
- Review database structure, universe
design considerations, and learn about
the BusinessObjects repository.
- Create and populate a repository and
distribute it to multiple domains. Use
Supervisor to add users and connect to
a corporate database.
NOTES
• Check out www.businessobjects.com/
services/training for more details
www.sap.nl/education 343
Business Objects
Administration - Enterprise v6.5
BOE115 · BO602e - BusinessObjects 6.5 Enterprise Administration Part 2
DURATION 10 hours PRICE € 423 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• System administrators and architects
who are responsible for the technical
and practical aspects of administering
BusinessObjects 6.5 for their enterprise.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• Familiarity with Windows 2000 Server
administration
• As the follow-up course to
BusinessObjects 6.5 Enterprise
Administration: Part 1 (BO601e), this
course assumes that you have already
gone through Part 1 and have a
BusinessObjects system set up, or have
equivalent knowledge. This will enable
you to perform the activities in this
course on your system. Specifically, it
assumes you know how to:
- Install the 2-tier full-client
- Set up connections to middleware and
demo universe
- Create the repository and bomain.key
- Add BusinessObjects users and groups
- Secure universes and documents
- Set up document categories
- Distribute multiple universe and
document domains
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
344
GOALS
• The second of a three-part series of E-
learning courses for Business Objects
administrators, the BusinessObjects 6.5
Enterprise Administration Part 2:
Setting Up Business Objects Servers
course guides you through installing
and configuring ASP and JSP
implementations of Business Objects
systems, upgrading the Business Objects
server, clustering Business Objects
servers, and setting up Broadcast Agent.
• On completion of this course you will
be able to:
- Install Apache web and Tomcat
application servers
- Install, configure, and administer
Business Objects server
- Upgrade Business Objects server
- Cluster Business Objects servers
- Install and configure Broadcast Agent
(BCA)
CONTENT
• Web and Application Servers
- Install Apache web servers and Tomcat
application servers to set up a JSP
environment to install and configure a
Business Objects server.
• Business Objects Server
- Install and configure the Business
Objects Server, multiple language
support and LDAP authentication.
- Also learn about the administration
console and Business Objects server
processes.
• Broadcast Agent
- Learn about Broadcast Agent and how
to configure and test it.
• Clustering
- Learn the purpose and specific
implementation of the object request
broker (ORB) and the application
services framework (ASF).
- Understand the role of the primary,
secondary, and client nodes and how to
configure them for load- balancing.
- Configure and load-balance a cluster.
NOTES
• Check out www.businessobjects.com/
services/training for more details
Business Objects
Administration - Enterprise v6.5
BOE125 · BO603e - BusinessObjects 6.5 Enterprise Administration Part 3
DURATION 4,5 hours PRICE € 423 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• System administrators and architects
who are responsible for the technical
and practical aspects of administering
BusinessObjects 6.5 for their enterprise.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• Familiarity with Windows 2000 Server
administration.
• As the follow-up course to
BusinessObjects 6.5 Enterprise
Administration: Part 2 (BO602e) this
course assumes that you have already
gone through Part 1 (BO601e) and Part 2
(BO602e), or have equivalent
knowledge. This will enable you to
perform the activities in this course on
your system. Specifically, it assumes you
know how to:
• Set up a BusinessObjects system
- Installed the 2-tier full-client
- Set up connections to middleware and
demo universe
- Created repository and bomain.key
- Added users and groups
- Secured universes and documents
- Set up document categories
- Distributed multiple universe and
document domains
• Set up and manage servers
- Install and configure Business Objects
Server
- Administer Business Objects Server
- Upgrade Business Objects Server
(continued on next page)
- Cluster Business Objects Servers
- Install and configure Broadcast Agent
• Alternatively, if you do not have a
system set up, you can instead follow
the Show Me and Try It simulations.
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• The last of a three-part series of E-
learning courses for Business Objects
administrators, the BusinessObjects 6.5
Enterprise Administration Part 3:
Deploying your Business Objects System
course discusses how you can improve
Business Objects server performance; set
up, run, and analyze traces; and
understand deployment principles.
• On completion of this course you will
be able to:
- Tune the performance of your Business
Objects system
- Perform auditing and trace logging
- Describe the deployment lifecycle and
strategies
CONTENT
• Performance and Tuning
- Improve the performance of your
system by learning what impacts
performance and what you can do to
improve it.
• Auditing and Trace Logging
- Audit and trace your system to
understand what's going on behind the
scenes.
• Deploying
- Understand the different deployment
scenarios. Learn how Enterprise 6
interacts with redirectors, firewalls,
multiple web and application servers,
and multiple clusters.
NOTES
• Check out www.businessobjects.com/
services/training for more details
www.sap.nl/education 345
Business Objects
Administration - Enterprise v6.5
BOE130 · BO502 - BusinessObjects: Supervisor
DURATION 1 day PRICE € 580 STARTING DATES 27-mrt-09, 10-jul-09
TARGET GROUP
• IT professionals responsible for security
in a BusinessObjects implementation.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• Reporting with BusinessObjects
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• Information is an organization's most
valuable asset. And managing that
information throughout the entire
enterprise is essential for success.
• In the BusinessObjects 6.5 Supervisor
course, you will learn how to effectively
use BusinessObjects Supervisor, a BI
administration tool, to manage users
and resources from a central point or
within a distributed environment.
• A hands-on, real world approach
ensures that you will quickly learn how
to determine the appropriate repository
architecture to optimize performance
and security.
• You will be able to:
- Create and manage repositories
- Allocate and manage universe and
document domains to minimize
maintenance tasks and storage space
requirements.
- Determine appropriate strategies for
organizing users and groups
- Granting user and group access to a
customized set of commands to balance
performance and ease of administration.
346
CONTENT
• Introduction to Supervisor
- Understand how the Supervisor module
fits into your BusinessObjects system.
- Become familiar with the main
functions of the different types of
supervisors and their associated tasks.
• Introduction to the course scenario
- Introduces you to the business scenario
which provides the context for future
discussions and course workshops.
• Creating the Repository
- Learn the differences between
monolithic and distributed repositories,
and how different repository
architectures impact performance.
- Create a repository and verify the
location of the security files and their
configurations.
- Run a safe recovery to recover a .KEY
file.
• Implementing Groups and Users
- Understand the concepts of groups,
inheritance, and customization.
- Create and manage user and group
access to modules, commands,
universes, and documents.
- Learn best practices for organizing users
and groups to balance performance and
ease of administration.
- Learn how to automate the process for
creating groups, users, and user
properties by importing the relevant
information from a text file.
• Command Restrictions
- Learn how to define and override the
access various groups and users have to
the commands in the User,
WebIntelligence, Designer, and
Supervisor modules of BusinessObjects.
- Understand the configuration issues
relating to command restrictions.
• Distributed Repository Architecture
- Create a distributed repository.
- Allocate universe and document
domains to different groups.
Understand the technical specifications
for setting up a repository server, and
the advantages and disadvantages of
multiple domains on multiple database
platforms.
• Configuring Universes
- Export and allocate a universe from the
Designer module to a group and then
configure it on a group-by-group basis.
• Maintain Document Domains
- Allocate and manage document
domains while learning how to
minimize maintenance tasks and
storage space requirements.
Business Objects
Administration - Enterprise XI R1/R2

BOE210 BOE220 BOE230

Certified Professional -
SA210R2 - Business SA310R2 - Business SA410R2 - Business BusinessObjects
Objects Enterprise: Objects Enterprise: Objects Enterprise: Enterprise
Administering Users and Administering Servers - Designing and Deploying a
Content with the CMC Windows Solution - Windows
2 days 3 days 2 days

BOE215 BOE225 BOE235

SA210eR2 - Business SA310eR2 - Business SA410eR2 - Business
Objects Enterprise Objects Enterprise Objects Enterprise
Administering Users and Administering Servers – Designing and Deploying a
Content with the CMC Windows Solution – Windows
12 hours 18 hours 11 hours

BOK116 BOE505
DV302rwR2 - ED101 -
Web Services .NET SDK: Education Spotlight
SDK Training Starter Kit

9 hours 1 hour

BOE266
SA260Rrw2P - Business
Objects Enterprise XI R2
(Productivity Pack): Delta
Webinar
0,2 hours

BOE216 BOE206 BOE205 BOE226 BOE285

SA150rwR2 - BU480rwR2 - Working with SA110eR2 - Crystal SA160rwR2 - SA240eR2P - BOBJ
Understanding the BusinessObjects XI Reports Server BusinessObjects Enterprise Prod. Pack:
BusinessObjects XI R2 Release 2 Recorded Administration and Enterprise Server and Using and Administering
Platform Webinar Series Configuration Admin Functions the Content Search
3 hours 0,6 hours 15 hours 4 hours 1,5 hours

BOE145 BOE155 BOE165 BOE175 BOE185

SA250e - BusinessObjects: SA311e - BusinessObject SA500e - BusinessObjects SA110e - Crystal Reports DS210e - BusinessObjects
Mastering Infrastructure Enterprise: Administering Enterprise: Mastering New Server XI R1: XI: Data Essentials
Servers - Unix Features Administration and Setup

4 hours 14 hours 0,75 hours 18 hours 4 hours

BOE145 · SA250e - BusinessObjects: Mastering Infrastructure

DURATION 4 hours PRICE € 135 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP • The business benefit of this course is CONTENT

• The target audience for this course is
report designers, data managers, and
other information technology
professionals who want to gain an
understanding of the architecture,
infrastructure, components, services,
and processes of BusinessObjects
Enterprise XI.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This course uses a series of interactive
diagrams, activities, and quizzes to
provide learners with an understanding
of the Business Objects Enterprise
architecture, infrastructure,
components, services, and processes.
that learner’s will be able to perform
their jobs more effectively and
efficiently based on an understanding of
how BusinessObjects Enterprise XI
meets their business intelligence
requirements.
• After completing the course, learners
will be able to:
- Describe the components and services
involved in BusinessObjects Enterprise
- Describe the architecture and
infrastructure of BusinessObjects
Enterprise
- Describe the information process flows
in BusinessObjects Enterprise
• Architecture and Infrastructure
- Describe BusinessObjects Enterprises's
role in the Business Objects business
intelligence solution
- Describe the BusinessObjects Enterprise
architecture
- Identify the BusinessObjects Enterprise
components
- Describe the BusinessObjects Enterprise
infrastructure
• Information Process Flows
- Explain the process to log on to
BusinessObjects Enterprise
- Explain the process of report scheduling
- Explain the process of report viewing

www.sap.nl/education 347
Business Objects
Administration - Enterprise XI R1/R2
BOE155 · SA311e - BusinessObject Enterprise: Administering Servers - Unix
DURATION 14 hours PRICE € 450 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
BusinessObjects Enterprise
administrators, IT managers, and users
who are responsible for configuring and
managing BusinessObjects Enterprise
servers.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
Working knowledge of:
• Familiarity with UNIX and UNIX
administration
• Tasks involved in supporting
BusinessObjects Enterprise users and
groups so they can access corporate data
through InfoView
• UNIX security concepts
• Crystal Reports and core report design
concepts
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• The overall goal of this 14-hour
BusinessObjects Enterprise XI UNIX:
Administering Servers E-learning
course is to give learners the skills and
knowledge necessary to configure and
manage the servers in a BusinessObjects
Enterprise deployment.
• This course provides a foundation for
System Administrators who are
responsible for setting up and
maintaining a BusinessObjects
Enterprise platform.
• After completing the course, learners
will be able to:
- Identify BusinessObjects Enterprise
architecture
- Perform common server management
tasks
- Manage the BusinessObjects Enterprise
servers
- Manage server groups
CONTENT
• BusinessObjects Enterprise Architecture
- Business Intelligence and
BusinessObjects Enterprise Architecture
- The BusinessObjects Enterprise
architecture
- Information process flows in
348
BusinessObjects Enterprise
• Performing Common Server
Management Tasks
- Server Management Components
- Using the ccm.sh and other scripts to
manage servers
- Using the CMC to manage servers
- Managing auditing
• Managing the Web Application Services
- The web application services
- Configuring the Java Web Application
Server and the Java Web Component
Adapter
- Configuring the web application
services to communicate across a
firewall
• Managing the Central Management
Server and the Repository
- The role of the Central Management
Server
- Migrating CMS data
- Clustering Central Management
Servers
• Managing the File Repository Servers
- The role of the File Repository Servers
- Configuring the File Repository Servers
• Managing the Crystal Reports Job
Server
- The role of the Crystal Reports Job
Server
- Configuring the Crystal Reports Job
Server
- How scheduled reports are processed
• Managing the Crystal Page and Cache
Servers
- The role of the Crystal Reports Cache
Server and the Crystal Reports Page
Server
• Configuring the Crystal Reports Cache
Server
- Configuring the Crystal Reports Page
Server
- How report viewing requests are
processed
• Managing the Report Application
Server
- The role of the Report Application
Server
- Configuring the Report Application
Server
- How report viewing requests are
processed by the RAS
• Processing List of Values (LOV) Objects
- The role of the LOV Job Server and LOV
objects • Configuring the LOV Job
Server
- How scheduled LOV objects are
processed
- How scheduled reports containing LOV
objects are processed
- How viewing requests for reports
containing LOV objects are processed
• Managing the Web Intelligence Servers
- The Web Intelligence Servers
- The Web Intelligence Job Server
performance setting
- Configuring the Web Intelligence
Report Server
• Managing the Destination Job Server
- The role of the Destination Job Server
- Configuring the Destination Job Server
- How to process a scheduled destination
• Managing the Program Job Server
- The role of the Program Job Server
- Configuring the Program Job Server
- How scheduled programs are processed
• Managing the Event Server
- BusinessObjects Enterprise Events
- The Event Server
- Configuring the Event Server
• Managing Server Groups
- The purpose of server groups
- Creating server groups
- Resolving Issues with BusinessObjects
Enterprise Servers
- Troubleshooting BusinessObjects
Enterprise
NOTES
• Applicable certification
- This course is a core course in the
BusinessObjects Enterprise Certified
Professional certification.
Business Objects
Administration - Enterprise XI R1/R2
BOE165 · SA500e - BusinessObjects Enterprise: Mastering New Features
DURATION 0,75 hours PRICE € 225 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
anyone who has a familiarity with
Crystal Enterprise and is looking for an
introduction to BusinessObjects
Enterprise XI new features.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• Working knowledge of Crystal
Enterprise 10 or earlier
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This course introduces the new features
in BusinessObjects Enterprise XI.
• These new features include servers that
are new to the Enterprise platform, an
overview of the architectural elements,
and a look at the new content
management features such as
categories, universes, security,
scheduling and publishing.
• Also, the course will review client
application information such as
InfoView, portal integration and
supported products.
• After completing the course, learners - Discuss the Designer interface for
will be able to: Universes
- Discuss the new Enterprise architecture - Review Business Views
- Identify the new content management - Introduce categories, inboxes and data
components connections in the Central
- Describe the new client application Management Console
components - Discuss security, scheduling, and
CONTENT publishing
• Topic 1 • Topic 3
- Provide an overview of BusinessObjects - Introduce InfoView
Enterprise XI - Discuss portal integration
- Discuss the new elements in - Identify the native and supported
BusinessObjects architecture products of BusinessObjects Enterprise
- Introduce the new LOV, Destination XI
and Web Intelligence Servers
- Introduce the Performance
Management metrics engines
- Discuss the new auditing features
• Topic 2
- Introduce the data management
features of BusinessObjects Enterprise
XI
- Describe the new Central Management
Console interface
www.sap.nl/education 349
Business Objects
Administration - Enterprise XI R1/R2
BOE175 · SA110e - Crystal Reports Server XI R1: Administration and Setup
DURATION 18 hours PRICE € 562 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
System Administrators who are new to
Crystal Reports Server and will be
responsible for maintaining Crystal
Reports Server users, groups, and
objects in their organization.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
Working knowledge of:
• NT enterprise security concepts (global
& local groups, and directory structure)
• Crystal Reports and core report design
concepts
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This 18-hour E-learning course,
presented in ten one-to-two hour
lessons, explains how to perform the
tasks involved in supporting Crystal
Reports Server users and groups so they
can access Crystal reports and other
forms of corporate data through the
Crystal Reports Server web portal.
• The course also introduces the
BusinessObjects Enterprise architecture
upon which Crystal Reports Server is
based. Please note, this course does not
discuss configuring and managing
individual servers but it does provide an
overview of common server
management tasks, web application
services, and the management of the
Central Management Server.
• This course provides a foundation for
System Administrators to effectively
manage both users and content on the
Crystal Reports Server platform.
350
• After completing the course, learners
will be able to:
- Understand the Crystal Reports Server
interface
- Understand the BusinessObjects
Enterprise architecture upon which
Crystal Reports Server is based
- Plan content and application security
- Create and secure folders, users, and
groups
- Publish and configure content
- Schedule reports and objects
- Perform common server management
tasks
CONTENT
• Understanding Crystal Reports Server
- What is Crystal Reports Server ?
- Working in InfoView
- Working in the Central Management
Console
• Crystal Reports Server Architecture
- The BusinessObjects Enterprise
architecture
- Crystal Reports Server information
process flows
• Planning Your Content
- The Crystal Reports Server security
model
- Creating a content plan
• Planning Application Security
- Securing Crystal Reports Server
applications
• Creating and Securing Folders, Users
and Groups
- Creating folders, new users and groups
- Mapping third-party accounts to
Crystal Reports Server
- Applying security
• Publishing and Configuring Content
- Publishing
• Scheduling
- Scheduling Objects
- Scheduling on events
- Scheduling with business calendars
- Managing instances
• Performing Common Server
Management Tasks
- Server management components
- Using the CCM to manage servers
- Using the CMC to manage servers
• Managing the Web Application Services
- The web application services
- Configuring the Java Web Application
Server and the Java Web Component
Adapter
- Configuring the .NET Web Application
Server and the .NET Web Component
Adapter
- Configuring the web application
services to communicate across a
firewall
• Managing the Central Management
Server and the Repository
- The role of the Central Management
Server
- Migrating CMS data
Business Objects
Administration - Enterprise XI R1/R2
BOE185 · DS210e - BusinessObjects XI: Data Essentials
DURATION 4 hours PRICE € 180 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course are
Reports Designers and System
Administrators who want to
understand data concepts and how data
is used within BusinessObjects
applications.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This 4-hour E-learning offering will
introduce learners to data concepts and
how data is used within BusinessObjects
XI R1. By the end of the course learners
will understand the data lifecycle from a
database to a report.
• This includes sources of data, forms of
data, and ways of manipulating data in
BusinessObjects applications.
• The business benefit of this course is
that it provides a common language for
Reports Designers and System
Administrators to communicate with
Data Managers in their organization.
Enabling this communication increases
an organization’s business intelligence
potential through effective reporting
and administration.
• After completing the course, learners
will be able to:
- Define databases and data types
- Explain how BusinessObjects connects
to and manipulates data
- Describe how BusinessObjects
applications create the semantic layer
- Identify how BusinessObjects resolves
data issues using data integration
CONTENT
• Types of Data
- Define a database
- Identify different database types
- Describe various database objects
- Name different data sources
• Working with Data
- Describe different types of data
connections
- Explain how data can be manipulated
using SQL
• Semantic Layer
- Understand the concept of the semantic
layer
- Define the BusinessObjects applications
that form the semantic layer
- Understand the architecture of the
BusinessObjects applications that form
the semantic layer
• Data Integration
- Understand data integration issues
- Understand how BusinessObjects
resolves data integration issues
NOTES
• Certification not applicable
www.sap.nl/education 351
Business Objects
Administration - Enterprise XI R1/R2
BOE205 · SA110eR2 - Crystal Reports Server Administration and Configuration
DURATION 15 hours PRICE € 562 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
System Administrators who are new to
Crystal Reports Server and will be
responsible for maintaining Crystal
Reports Server users, groups, and
objects in their organization.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED
• Windows conventions
• Familiarity with Windows NT/2000 and
NT administration
• NT enterprise security concepts
(global/local groups, and directory
structure)
GOALS
• This 12 to 18-hour E-learning course,
presented in ten one-to-two hour
lessons, explains how to perform the
tasks involved in supporting Crystal
Reports Server users and groups so they
can access Crystal reports and other
forms of corporate data through the
Crystal Reports Server web portal.
• The course also introduces the
BusinessObjects Enterprise architecture
upon which Crystal Reports Server is
based.
• Please note, this course does not discuss
configuring and managing individual
servers but it does provide an overview
of common server management tasks,
web application services, and the
management of the Central
Management Server.
352
• The business benefit for taking the
course is that it provides a foundation
for System Administrators to effectively
manage both users and content on the
Crystal Reports Server platform.
CONTENT
• Understanding Crystal Reports Server
- What is Crystal Reports Server?
- Working in InfoView
- Working in the Central Management
Console
• Crystal Reports Server Architecture
- The BusinessObjects Enterprise
architecture
- Information process flows in Crystal
Reports Server
• Planning Your Content
- The Crystal Reports Server security
model
- Creating a content plan
• Planning Application Security
- Securing Crystal Reports Server
applications
• Creating and Securing Folders, Users
and Groups
- Creating folders, new users and groups
- Mapping third-party accounts to
Crystal Reports Server
- Applying security
• Publishing and Configuring Content
- Publishing objects
• Scheduling
- Scheduling objects
- Scheduling on events
- Scheduling with business calendars
- Managing instances
• Performing Common Server
Management Tasks
- Server management components
- Using the CCM to manage servers
- Crystal Reports Server information
process flows
• Managing the Web Application Services
- The web application services
- Configuring the Java Web Application
Server and the Java Web Compon
Adapter
- Configuring the .NET Web Application
Server and the .NET Web Compon
Adapter
- Configuring the web application
services to communicate across a
firewall
• Managing the Web Application Services
- The role of the Central Management
Server
- Migrating CMS data
NOTES
• Course length: 12-18 hours
• Additional education not applicable
• Certification not applicable
Business Objects
Administration - Enterprise XI R1/R2
BOE206 · BU480rwR2 - Working with BusinessObjects XI Release 2 Recorded Webinar Series
DURATION 0,6 hours PRICE € 225 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
new users and new hires within an
organization.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• Upon completion of one or all the
webinars in this series a user will:
- Have core applicable knowledge of the
specific product.
- Understand the purpose of the product
and when to use it.
- Will be able to demonstrate how and
what the product can do to others.
CONTENT
• The Working with… BusinessObjects
Recorded Webinar Series is designed to
provide the learner with a fundamental
understanding of the functionality of
Business Objects core products. The
series is targeted at new users and new
employees who need to have a base
knowledge level on one or all of the
BusinessObjects core products.
• The Working with… series contains 12
webinars. They are:
- BusinessObjects XI R2 Product Suite –
Coming April 28/06
- BusinessObjects Performance
Management XI R2 – Coming April
28/06
- BusinessObjects Web Intelligence XI R2
- BusinessObjects OLAP Intelligence XI
R2
- BusinessObjects InfoView XI R2
- Crystal Reports XI R2
- BusinessObjects Desktop Intelligence XI
R2
- BusinessObjects Live Office XI R2 –
Coming April 28/06
- BusinessObjects Universe Designer XI
R2
- BusinessObjects Business View Manager
XI R2
- BusinessObjects Intelligent Question XI
R2
- Crystal Xcelsius 4
• Each webinar in the Working with…
series is between 20 to 65 minutes in
length. The series shows the learner
how to use the basics of the product to
allow them to understand how to use
BusinessObjects products in their
organization. Each series episode is
produced using mostly demos to allow
the learner to see the product in use
and to give the user a clear
understanding of the product
capabilities.
• The webinars are also designed with a
user friendly interface which allows the
learner to easily navigate within the
webinar at a click of a mouse allowing
the individual to optimize their
education time.
NOTES
• Course length: 20 - 65 minutes
• Additional education
- A variety of instructor led and
E-learning courses on all the products
are available. Check out
www.businessobjects.com/services/
training/elm for more details.
• Applicable certification
- This offering is not applicable to any
Business Objects Certified Professional
programs.
www.sap.nl/education 353
Business Objects
Administration - Enterprise XI R1/R2
BOE210 · SA210R2 - BusinessObjects Enterprise: Administering Users and Content with the CMC
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1160 STARTING DATES 22-jan-09, 23-feb-09, 25-mei-09
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
system architects/administrators who
are new to BusinessObjects Enterprise
and who will be responsible for
maintaining BusinessObjects Enterprise
users, groups, and objects in their
organization.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED
• Windows conventions
• Familiarity with Windows NT/2000 and
NT administration
• NT enterprise security concepts
(global/local groups, and directory
structure)
GOALS
• This two-day instructor-led classroom
course explains how to perform the
tasks in the central management
console (CMC).
• These tasks involve supporting
BusinessObjects Enterprise users and
groups so they can access corporate data
through the web portal in
BusinessObjects Enterprise.
• This corporate data can take the form
of Crystal Reports, BusinessObjects Web
Intelligence, or Desktop Intelligence
documents, OLAP Intelligence reports,
program objects, object packages, and
popular third-party objects, such as
Microsoft Word and Excel files, among
others.
354
• Note that this course does not discuss
maintaining BusinessObjects Enterprise
servers, which is taught in the
BusinessObjects Enterprise XI R1/R2:
Administering Servers - Windows
course.
• The business benefit of this course is
that it provides a foundation for you to
effectively manage both users and
content on the BusinessObjects
Enterprise platform.
CONTENT
• Understanding BusinessObjects
Enterprise
- What is BusinessObjects Enterprise?
- Working in InfoView
- Working in the CMC
• BusinessObjects Enterprise Architecture
- Understanding the BusinessObjects
Enterprise architecture
• BusinessObjects Enterprise Security
- Creating users, groups, and folders
- The BusinessObjects Enterprise security
model
- Categories
- Guidelines for planning security
- Profiles
• Planning Your Content
- Creating a content plan
• Application Security
- Securing applications
• Authentication and Mapping Third-
Party Accounts
- Authentication and single sign-on
- Mapping third party accounts to
BusinessObjects Enterprise
• Publishing and Configuring Content
- Publishing objects
• Scheduling
- Scheduling objects
- Scheduling on events
- Scheduling with business calendars
- Managing instances
NOTES
• Recommended additional education:
- BusinessObjects Enterprise XI R1/R2:
Administering Servers - Windows
(Instructor-led or E-learning)
- BusinessObjects Enterprise XI R1/R2:
Designing and Deploying a Solution -
Windows (Instructor-led or E-learning)
• Applicable certification
- This course is a core course in the
BusinessObjects Enterprise Certified
Professional: BusinessObjects Enterprise
XI certification.
Business Objects
Administration - Enterprise XI R1/R2
BOE215 · SA210eR2 - BusinessObjects Enterprise Administering Users and Content with the CMC
DURATION 12 hours PRICE € 562 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
system architects/administrators who
are new to BusinessObjects Enterprise
and will be responsible for maintaining
BusinessObjects Enterprise users,
groups, and objects in their
organization.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED
• Windows conventions
• Familiarity with Windows NT/2000 and
NT administration
• NT enterprise security concepts (global
and local groups, and directory
structure)
GOALS
• This 10-14-hour E-learning course
explains how to perform the tasks in the
Central Management Console (CMC).
• These tasks involve supporting
BusinessObjects Enterprise users and
groups so they can access corporate data
through BusinessObjects Enterprise's
web portal.
• This corporate data can take the form
of Crystal Reports, BusinessObjects Web
Intelligence, or Desktop Intelligence
documents, OLAP Intelligence reports,
program objects, object packages and
popular 3rd party objects such as
Microsoft Word and Excel files, among
others. Please note: This course does not
discuss maintaining BusinessObjects
Enterprise servers, which is taught in
the BusinessObjects Enterprise XI
R1/R2: Administering Servers -
Windows course.
• The business benefit of this course is
that it provides a foundation for System
Architects/Administrators to effectively
manage both users and content on the
BusinessObjects Enterprise platform.
CONTENT
• Understanding BusinessObjects
Enterprise
- What is BusinessObjects Enterprise?
- Working in InfoView
- Working in the CMC
• BusinessObjects Enterprise Architecture
- Understanding the BusinessObjects
Enterprise architecture
• BusinessObjects Enterprise Security
- Creating users, groups, and folders
- The BusinessObjects Enterprise security
model
- Categories
- Guidelines for planning security
- Profiles
• Planning Your Content
- Creating a content plan
• Application Security
- Securing applications
• Authentication and Mapping Third-
Party Accounts
- Authentication and single sign-on
- Mapping third party accounts to
BusinessObjects Enterprise
• Publishing and Configuring Content
- Publishing objects
• Scheduling
- Scheduling objects
- Scheduling on events
- Scheduling with business calendars
- Managing instances
NOTES
• Course length: 10-14 hours
• Recommended additional education:
- BusinessObjects Enterprise XI R1/R2:
Administering Servers - Windows
(Instructor-led or E-learning)
- BusinessObjects Enterprise XI R1/R2:
Designing and Deploying a Solution -
Windows (Instructor-led or E-learning)
• Applicable certification
- This course is a core course in the
Business Objects Certified Professional:
BusinessObjects Enterprise XI
certification.
www.sap.nl/education 355
Business Objects
Administration - Enterprise XI R1/R2
BOE216 · SA150rwR2 - Understanding the BusinessObjects XI R2 Platform
DURATION 3 hours PRICE € 135 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP Information not available
PREREQUISITES - REQUIREDNone
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This course is designed to provide you
with an understanding of the
BusinessObjectsEnterprise XI Release 2
platform.
• By the end of the course you will
understand how users, content,
security, and servers operate in
BusinessObjects Enterprise Release 2 so
you can properly assess your migration
options.
• The business benefit of this course is
that you will understand how the
BusinessObjects Enterprise XI Release 2
platform differs from your current
deployment.
CONTENT
• Using InfoView
- Logging on to InfoView
- Navigating through folders and
categories
- Viewing reports in InfoView
356
- Scheduling in InfoView
• Administering BusinessObjects
Enterprise using the Central
Management Console
- Overview of the CMC
- Overview of managing Folders
- Overview of managing Reports and
Documents
- Overview of managing Users and
Groups
- Overview of managing Servers
• Organizing and Securing Content in
BusinessObjects Enterprise
- Understanding security rules and
guidelines in BusinessObjects Enterprise
- How to secure content
• BusinessObjects Enterprise Server
Overview
- Overview of the role of each server in
BusinessObjects Enterprise
• BusinessObjects Enterprise Process
Flows
- Overview of the transactions between
servers when logging in
- Overview of the transactions between
servers when viewing and scheduling
Crystal Reports
- Overview of the transactions between
servers when viewing and scheduling
Web Intelligence documents
- Overview of the transactions between
servers when viewing and scheduling
Desktop Intelligence documents
- Overview of the transactions between
servers when viewing OLAP Intelligence
documents
NOTES
• Recommended additional education:
Essentials of Migrating from
BusinessObjects 5.x/6.x to
BusinessObjects XI R2
• Certification not applicable
Business Objects
Administration - Enterprise XI R1/R2
BOE220 · SA310R2 - BusinessObjects Enterprise: Administering Servers - Windows
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1740 STARTING DATES 25-feb-09, 27-apr-09, 27-mei-09
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
System architects/Administrators who
are responsible for setting up and
maintaining a BOBJ Enterprise
platform.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
You must have attended the following
offerings or have the equivalent
knowledge:
• BOBJ Enterprise XI R1/R2:
Administering Users and
• Content with the CMC
You must have working knowledge of:
• Tasks involved in supporting BOBJ
Enterprise users and
• groups access corporate data through
InfoView
• BOBJ Enterprise account management
• BOBJ Enterprise content management
• BOBJ Enterprise security concepts
• BOBJ Enterprise InfoView
• NT enterprise security concepts (global
& local groups, and directory structure)
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This three-day instructor-led course
explains and demonstrates what each
server component in BOBJ Enterprise
does and how it is configured.
• You will install and configure each
component and learn how information
flows from server to server for system
processes such as logging on to the
system, scheduling reports and viewing
reports.
• You will learn to use the Central
Management Console (CMC) and the
Central Configuration Manager (CCM)
to manage and configure the servers
and will also practice troubleshooting
system problems when they arise.
• The business benefit of this course is
that it provides a foundation for System
Architects/Administrators who are
responsible for setting up and
maintaining a BOBJ Enterprise
platform.
CONTENT
• BOBJ Enterprise Architecture
- Understanding Business Intelligence
- Understanding the BOBJ Enterprise
architecture
- Information process flows in BOBJ
Enterprise
• Preparation and Installation of BOBJ
Enterprise
- Preparing and installing BOBJ
Enterprise
• Performing Common Server
Management Tasks
- Describing server management tools
- Using the Central Configuration
Manager (CCM) to manage servers
- Using the CMC to manage servers
• Managing the Web Application Services
- The web application services
- Configuring the Java Web Application
Server and the Java Web Compon
Adpater
- Configuring the .NET Web Application
Server and the .NET Web Compon
Adapter
- Configuring the web application
services to communicate across a
firewall
• Managing the Central Management
Server and the Repository
- The role of the Central Management
Server
- Migration and backup of CMS system
data
- Managing auditing
• Managing the File Repository Servers
- The role of the File Repository Servers
- Configuring the File Repository Servers
• Managing the Crystal Reports Servers
- The roles of the Crystal Reports Servers
- Configuring the Crystal Reports Servers
- How to set and run a schedule for a
report
• Working with List of Values (LOV) Job
Server
- The role of the LOV Job Server and LOV
objects
- Configuring the LOV Job Server
- How LOV objects are processed
• Managing the Web Intelligence Servers
- The role of Web Intelligence Servers
• Managing the Desktop Intelligence
Servers
- Responsibilities of the Desktop
Intelligence Servers
- Configuring the Desktop Intelligence
Server
- Configuring the Desktop Intelligence
Cache Server
- Publishing Desktop Intelligence
documents
- Using 3-tier Desktop Intelligence mode
• Managing the Destination Job Server
- The role of the Destination Job Server
- Configuring the Destination Job Server
- Setting a schedule to send an object or
instance to a destination
• Managing the Program Job Server
- The role of the Program Job Server
- Configuring the Program Job Server
- How scheduled programs are processed
• Managing the Event Server
- Understanding events in the BOBJ
Enterprise
- Responsibilities of the Event Server
- Configuring the Event Server
• Managing Server Groups
- Understanding server groups
- Creating server groups
• Troubleshooting BOBJ Enterprise
- Troubleshooting BOBJ Enterprise
NOTES
• Recommended additional education:
- Understanding the BOBJ XI R2 Platform
Recorded Webinar Series
- BOBJ Enterprise XI R1/R2: Designing &
Deploying a Solution – Windows
SA410R2
• Applicable certification
- This course is a core course in the BOBJ
Enterprise Certified Professional
certification.
www.sap.nl/education 357
Business Objects
Administration - Enterprise XI R1/R2
BOE225 · SA310eR2 - BusinessObjects Enterprise Administering Servers – Windows
DURATION 18 hours PRICE € 846 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
system architects/administrators who
are responsible for setting up and main-
taining BOBJ Enterprise.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
You must have attended the following
offerings or have the equivalent know-
ledge:
• BOBJ Enterprise XI R1/R2:
Administering Users and
• Content with the CMC (Instructor-led
or E-learning)
You must have working knowledge of:
• Tasks involved in supporting BOBJ
Enterprise users and
• groups access corporate data through
InfoView
• BOBJ Enterprise account management
• BOBJ Enterprise content management
• BOBJ Enterprise security concepts
• BOBJ Enterprise InfoView
• NT enterprise security concepts (global
and local groups, and directory struc-
ture)
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This 14-21-hour E-learning course
explains and demonstrates the configu-
rations of the various server compo-
nents in BOBJ Enterprise.
• During this course, you will install and
configure each component and learn
how information flows from server to
server for system processes such as log-
ging on to the system, scheduling
reports, and viewing reports.
• You will learn to use the central man-
agement console (CMC) and the central
configuration manager (CCM) to man-
age and configure the servers, and will
also practice troubleshooting system
problems when they arise.
• The business benefit of this course is
that it provides a foundation for system
architects/administrators who are
responsible for setting up and maintain-
ing a BOBJ Enterprise platform.
358
CONTENT
• BOBJ Enterprise Architecture
- Understanding business intelligence (BI)
- Understanding the BOBJ Enterprise
architecture
- Information process flows in BOBJ
Enterprise
• Preparation and Installation of BOBJ
Enterprise
- Preparing and installing BOBJ
Enterprise
• Performing Common Server
Management Tasks
- Describing server management tools
- Using the central configuration manag-
er (CCM) to manage servers
- Using the CMC to manage servers
• Managing the Web Application Services
- The web application services
- Configuring the Java Web Application
Server and the Java Web Component
Adapter
- Configuring the .NET Web Application
Server and the .NET Web Component
Adapter
- Configuring the web application servic-
es to communicate across a firewall
• Managing the Central Management
Server and the Repository
- The role of the central management
server migration and backup of CMS
system data
- Clustering central management servers
- Managing auditing
• Managing the File Repository Servers
- The role of the file repository servers
- Configuring the file repository servers
• Managing the Crystal Reports Servers
- The roles of the Crystal Reports servers
- Configuring the Crystal Reports servers
- How to set and run a schedule for a
report
• Working with List of Values(LOV)
Objects
- The role of the LOV job server and LOV
objects
- Configuring the LOV job server
- How LOV objects are processed
• Managing the Web Intelligence Servers
- The role of the Web Intelligence servers
- Configuring the Web Intelligence
servers
- How report viewing requests are
processed by the Web Intelligence
servers
- How report scheduling requests are
processed by the Web Intelligence
servers
• Managing the Desktop Intelligence
Servers
- Responsibilities of the Desktop
Intelligence servers
- Configuring the Desktop Intelligence
Report server
- Configuring the Desktop Intelligence
Cache server
- Publishing Desktop Intelligence docu-
ments
- Using three-tier Desktop Intelligence
mode
• Managing the Destination Job Server
- The role of the destination job server
- Configuring the destination job server
- Setting a schedule to send an object or
instance to a destination
• Managing the Program Job Server
- The role of the program job server
- Configuring the program job server
- How scheduled programs are processed
• Managing the Event Server
- Understanding events in the BOBJ
Enterprise
- Responsibilities of the event server
- Configuring the event server
• Managing Server Groups
- Understanding server groups
- Creating server groups
• Troubleshooting BOBJ Enterprise
NOTES
• Course length: 14-21 hours
• Recommended additional education:
- Understanding the BOBJ XI R2 Platform
(Recorded webinar)
• Applicable certification
- This course is a core course in the BOBJ
Certified Professional: BOBJ Enterprise
XI certification.
Business Objects
Administration - Enterprise XI R1/R2
BOE226 · SA160rwR2 - BusinessObjects Enterprise Server and Administration Functions
DURATION 4 hours PRICE € 225 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP Information not available
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED
• Experience with Windows NT/2000, NT
administration and security concepts
(global/local groups and directory
structure)
GOALS
• This course is designed to provide you
with the essential knowledge required
when administering BusinessObjects
Enterprise XI Release 2. By the end of
the course you will have an
understanding of how the system
servers and administration tools work.
• The Central Management Console
(CMC) and all of the servers are covered
as well as auditing, publishing,
scheduling and sizing. Organizing and
securing the content in the system is
also a topic.
• The business benefit of this course is
that you will learn to design, deploy and
administer BusinessObjects Enterprise
XI R2 deployment using various tools
and information provided.
CONTENT
• Using the CMC
- Manage users and groups
- Manage folders and objects
- Manage servers and server groups
- Manage categories, Inboxes, calendars
and event
- Manage universes and universe
connections
- Manage BusinessObjects applications
• Using InfoView
- Log in to InfoView
- Navigate through folders and categories
to find objects
- Viewing, scheduling, and modification
options for Web Intelligence, Desktop
Intelligence, and Crystal Reports objects
- Send documents to other users
- Use discussion threads to interact with
other users
• Servers Overvieww
- Describe the functionality all server
services
- Understand when servers are used by
the system
- Identify which servers interact with one
another
• Organizing and Securing Content
- Objects and Content Objects
- Difference between Folders and
Categories
- Content Security Model including
Objects and Group Inheritance Rule
• Process Flows
- Describe what happens on the servers
side when end-users perform day to day
duties
- List which servers take part during
various process flows
- Describe what functions servers
perform during various process flows
- Identify what kind of information is
exchanged during various process flows
• BusinessObjects XI R2: Sizing
- Determine the total number of
potential users, concurrent active users,
and simultaneous requests
- Determine the number of services
required for each BusinessObjects server
- Determine the configuration of
machines based on the number of
processors, services, and machines
required
- Perform system testing and tuning
NOTES
• Recommend additional education:
- BusinessObjects Enterprise XI R1/R2:
Administering Users & Content with
the CMC (Instructor-led or E-learning)
- BusinessObjects Enterprise XI R1/R2:
Administering Servers - Windows
(Instructor-led or E-learning)
- BusinessObjects Enterprise XI R1/R2:
Designing & Deploying a Solution -
Windows (Instructor-led or E-learning)
• Certification not applicable
www.sap.nl/education 359
Business Objects
Administration - Enterprise XI R1/R2
BOE230 · SA410R2 - BusinessObjects Enterprise: Designing and Deploying a Solution - Windows
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1160 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
system architects/administrators who
are responsible for designing and
deploying BusinessObjects Enterprise
across their organization.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• BusinessObjects Enterprise XI R1/R2:
Administering Users and
• Content with the CMC (Instructor-led
or E-learning)
• BusinessObjects Enterprise XI R1/R2:
Administering Servers (Instructor-led or
E-learning)
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED
• BusinessObjects Enterprise
troubleshooting techniques
• BusinessObjects Enterprise server
management
• BusinessObjects Enterprise account
management
• BusinessObjects Enterprise content
management
• BusinessObjects Enterprise security
concepts
• NT enterprise security concepts (global
and local groups, and directory
structure)
• Crystal Reports and core report design
concepts
360
GOALS
• This two-day instructor-led gives you
the skills and knowledge required to
design and deploy a BusinessObjects
Enterprise system.
• Through hands-on activities and
instructor demonstration, you will
analyze customer requirements, and
design architecture and a system
management plan to meet the
customer's needs.
• Based on the design, you will deploy the
solution in a classroom environment.
• You'll also learn how to migrate system
content from one environment to
another.
• In addition, you'll benefit from more
in-depth exposure to the mechanics of a
BusinessObjects Enterprise system and a
careful review of the factors that can
impact system performance.
• The course is structured to help system
architects/administrators fine tune their
deployment and get the most out of
their system.
CONTENT
• BusinessObjects Enterprise Architecture
- Understanding business intelligence
activities
- The BusinessObjects Enterprise
architecture
• Designing a System Architecture
- Designing a scalable system
- Sizing a BusinessObjects Enterprise
deployment
- Designing a reliable system
- Designing an architecture plan
• Designing a System Management Plan
- Designing a content management plan
- Designing an instance management
plan
- Designing a system auditing plan
• Managing System Data Between
Environments
- Managing BusinessObjects Enterprise
system data between environments
- Creating a disaster recovery plan
• Deploying a System
- Installing and configuring
BusinessObjects Enterprise
- Troubleshooting BusinessObjects
Enterprise
NOTES
• Additional education not applicable
• Applicable certification
- This course is a core course in the
BusinessObjects Certified Professional:
BusinessObjects Enterprise XI
certification.
Business Objects
Administration - Enterprise XI R1/R2
BOE235 · SA410eR2 - BusinessObjects Enterprise Designing and Deploying a Solution – Windows
DURATION 11 hours PRICE € 562 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
System Architects/Administrators who
are responsible for designing and
deploying BusinessObjects Enterprise
across their organization.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• BusinessObjects Enterprise XI R1/R2:
Administering Users and Content with
the CMC
• BusinessObjects Enterprise XI R1/R2:
Administering Servers
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED
Experience with:
• Tasks involved in supported
BusinessObjects Enterprise users and
groups so they can access corporate data
through InfoView
• Familiarity with Windows NT/2000 and
NT administration
• NT enterprise security concepts
(global/local groups and directory
structure)
GOALS
• This course gives learners the skills and
knowledge required to design and
deploy a BusinessObjects Enterprise
system.
• Through hands-on activities and
instructor demonstration, learners will
analyze customer requirements, and
design architecture and a system
management plan to meet the
customer’s needs.
• Based on the design, learners will
deploy the solution in a classroom
environment.
• Learners will also learn how to migrate
system content from one environment
to another.
• Learners will benefit from more in
depth exposure to the mechanics of a
BusinessObjects Enterprise system and a
careful review of the factors that can
impact system performance.
• The course is structured to help System
Architects/Administrators fine tune
their deployment and get the most out
of their system.
CONTENT
• BusinessObjects Enterprise Architecture
- Understanding Business Intelligence
and Activities
- Understanding the BusinessObjects
architecture
- Information process flows in
BusinessObjects Enterprise
• Designing a System Architecture
- Designing a scalable system
- Sizing a BusinessObjects Enterprise
deployment
- Designing a reliable system
- Designing an architecture plan
• Designing a System Management Plan
- Designing a content management plan
- Designing an instance management
plan
- Designing a system auditing plan
• Managing System Data Between
Environments
- Managing BusinessObjects Enterprise
system data between environments
- Creating a disaster recovery plan
• Deploying a System
- Installing and configuring
BusinessObjects Enterprise
- Troubleshooting BusinessObjects
Enterprise
NOTES
• Course length: 9-12 hours
• Additional education not applicable
• Applicable certification
- This course is a core course in the
BusinessObjects Enterprise Certified
Professional (BECP) certification.
www.sap.nl/education 361
Business Objects
Administration - Enterprise XI R1/R2
BOE266 · SA260Rrw2P - Business Objects Enterprise XI R2 (Productivity Pack): Delta Webinar
DURATION 0,2 hours PRICE € 0 (gratis) E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
BusinessObjects Enterprise XI R2
System Administrators.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED
• Any previous knowledge and experience
with BusinessObjects Enterprise will be
useful in understanding the concepts
and key features discussed in the
webinar.
GOALS
• This ten-minute webinar is designed to
provide an overview of the key platform
features introduced by the
BusinessObjects Enterprise XI R2
Productivity Pack.
BOE285 · SA240eR2P - BusinessObjects Enterprise Productivity Pack: Using and Administering the Content Search
DURATION 1,5 hours PRICE € 103 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
employees using InfoView and/or
engaging in sales or support situations
with customers using BusinessObjects
Enterprise XI R2 Productivity Pack.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED
Knowledge about
• Business Objects product suite,
particularly InfoView.
GOALS
• This one-to-two-hour E-learning
course describes the Content Search, a
feature within InfoView that is delivered
in BusinessObjects Enterprise XI R2
Productivity Pack.
362
• You should take this course to learn
about the new platform-related features
and how they enhance the functionality
of BusinessObjects Enterprise XI R2.
You should also take this course to
learn how to the features will be used by
Business Users, Developers and System
Administrators.
• BusinessObjects Enterprise XI R2
Productivity Pack: The Productivity
Pack is an add-on to BusinessObjects
Enterprise XI R2 that extends the
current functionality by introducing
updated web services developer kits,
OLAP reporting capabilities, and an
enhanced search capability that allows
business to search the content objects.
• In this course you will learn how to
effectively search for content in
InfoView, as well as administrate and
deploy the Content Search feature from
the CMC.
• The business benefit of this course is
that you will be prepared to support
customers using the Content Search
feature of the Production Pack release.
• If you use InfoView as part of your job
function, this course will also
contribute to your ability to find
information efficiently.
CONTENT
• An Overview of the Content Search
- Who uses this feature?
- When is this feature used?
CONTENT
• Query as a Web Service
• Business Process BI Services
• Multi-Dimension Analysis Server
• Content Search
• Content Search Demo
• Content Search Administration Demo
• Architectural Changes
• Tips
NOTES
• Course length: 10 minutes
• Additional education
- There are several training courses
available for the Productivity Pack. For
information on specific offerings,
contact your account representative.
• Certification not applicable
- Why do customers want this feature?
• How Does the Content Search Work?
- List the searchable content types
- Search for content effectively
- Create Web Intelligence documents on
the fly
• Administration and Deployment
- Enable and configure the Content
Search
- Schedule and reset the index
- Describe security restrictions
NOTES
• Course length: 1-2 hours
• Additional education not applicable
• Certification not applicable
Business Objects
Administration - Enterprise XI R1/R2
BOE505 · ED101 Education Spotlight
DURATION 1 hour PRICE € 1350 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• Education Spotlight lessons are aimed at
system administrators who are
comfortable working with
BusinessObjects Enterprise and who
want to augment their knowledge.
Lesson content extends beyond the
materials in our core courses.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• BusinessObjects Enterprise XI R1/R2:
Administering Users and Content with
the CMC (Instructor-led or E-learning)
• BusinessObjects Enterprise XI R1/R2:
Administering Servers (Instructor-led or
E-learning)
• BusinessObjects Enterprise: Designing
and Deploying a Solution - Windows
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED
Experience with:
• BusinessObjects Enterprise
troubleshooting techniques
• BusinessObjects Enterprise server
management
• BusinessObjects Enterprise account
management
• BusinessObjects Enterprise content
management
• BusinessObjects Enterprise security
concepts
• NT enterprise security concepts (global
and local groups, and directory
structure)
• Crystal Reports and core report design
concepts
GOALS
• Take advantage of Education Spotlight,
the on-demand subscription service
from Business Objects, an SAP
company. Our concise, self-paced,
online lessons are designed to address
your critical application functions and
help ensure your BusinessObjects
deployment aligns with industry
practices.
• Business Objects experts developed
these lessons to challenge your system
administrators and enhance their
knowledge of our business intelligence
(BI) and reporting technologies.
CONTENT
• Advanced Migration
• Our advanced migration lessons give
you a choice of learning through
webinars or video. Each lesson is
designed to facilitate your migration to
BusinessObjects XI Release 2. Lessons
include:
- Advanced Migration: Preparing for an
Incremental Migration. This 77-minute,
recorded webinar gives you the
information you need to assess and plan
an incremental migration from
BusinessObjects 5.x or 6.x to
BusinessObjects XI Release 2.
- Advanced Migration: Questions to Ask
When Planning an Incremental
Migration. This 10-minute video focuses
on how to assess and plan an
incremental migration to
BusinessObjects XI Release 2.
- Advanced Migration: The Nine-Step
Migration Strategy. This 34- minute,
recorded webinar provides a nine-step
strategy for executing a migration from
BusinessObjects 5.x or 6.x to
BusinessObjects XI Release 2.
- Using Merge Versus Update in the
Import Wizard. This 16-minute,
recorded webinar clarifies the merge
and update features of the Import
Wizard when you’re migrating from
BusinessObjects 5 or 6.x to
BusinessObjects XI Release 2.
• Troubleshooting
• Use our seven troubleshooting lessons
to look under the hood of
BusinessObjects XI Release 2, and to
validate your Crystal Reports process
flows. These 60-minute interactive
activities give you an in- depth look at
Crystal Reports process flows in the
BusinessObjects Enterprise XI Release 2
environment. Our troubleshooting
lessons enable you to:
- Publish a Crystal report through the
CMC
- Run a schedule for a Crystal report to a
default destination and a default format
- Set a schedule for a Crystal report
- Set a schedule for a Crystal report that
requires a list of values
- View a Crystal report (using an
Advanced DHTML viewer)
- View a Crystal report instance (using an
ActiveX viewer)
- View a Crystal report with prompts
requiring a list of values (ActiveX
viewer)
• Troubleshooting and Advanced
Migration are only two examples of the
lessons available on Education
Spotlight. New lessons are added
monthly.
NOTES
• Each Education Spotlight lesson ranges
from 15 to 80 minutes, and is available
in a variety of formats – including
webinars and flash animations with
video demonstrations. An annual
subscription gives your users unlimited
access within a 12-month period.
• What to expect from our lessons
- An overview detailing the lesson’s
objectives, prerequisites, and
importance
- The lesson itself, which includes
concepts, principles, procedures, and
exercises
- Demonstrations, simulations, and pop-
up tools
• Additional education not applicable
www.sap.nl/education 363
Business Objects
Administration - Enterprise XI R1/R2
BOK116 · DV302rwR2 - Web Services .NET SDK: SDK Training Starter Kit
DURATION 9 hours PRICE € 450 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
application developers who will use the
BusinessObjects Enterprise .NET SDK or
the Web Services .NET SDK to integrate
BI platform functionality into custom
web or Windows applications. This
course is also suitable for system
analysts or software architects who wish
to gain an understanding of the
capabilities of the BusinessObjects
Enterprise .NET SDK or the Web
Services .NET SDK for application
development.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• BusinessObjects Enterprise XI R2:
Administering Users and Content with
the CMC
Working knowledge of:
• Object oriented programming concepts
• Visual Basic .NET or C#
• Fundamental BusinessObjects
Enterprise or Crystal Reports Server
administration
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This nine-hour SDK Training Starter
Kit is designed to give you an
introduction to the capabilities of the
BusinessObjects Enterprise SDK, the
Web Services .NET SDK and the basic
skills to use the Web Services .NET SDK
to build a custom administrative tool
that communicates with a
BusinessObjects Enterprise Server.
• As a business benefit, you will gain
understanding of how the Web Services
.NET SDK can be used to create your
own custom .NET applications to
364
consume Business Intelligence Web
Services from a BusinessObjects
Enterprise Server.
CONTENT
• Module 1: Introduction to BI Platform
Tasks
• Business Intelligence Platform
- Common BI platform tasks
- BusinessObjects Enterprise architecture
• Installing the SDKs
- BusinessObjects SDK Library
- Choosing an SDK
- Use cases for the Web Services SDK and
the BusinessObjects Enterprise SDK
- Installing the SDKs
- Finding SDK files and documentation
• Querying the Central Management
Server
- Structured Query Language (SQL) based
queries
- Uniform Resource Identifier (URI)
based queries Module 2: Authenticating
Users and Listing Content
• Authenticating Users
- BusinessObjects Enterprise
authentication types and licenses
- Important Web Services .NET SDK
classes for authenticating users
- Writing code to authenticate users
• Listing Managed Content
- Important Web Services .NET SDK
classes for listing managed content
- Writing code to list managed content
Module 3: Publishing and Viewing
Documents
• Viewing Managed Documents
- Important classes for viewing a
managed document instance
- Writing code to view a managed
document instance
- Important classes for viewing a
managed document on demand
- Writing code to view a managed
document on demand
• Publishing a Crystal Report
- Important classes for publishing a
Crystal report
- Writing code to publish a Crystal report
NOTES
• Recommended additional education:
- Java Reporting Component SDK: SDK
Training Starter Kit
- Crystal Reports .NET SDK: SDK
Training Starter Kit
• Delivery & Duration
- This starter kit is approximately nine
hours in duration and is delivered with
recorded lessons and self-study
activities. In order to complete the
hands-on activities, you must follow the
computer setup guide, and install the
necessary software and activity files.
• Certification not applicable
Business Objects
Administration - Enterprise Business Views XI R1/R2

BOB200
DM350R2 -
BusinessObjects
Implementing Business
Views
2 days

BOB205
DM350eR2 -
BusinessObjects
Implementing Business
Views
12 hours

BOB200 · DM350R2 - BusinessObjects Implementing Business Views

DURATION 2 days PRICE € 940 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
Data Managers who are responsible for
creating and maintaining Business
Views.
• Depending on the organization, Data
Managers may be represented by
Database Administrators or Business
Analysts.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
Working knowledge of:
• BusinessObjects Enterprise security
concepts
• BusinessObjects Enterprise InfoView,
Crystal Reports and core report design
concepts
• NT enterprise security concepts (global
and local groups and directory
structure).
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This two-day instructor-led classroom
course introduces you to Business Views
in BusinessObjects XI.
• Through hands-on activities and
instructor demonstration, you will be
able to define Business Views and the
components that make up a Business
View.
• The business benefit of the course is
that you will be able to modify and
create Business Views based on your
organization’s data requirements.
• You will then be able to use these
Business Views to obtain the data you
need in an easily understood format and
create reports that deliver effective
business intelligence to your
organization.
CONTENT
• Understanding Business Views
- Define Business Views
- Define the Business Views architecture
- Define the Business Views security
model
• Using Business Views
- Accessing Business Views
- Navigating with the Business View
Manager
• Managing Data Connections
- Create Data Connections
- Create Dynamic Data Connections
• Managing Data Foundations
- Create Data Foundations
- Add and link data tables
- Apply row- and column-level security
to Data Foundations
- Add formulas, SQL Expressions and
parameters
- Use custom functions
• Managing Business Elements
- Create Business Elements
- Modify Business Fields
- Apply row- and column-level security
to Business Elements
- Add parameters
• Managing Business Views
- Create Business Views
- Modify Business Views
• Building Business Views
- Plan and build Business Views
• Lists of Values and Dynamic Prompts
- Create and schedule lists of values
- Create and implement dynamic
prompts
NOTES
• Additional education not applicable
• Certification not applicable

www.sap.nl/education 365
Business Objects
Administration - Enterprise Business Views XI R1/R2
BOB205 · DM350eR2 - BusinessObjects Implementing Business Views
DURATION 12 hours PRICE € 450 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
Data Managers who are responsible for
creating and maintaining Business
Views.
• Depending on the organization, Data
Managers may be represented by
Database Administrators or Business
Analysts.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
Working knowledge of:
• BusinessObjects Enterprise security
concepts
• BusinessObjects Enterprise InfoView
• Crystal Reports and core report design
concepts
• NT enterprise security concepts (global
and local groups and directory
structure)
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This twelve-hour E-learning course
introduces you to Business Views in
BusinessObjects Enterprise XI.
• Through hands-on activities and
instructor demonstration, you will be
able to define Business Views and the
366
components that make up a Business
View.
• The business benefit of the course is
that you will be able to modify and
create Business Views based on your
organization’s data requirements.
• You will then be able to use these
Business Views to obtain the data you
need in an easily understood format and
create reports that deliver effective
business intelligence to your
organization.
CONTENT
• Understanding Business Views
- Define Business Views, Business Views
architecture and Business Vie security
model
• Using Business Views
- Accessing Business Views
- Navigating with the Business View
Manager
• Managing Data Connections
- Create Data Connections
- Create Dynamic Data Connections
• Managing Data Foundations
- Create Data Foundations
- Add and link data tables
- Apply row- and column-level security
to Data Foundations
- Add formulas, SQL Expressions and
parameters
- Use custom functions
• Managing Business Elements
- Create Business Elements
- Modify Business Fields
- Apply row- and column-level security
to Business Elements
- Add parameters
• Managing Business Views
- Create Business Views
- Modify Business Views
• Building Business Views
- Plan and build Business Views
• Lists of Values and Dynamic Prompts
- Create and schedule lists of values
- Create and implement dynamic
prompts
NOTES
• Additional education not applicable
• Certification not applicable
Business Objects
Administration - Enterprise Migration XI R2

BOE250
SA650R2 - Migrating from
BusinessObjects 5.x & 6.x
to BusinessObjects XI R2
BOE265
3 days
SA654eR2 - Advanced
Migration Concepts:
Planning an Incremental
BOE255 Migration to BOBJ
3 hours
SA650eR2 - Migrating
BusinessObjects 5x & 6x to
BusinessObjects XI R2

16 hours

BOE276
SA600rwR2 - Essentials of
Migrating from
BusinessObjects 5x/6x to
BusinessObjects XI R2
4 hours

BOE275
SA660eR2 - Migrating
Application Foundation 6x
to XI R2

2 hours

BOE286
SA601rwR2 - Business
Objects Enterprise XI R2:
Implementing Migration
Pack One
1,5 hours

BOE166
SA610rw - Enterprise XI:
Essentials of Updating from
Crystal Enterprise to the
BOBJ XI Platform
11 hours

www.sap.nl/education 367
Business Objects
Administration - Enterprise Migration XI R2
BOE166 · SA610rw - Enterprise XI: Essentials of Updating from Crystal Enterprise to the BusinessObjects XI Platform
DURATION 11 hours PRICE € 225 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
users of the Crystal Enterprise product
suite who will be moving to the
BusinessObjects Enterprise XI product
suite.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED
Experience with:
• Crystal Enterprise
• Crystal Reports
• Web Intelligence
• Universe Designer
• Application Foundation
• Data Integrator
GOALS
• This course is designed to provide
students with an overview of new
features and functionality in the
BusinessObjects XI product suite.
Targeted at users of Crystal Enterprise,
these webinars highlight the differences
between the Crystal Enterprise and
BusinessObjects Enterprise platforms.
• The business benefit of this course is
that learners will understand the new
features and functionality in
BusinessObjects XI so that they can
determine which features will enhance
their use of Business Objects products.
CONTENT
• BusinessObjects XI InfoView Overview
- Navigating the InfoView interface
- Viewing and scheduling reports
• BusinessObjects Enterprise XI Servers
Overview
- Overview of the role of all servers
368
- Overview of the Enterprise
infrastructure
• BusinessObjects Enterprise XI
Architecture Process Flows
- Interaction between Enterprise servers
during viewing, scheduling, and
processing of reports
• BusinessObjects Enterprise XI New
Features in the Central Management
Console
- Administering Web Intelligence objects
- Administering Universes and Universe
Connections
- Administering Categories
• BusinessObjects Enterprise XI Web
Architecture
- Describe the Java and .NET web
architectures
• BusinessObjects Enterprise XI
Authentication and Single Sign-on
- Understand new authentication and
single sign-on features
• Dynamic and Cascading Prompts in
BusinessObjects XI
- Create dynamic and cascading prompts
- View a report that contains dynamic
and cascading prompts
• Web Intelligence XI Overview
- Using the new Report Panel
• BusinessObjects XI Semantic Layer
- Integration with the BusinessObjects
Enterprise platform
- Crystal Reports based on Universes
• BusinessObjects Enterprise XI Web
Intelligence Report Server and Job
Server
- Role of the Web Intelligence Servers
- Configuration settings and options for
the Web Intelligence Servers
• BusinessObjects Enterprise XI
Destination Server
- Role of Destination Server
- Configuration settings and options for
the Destination Server
• BusinessObjects Enterprise XI:
Processing List of Values Objects
- Describe List of Value objects and how
they are used
- Understand the processing of List of
Value objects
• Performance Manager XI New Features
- New Feature Overview
- Installation Differences
- Integration with the BusinessObjects
Enterprise platform
• BusinessObjects Data Integrator XI New
Features
- Datastore Configuration
- Validation Transform
- New Functions
- Data Mart Accelerator
- Impact Analysis
NOTES
• Additional education
- No specific additional education is
recommended.
• Applicable certification
- This course is not applicable to any
Business Objects Certified Professional
programs.
Business Objects
Administration - Enterprise Migration XI R2
BOE250 · SA650R2 - Migrating from BusinessObjects 5.x & 6.x to BusinessObjects XI R2
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1740 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
system architects/administrators who
are responsible for planning, assessing,
and/or implementing a strategy for
their organization to migrate from their
BusinessObjects 5.x/6.x deployment to
the BusinessObjects XI Release 2.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• BusinessObjects 5i Supervisor
(Instructor-led) OR BusinessObjects
Supervisor 6.5 (Instructor-led)
• BusinessObjects 6.5 Enterprise
Administration (Instructor-led or E-
learning) AND BusinessObjects
Enterprise XI R1/R2: Administering
Users and Content with the CMC
(Instructor-led or E-learning)
• BusinessObjects Enterprise XI R1/R2:
Administering Servers - Windows
(Instructor-led or E-learning)
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED
Experience with:
• The users, content, architecture, and
security in their organization’s source
deployment
• Windows NT/2000 and NT
administration
• NT enterprise security concepts
(global/local groups, and directory
structure)
GOALS
• This three-day course is designed to
provideyou with an understanding of
how to migrate from a BusinessObjects
5.x/6.x system to BusinessObjects XI
Release 2.
• By the end of the course, you will
understand how to properly plan and
assess your migration strategy,
understand how users and content will
migrate from their source environment,
as well as understand the
BusinessObjects XI Release 2 security
model.
• You will have the opportunity to
practice migrating different types of
users and content through a series of
workshops.
• The business benefit of this course is
that you will be able to plan for and
implement a successful migration from
your source system to BusinessObjects
XI Release 2.
CONTENT
• Migration Overview
- What is migration?
- Top challenges as you migrate
- What migrates (and what doesn’t)
- Developer tools
- Supported platforms
- Tools for migration
- The migration roadmap
- Terminology
• Planning and Assessment
- Assessment
- Installation
- Content import
- Post migration validation
- Administration
• BusinessObjects 5/6.x Administration
and Security Workshop
- System storage
- The repository
- BusinessObjects 5/6.x administration
and security
• Creating a System Backup
- Creating a system backup
• Using the Import Wizard Workshop
- Using the Import Wizard
• Validation Workshop
- Validating migrated content
• BusinessObjects XI R2 Administration
and Security Workshop
- BusinessObjects XI R2 administration
overview
- What is the Central Management
Console?
- BusinessObjects XI R2 administration
and security workshop
- Comparing security models
(BusinessObjects 6.5 versus
BusinessObjec XI R2)
• Merge versus Update Workshop
- Describing objects relationships
- How Merge works
- How Update works
• Migrating Security Workshop
- Setting up
- Preparing the target environment
- Examining the source environment
- Performing the migration
- Validating the target environment
- BIAR (Business Intelligence Archive
Resource) files
• Report Migration and Conversion
Workshop
- Report migration
- Report conversion
• Final Migration Workshop
- Executing the migration
• Incremental Migration Workshop
- Describing incremental migration
- Examining the advantages and
disadvantages of incremental migration
- Understanding incremental migration
concepts
- Performing an incremental migration
NOTES
• Recommended additional education:
- (E-learning) Migration Application
Foundation 6x to BusinessObjects XI
Release 2 (For those who also are
migrating Application Foundation to
the new BusinessObjects XI R2
platform)
• Applicable certification
- This is a core course for the
BusinessObjects Enterprise XI R2
Migration Specialist designation.
www.sap.nl/education 369
Business Objects
Administration - Enterprise Migration XI R2
BOE255 · SA650eR2 - Migrating BusinessObjects 5x & 6x to BusinessObjects XI R2
DURATION 16 hours PRICE € 846 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
System Architects/Administrators who
are responsible for planning, assessing
and/or implementing a strategy for
their organization to migrate from their
BOBJ 5.x/6.x deployment to the BOBJ XI
Release 2 platform.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• BOBJ 5i Supervisor (Instructor-led) OR
BOBJ Supervisor 6.5 (Instructor-led)
• BOBJ 6.5 Enterprise Administration
(Instructor-led or E-learning) AND
BOBJ Enterprise XI R1/R2:
Administering Users and Content with
the CMC (Instructor-led or E-learning)
• BOBJ Enterprise XI R1/R2:
Administering Servers - Windows
(Instructor-led or E-learning)
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED
Experience with:
• The users, content, architecture, and
security in their organization's source
deployment
• Windows NT/2000 and NT
administration
• NT enterprise security concepts
(global/local groups, and directory
structure)
GOALS
• This 15-18-hour E-learning course is
designed to provide you with an
understanding of how to migrate from
a BOBJ 5.x/6.x system to BOBJ XI
Release 2.
• By the end of the course you will
understand how to properly plan and
assess your migration strategy, how
users and content migrate from your
source environment, as well as the BOBJ
XI Release 2 security model.
• You will have the opportunity to
practice migrating different types of
users and content through a series of
workshops.
• The business benefit of this course is
that you will be able to plan for and
370
implement a successful migration from
your source system to the BOBJ XI
Release 2 platform.
CONTENT
• Migrating Overview
- What is migration?
- Top challenges as you migrate
- What migrates (and what doesn't)
- Developer Suite
- Supported platforms
- Tools for migration
- Case studies
- Migration roadmap
- Terminology
• Planning and Assessment
- Assessing your migration strategy
- Installing
- Importing content
- Post migration validation
- Administration
• BOBJ 5/6.x Administration and Security
Workshop
- Explaining BOBJ 5/6.x administration
and security
- Managing Repository security and
Repository domains
- Creating overloads, column/row level
security, and control restrictions
• Creating a System Backup Workshop
- Creating a backup before migrating
• Using the Import Wizard Workshop
- Using the Import Wizard
- Explaining the features of the Import
Wizard
- Performing a simple migration
• Validation Workshop
- Explaining BOBJ XI Release 2
administration and security
- Migrating and mapping rights
- Creating overloads, column/row level
security, and control restrictions
- Creating and publishing new content to
BOBJ Enterprise X R2
• BOBJ XI R2 Administration and
Security Workshop
- Explaining BOBJ XI Release 2
administration and security
- Migrating and mapping rights
- Creating overloads, column/row level
security, and control restrictions
- Creating and publishing new content to
BOBJ Enterprise X R2
• Merge Versus Update Workshop
- Explaining how Merge works
- Explaining how Update works
• Migrating Security Workshop
- Setting up the system
- Preparing the target environment
- Validating Command Restriction and
access rights
- Validating Access Restrictions (formerly
known as Overloads or Restrictions
Sets)
- Using the BIAR (Business Intelligence
Archive Resource)
• Report Migration and Conversion
Workshop
- Performing report migrations
- Using the Report Conversion Tool
• Final Migration Workshop
- Performing a final migration
NOTES
• Course length: 15-18 hours
• Recommended additional education:
- Migration Application Foundation 6x to
BOBJ XI Release 2 (E-learning) - (For
those who also are migrating
Application Foundation to the new
BOBJ XI R2 platform)
• Applicable certification
- Migrating from BOBJ 5.x & 6.x to BOBJ
XI R2 is a required course to obtain a
BOBJ Migration Specialist designation.
Note that you must also have
completed the course prerequisites to
qualify for the designation. The
designation identifies you as being a
qualified professional who can support
customers migrating from BOBJ 5/6.x to
BOBJ XI R2.
Business Objects
Administration - Enterprise Migration XI R2
BOE265 · SA654eR2 - Advanced Migration Concepts: Planning an Incremental Migration to BusinessObjects
DURATION 3 hours PRICE € 225 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
Project Planners and System
Administrators who will be conducting
a migration from their current
deployment to BusinessObjects XI R2.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• Migrating from BusinessObjects 5.x &
6.x to BusinessObjects XI R2
(Instructor-led or E-learning)
• You should have knowledge of
BusinessObjects 5.x or 6.x (whichever
applies to your deployment), in
addition to knowledge of the
BusinessObjects XI platform, prior to
performing your migration.
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED
Experience with:
• The users, content, architecture, and
security in your organization’s source
deployment
• Windows administration
• Enterprise security concepts
(global/local groups, and directory
structure)
GOALS
• This three-hour E-learning course is
designed to teach you how to assess and
plan an incremental migration to
BusinessObjects XI R2.
• The course uses a combination of flash
animation, simulations and video clips
to guide you through creating a
migration plan.
• You will also learn about different
migration scenarios to help you
determine the best choices to make
when planning and performing your
organization’s migration from
BusinessObjects 5/6.x to BusinessObjects
XI R2.
• The business benefit of this course is
that Project Planners and System
Administrators will be able to describe
the challenges involved when planning
a migration and important factors to
consider when creating a migration
plan.
CONTENT
• Assessing and Planning
- What are the steps involved in a
successful migration?
• Creating a Migration Plan
- What is the best practices method of
creating a migration plan?
• Migration Scenarios
- This lesson coming in February 2007
Americas
NOTES
• Additional education not applicable
• Certification not applicable
www.sap.nl/education 371
Business Objects
Administration - Enterprise Migration XI R2
BOE275 · SA660eR2 - Migrating Application Foundation 6x to XI R2
DURATION 2 hours PRICE € 135 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
System architects/Administrators who
are responsible for planning, assessing
and/or implementing a strategy for
their organization to migrate from their
Application Foundation 6.x deployment
to the BusinessObjects XI Release 2
platform.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• Migrating from BusinessObjects 5.x &
6.x to BusinessObjects XI R2
(Instructor-led OR E-learning)
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED
Experience with:
• The users, content, architecture, and
security in their organization's source
deployment
• Windows NT/2000 and NT
administration
• NT enterprise security concepts
(global/local groups, and directory
structure)
372
GOALS
• This two-hour E-learning course is
designed to provide you with an
understanding of how to migrate from
BusinessObjects Application
Foundation 6.x to BusinessObjects XI
Release 2.
• By the end of the course, you will
understand how to properly plan and
migrate your Application Foundation
6.x environment to BusinessObjects XI
Release 2.
• You will learn how to examine the
source environment, migrate using the
Import Wizard migration tool, then
validate and test the results.
• The business benefit of this course is
that you will be able to plan for and
implement a successful migration from
your source Application Foundation 6.x
system to the BusinessObjects XI
Release 2 platform.
CONTENT
• Migrating Overview
- Using the Import Wizard to migrate
Application Foundation objects to
Performance Management
- The role of the Central Management
Server (CMS)
- Identify which objects migrate
- Incremental migration and when it is
supported
• How to migrate using the Import
Wizard
- Prepare the target environment
- Examine the source environment
- Perform a migration
- Validate the migrated content
- Test some of the platform reports
NOTES
• Additional education not applicable
• Level, Delivery, and Duration
- This core-level E-learning offering is a
two-hour course.
• Certification not applicable
Business Objects
Administration - Enterprise Migration XI R2
BOE276 · SA600rwR2 - Essentials of Migrating from BusinessObjects 5x/6x to BusinessObjects XI R2
DURATION 4 hours PRICE € 225 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP Information not available
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED
• Experience with users, content,
architecture, and security in your
organization's source deployment
GOALS
• This course is designed to provide
students with the essential knowledge
required when considering a migration
of their source environment to
BusinessObjects Enterprise XI Release 2.
• By the end of the course learners will
have a basic understanding of how
users, content, and security migrate
between the BusinessObjects Enterprise
5.x/6.x and BusinessObjects Enterprise
Release 2 platforms.
• The business benefit of this course is
that learners will understand how
migration operates so that they can
properly plan and assess a migration
strategy for their organization.
CONTENT
• Migration Overview
- Migration Roadmap
- Migration Process
- Migration Tools
• Migration Planning & Assessment
- System Assessment • Migration Security
- Migration Requirements - Security Model Comparison
- Post Migration Validation - Security Rights and Details
• BusinessObjects 5.x/6.x Administration - Security Migration Validation
& Security • Planning for your User Base
- Repository Domains - Migration considerations to educate
- System Storage your users
- Managing Users, Groups, and Resources NOTES
• Using the Import Wizard • Additional education
- Process Flow - Additional education offerings that we
- Security Migration recommend for those looking for a
- Migration Details and Confirmation deeper knowledge of migration include:
• Report Conversion Migrating BusinessObjects 5.x & 6.x to
- Conversion Details BusinessObjects XI Release 2
- Conversion Tools • Certification not applicable
- Process Flow
• Import Wizard - Merge vs. Update
- Process Flow
- Pros & Cons
- Incremental Import
• Migrating Basic Objects
- Planning and Assessment
- Migration
- Post Migration Validation
• BusinessObjects XI Release 2
Administration & Security
- New Features
- Security Model Comparison
- Managing Users, Groups, and Resources
www.sap.nl/education 373
Business Objects
Administration - Enterprise Migration XI R2
BOE286 · SA601rwR2 - BusinessObjects Enterprise XI R2: Implementing Migration Pack One
DURATION 1,5 hours PRICE € 112 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
System Administrators who are
responsible for migrating from their
BusinessObjects 5.x/6.x deployment to
the BusinessObjects XI Release 2
platform.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• XI R2 New Features and Migration
(Instructor-led) AND BusinessObjects 5i
Supervisor (Instructor-led) OR
BusinessObjects Supervisor 6.5
(Instructor-led)
• BusinessObjects 6.5 Enterprise
Administration (Instructor-led or E-
learning) AND BusinessObjects
Enterprise XI R1/R2: Administering
Users and Content with the CMC
(Instructor-led or E-learning)
• BusinessObjects Enterprise XI R1/R2:
Administering Servers - Windows
(Instructor-led or E-learning)
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED
Experience with :
• The users, content, architecture and
security in your organization’s source
deployment
• Windows NT/2000 and NT
administration
• NT enterprise security concepts
(global/local groups, and directory
structure)
• Familiarity using Broadcast Agent in
BusinessObjects 5/6.x
• Familiarity using Application
Foundation 6.x
374
GOALS
• This one-to-two-hour recorded webinar
bundle describes the components of
Migration Pack One.
• After completing this course, you will
be able to list and explain the benefits of
upgrades and new capabilities included
in the Migration Pack.
• The course focuses on four primary
areas: migrating BusinessObjects 6.5
Broadcast Agent scheduled documents,
changes to the Import Wizard, upgrades
to Performance Management migration
and enhancements to the Report
Conversion tool.
• The business benefit of this course is
that you will be able to use the
Migration Pack when planning,
implementing, and supporting your
organization’s migration from
BusinessObjects 5/6.x to BusinessObjects
XI R2.
CONTENT
• Introduction to BusinessObjects 5/6.x
Broadcast Agent
- Introduction to Broadcast Agent
- Sending documents manually
- Scheduling documents in
BusinessObjects
- Using the Broadcast Agent Console
• Changes to the Import Wizard
- How to properly install the Migration
Pack
- The updates to the Import Wizard
- How these updates improve the
migration process
• Validating Migrated BusinessObjects
5/6.x Broadcast Agent Jobs
- How BCA scheduling options migrate
from 5/6.x to XI R2
- How to verify that the scheduled jobs
migrated successfully to Business
Objects XI R2
• Import Wizard Enhancements for
Application Foundation
- A review of Application Foundation
migration
- Import Wizard enhancements
• Enhancements to the Report
Conversion Tool
- Feature and usability enhancements to
the RCT
- How to convert documents using the
RCT
NOTES
• Course length: 1-2 hours
• Additional education not applicable
• Applicable certification
- This course is not applicable to any
Business Objects Certified Professional
programs.
Business Objects
Administration - Enterprise Universe Design XI R1/R2 / vXI 3.0

BORFD BOU210
Reporting for Designer DM310R2 -
BusinessObjects:
Universe Design
BOU220
1 days 3 days
DM351R2 -
BusinessObjects:
Advanced Universe Design
BOU215
2 days
DM310eR2 -
BusinessObjects Universe

13 hours

BOU206
DM100rwR2 - BOBJ
Universe and Business
Views A Technical
Comparison
1 hour

BOU310 BOU320
DM310V3.0 - DM351V3.0 -
BusinessObjects Universe BusinessObjects Universe
Designer XI 3.0: Universe Designer XI 3.0: Advanced
Design Universe Design
3 days 2 days

BORFD · Reporting for Designer

DURATION 1 day PRICE € 470 STARTING DATES 2-feb-09, 23-mrt-09, 4-mei-09, 2-jun-09, 6-jul-09

TARGET GROUP - Build a simple (test) report - Applying wildcards in conditions

This course is designed for business users - Restrict data - Using condition objects
with no previous knowledge on creating - Use the Slice and Dice Panel - Understanding relational operators in
reports and are about to start a Universe - Share data with colleagues. conditions
Design track. CONTENT - Using logical operators for multiple
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None • Getting Started conditions
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None - Logging on to BusinessObjects • Slice and Dice
GOALS - Modifying start up options - Applying functions
• This one-day instructor-led course is - Accessing help - Filtering data
designed to give learners comprehensive - Opening documents - Applying calculations to data
basic skills and core knowledge to - Viewing reports - Applying breaks to data
present and analyze information, - Saving documents - Ranking data
distribute documents and reports, and • Report Building • Sharing Data with Colleagues
use the major reporting features of - Understanding objects, classes, and - Sharing reports with BusinessObjects
Business Objects XI. This knowledge is a universes users
prerequisite for the Designer (BOU310) - Creating documents - Creating reports for non-
course. - Creating a query BusinessObjects users
• Learners who already attended a - Editing the results of a query - Retrieving reports from the repository
(BOW210) Web Intelligence XI or - Exploring the Slice and Dice Panel - Exporting data
(BOR210) Desktop Intelligence course - Projecting data NOTES
can skip this 1 day training. - Understanding Report Manager • Certification not applicable
• After completing the course, learners • Restricting Data
will be able to: - Applying query conditions

www.sap.nl/education 375
Business Objects
Administration - Enterprise Universe Design XI R1/R2 / vXI 3.0
BOU206 · DM100rwR2 - BusinessObjects Universe and Business Views A Technical Comparison
DURATION 1 hour PRICE € 112 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP Information not available
PREREQUISITES - REQUIREDNone
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
BOU210 · DM310R2 - BusinessObjects: Universe Design
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1740 STARTING DATES 13-jan-09, 3-feb-09, 3-mrt-09, 24-mrt-09, 14-apr-09, 5-mei-09, 3-jun-09
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
universe designers.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• If you want to increase your skill level
and knowledge of BusinessObjects
Desktop Intelligence XI reporting skills
and concepts, this course is
recommended: BusinessObjects
Desktop Intelligence XI R2: Report
Design
• If you want to increase your skill level
and knowledge of BusinessObjects Web
Intelligence XI reporting skills and
concepts, this course is recommended:
BusinessObjects Web Intelligence XI
R1/R2: Report Design
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED
• Working knowledge of SQL and
relational database management
systems concepts and structures
• Familiarity with the type of data and
the logical structure of the databases in
their organization
• Familiarity with BusinessObjects Web
Intelligence report building
GOALS
• This three-day instructor-led course is
designed to give you the comprehensive
skills needed to design, build and
maintain BusinessObjects6.5 and
BusinessObjects XI R1/XI R2 universes.
• You should attend this course to
understand universe design concepts
and terminology, as well as the role of
universes in relation to BusinessObjects
reporting tools.
376
CONTENT
• This 48-minute webinar will give you a
general understanding of the Business
Objects Semantic Layer looking at
Universe and Business Views. This
• The course provides an overview of the
process for planning, designing and
creating a universe and then walks you
through the process of designing a
universe that responds to identified
requirements.
• The business benefit of this course is
that you will learn best-practi
methodology for creating universes that
respond to your reporting
requirements. Through well-designed
universes, report designers and business
users will be able to create reports
without having to know anything about
the underlying data source or structure.
CONTENT
• Understanding BusinessObjects
Universes
- Understanding how universes allow
users to query databases using their
everyday business terms
• Creating the Course Universe
- The course database and universe
- Creating a universe
• Building the Universe Structure
- Populating the universe structure
- Defining joins in a universe
• Creating Dimension Objects
- Understanding classes and objects
- Creating classes and objects
• Creating Measure Objects
- Understanding measure objects
- Creating measure objects
• Using Lists of Values
- Working with LOVs in Designer
- Creating a cascading LOV
webinar looks at the differences between
the two products and how they run
with our client tools.
NOTES
• Course length: 48 minutes
• Resolving Loops in a Universe
- Resolving loops using aliases
- Resolving loops using shortcut joins
- Resolving loops using contexts
• Resolving SQL Traps
- Resolving chasm traps
- Resolving fan traps
• Applying Restrictions on Objects
- Restricting the data returned by objects
• Using Functions with Objects
- Using @ Functions
• Using Hierarchies
- Working with hierarchies
• Aggregate Awareness
- Applying aggregate awareness to objects
• Derived Tables and Indexes
- Using derived tables
- Applying index awareness
• Linking Universes
- Creating links between universes
• Securing Universes
- Setting access restrictions on a universe
• Managing Universes
- Documenting universes
- Deploying & maintaining universes
• Creating Universes from Metadata
- Creating a universe from an XML
metadata file
NOTES
• If you want to maximize your skill level
and knowledge of Universe Designer
and apply it to designing question
domains for use with BusinessObjects
Intelligent Question XI, this course is
recommended:
- BusinessObjects Intelligent Question XI
R2: Question Designer Basics
Business Objects
Administration - Enterprise Universe Design XI R1/R2 / vXI 3.0

BOU215 · DM310eR2 - BusinessObjects Universe

DURATION 13 hours PRICE € 846 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP • Participants learn to design, optimize • Using @ Functions

• This 13hr E-learning course is designed
for universe designers, new to
BusinessObjects Designer, who need to
design, build, document, maintain, and
distribute BusinessObjects universes.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• A solid understanding of relational
databases and client-server concepts.
Must be SQL-literate.
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• Learn how to translate end user
reporting requirements into an optimal
universe design to ensure that your
company's Business Intelligence needs
are met.
• BusinessObjects Universe Design
provides you with all the skills needed
to efficiently create and maintain
universes for Web Intelligence, allowing
users to easily build, access, and run
reports.
• Hands-on activities and simulations
help you to quickly learn how to create,
distribute, maintain, and optimize
universes for Web Intelligence
deployments.
and maintain universes that reflect the
reporting needs of end users in your
organization.
CONTENT
• Understanding BusinessObjects
Universes
- Understand BusinessObjects universes
- Use the Universe Development Cycle
• Creating a Universe Connection
- Set universe parameters
• Building the Universe Structure
- Populating the universe structure
- Defining joins in a universe
- Setting join options
• Creating Measure Objects
- Defining measure objects
- Using measure objects
• Creating Dimension Objects
- Define objects and classes
- Create classes
- Create objects
• Resolving Loops
- Resolve loops in a universe
• Applying Restrictions
- Applying restrictions to objects
• SQL Traps
- Resolving SQL Traps
- Using @ Functions
• Using List of Values
- Creating a LOV
• Using Hierarches
- Defining Hierarchies
- Using Hierarchies
• Aggregate Awareness
- Defining aggregate awareness
- Applying aggregate awareness to
objects.
• Derived Tables
- Using Derived Tables
• Linking Universes
- Understanding linked universes
- Creating links between universe
• Managing Universes
- Documenting universes
- Deploying universes
- Maintaining universes
NOTES
• Delivery and duration
- The suggested time to complete this
E-learning offering is 13 hours.
• Certification not applicable

www.sap.nl/education 377
Business Objects
Administration - Enterprise Universe Design XI R1/R2 / vXI 3.0
BOU220 · DM351R2 - BusinessObjects: Advanced Universe Design
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1160 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
anyone responsible for creating and
designing universes using a
BusinessObjects Enterprise XI R2 SP2
environment.
• You will be most successful if you have
experience working with
BusinessObjects Designer.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• Working knowledge of SQL and
relational database management
systems concepts and structures
• Familiarity with the metadata and
logical structure of the databases in
their organization
• BusinessObjects Universe Designer
• BusinessObjects Web Intelligence
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED
• BusinessObjects XI R1/R2: Universe
Design
• BusinessObjects Web Intelligence XI R2:
Report Design
GOALS
• This two-day instructor-led advanced
course is designed to give you the
comprehensive skills and in-depth
knowledge needed to design universes
in BusinessObjects Designer.
378
• The business benefit of this course is
that you will learn best- practice
methodology for creating universes that
respond to your reporting
requirements.
• Through well-designed universes,
report designers and business users will
be able to create reports without having
to know anything about the underlying
data source or structure.
CONTENT
• Lesson 1 - Universe Development
Process
- Understanding the metadata
- Universe Development Cycle
- Best practices for universe design
• Lesson 2 - Universe Parameters
- Data access files and connection
parameters
- BusinessObjects dynamic SQL
parameters
- Connection and user credential
parameters
• Lesson 3 - Advanced Objects Scenarios
- Combining database functions in
objects
- Constructing relative date-time objects
- Working with Transact_SQL functions
• Lesson 4 - Complex Predefined
Conditions, LOVs and Joins
- Complex predefined conditions
- Advanced LOVs
- Advanced Join syntaxes
• Lesson 5 - SQL Traps Revisited
- Chasm Traps
- Fan Traps
• Lesson 6 - Extended Index Awareness
and Derived Tables
- Applying Index Awareness
- Derived Tables
NOTES
• This training offering is based on
BusinessObjects XI R2 Service Pack 2
(SP2).
• Additional education not applicable
• Applicable certification
- This course is not applicable to any
Business Objects Certified Professional
programs.
Business Objects
Administration - Enterprise Universe Design XI R1/R2 / vXI 3.0
BOU310 · DM310V3.0 - BusinessObjects Universe Designer XI 3.0: Universe Design
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1740 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
universe designers.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• BusinessObjects Web Intelligence XI 3.0:
Report Design
• Working knowledge of SQL and
relational database management
systems concepts and structures
• Familiarity with the type of data and
the logical structure of the databases in
their organization
• Familiarity with BusinessObjects Web
Intelligence report building
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This core three day instructor led
course is designed to give you the
comprehensive skills needed to design,
build and maintain BusinessObjects 6.5,
BusinessObjects XIR1/XIR2, and
BusinessObjects XI 3.0 universes.
• You should attend this course to
understand universe design concepts
and terminology, as well as the role of
universes in relation to BusinessObjects
reporting tools.
• The course provides an overview of the
process for planning, designing and
creating a universe and then walks you
through the process of designing a
universe that responds to identified
requirements.
• The business benefit of this course is
that you will learn best- practice
methodology for creating universes that
respond to your reporting
requirements.
• Through well-designed universes,
report designers and business users will
be able to create reports without having
to know anything about the underlying
data source or structure.
CONTENT
• Understanding BusinessObjects
Universes
- Define BusinessObjects universe
concepts
- Use the Universe Development Cycle
• Creating the Course Universe
- Describe the course database and
universe
- Create the universe
• Building the Universe Structure
- Populate the universe structure
- Define joins in a universe
• Creating Dimension Objects
- Describe classes and objects
- Create classes and objects
• Creating Measure Objects
- Explaine measure object concepts
- Create measure objects
- Create delegated measure objects
• Resolving Loops in a Universe
- Understand loops
- Resolve loops using shortcut joins
- Resolve loops using aliases
- Resolve loops using contexts
• Resolving SQL Traps
- Understand SQL traps and universes
- Resolve fan traps
- Resolve chasm traps
• Using Lists of Values
- Create a list of values
- Work with LOVs in Designer
- Create a cascading LOV
• Applying Restrictions on Objects
- Restrict the data returned by objects
• Using @functions with Objects
- Use @ Functions
• Using Hierarchies
- Work with hierarchies
• Derived Tables and Indexes
- Using derived tables
- Apply index awareness
• End-of-Course Challenge
- Design and create the Prestige Motors
universe
NOTES
• This course is designed to teach you
how to design BusinessObjects universes
using Universe Designer, using
BusinessObjects 6.5, BusinessObjects XI
R1/R2, or BusinessObjects XI 3.0.
• New features covered in the XI 3.0
course that are not applicable to
BusinessObjects 6.5 or XI R1/R2 learners
include:
- Creating a cascading list of values
associated with a hierarchy of objects in
a universe
- Creating delegated measures
- Creating nested derived tables
• Additional education not applicable
• Applicable certification
- This course is not applicable to any
Business Objects Certified Professional
programs.
www.sap.nl/education 379
Business Objects
Administration - Enterprise Universe Design XI R1/R2 / vXI 3.0
BOU320 · DM351V3.0 - BusinessObjects Universe Designer XI 3.0: Advanced Universe Design
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1160 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
anyone responsible for creating and
designing universes using a
BusinessObjects Enterprise XI R2 or XI
3.0 environment.
• The learners who attend the course will
be most successful if they have
experience in working with Business
Objects Universe Designer.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• BusinessObjects XI R2: Universe Design
and/or BusinessObjects XI 3.0: Universe
Design
• BusinessObjects Web Intelligence XI R2:
Report Design, and/or BusinessObjects
Web Intelligence XI R2 3.0: Report
Design
• Working knowledge of SQL and
relational database management
systems concepts and structures
• Familiarity with the metadata and
logical structure of the databases in
your organization
• Familiarity with BusinessObjects Web
Intelligence report building
• Familiarity with using BusinessObjects
Universe Designer
• Familiarity with the BusinessObjects
Central Management Console
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
380
GOALS
• This two-day instructor-led advanced
course is designed to give you the
comprehensive skills and in-depth
knowledge needed to design universes
in BusinessObjects Universe Designer.
• The business benefit of this course is
that you will learn best- practice
methodology for creating universes that
respond to your reporting
requirements.
• Through well-designed universes,
report designers and business users will
be able to create reports without having
to know anything about the underlying
data source or structure.
CONTENT
• Reviewing Universe Design Concepts
- Use your universe design and
BusinessObjects Universe Designer
knowledge to solve business problems
• Working with Aggregate Awareness
- Define aggregate awareness
- Apply aggregate awareness to objects
• Designing Advanced Objects
- Combine database functions in objects
- Construct relative date-time objects
- Work with analytic functions
• Creating Complex Predefined
Conditions, LOVs, and Joins
- Create complex predefined conditions
- Work with advanced LOVs
- Work with advanced join syntaxes
• Securing Universes
- Define connection and user credential
parameters
- Work with Central Management Server
(CMS) universe security
• Implementing Universe Life Cycle
Management
- Move content from development to
production
• Maintaining and Optimizing Universes
- Maintain universes
- Optimize universes
- Apply best practices for universe design
• Creating Universes from Other Data
Sources
- Create a universe from an XML
metadata file
- Create stored procedure and JavaBeans
universes
- Work with OLAP universes
NOTES
• Additional education not applicable
• Applicable certification
- This course is not applicable to any
Business Objects Certified Professional
programs
Business Objects
Administration - Enterprise XI 3.0 / Migration XI 3.0
BOE310
SA210V3.0 - BOBJ
Enterprise XI 3.0:
Administration and
Security
2 days
BOE405
SA100eV3.0 - Enterprise XI
3.0: What’s New -
Installation and Lifecycle
Management
3 hours
BOE435
SA103eV3.0 - Enterprise XI
3.0: What’s New -
Publishing Documents
3 hours
BOE350
SA650V3.0 - BOBJ
Migration XI 3.0: Migrating
from BOBJ 5.x & 6.x to
BOBJ XI 3.0
3 days
BOE320 C_BOCP_BOED
BusinessObjects
SA310V3.0 - BOBJ Enterprise XI 3.0:
Enterprise XI 3.0:
Administering Servers -
Windows
3 days
BOE415 BOE425
SA101eV3.0 - SA102eV3.0 - Enterpr. XI 3.0:
Enterprise XI 3.0: What’s New - Federation,
What’s New - User Rights Server Intelligence, Auditing
& Repository Diagnostic
2 hours Tool 4,5 hours
BOE445 BOE465
SA104eV3.0 - Enterprise XI SA106eV3.0 - Enterprise XI
3.0: What’s New - Using 3.0: What’s New -
the CMC and InfoView Migrating Reports and BCA
Publications
2 hours 3 hours
www.sap.nl/education 381
Business Objects
Administration - Enterprise XI 3.0 / Migration XI 3.0
BOE310 · SA210V3.0 - BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 3.0: Administration and Security
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1160 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
system architects/administrators who
are new to BusinessObjects Enterprise
and will be responsible for maintaining
BusinessObjects Enterprise users,
groups, and objects in their
organization.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED
• Windows conventions
• Familiarity with Windows Server
2000/2003 administration
• Windows Server 2000/2003 security
concepts (global/local groups, and
directory structure)
GOALS
• This two-day instructor-led course
explains how to perform the tasks in the
central management console (CMC).
• These tasks involve supporting
BusinessObjects Enterprise users and
groups so they can access corporate data
through the web portal in
BusinessObjects Enterprise.
• This corporate data can take the form
of Crystal Reports, BusinessObjects Web
Intelligence, or Desktop Intelligence
382
documents, Voyager reports, program
objects, object packages, and popular
third- party objects, such as Microsoft
Word and Excel files, among others.
Please note: this course does not discuss
maintaining BusinessObjects Enterprise
servers, which is taught in the
BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 3.0:
Administering Servers – Windows
course.
• The business benefit of this course is
that it provides a foundation for System
Architects/Administrators to effectively
manage both users and content on the
BusinessObjects Enterprise platform.
CONTENT
• What is BusinessObjects Enterprise?
- What is BusinessObjects Enterprise?
- Use Infoview and the CMC to view
content
- Configure the CMC
• Managing BusinessObjects Enterprise
Content
- Manipulating objects in BusinessObjects
Enterprise
- Adding objects to the Repository
• Securing BusinessObjects Enterprise
Content
- Creating users, groups, folders and
categories
- The BusinessObjects Enterprise security
model
- Guidelines for planning security
• Application Security
- Securing applications
• Publishing and Publications
- Publishing personalized reports and
documents to multiple recipient
- Publishing objects to dynamic recipients
- Managing profiles
• Scheduling Content
- Scheduling objects
- Event based scheduling
- Scheduling with business calendars
- Managing instances
• Federation
- What is Federation?
- Replicate content across a remote
connection
NOTES
• Additional education
- BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 3.0:
Administering Servers – Windows
course
• Applicable certification
- To be determined.
Business Objects
Administration - Enterprise XI 3.0 / Migration XI 3.0
BOE320 · SA310V3.0 - BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 3.0: Administering Servers - Windows
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1740 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
System Architects/Administrators who
are responsible for setting up and main-
taining a BOBJ Enterprise platform.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• BOBJ Enterprise XI V3.0: Administering
Users and Content with the CMC
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED
Working knowledge of:
• Tasks involved in supporting BOBJ
Enterprise users and groups access cor-
porate data through InfoView
• BOBJ Enterprise account management
• BOBJ Enterprise content management
• BOBJ Enterprise security concepts
• BOBJ Enterprise InfoView
• NT enterprise security concepts (global
& local groups, and directory structure)
GOALS
• This 3-day instructor-led course
explains and demonstrates what each
server component in BOBJ Enterprise
does and how it is configured.
• The learners will install and configure
each component and learn how infor-
mation flows from server to server for
system processes such as logging on to
the system, scheduling reports, and
viewing reports.
• Learners will learn to use the Central
Management Console (CMC) and the
Central Configuration Manager (CCM)
to manage and configure the servers
and will also practice troubleshooting
system problems when they arise.
• The business benefit of this course is
that it provides a foundation for System
Architects/Administrators who are
responsible for setting up and maintain-
ing a BOBJ Enterprise platform
CONTENT
• Preparing, Installing and Configuring
BOBJ Enterprise
- Explain how to prepare, install, and
configure BOBJ Enterprise
- Test BOBJ Enterprise once it is installed
- Verify what updates were applied to the
BOE installation (Post Inst
Maintenance)
• BOBJ Enterprise Architecture
- Describe the BOBJ Enterprise architec-
ture
- Describe the BOBJ Enterprise compo-
nents
- Explain the information process flows
in BOBJ Enterprise
• Performing Common Server
Management Tasks
- Describe server management tools
- Describe the Server Intelligence Agent
(SIA)
- Describe the CMC to manage servers
- Describe the CCM to manage servers
• Managing the Central Management
Server and the System Database
- Use the Central Management Server
- Migrate and backup the CMS system
data
- Cluster Central Management Servers
- Manage auditing
- Describe authentication and single sign-
on
- Map third-party accounts to BOBJ
Enterprise
• Managing the File Repository Servers
- Use the File Repository Servers
- Configure the File Repository Servers
- Use the Repository Diagnostic Tool
• Managing the Web Application Services
- Understand the web application services
- Configure the Java Web Application
Server
- Deploy BOBJ Enterprise web applica-
tions using wdeploy
• Managing the Web Intelligence Servers
- Describe the role of Web Intelligence
servers
- Configure the Web Intelligence servers
- Describe how report viewing requests
are processed by the Web Intelligence
servers
- Describe how scheduling requests are
processed by the Web Intellige servers
• Managing the Crystal Reports Server
- Use the Crystal Reports Server
- Configure the Crystal Reports Job
Server
- Configure the Crystal Reports Cache
Server
- Describe the role of the Report
Application Server
- Set and run a schedule for a report
- Describe the processing report viewing
requests using the RAS
• Managing the Desktop Intelligence
Servers
- Describe the role of the Desktop
Intelligence Job Server
- Describe the role of the Desktop
Intelligence Cache Server
- Describe the role of the Connection
Server
• Working with the Adaptive Job Server
and the Adaptive Processing Server
- Describe the role of the Adaptive Job
Server
- Describe the role of the Adaptive
Processing Server
• Managing the Replication Services
- Configure the Replication Services
- Configure replication jobs
- Manage the object cleanup
• Managing the Event Servers
- Understand events in the BOBJ
Enterprise
- Use the Event Server
- Configure the Event Server
• Managing the Multi-Dimensional
Analysis Services Servers
- Understand the role of the Multi-
Dimensional Analysis Services Serv
- Configure the Multi-Dimensional
Analysis Services Server
• Working with the List of Values (LOV)
Job Server
- Use the LOV Job Server and LOV objects
- Configure the LOV Job Server
- Process LOV objects
• Managing the Destination Job Servers
- Use the Destination Job Server
www.sap.nl/education 383
Business Objects
Administration - Enterprise XI 3.0 / Migration XI 3.0
- Configure the Destination Job Server
- Set a schedule to send an object or
instance to a destination
• Managing the Program Job Servers
- Use the Program Job Server
- Configure the Program Job Server
- Describe how scheduled programs are
processed
BOE350 · SA650V3.0 - Business Objects Migration XI 3.0: Migrating from BusinessObjects 5.x & 6.x to XI 3.0
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1740 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
system architects/administrators who
are responsible for planning, assessing,
and/or implementing a strategy for
their organization to migrate from their
BusinessObjects 5.x/6.x deployment to
the BusinessObjects XI 3.0.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• BusinessObjects 5i Supervisor BO OR
BusinessObjects Supervisor 6.5
• BusinessObjects 6.5 Enterprise
Administration AND BusinessObjects
Enterprise XI 3.0: Administering Users
and Content with the CMC
• BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 3.0:
Administering Servers - Windows
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED
Experience with:
• The users, content, architecture, and
security in their organization's source
deployment
• Windows NT/2000 and NT
administration
• NT enterprise security concepts
(global/local groups, and directory
structure)
GOALS
• This three-day course is designed to
provide you with an understanding of
how to migrate from a BusinessObjects
5.x/6.x system to BusinessObjects XI 3.0.
• By the end of the course, you will
understand how to properly plan and
assess your migration strategy,
understand how users and content will
migrate from their source environment,
384
• Troubleshooting BOBJ Enterprise
- Use best practices when troubleshooting
- Use a strategic troubleshooting method
NOTES
• Recommended additional education:
- Understanding the BOBJ XI R2 Platform
Recorded Webinar Series
as well as understand the
BusinessObjects XI 3.0 security model.
• You will have the opportunity to
practice migrating different types of
users and content through a series of
workshops.
• The business benefit of this course is
that you will be able to plan for and
implement a successful migration from
your source system to BusinessObjects
XI 3.0.
CONTENT
• Migration overview
- Define migration
- Describe the tools used in migration
- Describe the phases of a migration
project
• BusinessObjects 5.1.4/6.x administration
and security model
- Identify where resources are stored
- Describe repository domains
- Perform common administration tasks
- Describe the security model
• BusinessObjects XI 3.0 administration
and security
- Perform administration tasks in XI 3.0
- Identify differences between
administrative functions in 6.5 and XI
3.0
- Identify differences between security
models in 6.5 and XI 3.0
• Migration concepts
- Describe important migration concepts
- Describe commom challenges faced
when migrating
- Determine what content migrates
• Planning for migration
- BOBJ Enterprise XI R1/R2: Designing &
Deploying a Solution
• Applicable certification
- This course is a core course in the BOBJ
Enterprise Certified Professional certifi-
cation
- Plan a migration project
- Assess migration requirements
- Back-up the source and destination
repositories
- Use the Repository Diagnostic Tool to
find and repair inconsistenci
• Using the Import Wizard
- Describe the options available in the
Import Wizard
- Perform an incremental migration
- Migrate using BIAR files
• Validating the migration
- Validate migrated content
- Describe the tools used for validation
• Migrating security
- Prepare to migrate security
- Analyze the source environment
- Perform a security migration
- Validate the destination environment
• Converting reports
- Converting reports from Full Client to
Web Intelligence
- Comparing reports and identifying
differences
• Final migration workshop
- Plan, execute, and validate a migration
based on a real-world case study
NOTES
• Additional education not applicable
• Applicable certification
- To be determined.
Business Objects
Administration - Enterprise XI 3.0 / Migration XI 3.0
BOE405 · SA100eV3.0 - Enterprise XI 3.0: What’s New - Installation and Lifecycle Management
DURATION 3 hours PRICE € 112 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
BusinessObjects Enterprise System
Administrators.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• BusinessObjects Enterprise XI R2:
Designing and Deploying a Solution -
Windows
• BusinessObjects Enterprise XI R2:
Administering Servers - Windows
• BusinessObjects Enterprise XI R2:
Administering Users and Content with
the CMC AND Migrating from
BusinessObjects 5.x & 6.x to
BusinessObjects XI R2
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This 3-hour E-learning course provides
learners with an overview of the new
installation and lifecycle management
processes in BusinessObjects XI 3.0.
• Learners should take this course to
learn how to install the BusinessObjects
Enterprise platform, Client Tools,
Crystal Reports and Live Office.
• Learners will also learn how to install
language packs, perform silent
installations, and use the Software
Inventory Tool.
• In addition, learners will learn how to
promote BI content from one
Enterprise environment to another
using the Import Wizard and BIAR files.
• The business benefit of this course is
that learners will gain familiarity with
installation and lifecycle management
procedures, enabling them to support
customers installing XI 3.0.
CONTENT
• Installation overview
- Describe the new features introduced in
the installation process across multiple
Business Objects products
• BusinessObjects Enterprise installation
- Describe the new features introduced in
the installation process for
BusinessObjects Enterprise
- Install BusinessObjects Enterprise
- Create a response file and use it to
complete the silent installation of
BusinessObjects Enterprise
• BusinessObjects Enterprise Client Tools
installation
- Describe the new features introduced in
the installation process for
BusinessObjects Enterprise Client Tools
- Install BusinessObjects Enterprise Client
Tools
• Crystal Reports installation
- Describe the new features in Crystal
Reports installation
- Perform a new Crystal Report
installation
• Live Office installation
- Describe the new features in Live Office
installation
- Perform a Live Office installation
• Troubleshooting and tracing
installation
- Explain some of the tips, tricks, and best
practices of different installations
- Troubleshoot and trace different
installation problems
• Lifecycle Management
- Describe Lifecycle Management and
explain how it works in XI 3.0
NOTES
• This course is part of a series of delta
offerings created to prepare you for the
release of BusinessObjects XI 3.0. To get
the most out of each offering, you
should already have experience using
and supporting BusinessObjects XI R2.
• Additional education (Refer to other
offerings from the What’s New series for
a complete list. The Platform and
Migration-specific E-learning offerings
available are:)
- BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 3.0:
What's New - Using the CMC and
InfoView
- BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 3.0:
What's New - Publishing Documents
- BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 3.0:
What's New - Installation and Lifecycle
Management
- BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 3.0:
What's New - Federation, Server
Intelligence, Auditing and the
Repository Diagnostic Tool
- BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 3.0:
What's New - User Rights
- BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 3.0:
What's New - Migrating Reports and
BCA Publications
• Certification not applicable
www.sap.nl/education 385
Business Objects
Administration - Enterprise XI 3.0 / Migration XI 3.0
BOE415 · SA101eV3.0 - Enterprise XI 3.0: What’s New - User Rights
DURATION 2 hours PRICE € 112 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
BusinessObjects Enterprise System
Administrators.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• BusinessObjects Enterprise XI R2:
Designing and Deploying a Solution -
Windows
• BusinessObjects Enterprise XI R2:
Administering Servers - Windows
• BusinessObjects Enterprise XI R2:
Administering Users and Content with
the CMC AND Migrating from
BusinessObjects 5.x & 6.x to
BusinessObjects XI R2
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This 3-hour E-learning course is about
user rights management in
BusinessObjects XI 3.0.
• The course describes the new user
rights features available and how they
differ from the user rights features
found in XI R2.
• You should take this course if you want
to know how to set system security in a
BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 3.0
environment.
• The business benefit of this course is
that you will develop familiarity with
BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 3.0
386
enabling you to adequately support XI
3.0 customers.
CONTENT
• Custom access levels
- List the user rights features introduced
in BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 3.0
- Define custom access levels
- Describe how to use custom access
levels
- Explain how access levels can be
combined to allow for the assignment
of multiple access levels to one user
• Selective enforcement of rights
- Describe the concept of selectively
enforcing rights
- Name the guiding principles behind the
security model in BusinessObjects
Enterprise XI 3.0
- Explain the concept of scope of rights in
BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 3.0.
• Permissions Explorer and Security
Query
- Locate the source of inherited security
using the Permissions Explorer Tool
- Determine what documents a
particular user can access by using the
Security Query Tool.
NOTES
• This course is part of a series of delta
offerings created to prepare you for the
release of BusinessObjects XI 3.0. To get
this most out of each offering, you
should already have experience using
and supporting BusinessObjects XI R2.
• Additional education (Refer to other
offerings from the What’s New series for
a complete list. The Platform and
Migration-specific E-learning offerings
available are:)
- BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 3.0:
What's New - Using the CMC and
InfoView
- BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 3.0:
What's New - Publishing Documents
- BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 3.0:
What's New - Installation and Lifecycle
Management
- BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 3.0:
What's New - Federation, Server
Intelligence, Auditing and the
Repository Diagnostic Tool
- BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 3.0:
What's New - User Rights
- BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 3.0:
What's New - Migrating Reports and
BCA Publications
• Certification not applicable
Business Objects
Administration - Enterprise XI 3.0 / Migration XI 3.0
BOE425 · SA102eV3.0 - Enterprise XI 3.0: What’s New - Federation, Server Intell., Auditing & Repository Diagnostic Tool
DURATION 4,5 hours PRICE € 112 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
BusinessObjects Enterprise System
Administrators.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• BusinessObjects Enterprise XI R2:
Designing and Deploying a Solution -
Windows
• BusinessObjects Enterprise XI R2:
Administering Servers - Windows
• BusinessObjects Enterprise XI R2:
Administering Users and Content
• with the CMC AND Migrating from
BusinessObjects 5.x & 6.x to
BusinessObjects XI R2
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This 4.5-hour E-learning course will
provide learners with an overview of
several major new tools and features in
XI 3.0, including Server Intelligence,
auditing client actions, Federation, and
the Repository Diagnostic Tool.
• Learners should take this course to gain
an understanding of the new server
architecture.
• The business benefit of this course is
that learners will be able to support
customers using BusinessObjects
Enterprise XI 3.0.
CONTENT
• Server Intelligence
- Name the new features and
enhancements that are introduced in
BusinessObjects XI 3.0
- Describe Core Server Intelligence
- List the new features of server
management in the CMC
- Explain the new features in clustering
• Auditing
- List the new capabilities included in the
XI 3.0 auditing
- Explain the procedure to track IP
addresses and machine names
- Manage audit database connections
- Enable client auditing
• Federation
- Discuss the benefits of Federation and
its features
- Explain the concepts of Origin Site and
Destination Site in the Replication
process
- Describe conflict resolution in the
Replication process
• The Repository Diagnostic Tool
- Describe the Repository Diagnostic Tool
and its benefits
- Explain what are inconsistencies and
how inconsistencies are diagnosed and
repaired
- Describe the process of running the
Repository Diagnostic Tool
NOTES
• This course is part of a series of delta
offerings created to prepare you for the
release of BusinessObjects XI 3.0. To get
the most out of each offering, you
should already have experience using
and supporting BusinessObjects XI R2.
• Additional education (Refer to other
offerings from the What’s New series for
a complete list. The Platform and
Migration-specific E-learning offerings
available are:)
- BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 3.0:
What's New - Using the CMC and
InfoView
- BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 3.0:
What's New - Publishing Documents
- BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 3.0:
What's New - Installation and Lifecycle
Management
- BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 3.0:
What's New - Federation, Server
Intelligence, Auditing and the
Repository Diagnostic Tool
- BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 3.0:
What's New - User Rights
- BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 3.0:
What's New - Migrating Reports and
BCA Publications
• Certification not applicable
www.sap.nl/education 387
Business Objects
Administration - Enterprise XI 3.0 / Migration XI 3.0
BOE435 · SA103eV3.0 - Enterprise XI 3.0: What’s New - Publishing Documents
DURATION 3 hours PRICE € 112 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
BusinessObjects Enterprise System
Administrators.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• BusinessObjects Enterprise XI R2:
Designing and Deploying a Solution -
Windows
• BusinessObjects Enterprise XI R2:
Administering Servers - Windows
• BusinessObjects Enterprise XI R2:
Administering Users and Content with
the CMC AND Migrating from
BusinessObjects 5.x & 6.x to
BusinessObjects XI R2
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This 2-hour, 45 minute E-learning
course is about the new publishing
functionality in BusinessObjects
Enterprise XI 3.0. The course uses
descriptions, examples, diagrams, and
activities to teach you about the new
features as well as the publishing
process.
• After completing the course, you will be
able to create Crystal Reports and Web
Intelligence publications to burst
personalized content to multiple
recipients.
• The business benefit of this course is
that you will develop familiarity with
388
BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 3.0
enabling you to adequately support XI
3.0 customers.
CONTENT
• Overview of Publishing in XI 3.0
- List some of the benefits provided by the
BusinessObjects XI 3.0 comprehensive
publishing capabilities
- List the major difference between
publishing in Business Objects XI R2
versus XI 3.0
- List the four main areas of focus cited
for the new functionality provided in
this release
- List the three general steps required in
the publishing process
• New Publishing Features in XI 3.0
- Recognize the new features that are
available in the XI 3.0 release
- Briefly describe what each of these new
features offers users.
• The Publishing Process
- Describe the overall publishing process
- Create a profile
- Create a publication
NOTES
• Course length: 2 hours 45 minutes
• This course is part of a series of delta
offerings created to prepare you for the
release of BusinessObjects XI 3.0. To get
the most out of each offering, you
should already have experience using
and supporting BusinessObjects XI R2.
• Additional education (Refer to other
offerings from the What’s New series for
a complete list. The Platform and
Migration-specific E-learning offerings
available are:)
- BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 3.0:
What's New - Using the CMC and
InfoView
- BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 3.0:
What's New - Publishing Documents
- BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 3.0:
What's New - Installation and Lifecycle
Management
- BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 3.0:
What's New - Federation, Server
Intelligence, Auditing and the
Repository Diagnostic Tool
- BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 3.0:
What's New - User Rights
- BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 3.0:
What's New - Migrating Reports and
BCA Publications
• Certification not applicable
Business Objects
Administration - Enterprise XI 3.0 / Migration XI 3.0
BOE445 · SA104eV3.0 - Enterprise XI 3.0: What’s New - Using the CMC and InfoView
DURATION 2 hours PRICE € 112 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
BusinessObjects Enterprise System
Administrators.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• BusinessObjects Enterprise XI R2:
Designing and Deploying a
Solution - Windows
• BusinessObjects Enterprise XI R2:
Administering Servers - Windows
• BusinessObjects Enterprise XI R2:
Administering Users and Content with
the CMC AND Migrating from
BusinessObjects 5.x & 6.x to
BusinessObjects XI R2
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This 2-hour E-learning course is
designed to give learners a
comprehensive overview of the new
features available in XI 3.0.
• Learners should take this course to
learn how to navigate and perform
common administrative functions in
InfoView and the CMC.
• The business benefit of this course is
that you will develop familiarity with
CONTENT
• BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 3.0 New
Features
- Provide a brief BusinessObjects
Enterprise XI 3.0 platform overview and
how the platform addresses market
requirements.
- List the CMC redesign goals.
- Identify the CMC and InfoView
navigation enhancements available in
BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 3.0.
- Describe user and group management
improvements.
- Describe the Relationship Query Tool
and the Instance Manager Tool.
- Describe the process for publishing for
Crystal reports and Web Intelligence
documents.
- Describe how Cross-site Federation,
Server Intelligence and Auditing work
in BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 3.0.
• InfoView Activities
- Navigate to the public folders and select
a report.
- Locate where the common actions are
on the new interface.
- Copy multiple documents to a personal
folder.
- Upload documents to personal folder
and assign to a personal category.
- Schedule a document in a personal
folder.
- Use Search to find a report in Report
Samples.
- Search within search results and
perform actions on search results.
- View documents and document
instances.
• CMC Activities
- Browse for objects by context.
- Perform actions on objects in the new
interface.
- Create new objects and upload to the
repository.
- Copy objects to a new folder.
- Search for reports.
- Create, add, remove users and groups.
- Add multiple objects to multiple
categories.
- Update database login for multiple
Crystal reports.
- Manage user accounts.
- Find instances in the Instance Manager
and rerun failed instances.
NOTES
• This course is part of a series of delta
offerings created to prepare you for the
release of BusinessObjects XI 3.0. To get
the most out of each offering, you
should already have experience using
and supporting BusinessObjects XI R2.
• Additional education (Refer to other
offerings from the What’s New series for
a complete list. The Platform and
Migration-specific E-learning offerings
available are:)
- BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 3.0:
What's New - Using the CMC and
InfoView
- BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 3.0:
What's New - Publishing Documents
- BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 3.0:
What's New - Installation and Lifecycle
Management
- BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 3.0:
What's New - Federation, Server
Intelligence, Auditing and the
Repository Diagnostic Tool
- BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 3.0:
What's New - User Rights
- BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 3.0:
What's New - Migrating Reports and
BCA Publications
• Applicable certification
- This course is not applicable to any
Business Objects Certified Professional
programs.
www.sap.nl/education 389
Business Objects
Administration - Enterprise XI 3.0 / Migration XI 3.0
BOE465 · SA106eV3.0 - Enterprise XI 3.0: What’s New - Migrating Reports and BCA Publications
DURATION 3 hours PRICE € 112 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
BusinessObjects Enterprise System
Administrators.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• BusinessObjects Enterprise XI R2:
Designing and Deploying a Solution -
Windows
• BusinessObjects Enterprise XI R2:
Administering Servers - Windows
• BusinessObjects Enterprise XI R2:
Administering Users and Content with
the CMC AND Migrating from
BusinessObjects 5.x & 6.x to
BusinessObjects XI R2
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This 3-hour E-learning course is
designed to provide learners with an
overview of the new features available
for migrating from BusinessObjects
5.x/6.x to BusinessObjects XI 3.0.
• Learners should take this course to
learn how to use the XI 3.0 Import
Wizard, and how to migrate BCA
Publications and related objects such as
profiles and BCAP external users.
• Learners will also learn about
converting Desktop Intelligence reports
to Web Intelligence using the Report
Conversion Tool, and will learn how to
compare Desktop Intelligence and Full
Client reports using the Report
Comparison Tool and Delta Viewer.
390
• The business benefit of this course is
that users will be able to support
customers migrating their environment
to XI 3.0.
CONTENT
• New Features of the Import Wizard
- Describe the new features of the Import
Wizard
• BCAP Migration
- Understand BCA Publications.
- Migrate mail publications, web
publications, internal and external
recipients, and profiles.
- Perform a post-migration validation of
your content.
• Using the Report Conversion Tool
- Use the Report Conversion Tool to
convert reports to Web Intelligence.
• Using the Report Comparison Tool
- Use the Report Comparison Tool to
compare 5.x/6.x with XI 3.0 Desktop
Intelligence reports.
- View data differences in the Delta
Viewer.
- Save the output comparison file (.roc)
for later viewing.
NOTES
• This course is part of a series of delta
offerings created to prepare you for the
release of BusinessObjects XI 3.0. To get
the most out of each offering, you
should already have experience using
and supporting BusinessObjects XI R2.
• Additional education (Refer to other
offerings from the What’s New series for
a complete list. The Platform and
Migration-specific E-learning offerings
available are:)
- BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 3.0:
What's New - Using the CMC and
InfoView
- BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 3.0:
What's New - Publishing Documents
- BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 3.0:
What's New - Installation and Lifecycle
Management
- BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 3.0:
What's New - Federation, Server
Intelligence, Auditing and the
Repository Diagnostic Tool
- BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 3.0:
What's New - User Rights
- BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 3.0:
What's New - Migrating Reports and
BCA Publications
• Applicable certification
- This course is not applicable to any
Business Objects Certified Professional
programs.
Business Objects
Administration - Edge XI R1/R2
BOS210
SA215 - BusinessObjects
Edge Series: Administering
BusinessObjects Edge
Series
3 days
BOC215
RD110eR2 - Crystal
Reports: Report Design I -
Fundamentals of Report
Design
12 hours
BOS205 BOC225
SA205e - BusinessObjects RD210eR2 - Crystal
Edge Series: Overview Reports: Report Design II -
Business Reporting
Solutions
1,5 hours
BOC215 · RD110eR2 - Crystal Reports: Report Design I - Fundamentals of Report Design
DURATION 12 hours PRICE € 450 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
report designers, new to Crystal
Reports, who are responsible for
creating and distributing reports.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
Working knowledge of:
• Windows conventions
• Basic database concepts
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This 12-hour E-learning course is
designed to give you comprehensive
skills and in-depth knowledge to plan
and create reports that will help you
analyze and interpret information.
• As a business benefit, you will find that
this course is an in-depth approach to
the entire report creation cycle from
planning a report prototype to
distributing a report.
CONTENT
• Planning a Report
- Defining database concepts
- Planning and developing a report
prototype
• Creating a Report
- Connecting to a data source
- Adding tables
- The design environment
BOS235
SA216e - Administering
SharePoint Portal
Integration Kit
12 hours 2,5 hours
- Inserting objects on a report
- Previewing and saving a report
- Positioning and sizing objects
- Formatting objects
• Selecting Records
- Defining the Select Expert
- Determining the record selection
criteria
- Defining saved and refreshed data
- Applying record selection
- Applying additional record selection
criteria
- Modifying record selection
- Applying time-based record selection
• Organizing Data on a Report
- Sorting records
- Grouping records
- Summarizing data
• Formatting a Report
- Adding graphical elements
- Combining text objects with database
fields
- Applying specialized formatting
- Inserting fields with pre-built functions
• Applying Section Formatting
- Formatting sections
- Creating a summary report
• Creating Basic Formulas
- Defining formulas
- Creating formulas
- Applying Boolean formulas
- Applying If-Then-Else formulas
- Applying date calculations
- Applying number calculations
- Applying string manipulation
• Applying Conditional Reporting
- Determining trends in data
- Formatting data conditionally
• Representing Data Visually
- Creating a chart
• Distributing a Report
- Exporting a report
- Saving a report to BusinessObjects
Enterprise
NOTES
• Recommended additional education:
- Report Design II - Business Reporting
Solutions
- Report Design III - Report Processing
Strategies
- Crystal Reports XI R1/R2: Report
Design IV - Optimizing Report Data
• Applicable certification
- This is a core course in the Business
Objects Certified Professional: Crystal
Reports XI certification.
www.sap.nl/education 391
Business Objects
Administration - Edge XI R1/R2
BOC225 · RD210eR2 - Crystal Reports: Report Design II - Business Reporting Solutions
DURATION 12 hours PRICE € 450 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
report designers who are responsible for
creating and distributing reports and
have completed Crystal Reports: Report
Design I.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• Crystal Reports XI R1/R2: Report
Design I - Fundamentals of Report
Design
Working knowledge of:
• Windows conventions
• Basic database concepts
• Experience using Web Browser
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This 12-hour E-learning course is
designed to give you comprehensive
skills and in-depth knowledge to plan
and create reports that will help you
analyze and interpret information.
• As a business benefit, you will be able to
increase your understanding of
formulas, variables, arrays, templates,
parameters, summaries, and sections.
• This course will also help you make
more effective report design decisions
and create more efficient reports.
392
CONTENT
• Report Creation Review
- Using your Crystal Reports knowledge
• Using the Repository
- Using the repository
- Creating a report from a repository data
source
• Creating Formulas
- Using functions and operators
- Defining control structures available in
Crystal Reports Syntax
• Managing Reports
- Using the workbench
- Publishing reports to BusinessObjects
Enterprise
• Using Variables and Arrays
- Using variables
- Using arrays
• Building Parameterized Reports
- Defining and creating parameters
- Building a report with multiple
parameters
- Using edit masks and descriptions
- Creating a data range parameter
- Grouping using parameters
• Using Report Templates
- Applying report templates
- Building a template without a data
source
- Removing a template
• Summarizing Data with Cross-Tabs
- Building a basic cross-tab
- Formatting a cross-tab
• Using Report Sections
- Using sections
- Using group related functions to format
sections
- Using section underlay
- Using multiple column reporting
• Building Specialized Reports
- Using the Running Total Expert
- Creating a form letter
- Adding a hyperlink to a report
- Using Dynamic Graphic Locations
- Building a report with alerts
- Building a top N report
NOTES
• Recommended additional education:
- Crystal Reports XI R1/R2: Report
Design III - Report Processing Strategies
- Crystal Reports XI R1/R2: Report
Design IV - Optimizing Report Data
• Applicable certification
- This is a core course in the Business
Objects Certified Professional: Crystal
Reports XI certification.
Business Objects
Administration - Edge XI R1/R2
BOS205 · SA205e - BusinessObjects Edge Series: Overview
DURATION 1,5 hours PRICE € 103 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
customers who are planning or
considering a Business Objects Crystal
Decisions implementation for their
organization.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This one-to-two-hour E-learning
course provides an overview of Business
Objects Crystal Decisions and describes
how it addresses the business
intelligence needs of mid-market
organizations.
• After completing the course, you will be
able to describe how Business Objects
defines the mid-market, explain the
mid-market product roadmap strategy
and describe the components and
functionality of Business Objects Crystal
Decisions.
• The business benefit of this course is
that you will be able to determine how
Business Objects Crystal Decisions can
solve the specific business intelligence
needs of your organization.
• You will also be better equipped to plan
a BI Server implementation because you
will understand how it is used and what
components are involved in a typical
deployment.
CONTENT
• Topic 1 - Explain the Business Objects
Mid-Market Roadmap Strategy
• Topic 2 - How Business Objects Crystal
Decisions Addresses your Company’s
Information and Performance
Management Needs
• Topic 3 - Business Objects Crystal
Decisions Overview
• Topic 4 - How Business Objects Crystal
Decisions Interacts with Applications
and Documents
• Topic 5 - Identify Business Objects
Crystal Decisions Components
• Topic 6 - Publishing and Scheduling
Web Intelligence Documents and
Crystal Reports
NOTES
• Course length: 1-2 hours
• Additional education (For information
about administration and deployment,
System Administrators may wish to
complete the following offering:)
- Administering Business Objects Crystal
Decisions
• Certification not applicable
www.sap.nl/education 393
Business Objects
Administration - Edge XI R1/R2
BOS210 · SA215 - BusinessObjects Edge Series: Administering BusinessObjects Edge Series
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1740 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
System Administrators who will be
administering and deploying Business
Objects Crystal Decisions in their
organization.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED
• Business Objects Crystal Decisions:
Overview
GOALS
• This three-day instructor-led course is
designed to teach you how to
administrate and deploy Business
Objects Crystal Decisions.
• By the end of the course you will be
able to explain to employees and
customers how to administrate Business
Objects Crystal Decisions, create users
and folders, schedule content, and
describe architecture and security.
• The business benefit of this course is
that System Administrators will know
how to maximize the performance of
Business Objects Crystal Decisions
through effective deployment and
administration.
CONTENT
• Understanding Business Objects Crystal
Decisions
- What is the Business Objects Crystal
Decisions
- Working in InfoView
- Working in Central Management
Console
• Business Objects Crystal Decisions
Architecture
394
- Business Objects Crystal Decisions
architecture
- Information process flows in Business
Objects Crystal Decisions
• Business Objects Crystal Decisions
Security
- Creating users, groups, and folders
- Business Objects Crystal Decisions
security model
- Creating categories
• Planning Your Content
- Creating a content plan
• Planning Application Security
- Securing Business Objects Crystal
Decisions applications
• Authentication and Mapping Third-
Party Accounts
- Authentication and single sign-on
- Mapping third-party accounts to
Business Objects Crystal Decisions
• Publishing and Configuring Content
- Publishing methods
- Publishing a Web Intelligence document
- Publishing a Crystal report
- Process flow for publishing objects
• Scheduling
- Scheduling objects
- Scheduling on events
- Scheduling with business calendars
- Managing instances
• Performing Common Server
Management Tasks
- Server management components
- Using the CCM to manage servers
- Using the CMC to manage servers
• Managing the Web Application Services
- The web application services
- Configuring the Java Web Application
Server and the Java Web Compon
Adapter
- Configuring the .NET Web Application
Server and the .NET Web Compon
Adapter
• Managing the Central Management
Server and the Repository
- Using the Central Management Server
- Migrating and backing up CMS system
data
- Managing auditing
• Appendix A- Process Flows
- Information process flows in Business
Objects Crystal Decisions
• Appendix B - Web Intelligence
Workshop
- Describe Web Intelligence Applet
caching
- Describe Universe caching
- Describe Web Intelligence Applet
sessions
- Describe .WID report reviewing caching
• Appendix C – SharePoint Portal
Integration Kit Installation
- Explain the purpose of SharePoint
- Describe portal server architecture
- Define portals, portlets and portal
integration kits
- Install the Portal Integration Kit for
SharePoint
NOTES
• Additional education not applicable
• Certification not applicable
Business Objects
Administration - Edge XI R1/R2
BOS235 · SA216e - Administering SharePoint Portal Integration Kit
DURATION 2,5 hours PRICE € 103 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
System Administrators who will be
administering and deploying the
SharePoint Portal Integration Kit.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• SharePoint Portal Server 2003 is
essential, as is a good working nowledge
of both Crystal Reports and
BusinessObjects Enterprise.
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED
• Familiarity with Windows SharePoint
Services and/or Office
GOALS
• This two-to-three-hour E-learning
course is designed to teach you how to
install, configure and use the Portal
Integration Kit (PIK) for Microsoft
SharePoint.
• By the end of the course you will have - Verify and update Single Sign On
the skills necessary to assist - Update View on Demand options
BusinessObjects customers to effectively - Specify the server to use
use this add-on tool. - Set parameters
• The business benefit of this course is - Explain how and when to schedule
that System Administrators will acquire reports
a foundation for effectively managing NOTES
the SharePoint Portal Integration Kit. • Course length: 2-3 hours
CONTENT • Additional education not applicable
• Portal Integration Kit Installation • Certification not applicable
- Explain the purpose of SharePoint
- Describe portal server architecture
- Define portals, portlets and portal
integration kits
- Install the Portal Integration Kit for
SharePoint
• Portal Integration Kit Configuration
- Review and update the web.config file
for SharePoint
www.sap.nl/education 395
Business Objects
Business Intelligence – Crystal Reports XI R2

BOC210 BOC220 BOC230

RD110R2 - Crystal RD210R2 - Crystal RD310R2 - Crystal
Reports: Report Design I - Reports: Report Design II - Reports: Report Design III -
Fundamentals of Report Business Reporting Report Processing
BOC245
Design Solutions Strategies
2 days 2 days 1 day RD410eR2 - Crystal Business Objects
Reports: Report Design IV Certified Professional
- Optimizing Report Data - Crystal Reports
BOC215 BOC225 BOC235
8 hours
RD110eR2 - Crystal RD210eR2 - Crystal RD310eR2 - Crystal
Reports: Report Design I - Reports: Report Design II - Reports: Report Desig III -
Fundamentals of Report Business Reporting Report Processing
Design Solutions Strategies
12 hours 12 hours 6 hours

BOK106 BOK126
DV300rwR2 - Java DV301rwR2 - Crystal
Reporting Component Reports .NET SDK:
SDK: SDK Training SDK Training Starter Kit
Starter Kit
9 hours 9 hours

BOC266 BOC275 BOC285 BOC295

RD500rwR2 - Crystal BU330eR2 - Crystal BU410eR2 - Crystal DM210eR2 -
Reports XI R2: New Reports Explorer: Reports Reporting BusinessObjects Data
Features Essentials for Business Essentials for Business Essentials
Users Users
0,3 hours 11 hours 6 hours 4 hours

BOC105 BOC115 BOC125 BOC135 BOC145

RD311e - Crystal Reports: RD420e - Crystal Reports: DM330e - RD313e - Crystal Reports: BU410e - Crystal Reports
Creating and Using SQL Creating Complex BusinessObjects: SQL Reporting from OLAP Data XI: Reporting Essentials for
Commands Formulas Commands Sources Business Users
4 hours
4 hours 4 hours 4 hours 4 hours

396
Business Objects
Business Intelligence – Crystal Reports XI R2
BOC105 · RD311e - Crystal Reports: Creating and Using SQL Commands
DURATION 4 hours PRICE € 144 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• This course is designed for report
designers, who have taken CR: Report
Design I – Fundamentals of Report
Design, CR: Report Design II – Business
Reporting, CR: Report Design III –
Report Processing Strategies and RD IV
– Optimizing Report Data and who are
responsible for creating and distributing
reports.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
You must already able to:
• Understand and use Windows
conventions
• Understand basic database concepts
• Understand concepts taught in
Associate level course
• This course builds on concepts from
CR: Report Design I – Fundamentals of
Report Design, CR: Report Design II –
Business Reporting Solutions, CR:
Report Design III – Report Processing
Strategies and RD IV – Optimizing
Report Data. Therefore it is important
that learners have a solid understanding
of the concepts taught at that level.
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This four-hour E-learning courseis
designed to give learners comprehensive
skills and in-depth knowledge to create
and use SQL Commands for reporting
efficiency.
• The Crystal Reports: Creating and
Using SQL Commands - is an elective
course in the Crystal Reports Certified
Professional (CRCP) certification.
• After completing the course, learners
will be able to:
- Describe SQL and Crystal Reports
- Use SQL Commands to create Crystal
Reports
- Enhance Reports Using SQL
Commands
CONTENT
• Describe SQL and Crystal Reports
- Define SQL
- Describe how SQL is used in Crystal
Reports
- Use a SQL Command
- Define a SQL Command
- Describe Server-side processing
- Compare Stored Procedures and SQL
Commands
- Create a SQL Command
• How Crystal Reports Uses SQL
Commands
- Save a SQL Command to the Repository
- Add a commands field to a report
- Modifying a SQL Command
- Create a parameter in a SQL Command
- Modify a parameter in a SQL Command
- Add tables to a report based on a
parameter
• Enhance Reports Using SQL
Commands
- Report from Multiple SQL Commands
- Create a Dynamic Top N Report
- Combining Fields From Multiple Tables
- Set Location from Multiple Tables to a
SQL Command
NOTES
• Certification Applicability
- The Crystal Reports: Creating and
Using SQL Commands course is an
elective course in the Crystal Reports
Certified Professional (CRCP)
certification.
www.sap.nl/education 397
Business Objects
Business Intelligence – Crystal Reports XI R2

BOC115 · RD420e - Crystal Reports: Creating Complex Formulas

DURATION 4 hours PRICE € 135 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP GOALS - PV function

• This course is designed for report • This four-hour E-learning course is - NPer function
designers, who have taken designed to teach learners how to create - Pmt function
- RD110/RD110e and apply complex formulas for - PPmt function
- RD210/RD210e finance. • Determine interest paid (Learn to
- RD310/RD310e and • Existing Crystal Reports functions are apply:)
• for report designers wanting to optimize used. - ACCRINT function
reports for faster and more efficient • After completing the course, learners - ACCRINTM function
data processing. will be able to: - CumIPMT function
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED - Determine depreciation of an asset - ISPMT function
In this course you will be working - Determine compound interest • Determine yield on investment (Learn
intensively with Crystal Reports formulas - Determine interest paid to apply:)
and functions. To successfully understand - Determine yield on an investment - Yield function
the content and complete the activities, CONTENT - YieldDisc function
you must already be able to: • Determine depreciation of an asset - YieldMat function
• Understand financial areas such as (Learn to apply:) NOTES
depreciation and interest calculations - DB function • Topics on CR: Creating Complex
• Design reports to a level equivalent to - DDB function Formulas for Finance use and build on
Report Design I and II - SLN function concepts from RD110/RD110e,
• Understand Crystal Reports formula - SYD function RD210/RD210e and RD310/ RD310e,
syntax • Determine compound interest (Learn to therefore it is important that learners
• Understand client-server data apply:) have a solid understanding of the
processing environments at a basic level - FV function concepts taught at that level.
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None - FVSchedule function

398
Business Objects
Business Intelligence – Crystal Reports XI R2
BOC125 · DM330e - BusinessObjects: SQL Commands
DURATION 4 hours PRICE € 225 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• This course is designed for report
designers, who have taken Crystal
Reports XI: Report Design I –
Fundamentals of Report Design, Crystal
Reports XI: Report Design II - Business
Reporting Solutions, Crystal Reports
XI: Report Design III - Report
Processing Strategies, and Crystal
Reports XI: Report Design IV -
Optimizing Report Data and who are
responsible for creating and distributing
reports.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
In this course you will be working
intensively with Crystal Reports. To
successfully understand the content and
complete the activities, you must already
able to:
• Understand and use Windows
conventions
• Understand basic database concepts
• Understand concepts taught in
Associate level course
Topics in BusinessObjects XI: SQL
Commands build on concepts from
Crystal Reports XI: Report Design I –
Fundamentals of Report Design, Crystal
Reports XI: Report Design II - Business
Reporting Solutions, Crystal Reports XI:
Report Design III - Report Processing
Strategies, and Crystal Reports XI: Report
Design IV - Optimizing Report Data. It is
therefore very important that learners
have a solid understanding of the
concepts taught at that level before
enrolling in this course.
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This course is designed to teach learners
how to efficiently produce reports with
heightened functionality and more
robust data connectivity by using SQL
Commands in Crystal Reports.
• This course is not intended to teach
users the SQL Language. Although
some of the language's basic syntax is
discussed, additional resources should
be sought for further instruction in the
SQL language.
• After completing the course, learners
will be able to:
- Describe SQL and Crystal Reports
- Use SQL Commands to create Crystal
Reports
- Enhance Reports Using SQL
Commands
CONTENT
• SQL and reporting with Crystal Reports
- Writing an SQL statement
- Using the SQL Query window
- Using Crystal Reports as an SQL
Authoring tool
- Creating a basic SQL Command
• How Crystal Reports uses SQL
Commands
- Saving an SQL Command to the
repository
- Adding SQL Command fields to a
report
- Modifying an SQL Command
- Adding a parameter in an SQL
Command
- Selecting tables using an SQL parameter
• Enhancing reports using SQL
Command Records
- Reporting from multiple SQL
Commands
- Creating a dynamic TopN report
- Combining fields from multiple tables
- Setting the location to an SQL
Command
NOTES
• Certification not applicable
www.sap.nl/education 399
Business Objects
Business Intelligence – Crystal Reports XI R2
BOC135 · RD313e - Crystal Reports: Reporting from OLAP Data Sources
DURATION 4 hours PRICE € 144 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audiences for this course are
report designers and business analysts.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
Working knowledge of:
• Microsoft Windows
• Reporting from relational databases in
Crystal Reports
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This four-hour E-learning course gives
students the skills and knowledge
required to report from OLAP data
using Crystal Reports. The overall goal
of the Crystal Reports: Reporting from
OLAP Data Sources course is to enable
learners to quickly analyze OLAP data
by creating OLAP grid reports in Crystal
Reports.
BOC145 · BU410e - Crystal Reports XI: Reporting Essentials for Business Users
DURATION 4 hours PRICE € 180 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course are
novice report writers and business users
who need the basics of report design.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
Working knowledge of:
• Windows conventions
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This E-learning course is designed to
give learners an introduction to the
report creation process. Learners will
step through the entire report creation
cycle from planning a report to sharing
a report with other users.
• The business benefit of this course is a
quick start approach to the entire report
creation cycle from planning a report
prototype to distributing a report.
400
• The Crystal Reports: Reporting from
OLAP Data Sources course is an elective
course in the Crystal Reports Certified
Professional (CRCP) certification.
• After completing the course, learners
will be able to:
- Create an OLAP report
- Change the view of the data
- Add calculations to the report
- Conditionally format the report
CONTENT
• Creating an OLAP Report
- Define OLAP and OLAP terminology
- Create a basic OLAP report
- Modify the report to include a chart,
multiple pages, and a parameter
• Changing the View of the Data
- Sort members
- Filter members
- Show and hide members
• After completing the course, learners
will be able to:
- Create a report
- Modify a report
- Distribute a report
CONTENT
• Creating a Report
- Planning a report
- Creating a report using a Report Wizard
- Navigating the report design
environment
- Previewing a report
- Saving a report
• Modifying a Report
- Adding and formatting a report title
- Adding and formatting additional
objects
- Sorting records
- Modifying groups of records
- Add automatic totals
- Reorder members
• Adding Calculations
- Create calculations using the
Calculation Expert
- Create a simple custom calculation
• Formatting OLAP Reports
- Apply conditional formatting using the
Highlighting Expert
- Apply conditional formatting using the
Format Formula Editor
NOTES
• Certification Applicability
- The Crystal Reports: Reporting from
OLAP Data Sources course is an elective
course in the Crystal Reports Certified
Professional (CRCP) certification.
- Summarizing data
- Modifying a chart
- Modifying the record selection
- Analyzing data
- Checking the layout of a report
• Distributing a Report
- Printing a report
- Exporting a report to Microsoft Excel
- Exporting a report to Microsoft Word
- Saving a report to BusinessObjects
Enterprise
- Viewing a report in an Enterprise folder
- Viewing a report in BusinessObjects
Enterprise
NOTES
• Certification not applicable
Business Objects
Business Intelligence – Crystal Reports XI R2
BOC210 · RD110R2 - Crystal Reports: Report Design I - Fundamentals of Report Design
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 940 STARTING DATES 13-jan-09, 14-apr-09
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
report designers, new to Crystal
Reports, who are responsible for
creating and distributing reports.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
Working knowledge of:
• Windows conventions
• Basic database concepts
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This two-day instructor led classroom
course is designed to give you
comprehensive skills and in-depth
knowledge to plan and create reports
that will help you analyze and interpret
information using Crystal Reports.
• As a business benefit, you will find that
this course is an in-depth approach to
the entire report creation cycle from
planning a report prototype to
distributing a report.
CONTENT
• Planning a Report
- Defining database concepts
- Planning and developing a report
prototype
• Creating a Report
- Connecting to a data source
- Adding tables
- The design environment
- Inserting objects on a report
- Previewing and saving a report
- Positioning and sizing objects
- Formatting objects
• Selecting Records
- Defining the Select Expert
- Determining the record selection
criteria
- Defining saved and refreshed data
- Applying and modifying record
selection criteria
- Applying time-based record selection
• Organizing Data on a Report
- Sorting records
- Grouping records
- Summarizing data
• Formatting a Report
- Adding graphical elements
- Combining text objects with database
fields
- Applying specialized formatting
- Inserting fields with pre-built functions
• Applying Section Formatting
- Formatting sections
- Creating a summary report
• Creating Basic Formulas
- Defining formulas
- Creating formulas
- Applying Boolean formulas, If-Then-
Else formulas, date calculations number
calculations, and string manipulation
• Applying Conditional Reporting
- Determining trends in data
- Formatting data conditionally
• Representing Data Visually
- Creating a chart
• Distributing a Report
- Exporting a report
- Saving a report to BusinessObjects
Enterprise
NOTES
• Recommended additional education:
- Report Design II - Business Reporting
Solutions
- Report Design III - Report Processing
Strategies
• Applicable certification
- This course is a core course in the
Business Objects Certified Professional -
Crystal Reports certification.
www.sap.nl/education 401
Business Objects
Business Intelligence – Crystal Reports XI R2
BOC220 · RD210R2 - Crystal Reports: Report Design II - Business Reporting Solutions
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 940 STARTING DATES 15-jan-09, 16-apr-09
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
report designers who are responsible for
creating and distributing reports and
have completed Crystal Reports XI
R1/R2 Report Design I - Fundamentals
of Report Design.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• Crystal Reports XI R1/R2: Report
Design I - Fundamentals of Report
Design
Working knowledge of:
• Windows conventions
• Basic database concepts
• Experience using Web Browser
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This course is designed to give you
comprehensive skills and in-depth
knowledge to plan and create reports
that will help you analyze and interpret
information using Crystal Reports.
• As a business benefit, you will be able to
increase your understanding of
formulas, variables, arrays, templates,
parameters, summaries, and sections,
which will help you make more
effective report design decisions and
create more efficient reports.
402
CONTENT
• Report Creation Review
- Using your Crystal Reports knowledge
• Using the Repository
- Using the repository
- Creating a report from a repository data
source
• Creating Formulas
- Using functions and operators
- Defining control structures available in
Crystal Reports Syntax
• Managing Reports
- Using the workbench
- Publishing reports to BusinessObjects
Enterprise
• Using Variables and Arrays
- Using variables
- Using arrays
• Building Parameterized Reports
- Defining and creating parameters
- Building a report with multiple
parameters
- Using edit masks and descriptions
- Creating a data range parameter
- Grouping using parameters
• Using Report Templates
- Applying report templates
- Building a template without a data
source
- Removing a template
• Summarizing Data with Cross-Tabs
- Building a basic cross-tab
- Formatting a cross-tab
• Using Report Sections
- Using sections
- Using group related functions to format
sections
- Using section underlay
- Using multiple column reporting
• Building Specialized Reports
- Using the Running Total Expert
- Creating a form letter
- Adding a hyperlink to a report
- Using Dynamic Graphic Locations
- Building a report with alerts
- Building a top N report
NOTES
• Recommended additional education:
- Crystal Reports XI R1/R2: Report
Design III - Report Processing Strategies
- Crystal Reports XI R1/R2: Report
Design IV - Optimizing Report Data
• Applicable certification
- This course is a core course in the
Business Objects Certified Professional:
Crystal Reports XI certification.
Business Objects
Business Intelligence – Crystal Reports XI R2
BOC230 · RD310R2 - Crystal Reports: Report Design III - Report Processing Strategies
DURATION 1 day PRICE € 470 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
report designers who have taken Crystal
Reports XI R1/R2:
- Report Design I - Fundamentals of
Report Design and Crystal Reports XI
R1/R2: Report Design II
- Business Reporting Solutions, and are
responsible for creating and distributing
reports.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• Crystal Reports XI R1/R2: Report
Design I - Fundamentals of Report
Design
• Crystal Reports XI R1/R2: Report
Design II - Business Reporting Solutions
In this course, you will be working
intensively with Crystal Reports. To
successfully understand the content and
complete the activities, you must have:)
• Knowledge of Windows conventions
• Basic computer skills
• Experience using a web browser
• Basic database concepts
• Knowledge of concepts taught in the
Associate level course
Topics in Report Design III build on
concepts from Report Design I and
Report Design II, therefore it is importan t
that learners have a solid understanding
of the concepts taught at that level.
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This one-day instructor led classroom
course is designed to give you the
comprehensive skills and in-depth
knowledge required to plan and create
reports that will help you analyze and
interpret important information.
• As a business benefit, you will find that
your increased understanding of report
processing, formulas, custom functions
and subreports will help you make
more effective report design decisions
and create more efficient reports.
CONTENT
• Describing Report Processing
- Describing multipass reporting
- Using evaluation time functions
- Using a dynamic array
• Using Subreports
- Defining subreports
- Creating an unlinked subreport, a
linked subreport, and an on-deman
subreport
- Using shared variables in a subreport
- Using subreports to link 'unlinkable'
data
• Creating complex formulas
- Creating complex formulas
- Using loop control structures
- Using arrays functions and loops
- Using nested functions
• Using Custom Functions
- Creating custom functions
- Using custom functions
- Modifying custom functions
NOTES
• Recommended additional education:
- Crystal Reports XI R1/R2: Report
Design IV - Optimizing Report Data
• Applicable certification
- This is a core course in the Business
Objects Certified Professional: Crystal
Reports XI certification
www.sap.nl/education 403
Business Objects
Business Intelligence – Crystal Reports XI R2
BOC235 · RD310eR2 - Crystal Reports: Report Desig III - Report Processing Strategies
DURATION 6 hours PRICE € 225 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
report designers who have taken Crystal
Reports XI R1/R2: Report Design I -
Fundamentals of Report Design and
Crystal Reports XI R1/R2: Report
Design II - Business Reporting
Solutions, and are responsible for
creating and distributing reports.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• Crystal Reports XI R1/R2: Report
Design I - Fundamentals of Report
Design
• Crystal Reports XI R1/R2: Report
Design II - Business Reporting Solutions
In this course, you will be working
intensively with Crystal Reports. To
successfully understand the content and
complete the activities, you must have:
• Knowledge of Windows conventions
• Basic computer skills
• Experience using a web browser
• Basic database concepts
• Knowledge of concepts taught in the
Associate level course
404
Topics in Report Design IIII build on
concepts from Report Design II and
Report Design III, therefore it is important
that learners have a solid understanding
of the concepts taught at that level.
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This six-hour E-learning course is
designed to give you comprehensive
skills and in-depth knowledge to plan
and create reports that will help you
analyze and interpret important
information.
• As a business benefit, you will gain an
increased understanding of report
processing, formulas, custom functions,
and subreports that will help you make
more effective report design decisions
and create more efficient reports.
CONTENT
• Describing Report Processing
- Describing multipass reporting
- Using evaluation time functions
- Using a dynamic array
• Creating complex formulas
- Creating complex formulas
- Using loop control structures
- Using arrays functions and loops
- Using nested functions
• Using Custom Functions
- Creating custom functions
- Using custom functions
- Modifying custom functions
• Using Subreports
- Defining subreports
- Creating an unlinked subreport, a
linked subreport, and an on- demand
subreport
- Using shared variables in a subreport
- Using subreports to link 'unlinkable'
data
NOTES
• Recommended additional education:
- Crystal Reports XI R1/R2: Report
Design IV - Optimizing Report Data
• Applicable certification
- This is a core course in the Business
Objects Certified Professional: Crystal
Reports XI certification.
 Business Objects
Business Intelligence – Crystal Reports XI R2
BOC245 · RD410eR2 - Crystal Reports: Report Design IV - Optimizing Report Data
DURATION 8 hours PRICE € 225 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
report designers with strong report
design skills.
• This course will teach you to optimize
reports for faster and more efficient
data processing
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
To be successful, you must have attended
thefollowing offerings or have the
equivalent knowledge of:
• Crystal Reports XI R1/R2: Report
Design I - Fundamentals of Report
• Design
• Crystal Reports XI R1/R2: Report
Design II - Business Reporting
• Solutions
• Crystal Reports XI R1/R2: Report
Design III - Report Processing
• Strategies
In this course, you will be working
intensively with Crystal Reports. To
successfully understand the content and
complete the activities, you must have:
• Knowledge of basic database concepts
• Knowledge of basic SQL concepts
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
BOC266 · RD500rwR2 - Crystal Reports XI R2: New Features
DURATION 0,3 hours PRICE € 112 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
Crystal Reports users who want to learn
about the new features available in
Crystal Reports XI R2.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• Experience using Crystal Reports XI
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This 20-minute webinar is designed to
give an understanding of the new
features in Crystal Reports XI R2.
CONTENT
• Saving and Moving Files
- Saving and moving files and folders
from Crystal Reports in Enterprise
GOALS
• This eight-hour eLearning course is
designed to teach you how to set up,
configure, and maintain data
connections for reports.
• You will learn how to link data,
optimize reports, and push processing
to the database server.
• As an established report designer within
your company, you will gain a more
advanced understanding of data
connectivity within the Crystal
Reports® environment
CONTENT
• Exploring the Database Expert
- Accessing the database expert
- Adding and removing data sources
- Using options in the database expert
- Using the data tab
- Using the links tab
• Identifying the Effects of Link Types
- Define links and joins
- Inner joins, left outer joins, right outer
joins, full outer joins
- Syntax differences between databases
- Joining different data types
• Setting Up and Configuring Data
Sources
- Native connections
• Formulas and Summaries
- Using the Find in Formulas, Duplicate
and Find in Field explorer options
- Add Summaries to all group levels
- Using the Auto complete in Formula
Editor
• Customization
- Reusing custom colours
- Using the Width formula control
• Crosstabs
- Dragging and dropping fields in and out
of crosstabs
• Exporting
- Using the Export Group outlines when
working with MS Excel
- Using the Group Tree feature when
exporting to PDF
- ODBC connections
- OLE connections
- Configuring ODBC
- Setting up data sources to Microsoft
Access and Microsoft SQL Serve
• Updating Reports for Database Changes
- Setting the data source location
- Mapping database fields
- Verifying the database
• Processing Data on the Server
- Optimizing record selection
- Using SQL expressions
- Performing grouping on a server
• Validating the Report Data
- NULL values in reports
- NULL values in formulas and record
selection
- Confirming the report data
• Detecting and Fixing Problems
- Finding resources to fix issues
- Using utilities to diagnose issues
- Getting additional help to resolve issues
NOTES
• Additional education not applicable
• Applicable certification
- This course is a course in the Business
Objects Certified Professional program:
Crystal Reports XI.
- Using the Saved Export Options after
saving or Publishing to Enterprise
• Searching
- Using the Search feature in the HTML
viewer for finding specific words in
Main and Sub reports
NOTES
• Course length: 20 minutes
• Additional education not applicable
• Certification not applicable
www.sap.nl/education 405
 Business Objects
Business Intelligence – Crystal Reports XI R2
BOC275 · BU330eR2 - Crystal Reports Explorer: Essentials for Business Users
DURATION 11 hours PRICE € 180 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
users who access Crystal Reports
Explorer through InfoView to create
and modify ad hoc reports.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED
• Experience with Microsoft Internet
Explorer
• Familiarity with BusinessObjects
Enterprise, Business Views, and Crystal
Reports
GOALS
• This seven- to 15-hour E-learning
course is designed to give you the skills
and knowledge required to access,
analyze, and share corporate data using
Business Objects InfoView, the portal to
BusinessObjects Enterprise XI R2, as
well as create and modify reports using
Crystal Reports Explorer.
• You should take this course to learn
how to create ad hoc reports using
Crystal Reports Explorer and save these
ad hoc reports to the BusinessObjects
Enterprise system.
406
• The business benefit of this course is
that you will be able to efficiently and
effectively use Crystal Reports Explorer
to create ad hoc reports.
CONTENT
• Introduction
- Navigating the E-learning course
• Getting Started with InfoView
- Logging on and navigating through
InfoView
- Exporting and saving documents
- Setting general preferences
- Creating a dashboard with My InfoView
- Creating and modifying folders and
categories
- Copying and moving folders and
documents
- Creating shortcuts to documents
- Deleting documents, folders, and
categories
- Accessing documents and sharing
documents with others
- Using discussions
- Adding documents from a local drive
- Creating hyperlink
• Using Crystal Reports Explorer
- Accessing Crystal Reports Explorer
- Navigating the Create Report page
- Setting user preferences
• Defining Data Sources
- Explaining data concepts
- Selecting a data source
- Adding and modifying fields
- Adding groups
- Filtering records
- Working with formulas, components,
and syntax
- Adding summaries
- Sorting records, groups, and summaries
- Saving your query
- Defining data sources activity
• Formatting reports
- Designing a report
- Working with text objects, report
objects and fields
- Applying formatting options
- Formatting sections
- Adding or deleting charts
- Using templates
NOTES
• Course length: 7-15 hours
• Recommended additional education:
- Crystal Reports XI R2: Essentials
• Certification not applicable
Business Objects
Business Intelligence – Crystal Reports XI R2
BOC285 · BU410eR2 - Crystal Reports Reporting Essentials for Business Users
DURATION 6 hours PRICE € 180 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
business users and report designers who
want to quickly analyze OLAP data by
creating basic multidimensional reports
in OLAP Intelligence.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This four-to-eight-hour E-learning
course gives you the skills and
knowledge required to create and
format an analytic report using Business
Objects OLAP Intelligence.
• It also introduces using calculations and
working with OLAP data in Microsoft
Excel.
• You should take this course to learn
how to create analytic reports, enabling
you to gain insight into your business
data and make decisions that impact
corporate performance.
• You will also learn techniques for
filtering data based on actual values,
ranking, and contribution as well as
highlighting values and exceptions.
• By analyzing various views of the data,
BOC295 · DM210eR2 - BusinessObjects Data Essentials
DURATION 4 hours PRICE € 180 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course are
Reports Designers and System
Administrators who want to
understand data concepts and how data
is used within BusinessObjects
applications.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This E-learning offering will introduce
you to data concepts and how data is
used within BusinessObject XI.
• By the end of the course you will
understand the data lifecycle from a
database to a report.
• This includes sources of data, forms of
data and ways of manipulating data in
BusinessObjects applications.
you will be able to answer business
questions interactively when swapping
and stacking dimensions to obtain the
information specific to your needs.
• The business benefits of this course is
that novice users will be able to create
powerful, customized OLAP reports for
analyzing the performance of their
businesses.
• Report designers will be able to design
reports that are easy to use, and that
take advantage of guided analysis and
formatting to make it easier to analyze
data.
CONTENT
• Introduction
- Navigating the E-learning course
- What's new with OLAP Intelligence
• Creating an Analytic Report
- Connecting to an offline (local) and an
online cube
- Swapping and stacking dimensions
- Using the Member Selector
- Adding and removing favorite group
members
- Hiding and reactivating dimensions
- Setting the initial view of data
• The business benefit of this course is
that it provides a common language for
Reports Designers and System
Administrators to communicate with
Data Managers in their organization.
Enabling this communication increases
an organization’s business intelligence
potential through effective reporting
and administration.
CONTENT
• Types of Data
- Define a database
- Identify different database types
- Describe various database objects
- Name different data sources
• Working with Data
- Describe different types of data
connections
- Explain how data can be manipulated
- Formatting data
- Excluding null values
- Changing member captions and caption
modes
- Working with charts
• Formatting Reports
- Sorting a member
- Filtering by actual value, ranking, and
contribution
- Focusing on specific data
- Working with data symmetry
- Highlighting values and exceptions
- Using analysis buttons
- Using parameters
• Creating Calculations
- Adding basic and statistical calculations
• Analyzing with Microsoft Excel
- Selecting dynamic or static view
- Exporting data from OLAP Intelligence
and BusinessObjects Enterprise
- Working with OLAP data in Microsoft
Excel
NOTES
• Course length: 4-8 hours
• Additional education not applicable
• Certification not applicable
using SQL
• Semantic Layer
- Understand the concept of the semantic
layer
- Define the BusinessObjects applications
that form the semantic laye
- Understand the architecture of the
BusinessObjects applications tha form
the semantic layer
• Data Integration
- Understand data integration issues
- Understand how BusinessObjects
resolves data integration issues
Americas
NOTES
• Additional education not applicable
• Certification not applicable
www.sap.nl/education 407
Business Objects
Business Intelligence – Crystal Reports XI R2
BOK106 · DV300rwR2 - Java Reporting Component SDK: SDK Training Starter Kit
DURATION 9 hours PRICE € 450 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course are
application developers who will use the
Java Reporting Component SDK to
build and integrate report functionality
into web or thick client applications.
• This course is also suitable for system
analysts or software architects who wish
to gain an understanding of the
capabilities of the Java Reporting
Component SDK for system integration
or application development.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• Crystal Reports XI R1/R2: Report
Design I – Fundamentals of Report
Design
Working knowledge of:
• Object Oriented Programming
Concepts
• Java and JSP Programming
• Fundamental Crystal Reports Design
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This nine-hour SDK Training Starter
Kit is designed to give you an
introduction to the capabilities of the
Java Reporting Component SDK and
the basic skills to use the SDK to build
custom reporting applications.
• As a business benefit, you will be able to
increase your understanding of the Java
Reporting Component SDK which will
help guide your planning for
integrating reporting functionality into
408
web or thick client applications.
CONTENT
• Module 1: Introduction to the Java
Reporting Component SDK
• SDK Overview
- All the Business Objects SDKs available
for XI R2
- The capabilities of the Java Reporting
Component SDK
• Java Reporting Component
Architecture
- The architecture of the Java Reporting
Component SDK
- The ReportClientDocument Object
Model
- CrystalReportViewer Object
• Getting Started with the Java Reporting
Component SDK
- Installing and configuring the Java
Reporting Component SDK
- Viewing a report using the Viewer Tag
Library
- Writing code to view a report using the
CrystalReportViewer Object Module 2:
Data Source Connectivity
• Data Connectivity Fundamentals
- Different types of report data sources
- Data connectivity models: Pull vs Push
- The important classes for data
connectivity
- Writing code to connect to a secure data
source using JDBC
• Advanced Data Connectivity
- The advantages and disadvantages of
using Plain Old Java Objects
- Implementing the Push model using
Plain Old Java Objects Module 3: Using
Parameters and Filtering Data
• Programming with Discrete Parameters
- Describe the common use of parameters
in programming filtered reports
- Write code to filter data using discrete
parameters
• Programming with Range Parameters
and Subreports
- Write code to filter subreport data using
a discrete
- Write code to filter data using a range
parameter
NOTES
• Recommended additional education:
- Crystal Reports .NET SDK: SDK
Training Starter Kit
- Web Services .NET SDK: SDK Training
Starter Kit
• Delivery & Duration
- This starter kit is approximately nine
hours in duration and is delivered with
recorded lessons and self-study
activities. In order to complete the
hands-on activities, you must follow the
computer setup guide, and install the
necessary software and activity files.
• Certification not applicable
Business Objects
Business Intelligence – Crystal Reports XI R2
BOK126 · DV301rwR2 - Crystal Reports .NET SDK: SDK Training Starter Kit
DURATION 9 hours PRICE € 450 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course are
application developers who will use the
Crystal Reports .NET SDK to build and
integrate report functionality into web
or Windows applications.
• This course is also suitable for system
analysts or software architects who wish
to gain an understanding of how to set
parameters or record selection formulas
in code using the Crystal Reports .NET
SDK for systems integration or
application development.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• Crystal Reports XI R1/R2: Report
Design I – Fundamentals of Report
Design
Working knowledge of:
• Object Oriented Programming
Concepts
• Visual Basic or C#
• Fundamental Crystal Reports Design
• Visual Studio 2003/2005
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This nine-hour SDK Training Starter
Kit is designed to give you an
introduction to the capabilities of the
Crystal Reports .NET SDK to build
custom reporting applications and the
basic skills to use the SDK to build
custom reporting applications.
• As a business benefit, you will be able to
increase your understanding of the
Crystal Reports .NET SDK which will
help guide your planning for
integrating reporting functionality into
web or Windows client applications.
CONTENT
• Module 1: Introduction to the Crystal
Reports .NET SDK
• SDK Overview
- All BusinessObjects SDKs available for
XI R2
- Capabilities of the Crystal Report .NET
SDK
- Differences between the Crystal Reports
.NET object models
• Getting Started with Crystal Reports
.NET SDK
- Setting-up a new Crystal Reports
project in Visual Studio 2005
- Using Smart Tasks and configuring
.NET controls and Crystal Report
controls
- Setting-up code behind classes for
writing custom code
- Connecting to report sources and
secure data sources Module 2: Data
Source Connectivity
• Data Source Connectivity
- Different types of report data sources
- Data connectivity models: Pull vs. Push
- The important classes for data
connectivity
- Writing code to connect to a secure data
source
• The Push Model and DataSets
- The advantages and disadvantages of
using ADO .NET DataSets
- Implementing the Push model using
ADO .NET DataSets
- Optimizing performance and scalability
using ADO .NET DataSets
- Push model case study Module 3: Using
Parameters and Filtering Data
• Programming with Selection Formulas
- Describe the common use of record
selection formulas in programming
filtered reports.
- Write code to filter data using a record
selection formula.
• Programming with Parameters
- Describe the common use of parameters
in programming filtered reports.
- Write code to filter data using discrete
parameters.
- Understand and compare the
advantages and disadvantages of using
parameters versus record selection
formulas.
NOTES
• Recommended additional education:
- Java Report Component SDK: SDK
Training Starter Kit
- Web Services .NET SDK: SDK Training
Starter Kit
• Delivery & Duration
- This starter kit is approximately nine
hours in duration and is delivered with
recorded lessons and self-study
activities. In order to complete the
hands-on activities, you must follow the
computer setup guide, and install the
necessary software and activity files.
• Certification not applicable
www.sap.nl/education 409
Business Objects
Business Intelligence - Crystal Reports 2008

BOC310 BOC320 BOC330

RD11008 - Crystal Reports
2008: Report Design I -
Fundamentals of Report
Design
2 days
RD21008 - Crystal Reports RD31008 - Crystal Reports
2008: Report Design II - 2008: Report Design III -
Business Reporting Report Processing
Solutions Strategies
2 days 1 day

BOC315 BOC325 BOC335 BOC345 BusinessObjects

RD110e08 - Crystal
Reports 2008: Report
Design I - Fundamentals of
Report Design
10 hours
RD21008e - Crystal
Reports 2008: Report
Design II - Business
Reporting Solutions
10 hours
Certified Professional -
RD310e08 - Crystal Crystal Reports 2008: Crystal Reports 2008
Reports 2008: Report Report Design IV -
Design III - Report Optimizing Report Data
Processing Strategies
7 hours 8 hours

BOC305
RD100e08 -
Crystal Reports 2008:
Quickstart

5 hours

BOC305 · RD100e08 - Crystal Reports 2008: Quickstart

DURATION 5 hours PRICE € 225 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP CONTENT - Describe the advanced report publishing

• The target audience for this course is
learners who want to understand the
new features and functionality
enhancements of Crystal Reports 2008.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
Working knowledge of:
• Crystal Reports at an intermediate level
• Windows conventions
• Basic database conventions
• Experience using a web browser
• Advanced Information Visualization
- Describe and use Adobe Flash in Crystal
reports
- Describe the integration with Xcelsius
- Describe the integration with Adobe
Flex applications
• Improved Report Viewing Experience
- Describe and use interactive parameters
- Describe how multilingual support
affects report design
options
• Flexible Application Integration
- Describe how Salesforce.com data is
integrated with Crystal Reports 2008
- Describe and use web services
• Changes to Crystal Reports 2008
Components
- Describe what's different in Crystal
Reports 2008 from the previous lesson
NOTES

PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This three- to six-hour E-learning
course is designed to give learners an
overview of the new features and
functionality enhancements in Crystal
Reports 2008.
• The new features and functionality
improvements include advanced
information visualization, improved
end-user report viewing experience,
enhanced report designer productivity,
new flexible deployment options, and
flexible application integration as well as
the changes to certain components of
Crystal Reports.
• The business benefit of this course is
that learners will be able to describe and
use the new features of Crystal Reports
2008.
- Describe the prompting improvements • Course length: 3-6 hours
- Describe the viewer improvements • Additional education not applicable
- Describe how Report Designer Add-ins • Applicable certification
work - This is a recommended course in the
- Describe and use the set data source Business Objects Certified Professional -
location feature for universes Crystal Reports 2008 certification.
- Describe the web pagination
improvements
• Improved Report Designer Productivity
- Describe the added functionality when
using barcodes in Crystal Reports
- Describe and use calculated members in
a crosstab
- Describe the improvements in
hyperlinking
- Describe and use sort controls
• Flexible Deployment Options
- Describe how to save a report to
crystalreports.com
- Describe and use XML exporting

410
 Business Objects
Business Intelligence - Crystal Reports 2008
BOC310 · RD11008 - Crystal Reports 2008: Report Design I - Fundamentals of Report Design
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 940 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
report designers, new to Crystal
Reports, who are responsible for
creating and distributing reports.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
Working knowledge of:
• Windows conventions
• Basic database concepts
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• Crystal Reports 2008 is a powerful,
dynamic, actionable reporting solution
that helps you design, explore, visualize,
and deliver reports via the web or
embedded in enterprise applications.
• This two-day instructor-led course is
designed to give you comprehensive
skills and in-depth knowledge to plan
and create reports that will help you
analyze and interpret information.
• As a business benefit, you will find that
this course is an in-depth approach to
the entire report creation cycle from
planning a report prototype to
distributing a report.
CONTENT
• Planning a Report
- Define database concepts
- Plan and develop a report prototype
• Creating a Report
- Create a report
- Add tables
- Describe the design environment
- Insert objects on a report
- Preview a report
- Save a report
- Position and size objects
- Format objects
• Selecting Records
- Define the Select Expert
- Determine the criteria for record
selection
- Understanding saved and refreshed data
- Apply record selection
- Apply additional record selection
criteria
- Modify record selection
- Apply time-based record selection
• Organizing Data on a Report
- Sort records
- Group records
- Summarize data
• Formatting a Report
- Add graphical elements
- Combine text objects with database
fields
- Apply specialized formatting
- Insert fields with pre-built functions
• Applying Section Formatting
- Format sections
- Create a summary report
• Creating Basic Formulas
- Define a formula and its purpose
- Create formulas
- Apply Boolean formulas
- Apply If-Then-Else formulas
- Apply date calculations
- Apply number calculations
- Apply string manipulation
• Applying Conditional Reporting
- Determine trends in data
- Format data conditionally
• Representing Data Visually
- Create a chart
• Distributing a Report
- Export a report
- Save a report to BusinessObjects
Enterprise
• Using the Repository
- Use the repository
- Create a report from a repository data
source
• Creating Formulas
- Use functions and operators
- Define control structures available in
Crystal Reports Syntax
• Managing Reports
- Use the Workbench
- Publish reports to BusinessObjects
Enterprise
• Using Variables and Arrays
- Use variables
- Use arrays
• Using Report Templates
- Apply report templates
- Build a template without a data source
- Remove a template
• Building Parameterized Reports
- Define and create parameters
- Build a report with multiple parameters
- Use edit masks and descriptions
- Create a date range parameter
- Group using parameters
• Summarizing Data with Crosstabs
- Build a basic crosstab
- Format a crosstab
• Using Report Sections
- Use sections
- Use group related functions to format
sections
- Use section underlay
- Use multiple-column reporting
• Building Specialized Reports
- Use the Running Total Expert
- Create a form letter
- Add a hyperlink to a report
- Use Dynamic Graphic Locations
- Build a report with alerts
- Build a top N report
- Integrate an Xcelsius Flash SWF into a
Crystal report
NOTES
• Recommended additional education:
- Crystal Reports 2008: Report Design II -
Business Reporting Solutions
- Crystal Reports 2008: Report Design III -
Report Processing Strategies
• Applicable certification
- This is a recommended course for the
Business Objects Certified Professional -
Crystal Reports certification
• Check out www.businessobjects.com/
services/training for more details
www.sap.nl/education 411
Business Objects
Business Intelligence - Crystal Reports 2008
BOC315 · RD110e08 - Crystal Reports 2008: Report Design I - Fundamentals of Report Design
DURATION 10 hours PRICE € 450 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
report designers, new to Crystal
Reports, who are responsible for
creating and distributing reports.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
Working knowledge of:
• Windows conventions
• Basic database concepts
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This 8- to 12-hour E-learning course is
designed to give you comprehensive
skills and in-depth knowledge to plan
and create reports that will help you
analyze and interpret information.
• As a business benefit, you will find that
this course is an in-depth approach to
the entire report creation cycle from
planning a report prototype to
distributing a report.
CONTENT
• Planning a Report
- Define database concepts
- Plan and develop a report prototype
• Creating a Report
- Create a report
- Add tables
- Describe the design environment
- Insert objects on a report
412
- Preview a report
- Save a report
- Position and size objects
- Format objects
• Selecting Records
- Define the Select Expert
- Determine the criteria for record
selection
- Understanding saved and refreshed data
- Apply record selection
- Apply additional record selection
criteria
- Modify record selection
- Apply time-based record selection
• Organizing Data on a Report
- Sort records
- Group records
- Summarize data
• Formatting a Report
- Add graphical elements
- Combine text objects with database
fields
- Apply specialized formatting
- Insert fields with pre-built functions
- Applying Section Formatting
- Format sections
- Create a summary report
• Creating Basic Formulas
- Define a formula and its purpose
- Create formulas
- Apply Boolean formulas
- Apply If-Then-Else formulas
- Apply date calculations
- Apply number calculations
- Apply string manipulation
- Applying Conditional Reporting
- Determine trends in data
- Format data conditionally
• Representing Data Visually
- Create a chart
• Distributing Reports
- Export a report
- Saving a report to BusinessObjects
Enterprise
NOTES
• Course length: 8-12 hours
• Recommended additional education:
- Crystal Reports 2008: Report Design II -
Business Reporting Solutions
- Crystal Reports 2008: Report Design III -
Report Processing Strategies
• Applicable certification
- This is a recommended course in the
Business Objects Certified Professional:
Crystal Reports 2008 certification.
Business Objects
Business Intelligence - Crystal Reports 2008
BOC320 · RD21008 - Crystal Reports 2008: Report Design II - Business Reporting Solutions
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 940 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
report designers who are responsible for
creating and distributing reports and
have completed Crystal Reports 2008:
Report Design I - Fundamentals of
Report Design.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• You should have completed Crystal
Reports 2008: Report Design I -
Fundamentals of Report Design.
• If you have taken a previous version of
Report Design I - Fundamentals of
Report Design, then you should have
completed Crystal Reports 2008:
Quickstart.
Working knowledge of:
• Windows conventions
• Basic database concepts
• Experience using a web browser
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• Crystal Reports 2008 is a powerful,
dynamic, actionable reporting solution
that helps you design, explore, visualize,
and deliver reports via the web or
embedded in enterprise applications.
• This two-day instructor-led course is
designed to give you comprehensive
skills and in-depth knowledge to plan
and create reports that will help you
analyze and interpret information.
• As a business benefit, you will be able to
increase your understanding of
formulas, variables, arrays, templates,
parameters, summaries, and sections.
This course will also help you make
more effective report design decisions
and create more efficient reports.
CONTENT
• Using the Repository
- Use the repository
- Create a report from a repository data
source
• Creating Formulas
- Use functions and operators
- Define control structures available in
Crystal Reports Syntax
• Managing Reports
- Use the Workbench
- Publish reports to BusinessObjects
Enterprise
• Using Variables and Arrays
- Use variables
- Use arrays
• Using Report Templates
- Apply report templates
- Build a template without a data source
- Remove a template
• Building Parameterized Reports
- Define and create parameters
- Build a report with multiple parameters
- Use edit masks and descriptions
- Create a date range parameter
- Group using parameters
• Summarizing Data with Crosstabs
- Build a basic crosstab
- Format a crosstab
• Using Report Sections
- Use sections
- Use group related functions to format
sections
- Use section underlay
- Use multiple-column reporting
• Building Specialized Reports
- Use the Running Total Expert
- Create a form letter
- Add a hyperlink to a report
- Use Dynamic Graphic Locations
- Build a report with alerts
- Build a top N report
- Integrate an Xcelsius Flash SWF into a
Crystal report
NOTES
• Recommended additional education:
- Crystal Reports 2008: Report Design III -
Report Processing Strategies
- Crystal Reports 2008: Report Design IV -
Optimizing Report Data
• Applicable certification
- This is a recommended course for the
Business Objects Certified Professional -
Crystal Reports certification.
www.sap.nl/education 413
Business Objects
Business Intelligence - Crystal Reports 2008
BOC325 · RD21008e - Crystal Reports 2008: Report Design II - Business Reporting Solutions
DURATION 10 hours PRICE € 450 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
report designers who are responsible for
creating and distributing reports and
have completed Crystal Reports 2008:
Report Design I - Fundamentals of
Report Design.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• You should have completed Crystal
Reports 2008: Report Design I -
Fundamentals of Report Design.
• If you have taken a previous version of
Report Design I - Fundamentals of
Report Design, then you should have
completed Crystal Reports 2008:
Quickstart.
Working knowledge of:
• Windows conventions
• Basic database concepts
• Experience using a web browser
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This 8- to 12-hour E-learning course is
designed to give you comprehensive
skills and in-depth knowledge to plan
and create reports that will help you
analyze and interpret information.
• As a business benefit, you will be able to
increase your understanding of
formulas, variables, arrays, templates,
parameters, summaries, and sections.
• This course will also help you make
more effective report design decisions
and create more efficient reports.
414
CONTENT
• Using the Repository
- Using the repository
- Creating a report from a repository data
source
• Creating Formulas
- Using functions and operators
- Defining control structures available in
Crystal Reports Syntax
• Managing Reports
- Using the Workbench
- Publishing reports to BusinessObjects
Enterprise
• Using Variables and Arrays
- Using variables
- Using arrays
• Building Parameterized Reports
- Defining and creating parameters
- Building a report with multiple
parameters
- Using edit masks and descriptions
- Creating a date range parameter
- Grouping using parameters
• Using Report Templates
- Applying report templates
- Building a template without a data
source
- Removing a template
• Summarizing Data with Crosstab
- Building a basic crosstab
- Formatting a crosstab
• Using Report Sections
- Using sections
- Using group related functions to format
sections
- Using section underlay
- Using multiple column reporting
• Building Specialized Reports
- Using the Running Total Expert
- Creating a form letter
- Adding a hyperlink to a report
- Using Dynamic Graphic Locations
- Building a report with alerts
- Building a top N report
- Integrate an Xcelsius Flash SWF into a
Crystal report
NOTES
• Course length: 8-12 hours
• Recommended additional education:
- Crystal Reports 2008: Report Design III -
Report Processing Strategies
- Crystal Reports 2008: Report Design IV -
Optimizing Report Data
• Applicable certification
- This is a recommended course in the
Business Objects Certified Professional:
Crystal Reports 2008 certification.
Business Objects
Business Intelligence - Crystal Reports 2008
BOC330 · RD31008 - Crystal Reports 2008: Report Design III - Report Processing Strategies
DURATION 1 day PRICE € 470 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
report designers, who have taken
Crystal Reports 2008:
- Report Design I - Fundamentals of
Report Design and Crystal Reports 2008:
Report Design II - Business Reporting
Solutions and who are responsible for
creating and distributing reports.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• You should have completed Crystal
Reports 2008: Report Design I -
Fundamentals of Report Design.
• You should have completed Crystal
Reports 2008: Report Design II -
Business Reporting Solutions.
• If you have taken a previous version of
either Report Design I - Fundamentals
of Report Design, or Crystal Reports
2008: Report Design II Business
Reporting Solutions, then you should
have completed Crystal Reports 2008:
Quickstart.
Working knowledge of:
• Windows conventions
• Basic database concepts
• Experience using a web browser
• Crystal Reports
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• Crystal Reports 2008 is a powerful,
dynamic, actionable reporting solution
that helps you design, explore, visualize,
and deliver reports via the web or
embedded in enterprise applications.
• This one-day instructor-led course is
designed to give you comprehensive
skills and in-depth knowledge required
to plan and create reports that will help
you analyze and interpret important
information.
• As a business benefit, you will find that
your increased understanding of report
processing, formulas, custom functions
and subreports will help you make
more effective report design decisions
and create more efficient reports.
CONTENT
• Report Processing
- Use multi-pass reporting
- Use evaluation time functions
- Use a dynamic array
• Using Subreports
- Define subreports
- Create an unlinked subreport
- Create a linked subreport
- Create an on-demand subreport
- Use shared variables with subreports
- Link “unlinkable” data with subreports
- Describe alternate solutions to using
subreports
• Creating Complex Formulas
- Use Print State functions
- Use loop control structures
- Use loop control structures with arrays
• Using Custom Functions
- Describe a custom function
- Use custom functions
• Using XML and Web Services Data
- Use XML and web services data
- Use a transform in XML exporting
NOTES
• Recommended additional education:
- Crystal Reports 2008: Report Design IV -
Optimizing Report Data
• Applicable certification
- This is a recommended course in the
Business Objects Certified Professional:
Crystal Reports certification.
www.sap.nl/education 415
Business Objects
Business Intelligence - Crystal Reports 2008
BOC335 · RD310e08 - Crystal Reports 2008: Report Design III - Report Processing Strategies
DURATION 7 hours PRICE € 225 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
report designers, who have taken
Crystal Reports 2008: Report Design I -
Fundamentals of Report Design and
Crystal Reports 2008: Report Design II -
Business Reporting Solutions and who
are responsible for creating and
distributing reports.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• You should have completed Crystal
Reports 2008: Report Design I -
Fundamentals of Report Design.
• You should have completed Crystal
Reports 2008: Report Design II -
Business Reporting Solutions.
• If you have taken a previous version of
either Report Design I - Fundamentals
of Report Design, or Crystal Reports
2008: Report Design II Business
Reporting Solutions, then you should
have completed Crystal Reports 2008:
Quickstart.
Working knowledge of:
• Windows conventions
• Basic database concepts
416
• Experience using a web browser
• Crystal Reports
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This 6- to 8-hour E-learning course is
designed to give you comprehensive
skills and in-depth knowledge required
to plan and create reports that will help
you analyze and interpret important
information.
• As a business benefit, you will find that
your increased understanding of report
processing, formulas, custom functions
and subreports will help you make
more effective report design decisions
and create more efficient reports.
CONTENT
• Report Processing
- Use multi-pass reporting
- Use evaluation time functions
- Use a dynamic array
• Using Subreports
- Define subreports
- Create an unlinked subreport
- Create a linked subreport
- Create an on-demand subreport
- Use shared variables with subreports
- Link “unlinkable” data with subreports
- Describe alternate solutions to using
subreports
• Creating Complex Formulas
- Use Print State functions
- Use loop control structures
- Use loop control structures with arrays
• Using Custom Functions
- Describe a custom function
- Use custom functions
• Using XML and Web Services Data
- Use XML and web services data
- Use a transform in XML exporting
NOTES
• Course length: 6-8 hours
• Recommended additional education:
- Crystal Reports 2008: Report Design IV -
Optimizing Report Data
• Applicable certification
- This is a recommended course in the
Business Objects Certified Professional:
Crystal Reports 2008 certification.
Business Objects
Business Intelligence - Crystal Reports 2008
BOC345 · Crystal Reports 2008: Report Design IV - Optimizing Report Data
DURATION 8 hours PRICE € 225 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
report designers with strong report-
design skills. This course will teach you
to optimize reports for faster and more
efficient data processing.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• Crystal Reports XI R1/R2: Report
Design I
• Crystal Reports XI R1/R2: Report
Design II
• Crystal Reports XI R1/R2: Report
Design III
In this course, you will be working
intensively with Crystal Reports. To
successfully understand the content and
complete the activities, you must have:
• Knowledge of basic database concepts
• Knowledge of basic SQL concepts
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This eight hour E-learning course will
instruct on how to set up, configure,
and maintain data connections for
reports.
• You will learn how to link data,
optimize reports, and push processing
to the database server.
• As an established report designer within
your company, you will gain a more
advanced understanding of data
connectivity within the Crystal Reports
2008 environment.
CONTENT
• Exploring the Database Expert
- Accessing the database expert
- Adding and removing data sources
- Using options in the database expert
- Using the data tab
- Using the links tab
• Identifying the Effects of Link Types
- Defining links and jobs
- Using inner joins, left outer joins, right
outer joins, and full outer joins
- Identifying syntax diffrences between
databases
- Joining different data types
• Setting Up and Configuring Data
Sources
- Using native connections
- Using ODBC connections
- Using OLE connections
- Configuring ODBC
- Setting up data sources to Microsoft
Access and Microsoft SQL Server
• Updating Reports for Database Changes
- Setting the data source location
- Mapping database fields
- Verifying the database
• Processing Data on the Server
- Optimizing record selection
- Using SQL expressions
- Performing grouping on a server
• Validating the Report Data
- Handling NULL values in reports
- Handling NULL values in formulas and
record selection
- Confirming the report data
• Detecting and Fixing Problems
- Finding resources to fix issues
- Using utilities to diagnose issues
- Getting additional help to resolve issues
NOTES
• Additional education not applicable
• Applicable certification
- This course is a course in the Business
Objects Certified Professional program:
Crystal Reports 2008.
www.sap.nl/education 417
Business Objects
Business intelligence - Dashboard Manager

BOD210 BOM235
PM310R2 - PM380eR2 - Deploying
BusinessObjects Dashboards from
Dashboard Manager: Development To Production
Designing Dashboards
3 days 4 hours

BOD215 BOM215
PM310eR2 - PM350eR2 -
BusinessObjects BusinessObjects
Dashboard Manager Performance
Designing Dashboards
18 hours 8 hours

BOD305 BOM236
PM100eV3.0 - PM375rwR2 - Performance
BusinessObjects Management: Additional
Dashboard and Analytics XI Designer Top
3.0: What’s New
2,5 hours 1 hour

BOM246
PM367rwR2 - Performance
Management: Addtional
Admin Topics

4 hours

BOD210 · PM310R2 - BusinessObjects Dashboard Manager: Designing Dashboards

DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1740 STARTING DATES 20-apr-09

TARGET GROUP dashboard deployment-system • Automating Dashboards with Rules

• The audience for this course may
consist of BusinessObjects XI Release 1
and BusinessObjects XI Release 2
customers.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED
Experience with:
• BusinessObjects Universe Designer
• BusinessObjects Web Intelligence XI
• BusinessObjects Enterprise XI
GOALS
• BusinessObjects Dashboard Manager XI
enables the deployment of powerful
dashboards to provide visibility,
alignment and insight across the
enterprise.
• This three-day instructor-led classroom
course provides hands-on activities that
take you step-by-step from setting up
the metric universe and Performance
Management repository to guiding
navigation through a corporate
dashboard.
• As a business benefit, by understanding
not only Dashboard Manager
functionality, but also the workflow
involved among the different roles in a
administrator, universe designer,
performance management designer-you
will know exactly what needs to be in
place before you can perform tasks, and
if not, who you should talk to.
CONTENT
• Understanding Dashboard Manager
- What is Dashboard Manager?
- Performance Management architecture
• Setting Up Dashboard Manager
- Setting up Performance Management
- Creating the metric universe
• Creating Metrics
- What is a metric?
- Creating metrics
- Refreshing metrics
• Creating Analytics
- Creating interactive analytics
- Using the analytics catalog
- Using statistical transformations
• Creating Personal Dashboards
- Creating personal dashboards
- Adding analytics
- Creating compound analytics
• Creating Corporate Dashboards
- Building corporate dashboards
- Securing dashboards
- Creating rules
- Scheduling metric/analytic refreshes
• Creating Dimensioned Analytics
- Creating dimensioned metrics
- Creating dimensioned analytics from
metrics and a query
- Securing dimensioned analytics
- Personalizing dashboard data
• Guiding Dashboard Navigation
- Guiding navigation between analytics
- Guiding navigation with metric trees
• Getting to know Crystal Xcelsius
- Define what Crystal Xcelsius is, who
uses it, and what its benefits are
- Define the overall process for creating
interactive models
- Identify the different components of the
Crystal Xcelsius interface
- Define the purpose of the buttons in
the Crystal Xcelsius toolbar a of the
Components, Object Browser, and
Properties windows
- Make changes to the canvas and access
help sources
• Importing Excel files
- Describe the best ways to plan your
models and set up your source files

418
Business Objects
Business intelligence - Dashboard Manager
- Differentiate between the file types
involved in the process
- Import a source file
- Define ways to update your models
when your data source changes
• Using charts
- Identify the chart components available
in Crystal Xcelsius and the type of data
they should display
- Describe how to link to sources
- Define when to use data ranges and
series
- Define category axis labels for a chart
- Use the ignore end blanks option works
• Using single value components
- Define the difference between input and
output in models
- Describe how single value components
can add interactivity to model
- Identify the single value components
available in Crystal Xcelsius
- Define how play options can automate
the interactive parts of your models
• Using selectors
- Describe how selectors work
- Define how to use insert in
functionality for selectors
- Identify the selectors available in Crystal
Xcelsius
- Identify the unique requirements
including in setting up to select
multiple items
- Define the process for importing
graphics for selectors
• Applying formatting
- Change individual components
- Change the font for a model
- Apply global styles to a model
- Apply skins to a model
• Publishing models
- Define the different formats available to
publish your models
- Export to all formats
• Setting up alerts
- Identify when alerts are appropriate,
and what components support alerts
- Differentiate between alerts based on
values or percentages
- Describe the process of setting up alerts
• Setting up dynamic visibility
- Define how to make components visible
based on conditions
- Describe the process for setting up
dynamic visibility
- Identify the options available for
dynamic visibility
- Use dynamic visibility on combination
with other functionality
• Adding graphics and animations
- Define the shapes and backgrounds
available in Crystal Xcelsius
- Identify how to import graphics
- Differentiate between embedded and
non-embedded files
- Create multi-layer models by adding
other flash animations to your models
• Using templates
- Access pre-defined templates in Crystal
Xcelsius
- Create your own templates based on
completed models
• Setting up drill-down functionality
- Identify the settings required to enable
drill down functionality
• Using tables
- Define how to use tables to display data
- Define how to use tables as selectors
• Using maps
- Use maps to represent data from
different geographic locations
• Using other components
- Define the special selectors available to
create your models
- Add text to your models
- Link to external sources
• Creating an advanced model
- Build an advanced model using a wide
range of the functionality in Crystal
Xcelsius
NOTES
• Recommended additional education:
- BusinessObjects Performance Manager:
Measuring Performance
• Certification not applicable
• Check out www.businessobjects.com/
services/training for more details
www.sap.nl/education 419
Business Objects
Business intelligence - Dashboard Manager
BOD215 · PM310eR2 - BusinessObjects Dashboard Manager Designing Dashboards
DURATION 18 hours PRICE € 846 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The audience for this course may
consist of BusinessObjects XI Release 1
and BusinessObjects XI Release 2
customers.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED
Experience with:
• BusinessObjects Universe Designer
• BusinessObjects Web Intelligence XI
• BusinessObjects Enterprise XI
GOALS
• BusinessObjects Dashboard Manager XI
enables the deployment of powerful
dashboards to provide visibility,
alignment and insight across the
enterprise.
• This E-learning course provides hands-
on simulations that take you step-by-
step from setting up the metric universe
and Performance Management
repository to guiding navigation
through a corporate dashboard.
• As a business benefit, by understanding
not only Dashboard Manager
functionality, but also the workflow
420
involved among the different roles in a
dashboard deployment—system
administrator, universe designer,
performance management designer—
you will know exactly what needs to be
in place before you can perform tasks,
and if not, who you should talk to.
CONTENT
• Understanding Dashboard Manager
- What is Dashboard Manager?
- Performance Management architecture
• Setting Up Dashboard Manager
- Setting up Performance Management
- Creating the metric universe
• Creating Metrics
- What is a metric?
- Creating metrics
- Refreshing metrics
• Creating Analytics
- Creating interactive analytics
- Using the analytics catalog
- Using statistical transformations
• Creating Personal Dashboards
- Creating personal dashboards
- Adding analytics
- Creating compound analytics
• Creating Corporate Dashboards
- Building corporate dashboards
- Securing dashboards
• Automating Dashboards with Rules
- Creating rules
- Scheduling metric/analytic refreshes
• Creating Dimensioned Analytics
- Creating dimensioned metrics
- Creating dimensioned analytics from
metrics and a query
- Securing dimensioned analytics
- Personalizing dashboard data
• Guiding Dashboard Navigation
- Guiding navigation between analytics
- Guiding navigation with metric trees
- Appendix A - Troubleshooting Missing
Metrics
NOTES
• Recommended additional education:
- BusinessObjects Performance Manager:
Measuring Performance
• Certification not applicable
Business Objects
Business intelligence - Dashboard Manager

BOD305 · PM100eV3.0 - BusinessObjects Dashboard and Analytics XI 3.0: What’s New

DURATION 2,5 hours PRICE € 112 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
those who are Dashboard and Analytics
designers who are comfortable working
in Dashboard Manager and Performance
Manager and need to create goalbased
analytics, strategies and alerts to display
for business users through corporate
dashboard applications.
• The business benefit of this course is
that learners will gain familiarity with
how BusinessObjects Dashboard
Manager and BusinessObjects
Performance Manager have been
repackaged in BusinessObjects XI 3.0
and how Dashboard and Analytics
applications can help organizations
focus on key performance metrics and
- Create and save analytics
- Build a personal dashboard
- Build a corporate dashboard
• Setting Preferences
- Describe the new Dashboard and
Analytics preferences
- Troubleshoot using the enable client
trace option
NOTES

PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• Experience using BusinessObjects
Performance Management XI R2,
OR BusinessObjects Dashboard
Manager XI R2: Designing Dashboards
and understanding of the basics of
deploying dashboards.
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This two- to three-hour E-learning
course is designed to give learners an
overview of the major themes and
functionality improvements for the
BusinessObjects XI 3.0 Dashboard and
Analytics applications.
transform information into a strategic • Course length: 2-3 hours
asset. • Additional education
CONTENT - Refer to other offerings from the What’s
• Positioning Dashboard and Analytics New series for a complete list.
applications
- Describe the positioning and value
proposition of Dashboard and Analytics
in BusinessObjects XI R3
- Describe the new Dashboard and
Analytics features
• Navigating Dashboard and Analytics
- Navigate to Dashboard and Analytics
applications
• Performing tasks in Dashboard and
Analytics

www.sap.nl/education 421
Business Objects
Business intelligence - Dashboard Manager
BOM215 · PM350eR2 - BusinessObjects Performance
DURATION 8 hours PRICE € 283 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
Performance Management designers
who are comfortable working in
Dashboard Manager and need to create
goal-based analytics, strategies and alerts
to display for business users through
corporate dashboard applications.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• BusinessObjects Dashboard Manager:
Designing Dashboards
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• Performance Manager enables you to
create scorecards that, by aligning with
Key Performance Indicators (KPIs), track
performance across the enterprise.
Building on existing Dashboard
Manager knowledge, this course
provides demonstrations and hands-on
activities that take you from building
goals to automating goal-based alerts
through rules.
422
• As a business benefit, you will be
moving beyond tracking historical
performance to mapping out strategies
for future performance and aligning
goals that can then be monitored
against actual data.
CONTENT
• Understanding Performance Manager
- Describe Performance Manager’s role
within Performance Management.
- Review Dashboard Manager
• Creating Goals
- Define what is a goal
- Create a goal
- Describe where goal data is stored
- Create a bipolar goal
- Create a sliced goal
• Creating Goal Analytics
- Describe a goal analytic
- List the ways you can create a goal
analytic
- Create and edit goal analytics
• Publishing Goals
- Describe Strategy Builder
- Create strategies and roles
- Publish goals and metrics
• Adding Goals to a Dashboard
- List the ways you can display goals on
dashboards
- Create a Goal Subscription analytic
- Create a Metric Tree analytic
- Create a Strategy Map analytic
• Create Goal-based Alerts
- Describe an alert
- Create a goal-based alert
- Create rules based on sliced metrics
- Describe functions to compare metrics
to goals
NOTES
• Additional education not applicable
• Level, Delivery, and Duration
- This instructor-led offering is a one-day
course.
• Certification not applicable
Business Objects
Business intelligence - Dashboard Manager
BOM235 · PM380eR2 - Deploying Dashboards from Development to Production
DURATION 4 hours PRICE € 283 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
Performance Management
administrators and dashboard designers.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED
• Experience with administering
Performance Management (in
Performance Management Setup)
• Familiarity with the components of a
Performance Management dashboard
GOALS
• This four-hour E-learning course
explains the process to move
Performance Management XI Release 2
dashboard applications from a
development environment to a
production environment.
• This course describes the process and its
limitations and then explains how to
use the Import Wizard, Set Architect
and the new Performance Management
Deployment Tool to move
BusinessObjects repository objects, sets
and PM repository assets from one
system to another.
• Note that the information in this course
is exclusively for Performance
Management XI Release 2 dashboard
applications.
• The business benefit of this course is
you will be able to better plan
dashboard development and the
deployment, reducing the need to
manually re-create dashboard
components or changes on the
production environment.
• Completion of this course is a
mandatory prerequisite for acquiring
the new Performance Management
Deployment Tool.
CONTENT
• Deployment Overview
- List the tools involved in the
deployment process
- List what the tools can and cannot
deploy between Performance
Management XI R2 environments
- Describe the steps in the deployment
process and the tools involved
- List the limitations and the best
practices to avoid them
• Preparing for Deployment
- Assess the dashboard application
- List the steps needed to prepare the
target Performance Management system
- Specify a new target PM repository
database and re-create calendars on the
target
• Deploying Sets
- Re-create calendars to support sets and
set-based metrics
- Use Set Architect to unload sets from
the source and load them to the target
• Deploying BO Repository Objects
- Use the Import Wizard to move BO
repository dashboard objects
- Describe how the Import Wizard treats
analytics and dashboards
• Deploying PM Repository Assets
- Describe the Performance Management
Deployment Tool
- Set up the Performance Management
Deployment Tool
- Describe the ID Reservation feature
NOTES
• Course length: 3-5 hours
• Additional education not applicable
• Certification not applicable
www.sap.nl/education 423
Business Objects
Business intelligence - Dashboard Manager
BOM236 · PM375rwR2 - Performance Management: Additional Designer Top
DURATION 1 hour PRICE € 112 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
dashboard designers that have previous
experience with Application
Foundation or Performance
Management XI R1.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• Application Foundation 6.5 or previous
• Performance Management XI R1
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED
Experience with:
• Application Foundation / Performance
Management XI R1
GOALS
• This 40-minute recorded webinar series
is designed to provide students with the
essential knowledge required to
personalize dashboard data and
understand the new features in
Performance Management XI R2.
424
• The business benefit of this course is NOTES
that learners will learn to personalize • Course length: 40 minutes
dashboards to display specific data for • Recommended additional education:
the logged in user, and gain an - BusinessObjects Dashboard Manager XI
understanding of the new features in R2: Designing Dashboards (Instructor-
Performance Management XI R2. led or E-learning)
CONTENT - BusinessObjects Performance Manager
• Personalizing Dashboard data XI R2: Measuring Performance
- What is dashboard personalization (Instructor-led or E-learning)
- Dashboard personalization options • Applicable certification
• What’s New in PM XI R2 - This course is not applicable to any
- Terminology - Address name re- Business Objects Certified Professional
branding and terminology programs.
- Architecture - How Performance
Management fits into the Enterprise
system
- Installation - What has changed with
installation and setup
- Dashboard Manager - Overview of new
features and changes
- Performance Manager - Overview of
new features and changes
Business Objects
Business intelligence - Dashboard Manager
BOM246 · PM367rwR2 - Performance Management: Addtional Admin Topics
DURATION 4 hours PRICE € 112 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
Performance Management
administrators who are responsible for
administering and/or deploying a
BusinessObjects Performance
Management XI R2.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• Learners should be familiar with the
Performance Management application
and concepts prior to viewing the
webinars in this series.
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This webinar series is designed to
provide learners with the essential
knowledge required when
administering BusinessObjects
Performance Management XI Release 2.
• By the end of the course learners will
have an understanding of how
administration tools work.
• The series includes: Using Process
Tracker, Set Architect, Performance
Management Setup Options, Creating
Rules Templates, and Deploying
Performance Management: Multi-node.
• The business benefit of this course is
that learners will learn to setup and
administer BusinessObjects Performance
Management XI R2 using various tools
and information provided.
CONTENT
• Using Process Tracker
- Understand the Concepts of Process
Tracker
- Understand how to install and
configure Process Tracker
- Demonstrate how Process Tracker can
be used
• Set Architect
- The purpose of Set Architect
- How to install and configure Set
Architect
- How to perform a basic setup for Set
Analysis using Set Architect
• Performance Management Setup
Options
- The System Setup tab
- The Time Configuration tab
- The Parameters tab
- The Tools tab
• Creating Rules Templates
- What are rule templates?
- Creating rule templates
- Using rule templates
- Understanding XML tags
• Deploying Performance Management:
Multi-node
- TBD
NOTES
• Additional education not applicable
• Applicable certification
- This course is not applicable to any
Business Objects Certified Professional
programs.
www.sap.nl/education 425
Business Objects
Business Intelligence - Desktop Intelligence V6.5 / XI R2

BOR100 BOR110
BO103 - BusinessObjects: BO201 - BusinessObjects:
Core Reporting Intermediate Reporting

BOR120
1 day 1 day
BO302 - BusinessObjects:
Advanced Reporting

BOR105 BOR115
1 day
BO103e - BusinessObjects BO201e - BusinessObjects
Core Reporting Intermediate Reporting

8 hours 8 hours

BOR210 BOR220
QA230R2 - QA330R2 -
BusinessObjects Desktop BusinessObjects Desktop
Intelligence: Report Design Intelligence: Advanced
Report Design
2 days 1 day

BOR215 BOR225
QA230eR2 - QA330eR2 -
BusinessObjects Desktop BusinessObjects Desktop
Intelligence Report Design Intelligence Advanced
Report Design
5 hours 5 hours

BOR235
BU250eR2 -
BusinessObjects Desktop
Intelligence: Essentials for
Business Users
9 hours

426
Business Objects
Business Intelligence - Desktop Intelligence V6.5 / XI R2

BOR100 · BO103 - BusinessObjects: Core Reporting

DURATION 1 day PRICE € 470 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP CONTENT • Using Presentation Styles

• This course is designed for business • Getting Started
users who need to generate effective - Logging on to BusinessObjects
reports using BusinessObjects 6.5. - Modifying start up options
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None - Accessing help
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None - Opening documents
GOALS - Viewing reports
• This one-day instructor-led course is - Saving documents
designed to give learners comprehensive • Report Building
skills and core knowledge to present - Understanding objects, classes, and
and analyze information, distribute universes
documents and reports, and use the - Creating documents
major reporting features of - Creating a query
BusinessObjects 6.5. - Editing the results of a query
• After completing the course, learners - Exploring the Slice and Dice Panel
will be able to: - Projecting data
- Build a report - Understanding Report Manager
- Restrict data • Restricting Data
- Use presentation styles - Applying query conditions
- Use the Slice and Dice Panel - Applying wildcards in conditions
- Share data with colleagues. - Using condition objects
- Understanding relational operators in
conditions
- Using logical operators for multiple
conditions
- Manipulating tables
- Viewing reports in different modes
- Understanding block types
- Selecting a presentation style at point of
query
- Converting tables
• Slice and Dice
- Applying functions
- Filtering data
- Applying calculations to data
- Applying breaks to data
- Ranking data
• Sharing Data with Colleagues
- Sharing reports with BusinessObjects
users
- Creating reports for non-
BusinessObjects users
- Retrieving reports from the repository
- Exporting data
NOTES
• Certification Applicability
- This offering is not applicable to any
certification.

www.sap.nl/education 427
Business Objects
Business Intelligence - Desktop Intelligence V6.5 / XI R2

BOR105 · BO103e - BusinessObjects Core Reporting

DURATION 8 hours PRICE € 225 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP - Modifying start up options - Viewing reports in different modes

• This course is designed for business - Accessing help - Understanding block types
users who need to generate effective - Opening documents - Selecting a presentation style at point of
reports using BusinessObjects 6.5. - Viewing reports query
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None - Saving documents - Converting tables
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None • Report Building • Slice and Dice
GOALS - Understanding objects, classes, and - Applying functions
• This one-day E-learning course is universes - Filtering data
designed to give learners comprehensive - Creating documents - Applying calculations to data
skills and core knowledge to present - Creating a query - Applying breaks to data
and analyze information, distribute - Editing the results of a query - Ranking data
documents and reports, and use the - Exploring the Slice and Dice Panel • Sharing Data with Colleagues
major reporting features of - Projecting data - Sharing reports with BusinessObjects
BusinessObjects 6.5. - Understanding Report Manager users
• After completing the course, learners • Restricting Data - Creating reports for non-
will be able to: - Applying query conditions BusinessObjects users
- Build a report - Applying wildcards in conditions - Retrieving reports from the repository
- Restrict data - Using condition objects - Exporting data
- Use presentation styles - Understanding relational operators in NOTES
- Use the Slice and Dice Panel conditions • Course length: 1 day
- Share data with colleagues. - Using logical operators for multiple • Certification Applicability
CONTENT conditions - This offering is not applicable to any
• Getting Started • Using Presentation Styles certification.
- Logging on to BusinessObjects - Manipulating tables

428
Business Objects
Business Intelligence - Desktop Intelligence V6.5 / XI R2

BOR110 · BO201 - BusinessObjects: Intermediate Reporting

DURATION 1 day PRICE € 470 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP - Sychronize data • Grouping Data using Sections

• This course is designed for intermediate
report designers.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
In this course you will be working
intensively with BusinessObjects. To
successfully understand the content and
complete the activities, you must already
able to:
• Use Windows conventions
• Use BusinessObjects to the basic or core
reporting level
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This one-day instructor-led course is
designed to give learners the
comprehensive skills and in-depth
knowledge needed to create and
manage BusinessObjects reports.
- Group data using sections
- Create templates and styles
- Use the drill functions
CONTENT
• Variables and Alerters
- Creating variables
- Setting alerters
- Grouping related data
- Formatting grouped data
- Calculating variance
• Running Calculations
- Adding a cumulative total
- Adding a calculation
- Adding complex calculations
- Resetting values in a running
calculation
• Data Synchronization
- Building documents
- Defining advantages of grouping
- Using a section in a report
- Applying aggregated totals in a
sectioned report
- Navigating a sectioned report
- Using the outlining tool
• Creating Templates and Styles
- Creating a new report
- Formatting the layout and structure of
the report
- Using a template
- Setting the default style of a
• BusinessObjects report
- Setting up and apply standard report
styles
• Drilling
- Using the drill functions
NOTES

• After completing the course, learners - Creating a data provider • Certification not applicable
will be able to: - Synchronizing data between data
- Create variables and alerters providers
- Create running calculations

www.sap.nl/education 429
Business Objects
Business Intelligence - Desktop Intelligence V6.5 / XI R2
BOR115 · BO201e - BusinessObjects Intermediate Reporting
DURATION 8 hours PRICE € 225 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• This course is designed for intermediate
report designers.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
In this course you will be working
intensively with BusinessObjects. To
successfully understand the content and
complete the activities, you must already
able to:
• Use Windows conventions
• Use BusinessObjects to the basic or core
reporting level
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This one-day E-learning course is
designed to give learners the
comprehensive skills and in-depth
knowledge needed to create and
manage BusinessObjects reports.
• After completing the course, learners
will be able to:
- Create variables and alerters
- Create running calculations
430
- Synchronize data
- Group data using sections
- Create templates and styles
- Use the drill functions
CONTENT
• Variables and Alerters
- Creating variables
- Setting alerters
- Grouping related data
- Formatting grouped data
- Calculating variance
• Running Calculations
- Adding a cumulative total
- Adding a calculation
- Adding complex calculations
- Resetting values in a running
calculation
• Data Synchronization
- Building documents
- Creating a data provider
- Synchronizing data between data
providers
• Grouping Data using Sections
- Defining advantages of grouping
- Using a section in a report
- Applying aggregated totals in a
sectioned report
- Navigating a sectioned report
- Using the outlining tool
• Creating Templates and Styles
- Creating a new report
- Formatting the layout and structure of
the report
- Using a template
- Setting the default style of a
BusinessObjects report
- Setting up and apply standard report
styles
• Drilling
- Using the drill functions
NOTES
• Course length: 1 day
• Certification not applicable
Business Objects
Business Intelligence - Desktop Intelligence V6.5 / XI R2
BOR120 · BO302 - BusinessObjects: Advanced Reporting
DURATION 1 day PRICE € 470 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• This course is designed for advanced
users.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
In this course you will be working
intensively with BusinessObjects. To
successfully understand the content and
complete the activities, you must already
able to:
• Understand core reporting knowledge
and techniques
• Understand variables and functions
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This one-day instructor-led course is
designed to give learners the advanced
skills and in-depth knowledge needed to
create and analyze complex
BusinessObjects documents.
• After completing the course, learners
will be able to:
- Use alternate query techniques
- Use character and string functions
- Create user defined objects
- Use the If Then Else statement
- Use calculation contexts
- Create advanced charts
- Report from other data sources
CONTENT
• Alternate Query Techniques
- Define combined queries
- Combine the results of more than one
query using Union, Intersection, and
Minus
- Define sub-queries
- Create a sub-query using the results of
one query as the starting point for a
second query
- Create a query based on the structure of
another query
- Create a condition based on another
query
• Character and Date String Functions
- Explain what a character string is and
how it can be dismantled into parts
- Review a list of major character
functions
- Use the Left() and Right() functions to
remove beginnings and/or ends of a
character string
- Use Replace() to replace pieces of a
string with new text
- Use the Pos() and SubStr() functions in
conjunction with the Length() function
to do highlevel string formatting
- Troubleshoot character string functions
to ensure they work properly
- Concatenate strings
- Convert a date-based value to a string
using the FormatDate function
- Convert a character-based data value to
a date type using the ToDate function
- Identify the duration between two dates
using the DaysBetween function
• User Defined Objects
- Create user objects
- Use a user object in a query
- Explain where a user object is stored
- Describe the limitations of user objects
• If Then Else
- Define the “If Then Else” syntax
- Use the “If Then Else” syntax to group
data values
- Use the Group function in the Variable
Editor
- Convert derived variables into true
variables
- Use “If Then Else” to control how a
variable calculates data
• Calculation Contexts
- Explain calculation contexts
- Define extended syntax
- Describe Input and Output context
- Use the Define as Variable feature to
define context
- Use Where to define context
- Use NoFilter() to redirect the context of
a variable
• Advanced Charting
- Create a chart with two Y-axes.
- Create a chart with different styles for
different series.
- Set a constant series.
- Group series for a Y-axis.
• Reporting from Other Data Sources
- Create a query based on an XML data
source
- Export data to XML
- Create a query based on an HTML data
source
NOTES
• Certification not applicable
www.sap.nl/education 431
Business Objects
Business Intelligence - Desktop Intelligence V6.5 / XI R2
BOR210 · QA230R2 - BusinessObjects Desktop Intelligence: Report Design
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 940 STARTING DATES 7-jan-09, 29-jan-09, 17-feb-09, 16-mrt-09, 6-apr-09, 27-apr-09, 18-mei-09, 8-jun-09, 24-jun-09
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
business users who need to generate
effective reports using BusinessObjects
Desktop Intelligence.
• The audience for this course may
consist of BusinessObjects 6.5,
BusinessObjects XI Release 1 and
BusinessObjects XI Release 2 customers.
• The XI Release 2 icon and the
BusinessObjects 6.5 icon have been
placed throughout the guide to identify
features that are specific to each version,
or to indicate potential differences.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• Desktop Intelligence is an integrated
query, reporting and analysis solution
that allows business users to access the
data in their corporate databases
directly from their desktop and present
and analyze this information in a
Desktop Intelligence document.
• This two-day instructor-led classroom
course is designed to give you
comprehensive skills and core
knowledge to present and analyze
information, distribute documents and
reports and use the major reporting
features of Desktop Intelligence.
• After completing this course you will be
able to present information in reports as
tables, as well as sophisticated dynamic
documents with drillable charts.
• You will also be able to distribute
documents and reports to colleagues.
CONTENT
• Introducing Desktop Intelligence
- Understanding core concepts of
Desktop Intelligence
- Understanding core functionality of
Desktop Intelligence
432
• Getting Started with Desktop
Intelligence
- Logging on to Desktop Intelligence
- Modifying start up options
- Accessing help
- Opening documents
- Viewing reports
- Saving documents
• Creating Desktop Intelligence
Documents with Queries
- Getting new data with Desktop
Intelligence
- Creating a query
- Modifying the query
- Understanding Report Manager
- Projecting data
• Restricting Data Returned by a Query
- Applying query conditions
- Applying wildcards in conditions
- Using condition objects
- Understanding relational operators in
conditions
- Using logical operators for multiple
conditions
• Designing Reports
- Displaying data in tables and charts
- Formatting Desktop Intelligence
documents
- Selecting a presentation style at point of
query
• Enhancing Presentation of Reports
- Formatting Desktop Intelligence
documents using the Slice and Dice
Panel
- Applying functions
- Filtering data
- Applying calculations to data
- Applying breaks to data
- Ranking data
• Creating Variables and Alerters
- Creating variables and formulas
- Creating alerters
- Creating running calculations
• Synchronizing Data from Multiple Data
Providers
- Concepts of combining data from
multiple sources
- Building a document with blocks of
data
• Grouping Data using Sections
- Concepts of grouping data using
sections
- Sectioning
- Outlining
• Creating Templates and Styles
- Creating templates
- Applying styles
• Analyzing in Drill Mode
- Analyzing the data cube
- Using the drill-down mode
- Taking a snapshot of the data
• Sharing Data with Colleagues
- Sharing reports with BusinessObjects
users
- Creating reports for non-
BusinessObjects users
- Retrieving reports from the repository
- Exporting data
- Viewing a Desktop Intelligence
document in InfoView
- Setting Desktop Intelligence viewing
preference
NOTES
• Recommended additional education:
- BusinessObjects Desktop Intelligence XI
R2: Advanced Report Design
• Certification not applicable
Business Objects
Business Intelligence - Desktop Intelligence V6.5 / XI R2
BOR215 · QA230eR2 - BusinessObjects Desktop Intelligence Report Design
DURATION 5 hours PRICE € 450 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
business users who need to generate
effective reports using BusinessObjects
Desktop Intelligence.
• The audience for this course may
consist of BusinessObjects 6.5,
BusinessObjects XI Release 1 and
BusinessObjects XI Release 2 customers.
• The XI Release 2 icon and the
BusinessObjects 6.5 icon have been
placed throughout the guide to identify
features that are specific to each version,
or to indicate potential differences.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• Desktop Intelligence is an integrated
query, reporting and analysis solution
that allows business users to access the
data in their corporate databases
directly from their desktop and present
and analyze this information in a
Desktop Intelligence document.
• This four to six-hour E-learning course
is designed to give you comprehensive
skills and core knowledge to present
and analyze information, distribute
documents and reports and use the
major reporting features of Desktop
Intelligence.
• After completing this course you will be
able to present information in reports as
tables, as well as sophisticated dynamic
documents with drillable charts.
• You will also be able to distribute
documents and reports to colleagues.
CONTENT
• Introducing Desktop Intelligence
- Understanding core concepts of
Desktop Intelligence
- Understanding core functionality of
Desktop Intelligence
• Getting Started with Desktop
Intelligence
- Logging on to Desktop Intelligence
- Modifying start up options
- Accessing help
- Opening documents
- Viewing reports
- Saving documents
• Creating Desktop Intelligence
Documents with Queries
- Getting new data with Desktop
Intelligence
- Creating a query
- Modifying the query
- Understanding Report Manager
- Projecting data
• Restricting Data Returned by a Query
- Applying query conditions
- Applying wildcards in conditions
- Using condition objects
- Understanding relational operators in
conditions
- Using logical operators for multiple
conditions
• Designing Reports
- Displaying data in tables and charts
- Formatting Desktop Intelligence
documents
- Selecting a presentation style at point of
query
• Enhancing Presentation of Reports
- Formatting Desktop Intelligence
documents using the Slice and Dice
Panel
- Applying functions
- Filtering data
- Applying calculations to data
- Applying breaks to data
- Ranking data
• Creating Variables and Alerters
- Creating variables and formulas
- Creating alerters
- Creating running calculations
• Synchronizing Data from Multiple Data
Providers
- Concepts of combining data from
multiple sources
- Building a document with blocks of
data
• Grouping Data using Sections
- Concepts of grouping data using
sections
- Sectioning
- Outlining
• Creating Templates and Styles
- Creating templates
- Applying styles
• Analyzing in Drill Mode
- Analyzing the data cube
- Using the drill-down mode
- Taking a snapshot of the data
• Sharing Data with Colleagues
- Sharing reports with BusinessObjects
users
- Creating reports for non-
BusinessObjects users
- Retrieving reports from the repository
- Exporting data
- Viewing a Desktop Intelligence
document in InfoView
- Setting Desktop Intelligence viewing
preference
NOTES
• Course length: 4-6 hours
• Recommended additional education:
- BusinessObjects Desktop Intelligence XI
R2: Advanced Report Design
• Certification not applicable
www.sap.nl/education 433
Business Objects
Business Intelligence - Desktop Intelligence V6.5 / XI R2
BOR220 · QA330R2 - BusinessObjects Desktop Intelligence: Advanced Report Design
DURATION 1 day PRICE € 470 STARTING DATES 20-jan-09, 9-feb-09, 11-mrt-09, 30-mrt-09, 12-mei-09, 16-jun-09
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
business users who need to generate
effective reports using BusinessObjects
Desktop Intelligence.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• BusinessObjects Desktop Intelligence XI
R2: Report Design
• Experience building Desktop
Intelligence report
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• Desktop Intelligence is an integrated
query, reporting and analysis solution
that allows you to access the data in
your corporate databases directly from
your desktop and present and analyze
this information in a Desktop
Intelligence document.
• This one-day instructor led classroom
course is designed to give you the
comprehensive skills needed to apply
advanced reporting techniques in the
creation of Desktop Intelligence
documents.
434
• After completing this course, you will
be able to apply alternative query
techniques in the creation of advanced
Desktop Intelligence documents and
reports.
• You will also be able to apply character
and date string functions, create user-
defined objects, group data, and use
calculation contexts to further develop
your documents and reports.
CONTENT
• Alternative Query Techniques
- Defining Combined Query Types
- Using Combined Queries
- Using Sub-Queries
- Creating a Query on a Query
• Character and Date String Functions
- Understanding Character Strings
- Using the Replace Function
- Using the Right Function
- Using the SubString() Function
- Using the Pos() Function
- Concatenating Different Data Types
- Using Date Functions
• User-Defined Objects
- Creating User Objects
- Using a User Object in a Query
- Editing a User Object
- Deleting a User Object
- Storing a User Object
• Grouping Data
- Grouping Data Using "If Then Else"
- Using “If Then Else” to Modify
Calculations
• Calculation Contexts
- Understanding Calculation Contexts
- Using Forced Output Calculation
Context
- Using Forced Input Calculation Context
- Identifying Input and Output Context
• Advanced Charting
- Using Charts
- Invoking a Secondary Y-axis
- Applying Multiple Styles on a Single Y-
axis
• Reporting from Other Data Sources
- Using XML as a data source
NOTES
• Additional education not applicable
• Certification not applicable
Business Objects
Business Intelligence - Desktop Intelligence V6.5 / XI R2
BOR225 · QA330eR2 - BusinessObjects Desktop Intelligence Advanced Report Design
DURATION 5 hours PRICE € 225 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
business users who need to generate
effective reports using BusinessObjects
Desktop Intelligence.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• BusinessObjects Desktop Intelligence XI
R2: Report Design
• Experience building Desktop
Intelligence reports
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• Desktop Intelligence is an integrated
query, reporting and analysis solution
that allows you to access the data in
your corporate databases directly from
your desktop and present and analyze
this information in a Desktop
Intelligence document.
• This our to-six-hour E-learning course
is designed to give you the
comprehensive skills needed to apply
advanced reporting techniques in the
creation of Desktop Intelligence
documents.
• After completing this course, you will
be able to apply alternative query
techniques in the creation of advanced
Desktop Intelligence documents and
reports.
• You will also be able to apply character
and date string functions, create user-
defined objects, group data, and use
calculation contexts to further develop
your documents and reports.
CONTENT
• Alternative Query Techniques
- Defining Combined Query Types
- Using Combined Queries
- Using Sub-Queries
- Creating a Query on a Query
• Character and Date String Functions
- Understanding Character Strings
- Using the Replace Function
- Using the Right Function
- Using the SubString() Function
- Using the Pos() Function
- Concatenating Different Data Types
- Using Date Functions
• User-Defined Objects
- Creating User Objects
- Using a User Object in a Query
- Editing a User Object
- Deleting a User Object
- Storing a User Object
• Grouping Data
- Grouping Data Using "If Then Else"
- Using “If Then Else” to Modify
Calculations
• Calculation Contexts
- Understanding Calculation Contexts
- Using Forced Output Calculation
Context
- Using Forced Input Calculation Context
- Identifying Input and Output Context
• Advanced Charting
- Using Charts
- Invoking a Secondary Y-axis
- Applying Multiple Styles on a Single Y-
axis
• Reporting from Other Data Sources
- Using XML as a data source
NOTES
• Course length: 4-6 hours
• Additional education not applicable
• Certification not applicable
www.sap.nl/education 435
Business Objects
Business Intelligence - Desktop Intelligence V6.5 / XI R2
BOR235 · BU250eR2 - BusinessObjects Desktop Intelligence: Essentials for Business Users
DURATION 9 hours PRICE € 180 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
business users who need to generate
effective reports using BusinessObjects
Desktop Intelligence.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This six- to 12-hour E-learning course is
designed to give learners comprehensive
skills and core knowledge to present
and analyze information, distribute
documents and reports, and use the
major reporting features of Desktop
Intelligence .
CONTENT
• Introduction
- What’s new in Desktop Intelligence
• Getting Started with Desktop
Intelligence
- Logging on to Desktop Intelligence
- Modifying start-up options
- Accessing Help
- Managing documents
• Creating Desktop Intelligence
Documents with Queries
- Creating a query
- Modifying the query
- Projecting Data
- Using the Report Manager
• Restricting Data Returned by a Query
- Applying query conditions
436
- Applying wildcards in conditions
- Using condition objects
- Using logical operators for multiple
conditions
• Designing Reports
- Presenting data in tables and charts
- Manipulating tables
- Converting tables
- Viewing reports in different modes
- Selecting a presentation style at point of
query
• Enhancing the Presentation of a Report
- Applying sorts to data
- Applying filters to data
- Applying calculations to data
- Applying breaks to data
- Ranking data
• Creating Variables, Alerters, and
Custom Conditions
- Creating variables and alerters
- Grouping data and calculating variance
- Creating running calculations
• Synchronizing Data from Multiple Data
Providers
- Building a document with blocks of
data
- Combining data from queries on
multiple universes
- Synchronizing data providers
- Linking personal data
• Grouping Data Using Sections
- Sectioning a report
- Enabling the Outline view
• Creating Templates and Styles
- Creating templates
- Applying templates
- Applying styles
• Analyzing Data in Drill Mode
- Using the drill-down mode
- Taking a snapshot of the data
• Sharing Data with Colleagues
- Sharing reports with BusinessObjects
users
- Creating reports for non-
BusinessObjects users
- Retrieving reports from the repository
- Exporting data
- Viewing a Desktop Intelligence
document in InfoView
- Setting Desktop Intelligence viewing
preferences
NOTES
• Course length: 6-12 hours
• Recommended additional education:
- BusinessObjects Desktop Intelligence XI
R2: Report Design
- BusinessObjects Desktop Intelligence XI
R2: Advanced Report Design
• Certification not applicable
Business Objects
Business Intelligence - Infoview XI R2
BOO205
BU210eR2 -
BusinessObjects InfoView:
Essentials
4 hours
BOO215
BU210eR2P - BOBJ
InfoView Productivity Pack:
Essentials for Business
Users
4 hours
BOO205 · BU210eR2 - BusinessObjects InfoView: Essentials
DURATION 4 hours PRICE € 180 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP Information not available
PREREQUISITES - REQUIREDNone
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This three-to-five hour E-learning
course is designed to give you the
comprehensive skills and knowledge
needed to access, analyze, and share
documents using Business Objects
InfoView.
BOO215 · BU210eR2P - BusinessObjects InfoView Productivity Pack: Essentials for Business Users
DURATION 4 hours PRICE € 180 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
users who need to access, view, share,
and analyze documents using InfoView.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This three to five hour E-learning
course is designed to give you the
comprehensive skills and knowledge
needed to access, analyze, and share
documents using Business Objects
InfoView.
• By taking this course, you will learn
how to customize your InfoView portal,
organize, manage, and distribute
documents, as well as manipulate
reports for your business needs.
CONTENT
• Introduction
- Navigating this ELT
- What’s new
• Getting Started with InfoView
• By taking this course, you will learn
how to customize your InfoView portal,
organize, manage, and distribute
documents, as well as manipulate
reports for your business needs.
CONTENT
• Introduction
- Navigating this E-learning
- What's new
- Logging on
- Navigating through InfoView
• Organizing Documents
- Accessing documents
- Creating and modifying folders
- Copying and moving documents
- Creating and modifying categories
- Assigning documents to categories
- Creating shortcuts to documents
- Searching for documents
- Filtering documents in a list
- Deleting documents, folders, and
categories
• Working with Documents
- Viewing documents
- Viewing document history
- Subscribing to Publications
- Scheduling documents
- Using discussions
- Sharing documents with others
- Exporting and saving documents
• Creating and Adding Documents
- Accessing other applications
• Getting Started with InfoView
- Logging on
- Navigating through InfoView
NOTES
• Course length: 3-5 hours
• Additional education not applicable
• Certification not applicable
- Creating a dashboard with My InfoView
- Creating hyperlinks
- Adding documents from a local drive
• Using Encyclopedia
- Accessing Encyclopedia
- Maintaining Overview information
- Maintaining Business Questions
- Maintaining Glossary Terms
- Maintaining Guided Analysis
• Setting InfoView Preferences
- Setting general preference
- Setting document preferences
- Changing your password
NOTES
• Course length: 3-5 hours
• Additional education not applicable
• Applicable certification
- This course is not applicable to any
Business Objects Certified Professional
programs.
www.sap.nl/education 437
Business Objects
Business Intelligence - Intelligence Question VX1 R2 / Live Office

BON205
BU260R2 -
BusinessObjects Intelligent
Question: Essentials

2 hours

BON215
DM261eR2 -
BusinessObjects Intelligent
Question: Question
Designer Basics
3 hours

BOL205
BU240eR2 -
BusinessObjects Live
Office Essentials for
Business Users
2 hours

BOL215
BU241eR2P -
BusinessObjects
Live Office:
Productivity Pack
3 hours

BOL305
LO100eV3.0 -
BusinessObjects
Live Office XI 3.0:
What’s New
3 hours

438
Business Objects
Business Intelligence - Intelligence Question VX1 R2 / Live Office
BON205 · BU260R2 - BusinessObjects Intelligent Question: Essentials
DURATION 2 hours PRICE € 225 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
non-traditional business users of
Business Intelligence who need to
analyze their corporate data quickly so
they can make solid business decisions.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This one-to-three-hour E-learning
course is designed to give you the skills
and knowledge needed to ask
structured questions to get the
information you need to make business
decisions using Business Objects
Intelligent Question XI R2.
• When you take this course you will
learn how to create, modify, save, and
export questions using Intelligent
Question as well as understand the
concepts behind Intelligent Question.
• The business benefit of this course is
that you will be able to create questions
to get answers quickly, save your favorite
questions, view and create definitions,
and easily move your answers to
BusinessObjectsWeb Intelligence or
Microsoft Excel for further analysis.
CONTENT
• Introduction
- Navigating the E-learning course
• Getting started with Intelligent
Question
- Overview of Intelligent Question
- Concept of constant visual feedback
- Concept of progressive disclosure
- Concept of business relevance
- Concept of personalization
• Accessing Intelligent Question
- Accessing Intelligene Question
- Components of the Intelligent Question
start page
- Components of the Intelligent Question
interface
- Components of an Intelligent Question
• Creating an Intelligent Question
- Connecting to a Question Domain
- Connecting a question as a simple list, a
simple total, and a standard question
• Modifying an Intelligent Question
- Editing a question as a simple list and as
simple total
- Adding a filter to a question
- Editing and refining a filter
- Creating a new filter
- Creating a question based ona favourite
question
- Linking to a secondary subject
- Customizing the answer display
- Using advanced analysis techniques
• Saving an Intelligent Question
- Saving a frequently used question as a
favorite question
- Selecting an existing question
• Exporting an Intelligent Question
- Exporting to BusinessObjects Web
Intelligence and to Microsoft Excel
NOTES
• Course length: 1-3 hours
• Additional education
If you want to increase your analytical
skills in order to evaluate the results
from an Intelligent Question further,
this BusinessObjects Web Intelligence
course is recommended:
- BusinessObjects Web Intelligence XI R2:
Essentials
• Certification not applicable
www.sap.nl/education 439
Business Objects
Business Intelligence - Intelligence Question VX1 R2 / Live Office
BON215 · DM261eR2 - BusinessObjects Intelligent Question: Question Designer Basics
DURATION 3 hours PRICE € 135 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
BusinessObjects XI Release 2 users who
create question domains in Question
Designer for use with the Intelligent
Question application.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• BusinessObjects XI R1/R2: Universe
Design
• BusinessObjects Intelligent Question XI
R2: Essentials
Working knowledge of:
• BusinessObjects universes, including
dimension and measure objects and
contexts
• The BusinessObjects Enterprise system
• The business concepts used in your
organization
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This two-to-four hour E-learning
course is designed to give you the
comprehensive skills and in-depth
knowledge needed to use Question
Designer, the administrative tool for the
Intelligent Question application. You
should take this course to learn how to
440
create the building blocks that make up
a question in Intelligent Question.
• You will learn to organize the metadata
found in BusinessObjects universes into
question domains, and then to export
the question domains to the
BusinessObjects Enterprise system for
accessing using Intelligent Question.
• The business benefit of this course is
that you will learn best practice
methods for creating question domains
that will allow Intelligent Question
users to focus on business questions, not
on the queries that are used to retrieve
the answers to the questions.
CONTENT
• Introduction to Question Designer
- What is a question domain?
- Exploring the Intelligent Question
architecture
- Leveraging the metadata in
BusinessObjects universes
• Installing Intelligent Question
- Installation prerequisites
- Components installed on the server
- Installing Intelligent Question
- Verifying the installation
• About Question Domains
- Designing subjects and behaviors
- Using filters, tenses and comparators
- Specifying time periods
- Understanding universe requirements
- How a question domain becomes an
Intelligent Question
• Creating a Question Domain
- Installing the sample database and
universe
- Opening the sample question domain
- Exploring the Question Designer
interface
- Creating a question domain
• Administering Security
- Setting user rights for Intelligent
Question users
- Setting user rights for Question
Designer users
- Setting user rights for question domains
- Setting user rights for universes
NOTES
• Course length: 2-4 hours
• Additional education not applicable
• Certification not applicable
Business Objects
Business Intelligence - Intelligence Question VX1 R2 / Live Office
BOL205 · BU240eR2 - BusinessObjects Live Office Essentials for Business Users
DURATION 2 hours PRICE € 180 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
business users who want to want to
work effectively in Live Office to embed
data from other sources into Microsoft
Office applications.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED
• Experience with Microsoft Office
• A basic understanding of Crystal
Reports
GOALS
• This one- to-three-hour E-learning
course is designed to give you an
opportunity to acquire basic familiarity
with the BusinessObjects Live Office
software.
• Live Office enables you to import data
from Crystal reports, OLAP reports,
Web Intelligence reports, and Business
Views into Microsoft Excel, Microsoft
Word, Microsoft PowerPoint, and
Microsoft Outlook e- mail messages.
• With the integration within the familiar
Microsoft Office environment, you can
easily and efficiently embed accurate,
updatable data in documents,
spreadsheets, and presentations, which
can then be shared with others for
collaborative decision-making.
CONTENT
• Introduction
- Navigating the E-learning course
- What's new in Live Office
• Getting Started with Live Office
- Understanding how Live Office works
- Logging on to BusinessObjects
Enterprise from Microsoft Excel
• Navigating the Live Office Environment
- Identifying the components of the
Business Objects menu
• Importing and Exporting Data
- Inserting a report view from a Crystal
report
- Inserting a report view from a Web
Intelligence report
- Creating a Crystal report from an Excel
spreadsheet
• Modifying a Report View
- Taking a snapshot
- Modifying parameter values
- Setting parameter binding
- Modifying fields
- Working with filters
- Drilling in charts
• Publishing and Viewing Files
- Saving an Excel workbook to
BusinessObjects Enterprise
- Opening an Excel workbook from
BusinessObjects Enterprise
NOTES
• Course length: 1,5-3 hours
• Additional education not applicable
• Certification not applicable
www.sap.nl/education 441
Business Objects
Business Intelligence - Intelligence Question VX1 R2 / Live Office
BOL215 · BU241eR2P - BusinessObjects Live Office: Productivity Pack
DURATION 3 hours PRICE € 180 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
business users.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This 3-4 hour E-learning course is
designed to give learners an overview of
the functionality available in
BusinessObjects Live Office XI R2
Productivity Pack.
• Learners should take this course to
learn how to insert new content from
Crystal Reports, Web Intelligence, and
the Query Panel, and how to use the
full range of functionality available in
Live Office to integrate BusinessObjects
content into Microsoft Office
documents.
BOL305 · LO100eV3.0 - BusinessObjects Live Office XI 3.0: What’s New
DURATION 3 hours PRICE € 112 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
BusinessObjects Live Office XI R2 users
who are transitioning to XI 3.0.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED
• Experience with BusinessObjects Live
Office XI R2
GOALS
• This three-hour E-learning course is
designed to give learners an
introduction to the new features
available in BusinessObjects Live Office
XI 3.0.
442
CONTENT
• Getting Started with Live Office
- Describe the benefits of using Live Office
- Connect to the repository
- Navigate the Live Office menu
- Find help documentation
- Set general options
• Inserting Live Office Objects
- Insert charts, crosstabs, and fields from a
Crystal report
- Insert report parts from a Web
Intelligence document
- Insert a new query based on a Universe
• Managing Live Office Objects
- Navigate and refresh Live Office objects
- Enable consolidated prompts
- Set refresh settings for objects
- Set parameter binding
- Take a snapshot
• The business benefit of this course is
that users will be able to easily
transition from using previous versions
of Live Office to using the latest version.
CONTENT
• Microsoft Office Integration
- Configure Microsoft Outlook to Live
Office
- Insert Live office object into email
- Check and refresh Live Office objects
sent in an email
- Copy and paste Live Office objects
between Microsoft Office applications
• Publishing and Viewing Live Office
Documents
- Save Live Office documents to the
repository
- Open and view Live Office documents
from the repository
NOTES
• Course length: 3-4 hours
• Additional education not applicable
• Applicable certification
- This course is not applicable to any
Business Objects Certified Professional
programs.
• Integration with Other Products
- Use the Crystal Reports interactive
parameters
- Describe how Live Office integrates with
the BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 3.0
publishing feature
- List the new feature enhancements
available in Live Office
NOTES
• Additional education not applicable
• Certification not applicable
Business Objects
Business Intelligence - OLAP Intelligence XI R1/R2
BOY105 BOY205
QA500e - BusinessObjects BU350eR2 -
OLAP Intelligence: BusinessObjects OLAP
Mastering New Features Intelligence Essentials for
Business Users
4 hours
BOY115
BU350e - BusinessObjects
OLAP
4 hours
BOY105 · QA500e - BusinessObjects OLAP Intelligence: Mastering New Features
DURATION 4 hours PRICE € 135 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
seasoned report designers, familiar with
Crystal Analysis 10 or BusinessObjects
6.5 Web Intelligence OLAP products,
who want to learn the new features and
evolutions of both products that are
incorporated in OLAP Intelligence XI.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED
• Experience with BusinessObjects Live
Office XI R2
GOALS
• This course introduces the new features
in BusinessObjects OLAP Intelligence
XI.
• These new features include the ability
to create and analyze OLAP reports over
the web using the new Interactive
Viewer. From InfoView, the
BusinessObjects Enterprise portal, you
can create connections to OLAP data
sources, and then create and distribute
OLAP reports over the web. With a new
toolbar, the Interactive Viewer
workflow focuses on the most common
tasks performed by the majority of
OLAP users.
6 hours
• Also, this course reviews performance
and platform support enhancements
provided in OLAP Intelligence XI. By
the end of this course learners should
be familiar with each of these items at
an introductory level.
• The business benefit of this course is for
report designers who want to ramp up
with an overview and quick start to the
new features of OLAP Intelligence XI.
• After completing the course, learners
will be able to:
- Introduce features that are new to
OLAP Intelligence
- Create a connection to an OLAP cube
over the web
- Create an OLAP report using the web-
based Interactive Viewer
- Distribute OLAP reports over the web,
within the BusinessObjects Enterprise
XI system.
- Publish reports from the Windows-
based, full client OLAP Intelligence
application to the BusinessObjects
Enterprise system.
- Discuss performance and platform
support enhancements
CONTENT
• Overview of OLAP Intelligence XI new
features
- What is OLAP Intelligence XI?
- What does OLAP Intelligence provide?
- Powerful ad-hoc OLAP reporting
• Powerful Ad-hoc OLAP Reporting
- OLAP reporting over the web
- Creating an OLAP report from InfoView
- Using the OLAP Intelligence Interactive
Viewer
• Saving the report to an InfoView folder
OLAP authoring and distribution
- OLAP design and deployment
environment
- New OLAP Intelligence toolbar
- OLAP Intelligence Excel add-in
- OLAP to relational drill-through
- Performance and platform support
Performance and Platform Support
- Performance enhancements
- Expanded OLAP server and UNIX
support
NOTES
• Certification not applicable
www.sap.nl/education 443
Business Objects
Business Intelligence - OLAP Intelligence XI R1/R2
BOY115 · BU350e - BusinessObjects OLAP
DURATION 4 hours PRICE € 180 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audiences for this course are
business analysts.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
Working knowledge of:
• Microsoft Windows
• Microsoft Excel
• Relational databases, or is familiar with
relational database concepts
• Microsoft Internet Explorer or Netscape
Navigator.
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This 4-hour E-learning course gives
students the skills and knowledge
BOY205 · BU350eR2 - BusinessObjects OLAP Intelligence Essentials for Business Users
DURATION 6 hours PRICE € 180 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
business users and report designers who
want to quickly analyze OLAP data by
creating basic multidimensional reports
in OLAP Intelligence.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This four-to-eight-hour E-learning
course gives you the skills and
knowledge required to create and
format an analytic report using Business
Objects OLAP Intelligence.
• It also introduces using calculations and
working with OLAP data in Microsoft
Excel.
• You should take this course to learn
how to create analytic reports, enabling
you to gain insight into your business
data and make decisions that impact
corporate performance.
• You will also learn techniques for
filtering data based on actual values,
ranking, and contribution as well as
highlighting values and exceptions.
444
required to create an analytic report
using Crystal Analysis.
• The overall goal of the Crystal Analysis
10 – Reporting Essentials course is to
enable learners to quickly analyze OLAP
data by creating basic multidimensional
reports in Crystal Analysis.
CONTENT
• Creating an Analytic Report
- Define OLAP terminology
- Describe how Crystal Analysis works
- Create a simple worksheet report
- Add a chart
• Formatting Reports
- Sort data
• By analyzing various views of the data,
you will be able to answer business
questions interactively when swapping
and stacking dimensions to obtain the
information specific to your needs.
• The business benefits of this course is
that novice users will be able to create
powerful, customized OLAP reports for
analyzing the performance of their
businesses.
• Report designers will be able to design
reports that are easy to use, and that
take advantage of guided analysis and
formatting to make it easier to analyze
data.
CONTENT
• Introduction
- Navigating the E-learning course
- What's new with OLAP Intelligence
• Creating an Analytic Report
- Connecting to an offline (local) and an
online cube
- Swapping and stacking dimensions
- Using the Member Selector
- Adding and removing favorite group
members
- Hiding and reactivating dimensions
- Setting the initial view of data
- Filter data
- Display data asymmetrically
- Highlight exceptions
• Creating Calculations
- Create Calculated Members
• Analyzing with Microsoft Excel
- Export Crystal Analysis reports to Excel
- Connect directly to OLAP data within
Excel using the Crystal Analysis Add-in
- Formatting data
- Excluding null values
- Changing member captions and caption
modes
- Working with charts
• Formatting Reports
- Sorting a member
- Filtering by actual value, ranking, and
contribution
- Focusing on specific data
- Working with data symmetry
- Highlighting values and exceptions
- Using analysis buttons
- Using parameters
• Creating Calculations
- Adding basic and statistical calculations
• Analyzing with Microsoft Excel
- Selecting dynamic or static view
- Exporting data from OLAP Intelligence
and BusinessObjects Enterprise
- Working with OLAP data in Microsoft
Excel
NOTES
• Course length: 4-8 hours
• Additional education not applicable
• Certification not applicable
Business Objects
Business Intelligence - Web Intelligence V6.5 / XI R2

BOW110 BOW220
WI103 - BusinessObjects: QA320R2 -
Web Intelligence Reporting BusinessObjects Web
Intelligence: Advanced
Report Design
2 days 1 day

BOW115 BOW225
WI103e - WebIntelligence QA320eR2 -
BusinessObjects Web
Intelligence Advanced
Report Design
16 hours 6 hours

BOW210 BOW220
QA210R2 - QA320R2 -
BusinessObjects Web BusinessObjects Web
Intelligence: Report Design Intelligence: Advanced
Report Design
2 days 1 day

BOW215 BOW225
QA210eR2 - QA320eR2 -
BusinessObjects Web BusinessObjects Web
Intelligence Report Design Intelligence Advanced
Report Design
15 hours 6 hours

BOW245 BOW255
BU221eR2 - BU220eR2 -
BusinessObjects Web BusinessObjects Web
Intelligence: Interactive Intelligence Essentials for
Viewing Business Users
14 hours 14 hours

www.sap.nl/education 445
Business Objects
Business Intelligence - Web Intelligence V6.5 / XI R2
BOW110 · WI103 - BusinessObjects: Web Intelligence Reporting
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 940 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• This course is designed for
WebIntelligence report builders.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
In this course you will be working
intensively with WebIntelligence. To
successfully understand the content and
complete the activities, you must already
able to:
• Understand and use Windows
conventions
• Understand basic database concepts
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This two-day instructor-led course is
designed to give learners the
comprehensive skills and in-depth
knowledge needed to create, analyze,
and share WebIntelligence documents.
• After completing the course, learners
will be able to:
- Describe the key concepts and terms of
WebIntelligence
- Log on to InfoView to access, create,
and assign categories to personal
documents
- View documents in InfoView
- Create documents with queries
- Restrict data returned by a query
- Display information in different table
styles and charts
- Enhance the presentation quality of a
report
- Format reports
- Create formulas and variables
- Analyze data
- Share documents
446
CONTENT
• Introduction to WebIntelligence
- Describe the core concepts of
WebIntelligence
- Explain the business processes for report
creation
- Define the core functionality of
WebIntelligence
• Getting Started with InfoView
- Log on to and off from InfoView
- Access documents
- Manage document categories
- Set password options
- Use online Help
- Customize a personalized view of
InfoView
• Viewing Documents in InfoView
- Set viewing options
- View and modify
• WebIntelligence documents in HTML
Interactive format
- View BusinessObjects documents in
several formats
- Refresh documents from InfoView
- Print documents from InfoView
• Creating Documents with Queries
- Use BusinessObjects universes to create
queries and build reports
- Differentiate between the two report
panels
- Build queries using the Java Report
Panel
- Edit queries
- Save a WebIntelligence document
• Restricting Data Returned by a Query
- Apply query filters
- Use a prompt to filter data when the
query is run
- Apply complex filters
- Group filters by priorty
• Displaying Information
- Describe the different types of tables
and charts for displaying information in
a report
- Create vertical, horizontal, crosstab,
form tables and charts
- Change table and chart formats
- Add data to existing tables
- Duplicate tables
• Enhancing the Presentation of a report
- Create breaks, sections and report filters
to display information
- Add calculations to report
- Sort information in reports
- Add blocks to report sections
- Create alerters
• Formatting Reports
- View document properties
- Modify default table and cell properties
- Format tables and charts
• Creating Formulas and Variables
- Create simple formulas
- Create, edit and delete variables
- Create variables to capture user
responses to prompts
- Use document functions to save
document information in reports
• Analyzing Data
- Create, navigate and take a snapshot of
a drillable document
- Use drill functions to view a document
onInfoView
• Sharing Documents
- Save and send documents to
WebIntelligence users
- Open documents received
- Save documents in PDF and Excel to
share with others
NOTES
• Certification not applicable
Business Objects
Business Intelligence - Web Intelligence V6.5 / XI R2
BOW115 · WI103e - WebIntelligence
DURATION 16 hours PRICE € 450 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• This course is designed for
WebIntelligence report builders.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This E-learning course is designed to
give learners the comprehensive skills
and indepth knowledge needed to
create, analyze, and share
WebIntelligence documents.
• After completing the course, learners
will be able to:
- Log on to InfoView to access, view,
analyze, drill into, and share documents
- Create a new documents using a query
- Restrict information returned by a
query
- Enhance reports for easier analysis
- Analyze data at a deeper level
CONTENT
• Getting Started
- Logging on to and off from InfoView
- Accessing documents
- Viewing documents
- Analyzing information
- Drilling into documents
- Sharing documents
• Creating New Documents with Queries
- Creating a document with a simple
query
- Navigating in documents with the
Report Manager
- Editing documents with the Report
Manager
• Restricting Information
- Restricting data returned by a query
• Enhancing Reports for Easier Analysis
- Filtering data in a report
- Organize data with sections and breaks
- Displaying information in tables and
charts
- Adding calculations to reports
• Analyzing Data at a Deeper Level
- Drilling in hierarchies in a report
NOTES
• Certification not applicable
www.sap.nl/education 447
Business Objects
Business Intelligence - Web Intelligence V6.5 / XI R2
BOW210 · QA210R2 - BusinessObjects Web Intelligence: Report Design
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 940 STARTING DATES 5-jan-09, 27-jan-09, 19-feb-09, 18-mrt-09, 8-apr-09, 28-apr-09, 19-mei-09, 22-jun-09
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
report designers who need to access and
analyze corporate information using
InfoView and Web Intelligence.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This two-day instructor-led classroom
course is designed to give you the
comprehensive skills and in-depth
knowledge needed to access, analyze
and share corporate data using Business
Objects InfoView and
BusinessObjectsWeb Intelligence.
• During this course, you’ll learn how to
organize, manage and distribute
documents using InfoView.
• You’ll also learn how to create Web
Intelligence documents for your
reporting needs, to retrieve data by
building queries using Business Objects
universes and to use Web Intelligence to
enhance documents for easier analysis.
• After taking this course, you will be able
to efficiently and effectively manage
personal and corporate documents to
access the information you need, when
you need it.
• You will be able to design your own
reports using Web Intelligence and
share your analysis with other users.
CONTENT
• Introducing Web Intelligence
- Accessing corporate information with
448
Web Intelligence
- Understanding how universes allow you
to query databases using everyday
business terms
• Getting Started with InfoView
- Managing documents in InfoView
- Viewing a Web Intelligence document
in InfoView
• Customizing InfoView
- Setting InfoView preferences
- Creating an InfoView dashboard with
My InfoView
• Creating Web Intelligence Documents
with Queries
- Getting new data with Web Intelligence
- Creating a new Web Intelligence
document
- Modifying a document’s query
- Working with query properties
• Restricting Data Returned by a Query
- Modifying a query with a predefined
query filter
- Applying a single-value query filter
- Using prompts to restrict data
- Using complex filters
• Report Design in the Java Report Panel
- Working in the Java Report Panel
- Displaying data in tables and charts
- Presenting data in free-standing cells
• Enhancing the Presentation of Reports
- Using breaks, calculations, sorts and
report filters
- Ranking data to see top or bottom
values
- Using alerters to highlight information
- Organizing a report into sections
- Copying data to other applications
• Formatting Reports
- Document formatting
- Formatting charts
• Creating Formulas and Variables
- Using formulas and variables in the Java
Report Panel
• Synchronizing Data
- Creating multiple queries in a
document
- Synchronizing data with merged
dimensions
• Analyzing Data
- Analyzing the data cube
- Drilling in the Java Report Panel
- Setting Web Intelligence drill options
• Sharing Web Intelligence Documents
- Sharing documents
- Scheduling a Web Intelligence
document
• Working in Interactive View
- Modifying a document interactively
- Using formulas and variables in
InfoView with Interactive view
- Analyzing in drill mode in InfoView
NOTES
• Recommended additional education:
- BusinessObjects Web Intelligence XI
R1/R2: Advanced Report Design
• Certification not applicable
Business Objects
Business Intelligence - Web Intelligence V6.5 / XI R2
BOW215 · QA210eR2 - BusinessObjects Web Intelligence Report Design
DURATION 15 hours PRICE € 450 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
report designers who need to access and
analyze corporate information using
InfoView and Web Intelligence.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This twelve to eighteen-hour E-learning
course is designed to give you the
comprehensive skills and in-depth
knowledge needed to access, analyze
and share corporate data using
BusinessObjects InfoView and Web
Intelligence.
• In this course, you will learn how to
organize, manage and distribute
documents using InfoView. You will
also learn how to create Web
Intelligence documents for your
reporting needs, to retrieve data by
building queries using BusinessObjects
universes and to use Web Intelligence to
enhance documents for easier analysis.
• After this course is over, you will be able
to efficiently and effectively manage
personal and corporate documents to
access the information you need, when
you need it.
• You will be able to design your own
reports using Web Intelligence and
share your analysis with other users.
• This collaborative approach to reporting
maximizes efficiency and avoids
reinventing the wheel by each user.
CONTENT
• Introducing Web Intelligence
- Accessing corporate information with
Web Intelligence
- Understanding how universes allow you
to query databases using everyday
business terms
• Getting Started with InfoView
- Managing documents in InfoView
- Viewing a Web Intelligence document
in InfoView
• Customizing InfoView
- Setting InfoView preferences
- Creating an InfoView dashboard with
My InfoView
• Creating Web Intelligence Documents
with Queries
- Getting new data with Web Intelligence
- Creating a new Web Intelligence
document
- Modifying a document’s query
- Working with query properties
• Restricting Data Returned by a Query
- Modifying a query with a predefined
query filter
- Applying a single-value query filter
- Using prompts to restrict data
- Using complex filters
• Report Design in the Java Report Panel
- Working in the Java Report Panel
- Displaying data in tables and charts
- Presenting data in free-standing cells
• Enhancing the Presentation of Reports
- Using breaks, calculations, sorts and
report filters
- Ranking data to see top or bottom
values
- Using alerts to highlight information
- Organizing a report into sections
- Copying data to other applications
• Formatting Reports
- Document formatting
- Formatting charts
• Creating Formulas and Variables
- Using formulas and variables in the Java
Report Panel
• Synchronizing Data
- Creating multiple queries in a
document
- Synchronizing data with merged
dimensions
• Analyzing Data
- Analyzing the data cube
- Drilling in the Java Report Panel
- Setting Web Intelligence drill options
• Sharing Web Intelligence Documents
- Sharing documents
- Scheduling a Web Intelligence
document
• Working in Interactive View
- Modifying a document interactively
- Using formulas and variables in
InfoView with Interactive view
- Analyzing in drill mode in InfoView
• Working in the Query-HTML panel
- Creating a new document in Query-
HTML
- Applying filters in the Query-HTML
panel
NOTES
• Course length: 12-18 hours
• Recommended additional education:
- BusinessObjects Web Intelligence XI R2:
Advanced Report Design
• Certification not applicable
www.sap.nl/education 449
Business Objects
Business Intelligence - Web Intelligence V6.5 / XI R2

BOW220 · QA320R2 - BusinessObjects Web Intelligence: Advanced Report Design

DURATION 1 day PRICE € 470 STARTING DATES 19-jan-09, 10-feb-09, 12-mrt-09, 31-mrt-09, 23-apr-09, 11-mei-09, 10-jun-09

TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
report designers who are experienced
Web Intelligence users and who need to
create complex Web Intelligence
documents.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• BusinessObjects Web Intelligence XI
R1/XI R2: Report Design
• Experience designing Web Intelligence
reports
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• BusinessObjects Web Intelligence is a
query, reporting and analysis tool that
allows you to access the data in your
corporate databases directly from
within BusinessObjects Enterprise
InfoView and to present and analyze
this information in a Web Intelligence
document.
• This one-day instructor-led classroom
course is designed to give you the
comprehensive skills needed to apply
alternative query and reporting
techniques when creating complex Web
Intelligence documents.
• After completing this course, you will
be able to create combined queries and
use sub-queries.
• You will also be able to use character
and date string functions, create
variables using "If" logic, and redefine
calculation contexts.
• The course also provides an optional
appendix describing how to link Web
Intelligence documents using the
OpenDocument URL command.
CONTENT
• Advanced Query Techniques
- Creating combined queries
- Using sub-queries
- Creating a query based on another
query
• Character and Date String Functions
- Using the character string functions
- Concatenating different data types
- Using date functions
• Using If Logic
- Grouping data using If() logic
- Using If() to modify calculation
behavior
• Additional Reporting Features
- Formatting breaks and crosstabs
- Overriding filters and ranking
- Using running aggregate functions
• Calculation Contexts
- Understanding calculation contexts
- Redefining the calculation contexts
NOTES
• Additional education not applicable
• Certification not applicable

450
Business Objects
Business Intelligence - Web Intelligence V6.5 / XI R2
BOW225 · QA320eR2 - BusinessObjects Web Intelligence Advanced Report Design
DURATION 6 hours PRICE € 225 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
report designers who are experienced
Web Intelligence users and who need to
create advanced Web Intelligence
documents.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• BusinessObjects Web Intelligence XI
R1/XI R2: Report Design
• Experience building Web Intelligence
reports
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• Web Intelligence is a query, reporting
and analysis tool that allows you to
access the data in your corporate
databases directly from within
BusinessObjects Enterprise InfoView
and to present and analyze this
information in a Web Intelligence
document.
• This four to eight-hour E-learning
course is designed to give you the
comprehensive skills needed to apply
alternative query and reporting
techniques when creating complex Web
Intelligence documents.
• After completing this course, you will
be able to combine queries and use sub-
queries.
• You will also be able to use character
and date string functions, create
variables using "If" logic, redefine
calculation contexts as well as use
advanced reporting techniques such as
formatting breaks and using custom
sorts.
CONTENT
• Advanced Query Techniques
- Using combined queries
- Using sub-queries
- Creating a query based on another
query
• Character and Date String Functions
- Using the character string functions
- Concatenating different data types
- Using date functions
• Using If Logic
- Grouping data using If() logic
- Using If() to modify calculation
behavior
• Advanced Reporting Features
- Formatting breaks
- Creating custom sorts
- Displaying document data in free-
standing cells
- Overriding filters and ranking
• Calculation Contexts
- Understanding calculation contexts
- Redefining the calculation context
NOTES
• Course length: 4-8 hours
• Additional education not applicable
• Certification not applicable
www.sap.nl/education 451
Business Objects
Business Intelligence - Web Intelligence V6.5 / XI R2
BOW245 · BU221eR2 - BusinessObjects Web Intelligence: Interactive Viewing
DURATION 14 hours PRICE € 450 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
users who need to access, view, share,
and analyze Web Intelligence
documents using the Interactive
Viewing.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This 14 hour E-learning course gives
learners the comprehensive skills and
in-depth knowledge to understand, to
explore, and interact with information.
• Web Intelligence Interactive Viewing
consists of a set of features that enrich
the report consumer’s experience by
enabling end users to easily explore,
modify, reformat, and otherwise edit
reports over the web.
CONTENT
• Introduction
- InfoView features
- Introducing Web Intelligence Interactive
Viewing
• Getting Started with InfoView
- Logging on
- Navigating through InfoView
• Organizing Documents
- Accessing documents
- Creating and modifying folders
- Copying and moving folders
- Copying and moving documents
- Creating and modifying categories
- Assigning documents to categories
- Creating shortcuts to documents
- Searching for documents
452
- Filtering documents in a list
- Deleting documents, folders, and
categories
• Working with Documents
- Viewing documents
- Viewing document history
- Subscribing to Publications
- Scheduling documents
- Using discussions
- Sharing documents with others
- Exporting and saving documents
- Refreshing a document
• Creating and Adding Additional
Components
- Accessing other applications
- Creating a dashboard with My InfoView
- Creating hyperlinks
- Adding documents from a local drive
• Using Encyclopedia
- Accessing Encyclopedia
- Maintaining Overview information
- Maintaining Business Questions
- Maintaining Glossary Terms
- Maintaining Guided Analysis
• Setting InfoView Preferences
- Changing your password
- Setting general preference
• Viewing Web Intelligence Documents in
Interactive Viewing
- Selecting a view format for Web
Intelligence Documents
- Displaying Interactive View menus and
toolbars
• Modifying Web Intelligence Documents
in Interactive Viewing
- Adding data in a table
- Presenting data in tables and charts
- Organizing data with breaks and sorts
- Restricting data with report filters
- Highlighting results with alerters
- Adding footers to a document
- Formatting report elements
• Calculating Data with Interactive
Viewing
- Understanding how data is calculated in
Web Intelligence
- Creating formulas using the Formula
Editor
- Creating a formula to calculate sales tax
- Calculating data based on values in a
cell
- Comparing total values by overriding a
filter
- Creating a formula from a prompt
response
• Drilling on Data in Interactive Viewing
- Analyzing in the data cube in
Interactive Viewing
- Setting drill options
- Using the query drill mode
- Drilling in InfoView
- Drilling on dimensions
- Taking a snapshot as you drill
- Drilling on charts
NOTES
• Additional education not applicable
• Certification not applicable
Business Objects
Business Intelligence - Web Intelligence V6.5 / XI R2
BOW255 · BU220eR2 - BusinessObjects Web Intelligence Essentials for Business Users
DURATION 14 hours PRICE € 180 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
business users who need to access and
analyze corporate information using
InfoView and Web Intelligence.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This nine-to-18-hour E-learning course
is designed to give you the
comprehensive skills and in-depth
knowledge needed to access, analyze
and share corporate data using Business
Objects InfoView and Web Intelligence.
• You should take this course to learn
how to organize, manage, and distribute
documents using InfoView.
• You should also take this course to
learn how to create Web Intelligence
documents for your reporting needs, to
retrieve data by building queries using
Business Objects universes, and to use
Web Intelligence to enhance documents
for easier analysis.
• The business benefit of this course is
that you will be able to efficiently and
effectively manage personal and
corporate documents to access the
information you need when you need
it.
• You will be able to design you own
reports using Web Intelligence and
share your analysis with others.
CONTENT
• Introduction
- What’s new with Web Intelligence
- Introducing Web Intelligence
• Getting Started with InfoView
- Working in InfoView
- Working with folders, documents, and
categories
- Using discussions
- Adding documents from a local drive
- Creating hyperlinks
• Viewing Web Intelligence Documents in
InfoView
- Viewing a document and document
history
- Refreshing, scheduling, and printing a
document
- Setting Web Intelligence viewing
preferences
- Working with Interactive View mode
• Creating Web Intelligence Documents
with Queries
- Selecting a Web Intelligence report
panel
- Creating a new document
- Saving a document to a personal and a
public folder
- Working with query properties
including editing a document’s query
• Restricting Data Returned by a Query
- Applying a single value query filter
- Using prompts to filter data
- Applying complex query filters
- Prioritizing operators
- Applying a single value query filter and
using prompts to filter da in the Query-
HTML panel
• Report Design in the Java Report Panel
- Presenting data in tables, crosstabs, and
charts
- Changing the table format
- Adding data to a table
- Duplicating a table
- Converting tables into charts
- Presenting data in free-standing cells
• Enhancing Presentation in Reports
- Organizing data
- Restricting data with report filters
- Ranking data to see top or bottom
values and highlighting results w
alerters
- Copying a document to another
application
• Formatting information
- Working with the Properties tab
- Modifying default properties
- Adding headers and footers to a
document
- Naming reports, tables, and charts
• Creating Custom Calculations and
Variables
- Creating a formula from a prompt and
saving it as a variable
- Creating a new variable in a report
- Creating advanced alerters
- Creating formulas in Interactive View
mode
• Synchronizing Data in from Multiple
Data Providers
- Synchronizing data from multiple data
sources
- Projecting data from a single query in
different report blocks
- Projecting data from different queries
using a single universe and using
multiple universes
- Setting options to automatically merge
dimensions
- Synchronizing data with merged
dimensions
• Analyzing Data in Drill Mode
- Analyzing in the data cube
- Building a drillable document
- Drilling down the data in a hierarchy
- Taking a snapshot as you drill
- Drilling in charts
- Using drill mode in InfoView
- Setting options for drilling in InfoView
NOTES
• Course length: 9-18 hours
• Recommended additional education:
- BusinessObjects Web Intelligence XI
R1/R2: Report Design
- BusinessObjects Web Intelligence XI
R1/R2: Advanced Report Design
• Certification not applicable
www.sap.nl/education 453
Business Objects
Business Intelligence - Web Intelligence XI 3.0

BOW310 BOW320
QA210V3.0 - QA320V3.0 - Business
BusinessObjects Web Objects Web Intelligence
Intelligence XI 3.0: Report XI 3.0: Advanced Report
Design Design
2 days 1 day

BOW315 BOW325
QA210eV3.0 - QA320eV3.0 - Business
BusinessObjects Web Objects Web Intelligence
Intelligence XI 3.0: Report XI 3.0: Advanced Report
Design Design
16 hours 8 hours

BOW305
QA100eV3.0 -
BusinessObjects Web
Intelligence XI 3.0: What’s
New
2,5 hours

BOW305 · QA100eV3.0 - BusinessObjects Web Intelligence XI 3.0: What’s New

DURATION 2,5 hours PRICE € 112 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
experienced report designers and
universe designers.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
This course is part of a series of delta
offerings created to prepare you for the
release of BusinessObjects XI 3.0. To get
the most out of each offering, you should
already have experience using and
supporting BusinessObjects Web
Intelligence XI R2.
• BusinessObjects Web Intelligence XI
R1/R2: Report Design
• Understanding of the basics of designing
Web Intelligence documents.
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This 2-hour E-learning course provides
learners with an overview of the new
features and enhancements in Web
Intelligence in BusinessObjects XI 3.0.
Learners should take this course to
learn about usability enhancements,
smart measures, new querying
functions, data tracking and the Web
Intelligence Rich Client.
• They will learn about appropriate use
and benefits of the new features and
related best practices, tips, tricks and
known troubleshooting tactics.
• The business benefit of this course is
that learners will gain familiarity with
the new features, their use and their
benefits, enabling them to support
customers using XI 3.0.
CONTENT
• Usability Enhancements
- Understand the usability enhancements
and their benefits
- Use the enhancements in the
Interactive Query panel to gain
efficiency in report creation
- Use the enhancements in the Report
panel to gain efficiency in report
formatting
- Create hyperlinks to other documents
or web pages
- View and handle large documents in
the Quick Display mode
• Smart Measures
- Understand smart measures and their
benefits
- Use smart measures
- Apply best practices when using smart
measures
• New Querying Functions
- Understand the new querying and
formula language functions and their
benefits
- Understand the Optional prompt
- Understand the delegated LOV
- Apply tips and tricks for using the
delegated LOV
• Data Tracking
- Understand data tracking and its
benefits
- Use data tracking
- Apply best practices for using the data
tracking
- Troubleshoot the data tracking feature
• Rich Client
- Understand the Rich Client and its
benefits
- Understand different connection modes
for the Rich Client
- Use a personal data provider within the
Rich Client
NOTES
• Course length: 2-3 hours
• Additional education
- Refer to other offerings from the What’s
New series for a complete list.

454
Business Objects
Business Intelligence - Web Intelligence XI 3.0
BOW310 · QA210V3.0 - BusinessObjects Web Intelligence XI 3.0: Report Design
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 940 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
report designers who need to access and
analyze information using InfoView and
Web Intelligence.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This two-day instructor-led course is
designed to give you the comprehensive
skills and in-depth knowledge needed to
access, analyze and share data using
BusinessObjectsInfoView and
BusinessObjects Web Intelligence.
• During this course, you’ll learn how to
organize, manage and distribute
documents using InfoView.
• You’ll also learn how to create Web
Intelligence documents for your
reporting needs, to retrieve data by
building queries using BusinessObjects
universes and to use Web Intelligence to
enhance documents for easier analysis.
• After taking this course, you will be able
to efficiently and effectively manage
personal and corporate documents to
access the information you need, when
you need it.
• You will be able to design your own
reports using Web Intelligence and
share your analysis with other users.
CONTENT
• Introducing Web Intelligence
- Accessing information with Web
Intelligence
- Understanding how universes allow you
to query databases using everyday
business terms
- Understanding Web Intelligence core
functionalities
- Creating a document in the Web
Intelligence Rich Client
- Viewing a Web Intelligence document
in InfoView
• Creating Web Intelligence Documents
with Queries
- Building a simple query
- Modifying a document query
- Working with query properties
• Restricting Data Returned by a Query
- Restricting data with query filters
- Modifying a query with a predefined
query filter
- Applying a single-value query filter
- Using prompts to restrict data
- Using complex filters
• Report Design
- Working in the Report Panel
- Displaying data in tables and charts
- Presenting data in free-standing cells
• Enhancing the Presentation of Data in
Reports
- Using breaks, calculations, and report
filters
- Formatting breaks and crosstabs
- Using default and custom sorts
- Ranking data to see top or bottom
values
- Tracking data changes
- Using alerters to highlight information
- Organizing a report into sections
- Copying data to other applications
• Formatting Reports
- Preparing documents for PDF and print
- Document formatting
- Formatting charts
• Calculating Data with Formulas and
Variables
- Understanding formulas and variables
- Understanding how Web Intelligence
calculates data
- Creating formulas and variables to
calculate data
• Using Multiple Data Sources
- Adding a new query using a personal
data provider
- Creating multiple queries in a
document
- Synchronizing data with merged
dimensions
• Analyzing Data
- Analyzing the data cube
- Drilling into the data
- Setting Web Intelligence drill options
• Managing and Sharing Web Intelligence
Documents
- Exporting documents from the Rich
Client
- Accessing InfoView
- Managing documents in InfoView
- Sharing documents in InfoView
- Scheduling a Web Intelligence
document
- Setting InfoView preferences
NOTES
• Recommended additional education:
- BusinessObjects Web Intelligence XI R3:
Advanced Report Design
• Certification not applicable
www.sap.nl/education 455
Business Objects
Business Intelligence - Web Intelligence XI 3.0
BOW315 · QA210eV3.0 - BusinessObjects Web Intelligence XI 3.0: Report Design
DURATION 16 hours PRICE € 450 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
report designers who need to access and
analyze information using InfoView and
Web Intelligence.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This two-day instructor-led course is
designed to give you the comprehensive
skills and in-depth knowledge needed to
access, analyze and share data using
BusinessObjectsInfoView and
BusinessObjects Web Intelligence.
• During this course, you’ll learn how to
organize, manage and distribute
documents using InfoView.
• You’ll also learn how to create Web
Intelligence documents for your
reporting needs, to retrieve data by
building queries using BusinessObjects
universes and to use Web Intelligence to
enhance documents for easier analysis.
• After taking this course, you will be able
to efficiently and effectively manage
personal and corporate documents to
access the information you need, when
you need it.
• You will be able to design your own
reports using Web Intelligence and
CONTENT
• Introducing Web Intelligence
- Accessing information with Web
Intelligence
- Understanding how universes allow you
to query databases using everyday
business terms
- Understanding Web Intelligence core
functionalities
456
- Creating a document in the Web
Intelligence Rich Client
- Viewing a Web Intelligence document
in InfoView
• Creating Web Intelligence Documents
with Queries
- Building a simple query
- Modifying a document query
- Working with query properties
• Restricting Data Returned by a Query
- Restricting data with query filters
- Modifying a query with a predefined
query filter
- Applying a single-value query filter
- Using prompts to restrict data
- Using complex filters
• Report Design
- Working in the Report Panel
- Displaying data in tables and charts
- Presenting data in free-standing cells
• Enhancing the Presentation of Data in
Reports
- Using breaks, calculations, and report
filters
- Formatting breaks and crosstabs
- Using default and custom sorts
- Ranking data to see top or bottom
values
- Tracking data changes
- Using alerters to highlight information
- Organizing a report into sections
- Copying data to other applications
• Formatting Reports
- Preparing documents for PDF and print
- Document formatting
- Formatting charts
• Calculating Data with Formulas and
Variables
- Understanding formulas and variables
- Understanding how Web Intelligence
calculates data
- Creating formulas and variables to
calculate data
• Using Multiple Data Sources
- Adding a new query using a personal
data provider
- Creating multiple queries in a
document
- Synchronizing data with merged
dimensions
• Analyzing Data
- Analyzing the data cube
- Drilling into the data
- Setting Web Intelligence drill options
• Managing and Sharing Web Intelligence
Documents
- Exporting documents from the Rich
Client
- Accessing InfoView
- Managing documents in InfoView
- Sharing documents in InfoView
- Scheduling a Web Intelligence
document
- Setting InfoView preferences
NOTES
• Course length: 2 days
• Recommended additional education:
- BusinessObjects Web Intelligence XI R3:
Advanced Report Design
• Certification not applicable
Business Objects
Business Intelligence - Web Intelligence XI 3.0
BOW320 · QA320V3.0 - BusinessObjects Web Intelligence XI 3.0: Advanced Report Design
DURATION 1 day PRICE € 470 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
report designers who are experienced
Web Intelligence users and who need to
create complex Web Intelligence
documents.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• BusinessObjects Web Intelligence XI 3.0:
Report Design
• Experience designing Web Intelligence
reports
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• BusinessObjects Web Intelligence is a
query, reporting and analysis tool that
allows you to access the data in your
corporate databases directly from
within BusinessObjects Enterprise
InfoView and to present and analyze
this information in a Web Intelligence
document.
• This one-day instructor-led classroom
course is designed to give you the
comprehensive skills needed to apply
alternative query and reporting
techniques when creating complex Web
Intelligence documents.
• After completing this course, you will
be able to create combined queries and
use sub-queries.
• You will also be able to use character
and date string functions, create
variables using "If" logic, and redefine
calculation contexts. The course also
provides an optional appendix
describing how to link Web Intelligence
documents using the OpenDocument
URL command.
CONTENT
• Advanced Query Techniques
- Using combined queries
- Using sub-queries
- Creating a query based on another
query
- Changing data sources
- Using the query drill
- Using query sampling
- Understanding dimensions and details
• Character and Date String Functions
- Using character string functions
- Concatenating different data types
- Using date functions
• Calculation Contexts
- Understanding calculation contexts
- Redefining calculation contexts
• Using If Logic
- Grouping data with If() logic
- Modifying calculation behavior with If()
logic
- Using IF/ELSEIF
• Additional Reporting Techniques
- Using data tracking
- Displaying data restricted by a filter or
ranking
- Using additional report functions
• Linking to Documents
- Linking to documents and URLs in Web
Intelligence
- Creating hyperlinks in the HTML
Report Panel
- Creating hyperlinks in the Web
Intelligence Rich Client and Java Report
Panel
NOTES
• Additional education not applicable
• Certification not applicable
www.sap.nl/education 457
Business Objects
Business Intelligence - Web Intelligence XI 3.0
BOW325 · QA320eV3.0 - BusinessObjects Web Intelligence XI 3.0: Advanced Report Design
DURATION 8 hours PRICE € 225 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
report designers who are experienced
Web Intelligence users and who need to
create complex Web Intelligence
documents.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• BusinessObjects Web Intelligence XI 3.0:
Report Design
• Experience designing Web Intelligence
reports
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• BusinessObjects Web Intelligence is a
query, reporting and analysis tool that
allows you to access the data in your
corporate databases directly from
within BusinessObjects Enterprise
InfoView and to present and analyze
this information in a Web Intelligence
document.
• This one-day instructor-led classroom
course is designed to give you the
comprehensive skills needed to apply
alternative query and reporting
techniques when creating complex Web
Intelligence documents.
458
• After completing this course, you will
be able to create combined queries and
use sub-queries.
• You will also be able to use character
and date string functions, create
variables using "If" logic, and redefine
calculation contexts. The course also
provides an optional appendix
describing how to link Web Intelligence
documents using the OpenDocument
URL command.
CONTENT
• Advanced Query Techniques
- Using combined queries
- Using sub-queries
- Creating a query based on another
query
- Changing data sources
- Using the query drill
- Using query sampling
- Understanding dimensions and details
• Character and Date String Functions
- Using character string functions
- Concatenating different data types
- Using date functions
• Calculation Contexts
- Understanding calculation contexts
- Redefining calculation contexts
• Using If Logic
- Grouping data with If() logic
- Modifying calculation behavior with If()
logic
- Using IF/ELSEIF
• Additional Reporting Techniques
- Using data tracking
- Displaying data restricted by a filter or
ranking
- Using additional report functions
• Linking to Documents
- Linking to documents and URLs in Web
Intelligence
- Creating hyperlinks in the HTML
Report Panel
- Creating hyperlinks in the Web
Intelligence Rich Client and Java Report
Panel
NOTES
• Course length: 1 day
• Additional education not applicable
• Certification not applicable
Business Objects
Business Intelligence - Xcelsius / Xcelsius 2008

BOX210 BOX220
BU271 - Crystal Xcelsius: PM281 - Crystal Xcelsius:
Designing Data Connectivity

2 days 1 day

BOX215 BOX225
BU271e - Crystal Xcelsius: PM281e - Crystal Xcelsius:
Designing Interactive Data Connectivity
Presentations

10 hours 5 hours
BOX255
BU371e - Crystal Xcelsius:
Designing Advanced
Interactive Presentations

7 hours

BOX206 BOX235 BOX245 BOX216 BOX265

BU500rw - BU251e - Crystal Xcelsius: BU255e - Crystal Xcelsius: QW100rw - Query as a PM251e - Crystal Xcelsius:
Crystal Xcelsius: Essentials of Interactive Essentials Web Service (QaaWS): Essentials of Data
What’s New Presentations Basics Connectivity

0,3 hours 7 hours 9 hours 0,3 hours 3 hours

BOX310
XC24008 -
BusinessObjects Xcelsius
2008 Enterprise: Core &
Connectivity
3 days

BOX315
XC241e08 -
BusinessObjects Xcelsius
2008 Enterprise: Core

11 hours

BOX206 · BU500rw - Crystal Xcelsius: What’s New

DURATION 0,3 hours PRICE € 0 (gratis) E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP learners will be able to take advantage of - New: OHLC and Candlestick Charts,
• The target audience for this webinar is the additional features available in the Logarithmic Scale, Chart animation,
Crystal Xcelsius 4 business users and IT Crystal Xcelsius product. List View selector, Panel Set, Single
professionals. CONTENT Value Gauges
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED • Architecture Changes - Changes: order of Single Value
• Working knowledge of Crystal Xcelsius - Integration into the BusinessObjects component folders
4, BusinessObjects Enterprise or Enterprise platform • New Skins
Crystal Reports Server, Live Office, • New Web Connectivity Options - Graphite, Halo and Windows Classic
MS SharePoint and MS Word. - Live Office Connector • New Export Model Feature
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None - SharePoint components NOTES

GOALS • Support for FSCommand • Course length: 15-20 minutes

• This recorded webinar is designed to
provide students with a high- level
overview of the new features and
changes in Crystal Xcelsius 4.5. The
business benefit of this course is that
- FSCommand Button
• New Publishing Options
- BusinessObjects Enterprise, MS
SharePoint, MS Word
• Component Changes & Additions
• Additional education not applicable
• Applicable Certification
- This course is not applicable to any
Business Objects Certified Professional
programs.

www.sap.nl/education 459
Business Objects
Business Intelligence - Xcelsius / Xcelsius 2008
BOX210 · BU271 - Crystal Xcelsius: Designing
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 940 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
the general business user who wants to
create more dynamic and interactive
presentations and reports.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED
• Working knowledge of Microsoft Excel
GOALS
• This 2-day instructor-led course is
designed to provide learners with an
understanding of how to use Crystal
Xcelsius to create interactive models of
complex data that can be used for
presentations and reports.
• By the end of the course, learners will
understand how to use the Crystal
Xcelsius suite of tools, determine which
components best represent different
types of information, and set up the
relationships between these
components. Students will have the
opportunity to practice creating
different types of models through a
series of workshops.
• The business benefit of this course is
that learners will be able to create
models that allow users of all levels of
expertise to understand complex data,
perform what-if analysis in a simple-to-
use format to spotlight problems and
resolve issues, and create presentations
and reports that steal the show.
CONTENT
• Getting to know Crystal Xcelsius
- Define what Crystal Xcelsius is, who
uses it, and what its benefits are
- Define the overall process for creating
interactive models
- Identify the different components of the
Crystal Xcelsius interface
- Define the purpose of the buttons in
the Crystal Xcelsius toolbar a of the
Components, Object Browser, and
Properties windows
- Make changes to the canvas and access
help sources
• Importing Excel files
460
- Describe the best ways to plan your
models and set up your source files
- Differentiate between the file types
involved in the process
- Import a source file
- Define ways to update your models
when your data source changes
• Using charts
- Identify the chart components available
in Crystal Xcelsius and the type of data
they should display
- Describe how to link to sources
- Define when to use data ranges and
series
- Define category axis labels for a chart
- Use the ignore end blanks option works
• Using single value components
- Define the difference between input and
output in models
- Describe how single value components
can add interactivity to model
- Identify the single value components
available in Crystal Xcelsius
- Define how play options can automate
the interactive parts of your models
• Using selectors
- Describe how selectors work
- Define how to use insert in
functionality for selectors
- Identify the selectors available in Crystal
Xcelsius
- Identify the unique requirements
including in setting up to select
multiple items
- Define the process for importing
graphics for selectors
• Applying formatting
- Change individual components
- Change the font for a model
- Apply global styles to a model
- Apply skins to a model
• Publishing models
- Define the different formats available to
publish your models
- Export to all formats
• Setting up alerts
- Identify when alerts are appropriate,
and what components support alerts
- Differentiate between alerts based on
values or percentages
- Describe the process of setting up alerts
• Setting up dynamic visibility
- Define how to make components visible
based on conditions
- Describe the process for setting up
dynamic visibility
- Identify the options available for
dynamic visibility
- Use dynamic visibility on combination
with other functionality
• Adding graphics and animations
- Define the shapes and backgrounds
available in Crystal Xcelsius
- Identify how to import graphics
- Differentiate between embedded and
non-embedded files
- Create multi-layer models by adding
other flash animations to your models
• Using templates
- Access pre-defined templates in Crystal
Xcelsius
- Create your own templates based on
completed models
• Setting up drill-down functionality
- Identify the settings required to enable
drill down functionality
• Using tables
- Define how to use tables to display data
- Define how to use tables as selectors
• Using maps
- Use maps to represent data from
different geographic locations
• Using other components
- Define the special selectors available to
create your models
- Add text to your models
- Link to external sources
• Creating an advanced model
- Build an advanced model using a wide
range of the functionality in Crystal
Xcelsius
NOTES
• Recommened additional education:
Crystal Xcelsius 4.5: Data Connectivity
• Not applicable to any Business Objects
Certified Professional programs.
Business Objects
Business Intelligence - Xcelsius / Xcelsius 2008
BOX215 · BU271e - Crystal Xcelsius: Designing Interactive Presentations
DURATION 10 hours PRICE € 450 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
the general business user who wants to
create more dynamic and interactive
presentations and reports.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED
• Working knowledge of Microsoft Excel
GOALS
• This eight to twelve hour E-learning
course is designed to provide you with
an understanding of how to use Crystal
Xcelsius to create interactive models of
complex data that can be used for
presentations and reports.
• By the end of the course, you will
understand how to use the Crystal
Xcelsius suite of tools, determine which
components best represent different
types of information, and set up the
relationships between these
components.
• You will have the opportunity to
practice creating different types of
models through a series of workshops.
• The business benefit of this course is
that you will be able to create models
that allow users of all levels of expertise
to understand complex data, perform
"what-if" analysis in a simple-to-use
format to spotlight problems and
resolve issues, and create presentations
and reports that steal the show.
CONTENT
• Overview
- Define what Crystal Xcelsius is and who
uses it
- Identify the benefits of using Crystal
Xcelsius
- Define the overall process for creating
interactive models
• Getting to Know Crystal Xcelsius
- Identify the different components of the
Crystal Xcelsius interface
- Define the purpose of the buttons in
the Crystal Xcelsius toolbar
- Define the purpose of the Components,
Object Browser, and Propertie windows
- Make changes to the canvas and access
help sources
• Importing Excel Files
- Describe the best ways to plan your
models and set up your source files
- Differentiate between the file types
involved in the process
- Import a source file
- Define ways to update your models
when your data source changes
• Using Charts
- Identify the chart components available
in Crystal Xcelsius and the type of data
they should display
- Describe how to link to sources
- Define when to use data ranges and
series
- Describe how the ignore end blanks
option works
• Using Single Value Components
- Describe how single value components
can add interactivity to model
- Identify the single value components
available in Crystal Xcelsius
- Define how play options can automate
the interactive parts of your models
• Using Selectors
- Describe how selectors work
- Define how to use “insert in”
functionality for selectors
- Identify the selectors available in Crystal
Xcelsius
- Define the process for importing
graphics for selectors
• Applying Formatting
- Change individual components
- Change the font for a model
- Apply global styles to a model
- Apply skins to a model
• Publishing Models
- Define the different formats available to
publish your models
- Export to all formats
• Setting up Alerts
- Identify when alerts are appropriate,
and what components support alerts
- Describe the process of setting up alerts
- Differentiate between alerts based on
values or percentages
• Setting up Dynamic Visibility
- Define how to make components visible
or not based on conditions
- Identify the options available for
dynamic visibility
- Use dynamic visibility on combination
with other functionality
• Adding Graphics and Animations
- Identify how to use graphics to simulate
components
- Differentiate between embedded and
non-embedded files
- Create multi-layer models by adding
other flash animations to your models
• Using Templates
- Access pre-defined templates in Crystal
Xcelsius
- Create your own templates based on
completed models
• Setting up Drill Down Functionality
- Identify the settings required to enable
drill down functionality
• Using Tables
- Define how to use tables to display data
- Define how to use tables as selectors
• Using Maps
- Use maps to represent data from
different geographic locations
• Using other Components
- Define the special selectors available to
create your models
- Add text to your models
- Link to external sources
• Creating Advanced Models
- Build an advanced model using a wide
range of the functionality in Crystal
Xcelsius
NOTES
• Course length: 8-12 hours
• Recommended additional education:
Crystal Xcelsius 4.5: Data Connectivity
• Applicable certification
- This course is not applicable to any
Business Objects Certified Professional
programs.
www.sap.nl/education 461
Business Objects
Business Intelligence - Xcelsius / Xcelsius 2008
BOX216 · QW100rw - Query as a Web Service (QaaWS)
DURATION 0,3 hours PRICE € 112 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The course is intended for advanced
Xcelsius users and advanced Crystal
Reports users who have a thorough
understanding of BusinessObjects
Enterprise Universes.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• Crystal Xcelsius 4.5: Designing
Interactive Presentations
• Working with BusinessObjects Universe
Designer XI R2
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED
While not required for this course,
experience with these products or
technologies will be helpful:
• Working knowledge of BusinessObjects
Enterprises
• Working knowledge of Universes
• Expertise with building Xcelsius
visualizations
• Working knowledge of databases, XML,
Flash, Live Office and Excel
• 2003 XML maps
GOALS
• This 23 minute webinar is designed to
provide you with an understanding of
how to create models that are linked to
462
live data sources using Query as a Web
Service (QaaWS).
• A series of demonstrations will provide
examples that will help you better
understand how and when to use
QaaWS to populate your Xcelsius
visualizations and Crystal Reports with
up to the minute data.
• The business benefit of this course is
that BusinessObjects Enterprise users
who have installed the XI R2
Productivity Pack will be able to use
Xcelsius and Crystal Reports to create
visualizations and reports that connect
to BusinessObjects Universes with
minimal effort.
CONTENT
• What is Query as a Web Service
- Understand the basics of Web Services
- Obtain the benefits of data provided by a
web service
- Identify the required components of a
Web Service
- What is the QaaWS?
- Advantages of using QaaWS
- Using the QaaWS Publishing Wizard
- Architecture
• Using Query as a Web Service with
Xcelsius
- Identify the components required for
Query as a Web Service
- Understand the workflow for using
Query as a Web Service
- Preparing an Xcelsius model for Query
as a Web Service
- Use the Publish Query as a Web Services
Wizard
- Demonstrate the entire process
• Using Query as a Web Service with
Crystal Reports
- Identify the components required for
Query as a Web Service
- Understand the workflow for using
Query as a Web Service with Crystal
Reports
- Preparing a Crystal Report for Query as
a Web Service
- Use the Publish Query as a Web Services
Wizard
- Demonstration of the entire process
NOTES
• Course length: 23 minutes
• Additional education not applicable
• Certification not applicable
Business Objects
Business Intelligence - Xcelsius / Xcelsius 2008
BOX220 · PM281 - Crystal Xcelsius: Data Connectivity
DURATION 1 day PRICE € 580 STARTING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
the technical user who will connect
existing models to live data sources.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• Crystal Xcelsius 4 .5: Designing
Interactive Presentations
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED
• Working knowledge of databases, XML,
Flash, Live Office and Excel 2003 XML
maps
GOALS
• This one-day instructor-led course is
designed to provide you with an
understanding of how to create models
that are linked to live data sources.
• By the end of the course, you will
understand what methods for
connectivity are available within Crystal
Xcelsius and which connectivity
method to use in specific situations.
• You will have the opportunity to
practice creating different types of
models through a series of workshops.
• The business benefit of this course is
that you will be able to create models
that can act as dashboards, scorecards,
and live reports for a full range of
interactivity and maximum benefit.
CONTENT
• Overview
- Define the overall process for creating
interactive models using Crystal
Xcelsius Designer
- Define the different methods available
for connecting data from liv data
sources to your models
- Identify the components that can be
linked to live data sources
• Using XML and the Use Web Services
Option
- Define how and why the Use Web
Service option is used for connectivity
- Describe the process of configuring a
Crystal Xcelsius model to replace a
range of data with XML data
- Understand the correct structure for
the source XML file
• Using Excel 2003 XML Maps
- Define what Excel 2003 XML maps are,
and describe the process involved in
configuring Crystal Xcelsius to update a
model using Excel 2003 XML maps
- Import an XML file into Excel 2003 and
configure XML maps
- Leverage XML maps from the Excel 2003
file to connect a Crystal Xcelsius model
to an XML file as a live data source
• Using the XML Data Button
- Define what the XML Data Button is
- Describe the process involved in
configuring Crystal Xcelsius to update a
model by using the XML Data Button
to connect to a custom middle tier
- Link a model to a live data source using
the XML Data Button
• Using Flash Variables
- Define what Flash Variables are, and the
process involved in updating a model
using Flash Variables
- Understand how Flash Variables link to
a model
- Pass data from one model to another on
the same HTML page using
FSCommand
• Using the SOAP Web Services
Connector
- Define what the SOAP Web Services
Connector is
- Describe the process involved in
updating a model using the SOAP Web
Services Connector
- Link a model to a live data source using
the SOAP Web Services Connector
• Using the Live Office Connector
- Define the Live Office Connector
- Use a Live Office-enabled Excel
spreadsheet as a data source
NOTES
• Additional education not applicable
• Certification not applicable
www.sap.nl/education 463
Business Objects
Business Intelligence - Xcelsius / Xcelsius 2008
BOX225 · PM281e - Crystal Xcelsius: Data Connectivity
DURATION 5 hours PRICE € 225 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
the technical user who will connect
existing models to live data sources.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• Crystal Xcelsius 4.5: Designing
Interactive Presentations
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED
• Working knowledge of databases, XML,
Flash, Live Office and Excel 2003 XML
maps
GOALS
• This four to six hour E-learning course
is designed to provide you with an
understanding of how to create models
that are linked to live data sources, and
how to pass data from one model to
another on the same HTML page.
• By the end of the course, you will
understand what methods for
connectivity are available within Crystal
Xcelsius and which connectivity
method to use in specific situations.
• You will have the opportunity to
practice creating different types of
models through a series of workshops.
• The business benefit of this course is
that you will be able to create models
that connect to live data sources, and
that pass data from one model to
another on the same HTML page.
CONTENT
• Overview
- Define the overall process for creating
interactive models using Crystal
Xcelsius Workgroup
464
- Define the different methods available
for connecting data from live data
sources to your models
- Identify the components that can be
linked to live data sources
• Using XML and the Use Web Services
Option
- Define how and why the Use Web
Service option is used for connectivity
- Describe the process of configuring a
Crystal Xcelsius model to replace a
range of data with XML data
- Understand the correct structure for
the source XML file
• Using Excel 2003 XML Maps
- Define what Excel 2003 XML maps are
- Describe the process involved in
configuring Crystal Xcelsius to update a
model using Excel 2003 XML maps
- Import an XML file into Excel 2003 and
configure XML maps
- Leverage XML maps from the Excel 2003
file to connect a Crystal Xcelsius model
to an XML file as a live data source
• Using the XML Data Button
- Define what the XML Data Button is
- Describe the process involved in
configuring Crystal Xcelsius to update a
model by using the XML Data Button
to connect to a custom middle tier
- Link a model to a live data source using
the XML Data Button
• Using Flash Variables
- Define what Flash Variables are
- Describe the process involved in
updating a model using Flash Variables
- Understand how Flash Variables link to
a model
- Pass data from one model to another on
the same HTML page using
FSCommand
• Using the SOAP Web Services
Connector
- Define what the SOAP Web Services
Connector is
- Describe the process involved in
updating a model using the SOAP Web
Services Connector
- Link a model to a live data source using
the SOAP Web Services Connector
• Using the Live Office Connector
- Define the Live Office Connector
- Use a Live Office enabled Excel
spreadsheet as a data source
• Integrating with SharePoint
- Define the Xcelsius for SharePoint (XSP)
client components
- Use the SharePoint Consumer,
SharePoint Provider and SharePoint
Param components to enable your
visualizations to communicate with
other web parts
- Deploy and connect your models in
SharePoint
• Using Collaboration
- Define how to set up models for
collaboration
- Identify the collaboration components
available in Crystal Xcelsius
NOTES
• Course length: 4-6 hours
• Additional education not applicable
• Certification not applicable
Business Objects
Business Intelligence - Xcelsius / Xcelsius 2008
BOX235 · BU251e - Crystal Xcelsius: Essentials of Interactive Presentations
DURATION 7 hours PRICE € 180 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
the general business user who wants to
create more dynamic and interactive
presentations and reports.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED
• Working knowledge of Microsoft Excel
GOALS
• This five to nine hour eLearning course
is designed to provide you with an
understanding of how to use Crystal
Xcelsius® to create interactive models of
complex data that can be used for
presentations and reports.
• By the end of the course, you will
understand how to use the Crystal
Xcelsius suite of tools, determine which
components best represent different
types of information, and set up the
relationships between these
components.
• You will have the opportunity to
practice creating different types of
models through a series of workshops.
• The business benefit of this course is
that you will be able to create models
that allow users of all levels of expertise
to understand complex data, perform
"what-if" analysis in a simple-to-use
format to spotlight problems and
resolve issues, and create presentations
and reports that steal the show.
CONTENT
• Introduction
- Learn how to use the Knowledge
Accelerator interface
• Getting to Know Crystal Xcelsius
- Navigate in Crystal Xcelsius
- Crop the canvas
- Define the canvas size
- Find help
• Importing Excel Files
- Import an Excel file
- Re-import an Excel file
• Using Charts
- Define the available charts
- Create a chart with a data range
- Create a chart with series
- Create a chart with ignore end blanks
• Using Single Value Components
- Define the available single value
components
- Create an interactive model
- Create an interactive model with play
options
• Using Selectors
- Define the available selectors
- Create a model with a list box selector
- Create a model with a radio button
selector
- Create a model with a list builder
selector
- Create a model with a graphic selector
• Applying Formatting
- Change the appearance of a component
- Change the font for a model
- Apply a global style to a model
- Apply a skin to a model
• Publishing Models
- Take a snapshot from preview mode
- Export to Flash or HTML
- Publish to PowerPoint, Outlook, Adobe
PDF, and Word
- Exporting to BusinessObjects Enterprise
• Setting up Alerts
- Create a model with a value-based alert
- Create a model with a percentage-based
alert
• Setting up Dynamic Visibility
- Create a model with dynamic visibility
using “insert in”
- Create a model with dynamic visibility
using a formula
• Adding Graphics and Animations
- Add graphics and backgrounds
- Create an interactive map with graphics
- Create a multi-layer model
• Using Templates
- Create a model from a template
- Create a template from a model
• Setting up Drill Down Functionality
- Create a model with a drill down chart
• Using Tables
- Create a model with table output
- Create a model with a table selector
• Using Maps
- Create an interactive map
• Using Other Components
- Define other available components
- Create a model with an interactive
calendar
- Create a model with a local scenario
button
- Add text to a model
- Add a URL to a model
• Creating Advanced Models
- Create an advanced model
NOTES
• Course length: 5-9 hours
• Recommened additional education
- Crystal Xcelsius 4.5: Essentials of Data
Connectivity
• Applicable Certification
- This course is not applicable to any
Business Objects Certified Professional
programs.
www.sap.nl/education 465
Business Objects
Business Intelligence - Xcelsius / Xcelsius 2008
BOX245 · BU255e - Crystal Xcelsius: Essentials
DURATION 9 hours PRICE € 450 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this eLearning is
the general business user who wants to
create more dynamic and interactive
presentations and reports and the
technical user who will connect existing
models to live data sources.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED
• Working knowledge of Microsoft Excel
GOALS
• This six-to-twelve hour eLearning is
designed to provide you with an
understanding of how to use Crystal
Xcelsius™ to create interactive models of
complex data that can be used for
presentations and reports.
• By using this product, you will
understand how to use the Xcelsius
suite of tools, determine which
components best represent different
types of information, set up the
relationships between these
components, and link the models to
live data.
• You will have the opportunity to
practice creating different types of
models through a series of workshops.
• The business benefit of this eLearning is
that you will be able to create models
that allow users of all levels of expertise
to understand complex data, perform
"what-if" analysis in a simple-to-use
format to spotlight problems and
resolve issues, and create presentations
and reports that steal the show.
CONTENT
• Introduction
• Getting to Know Crystal Xcelsius
- Navigate in Crystal Xcelsius
- Crop the canvas
- Define the canvas size
- Find help
- Learn how to use the Knowledge
Accelerator interface
• Importing Excel Files
- Import an Excel file
- Re-import an Excel file
466
• Using Charts
- Define the available charts
- Create a chart with a data range
- Create a chart with series
- Create a chart with ignore end blanks
• Using Single Value Components
- Define the available single value
components
- Create an interactive model
• Using Selectors
- Define the available selectors
- Create a model with a list box selector
- Create an interactive model with play
options
- Create a model with a radio button
selector
- Create a model with a list builder
selector
- Create a model with a graphic selector
• Applying Formatting
- Change the appearance of a component
- Change the font for a model
- Apply a global style to a model
- Apply a skin to a model
• Publishing Models
- Take a snapshot from preview mode
- Export to Flash or HTML
- Publish to PowerPoint, Outlook, Adobe
PDF and Word
- Export to BusinessObjects Enterprise
• Setting up Alerts
- Create a model with a value-based alert
- Create a model with a percentage-based
alert
• Setting up Dynamic Visibility
- Create a model with dynamic visibility
using “insert in”
- Create a model with dynamic visibility
using a formula
• Adding Graphics and Animations
- Add graphics and backgrounds
- Create an interactive map with graphics
- Create a multi-layer model
• Using Templates
- Create a model from a template
- Create a template from a model
• Setting up Drill-Down Functionality
- Create a model with a drill-down chart
• Using Tables
- Create a model with table output
- Create a model with a table selector
• Using Maps
- Create an interactive map
• Using Other Components
- Define other available components
- Create a model with an interactive
calendar
- Create a model with a local scenario
button
- Add text to a model
- Add a URL to a model
• Creating Advanced Models
- Create an advanced model
• Using XML and the Use Web Service
Option
- Link to live data using XML and the Use
Web Service option
• Using Excel 2003 XML Maps
- Link to live data using Excel 2003 XML
maps
- Refresh data using the XML Map
Refresh component
• Using the XML Data Button
- Link to live data using the XML Data
Button
- Refresh data using the XML Data
Button refresh options
• Using Flash Variables
- Link to live data using Flash Variables
- Use the FSCommand component
• Using the SOAP Web Service Connector
- Link to live data using the SOAP Web
Service Connector
• Using the Live Office Connector
- Use a Live Office spreadsheet as a data
source
• Integrating with SharePoint
- Add Xcelsius visualizations as
SharePoint web parts
- Use parameters in SharePoint
visualizations
• Using Collaboration
- Create a model with collaboration
components
• Using Query as a Web Service (QaaWS)
- Creating a standard query using QaaWS
Business Objects
Business Intelligence - Xcelsius / Xcelsius 2008
- Creating a prompted query using
QaaWS
- Creating a list of values query using
QaaWS
- Populating a chart using QaaWS
- Populating a selector using QaaWS
- Generating dynamic models using
QaaWS
BOX255 · BU371e - Crystal Xcelsius: Designing Advanced Interactive Presentations
DURATION 7 hours PRICE € 450 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
business users who have some
experience with Crystal Xcelsius 4.5
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED
Experience with:
• Crystal Xcelsius 4.5
• Microsoft Excel functions and logic
GOALS
• This six- to nine-hour E-learning course
is designed to give you the
comprehensive skills and in-depth
knowledge needed to design advanced
interactive presentations using Crystal
Xcelsius components and Microsoft
Excel logic.
• This media-rich course includes expert
audio and video commentary,
interactive simulations, and a self-paced
final activity.
• You should take this course to learn
about performing ad hoc analysis and
advanced scenario analysis.
• You will also learn strategies for
working with live data and working
with large data sets.
• The business benefit of this course is
that you will have more options for
presenting data using Crystal Xcelsius.
• In addition, you will learn
troubleshooting techniques and best
- Personalizing models using BOE
security
NOTES
• Course length: 6-12 hours
• Recommended additional education
- Crystal Xcelsius 4.5: Designing
Interactive Presentations
- Crystal Xcelsius 4.5: Data Connectivity
practices for design and deployment.
CONTENT
• Reviewing How Crystal Xcelsius Works
- Define the steps to publish a Crystal
Xcelsius model
- Explain Crystal Xcelsius design and
runtime workflows
- Explain the role of Excel and Excel best
practices
• Reviewing Crystal Xcelsius Key
Concepts
- Use Charts for visualization
- Use Selectors for interactivity
- Build dynamic visibility to create a
multi-layer robust application
- Formats for publishing models
• Using Advanced Components and
Techniques
- Perform ad hoc analysis and advanced
scenario analysis
- Build an intelligent dashboard with
ranking logic
- Troubleshoot dashboards
- Create advanced navigation logic
- Save a scenario
• Using Advanced Visualization and
Layout Methods
- Create hotspots using an image as a
component
- Move multiple rows of data
- Provide direction with labels and a Help
popup
• Applicable Certification
- This course is not applicable to any
Business Objects Certified Professional
programs.
- Build models with enhanced graphics
and backgrounds
• Use Design and Deployment Best
Practices
- Describe Crystal Xcelsius design and
deployment best practices
• Working with Live Data and Large Data
Sets
- Explain strategies for working with large
data sets
- Filter and sort data
- Create a multilayer dashboard
- Use prompts and connectivity for ad
hoc analysis
• End of Course Challenge
- In the end of course challenge you will
work with Excel and Crystal Xcelsius
using the skills and techniques you have
learned in the course to solve a business
problem.
NOTES
• Course length: 6-9 hours
• Additional education not applicable
• Certification not applicable
www.sap.nl/education 467
Business Objects
Business Intelligence - Xcelsius / Xcelsius 2008
BOX265 · PM251e - Crystal Xcelsius: Essentials of Data Connectivity
DURATION 3 hours PRICE € 450 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
the technical user who will connect
existing models to live data sources.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• Crystal Xcelsius 4.5: Essentials of
Interactive Presentations
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED
• Working knowledge of Microsoft Excel
• Working knowledge of databases, XML,
Flash, Excel 2003 XML maps, Live Office
and Microsoft SharePoint
GOALS
• This two to five hour eLearning course
is designed to provide you with an
understanding of how to create models
that are linked to live data sources, and
how to pass data from one model to
another on the same HTML page.
• By the end of the course, you will
understand what methods for
connectivity are available within Crystal
Xcelsius® and which connectivity
method to use in specific situations.
468
• You will have the opportunity to
practice creating different types of
connectivity through a series of
simulations.
• The business benefit of this course is
that you will be able to create models
that connect to live data sources, and
that pass data from one model to
another on the same HTML page.
CONTENT
• Introduction
- Learn how to use the Knowledge
Accelerator interface
• Using XML and the Use Web Service
Option
- Link to live data using XML and the Use
Web Service option
• Using Excel 2003 XML Maps
- Link to live data using Excel 2003 XML
maps
- Refresh data using the XML Map
Refresh component
• Using the XML Data Button
- Link to live data using the XML Data
Button
- Refresh data using the XML Data
Button refresh options
• Using Flash Variables
- Link to live data using Flash Variables
- Pass data from one model to another on
the same HTML page using
FSCommand
• Using the SOAP Web Service Connector
- Link to live data using the SOAP Web
Service Connector
• Using the Live Office Connector
- Use a Live Office spreadsheet as a data
source
• Integrating with SharePoint
- Add Xcelsius visualizations as
SharePoint web parts
• Using Collaboration
- Create a model with collaboration
components
NOTES
• Course length: 2-5 hours
• Additional Education not applicable
• Certification not applicable
Business Objects
Business Intelligence - Xcelsius / Xcelsius 2008

BOX310 · XC24008 - BusinessObjects Xcelsius 2008 Enterprise: Core & Connectivity

DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1410 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP • A series of interactive content, • Adding Interactivity to a Model

• The course is intended for
inexperienced BusinessObjects Xcelsius
Enterprise 2008 users who need to
acquire proficiency with building
interactive visualizations based on
Microsoft Excel workbooks.
• Users of Xcelsius Present 2008, Xcelsius
Engage 2008, and Xcelsius Engage -
Server 2008 may find this course useful,
but should first consider a course
intended for their specific software.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED
• Experience with Microsoft Excel
demonstrations, examples and review
quizzes will help you better understand
how to use Xcelsius.
• The business benefit of this course is
that users with data in Microsoft Excel
workbooks will be able to quickly create
visualizations and dashboards with
minimal effort.
CONTENT
• Creating a Model
- Producing interactive visualizations of
your data
- Getting around in Xcelsius
- Working with your Excel workbook
- Using selectors
- Adding dynamic visibility
- Troubleshooting
• Creating a Connected Model
- Using live data sources
- Connecting to XML Data
- Connecting to data using an existing
Web Service
- Connecting to Crystal Reports data
- Connecting to BusinessObjects
Universes using Query as a Web Service
- Using Live Office data
- Using other connectivity components
NOTES

GOALS - Visualizing data with charts • Additional education not applicable

• This three-day instructor-led course is
designed to provide you with an
understanding of how to create
interactive visualizations based on
Microsoft Excel workbooks using
BusinessObjects Xcelsius Enterprise
2008.
- Using Xcelsius Components • Certification not applicable
- Distributing your Xcelsius Visualization
- Applying best practices for designing
models
• Formatting a Model
- Applying formatting options
- Using themes and templates to apply
formatting

www.sap.nl/education 469
Business Objects
Business Intelligence - Xcelsius / Xcelsius 2008
BOX315 · XC241e08 - BusinessObjects Xcelsius 2008 Enterprise: Core
DURATION 11 hours PRICE € 742 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The course is intended for
inexperienced BusinessObjects Xcelsius
Enterprise 2008 users who need to
acquire proficiency with building
interactive visualizations based on
Microsoft Excel workbooks.
• Users of Xcelsius Present 2008, Xcelsius
Engage 2008, and Xcelsius Engage -
Server 2008 may find this course useful,
but should first consider a course
intended for their specific software.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED
• Experience with Microsoft Excel
GOALS
• This 18-hour E-learning is designed to
provide you with an understanding of
how to create interactive visualizations
based on Microsoft Excel workbooks
using BusinessObjects Xcelsius
Enterprise 2008.
470
• A series of animations, demonstrations
and interactive activities will help you
better understand how to create,
publish, and distribute visualizations.
• The business benefit of this course is
that users with data in Microsoft Excel
workbooks will be able to quickly create
visualizations and dashboards minimal
effort.
CONTENT
• Creating a Model
- Producing interactive visualizations of
your data
- Getting around in Xcelsius
- Working with your Excel workbook
- Visualizing data with charts
- Using Xcelsius Components
- Applying best practices for designing
models
• Formatting a Model
- Applying formatting options
- Using themes and templates to apply
formatting
• Adding Interactivity to a Model
- Using selectors
- Adding dynamic visibility
- Troubleshooting
• Distributing an Xcelsius Visualization
- Preparing to distribute your
visualization
- Distributing your visualization
- Creating a snapshot from the preview
mode
NOTES
• Course length: 6-18 hours
• Additional education not applicable
• Level, Delivery, and Duration
- This online computer based training
course is a Core level course.
- You should expect to spend six to
eighteen hours to complete all of the
content presented in this course.
• Certification not applicable
Business Objects
Data Services - Data Federator XI R2 / Data Insight XI R2

BOT210
DM240R2 - Business
Objects Data Federator:
Designing On-Demand
Federated Views
2 days

BOT215
DM240eR2 - Business
Objects Data Federator:
Designing On-Demand
Federated Views
9 hours

BOT220
DM240R2A - BOBJ Data
Federator Accelerated:
Designing On-Demand
Federated Views
2 days

BOI245
DM250eR2 -
BusinessObjects Data
Insight: Data Assessment -
Core Concepts
6 hours

BOI245 · DM250eR2 - BusinessObjects Data Insight: Data Assessment - Core Concepts

DURATION 6 hours PRICE € 562 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP CONTENT - Create a custom query

• The target audience for this course is
data managers who are new to Data
Insight, and who are responsible for
inspecting, measuring, and analysing
data to help business users understand
the defects in the data and the impact of
those defects upon the business.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This 4- to 8-hour E-learning course is
designed to provide learners with an
understanding of how to perform data
assessment tasks using Data Insight,
create Data Insight reports, and
implement automated and continuous
monitoring.
• Data Insight Overview
- Describe the value of data quality
assessment technology
- Describe data quality assessment in Data
Insight XI
• Getting Started with Data Insight
- Start the Data Insight XI Components
- Create a new assessment project
- Connect to data sources
- Manage projects
- Set options
• Planning Assessment Tasks with Data
Insight
- Describe the Data Insight analysis
process
- Identify the different tasks available in
Data Insight
• Create reports
- Describe the value of Data Insight
reports
- Identify the available report types
- Describe how to use reports to
communicate with stakeholders and
decision makers
• Automation and Continuous
Monitoring
- Describe the value of continuous
monitoring
- Schedule batched or individual tasks
- Identify why and how to set alerts
- Set automated email notifications
- Export reports and results
- Create trend reports
NOTES

• This course also provides the learners
with an understanding of the Data
Insight analysis process, and how to use
reports to communicate with
stakeholders and decision makers.
- Create a data profile
- Determine if additional profile tasks are
needed based on the data profile results
- Create a column query
- Create a referential integrity
• Course length: 4-8 hours
• Additional education not applicable
• Certification not applicable.

www.sap.nl/education 471
Business Objects
Data Services - Data Federator XI R2 / Data Insight XI R2
BOT210 · DM240R2 - BusinessObjects Data Federator: Designing On-Demand Federated Views
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1160 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
data managers who are new to Data
Federator and who are responsible for
providing a federated view of distributed
and heterogeneous data.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED
Experience with:
• Database management and data
warehousing skills
• ETL technology such as BusinessObjects
Data Integrator XI
GOALS
• This two-day instructor-led course
teaches you how to create virtual tables
using BusinessObjects Data Federator XI
R2, manage metadata definitions, create
views to generate the SQL queries and
define the mapping between the source
tables and the virtual table.
• This course also describes how to draft
and deploy Data Federator projects and
use tools to administrate the Data
Federator Query Server.
472
CONTENT
• Introducing Data Federator
- Data Federator concepts
- Data Federator architecture
- How to use the Data Federator Designer
- How data federation differs from
extraction, transformation, load (ELT)
technology
- The benefits of Data Federator
• Determining the Data to Include in the
Target Table
- What data to include in the target table
- How to create a new target table
- How to create a target by copying a data
source schema
• Mapping the Source Data to the Target
Table
- The basic mapping rule concepts
- How to create mapping rules with
multiple data sources
- How to create and administer a lookup
table in a mapping rule
- Multiple mapping rule management
techniques
• Refining the Mapping Rule Definitions
- How cases and aggregates are used to
refine mapping rules
- How to create case statement formulas
- The benefits and caveats of combining
case statements
- Aggregate formula concepts
- How to manage multiple mapping rules
on a single target table
• Ensuring the Integrity of Target Data
- Data integrity concepts
- How to resolve key conflicts
- Integrity checking procedures and best
practice
• Managing Projects
- Manage Data Federator projects
- Manage project evolution
• Administer the Query Server
- The Query Server Architecture
- Managing Data Federator users and
resources
NOTES
• Additional education not applicable
• Applicable certification
- This course is not applicable to any
Business Objects Certified Professional
programs.
Business Objects
Data Services - Data Federator XI R2 / Data Insight XI R2
BOT215 · DM240eR2 - Business Objects Data Federator: Designing On-Demand Federated Views
DURATION 9 hours PRICE € 562 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
data managers who are new to Data
Federator and who are responsible for
providing a federated view of distributed
and heterogeneous data.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED
Experience with:
• Database management and data
warehousing skills
• ETL technology such as BusinessObjects
Data Integrator
GOALS
• This eight-to-ten hour E-learning
course is designed to provide you with
an understanding of how to create
virtual tables using Data Federator,
create views to generate the SQL queries
and define the mapping between the
source tables and the virtual table.
• This course also shows you how to
manage draft and deployed Data
Federator projects, as well as how to use
tools to administrate the Data Federator
Query Server.
CONTENT
• Data Federator Concepts
- Describe Data Federator concepts
- Describe Data Federator architecture
- Work with Data Federator Designer
- Explain benefits of Data Federator
• Use Data Sources and Target Tables
- Determine what data to include in your
target tables
- Create a target table from various data
sources
• Create Mapping
- Explain the mapping interface
- Explain the mapping rules
- Create mapping rules with multiple
data sources
- Use a lookup table in a mapping rule
- Manage mapping rules
• Refine Mapping
- Use case statement semantics
- Use case statements to refine mapping
rules
- Use case statement formulas
- Combine case statements
- Use aggregate formulas
- Apply multiple mapping rules on a
single target
• Test Data Integrity
- Define a constraint
- Describe Data Integrity
- Resolve key conflicts
• Manage Projects
- Deploy a Data Federator project
- Create an archived version of a Data
Federator project
- Describe the benefits of using the spiral
methodology
• Use the Query Server
- Explain how the Query Server is part of
Data Federator architecture
- Describe how Data Federator Query
Server administers users and resources
NOTES
• Course length: 8-10 hours
• Additional education not applicable
• Applicable certification
- This course is not applicable to any
Business Objects Certified Professional
programs.
www.sap.nl/education 473
Business Objects
Data Services - Data Federator XI R2 / Data Insight XI R2
BOT220 · DM240R2A - BusinessObjects Data Federator Accelerated: Designing On- Demand Federated Views
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1160 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
data managers who are new to Data
Federator and who are responsible for
providing a federated view of distributed
and heterogeneous data.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED
Experience with:
• Database management and data
warehousing skills
• ETL technology such as BusinessObjects
Data Integrator XI
GOALS
• This two-day instructor-led course
teaches you how to create virtual tables
using BusinessObjects Data Federator XI
R2, manage metadata definitions, create
views to generate the SQL queries and
define the mapping between the source
tables and the virtual table.
• This course also describes how to draft
and deploy Data Federator projects and
use tools to administrate the Data
Federator Query Server.
474
CONTENT
• Lesson 1 - Introducing Data Federator
- Data Federator concepts
- Data Federator architecture
- How to use the Data Federator Designer
- How data federation differs from
extraction, transformation, load (ELT)
technology
- The benefits of Data Federator
• Lesson 2 - Determining the Data to
Include in the Target Table
- What data to include in the target table
- How to create a new target table
- How to create a target by copying a data
source schema
• Lesson 3 - Mapping the Source Data to
the Target Table
- The basic mapping rule concepts
- How to create mapping rules with
multiple data sources
- How to create and administer a lookup
table in a mapping rule
- Multiple mapping rule management
techniques
• Lesson 4 - Refining the Mapping Rule
Definitions
- How cases and aggregates are used to
refine mapping rules
- How to create case statement formulas
- The benefits and caveats of combining
case statements
- Aggregate formula concepts
- How to manage multiple mapping rules
on a single target table
- How to use a target table as a datasource
- Complex mapping rules workshop
• Lesson 5 - Ensuring the Integrity of
Target Data
- Data integrity concepts
- How to resolve key conflicts
- Integrity checking procedures and best
practice
• Lesson 6 - Managing Projects
- Manage Data Federator projects
- Merge Data Federator projects
- Manage project evolution
• Lesson 7 - Administer the Query Server
- The Query Server Architecture
- Managing Data Federator users and
resources
NOTES
• Additional education not applicable
• Applicable certification
- This course is not applicable to any
Business Objects Certified Professional
programs.
Business Objects
Data Services - Data Integrator IX R1/R2 / XI 3.0

BOI200 Business Objects

Certified Professional -
DM370R2 - Business BusinessObjects
Objects Data Integrator: Data Integrator
Extracting, Transforming
and Loading Data
4 days

BOI205
DM370e - BusinessObjects
Data Integrator: Extracting,
Transforming and Loading
Data
14 hours

BOI226
DM375rwR2 - Business
Objects Data Integrator:
Additional Administration
Topics
1 hour

BOI235
DM377eR2 -
BusinessObjects
Composer: ETL Design

3 hours

BOI236
DM376rwR2 -
Data Integrator XI R2:
Other

0,5 hour

BOI300
DI320V3.0 -
BusinessObjects
Data Integrator XI 3.0:
Core Concepts
3 days

www.sap.nl/education 475
Business Objects
Data Services - Data Integrator IX R1/R2 / XI 3.0
BOI200 · DM370R2 - BusinessObjects Data Integrator: Extracting, Transforming and Loading Data
DURATION 4 days PRICE € 2320 STARTING DATES 10-mrt-09
TARGET GROUP
• This course is designed for individuals
responsible for implementing ETL
projects (batch-mode), administering
and managing projects that involve
Data Integrator.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED
Experience with:
• Knowledge of data warehousing and
ETL concepts, SQL language
• Microsoft SQL Server
• Using functions, elementary procedural
programming and flow-of-control
statements, for example: If Then Else,
and While Loop statements
It is recommended you review these
articles prior to attending the course:
www.rkimball.com/html/articles.html
• Data Warehouse Fundamentals:
- TCO Starts with the End User
- Fact Tables and Dimension Tables
• Data Warehouse Architecture and
Modeling:
- There Are No Guarantees
• Architecture/Modeling:
- Advance Dimension Topics - Surrogate
Keys
- It’s Time for Time
- Slowly Changing Dimensions
• Architecture/Modeling: Industry- and
Application-Specific Issues:
- Think Globally, Act Locally
• Data Staging and Data Quality
- Dealing with Dirty Data
GOALS
• BusinessObjects Data Integrator XI
enables the implementation of ETL
(Extract, Transform, and Load) projects
from disparate data sources to deliver
more timely and accurate data that end
users in an organization can trust.
• In this four-day course, you will learn
about batch data transformation jobs,
techniques for capturing changes in
data, handling errors, multi-user
environment tasks, administering server
476
and migration basics.
• The course also shows you how to use
tools to audit, profile data, and manage
metadata to assist in the
implementation of an ETL project.
• Activities in this course focus on the
tools and features discussed in each
lesson and enable you to create
dimensions and a fact table. You will
have a chance to apply different
concepts learned from a few combined
lessons in two one-hour comprehensive
workshops.
• At the end of the course, you will be
able to put into practice data flow
design concepts in a final two-three
hour workshop.
• As a business benefit, by being able to
create efficient ETL projects, you can
use the transformed data to help
improve operational and supply chain
efficiencies, enhance customer
relationships, create new revenue
opportunities, and optimize return on
investment from enterprise
applications.
CONTENT
• Datawarehousing Concepts
- Describe dimensional modeling
• Understanding Data Integrator
- Describe components, management
tools, and the development process
- Explain object relationship
• Defining Source and Target Metadata
- Create a database datastore and import
metadata
- Create a new file format and handle
errors in file formats
• Validating, Tracing and Debugging Jobs
- Use descriptions and annotations
- Validate and trace jobs
- Use View Data and the Interactive
Debugger
• Creating a Batch Job
- Create a project, job, work flow, and
data flow
- Use the Query transform in a data flow
- Use template tables
• Using Built-in Transforms and Nested
Data
- Use the case, merge, and validation
transforms
- Import metadata from XML documents
- Use the XML_Pipeline in a data flow
• Using Built-in Functions
- Use date and time functions and the
date generation transform to bu a
dimension table
- Use the lookup functions to look up
status in a table
- Use match pattern functions to
compare input strings to patterns
- Use database type functions to return
information on data sources
• Using Data Integrator Scripting
Language and Variables
- Explain differences between global and
local variables
- Create global variables and custom
functions
- Use strings and variables in Data
Integrator scripting language
• Capturing Changes in Data
- Use Changed Data Capture (CDC) with
time-stamped sources
- Create an initial and delta load job
- User history preserving transforms
• Handling Errors and Auditing
- Recover a failed job
- Create a manual, recoverable work flow
- Define audit points, rules and actions
on failures
• Supporting a Multi-user Environment
- Describe terminology and repository
types in a multi-user environment
- Create and activate the central
repository
- Work with objects in the central
repository
• Migrating Projects
- Create multiple configurations in a
datastore
- Work with projects in the central
repository
Business Objects
Data Services - Data Integrator IX R1/R2 / XI 3.0
- Create a secure central repository
- Implement and modify group
permissions
• Using the Administrator
- Add a repository and user roles
- Set the job status interval and log
retention period
- Execute, schedule, and monitor batch
jobs
BOI205 · DM370e - BusinessObjects Data Integrator: Extracting, Transforming and Loading Data
DURATION 14 hours PRICE € 562 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• This course is designed for individuals
responsible for implementing projects
involving the extraction, transformation
and loading of data in batch jobs,
administering and managing projects
that involve Data Integrator.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• Knowledge of data warehousing
concepts
• Experience with Microsoft SQL Server
• Knowledge of normal forms of data and
SQL language
• Experience using functions, elementary
procedural programming and flow-of-
control statements. For example: If,
Else, While, Loop
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• Using Data Integrator you can create
jobs that Extract, Transform and Load
(ETL) data from disparate sources to
deliver more timely and accurate data
that end users at your organization can
trust.
• This course provides activity
simulations that walk you through
setting a connection to your data
source, creating and troubleshooting an
ETL batch job, managing metadata, and
using the Web Administrator to
administer batch jobs.
• As a business benefit, by being able to
create efficient ETL jobs, your end users
can use this transformed data to help
improve operational and supply chain
efficiencies, enhance customer
- Understand architecture, load balance
index, and job execution in server
groups
• Profiling Data
- Set up the Data Profiler and users
- Submit a profiling task
- Monitor profiling tasks in the
Administrator
relationships, create new revenue
opportunities, and optimize your return
on investment from enterprise
applications.
• After completing the course, learners
will be able to:
- Describe BusinessObjects Data
Integrator architecture
- Define source and target metadata to
import into your ETL jobs
- Create a batch job
- Validate, trace and debug batch jobs.
- Use built-in Transforms and Functions
to support data flow movement
requirements
- Optimize data flow
- Use variables, parameters and Data
Integrator Scripting Language
- Capture Changes in Data
- Handle errors and exceptions
- Support a multi-user environment,
administer batch jobs and migrate
projects using datastore and system
configurations
- Manage metadata
CONTENT
• Data Warehousing Concepts
- Describe normal forms of data
- Explain dimensional modeling
• Understanding Data Integrator
- Understand Data Integrator
Architecture and Interface and
development process
- Define objects
- Explain relationships between objects,
projects and jobs
- Describe the Data Integrator
• Managing Metadata
- Import and export metadata
- Use Metadata Reports
NOTES
• Additional education not applicable
• Certification not applicable
development process
• Defining Source and Target Metadata
- Use datastores
- Import metadata
- Define a file format
• Creating a Batch Job
- Create a batch job
- Create a simple data flow
- Add source and target objects to a data
flow
- Use the Query transform
- Execute the job
- Add a new table to a data flow using
template tables
• Validating, Executing and Debugging
Jobs
- Use descriptions and annotations
- Validate and trace jobs
- Debug jobs
• Using built-in Transforms
- Describe built-in transforms
- Create an embedded data flow
• Using built-in Functions
- Define and use built-in functions
- Use functions in expressions
• Optimizing Data Flow
- Optimize source and target based
performance
- Optimize job performance
- Understand table partitioning and
parallel execution in data flows
• Using Variables, Parameters and
Scripting
- Understand Variables,
• Parameters and DI Scripting Language
- Script a custom function
• Capturing Changes in Data
www.sap.nl/education 477
Business Objects
Data Services - Data Integrator IX R1/R2 / XI 3.0
- Use source-based and targetbased
• Changed Data Capture
- Handling Errors and Exceptions
- Understand recovery systems
- Process data with problems
• Supporting a multi-user environment
- Set up and work in a multiuser
environment
- Describe common tasks in a multi-user
environment
• Migrating Projects between Design, Test
and Production Phases
BOI226 · DM375rwR2 - BusinessObjects Data Integrator: Additional Administration Topics
DURATION 1 hour PRICE € 112 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is for
those in charge of performing functions
in a data integration project. Roles
include DBA, ETL designers, Data
Manager, Data Warehouse Architect.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• General understanding of
BusinessObjects Data Integrator XI R2
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This is a two webinar bundle that covers
Impact Analysis and BusinessObjects
Metadata Manager.
• Business Objects now has complete end-
to-end Impact Analysis support for the
XI platform. We can combine Data
Integrator and BI metadata to answer
data lineage and transformation
questions. Graphical reports can be used
to show end-to-end lineage/impact.
• This 57 minute webinar will introduce
you to the concepts of 'Impact Analysis',
and will show you how to setup Data
Integrator and BusinessObjects
Enterprise in order to demonstrate the
main features. BusinessObjects
478
- Understand migration mechanisms and
tools
- Use datastore configurations and
migration
- Migrate a multi-user and single user
environment
- Use datastore configurations to improve
job portability
• Using the Web Administrator
- Use the Web Administrator
- Implement central repository security
- Manage batch jobs with the
Metadata Manager is a new product
that will actively collect and unify BI,
ETL, relational database, and third-party
metadata.
• The goal is to allow IT staff
organizations to easily view, analyze and
explore metadata through a thin-client
web application. IT staff will understand
all the metadata used in their projects,
and understand the relationships
between metadata objects.
• Information about structure, end-to-
end impact analysis, report-to- source
data lineage will be available. With
Metadata Manager, organizations will be
able to deliver trusted data for
compliance requirements and improved
decision making as well as rapidly
decrease the cost of change
management for their project.
• In this webinar, you will learn what
Metadata is and what the
BusinessObjects Metadata Manager is.
An installation demo and the various
Integrators that can be used will be
covered. There will be a demo of the
Metadata Administrator. Finally, there
Administrator
- Understand server groups
• Managing metadata
- Understand metadata
- Use metadata reporting
- Use the Metadata Reporting tool
NOTES
• Certification applicability
- This course is not part of a
BusinessObjects Enterprise Certified
Professional certification.
will be some information on reporting,
and look at a demo of the Metadata
Explorer.
CONTENT
• Impact Analysis
- Understand the Concept of Impact
Analysis
- Understand Data Lineage
- Demonstrate how Impact Analysis can
be used
- Deploy and troubleshoot Metadata
Collector
- Create Impact Analysis reports
• BusinessObjects Metadata Manager
- What is Metadata?
- Metadata Manager
- Integrators
- Reporting
NOTES
• Course length: 1 hour 40 minutes
• Additional education not applicable
• Applicable certification
- This offering is not applicable to any
Business Objects Certified Professional
programs.
Business Objects
Data Services - Data Integrator IX R1/R2 / XI 3.0
BOI235 · DM377eR2 - BusinessObjects Composer: ETL Design
DURATION 3 hours PRICE € 283 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
business users involved in data
warehouse planning.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED
• Experience with Data warehousing
concepts
GOALS
• This three-to-four hour E-learning
course is designed to provide an
overview of how to use Composer to
plan data warehousing projects.
• You should take this course to learn
how to create and manage projects,
users, documents, and table mappings
to support the process of creating
Extract, Transform, and Load (ETL)
designs.
BOI236 · DM376rwR2 - Data Integrator XI R2: Other
DURATION 0,5 hour PRICE € 112 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is for
those in charge of performing data
cleansing operations in a data
integration project: DBA, ETL designers,
Data Manager, Data Warehouse
Architect.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• Knowledge of BusinessObjects Data
Intergator XI R2
• The business benefit of this course is
that the business users who own the
data involved in creating a data
warehouse will be able to effectively
collaborate on the design of the ETL
project.
CONTENT
• Getting Started with Composer
- Define the purpose of Composer
- Identify the key features of Composer
- Navigate the Composer user interface
• Setting Up Composer
- Create and modify task lists to use as
templates for ETL projects
- Upload documents
- Describe Composer security and the
user roles available
- Create user accounts
- Create connections to data systems
• Knowledge of BusinessObjects
Enterprise XI R2
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• In this webinar, you will receive an
overview of what data cleansing is as
well as take a look at First Logic Data
Cleansing Integration with
BusinessObjects Data Integrator.
• We will then cover Data Integrator
Firstlogic Transforms such as Name
- Profile and analyze source data
• Using Composer
- Create projects in Composer
- Assign users to projects and tasks
- Upload project documentation
- Create mappings between source and
target datastores
- Explore and report on projects
- Export projects to use as starter jobs in
other ETL tools, such as Data Integrator
NOTES
• Course length: 3-4 hours
• Additional education not applicable
• Applicable certification
- This course is not applicable to any
Business Objects Certified Professional
programs.
Parsing, Address Enhancement, and
Match Merge.
CONTENT
• Data Quality Overview
• Firstlogic Integration
• Data Integrator Firstlogic Transforms
NOTES
• Course length: 36 minutes
• Applicable certification
- None.
www.sap.nl/education 479
Business Objects
Data Services - Data Integrator IX R1/R2 / XI 3.0
BOI300 · DI320V3.0 - BusinessObjects Data Integrator XI 3.0: Core Concepts
DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1740 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• This course is designed for individuals
responsible for implementing,
administering, and managing data
integration projects.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• Knowledge of data warehousing and
ETL concepts
• Experience with MySQL and SQL
language
• Experience using functions, elementary
procedural programming, and flow-of-
control statements such as If-Then-Else
and While Loop statements
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED
It is recommended you review these
articles prior to attending the course:
www.rkimball.com/html/articles.html
• Data Warehouse Fundamentals:
- TCO Starts with the End User
- Fact Tables and Dimension Tables
• Data Warehouse Architecture and
Modeling:
- There Are No Guarantees
• Architecture/Modeling:
- Advance Dimension Topics - Surrogate
Keys
- It’s Time for Time
- Slowly Changing Dimensions
• Architecture/Modeling: Industry- and
Application-Specific Issues:
- Think Globally, Act Locally
• Data Staging and Data Quality
- Dealing with Dirty Data
GOALS
• BusinessObjects Data Integrator XI 3.0
enables you to integrate disparate data
sources to deliver more timely and
accurate data that end users in an
organization can trust.
480
• In this three-day course, you will learn
about creating, executing and
troubleshooting batch jobs, using
functions, scripts and transforms to
change the structure and formatting of
data, handling errors, and capturing
changes in data.
• As a business benefit, by being able to
create efficient data integration projects,
you can use the transformed data to
help improve operational and supply
chain efficiencies, enhance customer
relationships, create new revenue
opportunities, and optimize return on
investment from enterprise
applications.
CONTENT
• Describing Data Services
- Describe the purpose of Data Services
- Describe Data Services architecture
- Define Data Services objects
- Use the Data Services Designer interface
• Defining Source and Target Metadata
- Use datastores
- Use datastore and system configurations
- Define file formats for flat files
- Define file formats for Excel files
- Define file formats for XML files
• Creating Batch Jobs
- Work with objects
- Create a data flow
- Use the Query transform
- Use target tables
- Execute the job
• Troubleshooting Batch Jobs
- Use descriptions and annotations
- Validate and tracing jobs
- Use View Data and the Interactive
Debugger
- Use auditing in data flows
• Using Functions, Scripts, and Variables
- Define built-in functions
- Use functions in expressions
- Use lookup functions
- Use variables and parameters
- Use Data Services scripting language
- Script a custom function
• Using Platform Transforms
- Describe platform transforms
- Use the Map Operation transform
- Use the Validation transform
- Use the Merge transform
- Use the Case transform
- Use the SQL transform
• Setting up Error Handling
- Set up recoverable work flows
• Capturing Changes in Data
- Update data over time
- Use source-based CDC
- Use target-based CDC
• Using Data Integrator Transforms
- Describe the Data Integrator transforms
- Use the Pivot transform
- Use the Hierarchy Flattening transform
- Describe performance optimization
- Use the Data Transfer transform
NOTES
• Additional education not applicable
• Applicable certification
- This course is a core offering in the
Business Objects Certified Professional -
BusinessObjects Data Integrator
program.
Business Objects
Data Services - Data Integrator Accelerated XI R2

BOI210
DM370R2A - BOBJ Data
Integrator Accelerated:
Extracting, Transforming
and Loading Data
4 days

BOI215
DM370eR2A - BOBJ Data
Integrator Accelerated:
Extracting, Transforming
and Loading Data
24 hours

BOI225
DM373eR2 -
BusinessObjects Data
Integrator Accelerated:
New Features
5 hours

BOI216
DM374rwR2A -
Data Integrator XI R2

1 hour

www.sap.nl/education 481
Business Objects
Data Services - Data Integrator Accelerated XI R2
BOI210 · DM370R2A - BusinessObjects Data Integrator Accelerated: Extracting, Transforming and Loading Data
DURATION 4 days PRICE € 2320 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• This course is designed for individuals
responsible for implementing ETL
projects (batch-mode), administering
and managing projects that involve
Data Integrator.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• Knowledge of data warehousing and
ETL concepts, SQL language
• Experience with Microsoft SQL Server
• Experience using functions, elementary
procedural programming and flow-of-
control statements, for example: If then
Else, and While Loop statements
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED
It is recommended you review these
articles prior to attending the course:
www.rkimball.com/html/articles.html
• Data Warehouse Fundamentals:
- TCO Starts with the End User
- Fact Tables and Dimension Tables
• Data Warehouse Architecture and
Modeling:
- There Are No Guarantees
• Architecture/Modeling:
- Advance Dimension Topics - Surrogate
Keys
- It’s Time for Time
- Slowly Changing Dimensions
• Architecture/Modeling: Industry- and
Application-Specific Issues:
- Think Globally, Act Locally
• Data Staging and Data Quality
- Dealing with Dirty Data
GOALS
• BusinessObjects Data Integrator XI R2
Accelerated enables the implementation
of ETL (Extract, Transform, and Load)
projects from disparate data sources to
deliver more timely and accurate data
that end users in an organization can
trust.
• In this four-day course, you will learn
about batch data transformation jobs,
techniques for capturing changes in
data, handling errors, multi-user
environment tasks, administering server
and migration basics.
482
• The course also shows you how to use
tools to audit, profile data, and manage
metadata to assist in the
implementation of an ETL project.
• Activities in this course focus on the
tools and features discussed in each
lesson and enable you to create
dimensions and a fact table.
• You will have a chance to apply
different concepts learned from a few
combined lessons in two one-hour
comprehensive workshops.
• At the end of the course, you will be
able to put into practice data flow
design concepts in a final two-three
hour workshop.
• As a business benefit, by being able to
create efficient ETL projects, you can
use the transformed data to help
improve operational and supply chain
efficiencies, enhance customer
relationships, create new revenue
opportunities, and optimize return on
investment from enterprise
applications.
CONTENT
• Data Warehousing Concepts
- Describe dimensional modeling
• Understanding Data Integrator
- Describe components, management
tools, and the development process
- Explain object relationship
• Defining Source and Target Metadata
- Create a database datastore and import
metadata
- Create a new file format and handle
errors in file formats
• Validating, Tracing and Debugging Jobs
- Create a Project, Job, Work Flow and
Data Flow with the Query transform
- Understand the Target Table Editor
• Creating a Batch Job
- Understand push-down operations
- Describe descriptions and annotations
- Validate and trace Jobs
- Use the View Data and the Interactive
Debugger
• Using Built-in Transforms and Nested
Data
- Use the Case, Merge, Validation,
Data_Transfer, and Date_Generation
transforms
- Import metadata from XML and DTD
documents
- Understand operations on nested data
• Using Built-in Functions
- Define built-in functions
- Use the Gen_Row_Num_By_Group,
Is_Group_Changed functions
- Create surrogates
- Use the lookup functions to look up
status in a table
- Use match pattern functions to
compare input strings to patterns
• Using Data Integrator Scripting
Language and Variables
- Explain differences between global and
local variables
- Create global variables and custom
functions
- Use strings and variables in Data
Integrator scripting language
• Capturing Changes in Data
- Use changed data capture (CDC) with
time-stamped sources
- Create an initial and delta load job
- Use history preserving transforms
• Handling Errors and Auditing
- Recover a failed job
- Create a manual, recoverable work flow
- Define audit points, rules and actions
on failures
• Supporting a Multi-user Environment
- Describe terminology and repository
types in a multi-user environment
- Create and activate the central
repository
- Work with objects in the central
repository
• Migrating Projects
- Create multiple configurations in a
datastore
- Work with Projects in the central
repository
- Create a secure central repository
Business Objects
Data Services - Data Integrator Accelerated XI R2
- Implement and modify group
permissions
• Using the Administrator
- Add a repository and user roles
- Set the job status interval and log
retention period
- Execute, schedule, and monitor batch
jobs
BOI215 · DM370eR2A - BusinessObjects Data Integrator Accelerated: Extracting, Transforming and Loading Data
DURATION 24 hours PRICE € 1125 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• This course is designed for individuals
responsible for implementing ETL
projects (batch-mode), administering
and managing projects that involve
Data Integrator.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• Knowledge of data warehousing and
ETL concepts, SQL language
• Experience with Microsoft SQL Server
• Experience using functions, elementary
procedural programming and flow-of-
control statements, for example: If then
Else, and While Loop statements
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED
It is recommended you review these
articles prior to attending the course:
www.rkimball.com/html/articles.html
• Data Warehouse Fundamentals:
- TCO Starts with the End User
- Fact Tables and Dimension Tables
• Data Warehouse Architecture and
Modeling:
- There Are No Guarantees
• Architecture/Modeling:
- Advance Dimension Topics - Surrogate
Keys
- It’s Time for Time
- Slowly Changing Dimensions
• Architecture/Modeling: Industry- and
Application-Specific Issues:
- Think Globally, Act Locally
• Data Staging and Data Quality
- Dealing with Dirty Data
GOALS
• BusinessObjects Data Integrator XI R2
Accelerated enables the implementation
- Understand architecture, load balance
index, and job execution in server
groups
• Profiling Data
- Set up the Data Profiler and users
- Submit a profiling task
- Monitor profiling tasks in the
Administrator
of ETL (Extract, Transform, and Load)
projects from disparate data sources to
deliver more timely and accurate data
that end users in an organization can
trust.
• In this four-day course, you will learn
about batch data transformation jobs,
techniques for capturing changes in
data, handling errors, multi-user
environment tasks, administering server
and migration basics.
• The course also shows you how to use
tools to audit, profile data, and manage
metadata to assist in the
implementation of an ETL project.
• Activities in this course focus on the
tools and features discussed in each
lesson and enable you to create
dimensions and a fact table.
• You will have a chance to apply
different concepts learned from a few
combined lessons in two one-hour
comprehensive workshops.
• At the end of the course, you will be
able to put into practice data flow
design concepts in a final two-three
hour workshop.
• As a business benefit, by being able to
create efficient ETL projects, you can
use the transformed data to help
improve operational and supply chain
efficiencies, enhance customer
relationships, create new revenue
opportunities, and optimize return on
investment from enterprise
applications.
• Managing Metadata
- Import and export metadata
- Use Metadata Reports
NOTES
• Additional education not applicable
• Certification not applicable
CONTENT
• Data Warehousing Concepts
- Describe dimensional modeling
• Understanding Data Integrator
- Describe components, management
tools, and the development process
- Explain object relationship
• Defining Source and Target Metadata
- Create a database datastore and import
metadata
- Create a new file format and handle
errors in file formats
• Validating, Tracing and Debugging Jobs
- Create a Project, Job, Work Flow and
Data Flow with the Query transform
- Understand the Target Table Editor
• Creating a Batch Job
- Understand push-down operations
- Describe descriptions and annotations
- Validate and trace Jobs
- Use the View Data and the Interactive
Debugger
• Using Built-in Transforms and Nested
Data
- Use the Case, Merge, Validation,
Data_Transfer, and Date_Generation
transforms
- Import metadata from XML and DTD
documents
- Understand operations on nested data
• Using Built-in Functions
- Define built-in functions
- Use the Gen_Row_Num_By_Group,
Is_Group_Changed functions
- Create surrogates
- Use the lookup functions to look up
status in a table
www.sap.nl/education 483
Business Objects
Data Services - Data Integrator Accelerated XI R2
- Use match pattern functions to
compare input strings to patterns
• Using Data Integrator Scripting
Language and Variables
- Explain differences between global and
local variables
- Create global variables and custom
functions
- Use strings and variables in Data
Integrator scripting language
• Capturing Changes in Data
- Use changed data capture (CDC) with
time-stamped sources
- Create an initial and delta load job
- Use history preserving transforms
• Handling Errors and Auditing
- Recover a failed job
- Create a manual, recoverable work flow
- Define audit points, rules and actions
on failures
BOI216 · DM374rwR2A - Data Integrator XI R2
DURATION 1 hour PRICE € 103 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
data managers who are responsible for
data integration and/or data cleansing
functions within their organization.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• Take it Online
• Experience with Data Quality XI R2 and
Data Integrator XI R2.
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This 57-minute webinar details the
integration of Data Quality XI and Data
Integrator and how you can build a
Data Quality job, which can be executed
through Data Integrator. Data
Integrator provides enhanced data
484
• Supporting a Multi-user Environment
- Describe terminology and repository
types in a multi-user environment
- Create and activate the central
repository
- Work with objects in the central
repository
• Migrating Projects
- Create multiple configurations in a
datastore
- Work with Projects in the central
repository
- Create a secure central repository
- Implement and modify group
permissions
• Using the Administrator
- Add a repository and user roles
- Set the job status interval and log
retention period
- Execute, schedule, and monitor batch
jobs
quality capabilities through a tight
integration with Data Quality XI
(formerly Firstlogic IQ8).
• The previous data quality integration
option offered three standard data
cleansing transforms exposed within
Data Integrator. Configuration was
done via text files. This enhanced
integration will allow users access to a
complete set of data quality capabilities
offered by Data Quality XI.
• The business benefit of this webinar
bundle is that you will be able to build
jobs in Data Quality XI and run them
through Data Integrator, taking
advantage of Data Integrator features
and functionality.
- Understand architecture, load balance
index, and job execution in server
groups
• Profiling Data
- Set up the Data Profiler and users
- Submit a profiling task
- Monitor profiling tasks in the
Administrator
• Managing Metadata
- Import and export metadata
- Use Metadata Reports
NOTES
• Course length: 4 days
• Additional education not applicable
• Certification not applicable
CONTENT
• Demonstrate and run a simple Address
Cleanse job
• Convert a job from Data Quality to
Data Integrator
• Create a datastore in Data Integrator
• Extract data from text file in Data
Integrator and load to a template table
• Explain Passthrough
• Troubleshoot jobs that fail
NOTES
• Course length: 57 minutes
• Additional education not applicable
• Applicable certification
- Not applicable to any BusinessObjects
Certified Professional certifications.
Business Objects
Data Services - Data Integrator Accelerated XI R2
BOI225 · DM373eR2 - BusinessObjects Data ntegrator Accelerated: New Features
DURATION 5 hours PRICE € 283 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• This course is designed for individuals
who will be using Data Integrator XI R2
Accelerated and who are responsible for
implementing ETL projects (batch-
mode), administering and managing
projects that involve Data Integrator.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• BusinessObjects Data Integrator XI
R1/R2: Extracting, Transforming and
Loading Data (Windows)
• Experience using Data Integrator XI to
create batch data transformation jobs,
applying techniques for capturing
changes in data, handling errors, multi-
user environment tasks, administering
server and migration basics.
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED
• Experience with auditing tools, data
profiling, and managing metadata is
recommended.
GOALS
• BusinessObjects Data Integrator XI R2
Accelerated introduces many new
features and enhancements.
• In this four-hour course, you will learn
about user interface enhancements,
features to improve developer and
deployment productivity, as well as new
features to improve memory
management and scalability.
• The course will also provide an
overview of the integration of Data
Integrator with Data Quality XI R2.
• As a business benefit, by being able to
take advantage of new Data Integrator
features, you can be more productive
and create ETL projects that are more
scalable and use server resources
efficiently.
CONTENT
• New Features Overview
- Describe the new features of Data
Integrator
• Understanding the User Interface
Enhancements
- Describe the Start Page
- Describe new window docking and
sliding functionality
• Defining Developer and Deployment
Productivity Enhancements
- Create jobs using native Microsoft Excel
support
- Describe improved support for variables
and filenames
- Create jobs with more push-down using
Data_Transfer (ELT)
- Describe new Data Integrator functions
- Use enhanced scheduling and the
BusinessObjects Enterprise scheduler
- Describe improved password
management
• Applying Extreme Scalability and
Robust Memory Management
- Use pageable cache
- Apply self-tuning
- Use grid computing enhancements
- Define persistent cache
• Assuring Trusted Data with Data
Quality XI R2 Integration
- Describe an overview of Data Integrator
and Data Quality integration
functionality
NOTES
• Course length: 4-6 hours
• Additional education not applicable
• Certification not applicable
www.sap.nl/education 485
Business Objects
Data Services - Data Quality XI R2 / XI 3.0

BOQ200
DM323R2 -
BusinessObjects
Data Quality:
Core Concepts
4 days

BOQ205
DM321eR2 -
BusinessObjects
Data Quality:
Core Concepts
12 hours

BOQ300
DQ320V3.0 -
BusinessObjects
Data Quality XI 3.0:
Core Concepts
4 days

BOQ200 · DM323R2 - BusinessObjects Data Quality: Core Concepts

DURATION 4 days PRICE € 1880 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
business users and data managers
responsible for data quality functions
within organizations.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
Working knowledge of:
• Windows conventions
• Basic database concepts
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This four-day instructor-led course is
designed to give you the ability to
quickly build and share business rules
across the enterprise through an
intuitive user interface and data quality
templates.
• In this course, you will learn data
quality concepts, use BusinessObjects
Data Quality XI to create projects,
examine and practice the concepts of
matching and consolidating records, as
well as using several transforms to
perform operations on data such as
cleansing, formatting, sorting and
filtering.
• After completing this course you will be
able to apply your knowledge and
centralize the discovery, correction, and
prevention of data quality issues.
CONTENT
• Understanding Data Quality Concepts
- Data profiling
- Parsing, standardizing and cleansing
data
- Enhancing data
• Introduction to Data Quality XI R2
- Identifying the components of Data
Quality XI R2
• Using the Project Architect
- Understanding the Project Architect
interface
- Creating a basic project
- Using readers and writers
• Using transforms
- Using the Address Cleanse transform
- Using the Formatter transform
- Using the Filter transform
- Using the Data Cleanse transform
- Using the Universal Data Cleanse
transform
- Using the Sorter transform
- Using the Search and Replace transform
- Using the Scan and Split transform
- Using the Copier transform
- Using the User-Defined transform
- Using reports
• Matching and Consolidating Records
- Understanding break group concepts
- Understanding match concepts
- Understanding post-match concepts
- Tailoring the match process to your
data
NOTES
• Additional education not applicable
• Applicable certification
- This course is not applicable to any
Business Objects Certified Professional
programs.

486
Business Objects
Data Services - Data Quality XI R2 / XI 3.0
BOQ205 · DM321eR2 - BusinessObjects Data Quality: Core Concepts
DURATION 12 hours PRICE € 705 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
business users responsible for data
quality functions within organizations.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
Working knowledge of:
• Windows conventions
• Basic database concepts
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This six-to-eighteen hour E-learning
course is designed to give you the ability
to quickly build and share business rules
across the enterprise through an
intuitive user interface and data quality
templates.
• In this course, you will learn data
quality concepts, use BusinessObjects
Data Quality XI to create projects,
examine and practice the concepts of
matching and consolidating records, as
well as use several transforms to
perform operations on data such as
cleansing, formatting, sorting and
filtering.
• Using the skills you acquire in this
course, you may assist your
organization by discovering, correcting
and preventing of data quality issues.
CONTENT
• Understanding Data Quality Concepts
- Data profiling
- Parsing, standardizing and cleansing
data
- Enhancing data
• Introduction to Data Quality XI R2
- Identifying the components of Data
Quality XI
• Using the Project Architect
- Understanding the Project Architect
interface
- Creating a basic project
- Using readers and writers
• Using Transforms
- Using the Address Cleanse transform
- Using the Formatter transform
- Using the Filter transform
- Using the Data Cleanse transform
- Using the Sorter transform
- Using the Search and Replace transform
- Using the Scan and Split transform
- Using the Copier transform
- Using the User-Defined transform
- Using reports
• Matching and Consolidating Records
- Understanding break group concepts
- Understanding match concepts
- Understanding post-match concepts
- Tailoring the match process to your
data
NOTES
• Course length: 6-18 hours
• Additional education not applicable
• Applicable certification
- This course is not applicable to any
Business Objects Certified Professional
programs.
www.sap.nl/education 487
Business Objects
Data Services - Data Quality XI R2 / XI 3.0
BOQ300 · DQ320V3.0 - BusinessObjects Data Quality XI 3.0: Core Concepts
DURATION 4 days PRICE € 1880 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• This course is designed for individuals
responsible for implementing,
administering, and managing data
quality projects.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
Working knowledge of:
• Windows conventions
• Basic database concepts
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• BusinessObjects Data Quality XI 3.0
enables you to parse, cleanse,
standardize, consolidate, and enhance
records.
• In this four-day course, you will learn
about creating, executing and
troubleshooting batch jobs, using
functions, scripts and transforms to
change the structure and formatting of
data, handling errors, cleansing address
and firm data, and match and
consolidate records.
• As a business benefit, by being able to
create efficient data quality projects,
you can use the transformed data to
help improve operational and supply
chain efficiencies, enhance customer
relationships, create new revenue
opportunities, and optimize return on
investment from enterprise
applications.
488
CONTENT
• Describing Data Services
- Describe the purpose of Data Services
- Describe Data Services architecture
- Define Data Services objects
- Use the Data Services Designer interface
• Defining Source and Target Metadata
- Use datastores
- Use datastore and system configurations
- Define file formats for flat files
- Define file formats for Excel files
- Define file formats for XML files
• Creating Batch Jobs
- Work with objects
- Create a data flow
- Use the Query transform
- Use target tables
- Execute the job
• Troubleshooting Batch Jobs
- Use descriptions and annotations
- Validate and tracing jobs
- Use View Data and the Interactive
Debugger
- Use auditing in data flows
• Using Functions, Scripts, and Variables
- Define built-in functions
- Use functions in expressions
- Use lookup functions
- Use variables and parameters
- Use Data Services scripting language
- Script a custom function
• Using Platform Transforms
- Describe platform transforms
- Use the Map Operation transform
- Use the Validation transform
- Use the Merge transform
- Use the Case transform
- Use the SQL transform
• Setting up Error Handling
- Set up recoverable work flows
• Using Data Quality Transforms
- Describe the most commonly used Data
Quality transforms
• Using Address Cleanse
- Explain the business need for Address
Cleanse transforms
- Describe strategies for Address Cleanse
transforms
- Describe global address data and USA
address data that does not require USPS
certification
- Complete an Address Cleanse transform
• Using Data Cleanse
- Explain the business need for Data
Cleanse transforms
- Describe strategies for Data Cleanse
transforms
- Complete a Data Cleanse transform
- Understand parsing dictionaries
- Customize dictionary entries
• Matching and Consolidating Data
- Describe match concepts
- Describe break group concepts
- Describe post-match concepts
- Tailor the match process to your data
NOTES
• Additional education not applicable
• Certification not applicable
Business Objects
Data Services - Information Quality XI R2 / Postal Soft XI R2

BOG210 BOG220
DM220 - DM225 -
Information Quality Suite: Information Quality Suite:
Fundamentals Advanced

3 days 3 days

BOG230
DM221 -
Postalsoft Fundamentals:
Presort and Label Studio

2 days

BOG210 · DM220 - Information Quality Suite: Fundamentals

DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1740 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP essential functions and features of each - Standardization/assignment options

• The audience for this course is new application as well as ample practice - Input/output files
users of Firstlogic software. The course time with each application. - Reports
has been designed to enable data CONTENT - Lists
processors, who are not necessarily IT • Fundamentals of Data Quality and - Basics of search and replace
professionals, to use Firstlogic software Mailing, File Preparation and ACE - Basics of scan and split
to set-up and run data cleansing, - Roles and trends in data quality - Basics of modify PW fields
matching and/or postal compliance - An integrated data flow approach to - Basics of UMD
processes on their corporate or client Firstlogic processes • Match / Consolidate
data. - Input capabilities and requirements – - Overview of MCD functionality
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED files and fields - MCD dictionaries and directories
• Working knowledge of your operating - Using FirstPrep to generate support files - Match criteria
system - FirstPrep utilities - Match options
• Understanding of the USPS - Overview of ACE functionality - Input/output files
requirements - ACE dictionaries and directories - Reports
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None - Data parsing - Lists
GOALS - Standardization options - Priority
• This three-day course provides you with - Input/output files - Basics of multiple level matching
functional training and hands- on - Reports - Basics of association matching
experience with Firstlogic’s suite of data - Multi-line options - Basics of constant key
quality solutions: FirstPrep, ACE, - ACE wizard NOTES
DataRight IQ and Match/Consolidate. - ACE utilities • Additional education not applicable
• The focus of the course is on real-world - Job file orientation • Certification not applicable
scenarios and practical interaction with • DataRight IQ / DataRight
the Firstlogic applications, providing - Overview of DTR IQ functionality
explanations and demonstrations of the - DTR IQ dictionaries and directories

www.sap.nl/education 489
Business Objects
Data Services - Information Quality XI R2 / Postal Soft XI R2

BOG220 · DM225 - Information Quality Suite: Advanced

DURATION 3 days PRICE € 1740 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP GOALS - Custom rules files

• The audience for this course is data • This three-day course provides you with • Match / Consolidate
processors who already have a working instruction and practice on - Multi-level matching
knowledge of Firstlogic software and methodologies for using the advanced - Adjusted matching
want a more in-depth knowledge of features and capabilities of Firstlogic’s - Multi-criteria matching
complex data cleansing and matching DataRight IQ and Match/Consolidate - Relational matching
techniques in order to: software applications. - Constant key
- Integrate advanced pattern matching or • You will gain a greater understanding of - Group posting
data consolidation into the data use cases and through detailed - Super lists
cleansing process; explanations and demonstrations know - Unparsed data
- Employ complex multi-level match the techniques for configuring the - Non-US data
strategies; software to produce results that require - Report options
- Supplant standard match processes with the use of these advanced functions. - Custom sorting
an extended algorithm for record CONTENT - Extended matching
comparisons. • DataRight IQ NOTES

PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED - Search and replace • Additional education not applicable

• Working knowledge of Firstlogic
products
• Ability to set-up all fundamental
functionalities of Firstlogic products
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
- Scan and split • Certification not applicable
- Modify PW fields
- Custom parsing dictionary
- Custom capitalization dictionary
- User defined pattern matching

BOG230 · DM221 - Postalsoft Fundamentals: Presort and Label Studio

DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1160 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP • The focus of the course is on real-world - Mailflow

• The audience for this course is new scenarios and practical interaction with - On-demand reporting
users of Firstlogic software. The course the Firstlogic applications, providing - Mail.dat
has been designed to enable data explanations and demonstrations of the - Optional procedures
processors, who are not necessarily IT essential functions and features of each - Confirm program
professionals, to use Firstlogic software application as well as ample practice • Label Studio
to set-up and run data cleansing, time with each application. - Overview of Label Studio functionality
matching and/or postal compliance CONTENT - Label Studio job file set-up
processes on their corporate or client • Presort - Label design
data. - PST job set-up - Print barcodes
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED - Versions - Print break marks
• Working knowledge of your operating - Entry points - Tray and sack tags
system - Presort schemes NOTES

• Understanding of the USPS - Reports • Additional education not applicable

requirements - Ride-along enclosures • Certification not applicable
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None - Segments
GOALS - Walk sequence
• This two- day course provides you with - Firm packaging
functional training and hands- on - Palletization
experience with Firstlogic’s suite of data - Foreign pieces
quality solutions: Presort and Label - Split output
Studio. - Output selection

490
Business Objects
Data Services - Text Analysis VXI R1/R2

BOZ220 BOZ230
TA205 - ThingFinder TA210 - ThingFinder
Fundamentals Customization

1 day 2 days

BOZ210
TA200 - Introduction to
Inxight

1 day

BOZ240
TA215 - Metadata
Management System

1 day

BOZ250
TA220 - Categorizer
Workbench

2 days

BOZ210 · TA200 - Introduction to Inxight

DURATION 1 day PRICE € 470 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP can solve • Summarizer

• The target audience for this course is - Introduce Inxight’s product suite - What does Summarizer do?
anyone who is new to the Inxight • SmartDiscovery Awareness Server - Summarizer Demo
products. - What is SmartDiscovery Awareness • Categorizer
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None Server? - What is categorization?
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None - Describe federated search - Why do categorization?
GOALS - Viewing Search Results - How does categorization work?
• The half-day course provides you with a - Describe page tracking - What is taxonomy?
high-level overview of the features and - Describe alerts - Categorizer Workbench
benefits of the Inxight Software • SmartDiscovery Analysis Server - Categorizer Workbench Demo
products with demonstrations for most - What is SmartDiscovery Analysis Server? • Metadata Management System
products. - When is SmartDiscovery Analysis Server - What is Metadata Management System?
• You will also gain some background on recommended? - Document Search Results
the company formerly known at • SmartDiscovery Extraction Server - Viewing a Document
Inxight Software Inc. - What is SmartDiscovery Extraction - Entity Relationships
• After completing this course, you will Server? - Metadata Management System Demo
be able to: - Describe SmartDiscovery Core • Visualization
- Identify high-level facts about Inxight - SDX Crunchers - Visualization Products
Software Inc.; - SDX Administration - StarTree
- Describe the purpose of the Inxight - Resource Store - TableLens
products; - Processing Management System - TimeWall
- Identify high-level features of Inxight - When is SDX recommended? - Visualization Demos
products. • ThingFinder NOTES
CONTENT - What is ThingFinder? • Additional education not applicable
• About Inxight Software, Inc. - What is Entity Extraction? • Certification not applicable
- Describe high-level facts about Inxight - ThingFinder Predefined Entities
Software Inc - What is ThingFinder Professional?
- Identify who Inxight’s customers are - ThingFinder Workbench
- Define the problems Inxight software - ThingFinder Demo
www.sap.nl/education 491
Business Objects
Data Services - Text Analysis VXI R1/R2
BOZ220 · TA205 - ThingFinder Fundamentals
DURATION 1 day PRICE € 580 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
system administrators, developers,
project managers and implementers.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This half-day instructor-led course
provides you with an introduction to
entity extraction concepts and the
ThingFinder products.
• The course includes an overview of
ThingFinder and ThingFinder
Professional features, ThingFinder
processing, ThingFinder output, name
catalogs, and configuration.
• This course is a prerequisite for the
ThingFinder Customization course.
• After completing this course, you will
be able to:
- Describe how ThingFinder works;
- Define entity extraction;
- Describe the use of entity extraction;
- Identify ThingFinder products;
492
- Describe ThingFinder processing;
- Identify pre-defined ThingFinder entity
types;
- Describe the ThingFinder Extraction
Pack;
- Interpret basic ThingFinder output;
- Identify the ThingFinder configuration
files.
CONTENT
• Introduction to Entity Extraction and
ThingFinder
- Entity extraction concepts
- SmartDiscovery Servers
- ThingFinder Standard
- ThingFinder Professional
- Introduction to name catalogs
• ThingFinder Processing
- ThingFinder architecture
- ThingFinder process
- Demonstration of ThingFinder
• Understanding Entity Selection
- ThingFinder Pre-defined entity types
- Entity types and relations for
government
- Entity selection principles
- Hands on exercises
• Exploring the Extraction Pack
- Purpose and benefits of extraction packs
- Common noun mentions
- Pre-defined extraction pack rules
• Performing Post Processing
- Conjecturing
- Relevance ranking
- Aliasing
- ISO normalization
- Hands on exercises
• Demystifying ThingFinder Output
- ThingFinder output elements
• Configuring ThingFinder
- Configuration files affecting
ThingFinder
NOTES
• Additional education not applicable
• Certification not applicable
Business Objects
Data Services - Text Analysis VXI R1/R2
BOZ230 · TA210 - ThingFinder Customization
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1160 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
anyone who will be developing custom
rules for ThingFinder.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• ThingFinder Fundamentals
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED
• Experience with ThingFinder
GOALS
• This two-day instructor-led course
provides you with an overview of the
ThingFinder Customization
functionality.
• The course includes an introduction to
the ThingFinder Workbench, step-by-
step instructions for creating custom
extraction rules and name catalogs
using the ThingFinder Workbench and
detailed instructions for using the
Custom Grouper User Language.
• After completing this course, you will
be able to:
- Describe the ThingFinder Workbench;
- Define the process for creating rules
using ThingFinder Workbench;
- Identify how to create and modify name
catalogs;
- Describe the capabilities of CGUL;
- Describe how to create entity rules.
CONTENT
• Introduction to Customization
- Determining if customization is needed
for ThingFinder
• Configuration Adjustments
- Configuration files that can be modified
• ThingFinder Workbench 2.1
- Describe the purpose of ThingFinder
Workbench
- Describe the features of ThingFinder
Workbench • #define (aka Character Patterns)
- Identify process for creating rules in - Define the purpose of #define
ThingFinder workbench - Using the #define in rules
- Hands-on exercises to create simple - Hands-on exercises creating and using
rules #define directive
• Name Catalog Concepts • Token Groups and Subgroups
- Define name catalogs - Describe token groups and subgroups
- Identify name catalog concepts - Describe how to use token groups and
- Describe use of wildcards in name subgroups in rules
catalogs - Hands-on exercises creating sub-rules
• Creating Name Catalogs with and rules
ThingFinder Workbench • Defining Lexicons (aka Wordlists)
- Creating name catalogs - Describe lexicons
- Compiling name catalogs in - Using lexicons in ThingFinder
ThingFinder Workbench Workbench
- Testing name catalogs in ThingFinder - Hands-on exercises using lexicons
Workbench • Defining Scope
- Hands-on exercises to create name - Purpose of scope
catalogs - Scope syntax
• Creating Name Catalogs using a Text - Paragraph filter
Editor • Expression Markers
- Describe the process for creating name - What are expression markers?
catalogs with a text editor - Using expression markers in CGUL
- Identify the syntax for the name catalog - Hands-on exercises creating rules with
compiler command line expression markers
• Introduction to CGUL Language • CGUL Miscellany
- What is CGUL? - Block markers
- Describe the rule-writing process - Key/Value pairs
- Using Markup - Character classifiers
- Hands-on exercises playing with - Final hands-on exercise
Markup • Deploying CGUL Rules
• A Simple Rule Example - CGUL rules
- Steps for creating rules using Graphical NOTES
Editor and Text Editor • Additional education not applicable
- Hands-on exercises creating Hello World • Certification not applicable
rules
• CGUL Building Blocks
- Key elements used to write CGUL rules
- Components of tokens
www.sap.nl/education 493
Business Objects
Data Services - Text Analysis VXI R1/R2
BOZ240 · TA215 - Metadata Management System
DURATION 1 day PRICE € 580 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
analysts, content operations and data
quality personnel, librarian and
knowledge management personnel, and
other specialized knowledge workers.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This half-day instructor-led course is
designed to give you in-depth
instruction on the capabilities of the
Metadata Editor.
• Hands-on exercises provide you with
practice in completing all the tasks that
can be performed using the application.
494
• After completing this course, you will
be able to:
- Describe the features of Metadata
Management System;
- Perform Metadata Editor tasks.
CONTENT
• Introduction to Metadata Management
System 1.0
- Describe what Metadata Management
System is
- Identify benefits of Metadata
Management System
• Exploring the MMS User Interface
- Describe how to access MMS
- Identify the elements of the MMS user
interface
• MMS Tasks and Concepts
- Define basic MMS terminology
- Identify the tasks that can be performed
on entities in MMS
• Searching with MMS
- Search with MMS
• Working with Entity Mentions and
Entities
• Previewing Changes
- Describe the tasks that can be
performed with global entities in MMS
- Work with entities
NOTES
• Additional education not applicable
• Certification not applicable
Business Objects
Data Services - Text Analysis VXI R1/R2

BOZ250 · TA220 - Categorizer Workbench

DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1160 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP - Why use categorization? - Entity Operators

• The target audience for this course is for - How does categorization work? - Hands-on exercise
anyone who will be using the - What is taxonomy? • Hybrid Process
Categorizer Workbench to develop - Describe a simple taxonomy - What is the hybrid approach?
taxonomies. - Describe a more complex taxonomy - Examples of using the hybrid approach
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None • Introduction to Categorizer Workbench - Hands-on exercise
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None - What is Categorizer Workbench? • Suggest Rule Process
GOALS - How does Categorizer Workbench use a - Identify when Suggest Rule is used
• This two-day instructor-led course taxonomy - Describe how to use Suggest Rule
provides you with an overview of the - Learn-by-Example categorization feature
Categorizer Workbench functionality. • Learn by Example Process - Hands-on exercise
• The course includes an introduction to - Identify the process for developing a • Testing a Taxonomy
categorization and the Categorizer taxonomy using LBE - Defining a test set
Workbench and how to develop - Create a taxonomy - Creating a test set
taxonomies using the Categorizer - Build or rebuild training set index - Adding documents to a test set
Workbench. - Create and edit the taxonomy hierarchy - Creating a new test document
• After completing this course, you will - Assign documents to categories - Importing a test set
be able to: - Auto-generate rules - Assign test set document to category
- Describe what Categorizer Workbench - The testing process - Remove test document from category
is; - Hands-on exercise - Generating Overview Report for a test
- Describe how Categorizer Workbench • Defining Category Properties set
works; - Describe the purpose and function of - Hands-on exercise
- Identify how to control relevant category properties • Understanding Accuracy Measures
documents in a taxonomy; • Taxonomy Query Language: Boolean - Tools to help optimize categories
- Define the process for using Categorizer - Operators - Precision
Workbench for developing a taxonomy - What is the Taxonomy Query Language? - Recall
using Learn by Example; - Boolean Operators - F-Score
- Describe how to use the Taxonomy - Hands-on exercise - Beta
Query Language; • Taxonomy Query Language: Scoring - Tuning a taxonomy
- Identify how to create a hybrid rule; Operators • Deploying Taxonomies
- Identify how to develop rules using - Scoring Operators - What is the process for deploying
Suggest Rule; - Hands-on exercise taxonomy?
- Define how to use the test set feature; • Taxonomy Query Language: Logical • Category Miscellany
- Describe Precision, Recall and F-Scores Operators - Miscellaneous categorizer features
used by Categorizer Workbench. - Logical Operators NOTES

CONTENT - Hands-on exercise • Additional education not applicable

• Introduction to Categorization • Taxonomy Query Language: Entity • Certification not applicable
- What is categorization? Operators

www.sap.nl/education 495
Business Objects
Enterprise Performance Management - Extended Analytics

BOF110
FM216 - BOBJ Extended
Analytics: Creating and
Administrating the Cubes

1 day

BOF120
FM217 - BusinessObjects
Extended Analytics:
Creating and Managing
Reports via Excel
1 day

BOF130
FM218 -BusinessObjects
Extended Analytics:
Creating and Managing
Reports via the Web
2 days

BOF235
FM219e - BusinessObjecs
Analytics: E-learning for
Web End-Users

4 hours

BOF110 · FM216 - BusinessObjects Extended Analytics: Creating and Administrating the Cubes
DURATION 1 day PRICE € 580 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP GOALS NOTES

• The target audience for this course is
system administrators, and power users.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
• In this one day instructor led course
you will learn how to create cubes based
on Cartesis Finance data. You will:
- Build cubes with high performance.
- Synchronize data between Cartesis
Finance and the cubes generated.
• Additional education (To be successful,
you must have working knowledge of:)
- Microsoft Excel
- Cartesis Finance
• Certification not applicable

BOF120 · FM217 - BusinessObjects Extended Analytics: Creating and Managing Reports via Excel
DURATION 1 day PRICE € 580 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED - Apply the most effective method of

• The target audience for this course is for
project team members and, more
generally, for anyone involved in
creating or updating the software’s
configuration and in the day-to-day
running of Cartesis Planning for
management.
• Working knowledge of Microsoft Excel
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• In this one day instructor led course
you will understand the cube used to
create reports using Analyzer and
publish reports to Excel or the Web
using the Reporter. You will:
building Excel Ad-hoc Analysis.
- Publish, organize and distribute Excel
analysis on a web server.
NOTES
• Additional education not applicable
• Certification not applicable

496
Business Objects
Enterprise Performance Management - Extended Analytics

BOF130 · FM218 -BusinessObjects Extended Analytics: Creating and Managing Reports via the Web
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1160 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP modules and understand their technical - Import, organize and distribute reports
• The target audience for this course is architecture. Successfully work with the on the Web Dashboard.
power users. Analytics operation cycle, manage user NOTES

PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• Working knowledge of Microsoft Excel
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• In this two day instructor led course
learn how to identify the Analytics
rights. Create Analytics solutions, views • Additional education not applicable
and cubes, create reports, publish • Certification not applicable
reports, and create dashboards. You
will:
- Apply the most effective method for
building Web Ad-Hoc Analysis.

BOF235 · FM219e - BusinessObjecs Analytics: E-learning for Web End-Users

DURATION 4 hours PRICE € 405 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP tables and charts and customize • Creating charts

• The target audience for this course is
Analytics end-users who perform ad-
hoc analysis and can customize
dashboard pages.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• For this course, you need to be familiar
with the web environment and with
data analysis.
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This 4-hour E-learning course is
designed to give learners the
comprehensive skills and knowledge to
apply the most effective method for
performing web ad-hoc analysis.
• Learners should take this course to
learn how to connect and navigate in
the Analytics Web Interface, manipulate
dashboard pages.
CONTENT
• Getting started
- How to connect to Analytics Dashboard
and to navigate in the site.
• Performing ad-hoc analysis
- How to perform a simple ad-hoc
analysis. You will learn to select data,
drill down and up, add and remove
dimensions and members.
• Enhancing ad-hoc analysis
- How to easily enhance a crosstab by
adding automatic totals, sorting
members and displaying percentages.
• Advance ad-hoc analysis
- How to apply filters, exceptions, and
alerts to ad-hoc reports.
- How to display charts select portions of
the crosstab to chart and modify the
chart appearance.
• Saving and sharing analysis
- How to save ad-hoc reports and share it
with other.
• Using Smart Reporting
- How to use the Report mode.
• Customizing My Page
- How to customize an Analytics Web
Private page.
NOTES
• Additional education not applicable
• Certification not applicable

www.sap.nl/education 497
Business Objects
Enterprise Performance Management - Planning XI

BOP245
PL443e - BusinessObjects
Planning: Dashboard
Basics

4 hours

BOP246 BOP210 BOP216

PB410rw - PL340 - Planning: Plan PB355rw - Planning XI:
BusinessObjects Planning Reporting Fundamentals Working with Fixed and
XI Variable Reports

0,5 hour 2 days 1 hour

BOP215 BOP226
PB345e - BusinessObjects PB360w - BusinessObjects
Planning: Plan Reporting Planning XI
Fundamentals

2 hours 1 hour

BOP236
PB365rw -
BusinessObjects Planning:
BOP220 XI
PL440 - Planning: System 1 hour
and Budgeting
Fundamentals

2 days

BOF225 BOP235
FM215e - BusinessObjects PL442e - BusinessObjects
Planning: Planning for End- Planning: Budgeting Basics
Users

3 hours 6 hours

BOP205
PB210e - BusinessObjects
Planning: Essentials

4 hours

498
Business Objects
Enterprise Performance Management - Planning XI

BOF225 · FM215e - BusinessObjects Planning: Planning for End-Users

DURATION 3 hours PRICE € 405 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP CONTENT - Printing

• The target audience for this course is for • First Steps - Saving and exiting
users who will enter or approve data for - Open a report - Demo and Practice
one or several units. - Select dimension members • Advanced Planning Features
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None - Web Analyst interface - Projection
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None - Demo and Practice - Demo
GOALS • Key Concepts - Workback
• This 3-hour E-learning solution gives - Multi-dimensional data - Demo
students instant access to a complete - Hierarchies and roll-up - Practice
self-paced training program at anytime - Consolidation - Tasks
of the day. - Scenario • Unit Data Roll-Up
• A virtual instructor leads the • Navigate In The Reports - Why
participant through the course, using - What a report is - How
interactive presentations of core - Drill-down • Workflow
application features and practical - Demo - Data validation
exercises based on application • Data Entry - Workflow
simulations. - Data entry: rules NOTES

• The E-learning also provides self-
assessment with positive feedback. The
objectives of this E-learning course
include entering data in Cartesis
Planning and using planning
functionalities.
- Data entry: exceptions • Additional education not applicable
• Data Entry Features • Certification not applicable
- Visual cues
- Entry shortcuts
- Fast edit
- Annotation and line item details

www.sap.nl/education 499
Business Objects
Enterprise Performance Management - Planning XI
BOP205 · PB210e - BusinessObjects Planning: Essentials
DURATION 4 hours PRICE € 180 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
end-users who need to access, view, edit
and print budgets and reports using
Planning.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This one-to-four hour E-learning
course is designed to give you the
comprehensive skills and in-depth
knowledge needed to access, edit, and
review budgets and reports using
BusinessObjects Planning.
• You should take this course to learn
how to complete and submit your plan.
• The course covers all access options:
- Professional Edition
- Distributed System
- Web Checkout
- Web Interactive and Web Forms.
• Additional topics are included for Web
Reports and Plan Dashboarding.
• The business benefit of this course is
that you will be able to efficiently and
effectively complete your budgets and
view reports.
CONTENT
• Getting Started with Planning
- Describing the flow of data
- Explaining the plan process
- Launching the Professional Edition
- Describing Planning Home
500
- Changing your password
- Using Help
- Exiting the application
• Working with Plan Workbooks
- Opening a plan workbook
- Navigating a plan workbook
- Differentiating between Excel and
Planning
- Printing a plan workbook
- Saving a plan workbook
- Saving a version of a plan workbook
- Changing the stage of a workbook
- Viewing Process Control history
• Completing a Plan Workbook
- Editing and calculating a plan
workbook
- Adding a new line to a plan workbook
- Updating an existing line in a plan
workbook
• Exploring Plan Workbooks
- Describing the Instructions sheet
- Describing the Summary sheet
- Describing the Budget sheet
- Describing the Payroll sheet
• Understanding Global Assumptions
- Explaining the use of Global
Assumptions
- Viewing the Global Assumptions
workbook
• Exploring Process Control Management
- Viewing plan statuses using Process
Control Management
- Changing the stage of a plan workbook
- Viewing plan statuses using the Graph
View
• Using Plan Reports
- Opening an existing report
- Calculating a report to display current
data
- Filtering a report to display a specific set
of data
- Drilling reports to display a different
level of detail
- Printing a report
- Delivering a report using eMail
• Plan Dashboarding
- Viewing interactive dashboards
- Saving web favorites
- Managing web favorites
- Viewing Currently Assigned plan
workbooks
- Viewing and managing Alerts
NOTES
• Course length: 1-4 hours
• Recommended additional education:
- BusinessObjects Planning XI: Plan
Reporting Basics
- BusinessObjects Planning XI:
Automated Report Distribution
• Certification not applicable
Business Objects
Enterprise Performance Management - Planning XI
BOP210 · PL340 - Planning: Plan Reporting Fundamental
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1140 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
users with little or no reporting
experience who need to write reports
on the Planning data.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED
• Working knowledge of Microsoft Excel
GOALS
• This 2-day instructor-led course is
designed to give you the skills necessary
to design and develop standard reports.
• Through the use of Planning functions,
database codes, and filters, you will
learn to query the database and
populate reports with your desired
information.
• Additionally, you will learn to improve
report layout, add dynamic titles, set
delivery options, and apply tips and
tricks for improving report calculation
BOP215 · PB345e - BusinessObjects Planning: Plan Reporting Fundamentals
DURATION 2 hours PRICE € 225 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
people with little or no reporting
experience who need to write reports
on the Planning data.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED
• Working knowledge of Microsoft Excel
GOALS
• The BusinessObjects Planning XI: Plan
Reporting Fundamentals E-learning
series is designed to give you the skills
necessary to design and develop
standard reports.
• This series is for you if you want to
learn about the basic database structure
speed.
• The business benefit of this course is
that you will be able to quickly create
presentation quality, efficient reports
that can be shared with or delivered to
others.
CONTENT
• General Concepts
- What is Planning?
- Define data structures
- Work with Dimensions
- Use imports
- Manage security
• Getting Started with Plan Reports
- Explore the report structure
- Understand report functionality
• Writing Fixed Reports
- Create fixed reports
- Work with fixed reports
- Build fixed reports from scratch
• Writing Variable Reports
and how to write reports that can be
shared and delivered to others.
• The Plan Reporting Fundamentals
series consists of the following three
courses:
- BusinessObjects Planning XI: General
Concepts
- BusinessObjects Planning XI: Plan
Reporting Basics
- BusinessObjects Planning XI:
Automated Report Distribution
• Each course in the Plan Reporting
Fundamentals series is approximately
one to three hours in length.
• The series shows you how to use various
reporting features of the Planning XI
- Create variable reports
- Work with variable reports
- Build variable reports from scratch
• Automating Report Distribution
- Generate sequential reports
- Deliver reports
- Run a consecutive report batch
- Package reports with Assembler
- Use scheduler to process consecutive
reports
• Using Advanced Reports
- Run Save-to-Database reports
- Run Save-to-Globals reports
- Create a Pivot Table report
NOTES
• Recommended additional education:
- BusinessObjects Planning XI: System
and Budgeting Fundamentals
• Certification not applicable
product, provides examples of common
reports and gives an overview of the
setup and administration options.
NOTES
• Course length: 1-3 hours
• Additional education not applicable
• Applicable certification
- This offering is not applicable to any
Business Objects Certified Professional
programs.
www.sap.nl/education 501
Business Objects
Enterprise Performance Management - Planning XI
BOP216 · PB355rw - Planning XI: Working with Fixed and Variable Reports
DURATION 1 hour PRICE € 112 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
people who want to learn about fixed
and variable reports.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED
• Working knowledge of Microsoft Excel
GOALS
• The two-hour BusinessObjects Planning
XI: Working with Fixed and Variable
Reports recorded webinar series is
designed to provide you with a review of
the basic reporting functionality of
BusinessObjects Planning. The series is
for you if you want to learn how to
create fixed reports and incorporate best
502
practices into variable reports.
• The Working with Fixed and Variable
Reports series consists of the following
two recorded webinars:
- BusinessObjects Planning XI: Fixed and
Sequential Reporting
- BusinessObjects Planning XI: Variable
Report Techniques
• Each recorded webinar in the Working
with Fixed and Variable Reports series is
approximately 60 minutes in length.
The series shows you how to use various
reporting features of the product and
provides examples of common reports.
Each recorded webinar is produced
using mostly demos to allow you to see
the product in use and to give you a
clear understanding of the reporting
capabilities.
CONTENT
• Upon completion of the recorded
webinar series, you will be able to:
- Create and run reports
- Use PLN formulas
- Write criteria statements
NOTES
• Additional education not applicable
• Certification not applicable
Business Objects
Enterprise Performance Management - Planning XI
BOP220 · PL440 - BusinessObjects Planning: System and Budgeting Fundamentals
DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1140 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
users who will function as the Master
System User of the application.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED
• Working knowledge of Excel
GOALS
• This two-day instructor-led course is
designed to give you the skills necessary
to manage your planning process using
your BusinessObjects Planning system.
• In this course, you will learn how to
administer the system, work with
templates to build your plan
workbooks, create and modify Standard
Planning Methodologies (SPMs) to meet
your calculation needs, use utilities to
assist in administering the plan process,
and manage workflow using Process
Control.
• The business benefit of this course is
that you will be able to effectively
administer your Planning system
according to your organization’s
business requirements and plan process.
• Additionally, you will be able to take
advantage of the flexible and robust
capabilities available to manage and
execute that plan process enabling a
better experience for all involved.
CONTENT
• System setup and Configuration
- What is Planning?
- Define data structures
- Work with Dimensions
• Utilities
- Run a data import
- Use database and system utilities
- Manage security
• Getting started with Plan Budgeting
- Examine the end-user experience
- Explore the plan workbook
environment
- Work with plan workbooks
• Working with Templates
- Describe the Template structure
- Create and modify a Template
- Compare Planning-sheets to non-
Planning sheets
- Examine the Settings sheet
• Understanding the Interface Process
- Discuss when to perform Interfaces
- Execute an Interface from within a
workbook
- Execute the Sequential Interface Utility
- Define Interface, Dimension, and
Template settings
• Working with SPMs
- What are SPMs?
- Use SPMs in plan workbooks
- Create and edit master SPMs
- Assign SPMs for interface
- Construct multi-line SPMs
• Using Global Assumptions and Custom
Tables
- Differentiate between Global
Assumptions and Custom Tables
- Explore the Global Assumptions
workbook
- Reference Global Assumptions
- Reference Custom Tables
• Reviewing Plan Administration Tools
- Discuss Plan Administration settings
- Run the Recalculate utility
- Use the Override Checkout Status
utility
- Define Versioning
- Distribute and collect workbooks
- Execute a Workbook Modification
utility
• Managing workflow with Process
Control
- Define Process Control stages
- Describe Process Control from an end-
user perspective
- Work with Process Control utilities
- Discuss implementation considerations
NOTES
• Recommended additional education:
- BusinessObjects Planning XI: Plan
Reporting Fundamentals
• Certification not applicable
www.sap.nl/education 503
Business Objects
Enterprise Performance Management - Planning XI
BOP226 · PB360rw - BusinessObjects Planning XI:
DURATION 1 hour PRICE € 180 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
people who want to improve the
efficiency of their reports and deliver
report packages.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED
• Working knowledge of Microsoft Excel
GOALS
• The two-hour BusinessObjects Planning
XI: Optimizing and Automating
Reports recorded webinar series is
designed to provide you with a review of
the basic reporting functionality of
BusinessObjects Planning. The series is
for you if you want to learn how to
create more efficient reports and deliver
504
report packages.
• The Optimizing and Automating
Reports series consists of the following
two recorded webinars:
- BusinessObjects Planning XI: Report
Optimization
- BusinessObjects Planning XI:
Automated Report Distribution
• Each recorded webinar in the
Optimizing and Automating Reports
series is approximately 60 minutes in
length. The series shows you how to use
various reporting features of the
product and provides examples of
common reports. Each recorded
webinar is produced using mostly
demos to allow you to see the product
in use and to give you a clear
understanding of the reporting
capabilities.
CONTENT
• Upon completion of the recorded
webinar series, you will be able to:
- Write more efficient reports
- Produce a reporting batch
- Package and deliver reports on a
scheduled basis
NOTES
• Additional education not applicable
• Certification not applicable
Business Objects
Enterprise Performance Management - Planning XI
BOP235 · PL442e - BusinessObjects Planning: Budgeting Basics
DURATION 6 hours PRICE € 225 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
users who will function as the Master
System User of the application.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• BusinessObjects Planning XI: System
Fundamentals
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED
• Working knowledge of Excel
GOALS
• This four-to-eight hour E-learning
course is designed to give you the skills
necessary to manage your planning
process using your BusinessObjects
Planning system.
• In this course, you will learn how to
work with templates to build your plan
workbooks, create and modify Standard
Planning Methodologies (SPMs) to meet
your calculation needs, use utilities to
assist in administering the plan process
and manage workflow using Process
Control.
• The business benefit of this course is
that you will be able to effectively
administer your Planning system
according to your organization’s
business requirements and plan process.
• Additionally, you will be able to take
advantage of the flexible and robust
capabilities available to manage and
execute that plan process enabling a
better experience for all involved.
CONTENT
• Getting Started with Plan Budgeting
- Examine the end-user experience
- Explore the plan workbook
environment
- Work with plan workbooks
• Working with Templates
- Describe the Template structure
- Create and modify a Template
- Compare Planning-sheets to non-
Planning sheets
- Examine the Settings sheet
• Understanding the Interface Process
- Discuss when to perform Interfaces
- Execute an Interface from within a
workbook
- Execute the Sequential Interface Utility
- Define Interface, Dimension, and
Template settings
• Working with SPMs
- What are SPMs?
- Use SPMs in plan workbooks
- Create and edit master SPMs
- Assign SPMs for interface
- Construct multi-line SPMs
• Using Global Assumptions and Custom
Tables
- Differentiate between Global
Assumptions and Custom Tables
- Explore the Global Assumptions
workbook
- Reference Global Assumptions
- Reference Custom Tables
• Reviewing Plan Administration Tools
- Discuss Plan Administration settings
- Run the Recalculate utility
- Use the Override Checkout Status
utility
- Define Versioning
- Distribute and collect workbooks
- Execute a Workbook Modification
utility
• Managing Workflow with Process
Control
- Define Process Control stages
- Describe Process Control from an end-
user perspective
- Work with Process Control utilities
- Discuss implementation considerations
NOTES
• Course length: 4-8 hours
• Recommended additional education:
- BusinessObjects Planning XI: Plan
Reporting Fundamentals
• Certification not applicable
www.sap.nl/education 505
Business Objects
Enterprise Performance Management - Planning XI
BOP236 · PB365rw - BusinessObjects Planning XI:
DURATION 1 hour PRICE € 180 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
people who want to increase their
knowledge on plan reporting.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• BusinessObjects Planning XI: Plan
Reporting Basics
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED
• Working knowledge of Microsoft Excel
GOALS
• The four-hour BusinessObjects
Planning XI: Reporting Techniques
recorded webinar series is designed to
provide you with a review of the
reporting functionality of
BusinessObjects Planning. The series is
targeted at employees who want to
increase their knowledge level on one or
several reporting features.
BOP245 · PL443e - BusinessObjects Planning: Dashboard Basics
DURATION 4 hours PRICE € 225 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
anyone who wants to create interactive
dashboards in Planning Enterprise
Desktop using Crystal Xcelsius and plan
data.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• BusinessObjects Planning XI: Plan
Report Fundamentals
• Crystal Xcelsius 4.5: Essentials of
Interactive Presentations
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED
• Working knowledge of Excel
GOALS
• This one-and-a-half to two-and-a-half
hour E-learning course is designed to
give you the skills necessary to create
506
• The Reporting Techniques series
consists of the following four recorded
webinars:
- BusinessObjects Planning XI: Fixed and
Sequential Reporting
- BusinessObjects Planning XI: Variable
Report Techniques
- BusinessObjects Planning XI: Report
Optimization
- BusinessObjects Planning XI:
Automated Report Distribution
• Each recorded webinar in the Reporting
Techniques series is approximately 60
minutes in length. The series shows you
how to use various reporting features of
the product and provides examples of
common reports. Each recorded
webinar in the series is produced using
mostly demos to allow you to see the
interactive dashboards from plan data.
• You should take this course to learn
about Plan Dashboard features.
• You will learn how to assign and
manage Web Favorites; to define,
process and manage alerts; and to create
interactive dashboards for the Planning
Enterprise Desktop.
CONTENT
• Using Web Favorites
- Save plan workbooks and reports as web
favorites
- Manage web favorites
- View currently assigned plan
workbooks
• Setting and Managing Alerts
- Set alerts using an Alert sheet
product in use and to give you a clear
understanding of the reporting
capabilities.
CONTENT
• Upon completion of the recorded
webinar serires, you will:
- Have a general understanding of plan
reporting capabilities
- Be able to run plan reports
NOTES
• Additional education not applicable
• Certification not applicable
- Set alerts using the PLNALERT function
- Administer alerts
• Designing an Interactive Dashboard
- Layout a dashboard model
- Create an Excel import file from a plan
report
- Publish an Xcelsius model
- Integrate the model onto the plan
dashboard
NOTES
• Course length: 1,5-2,5 hours
• Recommended additional education:
- Crystal Xcelsius 4.5: Designing
Advanced Interactive Presentations
• Certification not applicable
Business Objects
Enterprise Performance Management - Planning XI

BOP246 · PB410rw - BusinessObjects Planning XI:

DURATION 0,5 hour PRICE € 112 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
anyone who wants a high-level
orientation to the Planning application.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None
• Working knowledge of Excel
GOALS
course, you will learn about the benefits - Reporting features
that Planning provides to any budgeting - Access options
and reporting process. NOTES
• The business benefit of this course is • Additional education not applicable
that you will be able to discuss the basic • Certification not applicable
features of Planning.
CONTENT

• This 30-minute recorded webinar is • In this course, you will learn about:
designed to introduce you to - The interactive Plan Dashboard
BusinessObjects Planning. In this - Budgeting capabilities and methods

www.sap.nl/education 507
Business Objects
Enterprise Performance Management - Planning Extended
BOP300 BOP310
PX200 - BusinessObjects PX201 - BusinessObjects
Planning Extended 5.3: Planning Extended 5.3:
Implementation Team Scripting
Training
4 days 1 day
BOP300 · PX200 - BusinessObjects Planning Extended 5.3: Implementation Team Training
DURATION 4 days PRICE € 2320 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• The course is design for decision maker
in Planning Extended projects as well as
power users and administrators.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• Familiarity with financial reporting data
and analysis
• Ability to navigate in Microsoft Internet
Explorer
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This course is designed to get your team
up and running with Planning
Extended as quickly as possible. This 4-
day classroom program is for the team
of users who will lead the
implementation and provide general
report, model, and user support to their
local operations. The focus is on
establishing a foundation of skills and
knowledge so that these users are
equipped to work with Business Objects
Consultants to assess and analyze your
business requirements, prototype your
first business model, load data, and
create your initial report templates.
• The topics covered are:
- Day 1 Using Planning Extended Analyst
- Day 2 Report Building
- Day 3 Model Administration and Data
Loading
- Day 4 Using Planning Extended Excel
Analyst User Rights Overview
CONTENT
• Using Analyst
- Using Planning Extended Analyst is
designed for users with little or no
508
experience with Business Objects
Planning Extended. This lesson
establishes the core concepts required to
begin working with Planning Extended
through the simple and intuitive Web
interface. Through a series of step-by-
step demonstrations and hands-on
exercises, you will learn how to open a
report, "drill-down" on
multidimensional data and manipulate
your view of the data. Additionally, you
will learn how to enter and annotate
data in a report.
• Report Building
- Report Building is a lesson designed for
users that need to create and maintain
report templates in Planning Extended.
Using the Analyst Pro application, you
will learn the skills required to create
row, column and report templates. You
will learn how to modify existing
templates, take advantage of reporting
features, apply formatting options,
create variance columns and utilize
"best practice" principles when creating
report templates.
• Model administration and data loading
- The business model is the most critical
component of your implementation as
it represents your organization in
Planning Extended. As such, Model
Administration & Data Loading guides
you through the process of maintaining
and modifying a business model, and
loading data into "scenarios." First, you
will load a model from files and then
add or edit dimensions for this model.
Next, you will create and replicate
scenarios to import and export data.
Finally, you will learn how to
consolidate loaded data with the
business model that you created.
• Using Excel Analyst
- Planning Extended Excel Analyst is a
web-enabled application that gives you
the ability to access, display, analyze and
create Planning Extended reports
directly inside Microsoft Excel. In Using
Excel Analyst you will learn how to
navigate the Excel Analyst interface to
create "grid-based" Planning reports
within Excel, use Planning Extended
functions in reports, integrate Excel
functions into Excel Analyst reports,
and insert Planning Extended
functionality into existing Excel
workbooks.
• User rights
- User Rights Overview is an introduction
into how Planning Extended uses a
flexible and object-oriented user rights
structure to provides sophisticated levels
of security. This module covers the
rights required by the implementation
team, the approach used to grant rights
to Analyst web client users, and
introduces the rights structure for
Analyst Pro users.
NOTES
• Additional education not applicable
• Certification not applicable
Business Objects
Enterprise Performance Management - Planning Extended

BOP310 · PX201 - BusinessObjects Planning Extended 5.3: Scripting

DURATION 1 day PRICE € 580 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED CONTENT

• This course has been designed for
Planning Extended system
administrators who need to understand
how to execute, maintain, schedule and
debug existing scripts as well as power
users who need to modify existing
scripts and design new scripts based on
new business requirements or changes
to their implementation.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• Implementation Team Traiining course
or experience using Planning Extended
Analyst Pro and an understanding of
the basic concepts of an Planning
Extended business model, including the
role of scenarios.
• Familiarity with basic procedural
programming constructs, such as
variables, loops, and conditional
statements.
• Experience using Visual Basic for
Applications
GOALS
• Scripting in Planning Extended covers
the reasons scripts are used in Planning
Extended and the basic concepts of
script execution and management, such
as running scripts manually, scheduling
them, running them from reports, and
importing and exporting scripts
between Planning Extended sites.
• The second part of the course is devoted
to the design and creation of new
scripts. A business requirement is
analyzed, the logic required to fulfill the
business requirement is developed, and
the script is written.
• Scripting
- Navigate the Planning Extended
scripting interface
- Execute scripts from Analyst Pro and
from reports
- Schedule a script
- Modify and save existing scripts
- Import and export scripts
- Design and write a basic script
- Use library files
- Associate scripts with reports
NOTES
• Additional education not applicable
• Certification not applicable

www.sap.nl/education 509
Business Objects
Enterprise Performance Management - Intercompany XI R2 / 5.1

BOF240
FM220 - BusinessObjects
Intercompany: Operation
and Implementation Team

1 day

BOF245
FM221e - BusinessObjects
InterCompany: E-learning
for End-Users

3 hours

BOF305 BOF315
IC200eV5.1 - Business IC205eV5.1 - Business
Objects InterCompany: Objects InterCompany 5.1:
Technical Overview for End Operation and
Users Configuration Basics
2,5 hours 2 hours

BOF240 · FM220 - BusinessObjects Intercompany: Operation and Implementation Team

DURATION 1 day PRICE € 580 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP CONTENT accounting system

• The target audience for this course is
system administrators, and power users.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• Working knowledge of Basic reporting
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• In this one day instructor led course
you will learn how to use the main
Cartesis Intercompany functionalities to
setup, operate, and administrate
Cartesis Intercompany.
• Import/enter Intercompany
declarations in ICS
• Reconcile Intercompany declarations
using the ICS methods of
communication
• Monitor the progress of the
reconciliation process
• Manage the export of reconciled
Intercompany balances to the
consolidation system
• Export the adjustments to the
• Import / reconcile / adjust invoices
• Create / import metadata
• Setup conversion and reconciliation
options
• Customize reports and import/export
templates
• Monitor the daily process
NOTES
• Additional education not applicable
• Certification not applicable

BOF245 · FM221e - BusinessObjects InterCompany: E-learning for End-Users

DURATION 3 hours PRICE € 405 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP • The E-learning also provides self-assess- - Attaching Comments and Files
• The target audience for this course is for ment with positive feedback. The objec- • Reconciling Balances
users who will enter and reconcile tives of this E-learning course include - Reconciliation process
intercompany balances. reconciling intercompany balances with - Modify Balances
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None the other reporting companies, follow- • Using States
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None ing the reconciliation process using fil- - Automatic states
GOALS ters and reports, and communicating - States on demand
• This 3-hour E-learning solution gives with the other reporting companies. - Difference between group states and
students instant access to a complete CONTENT states
self-paced training program at anytime • Getting Started • Retrieving Information
of the day. - Logging In - Filters
• A virtual instructor leads the partici- - Changing the Language - Reports
pant through the course using interac- - Navigating in the Interface • Ending Process
tive presentations of core application - Selecting Co's/Periods - Freezing
features and practical exercises based on - Consulting Balances - Exporting balances
application simulations. • Loading Balances NOTES
- Creating Balances Manually • Additional education not applicable
510 - Importing Balances • Certification not applicable
 Business Objects
Enterprise Performance Management - Intercompany XI R2 / 5.1
BOF305 · IC200eV5.1 - BusinessObjects InterCompany: Technical Overview for End Users
DURATION 2,5 hours PRICE € 405 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• This course is desgned for
BusinessObjects Intercompany users.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• Working knowledge of intercompany
reconcilation process.
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This training session is for users who
will enter and reconcile intercompany
balances. You will learn how to:
- Reconcile your intercompany balances
with the other reporting companies.
- Follow the reconciliation process using
filters and reports.
- Communicate with the other reporting
companies.
BOF315 · IC205eV5.1 - BusinessObjects InterCompany 5.1: Operation and Configuration Basics
DURATION 2 hours PRICE € 405 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
BusinessObjects Intercompany
administrators.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• T-ITC51-3501 - BusinessObjects
Intercompany 5.1: End-User training
• Experience with Financial reconciliation
process
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This 2 hour e-learning course is
designed to explain how to configure
the BusinessObjects Intercompany
CONTENT
• Introduction
- In this lesson we will learn how to
navigate in the Intercompany tutorial
and what the lesson objectives are.
• Getting started
- In this lesson we will learn how to log
on to Intercompany, change the
language, navigate, select companies
and periods, and consult balances.
• Loading balances
- In this lesson, you are going to talk
about loading balances into
BusinessObjects Intercompany.You will
learn how to import balances or enter
them manually.
• Reconciling balances
- In this lesson, you are going to learn
more about reconciling balances.
application. This includes how to set up
reports, accounts and security as well as
create import templates to automate
the application.
CONTENT
• Introduction
- List the administratiive tasks
- Navigate the administration menus
• Creating a database
- Create metadata in an Intercompany
database
- Set global parameters
- Define other database settings
• Using states
- In this lesson, we are going to learn
about states.
• Retrieving information
- In this lesson, we are going to learn how
to retrieve information in
Intercompany.
• Completion process
- In this lesson, we are going to learn
about the ending process in
Intercompany.
NOTES
• Course length: 2,5 hours
• Additional education not applicable
• Certification not applicable
• Managing the process
- Manage periods
- Manage balances
- Manage import and export of balances
- Set up invoice level matching List the
administratiive tasks
NOTES
• Additional education not applicable
• Certification not applicable
www.sap.nl/education 511
Business Objects
Enterprise Performance Management - Profitiability & Cost Management

BOA250
PF210 - Actitvity Analysis:
Advanced Topics in
Model Building
BOA340
5 days
PC205 - BusinessObjects
Profitability
BOA225 BOA355
PF204e - Introduction to 4 days PC300e - BusinessObjects
Activity Based Costing Profitability and Cost
Management Transactional
BOA240 ABC
2,5 hours 5 hours
PF205 - Actitvity Analysis:
Foundation
BOA365
4 days OM300e - Business
Objects Objectiv. Mgmt:
Using Profitability for Perf.
Mgmt.
6 hours

BOA225 · PF204e - Introduction to Activity Based Costing

DURATION 2,5 hours PRICE € 180 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
anyone who needs fundamental
knowledge of the area of activity based
costing.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This two-to-three hour E-learning
course presents the basic principles of
activity based costing (ABC) and
management.
• This course is intended to provide an
introduction to the topic and to define
common terminology.
• In addition, the concepts are illustrated
through the use of examples, exercises,
and sample calculations.
• The business benefit of this course is
that you gain a basic understanding of
activity based costing concepts.
CONTENT
• What is activity based costing?
- Define activity based costing (ABC)
- Describe the origins of ABC
- Differentiate between ABC and ABM
- Identify the reasons why ABC has
generated interest
- Explain changing uses of cost
information
• Using ABC in practice
- Describe the difference in traditional
costing and ABC calculations
- Name two steps in the ABC calculation
- Explain the improved accuracy of ABC
over traditional costing methods
- Identify the major advantages of ABC
over traditional costing
• Exploring broader aspects of ABC
- Describe activity types
- Explain issues with activity analysis
- Compare single dimensional,
multidimensionality, and cascade
approaches
- Explain issues with cost object analysis
• Linking processes to ABC
- Explain the relationship that activities
have with process improvement
- List the benefits of process improvement
- Describe the CAM-I cross
• Examining activity based budgeting
- Discuss how to use ABC to achieve
better budgets
- Complete a sample budget calculation
• Summarizing advantages to using ABC
- Explain the two main advantages of
output costing
- List the benefits of using ABC for cost
awareness
- List the benefits of using ABC for cost
control
NOTES
• Course length: 2-3 hours
• Recommended additional education
- BusinessObjects Activity Analysis:
Foundation
• Applicable certification
- This course is not applicable to any
Business Objects Certified Professional
programs.

512
Business Objects
Enterprise Performance Management - Profitiability & Cost Management
BOA240 · PF205 - BusinessObjects Activity Analysis: Foundation
DURATION 4 days PRICE € 1880 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
model builders and managers with little
or no experience in ABC with
BusinessObjects Activity Analysis.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This four-day instructor-led course is
designed to provide an introduction and
overview to BusinessObjects Activity
Analysis.
• You will be introduced to the concepts
of Activity Based Costing (ABC) and its
associated terminology.
• This course details the fundamental
practicalities of managing ABC with the
BusinessObjects Activity Analysis
software.
CONTENT
• Lesson 1 - Introduction to
BusinessObjects Activity Analysis and
Methodology
- Identify the fundamental principles of
ABC.
- Relate ABC terminology to your own
organization.
- Describe the flow of cost through an
ABC model.
- List the main elements of the Activity
Analysis system.
- State the different user types and their
access permissions.
- Manually calculate costs through to
activity level.
• Lesson 2 - Exploring BusinessObjects
Activity Analysis
- Navigate effectively through the Model
Builder Interface.
- Manage the creation and deletion of
models.
- Insert information into an existing
model.
- Create a customized view of the
application.
24
• Lesson 3 - Building Model Structure
- Create a new model with simple
dimension structures.
- Describe how attributes can be used for
reporting purposes.
- Demonstrate how hierarchies can be
created within dimensions.
- Detail the impact of applying the ‘Cost
Object Type Line Item’ attribute.
• Lesson 4 - Activity Costing
- Describe how costs flow through a
model from Line Item to Activity.
- Complete a Resource Driver
Assignment and a Responsibility
Center/Activity Assignment.
- Input value information into the
model.
- Build grids to show Activity Cost
results.
• Lesson 5 - Cost Object Costing
- Define dimension hierarchies.
- State the different types of Cost Object
assignment.
- Determine which Activity Driver level
to use for an assignment.
- Apply a Cost Object assignment.
• Lesson 6 - Importing and Exporting
- Import data into an existing model.
- Export data from an existing model.
- Import data from .csv files into a model
via Data Bridge.
- View the results of a Data Bridge import
in a model.
• Lesson 7 - Viewing Cost Object Results
- Describe the impact of using the
different Responsibility Center levels in
a Cost Object Assignment.
- Identify the relevant grid value and
dimensions to use on a grid wh viewing
Cost Object results.
- Build grids using a range of different
values to view Cost Object results.
- Trace the flow of cost through a model
from Line Item to Cost Objec
• Lesson 8 - Books
- Use book objects to display values.
- Design and publish a simple suite of
books.
- Add a script to a book.
- Apply default book assignments to
specific user groups.
• Lesson 9 - Reassignments and Overrides
- Identify the differences between a
reassignment and an override.
- Complete a Direct Activity Assignment
and an Activity Reassignment a model.
- Build a grid to view the results of a
reassignment.
- Identify the circumstances in which a
reassignment would need to be made.
• Lesson 10 - Rules
- Script simple rules to calculate results
in your model.
- Replace input values with values
calculated from a rule.
- Identify the anatomy of a simple rule.
- Improve rule efficiency by the use of
specific EPO and utility functions.
• Lesson 11 - Activity Analysis Model
Optimization
- Examine a test model and identify
problem areas.
- Suggest changes to the test model
problem areas.
- Implement changes to amend the test
models problem areas.
• Lesson 12 - Role of the Administrator
- Identify security settings.
- Assign users to groups.
- Manage models.
- Reset user passwords.
NOTES
• Recommended additional education:
- BusinessObjects Activity Analysis:
Advanced Topics in Model Building
• Applicable certification
- This course is not applicable to any
Business Objects Certified Professional
programs.
www.sap.nl/education 513
Business Objects
Enterprise Performance Management - Profitiability & Cost Management

BOA250 · PF210 - BusinessObjects Activity Analysis: Advanced Topics in Model Building

DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2350 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
those who require advanced knowledge
of model building techniques when
using the Profitability suite of
applications.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• BusinessObjects Activity Analysis:
Foundation
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED
Experience with:
• VBScript
• Model building within the Profitability
suite of applications
GOALS
• This five-day instructor-led offering is
designed to give you the comprehensive
skills and detailed knowledge needed to
utilize advanced model building
techniques within the BusinessObjects
Activity Analysis, Performance
Optimization and IT Services Costing
applications.
• You should take this course to learn
how to script rules using the
appropriate syntax, design efficient
rules, limit the scope of rule
calculation, create user defined rules
and use item properties.
• In relation to book scripting, you will
cover topics such as advanced web book
techniques, complex relationships
between objects and performance of
validation and update in web books
using script. The use of advanced
dimensions and advice on best practice
techniques are also covered in this
course.
CONTENT
• Lesson 1 - Advanced Rules
- Using basic VBScript
- Improving rule efficiency
- Order of calculation
- Version, Period and Responsibility
Center rules
• Lesson 2 - Book Objects
- How book objects interact
- Controlling objects using methods,
properties and events
• Lesson 3 - Book Scripting
- Object functionality
- Complex relationships between objects
- Linking books using a Model object
• Lesson 4 - Advanced Dimensions
- Using the Line Item Details and
Revenue Types dimensions
- Performing complex reassignments and
overrides
- Advanced grid building techniques
• Lesson 5 - Model Optimization
- Cross model rules
- Model partitioning
- CalculateSlice
- Model calculation options
NOTES
• Additional education not applicable
• Applicable certification
- This course is not applicable to any
Business Objects Certified Professional
programs.

514
Business Objects
Enterprise Performance Management - Profitiability & Cost Management
BOA340 · PC205 BusinessObjects Profitability
DURATION 4 days PRICE € 1880 STARTING DATES On request
TARGET GROUP
• This course is designed for individuals
who have little or no experience using
BusinessObjects Profitability and
Costing Management .
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• BusinessObjects Profitability and Cost
Management enables you to de design
multi-dimensional models that can be
used to analyze data in a wide variety of
situations.
• This course focuses on the use of the
application for Activity Based Costing
purposes.
• This four-day instructor-led course
provides hands-on activities that take
you step-by-step through the process of
building model structures, entering
data, calculating results, and producing
web-based reports.
• The business benefit of this course is
that by understanding the processes of
model design and performing the role
of an end-user, you will be able to fully
assess the source information required
to build an effective model and the
types of resultant data that can be
distributed throughout an
organization.organization.
CONTENT
• Using activity based costing
methodology
- Identify the fundamental principles of
ABC
- Determine how cost flows through a
model
- Identify the main elements of the
model builder interface
• Exploring BusinessObjects Profitability
and Cost Management
- Navigate the model builder interface
• Building model structure
- Create a new model
- Use hierarchical structures
- Use system and user defined attributes
- Apply consolidation types
• Costing Activities
- Complete basic assignments
- Use View Builder
- Use Data Explorer
• Calculating Cost Objects
- Understand Cost Object assignment
functionality
- Apply Cost Object assignments
• Importing and exporting data
- Import and export data via XML
- Import data via Data Bridge
- View import results
• Viewing Cost Object Results
- Review Cost Object assignments
- Design layouts to view Cost Object
results
- Analyze Cost Object calculations
• Using books
- Navigate the book building screens
- Use book objects
- Design layouts for use in books
- Create a suite of books
- Publish books
• Applying reassignments and overrides
- Define reassignments and overrides
- Perform an Activity reassignment
- Use a Direct Activity assignment
- Use overrides
• Using rules
- Script simple rules
- Create Activity Driver rules
- Improve rule efficiency
- Use grid formula
• Designing a new model
- Identify hierarchical structures
- Create appropriate assignments
- Input model values
- Design a suite of books
• Performing a model optimization
- Review a case study model
- Implement changes to the model
• Performing administration
- Identify security settings
- Perform model administration
NOTES
• Recommended additional education:
- BusinessObjects Activity Analysis:
Advanced Topics in Model Building
- BusinessObjects Objectives
Management: Using Profitability for
Performance Management
www.sap.nl/education 515
 Business Objects
Enterprise Performance Management - Profitiability & Cost Management
BOA355 · PC300e - BusinessObjects Profitability and Cost Management: Transactional ABC
DURATION 5 hours PRICE € 284 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• This course is designed for individuals
who are familiar with the use of
BusinessObjects Profitability and Cost
Management and require more
information about the use of the
application for transactional costing
purposes.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• BusinessObjects Profitability and Cost
Management: Fundamentals in Model
Building
• Working knowledge of BusinessObjects
Profitability and Cost Management
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• Business Objects Profitability and Cost
Management enables you to design
multi-dimensional models that can be
used in a wide variety of situations.
• This five hour eLearning course focuses
on the use of the application for
transactional costing purposes and is
designed to provide you with an
introduction to creating transactional
costing models.
516
• In this course, you will learn about the
types of data needed for a transactional
costing model, changes to dimensions
for transactional costing, and
transferring data into a model.
• The business benefit of this course is
that you will be able to design and build
a transactional costing model and fully
understand the associated processes.
CONTENT
• Introducing transactional costing
- Describe the differences between
transactional and standard activity
based costing
- Give examples of the key verticals that
may use transactional costing
- Compare the use of relational and
multidimensional systems
• Implementing transactional costing
- Describe the roles and responsibilities of
those involved in a transactional costing
implementation
- Demonstrate an understanding of the
calculation process within transactional
costing models
- List the inputs and outputs associated
with a transactional costing model
• Modelling for transactional costs
- State the purpose of the Detailed Cost
Object dimensions
- Describe the process of linking items
within the Detailed Cost Objects and
Cost Object dimensions
- List the limitations that apply when
using transactional costing models
• Loading data
- State the stages associated with
populating the load tables
- Name the two approaches that can be
used when loading Activity Driver
volumes
• Calculating results
- Describe the console commands that
are needed to carry out a calculation
- List the results tables and their contents
NOTES
• Additional education
- BusinessObjects Activity Analysis:
Advanced topics in Model Building
- BusinessObjects Objectives
Management: Using Profitability for
performance management
• Certification not applicable
Business Objects
Enterprise Performance Management - Profitiability & Cost Management

BOA365 · OM200e - BusinessObjects Objectives Management: Using Profitability for Performance Management
DURATION 6 hours PRICE € 284 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP • You should also take this course to • Measures

• The target audience for this course is
users who are familiar with the use of
the applications within the
BusinessObjects Profitability suite.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• BusinessObjects Activity Analysis:
Foundation
• Working knowledge of BusinessObjects
Profitability
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This six-hour E-learning course is
designed to provide an introduction to
the BusinessObjects Objectives
Management application.
• You should take this course to learn
how to navigate through the Objectives
Management user interface, and
understand the types of data that are
required to build a model.
learn how to design books and
distribute data from an Objectives
Management model.
• The business benefit of this course is
that you will be able to design and build
a model within Objectives Management
and state the organizational benefits of
using the application.
CONTENT
• Introduction to Objectives Management
- Objectives Management and the
Profitability Suite
- Performance Management
• Dimensions, Assignments, and
Timelines
- Objectives Management dimensions
- Assignments within Objectives
Management
- Data Flow
- Timelines
- Calculating Achievement
- Results
• Books
- The Drill Control
- Standalone Objects
NOTES
• Additional education
- To increase your skill level and
knowledge of BusinessObjects
Profitability, the following course is
recommended: BusinessObjects Activity
Analysis: Advanced Topics in Model
Building
• Certification not applicable

www.sap.nl/education 517
Business Objects Enterprise Performance Management -
Finance: Project Team / Functional Administrator / End User working in Local Site

BOF230
FM212 - BusinessObjects
Finance: Rules in
BusinessObjects Finance
BOF190
2 days
FM208 - BusinessObjects
Finance: Data Link
BOF250 1 day BOF220
FM227 - BusinessObjects FM210 - BusinessObjects
Finance: Administrative Finance: Advanced
Course/Implementation Reporting (Data Retrieval)
Team Training BOF210
5 days 2 days
FM209 - BusinessObjects
Finance: XL Link
Pivot Table
BOF255
1 day FM248e - BusinessObjects
Finance: Introduction to the
Coefficients

3 hours

BOF205 BOF215
FM207e - BusinessObjects FM211e - BusinessObjects
Finance: Local Data Entry Finance: Finance Viewers
Sites for the Web

3 hours 3 hours

BOF190 · FM208 - BusinessObjects Finance: Data Link

DURATION 1 day PRICE € 580 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP GOALS automated by importing it directly from

• The target audience for this course is • During this one day class, participants a ledger to Cartesis Finance.
Cartesis Finance users. will learn to create schedules and use NOTES

PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
Working knowledge of:
• Cartesis Finance
• Excel
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED
them to input data and retrieve data • Additional education not applicable
from Cartesis Finance. • Certification not applicable
• The class will also gain knowledge in
using DataLink a mapping interface
None which allows data entry to be

518
Business Objects Enterprise Performance Management -
Finance: Project Team / Functional Administrator / End User working in Local Site

BOF205 · FM207e - BusinessObjects Finance: Local Data Entry Sites for the Web
DURATION 3 hours PRICE € 405 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP include entering reporting data - Manually entering data

• The target audience for this course is for successfully, ensuring that the entered - Saving a package
users who will be in charge of the data information is accurate, and making - Printing schedules
entry in the Cartesis Finance Packages. this information available to the Group • Running Package Controls
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None for consolidation. - Running controls
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None CONTENT - Identifying error types
GOALS • Accessing the Package - Correcting errors
• This 3-hour E-learning solution gives - Logging on • Publishing the Package
students instant access to a complete - Choosing your preferences - Principles
self-paced training program at anytime - Selecting a package - Publication modes
of the day. - Focus on Package Statuses NOTES

• A virtual instructor leads the • Navigating Through the Package • Additional education not applicable
participant through the course, using - Package Properties • Certification not applicable
interactive presentations of core - Home schedule page
application features and practical - All schedules page
exercises based on application - Toolbar
simulations. - Types of schedules
• The E-learning also provides self- • Entering Package Data
assessment with positive feedback. The - Two ways of entering data
objectives of this E-learning course - Importing data

BOF210 · FM209 - BusinessObjects Finance: XL Link/Pivot Table

DURATION 1 day PRICE € 580 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
anyone who wants to analyze Cartesis
Finance data using Excel.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• In this one day training course you will
gain more in-depth knowledge of the
Excel Link functionality and Dynamic that you can export data to a Cartesis
PivotTables Finance package.
CONTENT NOTES
• Present Produce Excel documents into • Additional education not applicable
which you can import data from a • Certification not applicable
Cartesis Finance database.
• Create PivotTables for retrieving data
from a Cartesis Finance database.
• Design data entry schedules in Excel so

www.sap.nl/education 519
Business Objects Enterprise Performance Management -
Finance: Project Team / Functional Administrator / End User working in Local Site

BOF215 · FM211e - BusinessObjects Finance: Finance Viewers

DURATION 3 hours PRICE € 405 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP • The E-learning also provides self- - Dimensions

• The target audience for this course is for assessment with positive feedback. The - Opening report
users who will consult package or objectives of this E-learning include • Running an Advanced Report
consolidated data for part or the entire understanding how data is stored in the - Simple selection methods
Group. Cartesis Finance database and retrieving - Advanced selection methods
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None and printing data efficiently using - Grouping methods
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None reports. • Using a Viewpoint
GOALS CONTENT - Definition
• This 3-hour E-learning solution gives • Logging on to Cartesis Finance - Applying viewpoints
students instant access to a complete - Logging on - Managing viewpoints
self-paced training program at anytime - Homepage • Printing a Report
of the day. - Preferences - Principle
• A virtual instructor leads the • Accessing a Report NOTES
participant through the course using - List by folder • Additional education not applicable
interactive presentations of core - List individually • Certification not applicable
application features and practical - My favorites
exercises based on application • Running a Simple Report
simulations. - Data sources

BOF220 · FM210 - BusinessObjects Finance: Advanced Reporting (Data Retrieval)

DURATION 2 days PRICE € 1160 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP GOALS NOTES

• The target audience for this course is
End Users, and Power Users.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
Working knowledge of:
• Excel
• Cartesis Finance: Administrative
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
• This two day class will show the class • Additional education not applicable
how to use Cartesis Finance to build • Certification not applicable
more complex reports using
functionality like functions, hierarchies
and hit list.
• This workshop will also introduce the
user to Cartesis Finance Dynamic
Analysis.

BOF230 · FM212 - BusinessObjects Finance: Rules in BusinessObjects Finance

DURATION 2 days PRICE € 405 E-LEARNING

TARGET GROUP GOALS NOTES

• The target audience for this course is
System Administrators, Decision
Makers, and Power Users.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
Working knowledge of:
• Cartesis Finance: Project Team Training
• Cartesis Finance: Administrative
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
• This two day class is designed to give • Only available in French language
participants hands on experience • Additional education not applicable
creating and modifying rules in Cartesis • Certification not applicable
Finance.
• The most common types of rules are
introduced to give a broad overview of
this very extensive subject. Participants
will also learn to create flexible reports
to analyze and check consolidated data.

520
Business Objects Enterprise Performance Management -
Finance: Project Team / Functional Administrator / End User working in Local Site

BOF250 · FM227 - BusinessObjects Finance: Administrative Course/Implementation Team Training

DURATION 5 days PRICE € 2900 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
System Administrators, Decision
Makers, and Power Users.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• Working knowledge of Microsoft Excel
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This five day class is designed to give
participants hands on experience
creating and modifying a Cartesis
Finance database.
• Participants learn how to create and to move data into and from the
modify dimensions within the database. database using the Excel Link.
They will create a new category NOTES
scenario, build analysis hierarchies, and • Additional education not applicable
build custom calculations and controls • Certification not applicable
into the view.
• Participants will learn to create flexible
reports and schedules, and to use these
schedules to input, submit, adjust,
translate, and consolidate data.
• The final day of class will focus on
mapping accounts using DataLink, and

BOF255 · FM248e - BusinessObjects Finance: Introduction to the Coefficients

DURATION 3 hours PRICE € 405 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP CONTENT NOTES

• The target audience for this course is
system administrators, and power users.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• To get the most out of this E-learning
session, you must be familiar with how
rules work in Finance.
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• The objective of this 3 hour E-learning
training course is to understand how
coefficients work, and how to go about
customizing them.
• During this session we will: • Additional education not applicable
- Define what a coefficient is. • Certification not applicable
- Go into detail on how functions and
coefficients work and how to go about
customizing them.
- Take a look at the main database tables
used to calculate functions.
- Work with the Syntax Wizard to define
the SQL code used in the functions.
- And finally, we will take a look at what
generating coefficients do.

www.sap.nl/education 521
Business Objects
Enterprise Performance Management - Performance Mgmt / Objectives Management

BOM210 BOM235
PM350R2 - Performance PM380eR2 - Deploying
Manager: Measuring Dashboards from
Performance Development to Production

1 day 4 hours

BOM215 BOM236
PM350eR2 - Performance PM375rwR2 - Performance
Manager: Measuring Management: Additional
Performance Designer Topics

8 hours 1 hour

BOM245
PM381eR2 - Performance
Management: Moving from
BOM205 Development to Production
Systems on SP2
BU230eR2 - Performance 4 hours
Management Essentials for
Business Use
BOM246
5 hours
PM376rwR2 - Performance
Management: Additional
Admin Topics

4 hours

BOA365
OM300e - Business
Objects Objectiv. Mgmt:
Using Profitability for Perf.
Mgmt.
6 hours

522
Business Objects
Enterprise Performance Management - Performance Mgmt / Objectives Management
BOM205 · BU23OeR2 - Performance Management Essentials for Business Use
DURATION 5 hours PRICE € 180 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
business users who need to view and
analyze documents and dashboard data
in InfoView; and create personal and
simple corporate dashboards within
Performance Management.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED None
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This five-hour E-learning course is
designed to give you the skills and
knowledge needed to access and
manage documents and dashboards
using Business Objects InfoView.
• It also guides you through interacting
with and analyzing dashboard data in
InfoView; and creating personal and
simple corporate dashboards within
Performance Management.
• You should take this course to learn
how to customize your InfoView portal;
organize, manage, and distribute
documents; and create and manipulate
dashboards for your business needs.
• The business benefit of this course is
that you will be able to efficiently and
effectively manage personal and
corporate documents and dashboards to
access the data you need, when you
need it.
CONTENT
• Introduction
- Navigating Knowledge Accelerator
- What’s new
• Getting Started with InfoView
- Logging on and navigating InfoView
- Managing folders, documents, and
categories
- Using discussions
- Sharing documents with others
- Accessing other applications
- Creating a dashboard with My InfoView
- Creating hyperlinks
• Getting Started with Performance
Management
- What is Performance Management?
- Accessing corporate dashboards
- Making a dashboard your initial view
- Responding to alerts
• Analyzing Dashboard Content
- Modifying analytics
- Drilling-down on analytics
- Drilling-down on maps
• Managing Goals in Dashboards
- Analyzing strategy maps and scorecards
- Gaining insight and collaborating on
goals
• Creating Personal Dashboards with
Performance Management
- Creating a personal dashboard
• Designing a Corporate Dashboard
- Creating a corporate dashboard
- Creating metric-based and query-based
analytics
- Adding content to dashboards
- Creating rules
• Setting Preferences in InfoView
- Setting general preferences
- Setting Performance Management
preferences
NOTES
• Additional education not applicable
• Level, Delivery, and Duration
- This core E-learning offering is a five to
10 hour course.
• Certification not applicable
www.sap.nl/education 523
Business Objects
Enterprise Performance Management - Performance Mgmt / Objectives Management

BOM210 · PM350R2 - BusinessObjects Performance Manager: Measuring Performance

DURATION 1 day PRICE € 580 STARTING DATES On request

TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
Performance Management designers
who are comfortable working in
Dashboard Manager and need to create
goal-based analytics, strategies and alerts
to display for business users through
corporate dashboard applications.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• BusinessObjects Dashboard Manager:
Designing Dashboards
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• BusinessObjects Performance Manager
XI enables you to create scorecards that,
by aligning with Key Performance
Indicators (KPIs), track performance
across the enterprise.
• Building on existing BusinessObjects
Dashboard Manager knowledge, this
course provides demonstrations and
hands-on activities that take you from
building goals to automating goal-based
alerts through rules.
• As a business benefit, you will be
moving beyond tracking historical
performance to mapping out strategies
for future performance and aligning
goals that can then be monitored
against actual data.
CONTENT
• Understanding Performance Manager
- Describe Performance Manager’s role
within Performance Management.
- Review Dashboard Manager
• Creating Goals
- Define what is a goal
- Create a goal
- Describe where goal data is stored
- Create a bipolar goal
- Create a sliced goal
• Creating Goal Analytics
- Describe a goal analytic
- List the ways you can create a goal
analytic
- Create and edit goal analytics
• Publishing Goals
- Describe Strategy Builder
- Create strategies and roles
- Publish goals and metrics
• Adding Goals to a Dashboard
- List the ways you can display goals on
dashboards
- Create a Goal Subscription analytic
- Create a Metric Tree analytic
- Create a Strategy Map analytic
• Create Goal-based Alerts
- Describe an alert
- Create a goal-based alert
- Create rules based on sliced metrics
- Describe functions to compare metrics
to goals
NOTES
• Additional education not applicable
• Certification not applicable

524
Business Objects
Enterprise Performance Management - Performance Mgmt / Objectives Management
BOM245 · PM381eR2 - Performance Management: Moving from Development to Production Systems on SP2
DURATION 4 hours PRICE € 283 E-LEARNING
TARGET GROUP
• The target audience for this course is
Performance Management
administrators and dashboard designers.
PREREQUISITES - REQUIRED
• Experience with administering
Performance Management (in
Performance Management Setup)
• Familiarity with the components of a
Performance Management dashboard
PREREQUISITES - RECOMMENDED None
GOALS
• This four-hour E-learning course
explains the process to move
Performance Management XI Release 2
dashboard applications from a
development environment to a
production environment.
• This course describes the process and its
limitations and then explains how to
use the Import Wizard, Set Architect
and the new Performance Management
Deployment Tool to move
BusinessObjects repository objects, sets
and PM repository assets from one
system to another.
• Note that the information in this course
is exclusively for Performance
Management XI Release 2 dashboard
applications.
• The business benefit of this course is
you will be able to better plan
dashboard development and the
deployment, reducing the need to
manually re-create dashboard
components or changes on the
production environment.
• Completion of this course is a
mandatory prerequisite for acquiring
the new Performance Management
Deployment Tool.
CONTENT
• Deployment Overview
- List the tools involved in the
deployment process
- List what the tools can and cannot
deploy between Performance
Management XI R2 environments
- Describe the steps in the deployment
process and the tools involved
- List the limitations and the best
practices to avoid them
• Preparing for Deployment
- Assess the dashboard application
- List the steps needed to prepare the
target Performance Management system
- Specify a new target PM repository
database and re-create calendars the
target
• Deploying Sets
- Re-create calendars to support sets and
set-based metrics
- Use Set Architect to unload sets from
the source and load them to t target
• Deploying BO Repository Objects
- Use the Import Wizard to move BO
repository dashboard objects
- Describe how the Import Wizard treats
analytics and dashboards
• Deploying PM Repository Assets
- Describe the Performance Management
Deployment Tool
- Set up the Performance Management
Deployment Tool
- Describe the ID Reservation feature
NOTES
• Course length: 3-5 hours
• Additional education not applicable
• Certification not applicable
www.sap.nl/education 525
CERTIFICERING

Data Uitslag Meer informatie

Certificeringtesten voor de verschillende oplos-
singen van SAP worden gelijktijdig afgenomen op
29-jan-09 27-feb-09 27-mrt-09
24-apr-09 29-mei-09 26-jun-09
Avondcertificeringen (van 17.30 tot 20.30 uur)
worden afgenomen op
13-jan-09 10-feb-09 10-mrt-09
8-apr-09 12-mei-09 9-jun-09
De tijdsduur is per certificeringtest verschillend en
kan variëren van 1 tot 3 uur.
De kosten per test bedragen:
Certificeringtesten SME € 100
Certificeringtesten Associate € 400
Certificeringtesten Professional € 600
De uitslag van een certificeringtest is direct na
afloop beschikbaar. Binnen drie weken ontvangt u
tevens schriftelijk de uitslag. Bij een negatieve
uitslag mag de certificeringtest maximaal twee keer
herkanst worden in dezelfde release.
Test
De certificeringtest bestaat voornamelijk uit multiple
choice vragen. Alle beschikbare certificeringtesten
2009 vindt u in op deze en de volgende pagina.
Om een verschil te maken in niveaus gaat SAP de
termen Certified Associate, Certified Professional
en Certified Master hanteren. Het model
onderscheidt bovendien application consultants,
technology consultants, development consultants
en solution architects.
Aansluitend op deze nieuwe aanpak, heeft SAP
hiervoor ook nieuwe certificeringstesten ontwikkeld.
De komende maanden maken wij de overstap van
het oude naar het nieuwe model.
Voor de meest actuele certificeringinformatie
verwijzen wij u graag naar de webpagina
www.sap.com/services/education/certification

CROSS-INDUSTRY SOLUTIONS
SAP CUSTOMER RELATIONSHIP MANAGEMENT Language Hours/questions Booking Code
SAP Certified Application Associate - CRM Foundation with SAP CRM 2005 English 2/60 C_CR10_50
SAP Certified Solution Consultant CRM - Telesales (CRM 4.0) English 3/80 C_CR410_40
SAP Certified Solution Consultant CRM - Marketing (CRM 4.0) English 3/80 C_CR600_40
SAP Certified Solution Consultant CRM - Service (CRM 4.0) English 3/80 C_CR700_40
SAP Certified Solution Consultant CRM - Internet Sales (CRM 4.0) English 3/80 C_CR800_40
SAP Certified Solution Consultant CRM - Analytical CRM (CRM 4.0) English 3/80 C_CR900_40
SAP Certified Application Professional - Analytical CRM with SAP CRM 2005 English 3/80 P_CRMANA_50
SAP Certified Application Professional - Marketing with SAP CRM 2005 English 3/80 P_CRMMKT_50
SAP Certified Application Professional - Sales with SAP CRM 2005 English 3/80 P_CRMSLS_50
SAP Certified Application Professional - Service with SAP CRM 2005 English 3/80 P_CRMSRV_50
SAP Certified Application Associate - CRM Fundamentals with SAP CRM 2007 (CRM 6.0) English 3/90 C_TCRM20_60

ERP BASIC INTEGRATION

SAP Certified - Business Foundation & Integration with SAP ERP 6.0 English 3/90 C_TERP10_60
Solution Architect ERP – Integration of Business Processes with SAP ERP 2005 German/English 3/80 C_TERP10_05
SAP ERP – Fundamentals & Integration of Business Processes German/English 3/80 C_TERP10

ERP OPERATIONS
SCM – WM & LE with SAP ERP 2005 English 3/80 C_TSCM66_05
SCM – WM & LE with SAP ERP 2006 Professional English 3/90 P_LEWM_60
SCM – Procurement with mySAP ERP 2005 German/English 3/80 C_TSCM52_05
SCM – Procurement with SAP ERP 2006 Professional English 3/90 P_PRO_60
SCM – Procurement with SAP ERP (2004) German/English 3/80 C_TSCM54_04
SCM – Order Fulfillment with SAP ERP 2004 German/English 3/80 C_TSCM64_04
SCM – Order Fulfillment with mySAP ERP 2005 English/German 3/80 C_TSCM62_05
SCM – Order Fulfillment with SAP ERP 6.0 Associate English 3/90 C_TSCM62_60
SCM – Order Fulfillment with SAP ERP 6.0 Professional English 3/90 P_SD_60

SAP SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT

Solution Consultant SCM – Planning in mySAP SCM (SCM5.0) English/German 3/80 C_TSCM44_05
SCM – Planning & Manufacturing with SAP ERP 2005 German/English 3/80 C_TSCM42_05
SAP SCM – Manufacturing (SCM 4.0) German/English 3/80 C_TSCM34_40
SAP SCM – Planning (SCM 4.0) German/English 3/80 C_TSCM24_40

SAP SUPPLIER RELATIONSHIP MANAGEMENT

SAP SRM – SRM with SAP SRM 2005 (SRM50) Associate English 3/90 C_SRM50
SAP SRM – SRM with SAP SRM (SRM50) Professional 2005 English 3/90 P_SRM50
SAP SRM – Procurement (SRM 5.0) German/English 1/40 C_TSRM10_05
SAP SRM – Procurement (SRM 4.0) German/English 1/40 C_TSRM10_40
SAP SRM – E-Procurement (SRM 3.0) German/English 1/40 C_TSRM10_30

526
SAP PRODUCT LIFECYCLE MANAGEMENT
mySAP PLM – Quality Management (2005) German/English 3/80 C_TPLM40_05
PLM – Maintenance & Repair with mySAP ERP 2005 German/English 3/80 C_TPLM30_05
PLM – Project Management with SAP ERP 2006 Associate German/English 3/90 C_TPLM22_60
PLM – Project Management with mySAP ERP 2005 German/English 3/80 C_TPLM22_05

CROSS-INDUSTRY SOLUTIONS
SAP ERP HUMAN CAPITAL MANAGEMENT Language Hours/questions Booking Code
Human Resources – Mngmt & Administration with SAP ERP 2005 German/English 3/80 C_THR12_05
Human Resources – Mngmt & Administration with SAP ERP 2004 German/English 3/80 C_THR14_04
Human resources – Talent Management with SAP ERP 6.0 Professional English 3/90 P_HCMTM_60

SAP ERP FINANCIALS

Financials – Financial Accounting with SAP ERP 2005 German/English 3/80 C_TFIN52_05
Financials – Management Accounting with SAP ERP 2005 German/English 3/80 C_TFIN22_05
Financials – Strategic Enterprise Management – CPM & BPS with SAP ERP 2004 German/English 3/80 C_TFIN40_04
Financials – Financial Accounting with SAP ERP 2004 German/English 3/80 C_TFIN54_04
Financials – Management Accounting with SAP ERP 2004 German/English 3/80 C_TFIN24_04
Financials – Strategic Enterprise Management Business Consolidation with
SAP ERP 6.0 Professional English 3/90 P_SEMBCS_60

INDUSTRY SOLUTIONS Language Hours/questions Booking Code

SAP OIL & GAS SAP for Oil & Gas: Business Processes and Organization English 3/80 C_TIOG10_05
SAP RETAIL SAP Retail (2003) German/English 3/80 C_ISR_03
IS BEVERAGE SAP Beverage – Logistics (2003) German/English 2/60 C_BEVLO_03
PUBLIC KFI ERP 2005 English 1,5/40 C_KFI_06
SAP FOR UTILITIES SAP IS-U 2004 English 3/80 C_NLISU_04

SAP SOLUTIONS FOR SMALL AND MIDSIZE ENTERPRISES

SAP BUSINESS ONE Language Hours/questions Booking Code
SAP Business One 2007 (Development Consultant) English 3/80 C_TB1300_07
SAP Business One 2005 (Development Consultant) English 3/80 C_TB1300_05
SAP Business One 2004 (Development Consultant) German/English 3/80 C_TB1300_04
SAP Business One 2005 (Support Consultant) English/German 3/80 C_TB1250_06
SAP Business One 2007 (Support Consultant) Enlish 3/80 C_TB1250_07
SAP Business One 2005 (Support Consultant) English 1/40 C_TB1250_05
SAP Business One 2004 (Support Consultant) English 1/40 C_TB1250_04
SAP Business One 2007 (Implementation Consultant) English 3/80 C_TB1200_07
SAP Business One 2005 (Solution Consultant) German/English 3/80 C_TB1200_05
SAP Business One 2007 (Advanced Consultant) English 3/80 C_TB1270_07
SAP Business One 2007 (Implementation consultant) Delta English 1,5/40 C_DTB1_07
SAP Business One 2004 (Solution Consultant) German/English 3/80 C_TB1200_04
SAP Business One Rel.7.0 Delta (Solution Consultant) English 1,5/40 C_DTB1_70

SAP ALL_IN_ONE
SAP Support Consultant on SAP All-in-One English 1/40 C_PXSUP
SAP Certified Application Associate - Financials with SAP Business All-in-One Solution English 3/90 C_AFIN_07
SAP Certified Application Associate - Logistics with SAP Business All-in-One Solution English 3/90 C_A1LOG

SAP SOLUTION MANAGER

IMPLEMENTATION & OPERATIONS Language Hours/questions Booking Code
SAP Certified Solution Consultant - SAP Solution Manager 4.0 Implementation Tools English 1/40 C_SMI310_06
SAP Certified Solution Consultant SAP NetWeaver '04 - Solution Manager Implementation Tools English 1/40 C_SMI310_04
SAP Certified Solution Consultant IT Excellence - SAP Solution Manager 7.0 Operations English 1/40 C_SM100_06

END-TO-END (E2E) SOLUTION OPERATIONS Language Hours/questions Booking Code

SAP Certified E2E Application Management Expert - Change Control Management English 1/40 C_E2E200_07
SAP Certified E2E Application Management Expert - Root Cause Analysis English 1/40 C_E2E100_07
SAP Certified E2E Business Process Expert - Integration & Automation English 1/40 C_E2E300_07
SAP Certified E2E Program Manager - Technical Upgrade Management English 0,5/20 C_E2E400_07
SAP Certified Solution Consultant - Managing E2E Solution Operations (with Run SAP) English 1/30 C_TE2E04_08
SAP Certified E2E Application Management Expert - Root Cause Analysis English 1/40 C_E2E100_08
SAP Certified E2E Application Management Expert - Change Control Management English 1/40 C_E2E200_08
SAP E2E Solution Operations Certification Business Expert - Process Integration &
Automation Optimization English 1/40 C_E2E300_08

ENTERPRISE SERVICE-ORIENTED ARCHITECTURE (ENTERPRISE SOA) Language Hours/questions Booking Code

SAP Certified Associate Enterprise Architect English 3/90 C_SOA200_70

www.sap.nl/education 527
INFRASTRUCTURE – SAP NETWEAVER
DEVELOPMENT CONSULTANT Language Hours/questions Booking Code
SAP NetWeaver 7.0 Application Development Focus ABAP Associate English 3/90 C_TAW12_70
SAP NetWeaver 2004 – Application Development Focus ABAP German/English 3/80 C_TAW12_04
SAP NetWeaver 7.0 ABAP System Interfaces Development Professional English 3/90 P_ABAP_SI_70
SAP NetWeaver 7.0 ABAP User Interface Development Professional English 3/90 P_ABAP_GUI70
SAP NetWeaver 7.0 (SP09) – Mobile Infrastructure English 1/40 C_TMOB40_70
SAP Netweaver 2004s – NetWeaver Portal English 3/80 C_TEP12_04S
SAP NetWeaver 7.0 Application Development Focus JAVA Associate English 3/90 C_JA320_70
SAP NetWeaver ’04 – Web Application Development Focus JAVA English 3/80 C_JA320_04
SAP NetWeaver 7.0 Application Development Focus JAVA Professional English 3/90 P_JAVA_DEV70
SAP NetWeaver 7.0 – Exchange Infrastructure English 3/80 C_TBIT44_70
SAP NetWeaver ’04 – Exchange Infrastrucure & Integration (XI 3.0) English 3/80 C_TBIT44_04

SOLUTION CONSULTANT
SAP NetWeaver Master Data Management (MDM 5.5 SP04) English 3 / 80 C_MDMS_04
SAP NetWeaver 2004s – Knowledge Management & Collaboration (Portal 7.0 (partly NW2004s) English 3 / 80 C_TEP30_04s
SAP NetWeaver 7.0 Business Intelligence Application Associate English 3/90 C_TBW45_70
Solution Consultant SAP NetWeaver 2004s German/English 3/80 C_TBW45_04s
SAP NetWeaver 7.0 Business Intelligence Data Warehousing Professional English 3/90 P_BIE_70
SAP NetWeaver 7.0 Business Intelligence Reporting & Analyses professional English 3/90 P_BIR_70

TECHNOLOGY CONSULTANT
SAP NetWeaver ’04 – OS/DB Migration for SAP Systems English 1/40 C_TADM70_04

TECHNOLOGY CONSULTANT
SAP NetWeaver ’04 – SAP WebAS for DB2 on z/OS English 3/120 C_TADMZOS_04
SAP NetWeaver 2004s – Portal English 3/120 C_TEP10_04s
SAP NetWeaver 2004 – Portal, Knowledge Management & Collaboration English 3/120 C_TEP10_04
SAP NetWeaver 7.0 – SAP Web As for MS SQL Server Associate English 3/90 C_TADM53_70
SAP NetWeaver ’04 – SAP Web AS for MS SQL Server English 3/120 C_TADM53_04
SAP NetWeaver 7.0 SAP Web As for DB2 UDB English 3/90 C_TADM56-70
SAP NetWeaver ’04 – SAP Web As for DB2 UDB English 3/120 C_TADM56_04
SAP Certified Technology Associate - System Administration (Oracle DB) with SAP NetWeaver 7.0 English 3/90 C_TADM51_70
SAP NetWeaver ’04 – SAP Web As for ORACLE German/English 3/120 C_TADM51_04
SAP NetWeaver 7.0 Platform technology Professisonal English 3/90 P_ADM_SYS_70
SAP NetWeaver 7.0 Exchange Infrastructure English 3/80 C_TBIT51_70
SAP NetWeaver – SAP Security (2004) English 3/80 C_TADMSEC_04
SAP netWeaver 7.0 Security Professional English 3/90 P_ADM_SEC_70
SAP netWeaver 7.0 Web As for MaxDB Associate English 3/90 C_TADM50_70
SAP Netweaver ’04 – SAP Web As for MaxDB English 3/120 C_TADM50_04

DELTA CERTIFICATION
TECHNICAL CONSULTANT Language Hours/questions Booking Code
SAP Netweaver ’04 – SAP Web AS Impl. & operation for (DB) (2003)
(for Technology Consultants 2000 or 2002)* English 1/40 C_TADMD3x_03
SAP NetWeaver ’04 – SAP Web AS for (DB)* German/English 1/40 C_TADMD5x_04
* With ‘x’ in the certification booking code for O=Oracle, B= SAPDB, S=MS SQL Server, D=DB2 UDB. I=Informix, A=DBW on AS/400. Delta test C_TADMD3x_03
does not cover database questions. Nevertheless, you have to choose the correct booking code dependant which database certificate you had in the past.

SOLUTION CONSULTANT
SAP NetWeaver 2004s – Business Intelligence (SAPBW3.5) German/English 1/40 C_DBW35_04s
SAP NetWeaver 2004s – Business Intelligence (SAPBW3.0) German/English 1/40 C_DBW30_04s

SAP BUSINESS OBJECTS Language Hours/questions Booking Code

Business Objects Certified Professional - BusinessObjects Enterprise English 4,5/`130 C_BOCP_BOE
Business Objects Certified Professional - BusinessObjects Data Integrator English 3/88 C_BOCP_BODI
Business Objects Certified Professional - Crystal Reports English 3/85 C_BOCP_CR
Business Objects Certified Professional - Crystal Reports 2008 English 0,7/22 C_BOCP_CR08D
Business Objects Enterprise XI 3.0 English 1,3/40 C_BOCP_BOED

528
ROUTEBESCHRIJVING

SAP Education
Amerikastraat 10, 5232 BE ’s-Hertogenbosch
T +31 (0)73 645 79 50 / 0800 022 12 06 (gratis)
F +31 (0)73 645 75 90
E education.netherlands@sap.com

www.sap.nl/education

Route - per auto

Vanuit Amsterdam/Utrecht/Waalwijk Amsterdam

Neem op de A2 richting ’s-Hertogenbosch/Eindhoven
de afslag Rosmalen-De Herven (nr. 20). Utrecht A2
Bovenaan de afrit neemt u de rotonde 3/4 richting
‘Industrieterrein Soetelieve/De Herven’.
Na 100m ziet u aan uw linkerhand het kantoor van
SAP Nederland. Waalwijk A59
U kunt op het parkeerdek rondom het gebouw parkeren.
De receptie van het SAP Training Center bevindt zich
links in de centrale hal.

Vanuit Maastricht/Eindhoven Afslag 20

Neem op de A2 richting ’s-Hertogenbosch de afslag Rosmalen
Rosmalen-De Herven.
Ga bovenaan de afrit, bij de verkeerslichten, linksaf en ‘De Herven’
rijd het viaduct over.
Bij de eerstvolgende verkeerslichten gaat u linksaf
richting ‘Industrieterrein Soetelieve/De Herven’.
Op de rotonde neemt u de eerste afslag rechtdoor.
Na 100m ziet u aan uw linkerhand het kantoor van Arnhem
SAP Nederland.
U kunt op het parkeerdek rondom het gebouw parkeren. Nijmegen A50
De receptie van het SAP Training Center bevindt zich
links in de centrale hal.

Openbaar Vervoer

Neem van het Centraal Station ‘s-Hertogenbosch

buslijn 66 richting Rosmalen.
Eindhoven A2
Stap uit bij halte Reitscheweg.
Steek de straat over en houd links aan (2 minuten lopen).

Hotelaccommodatie

SAP Education heeft prijs-
afspraken gemaakt met de
genoemde hotels.
Indien u bij reservering van
een hotelkamer aangeeft dat
u deelneemt aan een cursus
bij SAP Nederland B.V.
kunt u gebruik maken van
gereduceerde tarieven.
Mercure Hotel
Ligging: aan de snelweg A2,
afslag Rosmalen / de Herven
Burg. Burgerslaan 50
5245 NH Rosmalen
T +31 (0)73 521 91 59
F +31 (0)73 521 62 15
Golden Tulip Hotel Central
Ligging: in het centrum van
’s-Hertogenbosch
Burg. Loeffplein 98
5211 RX ’s-Hertogenbosch
T +31 (0)73 692 69 26
F +31 (0)73 614 56 99
Mövenpick Hotel
Ligging: aan de snelweg A2,
afslag 22
Pettelaarpark 90
5216 PH ’s-Hertogenbosch
T +31 (0)73 687 46 74
F +31 (0)73 687 46 35

www.sap.nl/education 529
ALGEMENE VOORWAARDEN SAP EDUCATION
0. Definities
0.1 SAP Education: Onderdeel van
SAP Nederland BV (verder te
noemen SAP) specifiek berust met
het verzorgen van SAP-opleidingen
en trainingen.
0.2 Klant: opdrachtgever van SAP
Education tot levering van een
SAP Education dienst.
0.3 Cursist: daadwerkelijke deelnemer
aan een SAP Education dienst.
0.4 Public course: een door SAP
Education ontwikkelde en verzorg-
de standaard SAP opleiding of
training beschreven en vastgelegd
in het opleidingsrooster, die open
staat voor de in artikel 1.2
genoemde deelnemers.
0.5 Workshop: een door SAP
Education ontwikkelde en verzorg-
de klantspecifieke training enkel en
alleen gericht op deelnemers allen
werkzaam bij één opdrachtgever,
cq. klant.
0.6 Academy; een door SAP Education
ontwikkeld en verzorgd traject van
trainingen specifiek gericht op het
behalen van een certificering.
0.7 E-learning: een door SAP
Education ontwikkeld online
studiemethode waar de cursist
zonder tussenkomst van een
docent een opleiding kan volgen.
0.8 Online Knowledge Products
(OKP’s): specifieke informatie-
producten welke door SAP
Education online beschikbaar
gesteld worden.
0.9 Dienst: een door SAP Education te
verzorgen opleiding, training, of
aan Education gerelateerde service
(zoals het uitvoeren van een
Training Needs Analysis of
Education Consulting).
530
1. Aanmelding en termijn
1.1 Aan de opleidingen van SAP
Education kunnen enkel en alleen
deelnemen:
• Medewerkers van SAP
• Klanten van SAP
• Officiële partners van SAP
• Potentiële klanten van SAP na
goedkeuring door SAP
• Door SAP geaccepteerde derde
bedrijven/instellingen/personen
In geval van training met betrekking tot
oplossingen die nog niet algemeen
beschikbaar zijn, behoudt SAP zich het
recht voor daar andere criteria voor te
hanteren.
1.2 Wijze van inschrijven:
• Schriftelijk via het daartoe bestaande
inschrijfformulier
• Online via het Online Registration
Systeem
1.3 AIleen aanmeldingen conform
artikel 1.2 worden geaccepteerd.
Telefonische en e-mail aanmeldingen
en/of reserveringen worden niet
geaccepteerd.
1.4 Indien de door u gewenste Dienst
volledig bezet is, wordt dat door SAP
Education kenbaar gemaakt.
1.5 Aanmeldingen voor Diensten
worden door SAP Education schriftelijk
bevestigd.
1.6 Reserveren uit plannings-
overwegingen is toegestaan. Hieraan
kunnen echter geen rechten worden
ontleend.
1.7 Iedere schriftelijke aanmelding
wordt gezien als een definitieve
aanmelding en wordt als zodanig
behandeld.
1.8 SAP Education heeft te allen tijde
het recht om een bepaalde Dienst op
basis van onvoorziene omstandigheden
te annuleren of te verplaatsen.
2. Betalingen en annuleringen
2.1 Alle facturen met betrekking tot
Diensten dienen uiterlijk 30 dagen na
aanvang van de opleiding te zijn
voldaan.
2.2 Annulering van een Public Course
is mogelijk indien SAP Education
uiterlijk 10 werkdagen voor aanvang
van de training de schriftelijke
annulering ontvangen heeft. Enkel dan
is geen cursusgeld verschuldigd.
Het annuleren van Online Knowledge
Products (OKP’s) en E-learning units is
niet mogelijk. Elektronisch annuleren is
alleen geldig indien door SAP
Education schriftelijk bevestigd.
2.3 Annulering van een workshop is
kosteloos door Klant mogelijk tot
12 werkdagen voor aanvang van
betreffende workshop en dient
schriftelijk te gebeuren. Voor een
tijdige annulering zonder de plicht tot
betaling van de opleiding is bepalend
de dag waarop SAP Education de
schriftelijke annulering ontvangt.
Bij niet tijdige annulering zijn de totale
workshopkosten verschuldigd.
2.4 Indien voor Academies afwijkende
specifieke voorwaarden van toepas-
sing zijn, zullen die voor officiële
inschrijving worden medegedeeld.
2.5 Een Klant heeft te allen tijde het
recht conform artikel 1.1 een andere
deelnemer in zijn/haar plaats aan te
wijzen, mits dit voor aanvang van de
Dienst schriftelijk dan wel elektronisch
aan SAP Education is medegedeeld en
dit door SAP Education schriftelijk is
bevestigd.
2.6 Het niet verschijnen van een
Cursist op een geboekte Dienst
ontslaat een klant niet van zijn
betalingsverplichtingen.
2.7 Het tarief van de Dienst op lokatie
van SAP Education is inclusief cursus-
materiaal, systeem gebruik en lunch.
3. Kwaliteit en aansprakelijkheid
3.1 Het is de verantwoordelijkheid van
zowel de Cursist als de Klant om
ervoor te zorgen dat de Cursist voor
deelname aan een cursus over het
vereiste kennisniveau c.q. de vereiste
vooropleiding beschikt.
3.2 SAP Education is voor directe of
indirecte schade uitdrukkelijk niet
aansprakelijk.
3.3 Indien SAP Education, ongeacht
het gestelde in lid 2 van dit artikel,
toch aansprakelijk zal zijn, is deze
aansprakelijkheid beperkt tot directe
schade met een maximum van de
betreffende opdrachtwaarde. Nimmer
zal de aansprakelijkheid meer bedragen
dan 10.000,- euro.
3.4 SAP Education houdt de klant
aansprakelijk voor schade toegebracht
aan SAP eigendommen dan wel de
reputatie van SAP.
3.5 Klachten over Diensten, ongeacht
de aard, dienen binnen 24 uur na
beëindiging van de Dienst schriftelijk
dan wel elektronisch met motivering
van redenen kenbaar te worden
gemaakt.
4. Huisregels
4.1 Deelnemers aan een opleiding op
lokatie SAP Education dienen zich te
houden aan de door SAP Education
gestelde huisregels. De huisregels
vormen een onderdeel van de
Algemene Voorwaarden.
4.2 SAP Education behoudt zich het
recht voor om Cursisten van Diensten
uit te sluiten dan wel te verwijderen
met opgave van redenen.
5. Auteursrechten, geheimhouding
en intellectueel eigendom
5.1 Opleidingsmaterialen van SAP
Education mogen in welke vorm dan
ook niet worden gekopieerd en/of
openbaar gemaakt, ook niet voor
gebruik binnen de instelling of organi-
satie waar de Cursist werkzaam is.
5.2 Alle Intellectuele Eigendommen van
de door SAP Education ontwikkelde
materialen blijven bij SAP Education.
5.3 Alle rechten inclusief vertalingen,
vermenigvuldiging en herdrukken van
opleidingsmaterialen in welke vorm dan
ook zijn uitdrukkelijk voorbehouden aan
SAP Education.
5.4 De Cursist is verplicht alle
informatie en documentatie betrekking
hebbende op SAP Software en
hem/haar ter beschikking gesteld in
het kader van de door hem/haar
gevolgde opleiding vertrouwelijk te
behandelen.
6. Algemeen
6.1 SAP Education is niet aansprakelijk
voor eventuele druk- en zetfouten.
6.2 SAP Education behoudt zich het
recht voor om wijzigingen in cursus-
materiaal, cursusinhoud en samen-
stelling zonder voorafgaande opgave
van redenen door te voeren, indien
ontwikkelingen daartoe aanleiding
geven.
7. Aanvullende voorwaarden voor
Online Registratie
Aanmeldingen kunnen na onder-
tekening van de Online Registratie
Overeenkomst via internet geschieden.
Voor de annulering van aanmeldingen
gelden de voorwaarden conform
artikel 2.2.
www.sap.nl/education 531
INDEX

CODE COURSE TITLE Duration Price Dates Page

AC010 · Business Processes in Financial Accounting 5 days € 2.950 16-mrt-09

25-mei-09 86
AC020 · Investment Management 3 days € 1.770 On request 106
AC040 · Business Processes in Management Accounting 5 days € 2.950 30-mrt-09
8-jun-09 80
AC050 · Fin & Mgt Accounting with New GL 5 days € 2.950 19-jan-09 97
AC200 · Financial Accounting Customizing I 5 days € 2.950 12-jan-09 99
AC201 · Payment and Dunning Program, Correspondence, Interest Calculation 2 days € 1.180 22-jan-09 99
AC202 · Financial Accounting: Customizing II 2 days € 1.180 26-jan-09 99
AC205 · Individual Account Closing 4 days € 2.360 3-feb-09 100
AC206 · Parallel Valuation and Financial Reporting 3 days € 1.770 On request 100
AC210 · New General Ledger 4 days € 2.360 24-mrt-09
2-jun-09 101
AC212 · Migration to the New General Ledger 5 days € 2.950 On request 101
AC220 · Special Ledger 5 days € 2.950 On request 102
AC270 · Travel Management: Travel Planning and travel Expenses 5 days € 2.950 On request 174
AC280 · Analytics and Reporting in Financial Accounting 3 days € 1.770 On request 87
AC305 · Asset Accounting 5 days € 2.950 16-feb-09 102
AC350 · System Configuration for IM 2 days € 1.180 On request 106
AC400 · Programming in Financials 5 days € 2.950 On request 107
AC405 · Cost Center & Internal Order Accounting 5 days € 2.950 20-apr-09
22-jun-09 107
AC412 · Cost Center Accounting: Extended Functionality 3 days € 1.770 On request 108
AC420 · Template Allocation Procedure voor Proccesses 2 days € 1.180 On request 108
AC505 · Product Cost Planning 5 days € 2.950 On request 109
AC520 · Controlling for Make to Order Stock Production 5 days € 2.950 On request 109
AC530 · Actual Costing Material Ledger 3 days € 1.770 On request 110
AC605 · Profitability Analysis 5 days € 2.950 26-jan-09 110
AC610 · Profit Center Accounting 3 days € 1.770 7-apr-09 111
AC660 · EC-CS: Consolidation Functions 5 days € 2.950 On request 103
AC665 · EC-CS: Integration 3 days € 1.770 On request 103
AC680 · Analytics & Reporting in Management Accounting 3 days € 1.770 On request 88
AC805 · Cash Management 3 days € 1.770 11-feb-09 93
AC990 · Tips & tricks in CO 3 days € 1.770 On request 111
ADM100 · SAP Web AS Administration I 5 days € 3.300
19-jan-09, 16-mrt-09, 25-mei-09 256
ADM102 · SAP Web AS Administration II 3 days € 1.980
26-jan-09, 23-mrt-09, 3-jun-09 256
ADM106 · Advanced SAP System Monitoring 2 days € 1.320 2-feb-09 257
ADM107 · Advanced System Monitoring for NetWeaver 2004 2 days € 1.320 5-feb-09 257
ADM110 · SAP ECC 6.0 Installation 2 days € 1.320 29-jan-09
8-jun-09 258
ADM200 · SAP Web AS Java Administration 5 days € 3.300
5-jan-09, 23-feb-09, 4-mei-09 204
ADM200 · SAP Web AS Java Administration 5 days € 3.300 22-jun-09 204
ADM225 · SAP Software Logistics for Java 3 days € 1.980 11-mrt-09 258
ADM315 · Workload Analysis 3 days € 1.980 6-apr-09
10-jun-09 259
ADM325 · Software Logistics 5 days € 3.300 30-mrt-09
15-jun-09 259
ADM326 · SAP R/3 Enterprise Upgrade 5 days € 3.300 On request 260
ADM355 · SAP APO System Administration 2 days € 1.320 12-jan-09 270
ADM505 · Database Administration Oracle 3 days € 1.980 11-mei-09
2-mrt-09 266
ADM506 · Oracle Database Administration II 2 days € 1.320 14-mei-09
5-mrt-09 266
ADM515 · SAP DB Database Administration 3 days € 1.980 9-feb-09 267
ADM520 · Database Administration MS SQL Server 3 days € 1.980 On request 267
ADM525 · SAP NetWeaver on DB2 UDB for iSeries: Database Administration 5 days € 3.300 On request 268
ADM530 · SAP NetWeaver on DB2 UDB for z/OS: Database Administration 4 days € 2.640 On request 268
ADM535 · DB2 UDB (UNIX and Windows) Database Administration 3 days € 1.980 On request 269
ADM555 · liveCache Administration 2 days € 1.320 On request 270
ADM940 · SAP Authorization Concept 3 days € 1.980
26-jan-09, 6-apr-09, 15-jun-09 262

www.sap.nl/education 533
INDEX

CODE COURSE TITLE Duration Price Dates Page

ADM950 · Secure SAP System Management 2 days € 1.320 2-feb-09

16-apr-09 263
ADM955 · SAP GRC Access Control - Installation 4 days € 2.640 On request 263
ADM960 · Security in SAP System Environments 3 days € 1.980 9-feb-09
20-apr-09 264
ANA10 · xApp Analytics using Visual Composer 3 days € 1.770 On request 297
BC400 · ABAP Workbench Foundations 5 days € 2.950
9-feb-09, 30-mrt-09, 25-mei-09 235
BC401 · ABAP Objects 5 days € 2.950 16-feb-09
20-apr-09 235
BC402 · Advanced ABAP 5 days € 2.950 On request 236
BC405 · Programming ABAP Reports 5 days € 2.950 23-mrt-09 236
BC407 · Reporting with the InfoSet Query and QuickViewer 2 days € 1.180 12-mrt-09 237
BC410 · Developing Screen-Based User Dialogs 3 days € 1.770 6-apr-09 237
BC412 · Dialog Programming using EnjoySAP Controls 5 days € 2.950 On request 237
BC414 · Programming Database Updates 2 days € 1.180 On request 238
BC415 · Remote Function Calls in ABAP 2 days € 1.180 On request 227
BC416 · Web Services in ABAP 2 days € 1.180 27-apr-09 232
BC417 · BAPI Development for Accessing SAP 3 days € 1.770 On request 232
BC420 · Data Transfer 5 days € 2.950 On request 238
BC425 · Enhancements and Modification 3 days € 1.770 On request 238
BC427 · Enhancement framework 2 days € 1.180 On request 238
BC430 · ABAP Dictionary 2 days € 1.180 On request 239
BC460 · SAPscript: Forms Design and Text Management 3 days € 1.770 On request 239
BC470 · Form Printing using SAP Smart Forms 2 days € 1.180 On request 239
BC480 · PDF-Based Print Forms 3 days € 1.770 On request 240
BC481 · SAP Interactive Forms bij Adobe (SIFbA) in the ABAP Environment 2 days € 1.180 On request 240
BC490 · ABAP Performance Tuning 3 days € 1.770 On request 241
BIT100 · SAP NetWeaver Process Integration - Overview 3 days € 1.770 7-jan-09
6-mei-09 221
BIT140 · XML Introductiion 2 days € 1.180 On request 223
BIT300 · Application Link Enabling (ALE) Technology 3 days € 1.770 On request 227
BIT350 · ALE Enhancements 2 days € 1.180 On request 228
BIT400 · SAP NW Exchange Infrastructure 5 days € 2.950 On request 223
BIT402 · Adapters Concepts part 1 6 hours € 550 E-learning 221
BIT403 · Adapters Concepts part 2 6 hours € 550 E-learning 222
BIT420 · PI - Proxy Development & Service Provisioning with ESR 5 days € 2.950 On request 273
BIT430 · SAP XI Business Process Management 3 days € 1.770 On request 223
BIT450 · SAP Exchange Infrastructure Development 2 days € 1.180 On request 224
BIT460 · SAP Exchange Infrastructure Mapping 3 days € 1.770 On request 224
BIT526 · Java Connector Programming 5 days € 2.950 On request 230
BIT528 · SAP .NET Connector Programming 5 days € 2.950 On request 231
BIT530 · SAP Business Connector Introduction 2 days € 1.180 On request 231
BIT531 · SAP Business Connector Integration 3 days € 1.770 On request 231
BIT600 · SAP Business Workflow - Concepts, Inbox and Template Usage 2 days € 1.180 2-mrt-09
18-mei-09 224
BIT601 · SAP Business Workflow - Build and Use 4 days € 2.360 16-mrt-09
26-mei-09 225
BIT603 · SAP Workflow and Web Scenarios 2 days € 1.180 23-mrt-09 225
BIT610 · SAP Workflow - Programming 3 days € 1.770 25-mrt-09 226
BIT611 · SAP Workflow Advanced Programming with ABAP OO 1 day € 590 On request 222
BIT615 · SAP Archive Link Document Management with SAP Archive Link 4 days € 2.360 On request 228
BIT640 · SAP NetWeaver - SAP Records Management in Detail 3 days € 1.770 On request 228
BIT660 · Data Archiving 3 days € 1.770 6-apr-09 229
BIT670 · ADK - Retrieval Programming 2 days € 1.180 On request 229
BMP300 · Business Process Management Governance Overview 3 days € 1.770 On request 304
BOA225 · PF204e - Introduction to Activity Based Costing 2,5 hours € 180 E-learning 512
BOA240 · PF205 - BusinessObjects Activity Analysis: Foundation 4 days € 1.880 On request 513
BOA250 · PF210 - BusinessObjects Activity Analysis: Advanced Topics in Model Building 5 days € 2.350 On request 514
BOA340 · PC205 BusinessObjects Profitability 4 days € 1.880 On request 515
BOA355 · PC300e - BusinessObjects Profitability and Cost Management: Transactional ABC 5 hours € 284 E-learning 516
BOA365 · OM200e - BusinessObjects Objectives Management: Using Profitability for Performance Management
6 hours € 284 E-learning 517
BOB200 · DM350R2 - BusinessObjects Implementing Business Views 2 days € 940 On request 365
BOB205 · DM350eR2 - BusinessObjects Implementing Business Views 12 hours € 450 E-learning 366
534
INDEX

CODE COURSE TITLE Duration Price Dates Page

BOC105 · RD311e - Crystal Reports: Creating and Using SQL Commands 4 hours € 144 E-learning 397
BOC115 · RD420e - Crystal Reports: Creating Complex Formulas 4 hours € 135 E-learning 398
BOC125 · DM330e - BusinessObjects: SQL Commands 4 hours € 225 E-learning 399
BOC135 · RD313e - Crystal Reports: Reporting from OLAP Data Sources 4 hours € 144 E-learning 400
BOC145 · BU410e - Crystal Reports XI: Reporting Essentials for Business Users 4 hours € 180 E-learning 400
BOC210 · RD110R2 - Crystal Reports: Report Design I - Fundamentals of Report Design 2 days € 940 13-jan-09
14-apr-09 401
BOC215 · RD110eR2 - Crystal Reports: Report Design I - Fundamentals of Report Design 12 hours € 450 E-learning 391
BOC220 · RD210R2 - Crystal Reports: Report Design II - Business Reporting Solutions 2 days € 940 15-jan-09
16-apr-09 402
BOC225 · RD210eR2 - Crystal Reports: Report Design II - Business Reporting Solutions 12 hours € 450 E-learning 392
BOC230 · RD310R2 - Crystal Reports: Report Design III - Report Processing Strategies 1 day € 470 On request 403
BOC235 · RD310eR2 - Crystal Reports: Report Desig III - Report Processing Strategies 6 hours € 225 E-learning 404
BOC245 · RD410eR2 - Crystal Reports: Report Design IV - Optimizing Report Data 8 hours € 225 E-learning 405
BOC266 · RD500rwR2 - Crystal Reports XI R2: New Features 0,3 hours € 112 E-learning 405
BOC275 · BU330eR2 - Crystal Reports Explorer: Essentials for Business Users 11 hours € 180 E-learning 406
BOC285 · BU410eR2 - Crystal Reports Reporting Essentials for Business Users 6 hours € 180 E-learning 407
BOC295 · DM210eR2 - BusinessObjects Data Essentials 4 hours € 180 E-learning 407
BOC305 · RD100e08 - Crystal Reports 2008: Quickstart 5 hours € 225 E-learning 410
BOC310 · RD11008 - Crystal Reports 2008: Report Design I - Fundamentals of Report Design 2 days € 940 On request 411
BOC315 · RD110e08 - Crystal Reports 2008: Report Design I - Fundamentals of Report Design 10 hours € 450 E-learning 412
BOC320 · RD21008 - Crystal Reports 2008: Report Design II - Business Reporting Solutions 2 days € 940 On request 413
BOC325 · RD21008e - Crystal Reports 2008: Report Design II - Business Reporting Solutions 10 hours € 450 E-learning 414
BOC330 · RD31008 - Crystal Reports 2008: Report Design III - Report Processing Strategies 1 day € 470 On request 415
BOC335 · RD310e08 - Crystal Reports 2008: Report Design III - Report Processing Strategies 7 hours € 225 E-learning 416
BOC345 · Crystal Reports 2008: Report Design IV - Optimizing Report Data 8 hours € 225 E-learning 417
BOD210 · PM310R2 - BusinessObjects Dashboard Manager: Designing Dashboards 3 days € 1.740 20-apr-09 418
BOD215 · PM310eR2 - BusinessObjects Dashboard Manager Designing Dashboards 18 hours € 846 E-learning 420
BOD305 · PM100eV3.0 - BusinessObjects Dashboard and Analytics XI 3.0: What’s New 2,5 hours € 112 E-learning 421
BOE105 · BO601e - BusinessObjects 6.5 Enterprise Administration Part 1 9 hours € 423 E-learning 343
BOE115 · BO602e - BusinessObjects 6.5 Enterprise Administration Part 2 10 hours € 423 E-learning 344
BOE125 · BO603e - BusinessObjects 6.5 Enterprise Administration Part 3 4,5 hours € 423 E-learning 345
BOE130 · BO502 - BusinessObjects: Supervisor 1 day € 580 27-mrt-09
10-jul-09 346
BOE145 · SA250e - BusinessObjects: Mastering Infrastructure 4 hours € 135 E-learning 347
BOE155 · SA311e - BusinessObject Enterprise: Administering Servers - Unix 14 hours € 450 E-learning 348
BOE165 · SA500e - BusinessObjects Enterprise: Mastering New Features 0,75 hours € 225 E-learning 349
BOE166 · SA610rw - Enterprise XI: Essentials of Updating from Crystal Enterprise to the BusinessObjects XI Platform
11 hours € 225 E-learning 368
BOE175 · SA110e - Crystal Reports Server XI R1: Administration and Setup 18 hours € 562 E-learning 350
BOE185 · DS210e - BusinessObjects XI: Data Essentials 4 hours € 180 E-learning 351
BOE205 · SA110eR2 - Crystal Reports Server Administration and Configuration 15 hours € 562 E-learning 352
BOE206 · BU480rwR2 - Working with BusinessObjects XI Release 2 Recorded Webinar Series 0,6 hours € 225 E-learning 353
BOE210 · SA210R2 - BusinessObjects Enterprise: Administering Users and Content with the CMC 2 days € 1.160
22-jan-09, 23-feb-09, 25-mei-09 354
BOE215 · SA210eR2 - BusinessObjects Enterprise Administering Users and Content with the CMC 12 hours€ 562 E-learning 355
BOE216 · SA150rwR2 - Understanding the BusinessObjects XI R2 Platform 3 hours € 135 E-learning 356
BOE220 · SA310R2 - BusinessObjects Enterprise: Administering Servers - Windows 3 days € 1.740
25-feb-09, 27-apr-09, 27-mei-09 357
BOE225 · SA310eR2 - BusinessObjects Enterprise Administering Servers – Windows 18 hours € 846 E-learning 358
BOE226 · SA160rwR2 - BusinessObjects Enterprise Server and Administration Functions 4 hours € 225 E-learning 359
BOE230 · SA410R2 - BusinessObjects Enterprise: Designing and Deploying a Solution - Windows
2 days € 1.160 On request 360
BOE235 · SA410eR2 - BusinessObjects Enterprise Designing and Deploying a Solution – Windows
11 hours € 562 E-learning 361
BOE250 · SA650R2 - Migrating from BusinessObjects 5.x & 6.x to BusinessObjects XI R2 3 days € 1.740 On request 369
BOE255 · SA650eR2 - Migrating BusinessObjects 5x & 6x to BusinessObjects XI R2 16 hours € 846 E-learning 370
BOE265 · SA654eR2 - Advanced Migration Concepts: Planning an Incremental Migration to BusinessObjects
3 hours € 225 E-learning 371
BOE266 · SA260Rrw2P - Business Objects Enterprise XI R2 (Productivity Pack): Delta Webinar 0,2 hours € 0 E-learning 362
BOE275 · SA660eR2 - Migrating Application Foundation 6x to XI R2 2 hours € 135 E-learning 372
BOE276 · SA600rwR2 - Essentials of Migrating from BusinessObjects 5x/6x to BusinessObjects XI R2
4 hours € 225 E-learning 373
BOE285 · SA240eR2P - BusinessObjects Enterprise Productivity Pack: Using and Administering the Content Search
1,5 hours € 103 E-learning 362
www.sap.nl/education 535
INDEX

CODE COURSE TITLE Duration Price Dates Page

BOE286 · SA601rwR2 - BusinessObjects Enterprise XI R2: Implementing Migration Pack One 1,5 hours € 112 E-learning 374
BOE310 · SA210V3.0 - BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 3.0: Administration and Security 2 days € 1.160 On request 382
BOE320 · SA310V3.0 - BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 3.0: Administering Servers - Windows 3 days € 1.740 On request 383
BOE350 · SA650V3.0 - Business Objects Migration XI 3.0: Migrating from BusinessObjects 5.x& 6.x to BusinessObjects XI 3.0
3 days € 1.740 On request 384
BOE405 · SA100eV3.0 - Enterprise XI 3.0: What’s New - Installation and Lifecycle Management 3 hours € 112 E-learning 385
BOE415 · SA101eV3.0 - Enterprise XI 3.0: What’s New - User Rights 2 hours € 112 E-learning 386
BOE425 · SA102eV3.0 - Enterprise XI 3.0: What’s New - Federation, Server Intelligence, Auditing & Repository Diagnostic Tool
4,5 hours € 112 E-learning 387
BOE435 · SA103eV3.0 - Enterprise XI 3.0: What’s New - Publishing Documents 3 hours € 112 E-learning 388
BOE445 · SA104eV3.0 - Enterprise XI 3.0: What’s New - Using the CMC and InfoView 2 hours € 112 E-learning 389
BOE465 · SA106eV3.0 - Enterprise XI 3.0: What’s New - Migrating Reports and BCA Publications
3 hours € 112 E-learning 390
BOE505 · ED101 Education Spotlight 1 hours € 1.350 E-learning 363
BOF110 · FM216 - BusinessObjects Extended Analytics: Creating and Administrating the Cubes 1 day € 580 On request 496
BOF120 · FM217 - BusinessObjects Extended Analytics: Creating and Managing Reports via Excel
1 day € 580 On request 496
BOF130 · FM218 -BusinessObjects Extended Analytics: Creating and Managing Reports via the Web
2 days € 1.160 On request 497
BOF190 · FM208 - BusinessObjects Finance: Data Link 1 day € 580 On request 518
BOF205 · FM207e - BusinessObjects Finance: Local Data Entry Sites for the Web 3 hours € 405 E-learning 519
BOF210 · FM209 - BusinessObjects Finance: XL Link/Pivot Table 1 day € 580 On request 519
BOF215 · FM211e - BusinessObjects Finance: Finance Viewers 3 hours € 405 E-learning 520
BOF220 · FM210 - BusinessObjects Finance: Advanced Reporting (Data Retrieval) 2 days € 1.160 On request 520
BOF225 · FM215e - BusinessObjects Planning: Planning for End-Users 3 hours € 405 E-learning 499
BOF230 · FM212 - BusinessObjects Finance: Rules in BusinessObjects Finance 2 days € 405 E-learning 520
BOF235 · FM219e - BusinessObjecs Analytics: eLearning for Web End-Users 4 hours € 405 E-learning 497
BOF240 · FM220 - BusinessObjects Intercompany: Operation and Implementation Team 1 day € 580 On request 510
BOF245 · FM221e - BusinessObjects InterCompany: eLearning for End-Users 3 hours € 405 E-learning 510
BOF250 · FM227 - BusinessObjects Finance: Administrative Course/Implementation Team Training
5 days € 2.900 On request 521
BOF255 · FM248e - BusinessObjects Finance: Introduction to the Coefficients 3 hours € 405 E-learning 521
BOF305 · IC200eV5.1 - BusinessObjects InterCompany: Technical Overview for End Users 2,5 hours € 405 E-learning 511
BOF315 · IC205eV5.1 - BusinessObjects InterCompany 5.1: Operation and Configuration Basics
2 hours € 405 E-learning 511
BOG210 · DM220 - Information Quality Suite: Fundamentals 3 days € 1.740 On request 489
BOG220 · DM225 - Information Quality Suite: Advanced 3 days € 1.740 On request 490
BOG230 · DM221 - Postalsoft Fundamentals: Presort and Label Studio 2 days € 1.160 On request 490
BOI200 · DM370R2 - BusinessObjects Data Integrator: Extracting, Transforming and Loading Data
4 days € 2.320 10-mrt-09 476
BOI205 · DM370e - BusinessObjects Data Integrator: Extracting, Transforming and Loading Data
14 hours € 562 E-learning 477
BOI210 · DM370R2A - BusinessObjects Data Integrator Accelerated: Extracting, Transforming and Loading Data
4 days € 2.320 On request 482
BOI215 · DM370eR2A - BusinessObjects Data Integrator Accelerated: Extracting, Transforming and Loading Data
24 hours € 1.125 E-learning 483
BOI216 · DM374rwR2A - Data Integrator XI R2 1 hours € 103 E-learning 484
BOI225 · DM373eR2 - BusinessObjects Data ntegrator Accelerated: New Features 5 hours € 283 E-learning 485
BOI226 · DM375rwR2 - BusinessObjects Data Integrator: Additional Administration Topics 1 hours € 112 E-learning 478
BOI235 · DM377eR2 - BusinessObjects Composer: ETL Design 3 hours € 283 E-learning 479
BOI236 · DM376rwR2 - Data Integrator XI R2: Other 0,5 hours € 112 E-learning 479
BOI245 · DM250eR2 - BusinessObjects Data Insight: Data Assessment - Core Concepts 6 hours € 562 E-learning 471
BOI300 · DI320V3.0 - BusinessObjects Data Integrator XI 3.0: Core Concepts 3 days € 1.740 On request 480
BOK106 · DV300rwR2 - Java Reporting Component SDK: SDK Training Starter Kit 9 hours € 450 E-learning 408
BOK116 · DV302rwR2 - Web Services .NET SDK: SDK Training Starter Kit 9 hours € 450 E-learning 364
BOK126 · DV301rwR2 - Crystal Reports .NET SDK: SDK Training Starter Kit 9 hours € 450 E-learning 409
BOL205 · BU240eR2 - BusinessObjects Live Office Essentials for Business Users 2 hours € 180 E-learning 441
BOL215 · BU241eR2P - BusinessObjects Live Office: Productivity Pack 3 hours € 180 E-learning 442
BOL305 · LO100eV3.0 - BusinessObjects Live Office XI 3.0: What’s New 3 hours € 112 E-learning 442
BOM205 · BU23OeR2 - Performance Management Essentials for Business Use 5 hours € 180 E-learning 523
BOM210 · PM350R2 - BusinessObjects Performance Manager: Measuring Performance 1 day € 580 On request 524
BOM215 · PM350eR2 - BusinessObjects Performance 8 hours € 283 E-learning 422
BOM235 · PM380eR2 - Deploying Dashboards from Develoment to Production 4 hours € 283 E-learning 423
BOM236 · PM375rwR2 - Performance Management: Additional Designer Top 1 hours € 112 E-learning 424

536
INDEX

CODE COURSE TITLE Duration Price Dates Page

BOM245 · PM381eR2 - Performance Management: Moving from Development to Production Systems on SP2
4 hours € 283 E-learning 525
BOM246 · PM367rwR2 - Performance Management: Addtional Admin Topics 4 hours € 112 E-learning 425
BON205 · BU260R2 - BusinessObjects Intelligent Question: Essentials 2 hours € 225 E-learning 439
BON215 · DM261eR2 - BusinessObjects Intelligent Question: Question Designer Basics 3 hours € 135 E-learning 440
BOO205 · BU210eR2 - BusinessObjects InfoView: Essentials 4 hours € 180 E-learning 437
BOO215 · BU210eR2P - BusinessObjects InfoView Productivity Pack: Essentials for Business Users
4 hours € 180 E-learning 437
BOP205 · PB210e - BusinessObjects Planning: Essentials 4 hours € 180 E-learning 500
BOP210 · PL340 - Planning: Plan Reporting Fundamental 2 days € 1.140 On request 501
BOP215 · PB345e - BusinessObjects Planning: Plan Reporting Fundamentals 2 hours € 225 E-learning 501
BOP216 · PB355rw - Planning XI: Working with Fixed and Variable Reports 1 hours € 112 E-learning 502
BOP220 · PL440 - BusinessObjects Planning: System and Budgeting Fundamentals 2 days € 1.140 On request 503
BOP226 · PB360rw - BusinessObjects Planning XI: 1 hours € 180 E-learning 504
BOP235 · PL442e - BusinessObjects Planning: Budgeting Basics 6 hours € 225 E-learning 505
BOP236 · PB365rw - BusinessObjects Planning XI: 1 hours € 180 E-learning 506
BOP245 · PL443e - BusinessObjects Planning: Dashboard Basics 4 hours € 225 E-learning 506
BOP246 · PB410rw - BusinessObjects Planning XI: 0,5 hours € 112 E-learning 507
BOP300 · PX200 - BusinessObjects Planning Extended 5.3: Implementation Team Training 4 days € 2.320 On request 508
BOP310 · PX201 - BusinessObjects Planning Extended 5.3: Scripting 1 day € 580 On request 509
BOQ200 · DM323R2 - BusinessObjects Data Quality: Core Concepts 4 days € 1.880 On request 486
BOQ205 · DM321eR2 - BusinessObjects Data Quality: Core Concepts 12 hours € 705 On request 487
BOQ300 · DQ320V3.0 - BusinessObjects Data Quality XI 3.0: Core Concepts 4 days € 1.880 On request 488
BOR100 · BO103 - BusinessObjects: Core Reporting 1 day € 470 On request 427
BOR105 · BO103e - BusinessObjects Core Reporting 8 hours € 225 E-learning 428
BOR110 · BO201 - BusinessObjects: Intermediate Reporting 1 day € 470 On request 429
BOR115 · BOR115 BO201e - BusinessObjects Intermediate Reporting 8 hours € 225 E-learning 430
BOR120 · BO302 - BusinessObjects: Advanced Reporting 1 day € 470 On request 431
BOR210 · QA230R2 - BusinessObjects Desktop Intelligence: Report Design 2 days € 940
7-jan-09, 29-jan-09, 17-feb-09, 16-mrt-09, 6-apr-09, 27-apr-09, 18-mei-09, 8-jun-09, 24-jun-09 432
BOR215 · QA230eR2 - BusinessObjects Desktop Intelligence Report Design 5 hours € 450 E-learning 433
BOR220 · QA330R2 - BusinessObjects Desktop Intelligence: Advanced Report Design 1 day € 470
20-jan-09, 9-feb-09, 11-mrt-09, 30-mrt-09, 12-mei-09, 16-jun-09 434
BOR225 · QA330eR2 - BusinessObjects Desktop Intelligence Advanced Report Design 5 hours € 225 E-learning 435
BOR235 · BU250eR2 - BusinessObjects Desktop Intelligence: Essentials for Business Users 9 hours € 180 E-learning 436
BORFD · Reporting for Designer 1 day € 470
2-feb-09, 23-mrt-09, 4-mei-09, 2-jun-09, 6-jul-09 375
BOS205 · SA205e - BusinessObjects Edge Series: Overview 1,5 hours € 103 E-learning 393
BOS210 · SA215 - BusinessObjects Edge Series: Administering BusinessObjects Edge Series 3 days € 1.740 On request 394
BOS235 · SA216e - Administering SharePoint Portal Integration Kit 2,5 hours € 103 E-learning 395
BOT210 · DM240R2 - BusinessObjects Data Federator: Designing On-Demand Federated Views2 days € 1.160 On request 472
BOT215 · DM240eR2 - Business Objects Data Federator: Designing On-Demand Federated Views 9 hours € 562 E-learning 473
BOT220 · DM240R2A - BusinessObjects Data Federator Accelerated: Designing On- Demand Federated Views
2 days € 1.160 On request 474
BOU206 · DM100rwR2 - BusinessObjects Universe and Business Views A Technical Comparison 1 hours € 112 E-learning 376
BOU210 · DM310R2 - BusinessObjects: Universe Design 3 days € 1.740
13-jan-09, 3-feb-09, 3-mrt-09, 24-mrt-09, 14-apr-09, 5-mei-09, 3-jun-09 376
BOU215 · DM310eR2 - BusinessObjects Universe 13 hours € 846 E-learning 377
BOU220 · DM351R2 - BusinessObjects: Advanced Universe Design 2 days € 1.160 On request 378
BOU310 · DM310V3.0 - BusinessObjects Universe Designer XI 3.0: Universe Design 3 days € 1.740 On request 379
BOU320 · DM351V3.0 - BusinessObjects Universe Designer XI 3.0: Advanced Universe Design 2 days € 1.160 On request 380
BOW110 · WI103 - BusinessObjects: Web Intelligence Reporting 2 days € 940 On request 446
BOW115 · WI103e - WebIntelligence 16 hours € 450 E-learning 447
BOW210 · QA210R2 - BusinessObjects Web Intelligence: Report Design 2 days € 940
5-jan-09, 27-jan-09, 19-feb-09, 18-mrt-09, 8-apr-09, 28-apr-09, 19-mei-09, 22-jun-09 448
BOW215 · QA210eR2 - BusinessObjects Web Intelligence Report Design 15 hours € 450 E-learning 449
BOW220 · QA320R2 - BusinessObjects Web Intelligence: Advanced Report Design 1 day € 470
19-jan-09, 10-feb-09, 12-mrt-09, 31-mrt-09, 23-apr-09, 11-mei-09, 10-jun-09 450
BOW225 · QA320eR2 - BusinessObjects Web Intelligence Advanced Report Design 6 hours € 225 E-learning 451
BOW245 · BU221eR2 - BusinessObjects Web Intelligence: Interactive Viewing 14 hours € 450 E-learning 452
BOW255 · BU220eR2 - BusinessObjects Web Intelligence Essentials for Business Users 14 hours € 180 E-learning 453
BOW305 · QA100eV3.0 - BusinessObjects Web Intelligence XI 3.0: What’s New 2,5 hours € 112 E-learning 454
BOW310 · QA210V3.0 - BusinessObjects Web Intelligence XI 3.0: Report Design 2 days € 940 On request 455
BOW315 · QA210eV3.0 - BusinessObjects Web Intelligence XI 3.0: Report Design 16 hours € 450 E-learning 456
BOW320 · QA320V3.0 - BusinessObjects Web Intelligence XI 3.0: Advanced Report Design 1 day € 470 On request 457
www.sap.nl/education 537
INDEX

CODE COURSE TITLE Duration Price Dates Page

BOW325 · QA320eV3.0 - BusinessObjects Web Intelligence XI 3.0: Advanced Report Design 8 hours € 225 E-learning 458
BOX206 · BU500rw -Crystal Xcelsius: What’s New 0,3 hours € 0 E-learning 459
BOX210 · BU271 - Crystal Xcelsius: Designing 2 days € 940 On request 460
BOX215 · BU271e - Crystal Xcelsius: Designing Interactive Presentations 10 hours € 450 E-learning 461
BOX216 · QW100rw - Query as a Web Service (QaaWS): Basics 0,3 hours € 112 E-learning 462
BOX220 · PM281 - Crystal Xcelsius: Data Connectivity 1 day € 580 On request 463
BOX225 · PM281e - Crystal Xcelsius: Data Connectivity 5 hours € 225 E-learning 464
BOX235 · BU251e - Crystal Xcelsius: Essentials of Interactive Presentations 7 hours € 180 E-learning 465
BOX245 · BU255e - Crystal Xcelsius: Essentials 9 hours € 450 E-learning 466
BOX255 · BU371e - Crystal Xcelsius: Designing Advanced Interactive Presentations 7 hours € 450 E-learning 467
BOX265 · PM251e - Crystal Xcelsius: Essentials of Data Connectivity 3 hours € 180 E-learning 468
BOX310 · XC24008 - BusinessObjects Xcelsius 2008 Enterprise: Core & Connectivity 3 days € 1.410 On request 469
BOX315 · XC241e08 - BusinessObjects Xcelsius 2008 Enterprise: Core 11 hours € 742 E-learning 470
BOY105 · QA500e - BusinessObjects OLAP Intelligence: Mastering New Features 4 hours € 135 E-learning 443
BOY115 · BU350e - BusinessObjects™ OLAP 4 hours € 180 E-learning 444
BOY205 · BU350eR2 - BusinessObjects OLAP Intelligence Essentials for Business Users 6 hours € 180 E-learning 444
BOZ210 · TA200 - Introduction to Inxight 1 day € 470 On request 491
BOZ220 · TA205 - ThingFinder Fundamentals 1 day € 580 On request 492
BOZ230 · TA210 - ThingFinder Customization 2 days € 1.160 On request 493
BOZ240 · TA215 - Metadata Management System 1 day € 580 On request 494
BOZ250 · TA220 - Categorizer Workbench 2 days € 1.160 On request 495
BPM100 · Business process Management Methodology 2 days € 1.180 On request 302
BPM130 · SAP Business Architect by IDS Scheer 2 days € 1.180 On request 303
BW001 · Business Intelligence: Overview (SAPBI) 5 hours € 550 E-learning 48
BW305 · BI - Enterprise Reporting Query & Analysis (Part I) 5 days € 2.950
9-feb-09, 16-mrt-09, 4-mei-09 212
BW306 · BI - Enterprise Reporting Query & Analysis (Part II) 5 days € 2.950 2-mrt-09 213
BW310 · BI - Enterprise Data Warehousing 5 days € 2.950 16-feb-09
11-mei-09 215
BW330 · BI - Modeling and Implementation 5 days € 2.950 9-mrt-09
25-mei-09 215
BW350 · BI Data Acquistion 5 days € 2.950 16-mrt-09 216
BW360 · BI Performance & Administration 5 days € 2.950 30-mrt-09
8-jun-09 216
BW365 · BI User Management & Authorizations 2 days € 1.180 6-apr-09 213
BW370 · BI - Integrated Planning 5 days € 2.950 30-mrt-09 85
BW380 · BI Analysis Processes & Data Mining 2 days € 1.180 26-feb-09 215
CA500 · Cross Application Time Sheet 2 days € 1.180 6-jan-09 123
CA611 · eCATT and Test Workbench 3 days € 1.770 On request 234
CA705 · Report PainterReport Writer 2 days € 1.180 On request 87
CA710 · Advanced Functions of Report Writer 3 days € 1.770 On request 88
CA990 · Currency Conversion 2 days € 1.180 On request 104
CERTI · certificering 526
CPM030 · Introduction to SAP Business Planning and Consolidation 3 hours € 350 E-learning 75
CPM210 · SAP Strategy Management 5 days € 2.950 9-mrt-09
22-jun-09 306
CPM310 · SAP BPC: Application Configuration 3 days € 1.770 21-jan-09
22-apr-08 311
CPM311 · SAP BPC: Application Configuration 5 days € 2.950 Virtual ILT 310
CPM320 · SAP BPC: Reporting Budgeting & Consolidation 3 days € 1.770 28-jan-09
27-apr-09 311
CPM321 · SAP BPC: Reporting Budgeting & Consolidation 5 days € 2.950 Virtual ILT 312
CPM325 · SAP Business Planning and Consolidation- Reporting 5 hours € 550 E-learning 313
CR100 · CRM Base Customizing 5 days € 2.950 26-jan-09
20-apr-09 195
CR300 · CRM Sales 5 days € 2.950 2-feb-09
11-mei-09 195
CR410 · CRM Interaction Center (WebClient) 3 days € 1.180 11-feb-09
4-mei-09 200
CR500 · CRM Middleware 3 days € 1.770 19-jan-09
15-apr-09 201
CR580 · CRM User Interface 3 days € 1.770 4-feb-09
27-apr-09 196
CR600 · CRM Marketing 5 days € 2.950 16-feb-09 196
CR700 · CRM Service 5 days € 2.950 9-feb-09 197
538
INDEX

CODE COURSE TITLE Duration Price Dates Page

CR900 · Analytical CRM 3 days € 1.770 On request 197

CRM001 · Empower Sale Services and Marketing with mySAP CRM Solution 6 hours € 550 E-learning 50
DADM7A · Delta Administration SAP NetWeaver AS ABAP 4.6C - 7.0 5 days € 3.300 On request 260
DBITWF · SAP Business Workflow - Delta 4.6c NW04s 2 days € 1.180 20-apr-09 226
DBW70E · BI - Delta Enterprise Data Warehousing SAP NetWeaver 2004s 2 days € 1.180 2-mrt-09
2-jun-09 214
DBW70M · BI - Upgrading to SAP NetWeaver 7.0 2 days € 1.180 On request 218
DBW70P · BI - Delta Planning SAP NetWeaver 2004s 2 days € 1.180 26-feb-09
4-jun-09 217
DBW70R · BI - Delta Reporting SAP NetWeaver 2004s 3 days € 1.770 23-feb-09
27-mei-09 213
DERPAA · Delta SAP System in Asset Accounting 2 days € 1.180 On request 98
DERPFI · Delta SAP System in Financial Accounting 2 days € 1.180 On request 98
DERPHR · Delta in mySAP ERP HCM 4 days € 2.360 On request 124
DERPPS · Delta SAP R/3 Enterprise in PS 5 days € 2.950 On request 170
DERPSP · Delta in Sales Order Management 3 days € 1.770 On request 165
DFPS66 · Defense Forces & Public Security Workshop part 1 4 days € 2.360 On request 326
DFPS67 · Defense Forces & Public Security Workshop part 2 3 days € 1.770 On request 326
DNW7AW · Delta ABAP R/3 4.6C -> SAP NW 7.0 5 days € 2.950 On request 241
DUT010 · Installation and Administration of Duet™ 3 days € 1.770 On request 322
DUT021 · Leave Management Scenario for Duet™ 2 hours € 150 E-learning 322
DUT022 · Time Management Scenario Configuration for Duet™ 2 hours € 150 E-learning 322
DUT023 · Budget Monitoring Scenario for Duet™ 2 hours € 150 E-learning 323
DUT024 · Team Management Scenario Configuration for Duet™ 2 hours € 150 E-learning 323
DUT025 · Travel Management Scenario Configuration for Duet™ 2 hours € 150 E-learning 323
DUT026 · Sales Management Scenario Configuration for Duet™ 2 hours € 150 E-learning 324
DUT027 · Purchasing Management Scenario Configuration for Duet™ 2 hours € 150 E-learning 324
DUT028 · Demand Planning Scenario Configuration for Duet™ 2 hours € 150 E-learning 324
DUT029 · Reports Management Scenario Configuration for Duet™ 2 hours € 150 E-learning 325
E2E040 · Run SAP End-to-End Solution Operations 2 days € 1.180 On request 287
E2E050 · E2E Solution Support 3 hours € 350 E-learning 288
E2E100 · E2E Root Cause Analysis 5 days € 2.950 26-jan-09
20-apr-09 289
E2E200 · E2E Change Control Management 5 days € 2.950 9-feb-09 290
E2E300 · E2E Solution Support - Integration and Automation 5 days € 2.950 On request 291
E2E400 · E2E Technical Upgrade Management 2 days € 1.180 On request 292
EP120 · SAP NetWeaver Portal Development 5 days € 2.950 On request 205
EP130 · SAP KMC Development 5 days € 2.950 On request 205
EP200 · SAP Enterprise Portal System Administration 5 days € 2.950 2-mrt-09
29-jun-09 205
EP300 · Configuration of Knowledge Management and Collaboration 5 days € 2.950 9-mrt-09 206
EP600 · SAP NetWeaver Portal Universal Work List 1 day € 590 On request 206
ERP001 · Management Empowered by mySAP ERP 4 hours € 350 E-learning 50
ERP020 · Management Empowered by mySAP ERP Financials 2 hours € 150 E-learning 51
ERP030 · Management Empowered by mySAP ERP Human Capital Management 2 hours € 150 E-learning 51
ERP040 · Management Empowered by mySAP ERP Logistics and Operations 4 hours € 350 E-learning 52
ERP200 · Controlling Overview 4 hours € 350 E-learning 26
ERP201 · Controlling Master Data 2 hours € 150 E-learning 26
ERP202 · Cost Center Planning & Postings 4 hours € 350 E-learning 27
ERP203 · Cost Center Period-end Closing & Reports 2 hours € 150 E-learning 27
ERP204 · Internal Order 4 hours € 350 E-learning 27
ERP205 · Product Cost 2 hours € 150 E-learning 28
ERP206 · Control Order - Production Order 1 hours € 150 E-learning 28
ERP207 · Profit Center 4 hours € 350 E-learning 28
ERP250 · FI Overview 2 hours € 150 E-learning 33
ERP251 · General Ledger Overview & Master Data 2 hours € 150 E-learning 34
ERP252 · General Ledger 4 hours € 350 E-learning 34
ERP253 · Billing Process 2 hours € 150 E-learning 34
ERP254 · Accounts Receivable 4 hours € 350 E-learning 35
ERP255 · Financial Master Data 2 hours € 150 E-learning 35
ERP256 · Accounts Payable 4 hours € 350 E-learning 35
ERP257 · Cash Management 2 hours € 150 E-learning 36
ERP258 · Financial Reports 2 hours € 150 E-learning 36
ERP259 · Asset Accounting Overview 1 hours € 150 E-learning 36
ERP260 · Asset Accounting Master Data 2 hours € 150 E-learning 37
www.sap.nl/education 539
INDEX

CODE COURSE TITLE Duration Price Dates Page

ERP261 · Asset Accounting Details 4 hours € 350 E-learning 37

ERP262 · Asset Accounting Closing 1 hours € 150 E-learning 37
ERP270 · Travel Management Overview 1 hours € 150 E-learning 38
ERP271 · Travel Management 4 hours € 350 E-learning 38
ERP280 · Funds Management (Funds Manager) 4 hours € 350 E-learning 38
ERP400 · Material Management Overview 2 hours € 150 E-learning 21
ERP401 · Material & Service Master Data 2 hours € 150 E-learning 21
ERP402 · Purchasing Overview 2 hours € 150 E-learning 22
ERP403 · Vendor & Purchase Inf. Master Data & Source List 2 hours € 150 E-learning 22
ERP404 · Purchase Requisitions Quotations & Contracts 4 hours € 350 E-learning 22
ERP405 · Material Management Reports 1 hours € 150 E-learning 23
ERP406 · Inventory Management 4 hours € 350 E-learning 23
ERP407 · Material Requirements Planning & Physical Inventory 2 hours € 150 E-learning 23
ERP408 · Logistics Invoice Verification 2 hours € 150 E-learning 23
ERP450 · Sales & Distribution Overview 2 hours € 150 E-learning 13
ERP451 · Sales Order Processing 2 hours € 150 E-learning 13
ERP452 · Customer Master Data 2 hours € 150 E-learning 13
ERP453 · Quotation Management 1 hours € 150 E-learning 13
ERP454 · Scheduling Agreements & Contracts 2 hours € 150 E-learning 14
ERP455 · Sales & Distribution Reports 2 hours € 150 E-learning 14
ERP456 · Pricing Condition Records 2 hours € 150 E-learning 14
ERP457 · Sales Agreements 2 hours € 150 E-learning 14
ERP458 · Backorder Processing 1 hours € 150 E-learning 15
ERP459 · Outbound Processing 4 hours € 350 E-learning 15
ERP460 · Billing Process 4 hours € 350 E-learning 15
ERP461 · Accounts Receivable & Credit Mgmt. Overview 1 hours € 150 E-learning 15
ERP462 · Credit & Risk Management 4 hours € 350 E-learning 16
ERP463 · Credit Reporting 1 hours € 150 E-learning 16
ERP900 · Order to Cash - Role Based Training I 6 hours € 550 E-learning 17
ERP901 · Salesman 7 hours € 550 E-learning 18
ERP902 · Sales Administrator I 6 hours € 550 E-learning 18
ERP903 · Sales Administrator II 5 hours € 550 E-learning 19
ERP904 · Outbound Shipping Clerk 6 hours € 550 E-learning 19
ERP905 · Billing Employee 5 hours € 550 E-learning 19
ERP906 · Credit Analyst I 8 hours € 550 E-learning 20
ERP907 · Credit Analyst II 7 hours € 550 E-learning 20
ERP910 · Role Based Training - Procure to Pay I 6 hours € 550 E-learning 24
ERP912 · Requisition Clerk & Invoice Verification Clerk 1 8 hours € 550 E-learning 24
ERP913 · Invoice Verification Clerk II 6 hours € 550 E-learning 25
ERP914 · Buyer 7 hours € 550 E-learning 25
ERP915 · Receiving Clerk 7 hours € 550 E-learning 25
ERP920 · Role Based Training - Controlling Processes I 6 hours € 550 E-learning 29
ERP921 · Cost Center Analyst & Controller I 8 hours € 550 E-learning 30
ERP922 · Internal Order Analyst 6 hours € 550 E-learning 30
ERP923 · Product Cost Analyst I 6 hours € 550 E-learning 30
ERP924 · Profitability Analyst 6 hours € 550 E-learning 31
ERP925 · Product Cost Analysat II & Controller II 3 hours € 350 E-learning 31
ERP926 · Controller III 8 hours € 550 E-learning 32
ERP930 · Role Based Training - Financial Processes I 4 hours € 350 E-learning 40
ERP931 · Accounting Analyst 6 hours € 550 E-learning 40
ERP932 · Acc. Receivable Clerk 1 & Acc. Payable Clerk 1 4 hours € 350 E-learning 40
ERP933 · Travel Manager 5 hours € 550 E-learning 41
ERP934 · Asset Manager I 3 hours € 350 E-learning 41
ERP935 · Asset Manager II 5 hours € 550 E-learning 41
ERP936 · Accounts Receivable Clerk II 8 hours € 550 E-learning 42
ERP937 · Accounts Payable Clerk II 6 hours € 550 E-learning 42
EWM100 · Extended Warehouse Management Processes 3 days € 1.770 9-feb-09
14-apr-09 185
EWM110 · Extended Warehouse Management Customizing 5 days € 2.950 16-feb-09
4-mei-09 186
FIN009 · Corporate Governance Overview (Auditing and Sarbanes-Oxley Act) 4 hours € 350 E-learning 116
FIN090 · Solution Overview for Auditing and the Sarbanes-Oxley Act 4 hours € 350 E-learning 116
FIN900 · Auditing of Financial Business Processes in SAP 5 days € 2.950 On request 117
FIN910 · Management of Internal Controls 5 days € 2.950 On request 117
FIN930 · Auditing with SAP Business Warehouse & Strategic Enterprise Management 8 hours € 550 E-learning 118
540
INDEX

CODE COURSE TITLE Duration Price Dates Page

FSC010 · Processes in Treasury and Risk 5 days € 2.950 12-jan-09 94

FSC020 · Processes in Credit Management 3 days € 1.770 21-jan-09
3-jun-09 94
FSC120 · SAP Inhouse-Cash 2 days € 1.180 On request 95
FSC200 · Customizing SAP Dispute & SAP Collections Management 2 days € 1.180 8-jun-09 95
FSC800 · SAP Liquidity Planner (Cash Accounting and Cash Flow Planning) 2 days € 1.180 On request 96
GRC200 · Manage Compliance with SAP E-learning - Introduction to Virsa Compliance Calibrator v5.1
2 hours € 150 E-learning 113
GRC220 · Compliant Provisioning with SAP E-learning - Introduction to Virsa Access Enforcer v5.1
3 hours € 350 E-learning 113
GRC300 · Risk Analysis and Remediation 3 days € 1.770 2-mrt-09 114
GRC310 · User Provisioning & Role Management 3 days € 1.770 9-mrt-09 115
GTS100 · SAP Global Trade Services 3 days € 1.770 On request 167
GTS200 · Configuration of SAP Global Trade Services 3 days € 1.770 On request 167
HR050 · Business Processes in Human Capital Management 5 days € 2.950
12-jan-09, 2-mrt-09, 11-mei-09 76
HR110 · Essentials of Payroll 2 days € 1.180 9-mrt-09
2-jun-09 124
HR130 · Essentials of SAP Enterprise Portal in HCM 2 days € 1.180 11-mrt-09 77
HR140 · Business Processes in Talent Management 2 days € 1.180 4-feb-09 122
HR150 · HCM Admin & EIC 2 days € 1.180 On request 76
HR255 · Employee & Manager Selfservices 5 days € 2.950 16-feb-09 77
HR270 · SAP Enterprise Learning 3 days € 1.770 On request 78
HR272 · SAP Enterprise Learning - E-learning - Development and Integration 2 days € 1.180 On request 78
HR280 · Forms & Smart Forms 2 days € 1.180 30-mrt-09 78
HR290 · System configuration for ESS MSS 2 days € 1.180 2-apr-09 79
HR305 · Master Data Configuration 5 days € 2.950
19-jan-09, 16-mrt-09, 25-mei-09 124
HR306 · Configuration of Time Recording 4 days € 2.360 26-jan-09
6-apr-09 125
HR310 · Time Evaluation with Clock Times 5 days € 2.950 20-apr-09 125
HR311 · Time Evaluation without Clock Times 5 days € 2.950 9-feb-09 126
HR315 · Recruitment 3 days € 1.770 On request 120
HR316 · E-Recruiting 3 days € 1.770 On request 120
HR325 · Benefits Administration 5 days € 2.950 On request 126
HR350 · Programming in Human Capital Management 5 days € 2.950 On request 127
HR400 · Payroll Configuration 5 days € 2.950 23-mrt-09 127
HR505 · Organizational Management 3 days € 1.770
4-feb-09, 30-mrt-09, 18-mei-09 120
HR506 · Advanced Organizational Management 2 days € 1.180 26-feb-09 121
HR510 · Personnel Development 4 days € 2.360 20-jan-09 121
HR515 · Training and Event Management 3 days € 1.770 On request 121
HR540 · Enterprise Compensation Management 3 days € 1.770 On request 122
HR550 · Personnel Cost Planning and Simulation 2 days € 1.180 On request 122
HR580 · Analytics & Reporting in Human Capital Management 2 days € 1.180 16-apr-09 92
HR940 · Authorizations in HCM 2 days € 1.180 2-feb-09
4-jun-09 128
HR990 · Technical Tips and Tricks in HCM 3 days € 1.770 On request 128
IRT310 · Master Data in SAP for Retail 5 days € 2.950 On request 326
IRT320 · Pricing Promotions and Markdowns 5 days € 2.950 On request 326
IRT330 · Planning Purchasing and Merchandise Distribution 5 days € 2.950 On request 326
IRT360 · Store Connection 3 days € 1.770 On request 326
IRT370 · SAP Retail Store 2 days € 1.180 On request 326
IUT110 · Intro to the IS-U/CCS System 5 days € 2.950 4-mei-09 327
IUT210 · Master Data & Basic Functions 3 days € 1.770 11-mei-09 328
IUT220 · Device Management 3 days € 1.770 18-mei-09 328
IUT221 · Work Management 4 hours € 350 E-learning 329
IUT225 · Energy Data Management 2 days € 1.180 4-jun-09 329
IUT230 · Billing & Invoicing 5 days € 2.950 25-mei-09 330
IUT235 · Real-Time-Pricing 2 days € 1.180 On request 330
IUT240 · Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable 5 days € 2.950 8-jun-09 331
IUT250 · Customer Service 3 days € 1.770 On request 331
IUT255 · Integration of SAP for CRM and SAP for Utilities 3 days € 1.770 On request 332
IUTBIL · Settling Energy Quantities 3 days € 1.770 On request 332
JA100 · SAP J2SE Fundamentals 5 days € 2.950 5-jan-09 248
www.sap.nl/education 541
INDEX

CODE COURSE TITLE Duration Price Dates Page

JA300 · SAP J2EE Fundamentals 5 days € 2.950 12-jan-09 249

JA310 · Java Web Dynpro Basics 4 days € 2.360 26-jan-09 249
JA312 · Advanced Web Dynpro for Java 5 days € 2.950 On request 249
JA313 · Integration of SAP Interactive Forms into Web Dynpro for Java 2 hours € 150 E-learning 250
JA314 · Java WebDynpro - Business Graphics 2 hours € 150 E-learning 250
JA320 · SAP Java Persistence Framework 5 days € 2.950 On request 250
JA331 · SAP J2EE Open Integration Technologies 12 hours € 550 E-learning 251
JA340 · SAP Java Development Infrastructure 3 days € 1.770 On request 251
JA400 · Introduction to Java EE5 5 days € 2.950 On request 251
JA410 · Java voor SAP NetWeaver 7.1 3 days € 1.770 On request 252
JA450 · Web Dynpro for Java on SAP NetWeaver 7.1 5 days € 2.950 On request 252
MDM100 · Master Data Management 5.5 SP04 5 days € 2.950 26-jan-09 210
MDM101 · Global Data Synchronisation 4 hours € 350 E-learning 210
MDM300 · Master Data Management 5.5 SP04 Print Publishing 3 days € 1.770 On request 211
MDM400 · SAP NetWeaver 2004s Data Modeling in MDM 3 days € 1.770 On request 211
NET200 · Developing BSP Applications 5 days € 2.950 23-feb-09 246
NET310 · ABAP Web Dynpro 5 days € 2.950 2-mrt-09
4-mei-09 247
NET311 · Advanced Web Dynpro for ABAP 2 days € 1.180 16-mrt-09
11-mei-09 247
NET312 · UI Dev. with ABAP Web Dynpro 3 days € 1.770 18-mrt-09
13-mei-09 247
NW001 · Technology Solutions Powered by SAP NetWeaver 8 hours € 550 E-learning 53
NW100 · SAP Web Application Server Overview 4 hours € 350 E-learning 43
NW200 · SAP Web Application Server User Configuration 2 hours € 150 E-learning 43
NW300 · SAP Web Application Server Basic System Maintenance 2 hours € 150 E-learning 44
NW310 · SAP Web Application Server System Maintenance II 2 hours € 150 E-learning 44
NW400 · SAP Web Application Server Development Overview 4 hours € 350 E-learning 45
NW500 · SAP Web Application Server Database Interaction 2 hours € 150 E-learning 45
NW600 · SAP Web Application Server Development Analysis and Tools 2 hours € 150 E-learning 46
NW900 · SAP Web Application Server User Authorization Administration 2 hours € 150 E-learning 46
NWC110 · Modeling Applications with Visual Composer 2 days € 1.180 On request 273
NWC120 · Guided Procedures 3 days € 1.770 On request 274
OBPC51 · Online Knowledge Product SAP Business Planning and Consolidation 5.1 20 hours € 350 E-learning 313
OCA71 · Online Knowledge Product SAP Composite 16 hours € 350 E-learning 301
OCE71 · Online Knowledge Product SAP NetWeaver Composition Environment 7.1 75 hours € 350 E-learning 253
OCPM07 · SAP Strategy Management 2007 3 hours € 350 E-learning 307
OCR60 · Online Knowledge Product SAP CRM 2007 4 hours € 350 E-learning 198
OCR60S · OKP SAP CRM 2006s 22 hours € 350 E-learning 198
ODUET1 · Online Knowledge Product DUET 25 hours € 350 E-learning 325
OIM70 · Online Knowledge Product SAP NetWeaver Identity Management 7.0 19 hours € 350 E-learning 219
OMB03S · OKP SAP Mobile Business 20 hours € 350 E-learning 152
ONW04S · Online Knowledge Product SAP NetWeaver 2004S 230 hours € 350 E-learning 254
ONWES · OKP SAP NetWeaver Enterprise Search 7.0 7 hours € 350 E-learning 207
OSC41S · Online Knowledge Product SAP Supply Chain Management (SCM) 4.1 8 hours € 350 E-learning 190
OSR50S · Online Knowledge Product sap srm 5.0 50 hours € 350 E-learning 202
OTA010 · Online Knowledge Product SAP Test Acceleration and Optimization (TAO) 1.0 1,25 hours € 350 E-learning 293
OTDMS3 · Online Knowledge Product SAP Test Data Migration Server (TDMS) 3.0 4,5 hours € 500 E-learning 293
OXA11S · Online Knowledge product SAP xAPP Analytics 1.1 € 350 E-learning 277
OXE10S · Online Knowledge Product SAP xAPPS Emissions Management 1.0 € 350 E-learning 278
OXL10S · OKP SAP xApps Integration Exploration and Production (xIEP) 1.0 € 350 E-learning 278
OXLPO · OKP SAP xApp Lean Planning and Operation (xLPO) 5.60 20 hours € 350 E-learning 145
OXP10S · Online Knowledge Product SAP xAPPS Product Definition 1.0 € 350 E-learning 279
OXP20S · Online Knowledge Product SAP xAPPS Product Definition 2.0 € 350 E-learning 279
OXQ10S · OKP SAP xAPPS Cost and Quotation Management (xCQM) 1.0 € 350 E-learning 279
OXR10S · OKP SAP xAPPS Resource and Program Management 1.0 € 350 E-learning 280
OXR20S · OKP SAP xAPPS Resource and Program Management 2.0 € 350 E-learning 280
OXR40S · Online Knowledge Product SAP xRPM 4.0 € 350 E-learning 281
PLM100 · Business Processes in Product Life-Cycle Management 3 days € 1.770 21-jan-09 90
PLM114 · Basic Data for Manufacturing & Product Management 4 days € 2.360 2-feb-09 157
PLM115 · Basic Data for Process Manufacturing 4 days € 2.360 30-mrt-09 157
PLM120 · Document Management System 3 days € 1.770 28-jan-09 157
PLM130 · Classification 2 days € 1.180 4-feb-09 158
PLM145 · Variant Configuration 5 days € 2.950 On request 158
PLM146 · Variant Configuration Additional Scenarios 3 days € 1.770 On request 159
542
INDEX

CODE COURSE TITLE Duration Price Dates Page

PLM150 · Change & Configuration Management 3 days € 1.770 On request 151

PLM160 · Recipe Management 3 days € 1.770 On request 159
PLM170 · Integrated Product- and Process Engineering (iPPE) in PLM 3 days € 1.770 On request 160
PLM200 · Business Processes in Project Management 3 days € 1.770 2-mrt-09
18-mei-09 90
PLM210 · Project Management: Structures 2 days € 1.180 9-mrt-09
25-mei-09 171
PLM220 · Program and Project Management Logistics 5 days € 2.950 16-mrt-09 171
PLM230 · Project Management – Network Controlled and Customer-Driven Project Accounting 5 days € 2.950 23-mrt-09 171
PLM240 · Project Management - Reporting 3 days € 1.770 6-apr-09 90
PLM280 · Resource Related Billing 1 hours € 150 E-learning 172
PLM281 · HR Workforce Planning Integration 1 hours € 150 E-learning 172
PLM300 · Business Processes in Plant Maintenance 5 days € 2.950 16-feb-09
4-mei-09 91
PLM301 · Business Processes in Customer Service 5 days € 2.950 23-feb-09 166
PLM305 · Managing Technical Objects 2 days € 1.180 2-mrt-09
14-mei-09 153
PLM310 · Maintenance and Service Processing: Preventative 3 days € 1.770 11-mrt-09
18-mei-09 153
PLM315 · Maintenance Processing: Operational Functions 3 days € 1.770 16-mrt-09
3-jun-09 153
PLM318 · Analytics in Enterprise Asset Management 2 days € 1.180 30-mrt-09 91
PLM320 · WCM Work Clearance Management 3 days € 1.770 On request 154
PLM322 · Managing Maintenance Projects/Capacity & Shutdown Planning 3 days € 1.770 On request 154
PLM335 · Service Processing 4 days € 2.360 23-mrt-09 166
PLM400 · Business Processes in Quality Management 5 days € 2.950 On request 176
PLM412 · Quality Planning Inspections 5 days € 2.950 On request 177
PLM415 · QM in Procurement 3 days € 1.770 On request 178
PLM420 · QM in Discrete Manufacturing 2 days € 1.180 On request 177
PLM421 · QM in the Process Industry 3 days € 1.770 On request 151
PLM510 · cProjects 2 days € 1.180 23-mrt-09 172
PLM512 · cFolders 2 days € 1.180 25-mrt-09 173
PLM550 · xRPM (Resource Portfolio Management) 4 days € 2.360 20-apr-09 173
RE010 · Business Processes in Real Estate Management 3 days € 1.770 4-mrt-09 168
RE200 · Flexible Real Estate Management 5 days € 2.950 9-mrt-09 169
SAP01 · SAP Overview 3 days € 1.770
12-jan-09, 11-feb-09, 11-mrt-09, 20-apr-09, 18-mei-09, 22-jun-09 69
SAP110 · Learning Advisor 30 min days € 60 E-learning 49
SAP125 · SAP Navigation 2005 2 hours € 60 E-learning 12
SAP126 · SAP Portal Navigation 2005 0,5 hours € 60 E-learning 64
SAP130 · Business Solutions Powered by SAP 2 hours € 60 E-learning 49
SAP200 · Order to Cash 8 hours € 550 E-learning 65
SAP210 · Procure to Pay 8 hours € 550 E-learning 66
SAP220 · Plan to Inventory 8 hours € 550 E-learning 66
SAP230 · Plant Maintenance 8 hours € 550 E-learning 66
SAP240 · HR Admistration Processes 8 hours € 550 E-learning 67
SAP600 · Navigation in SAP Report 2 hours € 150 E-learning 67
SAP620 · Analytics & Reporting in Financials 2 hours € 150 E-learning 67
SAP630 · Analytics & Reporting in Human Capital Management 2 hours € 150 E-learning 68
SAP640 · Analytics & Reporting in Sales 2 hours € 150 E-learning 68
SAP650 · Analytics & Reporting in Procurement 2 hours € 150 E-learning 68
SAPBO · SAP Business Objects for SAP NetWeaver BI 2 days € 1.160 On request 271
SAPCRM · Overview of the mySAP CRM Solution 3 days € 1.770 12-jan-09
6-apr-09 70
SAPDUT · Duet Solution Overview 2 days € 1.180 On request 321
SAPEP · SAP Enterprise Portal Fundamentals 3 days € 1.770
16-feb-09, 27-apr-09, 17-jun-09 70
SAPFIN · mySAP ERP Financials 2 days € 1.180 On request 74
SAPHR · mySAP ERP Human Capital Management Overview 2 days € 1.180 8-jan-09
14-apr-09 73
SAPIRT · Function Overview in SAP for Retail 5 days € 2.950 On request 326
SAPNW · SAP NetWeaver Overview 3 days € 1.770
4-mrt-09, 6-mei-09, 29-jun-09 74
SAPPLM · mySAP PLM Solution Overview 2 days € 1.180 15-jan-09
16-apr-09 73
www.sap.nl/education 543
INDEX

CODE COURSE TITLE Duration Price Dates Page

SAPSCM · Overview of the mySAP SCM Solution 3 days € 1.770 21-jan-09

15-apr-09 71
SAPSPM · SAP Service Parts Management Overview 2 days € 1.180 2-feb-09
23-apr-09 71
SAPSRM · Overview of the mySAP SRM Solution 3 days € 1.770 16-mrt-09
3-jun-09 72
SAPTEC · Fundamentals of SAP Web AS 3 days € 1.770
12-jan-09, 9-mrt-09, 18-mei-09, 29-jun-09 72
SCM100 · Planning Overview (ERP) 2 days € 1.180 2-feb-09 89
SCM130 · Planning and Manufacturing Overview 5 days € 2.950 2-mrt-09 146
SCM200 · Business Processes in Planning (SAP SCM (APO)) 2 days € 1.180 19-jan-09
2-mrt-09 179
SCM210 · Core Interface APO 2 days € 1.180 On request 180
SCM212 · Integrated Supply Chain Modeling 5 days € 2.950 On request 180
SCM215 · Master Data APO 3 days € 1.770 On request 181
SCM220 · Demand Planning 3 days € 1.770 9-mrt-09 181
SCM222 · Demand Planning with Bills of Material 2 hours € 150 E-learning 182
SCM225 · Advanced Demand Planning 2 days € 1.180 On request 182
SCM230 · Supply Network Planning (SNP) 5 days € 2.950 23-mrt-09 183
SCM235 · Planning with Capable-to-Match (CTM) 4 days € 2.360 On request 184
SCM240 · Production Planning (ERP) 5 days € 2.950 16-feb-09 146
SCM250 · Production Planning and Detailed Scheduling (APO PP DS) 5 days € 2.950 26-jan-09
30-mrt-09 183
SCM270 · Flexible Planning 2 days € 1.180 On request 147
SCM280 · Overview on SAP ICH 2 hours € 150 E-learning 191
SCM282 · Process: Customer Collaboration 2 hours € 150 E-learning 191
SCM290 · Overview of Trade Promotion Mgmt. with CRM & SCM 2 hours € 150 E-learning 199
SCM300 · Production Overview 3 days € 1.770 9-feb-09 147
SCM310 · Production Orders 5 days € 2.950 23-feb-09 149
SCM340 · Process Manufacturing 5 days € 2.950 On request 149
SCM344 · Process Management 3 days € 1.770 On request 149
SCM350 · KANBAN 2 days € 1.180 On request 131
SCM360 · Capacity Planning (ERP) 5 days € 2.950 On request 147
SCM500 · Business Processes in Procurement 5 days € 2.950 23-feb-09
25-mei-09 131
SCM510 · Inventory Management and Physical Inventory 5 days € 2.950 9-mrt-09
8-jun-09 132
SCM515 · Invoice Verification 3 days € 1.770 23-mrt-09
3-jun-09 132
SCM516 · Procurement Optimization 2 days € 1.180 On request 133
SCM518 · Materials Management Archiving Purchasing Documents 2 hours € 150 E-learning 133
SCM520 · Purchasing 5 days € 2.950 30-mrt-09
15-jun-09 133
SCM521 · Pricing in Purchasing 3 days € 1.770 On request 134
SCM525 · Consumption-Based Planning and Forecasting 2 days € 1.180 26-mrt-09 134
SCM540 · Procurement of Services 2 days € 1.180 On request 134
SCM550 · Customizing in Materials Management 5 days € 2.950 9-feb-09
22-jun-09 135
SCM600 · Processes in Sales Order Management 5 days € 2.950
16-feb-09, 4-mei-09, 29-jun-09 143
SCM601 · Processes in Logistics Execution 3 days € 1.770 23-feb-09
13-mei-09 139
SCM605 · Sales 5 days € 2.950 23-feb-09
11-mei-09 162
SCM610 · Delivery Processes 3 days € 1.770 4-mrt-09
18-mei-09 139
SCM611 · Transportation 3 days € 1.770 9-mrt-09 143
SCM612 · Transportation Planning and Vehicle Scheduling 3 days € 1.770 On request 144
SCM615 · Billing 2 days € 1.180 12-mrt-09
25-mei-09 163
SCM620 · Pricing in Sales Order Management 3 days € 1.770 16-mrt-09
27-mei-09 163
SCM630 · Warehouse Management 5 days € 2.950 9-mrt-09
25-mei-09 139

544
INDEX

CODE COURSE TITLE Duration Price Dates Page

SCM631 · Additional Topics in Warehouse Management 2 days € 1.180 19-mrt-09

4-jun-09 140
SCM635 · Task Resource Management 3 days € 1.770 On request 140
SCM640 · Foreign Trade 3 days € 1.770 On request 144
SCM645 · Credit & Receivables Risk Management 2 days € 1.180 On request 164
SCM650 · Cross Functional Customizing in Sales 3 days € 1.770 18-mrt-09 164
SCM660 · Handling Unit Management 2 days € 1.180 17-mrt-09 141
SCM663 · SAP Event Management 5.0 3 days € 1.770 On request 192
SCM670 · Global Availability Check 3 days € 1.770 6-apr-09 165
SCM680 · Cross-Applic. Busines. Processes 2 days € 1.180 19-jan-09 135
SCM681 · Stock Transfer Business Process 2 hours € 150 E-learning 135
SCM682 · Stock Transfer Customizing & Master Data 2 hours € 150 E-learning 136
SCM683 · Subcontracting Business Process 2 hours € 150 E-learning 136
SCM684 · Subcontracting Customizing and Master Data 2 hours € 150 E-learning 136
SCM920 · Customizing Production Orders 2 days € 1.180 On request 150
SEM010 · Strategic Enterprise Management Overview 3 days € 1.770 On request 81
SEM200 · Business Warehouse for SEM 5 days € 2.950 On request 81
SEM215 · Integrated Financial Plannng with BPS 5 days € 2.950 On request 82
SEM220 · SEM Corporate Performance Monitor 5 days € 2.950 On request 82
SEM240 · BW-based Consolidation 5 days € 2.950 On request 83
SEM241 · SEM-BCS for End Users 2 days € 1.180 On request 84
SEM245 · SEM-BCS Migration and Special Cases 3 days € 1.770 On request 84
SM001 · Solution Manager 2 hours € 150 E-learning 282
SM100 · Solution Manager Operations 5 days € 2.950
12-jan-09, 2-mrt-09, 4-mei-09 285
SM510 · Solution Manager: Global Rollout 4 hours € 350 E-learning 283
SM520 · E-learning / with SAP Solution Manager 4 hours € 350 E-learning 283
SM530 · ITIL with SAP Solutio Manager 4 hours € 350 E-learning 286
SM540 · Solution Manager: Incident Management 4 hours € 350 E-learning 286
SM550 · Solution Manager: Change Request Management 4 hours € 350 E-learning 286
SMI210 · Impl. Methodology Overview 1 day € 590 4-feb-09
9-apr-09 284
SMI310 · SAP Solution Manager: Implementation Tools in Detail 3 days € 1.770 11-feb-09
15-apr-09 284
SNC100 · Supplier Network Collaboration 3 days € 1.770 On request 187
SOA100 · Enterprise SOA Fundamentals 2 days € 1.180 19-jan-09
16-mrt-09 295
SOA110 · Enterprise SOA Roadmap 3 days € 1.770 21-jan-09
18-mrt-09 296
SOA120 · SAP Business Process Modeling 2 days € 1.180 On request 298
SOA200 · SAP Enterprise Architect Framework for enterprise SOA 5 days € 2.950 30-mrt-09
8-jun-09 296
SOA230 · ARIS Toolset for SAP Enterprise Architecture Framework 2 days € 1.180 On request 298
SOA250 · SAP Enterprise Architecture Framework for Enterprise SOA 5 days € 2.950 On request 299
SOA300 · Design Time Governance in Enterprise SOA 3 days € 1.770 On request 300
SOA400 · SAP Enterprise SOA - Service Provisioning & Consumption 3 days € 1.770 18-feb-09
15-apr-09 300
SPM100 · SAP Service Parts Planning Processes 3 days € 1.770 On request 187
SPM110 · SAP Service Parts Planning Customizing 5 days € 2.950 On request 188
SPM200 · SAP Service Parts Fulfillment Processes 3 days € 1.770 On request 189
SRF001 · Radio Frequency in SAP Software - Solution Overview 1 hours € 150 E-learning 192
SRF010 · SAP RFID-enabled Supply Chain Execution - Solution Overview 2 hours € 150 E-learning 193
SRF050 · SAP RFID for SCM: Technology and System Landscape 2 hours € 150 E-learning 193
SRM210 · SAP Enterprise Buyer 5.0 Configuration 5 days € 2.950 23-mrt-09
8-jun-09 202
SRM260 · SAP Catalog and Content Management 3 days € 1.770 On request 203
SRM270 · MDM Catalog Content Management 3 days € 1.770 1-apr-09
22-jun-09 203
SRM300 · SRM - SAP E-Sourcing Overview 2 days € 1.180 6-apr-09
25-jun-09 203
TADM10 · SAP Netweaver AS Implementation and Operation 10 days € 6.600 On request 340
TADMD5 · Delta Implementation & Operations SAP Web AS 6.20 - 6.40 5 days € 3.300 On request 340
TADMD7 · Delta Implementation & Operation SAP Web AS 6.40 - SAP NetWeaver AS 7.0 (Java & ABAP) 09-mrt-09
5 days € 3.300 20-apr-09 261

www.sap.nl/education 545
INDEX

CODE COURSE TITLE Duration Price Dates Page

TBIT40 · XI Fundamentals 5 days € 3.300

12-jan-09, 23-mrt-09, 25-mei-09 341
TBIT44 · Mapping, Adapters and BPM 5 days € 2.950 2-feb-09
20-apr-09 341
TBIT50 · XI - Technical Implementation and Operation (Part 1) 6 hours € 550 E-learning 342
TBIT51 · XI - Technical Implementation and Operation (Part2) 5 days € 3.300 16-feb-09
20-apr-09 342
TBW10 · BI Enterprise Data Warehousing 5 days € 2.950 5-jan-09
8-jun-09 335
TBW20 · BI Reporting & Query Design 5 days € 2.950 12-jan-09
15-jun-09 335
TBW41 · BI - Extraction with UDI and XI and APD 5 hours € 550 E-learning 336
TBW42 · BI Advanced Enterprise Data Warehousing & Reporting 10 days € 5.900 19-jan-09
22-jun-09 336
TBW45 · BI Business Planning and Simulation 5 days € 2.950 2-feb-09
6-jul-09 337
TBW70D · BI - Delta Enterprise Data Warehousing & Reporting SAP NetWeaver 2004s 5 days € 2.950 On request 337
TBWD35 · Delta-Reporting WHM, Extraction (SAP BW 3.0 - 3.5) 3 days € 1.770 On request 338
TCRM10 · CRM Fundamentals I 5 days € 2.950 2-mrt-09
25-mei-09 199
TCRM20 · Fundamentals II 10 days € 5.900 9-mrt-09
08-jun-09 333
TDMS10 · SAP Test Data Migration Server 3.0 3 days € 1.770 On request 294
TE2E04 · RunSAP - End-to-End Solution Operations 5 days € 2.950 On request 63
TEP10 · Implementation and Operation 10 days € 6.600 2-feb-09 208
TEP12 · SAP NetWeaver Portal Development 5 days € 2.950 19-jan-09 209
TERP01 · SAP ERP: Introduction 1,5 hours € 150 E-learning 54
TERP02 · SAP ERP: Introduction into SAP NetWeaver 1 hours € 150 E-learning 56
TERP10 · mySAP ERP Integrated Bus. Processes Based on mySAP ERP 10 days € 5.900 5-jan-09 55
TERP11 · SAP ERP: Introduction into NW BI (BW 3.5) 1,5 hours € 150 E-learning 55
TERP12 · SAP ERP: Introduction into Strategic Enterprise Management (SEM 4.0) 1 hours € 150 E-learning 57
TERP1E · Integration of Business Processes in SAP ERP 54 hours € 3.200 E-learning 56
TERP21 · SAP ERP: Introduction into Processes in Financial Accounting 6 hours € 550 E-learning 57
TERP22 · SAP ERP: Introduction into Processes in Management Accounting/CO 6 hours € 550 E-learning 58
TERP31 · SAP ERP: Introduction into Processes in Human Capital Management 5 hours € 550 E-learning 58
TERP41 · SAP ERP: Introduction into Processes in Procurement 6 hours € 550 E-learning 59
TERP42 · SAP ERP: Introduction into Processes in Inventory Management 3 hours € 350 E-learning 59
TERP51 · SAP ERP: Introduction into Processes in Material Planning 3 hours € 350 E-learning 60
TERP52 · SAP ERP: Introduction into Processes in Manufacturing Execution 3 hours € 350 E-learning 60
TERP53 · SAP ERP: Introduction into Processes in Enterprise Asset Management/Customer Service Organizational Structures
5 hours € 550 E-learning 61
TERP54 · SAP ERP: Introduction into Processes in Lifecycle Data Management 2 hours € 150 E-learning 61
TERP61 · SAP ERP: Introduction into Processes in Sales Order Management 6 hours € 550 E-learning 62
TERP71 · SAP ERP: Introduction into Processes in Program and Project Management 4 hours € 350 E-learning 62
TZACC2 · Adaptive Computing Implementation with Adaptive Computing Controller in SAP NetWeaver Technology
2 days € 1.180 On request 261
TZCE11 · SAP NetWeaver Composition Environment 7.1 3 days € 1.770 On request 274
TZEREP · HR Administrative Services 2 days € 1.180 On request 79
TZESR1 · Enterprise Services Repository for SAP NetWeaver Composition Environment 7.1 1 day € 590 On request 275
TZEWM1 · SAP Extended Warehouse Management Processes 2 days € 1.180 On request 189
TZMAM2 · EPT SAP Mobile Asset Management 2.5 3 days € 1.770 On request 155
TZNWIM · SAP NetWeaver Identity Management 7.0 5 days € 2.950 On request 219
TZNWVC · Visual Composer for SAP NetWeaver Composition Environment 7.1 2 days € 1.180 On request 274
TZPC25 · EPT SAP GRC Process Control 2.5 5 days € 2.950 On request 118
TZRPM4 · Early Product Training SAP xRPM 4.0 3 days € 1.770 On request 276
TZTDM3 · Basic Implementation and Configuration of SAP TDMS 2006 3 days € 1.770 On request 294
WNL11 · Dutch Payroll Processes 2 days € 1.180 2-apr-09 128
WNL12 · Payroll Configuration NL (Technical) 3 days € 1.770 6-apr-09 129
WNLADA · Adobe Interactive Forms Awareness 1 day € 590 On request 242
WNLADJ · Workshop Interactive Forms Java Development Introduction 4 days € 2.360 3-feb-09 243
WNLAIF · Workshop ABAP Interactive Forms for ECC 5 days € 2.950 2-mrt-09
25-mei-09 244
WNLFB · SAP HCM Flexible Benefits 2 days € 1.180 9-mrt-09 129
WNLH09 · Payroll Configuration Expert 2 days € 1.180 On request 129
WNLKF1 · KFI Module 1 Budgeting Overview 5 days € 2.950 On request 326
546
INDEX

CODE COURSE TITLE Duration Price Dates Page

WNLKF2 · KFI Module 2 Budget Control System 2 days € 1.180 On request 326
WNLKF3 · KFI Module 3 Additionele Topics 2 days € 1.180 On request 326
WNLOR1 · Intro OrgPublisher for SAP Solutions half day € 260 On request 326
WNLOR2 · WS OrgPublisher for SAP Solutions 2 days € 1.180 On request 326
WNLPF1 · mySAP HR Pension Funds NL: Overview 1 day € 590 On request 326
WNLPF2 · mySAP HR Pension Funds NL: Customizing 4 days € 2.360 On request 326
WNLPF4 · mySAP HR PF NL: Maintenance 1 day € 590 On request 326

www.sap.nl/education 547
3330838 (11/09)
© 2009 by SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP, R/3, mySAP, mySAP.com, xApps,
xApp, SAP NetWeaver, Duet, PartnerEdge, and other SAP products and
services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or
registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and in several other countries all
over the world. All other product and service names mentioned are the
trademarks of their respective companies. Data contained in this document
serves informational purposes only. National product specifications may vary.
Printed on environmentally friendly paper.

These materials are subject to change without notice. These materials are
provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (“SAP Group”) for
informational purposes only, without representation or warranty of
any kind, and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with
respect to the materials. The only warranties for SAP Group products and
services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements
accompanying such products and services, if any. Nothing herein should be
construed as constituting an additional warranty.

www.sap.nl/education
SAP Nederland B.V.
Amerikastraat 10
Postbus 3292
5203 DG ’s-Hertogenbosch
T + 31 (0)73 645 79 50 / 0800 022 12 06 (gratis)